Relion 670 series

Line differential protection RED670 2.0 IEC

Technical manual
 Document ID: 1MRK505308-UEN
Issued: July 2016
Revision: B
Product version: 2.0

Copyright 2014 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party,
nor used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)

This product includes cryptographic software written/developed by: Eric Young

(eay@cryptsoft.com) and Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties.
All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must
satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including
that any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In
particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure
would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to
personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity
applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that
all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to
notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no
event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use
of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for
use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This
conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product
standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN
60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed in
accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................45
This manual...................................................................................... 45
Intended audience............................................................................ 45
Product documentation.....................................................................46
Product documentation set..........................................................46
Document revision history........................................................... 47
Related documents......................................................................48
Document symbols and conventions................................................48
Symbols.......................................................................................48
Document conventions................................................................ 49
IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping......................................50

Section 2 Available functions......................................................... 59

Main protection functions..................................................................59
Back-up protection functions............................................................ 61
Control and monitoring functions......................................................62
Communication.................................................................................66
Basic IED functions.......................................................................... 69

Section 3 Analog inputs..................................................................71

Introduction.......................................................................................71
Function block.................................................................................. 71
Signals..............................................................................................72
Settings.............................................................................................74
Monitored data..................................................................................79
Operation principle........................................................................... 80

Section 4 Binary input and output modules....................................83

Binary input.......................................................................................83
Binary input debounce filter......................................................... 83
Oscillation filter............................................................................ 83
Settings........................................................................................83
Setting parameters for binary input modules..........................83
Setting parameters for binary input/output module................ 84

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI ..........................85

Local HMI screen behaviour.............................................................85
Identification................................................................................ 85
Settings........................................................................................85
Local HMI signals............................................................................. 85

1
Technical manual
Table of contents

Identification................................................................................ 85
Function block............................................................................. 85
Signals.........................................................................................86
Basic part for LED indication module............................................... 86
Identification................................................................................ 86
Function block............................................................................. 87
Signals.........................................................................................87
Settings........................................................................................88
Monitored data.............................................................................88
LCD part for HMI function keys control module................................88
Identification................................................................................ 88
Function block............................................................................. 89
Signals.........................................................................................89
Settings........................................................................................89
Operation principle........................................................................... 90
Local HMI.................................................................................... 90
Display....................................................................................91
LEDs.......................................................................................93
Keypad................................................................................... 94
LED..............................................................................................96
Functionality .......................................................................... 96
Status LEDs........................................................................... 96
Indication LEDs...................................................................... 97
Function keys............................................................................ 105
Functionality ........................................................................ 105
Operation principle............................................................... 105

Section 6 Differential protection................................................... 109

1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF .....................109
Identification.............................................................................. 109
Functionality.............................................................................. 109
Function block........................................................................... 109
Signals.......................................................................................110
Settings......................................................................................110
Monitored data...........................................................................110
Operation principle.................................................................... 110
Logic diagram.......................................................................112
Technical data........................................................................... 113
Low impedance restricted earth fault protection REFPDIF ........... 114
Identification.............................................................................. 114
Functionality.............................................................................. 114
Function block........................................................................... 115
Signals.......................................................................................115
Settings......................................................................................116

2
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Monitored data...........................................................................116
Operation principle.................................................................... 117
Fundamental principles of the restricted earth-fault
protection..............................................................................117
Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance
differential protection............................................................ 119
Calculation of differential current and bias current............... 120
Detection of external earth faults..........................................121
Algorithm of the restricted earth-fault protection.................. 123
Technical data........................................................................... 124
Line differential protection.............................................................. 125
Identification.............................................................................. 125
Functionality.............................................................................. 125
Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets L3CPDIF,
L6CPDIF...............................................................................125
Line differential protection 3 or 6 CT sets, with in-zone
transformers LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF.................................... 127
Analog signal transfer for line differential protection............ 127
Function block........................................................................... 129
Signals.......................................................................................132
Settings......................................................................................138
Monitored data...........................................................................148
Operation principle.................................................................... 150
Algorithm and logic...............................................................150
Time synchronization........................................................... 158
Analog signal communication for line differential protection 159
Open CT detection feature................................................... 162
Binary signal transfer............................................................164
Line differential coordination function LDLPSCH ................ 164
Technical data........................................................................... 168
Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC ..........169
Identification.............................................................................. 169
Functionality.............................................................................. 169
Function block........................................................................... 170
Signals.......................................................................................170
Settings......................................................................................171
Monitored data...........................................................................172
Operation principle.................................................................... 172
Technical data........................................................................... 176

Section 7 Impedance protection...................................................179

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic
ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS, ZDRDIR................................................... 179
Identification.............................................................................. 179

3
Technical manual
Table of contents

Functionality.............................................................................. 179
Function block........................................................................... 180
Signals.......................................................................................181
Settings......................................................................................183
Monitored data...........................................................................185
Operation principle.................................................................... 186
Full scheme measurement................................................... 186
Impedance characteristic..................................................... 186
Minimum operating current...................................................190
Measuring principles............................................................ 190
Directional impedance element for quadrilateral
characteristics...................................................................... 193
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................196
Technical data........................................................................... 199
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle
FDPSPDIS......................................................................................200
Identification.............................................................................. 200
Identification......................................................................... 200
Functionality.............................................................................. 200
Function block........................................................................... 201
Signals.......................................................................................201
Settings......................................................................................202
Operation principle.................................................................... 203
Phase-to-earth fault..............................................................205
Phase-to-phase fault............................................................ 207
Three-phase faults............................................................... 209
Load encroachment..............................................................209
Minimum operate currents....................................................214
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................214
Technical data........................................................................... 220
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series
compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS, ZDSRDIR.................. 220
Identification.............................................................................. 220
Functionality.............................................................................. 221
Function block........................................................................... 222
Signals.......................................................................................222
Settings......................................................................................224
Monitored data...........................................................................228
Operation principle.................................................................... 228
Full scheme measurement................................................... 228
Impedance characteristic..................................................... 229
Minimum operating current...................................................232
Measuring principles............................................................ 232
Directionality for series compensation..................................235

4
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Simplified logic diagrams......................................................237

Technical data........................................................................... 240
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS .. 241
Identification.............................................................................. 241
Functionality.............................................................................. 241
Function block........................................................................... 242
Signals.......................................................................................243
Settings......................................................................................244
Operation principle.................................................................... 245
Full scheme measurement................................................... 245
Impedance characteristic..................................................... 245
Basic operation characteristics.............................................246
Theory of operation.............................................................. 249
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................258
Technical data........................................................................... 262
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults
ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS.................................................................. 262
Identification.............................................................................. 262
Functionality.............................................................................. 263
Function block........................................................................... 264
Signals.......................................................................................264
Settings......................................................................................266
Operation principle.................................................................... 267
Full scheme measurement................................................... 267
Impedance characteristic..................................................... 267
Minimum operating current...................................................269
Measuring principles............................................................ 270
Directionality.........................................................................272
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................274
Technical data........................................................................... 277
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic and
additional distance protection directional function for earth faults
ZDMRDIR, ZDARDIR..................................................................... 277
Identification.............................................................................. 277
Functionality.............................................................................. 278
Function block........................................................................... 278
Signals.......................................................................................278
Settings......................................................................................279
Monitored data...........................................................................280
Operation principle.................................................................... 281
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic
ZDMRDIR.............................................................................281
Additional distance protection directional function for
earth faults ZDARDIR...........................................................283

5
Technical manual
Table of contents

Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC................................285

Identification.............................................................................. 285
Functionality.............................................................................. 286
Function block........................................................................... 286
Signals.......................................................................................286
Settings......................................................................................287
Operation principle.................................................................... 287
Fault inception detection...................................................... 287
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS....289
Identification.............................................................................. 289
Functionality.............................................................................. 289
Function block........................................................................... 289
Signals.......................................................................................290
Settings......................................................................................290
Operation principle.................................................................... 291
The phase selection function................................................291
Technical data........................................................................... 302
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate
settings ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS and ZDRDIR................................ 303
Identification.............................................................................. 303
Functionality.............................................................................. 303
Function block........................................................................... 304
Signals.......................................................................................305
Settings......................................................................................307
Operation principle.................................................................... 309
Full scheme measurement................................................... 309
Impedance characteristic..................................................... 310
Minimum operating current...................................................313
Measuring principles............................................................ 313
Directional impedance element for quadrilateral
characteristics...................................................................... 316
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................319
Technical data........................................................................... 322
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
FRPSPDIS......................................................................................323
Identification.............................................................................. 323
Functionality.............................................................................. 323
Function block........................................................................... 324
Signals.......................................................................................324
Settings......................................................................................325
Operation principle.................................................................... 326
Phase-to-earth fault..............................................................328
Phase-to-phase fault............................................................ 330
Three-phase faults............................................................... 331

6
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Load encroachment..............................................................332
Minimum operate currents....................................................337
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................338
Technical data........................................................................... 343
High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS..................................... 343
Identification.............................................................................. 343
Functionality.............................................................................. 343
Function block........................................................................... 345
Signals.......................................................................................345
Settings......................................................................................348
Monitored data...........................................................................352
Operation principle.................................................................... 352
Filtering.................................................................................352
Distance measuring zones................................................... 353
Phase-selection criteria........................................................ 354
Directional criteria.................................................................355
Fuse failure...........................................................................356
Power swings....................................................................... 356
Measuring principles............................................................ 356
Load encroachment..............................................................359
Simplified logic schemes...................................................... 360
Technical data........................................................................... 366
High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS ..................................366
Identification.............................................................................. 366
Functionality.............................................................................. 366
Function block........................................................................... 368
Signals.......................................................................................369
Settings......................................................................................371
Monitored data...........................................................................377
Operation principle.................................................................... 377
Filtering.................................................................................377
Distance measuring zones................................................... 378
Phase-selection element...................................................... 379
Directional element...............................................................380
Fuse failure...........................................................................381
Power swings....................................................................... 381
Measuring principles............................................................ 381
Simplified logic schemes...................................................... 384
Technical data........................................................................... 391
Power swing detection ZMRPSB ...................................................391
Identification.............................................................................. 391
Functionality.............................................................................. 391
Function block........................................................................... 392

7
Technical manual
Table of contents

Signals.......................................................................................392
Settings......................................................................................393
Operation principle.................................................................... 394
Resistive reach in forward direction..................................... 395
Resistive reach in reverse direction..................................... 396
Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction.................. 397
Basic detection logic.............................................................397
Operating and inhibit conditions........................................... 399
Technical data........................................................................... 400
Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF ................................. 400
Identification.............................................................................. 400
Functionality.............................................................................. 401
Function block........................................................................... 401
Signals.......................................................................................401
Settings......................................................................................402
Monitored data...........................................................................402
Operation principle.................................................................... 403
Technical data........................................................................... 404
Power swing logic PSLPSCH ........................................................ 404
Identification.............................................................................. 405
Functionality.............................................................................. 405
Function block........................................................................... 405
Signals.......................................................................................405
Settings......................................................................................406
Operation principle.................................................................... 406
Communication and tripping logic........................................ 406
Blocking logic....................................................................... 407
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM ......................................................409
Identification.............................................................................. 409
Functionality.............................................................................. 409
Function block........................................................................... 410
Signals.......................................................................................410
Settings......................................................................................411
Monitored data...........................................................................412
Operation principle.................................................................... 412
Technical data........................................................................... 416
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM..................................................416
Identification.............................................................................. 416
Functionality.............................................................................. 416
Function block........................................................................... 417
Signals.......................................................................................417
Settings......................................................................................418
Monitored data...........................................................................419

8
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Operation principle.................................................................... 419

Lens characteristic............................................................... 422
Detecting an out-of-step condition........................................424
Maximum slip frequency.......................................................425
Taking care of the circuit breaker ........................................ 426
Design.................................................................................. 428
Technical data........................................................................... 429
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ...................................................429
Identification.............................................................................. 429
Functionality.............................................................................. 429
Function block........................................................................... 429
Signals.......................................................................................429
Settings......................................................................................430
Operation principle.................................................................... 431

Section 8 Current protection.........................................................435

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
PHPIOC .........................................................................................435
Identification.............................................................................. 435
Functionality.............................................................................. 435
Function block........................................................................... 435
Signals.......................................................................................435
Settings......................................................................................436
Monitored data...........................................................................436
Operation principle.................................................................... 436
Technical data........................................................................... 437
Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
OC4PTOC ..................................................................................... 437
Identification.............................................................................. 438
Functionality.............................................................................. 438
Function block........................................................................... 439
Signals.......................................................................................439
Settings......................................................................................441
Monitored data...........................................................................446
Operation principle.................................................................... 447
Second harmonic blocking element...........................................451
Technical data........................................................................... 452
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC ................ 453
Identification.............................................................................. 453
Functionality.............................................................................. 453
Function block........................................................................... 453
Signals.......................................................................................453
Settings......................................................................................454
Monitored data...........................................................................454

9
Technical manual
Table of contents

Operation principle.................................................................... 454

Technical data........................................................................... 455
Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero sequence or
negative sequence directionality) EF4PTOC .................................455
Identification.............................................................................. 455
Functionality.............................................................................. 456
Function block........................................................................... 456
Signals.......................................................................................456
Settings......................................................................................458
Monitored data...........................................................................463
Operation principle.................................................................... 464
Operating quantity within the function.................................. 464
Internal polarizing................................................................. 465
External polarizing for earth-fault function............................466
Directional detection for earth fault function......................... 466
Base quantities within the protection....................................467
Internal earth-fault protection structure................................ 467
Four residual overcurrent steps............................................467
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison function............................................468
Second harmonic blocking element..................................... 471
Switch on to fault feature......................................................473
Technical data........................................................................... 475
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent
protection NS4PTOC .....................................................................476
Identification.............................................................................. 476
Functionality.............................................................................. 476
Function block........................................................................... 477
Signals.......................................................................................477
Settings......................................................................................478
Monitored data...........................................................................483
Operation principle.................................................................... 483
Operating quantity within the function.................................. 483
Internal polarizing facility of the function.............................. 484
External polarizing for negative sequence function..............485
Internal negative sequence protection structure.................. 485
Four negative sequence overcurrent stages........................ 485
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison function............................................486
Technical data........................................................................... 489
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
SDEPSDE ..................................................................................... 489
Identification.............................................................................. 489
Functionality.............................................................................. 490

10
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Function block........................................................................... 491

Signals.......................................................................................492
Settings......................................................................................493
Monitored data...........................................................................495
Operation principle.................................................................... 495
Function inputs..................................................................... 495
Technical data........................................................................... 501
Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius/
Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR.........................................................502
Identification.............................................................................. 503
Functionality.............................................................................. 503
Function block........................................................................... 504
Signals.......................................................................................504
Settings......................................................................................505
Monitored data...........................................................................506
Operation principle.................................................................... 507
Technical data........................................................................... 511
Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and output CCRBRF 511
Identification.............................................................................. 511
Functionality.............................................................................. 511
Function block........................................................................... 512
Signals.......................................................................................512
Settings......................................................................................513
Monitored data...........................................................................514
Operation principle.................................................................... 514
Technical data........................................................................... 517
Stub protection STBPTOC ............................................................ 517
Identification.............................................................................. 517
Functionality.............................................................................. 518
Function block........................................................................... 518
Signals.......................................................................................518
Settings......................................................................................519
Monitored data...........................................................................519
Operation principle.................................................................... 519
Technical data........................................................................... 520
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC........................................... 520
Identification.............................................................................. 521
Functionality.............................................................................. 521
Function block........................................................................... 521
Signals.......................................................................................521
Settings......................................................................................522
Monitored data...........................................................................523
Operation principle.................................................................... 523

11
Technical manual
Table of contents

Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker...................526

Unsymmetrical current detection..........................................526
Technical data........................................................................... 526
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP............................... 526
Identification.............................................................................. 527
Functionality.............................................................................. 527
Function block........................................................................... 528
Signals.......................................................................................528
Settings......................................................................................529
Monitored data...........................................................................530
Operation principle.................................................................... 530
Low pass filtering..................................................................532
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................533
Technical data........................................................................... 534
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP ................................535
Identification.............................................................................. 535
Functionality.............................................................................. 535
Function block........................................................................... 536
Signals.......................................................................................536
Settings......................................................................................537
Monitored data...........................................................................539
Operation principle.................................................................... 539
Low pass filtering..................................................................541
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................541
Technical data........................................................................... 542
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC ............................................. 543
Identification.............................................................................. 543
Functionality.............................................................................. 543
Function block........................................................................... 543
Signals.......................................................................................543
Settings......................................................................................544
Monitored data...........................................................................544
Operation principle.................................................................... 544
Technical data........................................................................... 546
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC.............. 546
Identification.............................................................................. 546
Functionality.............................................................................. 546
Function block........................................................................... 547
Signals.......................................................................................547
Settings......................................................................................548
Monitored data...........................................................................549
Operation principle.................................................................... 549
Measured quantities............................................................. 549

12
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Base quantities.....................................................................549
Overcurrent protection..........................................................549
Logic diagram.......................................................................551
Undervoltage protection....................................................... 551
Technical data........................................................................... 552

Section 9 Voltage protection........................................................ 555

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV ................................555
Identification.............................................................................. 555
Functionality.............................................................................. 555
Function block........................................................................... 556
Signals.......................................................................................556
Settings......................................................................................557
Monitored data...........................................................................559
Operation principle.................................................................... 559
Measurement principle......................................................... 560
Time delay............................................................................560
Blocking................................................................................566
Design.................................................................................. 567
Technical data........................................................................... 569
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV ..................................569
Identification.............................................................................. 569
Functionality.............................................................................. 570
Function block........................................................................... 570
Signals.......................................................................................570
Settings......................................................................................571
Monitored data...........................................................................573
Operation principle.................................................................... 573
Measurement principle......................................................... 574
Time delay............................................................................574
Blocking................................................................................580
Design.................................................................................. 580
Technical data........................................................................... 582
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV ................. 583
Identification.............................................................................. 583
Functionality.............................................................................. 583
Function block........................................................................... 583
Signals.......................................................................................583
Settings......................................................................................584
Monitored data...........................................................................586
Operation principle.................................................................... 586
Measurement principle......................................................... 586
Time delay............................................................................586
Blocking................................................................................592

13
Technical manual
Table of contents

Design.................................................................................. 592
Technical data........................................................................... 593
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH ............................................ 594
Identification.............................................................................. 594
Functionality.............................................................................. 594
Function block........................................................................... 594
Signals.......................................................................................595
Settings......................................................................................595
Monitored data...........................................................................596
Operation principle.................................................................... 596
Measured voltage.................................................................599
Operate time of the overexcitation protection.......................600
Cooling................................................................................. 603
Overexcitation protection function measurands................... 603
Overexcitation alarm............................................................ 604
Logic diagram.......................................................................605
Technical data........................................................................... 605
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV ......................................606
Identification.............................................................................. 606
Functionality.............................................................................. 606
Function block........................................................................... 606
Signals.......................................................................................606
Settings......................................................................................607
Monitored data...........................................................................608
Operation principle.................................................................... 608
Technical data........................................................................... 609
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV .................................................. 610
Identification.............................................................................. 610
Functionality.............................................................................. 610
Function block........................................................................... 610
Signals.......................................................................................610
Settings......................................................................................611
Operation principle.................................................................... 611
Technical data........................................................................... 613
Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC............................................... 613
Identification.............................................................................. 613
Functionality.............................................................................. 613
Function block........................................................................... 614
Signals.......................................................................................614
Settings......................................................................................615
Monitored data...........................................................................616
Principle of operation.................................................................616
Faulted phase selection....................................................... 616

14
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Residual current detection....................................................617

Fast fault clearance ............................................................. 617
Delayed fault clearance........................................................618
Trip and autoreclose logic.................................................... 619
Technical data........................................................................... 620

Section 10 Frequency protection....................................................621

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF ............................................. 621
Identification.............................................................................. 621
Functionality.............................................................................. 621
Function block........................................................................... 621
Signals.......................................................................................622
Settings......................................................................................622
Monitored data...........................................................................623
Operation principle.................................................................... 623
Measurement principle......................................................... 623
Time delay............................................................................623
Voltage dependent time delay..............................................624
Blocking................................................................................625
Design.................................................................................. 625
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF ...............................................626
Identification.............................................................................. 626
Functionality.............................................................................. 627
Function block........................................................................... 627
Signals.......................................................................................627
Settings......................................................................................628
Monitored data...........................................................................628
Operation principle.................................................................... 628
Measurement principle......................................................... 628
Time delay............................................................................629
Blocking................................................................................629
Design.................................................................................. 629
Technical data........................................................................... 630
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC .............................631
Identification.............................................................................. 631
Functionality.............................................................................. 631
Function block........................................................................... 631
Signals.......................................................................................631
Settings......................................................................................632
Monitored data...........................................................................632
Operation principle.................................................................... 632
Measurement principle......................................................... 633
Time delay............................................................................633
Blocking................................................................................633

15
Technical manual
Table of contents

Design.................................................................................. 634
Technical data........................................................................... 635

Section 11 Multipurpose protection................................................ 637

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC.......................... 637
Identification.............................................................................. 637
Functionality.............................................................................. 637
Function block........................................................................... 638
Signals.......................................................................................638
Settings......................................................................................640
Monitored data...........................................................................647
Operation principle.................................................................... 647
Measured quantities within CVGAPC...................................647
Base quantities for CVGAPC function..................................650
Built-in overcurrent protection steps.....................................650
Built-in undercurrent protection steps...................................655
Built-in overvoltage protection steps.................................... 656
Built-in undervoltage protection steps.................................. 656
Logic diagram.......................................................................656
Technical data........................................................................... 661

Section 12 System protection and control......................................665

Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC....................................................... 665
Identification.............................................................................. 665
Functionality.............................................................................. 665
Function block........................................................................... 665
Signals.......................................................................................665
Settings......................................................................................666
Operation principle.................................................................... 666
Filter calculation example.......................................................... 670

Section 13 Secondary system supervision.....................................673

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC............................................673
Identification.............................................................................. 673
Functionality.............................................................................. 673
Function block........................................................................... 673
Signals.......................................................................................674
Settings......................................................................................674
Operation principle.................................................................... 674
Technical data........................................................................... 676
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC................................................676
Identification.............................................................................. 676
Functionality.............................................................................. 677
Function block........................................................................... 677

16
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Signals.......................................................................................678
Settings......................................................................................679
Monitored data...........................................................................680
Operation principle.................................................................... 680
Zero and negative sequence detection................................ 680
Delta current and delta voltage detection.............................682
Dead line detection...............................................................685
Main logic............................................................................. 686
Technical data........................................................................... 689
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC..................................................689
Identification.............................................................................. 689
Functionality.............................................................................. 689
Function block........................................................................... 690
Signals.......................................................................................690
Settings......................................................................................691
Monitored data...........................................................................691
Operation principle.................................................................... 692
Technical data........................................................................... 693

Section 14 Control..........................................................................695
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN...695
Identification.............................................................................. 695
Functionality.............................................................................. 695
Function block........................................................................... 696
Signals.......................................................................................696
Settings......................................................................................698
Monitored data...........................................................................701
Operation principle.................................................................... 701
Basic functionality.................................................................701
Logic diagrams..................................................................... 702
Technical data........................................................................... 713
Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase operation
SMBRREC .....................................................................................714
Identification.............................................................................. 714
Functionality.............................................................................. 714
Function block........................................................................... 715
Signals.......................................................................................715
Settings......................................................................................717
Operation principle.................................................................... 718
Logic Diagrams.................................................................... 718
Auto-reclosing operation Off and On....................................719
Auto-reclosing mode selection............................................. 719
Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing
cycle..................................................................................... 719

17
Technical manual
Table of contents

Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1............... 720

Long trip signal..................................................................... 721
Time sequence diagrams..................................................... 727
Technical data........................................................................... 730
Interlocking .................................................................................... 731
Functionality.............................................................................. 731
Operation principle.................................................................... 731
Logical node for interlocking SCILO ......................................... 734
Identification......................................................................... 734
Functionality......................................................................... 734
Function block...................................................................... 735
Signals..................................................................................735
Logic diagram.......................................................................735
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES .........................736
Identification......................................................................... 736
Functionality......................................................................... 736
Function block...................................................................... 737
Logic diagram.......................................................................737
Signals..................................................................................737
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS.......................... 737
Identification......................................................................... 738
Functionality......................................................................... 738
Function block...................................................................... 739
Logic diagram.......................................................................740
Signals..................................................................................741
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC ................ 742
Identification......................................................................... 743
Functionality......................................................................... 743
Function block...................................................................... 743
Logic diagram.......................................................................744
Signals..................................................................................744
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC ................................ 745
Identification......................................................................... 745
Functionality......................................................................... 746
Function block...................................................................... 747
Logic diagram.......................................................................748
Signals..................................................................................750
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH ..................................................... 753
Identification......................................................................... 753
Functionality......................................................................... 753
Function blocks.................................................................... 754
Logic diagrams..................................................................... 756
Signals..................................................................................761

18
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Interlocking for double CB bay DB ........................................... 765

Identification......................................................................... 765
Functionality......................................................................... 765
Logic diagrams..................................................................... 767
Function block...................................................................... 770
Signals..................................................................................772
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE .......................................... 775
Identification......................................................................... 775
Functionality......................................................................... 775
Function block...................................................................... 776
Logic diagram.......................................................................777
Signals..................................................................................782
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO ............................ 784
Identification......................................................................... 784
Functionality......................................................................... 785
Function block...................................................................... 786
Logic diagram.......................................................................787
Signals..................................................................................788
Position evaluation POS_EVAL.................................................790
Identification......................................................................... 790
Functionality......................................................................... 790
Function block...................................................................... 790
Logic diagram.......................................................................791
Signals..................................................................................791
Apparatus control APC................................................................... 791
Functionality.............................................................................. 791
Operation principle.................................................................... 792
Error handling............................................................................ 793
Bay control QCBAY................................................................... 796
Functionality......................................................................... 796
Function block...................................................................... 796
Signals..................................................................................796
Settings................................................................................ 797
Operation principle............................................................... 797
Local/Remote switch LOCREM................................................. 799
Function block...................................................................... 799
Signals..................................................................................800
Settings................................................................................ 801
Operation principle............................................................... 801
Switch controller SCSWI........................................................... 802
Functionality ........................................................................ 803
Function block...................................................................... 803
Signals..................................................................................803

19
Technical manual
Table of contents

Settings................................................................................ 805
Operation principle............................................................... 805
Circuit breaker SXCBR..............................................................810
Functionality ........................................................................ 810
Function block...................................................................... 810
Signals..................................................................................811
Settings................................................................................ 812
Operation principle............................................................... 812
Circuit switch SXSWI.................................................................816
Functionality ........................................................................ 816
Function block...................................................................... 816
Signals..................................................................................817
Settings................................................................................ 818
Operation principle............................................................... 818
Bay reserve QCRSV..................................................................822
Functionality......................................................................... 822
Function block...................................................................... 822
Signals..................................................................................823
Settings................................................................................ 824
Operation principle............................................................... 824
Reservation input RESIN...........................................................826
Functionality......................................................................... 826
Function block...................................................................... 826
Signals..................................................................................827
Settings................................................................................ 828
Operation principle............................................................... 828
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
presentation SLGAPC.................................................................... 830
Identification.............................................................................. 830
Functionality.............................................................................. 830
Function block........................................................................... 831
Signals.......................................................................................831
Settings......................................................................................832
Monitored data...........................................................................833
Operation principle.................................................................... 833
Graphical display..................................................................833
Selector mini switch VSGAPC........................................................834
Identification.............................................................................. 835
Functionality.............................................................................. 835
Function block........................................................................... 835
Signals.......................................................................................835
Settings......................................................................................836
Operation principle.................................................................... 836

20
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Generic communication function for Double Point indication

DPGAPC........................................................................................ 837
Identification.............................................................................. 837
Functionality.............................................................................. 837
Function block........................................................................... 837
Signals.......................................................................................837
Settings......................................................................................838
Operation principle.................................................................... 838
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC........................ 838
Identification.............................................................................. 838
Functionality.............................................................................. 838
Function block........................................................................... 839
Signals.......................................................................................839
Settings......................................................................................839
Operation principle.................................................................... 840
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS.......... 840
Identification.............................................................................. 840
Functionality.............................................................................. 841
Function block........................................................................... 841
Signals.......................................................................................841
Settings......................................................................................842
Operation principle.................................................................... 857
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD.................................... 857
Identification.............................................................................. 857
Functionality.............................................................................. 857
Function block........................................................................... 858
Signals.......................................................................................858
Settings......................................................................................859
Operation principle.................................................................... 859

Section 15 Scheme communication............................................... 861

Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent
protection ZCPSCH........................................................................ 861
Identification.............................................................................. 861
Functionality.............................................................................. 861
Function block........................................................................... 861
Signals.......................................................................................862
Settings......................................................................................862
Operation principle.................................................................... 863
Blocking scheme.................................................................. 863
Permissive underreaching scheme...................................... 864
Permissive overreaching scheme........................................ 864
Unblocking scheme.............................................................. 864
Intertrip scheme....................................................................866

21
Technical manual
Table of contents

Simplified logic diagram....................................................... 866

Technical data........................................................................... 868
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance
protection ZC1PPSCH ...................................................................868
Identification.............................................................................. 868
Functionality.............................................................................. 868
Function block........................................................................... 869
Signals.......................................................................................869
Settings......................................................................................871
Operation principle.................................................................... 871
Blocking scheme.................................................................. 872
Permissive underreach scheme........................................... 872
Permissive overreach scheme............................................. 873
Unblocking scheme.............................................................. 873
Intertrip scheme....................................................................873
Simplified logic diagram....................................................... 873
Technical data........................................................................... 875
Current reversal and Weak-end infeed logic for distance
protection 3-phase ZCRWPSCH ................................................... 875
Identification.............................................................................. 875
Functionality.............................................................................. 875
Function block........................................................................... 876
Signals.......................................................................................876
Settings......................................................................................877
Operation principle.................................................................... 877
Current reversal logic........................................................... 877
Weak-end infeed logic..........................................................878
Technical data........................................................................... 880
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase
segregated communication ZC1WPSCH ...................................... 881
Identification.............................................................................. 881
Functionality.............................................................................. 881
Function block........................................................................... 881
Signals.......................................................................................882
Settings......................................................................................883
Operation principle.................................................................... 883
Current reversal logic .......................................................... 883
Weak end infeed logic.......................................................... 884
Technical data........................................................................... 885
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH..............................................886
Identification.............................................................................. 886
Functionality.............................................................................. 886
Function block........................................................................... 886
Signals.......................................................................................887

22
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Settings......................................................................................887
Operation principle.................................................................... 888
Zone extension.....................................................................888
Loss-of-Load acceleration.................................................... 888
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection
ECPSCH ........................................................................................889
Identification.............................................................................. 889
Functionality.............................................................................. 889
Function block........................................................................... 890
Signals.......................................................................................890
Settings......................................................................................891
Operation principle.................................................................... 891
Blocking scheme.................................................................. 892
Permissive under/overreaching scheme.............................. 893
Unblocking scheme.............................................................. 894
Technical data........................................................................... 895
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH...............................................895
Identification.............................................................................. 895
Functionality.............................................................................. 896
Function block........................................................................... 896
Signals.......................................................................................896
Settings......................................................................................897
Operation principle.................................................................... 898
Directional comparison logic function...................................898
Fault current reversal logic................................................... 898
Weak-end infeed logic..........................................................899
Technical data........................................................................... 900
Direct transfer trip logic...................................................................900
Introduction................................................................................901
Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC......902
Identification......................................................................... 902
Functionality......................................................................... 902
Function block...................................................................... 903
Signals..................................................................................903
Settings................................................................................ 904
Monitored data..................................................................... 905
Operation principle............................................................... 905
Technical data...................................................................... 907
Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC. 907
Identification......................................................................... 908
Functionality......................................................................... 908
Function block...................................................................... 908
Signals..................................................................................908

23
Technical manual
Table of contents

Settings................................................................................ 909
Monitored data..................................................................... 910
Operation principle............................................................... 910
Technical data...................................................................... 912
Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC......................913
Identification......................................................................... 913
Functionality......................................................................... 913
Function block...................................................................... 913
Signals..................................................................................914
Settings................................................................................ 914
Operation principle............................................................... 914
Technical data...................................................................... 915
Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC.............................................. 915
Identification......................................................................... 915
Functionality......................................................................... 916
Function block...................................................................... 916
Signals..................................................................................916
Settings................................................................................ 917
Operation principle............................................................... 917
Technical data...................................................................... 917
Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV........... 918
Identification......................................................................... 918
Functionality......................................................................... 918
Function block...................................................................... 918
Signals..................................................................................918
Settings................................................................................ 919
Monitored data..................................................................... 919
Operation principle............................................................... 919
Technical data...................................................................... 919
Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV.................. 920
Identification......................................................................... 920
Functionality......................................................................... 920
Function block...................................................................... 920
Signals..................................................................................920
Settings................................................................................ 921
Monitored data..................................................................... 921
Operation principle............................................................... 921
Technical data...................................................................... 922
Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC........... 922
Identification......................................................................... 922
Functionality......................................................................... 922
Function block...................................................................... 922
Signals..................................................................................923

24
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Settings................................................................................ 923
Monitored data..................................................................... 923
Operation principle............................................................... 923
Technical data...................................................................... 924
Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC.................. 924
Identification......................................................................... 924
Functionality......................................................................... 925
Function block...................................................................... 925
Signals..................................................................................925
Settings................................................................................ 925
Monitored data..................................................................... 926
Operation principle............................................................... 926
Technical data...................................................................... 926
Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC....................................... 926
Identification......................................................................... 927
Functionality......................................................................... 927
Function block...................................................................... 927
Signals..................................................................................927
Settings................................................................................ 928
Monitored data..................................................................... 928
Operation principle............................................................... 928
Technical data...................................................................... 929
Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC..................................... 929
Identification......................................................................... 929
Functionality......................................................................... 929
Function block...................................................................... 930
Signals..................................................................................930
Settings................................................................................ 930
Monitored data..................................................................... 931
Operation principle............................................................... 931
Technical data...................................................................... 931

Section 16 Logic.............................................................................933
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC .......................933
Identification.............................................................................. 933
Functionality.............................................................................. 933
Function block........................................................................... 933
Signals.......................................................................................934
Settings......................................................................................935
Operation principle.................................................................... 935
Logic diagram.......................................................................936
Technical data........................................................................... 940
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC........................................................... 940
Identification.............................................................................. 940

25
Technical manual
Table of contents

Functionality.............................................................................. 941
Function block........................................................................... 941
Signals.......................................................................................941
Settings......................................................................................943
Operation principle.................................................................... 943
Technical data........................................................................... 944
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH....................................................944
Identification.............................................................................. 944
Functionality.............................................................................. 945
Function block........................................................................... 945
Signals.......................................................................................945
Settings......................................................................................946
Operation principle.................................................................... 946
Technical data........................................................................... 946
Logic for group warning WRNCALH...............................................947
Identification.............................................................................. 947
Functionality.............................................................................. 947
Function block........................................................................... 947
Signals.......................................................................................947
Settings......................................................................................948
Operation principle.................................................................... 948
Technical data........................................................................... 949
Logic for group indication INDCALH...............................................949
Identification.............................................................................. 949
Functionality.............................................................................. 949
Function block........................................................................... 949
Signals.......................................................................................950
Settings......................................................................................950
Operation principle.................................................................... 950
Technical data........................................................................... 951
Basic configurable logic blocks.......................................................951
AND function block AND........................................................... 952
Function block...................................................................... 952
Signals..................................................................................953
Technical data...................................................................... 953
Controllable gate function block GATE......................................953
Function block...................................................................... 953
Signals..................................................................................953
Settings................................................................................ 954
Technical data...................................................................... 954
Inverter function block INV........................................................ 954
Function block...................................................................... 954
Signals..................................................................................954

26
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Technical data...................................................................... 955

Loop delay function block LLD.................................................. 955
Function block...................................................................... 955
Signals..................................................................................955
Technical data...................................................................... 955
OR function block...................................................................... 955
Function block...................................................................... 956
Signals..................................................................................956
Technical data...................................................................... 956
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER..................................956
Function block...................................................................... 957
Signals..................................................................................957
Settings................................................................................ 957
Technical data...................................................................... 957
Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY.................957
Function block...................................................................... 958
Signals..................................................................................958
Settings................................................................................ 958
Technical data...................................................................... 958
Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY................. 959
Function block...................................................................... 959
Signals..................................................................................959
Settings................................................................................ 959
Technical data...................................................................... 960
Settable timer function block TIMERSET.................................. 960
Function block...................................................................... 960
Signals..................................................................................960
Settings................................................................................ 961
Technical data...................................................................... 961
Exclusive OR function block XOR............................................. 961
Function block...................................................................... 961
Signals..................................................................................962
Technical data...................................................................... 962
Configurable logic blocks Q/T.........................................................962
ANDQT function block............................................................... 963
Function block...................................................................... 964
Signals..................................................................................964
Technical data...................................................................... 964
Single point indication related signals combining function
block INDCOMBSPQT.............................................................. 964
Function block...................................................................... 965
Signals..................................................................................965
Technical data...................................................................... 965

27
Technical manual
Table of contents

Single point input signal attributes converting function block

INDEXTSPQT............................................................................965
Function block...................................................................... 966
Signals..................................................................................966
Technical data...................................................................... 966
Invalid logic function block INVALIDQT.....................................966
Function block...................................................................... 967
Signals..................................................................................967
Technical data...................................................................... 968
Inverter function block INVERTERQT....................................... 968
Function block...................................................................... 969
Signals..................................................................................969
Technical data...................................................................... 969
ORQT function block................................................................. 969
Function block...................................................................... 970
Signals..................................................................................970
Technical data...................................................................... 970
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT.............................970
Function block...................................................................... 971
Signals..................................................................................971
Settings................................................................................ 971
Technical data...................................................................... 971
Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT.................................972
Function block...................................................................... 972
Signals..................................................................................972
Settings................................................................................ 973
Technical data...................................................................... 973
Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT.................................973
Function block...................................................................... 973
Signals..................................................................................974
Settings................................................................................ 974
Technical data...................................................................... 974
Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT............................. 974
Function block...................................................................... 975
Signals..................................................................................975
Settings................................................................................ 975
Technical data...................................................................... 975
Exclusive OR function block XORQT........................................ 975
Function block...................................................................... 976
Signals..................................................................................976
Technical data...................................................................... 976
Extension logic package.................................................................977
Fixed signals FXDSIGN..................................................................977

28
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Identification.............................................................................. 977
Functionality.............................................................................. 977
Function block........................................................................... 978
Signals.......................................................................................978
Settings......................................................................................978
Operation principle.................................................................... 978
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I.......................................... 979
Identification.............................................................................. 979
Function block........................................................................... 979
Signals.......................................................................................979
Monitored data...........................................................................980
Settings......................................................................................980
Operation principle.................................................................... 980
Technical data........................................................................... 981
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation
BTIGAPC........................................................................................981
Identification.............................................................................. 981
Functionality.............................................................................. 982
Function block........................................................................... 982
Signals.......................................................................................982
Settings......................................................................................983
Monitored data...........................................................................983
Operation principle.................................................................... 983
Technical data........................................................................... 984
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16...........................................984
Identification.............................................................................. 984
Functionality.............................................................................. 984
Function block........................................................................... 985
Signals.......................................................................................985
Setting parameters.................................................................... 986
Operation principle.................................................................... 986
Technical data........................................................................... 987
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation
ITBGAPC........................................................................................987
Identification.............................................................................. 987
Functionality.............................................................................. 987
Function block........................................................................... 988
Signals.......................................................................................988
Settings......................................................................................989
Operation principle.................................................................... 989
Technical data........................................................................... 990
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow
supervision TEIGAPC.....................................................................990
Identification.............................................................................. 990

29
Technical manual
Table of contents

Functionality.............................................................................. 990
Function block........................................................................... 991
Signals.......................................................................................991
Settings......................................................................................992
Operation principle.................................................................... 992
Operation accuracy.............................................................. 994
Memory storage................................................................... 994
Technical data........................................................................... 994

Section 17 Monitoring.....................................................................995
Measurements................................................................................995
Identification.............................................................................. 995
Functionality.............................................................................. 995
Function block........................................................................... 997
Signals.......................................................................................999
Settings....................................................................................1002
Monitored data.........................................................................1013
Operation principle.................................................................. 1016
Measurement supervision.................................................. 1016
Measurements CVMMXN...................................................1020
Phase current measurement CMMXU............................... 1025
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements
VMMXU, VNMMXU............................................................ 1026
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI,
CMSQI................................................................................1026
Technical data......................................................................... 1026
Gas medium supervision SSIMG................................................. 1028
Identification............................................................................ 1028
Functionality............................................................................ 1028
Function block......................................................................... 1029
Signals.....................................................................................1029
Settings....................................................................................1030
Operation principle.................................................................. 1030
Technical data......................................................................... 1031
Liquid medium supervision SSIML............................................... 1031
Identification............................................................................ 1031
Functionality............................................................................ 1032
Function block......................................................................... 1032
Signals.....................................................................................1032
Settings....................................................................................1033
Operation principle.................................................................. 1033
Technical data......................................................................... 1034
Breaker monitoring SSCBR..........................................................1034
Identification............................................................................ 1034

30
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Functionality............................................................................ 1035
Function block......................................................................... 1035
Signals.....................................................................................1035
Settings....................................................................................1036
Monitored data.........................................................................1038
Operation principle.................................................................. 1038
Circuit breaker contact travel time......................................1040
Circuit breaker status......................................................... 1041
Remaining life of circuit breaker......................................... 1042
Accumulated energy...........................................................1043
Circuit breaker operation cycles......................................... 1044
Circuit breaker operation monitoring.................................. 1045
Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring........................... 1046
Circuit breaker gas pressure indication.............................. 1047
Technical data......................................................................... 1047
Event function EVENT..................................................................1048
Identification............................................................................ 1048
Functionality............................................................................ 1048
Function block......................................................................... 1048
Signals.....................................................................................1049
Settings....................................................................................1050
Operation principle.................................................................. 1052
Disturbance report DRPRDRE..................................................... 1053
Identification............................................................................ 1053
Functionality............................................................................ 1053
Function block......................................................................... 1054
Signals.....................................................................................1055
Settings....................................................................................1060
Monitored data.........................................................................1099
Operation principle.................................................................. 1102
Technical data......................................................................... 1109
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP................................... 1110
Identification............................................................................ 1110
Functionality............................................................................ 1110
Function block......................................................................... 1111
Signals.....................................................................................1111
Settings....................................................................................1112
Operation principle.................................................................. 1112
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP.............................. 1113
Identification............................................................................ 1113
Functionality............................................................................ 1113
Function block......................................................................... 1113
Signals.....................................................................................1114

31
Technical manual
Table of contents

Operation principle.................................................................. 1114

Fault locator LMBRFLO................................................................1114
Identification............................................................................ 1114
Functionality............................................................................ 1115
Function block......................................................................... 1115
Signals.....................................................................................1115
Settings....................................................................................1116
Monitored data.........................................................................1117
Operation principle.................................................................. 1117
Measuring Principle............................................................1118
Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault... 1118
The non-compensated impedance model.......................... 1122
IEC 60870-5-103................................................................ 1123
Technical data......................................................................... 1123
Limit counter L4UFCNT................................................................1123
Identification............................................................................ 1123
Identification....................................................................... 1123
Functionality............................................................................ 1123
Operation principle.................................................................. 1124
Design................................................................................ 1124
Reporting............................................................................1125
Function block......................................................................... 1125
Signals.....................................................................................1126
Settings....................................................................................1126
Monitored data.........................................................................1127
Technical data......................................................................... 1127

Section 18 Metering..................................................................... 1129

Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT....................................................... 1129
Identification............................................................................ 1129
Functionality............................................................................ 1129
Function block......................................................................... 1129
Signals.....................................................................................1130
Settings....................................................................................1130
Monitored data.........................................................................1131
Operation principle.................................................................. 1131
Technical data......................................................................... 1133
Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR1133
Identification............................................................................ 1133
Functionality............................................................................ 1133
Function block......................................................................... 1134
Signals.....................................................................................1134
Settings....................................................................................1135
Monitored data.........................................................................1136

32
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Operation principle.................................................................. 1137

Technical data......................................................................... 1140
Technical data.................................................................... 1140

Section 19 Station communication............................................... 1141

670 series protocols..................................................................... 1141
DNP3 protocol.............................................................................. 1141
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol....................................... 1141
Functionality............................................................................ 1141
Communication interfaces and protocols................................ 1142
Settings....................................................................................1142
Technical data......................................................................... 1143
Generic communication function for Single Point indication
SPGAPC, SP16GAPC.............................................................1143
Functionality....................................................................... 1143
Function block.................................................................... 1143
Signals................................................................................1144
Settings.............................................................................. 1144
Monitored data................................................................... 1144
Operation principle............................................................. 1145
Generic communication function for Measured Value
MVGAPC................................................................................. 1145
Functionality....................................................................... 1146
Function block.................................................................... 1146
Signals................................................................................1146
Settings.............................................................................. 1146
Monitored data................................................................... 1147
Operation principle............................................................. 1147
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication............ 1147
Functionality....................................................................... 1148
Function block.................................................................... 1148
Signals................................................................................1148
Settings.............................................................................. 1148
Monitored data................................................................... 1149
Principle of operation..........................................................1149
IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol...................................1150
Introduction..............................................................................1150
Function block......................................................................... 1151
Signals.....................................................................................1151
Output signals.................................................................... 1151
Settings....................................................................................1153
Monitored data.........................................................................1156
Operation principle.................................................................. 1158
Technical data......................................................................... 1160

33
Technical manual
Table of contents

LON communication protocol....................................................... 1160

Functionality............................................................................ 1160
Settings....................................................................................1161
Operation principle.................................................................. 1161
Technical data......................................................................... 1179
SPA communication protocol....................................................... 1179
Functionality............................................................................ 1179
Design..................................................................................... 1179
Settings....................................................................................1180
Operation principle.................................................................. 1180
Communication ports......................................................... 1188
Technical data......................................................................... 1188
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol................................... 1189
Introduction..............................................................................1189
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS......................... 1189
Functionality....................................................................... 1189
Identification....................................................................... 1189
Function block.................................................................... 1190
Signals................................................................................1190
Settings.............................................................................. 1190
Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR........................................................................1191
Functionality....................................................................... 1191
Identification....................................................................... 1191
Function block.................................................................... 1191
Signals................................................................................1192
Settings.............................................................................. 1192
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR....1193
Functionality....................................................................... 1193
Identification....................................................................... 1193
Function block.................................................................... 1193
Signals................................................................................1193
Settings.............................................................................. 1193
Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF.........1194
Functionality....................................................................... 1194
Identification....................................................................... 1194
Function block.................................................................... 1194
Signals................................................................................1194
Settings.............................................................................. 1194
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT......................................................................... 1195
Functionality....................................................................... 1195
Identification....................................................................... 1195
Function block.................................................................... 1196

34
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Signals................................................................................1196
Settings.............................................................................. 1197
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED................................ 1197
Functionality....................................................................... 1197
Identification....................................................................... 1198
Function block.................................................................... 1198
Signals................................................................................1198
Settings.............................................................................. 1198
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV............1199
Functionality....................................................................... 1199
Identification....................................................................... 1199
Function block.................................................................... 1199
Signals................................................................................1199
Settings.............................................................................. 1199
Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRDEF...........................................................................1200
Functionality....................................................................... 1200
Identification....................................................................... 1200
Function block.................................................................... 1200
Signals................................................................................1200
Settings.............................................................................. 1201
Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD.............. 1202
Functionality....................................................................... 1202
Identification....................................................................... 1203
Function block.................................................................... 1203
Signals................................................................................1203
Settings.............................................................................. 1203
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD................ 1203
Functionality....................................................................... 1203
Identification....................................................................... 1204
Function block.................................................................... 1204
Signals................................................................................1204
Settings.............................................................................. 1204
Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD..........................................................................1205
Functionality....................................................................... 1205
Identification....................................................................... 1205
Function block.................................................................... 1205
Signals................................................................................1205
Settings.............................................................................. 1206
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103
I103GENCMD..........................................................................1206
Functionality....................................................................... 1206
Identification....................................................................... 1206

35
Technical manual
Table of contents

Function block.................................................................... 1207

Signals................................................................................1207
Settings.............................................................................. 1207
IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD..........................................................................1207
Functionality....................................................................... 1207
Identification....................................................................... 1208
Function block.................................................................... 1208
Signals................................................................................1208
Settings.............................................................................. 1208
Operation principle ................................................................. 1209
General...............................................................................1209
Communication ports......................................................... 1219
Technical data......................................................................... 1220
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEINTLKRCV.......................................................................1220
Functionality............................................................................ 1220
Function block......................................................................... 1221
Signals.....................................................................................1221
Settings....................................................................................1223
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV........................................1224
Function block......................................................................... 1224
Signals.....................................................................................1224
Settings....................................................................................1225
GOOSE function block to receive a double point value
GOOSEDPRCV............................................................................1226
Identification............................................................................ 1226
Functionality............................................................................ 1226
Function block......................................................................... 1226
Signals.....................................................................................1226
Settings....................................................................................1227
Operation principle ................................................................. 1227
GOOSE function block to receive an integer value
GOOSEINTRCV........................................................................... 1227
Identification............................................................................ 1227
Functionality............................................................................ 1227
Function block......................................................................... 1228
Signals.....................................................................................1228
Settings....................................................................................1228
Operation principle ................................................................. 1228
GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value
GOOSEMVRCV........................................................................... 1229
Identification............................................................................ 1229
Functionality............................................................................ 1229

36
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Function block......................................................................... 1229

Signals.....................................................................................1229
Settings....................................................................................1230
Operation principle ................................................................. 1230
GOOSE function block to receive a single point value
GOOSESPRCV............................................................................ 1230
Identification............................................................................ 1230
Functionality............................................................................ 1231
Function block......................................................................... 1231
Signals.....................................................................................1231
Settings....................................................................................1231
Operation principle ................................................................. 1231
MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND........................................ 1232
Functionality............................................................................ 1232
Design..................................................................................... 1232
General...............................................................................1232
Function block......................................................................... 1233
Signals.....................................................................................1233
Settings....................................................................................1235
Operation principle.................................................................. 1235
Security events on protocols SECALARM....................................1236
Security alarm SECALARM.....................................................1236
Signals................................................................................1236
Settings.............................................................................. 1236
Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG....................................... 1236
Activity logging ACTIVLOG..................................................... 1236
Settings....................................................................................1236

Section 20 Remote communication..............................................1239

Binary signal transfer....................................................................1239
Identification............................................................................ 1239
Functionality............................................................................ 1239
Function block......................................................................... 1240
Signals.....................................................................................1240
Settings....................................................................................1242
Monitored data.........................................................................1245
Operation principle.................................................................. 1246
Transmission of analog data from LDCM LDCMTransmit............ 1247
Function block......................................................................... 1247
Signals.....................................................................................1247

Section 21 Basic IED functions.................................................... 1249

Authority check ATHCHCK...........................................................1249
Identification............................................................................ 1249

37
Technical manual
Table of contents

Functionality............................................................................ 1249
Operation principle ................................................................. 1250
Authorization with Central Account Management enabled
IED..................................................................................... 1252
Authority management AUTHMAN...............................................1255
Identification............................................................................ 1255
AUTHMAN...............................................................................1255
Settings....................................................................................1255
FTP access with password FTPACCS......................................... 1255
Identification............................................................................ 1255
FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS............................................1255
Settings....................................................................................1256
Authority status ATHSTAT........................................................... 1256
Identification............................................................................ 1256
Functionality............................................................................ 1256
Function block......................................................................... 1256
Signals.....................................................................................1257
Settings....................................................................................1257
Operation principle ................................................................. 1257
Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG.................... 1257
Functionality............................................................................ 1257
Function block......................................................................... 1257
Signals.....................................................................................1258
Settings....................................................................................1258
Operation principle.................................................................. 1258
Internal signals................................................................... 1260
Supervision of analog inputs.............................................. 1262
Technical data......................................................................... 1262
Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN......................................1263
Functionality............................................................................ 1263
Settings....................................................................................1263
Operation principle ................................................................. 1268
General concepts............................................................... 1268
Real-time clock (RTC) operation........................................ 1271
Synchronization alternatives.............................................. 1272
Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization.................1275
Technical data......................................................................... 1275
Parameter setting groups............................................................. 1275
Functionality............................................................................ 1275
Function block......................................................................... 1276
Signals.....................................................................................1276
Settings....................................................................................1277
Operation principle.................................................................. 1277

38
Technical manual
 Table of contents

ChangeLock function CHNGLCK................................................. 1278

Functionality............................................................................ 1278
Function block......................................................................... 1279
Signals.....................................................................................1279
Operation principle ................................................................. 1279
Test mode functionality TESTMODE............................................1280
Functionality............................................................................ 1280
Function block......................................................................... 1280
Signals.....................................................................................1280
Settings....................................................................................1281
Operation principle ................................................................. 1281
IED identifiers TERMINALID........................................................ 1282
Functionality............................................................................ 1282
Settings ...................................................................................1282
Product information PRODINF..................................................... 1283
Functionality............................................................................ 1283
Settings ...................................................................................1283
Factory defined settings.......................................................... 1283
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI............................................ 1284
Functionality............................................................................ 1284
Function block......................................................................... 1284
Signals.....................................................................................1284
Operation principle.................................................................. 1285
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ....................................... 1285
Functionality............................................................................ 1285
Function block......................................................................... 1286
Signals.....................................................................................1286
Operation principle.................................................................. 1286
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI................................................ 1287
Functionality............................................................................ 1287
Function block......................................................................... 1287
Signals.....................................................................................1287
Operation principle.................................................................. 1288
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI........................................... 1288
Functionality............................................................................ 1288
Function block......................................................................... 1288
Signals.....................................................................................1289
Settings....................................................................................1290
Operation principle ................................................................. 1292
Frequency values............................................................... 1293
Global base values GBASVAL..................................................... 1294
Identification............................................................................ 1294
Functionality............................................................................ 1294

39
Technical manual
Table of contents

Settings....................................................................................1294
Primary system values PRIMVAL.................................................1295
Identification............................................................................ 1295
Functionality............................................................................ 1295
Settings....................................................................................1295
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM............................................ 1295
Functionality............................................................................ 1295
Function block......................................................................... 1296
Signals.....................................................................................1296
Settings....................................................................................1297
Operation principle ................................................................. 1297
Denial of service DOS.................................................................. 1297
Functionality ........................................................................... 1297
Function blocks........................................................................1298
Signals.....................................................................................1298
Settings....................................................................................1299
Monitored data.........................................................................1299
Operation principle.................................................................. 1299

Section 22 IED hardware............................................................. 1301

Overview.......................................................................................1301
Variants of case size with local HMI display............................1301
Case from the rear side........................................................... 1303
Hardware modules....................................................................... 1308
Overview..................................................................................1308
Numeric processing module (NUM)........................................ 1309
Introduction.........................................................................1309
Functionality....................................................................... 1309
Block diagram.....................................................................1310
Power supply module (PSM)................................................... 1310
Introduction.........................................................................1310
Design................................................................................ 1310
Technical data.................................................................... 1311
Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)...........................1311
Transformer input module (TRM)............................................ 1311
Introduction.........................................................................1311
Design................................................................................ 1312
Technical data.................................................................... 1313
Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
(ADM) ..................................................................................... 1314
Introduction.........................................................................1314
Design................................................................................ 1314
Binary input module (BIM)....................................................... 1316
Introduction.........................................................................1316

40
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Design................................................................................ 1316
Signals................................................................................1319
Settings.............................................................................. 1320
Monitored data................................................................... 1320
Technical data.................................................................... 1320
Binary output modules (BOM)................................................. 1321
Introduction.........................................................................1321
Design................................................................................ 1321
Signals................................................................................1323
Settings.............................................................................. 1324
Monitored data................................................................... 1324
Technical data.................................................................... 1328
Static binary output module (SOM)......................................... 1329
Introduction.........................................................................1329
Design................................................................................ 1329
Signals................................................................................1330
Settings.............................................................................. 1331
Monitored data................................................................... 1331
Technical data.................................................................... 1333
Binary input/output module (IOM)............................................1334
Introduction.........................................................................1334
Design................................................................................ 1334
Signals................................................................................1336
Settings.............................................................................. 1337
Monitored data................................................................... 1337
Technical data.................................................................... 1339
mA input module (MIM)........................................................... 1341
Introduction.........................................................................1341
Design................................................................................ 1341
Signals................................................................................1342
Settings.............................................................................. 1343
Monitored data................................................................... 1344
Technical data.................................................................... 1345
Serial and LON communication module (SLM) ...................... 1345
Introduction.........................................................................1345
Design................................................................................ 1345
Technical data.................................................................... 1346
Galvanic RS485 communication module.................................1347
Introduction.........................................................................1347
Design................................................................................ 1347
Technical data.................................................................... 1348
Optical ethernet module (OEM)...............................................1349
Introduction.........................................................................1349

41
Technical manual
Table of contents

Functionality....................................................................... 1349
Design................................................................................ 1349
Technical data.................................................................... 1350
Line data communication module (LDCM).............................. 1350
Introduction.........................................................................1350
Design................................................................................ 1350
Technical data.................................................................... 1351
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)............ 1352
Introduction.........................................................................1352
Design................................................................................ 1353
Functionality....................................................................... 1354
Technical data.................................................................... 1355
GPS time synchronization module (GTM)............................... 1355
Introduction.........................................................................1355
Design................................................................................ 1355
Monitored data................................................................... 1356
Technical data.................................................................... 1356
GPS antenna........................................................................... 1356
Introduction.........................................................................1356
Design................................................................................ 1356
Technical data.................................................................... 1358
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B........................... 1358
Introduction.........................................................................1358
Design................................................................................ 1358
Settings.............................................................................. 1359
Technical data.................................................................... 1359
Dimensions...................................................................................1360
Case without rear cover...........................................................1360
Flush mounting dimensions.....................................................1362
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions................................. 1363
Wall mounting dimensions.......................................................1364
External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection1364
Mounting alternatives................................................................... 1366
Flush mounting........................................................................ 1366
Overview............................................................................ 1366
Mounting procedure for flush mounting..............................1367
19 panel rack mounting.......................................................... 1368
Overview............................................................................ 1368
Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting...............1369
Wall mounting..........................................................................1370
Overview............................................................................ 1370
Mounting procedure for wall mounting............................... 1370
How to reach the rear side of the IED................................ 1371

42
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Side-by-side 19 rack mounting...............................................1372

Overview............................................................................ 1372
Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting.......... 1372
IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case...........1373
Side-by-side flush mounting.................................................... 1373
Overview............................................................................ 1373
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting......... 1374
Technical data.............................................................................. 1375
Enclosure.................................................................................1375
Electrical safety....................................................................... 1375
Connection system.................................................................. 1375
Influencing factors................................................................... 1376
Type tests according to standard............................................ 1377

Section 23 Labels.........................................................................1381
Labels on IED............................................................................... 1381

Section 24 Connection diagrams................................................. 1385

Section 25 Inverse time characteristics........................................1387

Application.................................................................................... 1387
Principle of operation....................................................................1390
Mode of operation....................................................................1390
Inverse characteristics..................................................................1395

Section 26 Glossary..................................................................... 1425

Glossary....................................................................................... 1425

43
Technical manual
44
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.

1.2 Intended audience

This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning

personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and
commissioning, and in normal service.

The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,

protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the
IEDs. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in
handling electronic equipment.

45
Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK505308-UEN B
Introduction

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set

Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase

Decommissioning
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering

Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual

Commissioning manual
Operation manual

Application manual

Technical manual

Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd

IEC07000220 V4 EN

Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the
various tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides
instructions on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project
structure. The manual also recommends a sequence for the engineering of protection
and control functions, LHMI functions as well as communication engineering for IEC
60870-5-103, IEC 61850 and DNP3.

The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual
provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are
organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be installed.

The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The
manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for
assistance during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking
of external circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as

46
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

well as verifying settings by secondary injection. The manual describes the process of
testing an IED in a substation which is not in service. The chapters are organized in the
chronological order in which the IED should be commissioned. The relevant
procedures may be followed also during the service and maintenance activities.

The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and
setting of the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to
view calculated and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines

sorted per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a
typical protection function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for
calculating settings.

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.

The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols

supported by the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific
implementations.

The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific
to the IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding
communication protocol manual.

The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber
security when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role
based access control, and product engineering for cyber security related events are
described and sorted by function. The guideline can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.

1.3.2 Document revision history

Document revision/date History
-/May2014 First release
A/June 2016 Second release
B/June 2016 Minor corrections

47
Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK505308-UEN B
Introduction

1.3.3 Related documents

Documents related to RED670 Identify number
Application manual 1MRK 505 307-UEN
Commissioning manual 1MRK 505 309-UEN
Product guide 1MRK 505 310-BEN
Technical manual 1MRK 505 308-UEN
Type test certificate 1MRK 505 310-TEN

670 series manuals Identify number

Operation manual 1MRK 500 118-UEN
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 308-UEN
Installation manual 1MRK 514 019-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 1MRK 511 304-UEN
60870-5-103
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 1MRK 511 302-UEN
Edition 1
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 1MRK 511 303-UEN
Edition 2
Communication protocol manual, LON 1MRK 511 305-UEN
Communication protocol manual, SPA 1MRK 511 306-UEN
Accessories guide 1MRK 514 012-BEN
Cyber security deployment guideline 1MRK 511 309-UEN
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN

1.4 Document symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which

could result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could

result in personal injury.

The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or

warning about the temperature of product surfaces.

48
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related

to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of
a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to
equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and

conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand

that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result
in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important
that the user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices.

1.4.2 Document conventions

Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the
push button icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press
.
Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the
signal name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
the character * after an input signal name indicates that the signal must be
connected to another function block in the application configuration to
achieve a valid application configuration.
Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are
bordered by dashed lines.

49
Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK505308-UEN B
Introduction

Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent
setting parameter signals that are only settable via the PST or LHMI.
If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the suffix
-int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and
continues.
Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another
diagram have the suffix -cont.

Illustrations are used as an example and might show other products

than the one the manual describes. The example that is illustrated is
still valid.

1.4.3 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Table 1: IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping
Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes
AEGPVOC AEGGAPC AEGPVOC
AGSAL AGSAL AGSAL
SECLLN0
ALMCALH ALMCALH ALMCALH
ALTIM - ALTIM
ALTMS - ALTMS
ALTRK - ALTRK
BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF
BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF
BDCGAPC SWSGGIO BBCSWI
BDCGAPC
BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC
BRPTOC BRPTOC BRPTOC
BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIGAPC
BUSPTRC_B1 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BBSPLLN0
BUSPTRC_B2 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B3 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B4 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B5 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B6 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B7 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B8 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B9 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B10 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
Table continues on next page

50
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BUSPTRC_B11 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B12 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B13 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B14 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B15 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B16 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B17 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B18 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B19 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B20 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B21 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B22 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B23 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B24 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUTPTRC_B1 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BBTPLLN0
BUTPTRC_B2 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B3 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B4 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B5 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B6 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B7 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B8 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BZISGGIO BZISGGIO BZISGAPC
BZITGGIO BZITGGIO BZITGAPC
BZNSPDIF_A BZNSPDIF BZASGAPC
BZASPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNSPDIF_B BZNSPDIF BZBSGAPC
BZBSPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNTPDIF_A BZNTPDIF BZATGAPC
BZATPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
BZNTPDIF_B BZNTPDIF BZBTGAPC
BZBTPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
Table continues on next page

51
Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK505308-UEN B
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

CBPGAPC CBPLLN0 CBPMMXU
CBPMMXU CBPPTRC
CBPPTRC HOLPTOV
HOLPTOV HPH1PTOV
HPH1PTOV PH3PTOC
PH3PTUC PH3PTUC
PH3PTOC RP3PDOP
RP3PDOP
CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC
CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF
CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF
CCSRBRF CCSRBRF CCSRBRF
CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC
CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU
CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI
COUVGAPC COUVLLN0 COUVPTOV
COUVPTOV COUVPTUV
COUVPTUV
CVGAPC GF2LLN0 GF2MMXN
GF2MMXN GF2PHAR
GF2PHAR GF2PTOV
GF2PTOV GF2PTUC
GF2PTUC GF2PTUV
GF2PTUV GF2PVOC
GF2PVOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN
D2PTOC D2LLN0 D2PTOC
D2PTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC
DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE
ECPSCH ECPSCH ECPSCH
ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH
EF2PTOC EF2LLN0 EF2PTRC
EF2PTRC EF2RDIR
EF2RDIR GEN2PHAR
GEN2PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EFPIOC EFPIOC EFPIOC
EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC
ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR
FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS
FRPSPDIS FPSRPDIS FPSRPDIS
Table continues on next page

52
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

FTAQFVR FTAQFVR FTAQFVR
FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC
SDDSPVC
GENPDIF GENPDIF GENGAPC
GENPDIF
GENPHAR
GENPTRC
GOOSEBINRCV BINGREC -
GOOSEDPRCV DPGREC -
GOOSEINTLKRCV INTGREC -
GOOSEINTRCV INTSGREC -
GOOSEMVRCV MVGREC -
GOOSESPRCV BINSGREC -
GOOSEVCTRRCV VCTRGREC -
GOPPDOP GOPPDOP GOPPDOP
PH1PTRC
GRPTTR GRPTTR GRPTTR
GSPTTR GSPTTR GSPTTR
GUPPDUP GUPPDUP GUPPDUP
PH1PTRC
HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF
INDCALCH INDCALH INDCALH
ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC
L3CPDIF L3CPDIF L3CGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPHAR
L3CPTRC
L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT
L6CPDIF L6CPDIF L6CGAPC
L6CPDIF
L6CPHAR
L6CPTRC
LAPPGAPC LAPPLLN0 LAPPPDUP
LAPPPDUP LAPPPUPF
LAPPPUPF
LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC
LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV
LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC
LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR
LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV
LD0LLN0 LLN0 -
LDLPSCH LDLPDIF LDLPSCH
Table continues on next page

53
Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK505308-UEN B
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

LDRGFC STSGGIO LDRGFC
LEXPDIS LEXPDIS LEXPDIS
LEXPTRC
LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR
LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO
LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV
LPHD LPHD
LPTTR LPTTR LPTTR
LT3CPDIF LT3CPDIF LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC
LT6CPDIF LT6CPDIF LT6CGAPC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPHAR
LT6CPTRC
MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC
NS2PTOC NS2LLN0 NS2PTOC
NS2PTOC NS2PTRC
NS2PTRC
NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR PH1PTOC
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
O2RWPTOV GEN2LLN0 O2RWPTOV
O2RWPTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH3PTOC
PH3PTOC PH3PTRC
PH3PTRC
OEXPVPH OEXPVPH OEXPVPH
OOSPPAM OOSPPAM OOSPPAM
OOSPTRC
OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 OV2PTOV
OV2PTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PAPGAPC PAPGAPC PAPGAPC
PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT
PH4SPTOC GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
OCNDLLN0 PH1BPTOC
PH1BPTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC
PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH RCHLCCH
SCHLCCH
PSLPSCH ZMRPSL PSLPSCH
PSPPPAM PSPPPAM PSPPPAM
PSPPTRC
Table continues on next page

54
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

QCBAY QCBAY
QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV
REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF
ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPTRC
ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV
ROV2PTOV
SAPFRC SAPFRC SAPFRC
SAPTOF SAPTOF SAPTOF
SAPTUF SAPTUF SAPTUF
SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC
SCILO SCILO SCILO
SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI
SDEPSDE SDEPSDE SDEPSDE
SDEPTOC
SDEPTOV
SDEPTRC
SESRSYN RSY1LLN0 AUT1RSYN
AUT1RSYN MAN1RSYN
MAN1RSYN SYNRSYN
SYNRSYN
SINGLELCCH SCHLCCH
SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC
SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC
SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC
SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC
SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR
SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG
SSIML SSIML SSIML
STBPTOC STBPTOC BBPMSS
STBPTOC
STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ
STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI
T2WPDIF T2WPDIF T2WGAPC
T2WPDIF
T2WPHAR
T2WPTRC
T3WPDIF T3WPDIF T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC
Table continues on next page

55
Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK505308-UEN B
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC
TCSLTC
TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC
TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC
TEIGGIO
TEILGAPC TEILGGIO TEILGAPC
TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC
TPPIOC TPPIOC TPPIOC
TR1ATCC TR1ATCC TR1ATCC
TR8ATCC TR8ATCC TR8ATCC
TRPTTR TRPTTR TRPTTR
U2RWPTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC U2RWPTUV
U2RWPTUV
UV2PTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC UV2PTUV
UV2PTUV
VDCPTOV VDCPTOV VDCPTOV
VDSPVC VDRFUF VDSPVC
VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU
VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI
VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU
VRPVOC VRLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC PH1PTUV
PH1PTUV VRPVOC
VRPVOC
VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC
WRNCALH WRNCALH WRNCALH
ZC1PPSCH ZPCPSCH ZPCPSCH
ZC1WPSCH ZPCWPSCH ZPCWPSCH
ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH
ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF
ZGVPDIS ZGVLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ZGVPDIS
ZGVPDIS ZGVPTUV
ZGVPTUV
ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS
ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS
ZMFCPDIS ZMFCLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC
ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU
ZMMMXU
Table continues on next page

56
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU ZMMMXU
ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS
ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS
ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS
ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS
ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS
ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS
ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS
ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZMRPSB
ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC

57
Technical manual
58
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

Section 2 Available functions

2.1 Main protection functions

2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential

RED670 (A31)

RED670 (B31)

RED670 (A32)

RED670 (B32)
RED670

Differential protection
HZPDIF 87 1Ph high impedance differential 0-3 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02
protection
REFPDIF 87N Restricted earth fault protection, 02
low impedance
L3CPDIF 87L Line differential protection, 3 CT 1 1 1
sets, 23 line ends
L6CPDIF 87L Line differential protection, 6 CT 1 1-A04 1 1-A04 1
sets, 35 line ends
LT3CPDIF 87LT Line differential protection, 3 CT 1 1-A05 1-A05
sets, with inzone transformers,
23 line ends
LT6CPDIF 87LT Line differential protection, 6 CT 1 1-A06 1-A06 1-A06 1-A06
sets, with inzone transformers,
35 line ends
LDLPSCH 87L Line differential protection logic 1 1 1 1 1
LDRGFC 11RE Additional security logic for 0-1
L differential protection
Impedance protection
ZMQPDIS, 21 Distance protection zone, 0-5 1-B10 1-B10 1-B10 1-B10
ZMQAPDIS quadrilateral characteristic 3-B11 3-B11 3-B11 3-B11
ZDRDIR 21D Directional impedance 0-2 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11
quadrilateral
ZMCAPDIS 21 Additional distance measuring
zone, quadrilateral
characteristic
ZMCPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, 0-5 3-B16 3-B16 3-B16 3-B16
ZMCAPDIS quadrilateral characteristic for
series compensated lines
Table continues on next page

59
Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK505308-UEN B
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential

RED670 (A31)

RED670 (B31)

RED670 (A32)

RED670 (B32)
RED670

ZDSRDIR 21D Directional impedance 0-2 1-B16 1-B16 1-B16 1-B16

quadrilateral, including series
compensation
FDPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral 0-2 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11
characteristic with fixed angle 1-B16 1-B16 1-B16 1-B16
ZMHPDIS 21 Fullscheme distance protection, 0-5 4-B17 4-B17 4-B17 4-B17
mho characteristic
ZMMPDIS, 21 Fullscheme distance protection, 0-5 4-B17 4-B17 4-B17 4-B17
ZMMAPDIS quadrilateral for earth faults
ZDMRDIR 21D Directional impedance element 0-2 1-B17 1-B17 1-B17 1-B17
for mho characteristic
ZDARDIR Additional distance protection 0-2 1-B17 1-B17 1-B17 1-B17
directional function for earth
faults
ZSMGAPC Mho impedance supervision 0-1 1-B17 1-B17 1-B17 1-B17
logic
FMPSPDIS 21 Faulty phase identification with 0-2 2-B17 2-B17 2-B17 2-B17
load enchroachment
ZMRPDIS, 21 Distance protection zone, 0-5
ZMRAPDIS quadrilateral characteristic,
separate settings
FRPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral 0-2
characteristic with fixed angle
ZMFPDIS 21 High speed distance protection 01
ZMFCPDIS 21 High speed distance protection 01 1-B19 1-B19 1-B19 1-B19
for series compensated lines
ZMRPSB 68 Power swing detection 0-1 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11
1-B16 1-B16 1-B16 1-B16
PSLPSCH Power swing logic 0-1 1-B03 1-B03 1-B03 1-B03
PSPPPAM 78 Pole slip/out-of-step protection 0-1 1-B22 1-B22 1-B22 1-B22
OOSPPAM 78 Out-of-step protection 01 1-B22 1-B22 1-B22 1-B22
ZCVPSOF Automatic switch onto fault 0-1 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11
logic, voltage and current based 1-B16 1-B16 1-B16 1-B16
1-B17 1-B17 1-B17 1-B17
PPLPHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1 1-B04

60
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

2.2 Back-up protection functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential

RED670 (A31)

RED670 (B31)

RED670 (A32)

RED670 (B32)
RED670

Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase 0-3 1 1 1 1
overcurrent protection
OC4PTOC 51_671) Four step phase 0-3 1 1 1 1
overcurrent protection
EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual 0-1 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24
overcurrent protection
EF4PTOC 51N Four step residual 0-3 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24
67N2) overcurrent protection

NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional 0-2 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24
negative phase
sequence overcurrent
protection
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional 0-1 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16
residual overcurrent
and power protection
LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload 02 1 1 1 1
protection, one time
constant, Celsius
LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload 02 1 1 1 1
protection, one time
constant, Fahrenheit
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure 0-2 1 2 1 2
protection
STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection 0-2 1-B11 1B 1-B11 1B
1-B11 1-B11
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance 0-2 1 2 1 2
protection
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower 0-2 1-C17 1-C17 1-C17 1-C17
protection
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower 0-2 1-C17 1-C17 1-C17 1-C17
protection
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor 1 1 1 1 1
check
VRPVOC 51V Voltage restrained 0-3
overcurrent protection

Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage 0-2 1 1 1 1
protection
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage 0-2 1 1 1 1
protection
Table continues on next page

61
Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK505308-UEN B
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential

RED670 (A31)

RED670 (B31)

RED670 (A32)

RED670 (B32)
RED670

ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual 0-2 1 1 1 1

overvoltage protection
OEXPVPH 24 Overexcitation 0-1 1-D03 1-D03 1-D03 1-D03
protection
VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential 0-2 2 2 2 2
protection
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 1 1 1 1 1
PAPGAPC 27 Radial feeder 01
protection

Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency 0-2 2-E02 2-E02 2-E02 2-E02
protection
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency 0-2 2-E02 2-E02 2-E02 2-E02
protection
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change 0-2 2-E02 2-E02 2-E02 2-E02
frequency protection

Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and 0-4 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01
voltage protection

General calculation
SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6

1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage

2.3 Control and monitoring functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential

RED670 (A31)

RED670 (B31)

RED670 (A32)

RED670 (B32)

RED670

Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing check 0-2 1 2 1 2
and synchronizing
SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser 0-4 1 2 1 2
1-H04 2-H05 1-H04 2-H05
APC8 3 Apparatus control for single bay, 0-1 1-H07 1-H07
max 8 apparatuses (1CB) incl.
interlocking
Table continues on next page

62
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential

RED670 (A31)

RED670 (B31)

RED670 (A32)

RED670 (B32)
RED670

APC15 3 Apparatus control for single bay, 0-1 1-H08 1-H08

max 15 apparatuses (2CBs) incl.
interlocking
QCBAY Apparatus control 1 1 1 1 1
LOCREM Handling of LRswitch positions 1 1 1 1 1
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1 1 1 1 1
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for function 15 15 15 15 15
selection and LHMI presentation
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 20 20 20 20 20
DPGAPC Generic communication function for 16 16 16 16 16
Double Point indication
SPC8GAPC Single point generic control 8 5 5 5 5 5
signals
AUTOBITS AutomationBits, command function 3 3 3 3 3
for DNP3.0
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 signals 4 4 4 4 4
I103CMD Function commands for IEC 1 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103GENCMD Function commands generic for 50 50 50 50 50
IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD IED commands with position and 50 50 50 50 50
select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 1 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103USRCMD Function commands user defined 1 1 1 1 1
for IEC 60870-5-103
Secondary system supervision
CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit supervision 0-2 1 2 1 2
FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0-3 3 3 3 3
VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure supervision based on 0-3 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03
voltage difference
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 1-6 6 6 6 6
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12 12 12 12 12
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5 5 5 5 5
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5 5 5 5 5
INDCALH Logic for group indication 5 5 5 5 5
Table continues on next page

63
Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK505308-UEN B
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential

RED670 (A31)

RED670 (B31)

RED670 (A32)

RED670 (B32)
RED670

AND, OR, INV, Configurable logic blocks 40-280 40-28 40-28 40-28 40-28
PULSETIMER, 0 0 0 0
GATE,
TIMERSET, XOR,
LLD,
SRMEMORY,
RSMEMORY
ANDQT, ORQT, Configurable logic blocks Q/T 01
INVERTERQT,
XORQT,
SRMEMORYQT,
RSMEMORYQT,
TIMERSETQT,
PULSETIMERQT
, INVALIDQT,
INDCOMBSPQT,
INDEXTSPQT
SLGAPC, Extension logic package 01
VSGAPC, AND,
OR,
PULSETIMER,
GATE,
TIMERSET, XOR,
LLD,
SRMEMORY,
INV
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1 1 1 1 1
B16I Boolean 16 to Integer conversion 18 18 18 18 18
BTIGAPC Boolean 16 to Integer conversion 16 16 16 16 16
with Logic Node representation
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 18 18 18 18 18
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 16 16 16 16 16
with Logic Node representation
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with limit 12 12 12 12 12
transgression and overflow
supervision
Monitoring
CVMMXN, Measurements 6 6 6 6 6
CMMXU,
VMMXU, CMSQI,
VMSQI,
VNMMXU
AISVBAS Function block for service value 1 1 1 1 1
presentation of secondary analog
inputs
EVENT Event function 20 20 20 20 20
Table continues on next page

64
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential

RED670 (A31)

RED670 (B31)

RED670 (A32)

RED670 (B32)
RED670

DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1 1 1 1 1

A1RADR,
A2RADR,
A3RADR,
A4RADR,
B1RBDR,
B2RBDR,
B3RBDR,
B4RBDR,
B5RBDR,
B6RBDR
SPGAPC Generic communication function for 64 64 64 64 64
Single Point indication
SP16GAPC Generic communication function for 16 16 16 16 16
Single Point indication 16 inputs
MVGAPC Generic communication function for 24 24 24 24 24
Measured Value
BINSTATREP Logical signal status report 3 3 3 3 3
RANGE_XP Measured value expander block 66 66 66 66 66
SSIMG 63 Gas medium supervision 21 21 21 21 21
SSIML 71 Liquid medium supervision 3 3 3 3 3
SSCBR Circuit breaker monitoring 0-2 1-M11 2-M12 1-M11 2-M12
LMBRFLO Fault locator 1 1 1 1 1
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals 3 3 3 3 3
for IEC 60870-5-103
I103AR Function status auto-recloser for 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103EF Function status earth-fault for IEC 1 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC 1 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103USRDEF Status for user defiend signals for 20 20 20 20 20
IEC 60870-5-103
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit supervision 30 30 30 30 30
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16 16 16 16 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation and 6 6 6 6 6
demand handling

65
Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK505308-UEN B
Available functions

2.4 Communication

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential

RED670 (A31)

RED670 (B31)

RED670 (A32)

RED670 (B32)
RED670

Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA communication 1 1 1 1 1
protocol
ADE LON communication 1 1 1 1 1
protocol
HORZCOMM Network variables via 1 1 1 1 1
LON
PROTOCOL Operation selection 1 1 1 1 1
between SPA and IEC
60870-5-103 for SLM
RS485PROT Operation selection for 1 1 1 1 1
RS485
RS485GEN RS485 1 1 1 1 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 1 1 1 1 1
communication general
protocol
DNPGENTCP DNP3.0 1 1 1 1 1
communication general
TCP protocol
CHSERRS485 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 1 1 1 1 1
communication
protocol
CH1TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP 1 1 1 1 1
CH2TCP, communication
CH3TCP, protocol
CH4TCP
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and 1 1 1 1 1
EIA-485
communication
protocol
MST1TCP, DNP3.0 for serial 1 1 1 1 1
MST2TCP, communication
MST3TCP, protocol
MST4TCP
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records 1 1 1 1 1
for TCP/IP and EIA-485
communication
protocol
IEC61850-8-1 Parameter setting 1 1 1 1 1
function for IEC 61850
GOOSEINTLKR Horizontal 59 59 59 59 59
CV communication via
GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEBINRCV Goose binary receive 16 16 16 16 16
Table continues on next page

66
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential

RED670 (A31)

RED670 (B31)

RED670 (A32)

RED670 (B32)
RED670

GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block 64 64 64 64 64

to receive a double
point value
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block 32 32 32 32 32
to receive an integer
value
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block 60 60 60 60 60
to receive a measurand
value
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block 64 64 64 64 64
to receive a single point
value
MULTICMDRCV, Multiple command and 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10
MULTICMDSND transmit
FRONT, LANABI, Ethernet configuration 1 1 1 1 1
LANAB, LANCDI, of links
LANCD
GATEWAY Ethernet configuration 1 1 1 1 1
of link one
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1
Optical serial
communication
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial 1 1 1 1 1
communication for
RS485
AGSAL Generic security 1 1 1 1 1
application component
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1 1 1 1 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1 1 1 1 1
LPHD Physical device 1 1 1 1 1
information
PCMACCS IED Configuration 1 1 1 1 1
Protocol
SECALARM Component for 1 1 1 1 1
mapping security
events on protocols
such as DNP3 and
IEC103
FSTACCS Field service tool 1 1 1 1 1
access via SPA
protocol over ethernet
communication
ACTIVLOG Activity logging 1 1 1 1 1
parameters
ALTRK Service Tracking 1 1 1 1 1
SINGLELCCH Single ethernet port link 1 1 1 1 1
status
Table continues on next page

67
Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK505308-UEN B
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential

RED670 (A31)

RED670 (B31)

RED670 (A32)

RED670 (B32)
RED670

PRPSTATUS Dual ethernet port link 1 1 1 1 1

status
Process bus
communication IEC
61850-9-2 1)
PRP IEC 62439-3 parallel 0-1 1-P03 1-P03 1-P03 1-P03
redundancy protocol
(only in F00)
Remote communication
Binary signal transfer 6/36 6/36 6/36 6/36 6/36
receive/transmit
Transmission of analog 1 1 1 1 1
data from LDCM
Receive binary status 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3
from remote LDCM
Scheme communication
ZCPSCH 85 Scheme 0-1 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11
communication logic for 1-B16 1-B16 1-B16 1-B16
distance or overcurrent
protection
ZC1PPSCH 85 Phase segregated 0-1 1-B05 1-B05
scheme
communication logic for
distance protection
ZCRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and 0-1 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11
weak-end infeed logic 1-B16 1-B16 1-B16 1-B16
for distance protection
ZC1WPSCH 85 Current reversal and 0-1 1-B05 1-B05
weak-end infeed logic
for phase segregated
communication
ZCLCPSCH Local acceleration logic 0-1 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11 1-B11
ECPSCH 85 Scheme 0-1 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24
communication logic for
residual overcurrent
protection
ECRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and 0-1 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24 1-C24
weak-end infeed logic
for residual overcurrent
protection
DTT Direct transfer trip 0-1

1) Only included for 9-2LE products

68
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

2.5 Basic IED functions

Table 2: Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function Description
name
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list
SELFSUPEVLST Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
SYNCHBIN, Time synchronization
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS,
SYNCHSNTP,
SYNCHSPA,
SYNCHCMPPS
TIMEZONE Time synchronization
DSTBEGIN, GPS time synchronization module
DSTENABLE, DSTEND
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI20 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
SPACOMMMAP SPA communication mapping
SPATD Date and time via SPA protocol
DOSFRNT Denial of service, frame rate control for front port
DOSLANAB Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port AB
DOSLANCD Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port CD
DOSSCKT Denial of service, socket flow control
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
PRIMVAL Primary system values
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
Table continues on next page

69
Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK505308-UEN B
Available functions

IEC 61850 or function Description

name
ALTRK Service tracking
ACTIVLOG Activity logging parameters
FSTACCS Field service tool access via SPA protocol over ethernet communication
PCMACCS IED Configuration Protocol
SECALARM Component for mapping security events on protocols such as DNP3 and IEC103
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol
DNPGENTCP DNP3.0 communication general TCP protocol
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication protocol
MSTSER DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial communication
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485
IEC61850-8-1 Parameter setting function for IEC 61850
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON
LONSPA SPA communication protocol
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI

70
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

Section 3 Analog inputs

3.1 Introduction

Analog input channels must be configured and set properly to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and all
directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be
defined properly. Measuring and protection algorithms in the IED use primary system
quantities. Setting values are in primary quantities as well and it is important to set the
data about the connected current and voltage transformers properly.

A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This

analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle
information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing
and service values reading.

The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary
equipment, that are sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a
process bus, via the IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol.

The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer

input module (TRM) type.

3.2 Function block

The hardware channels appear in the signal matrix tool (SMT) and in
ACT when a TRM is included in the configuration with the hardware
configuration tool. In the SMT or the ACT they can be mapped to the
desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED and used internally in the
configuration.

71
Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK505308-UEN B
Analog inputs

3.3 Signals

Table 3: TRM_12I Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analogue current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analogue current input 9
CH10(I) STRING Analogue current input 10
CH11(I) STRING Analogue current input 11
CH12(I) STRING Analogue current input 12

Table 4: TRM_6I_6U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 7
CH8(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 8
CH9(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

Table 5: TRM_6I Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
Table continues on next page

72
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Type Description

CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6

Table 6: TRM_7I_5U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 8
CH9(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

Table 7: TRM_9I_3U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analogue current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analogue current input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

73
Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK505308-UEN B
Analog inputs

3.4 Settings

Dependent on ordered IED type.

Table 8: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseAngleRef TRM40-Ch1 - Ch12 - - TRM40-Ch1 Reference channel
TRM41-Ch1 - Ch12 for phase angle
MU1-L1I presentation
MU1-L2I
MU1-L3I
MU1-L4I
MU1-L1U
MU1-L2U
MU1-L3U
MU1-L4U
MU2-L1I
MU2-L2I
MU2-L3I
MU2-L4I
MU2-L1U
MU2-L2U
MU2-L3U
MU2-L4U
MU3-L1I
MU3-L2I
MU3-L3I
MU3-L4I
MU3-L1U
MU3-L2U
MU3-L3U
MU3-L4U
MU4-L1I - L4I
MU4-L1U - L4U
MU5-L1I - L4I
MU5-L1U - L4U
MU6-L1I - L4I
MU6-L1U - L4U

Table 9: TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

74
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint10 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec10 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim10 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint11 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec11 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim11 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint12 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec12 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim12 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

Table 10: TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

75
Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK505308-UEN B
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 11: TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
Table continues on next page

76
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

Table 12: TRM_7I_5U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
Table continues on next page

77
Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK505308-UEN B
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 13: TRM_9I_3U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

78
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

3.5 Monitored data

Table 14: AISVBAS Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Status INTEGER 0=Ok - Service value status
1=Error
2=AngRefLow
3=Uncorrelated

Table 15: TRM_12I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 16: TRM_6I_6U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

79
Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK505308-UEN B
Analog inputs

Table 17: TRM_6I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 18: TRM_7I_5U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 19: TRM_9I_3U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

3.6 Operation principle

The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are
typically star connected and can be connected with the star point towards the object or
away from the object. This information must be set in the IED.

The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:

Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into
the object.
Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out
from the object.

For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see figure
2)

Forward means the direction is into the object.

Reverse means the direction is out from the object.

80
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"

en05000456.vsd
IEC05000456 V1 EN

Figure 2: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or

ToObject according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows
towards the protected object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the
protected object.

The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs and
VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated secondary and
primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated
ratios.

The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main menu/
Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the HMI.

81
Technical manual
82
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 4
Binary input and output modules

Section 4 Binary input and output modules

4.1 Binary input

4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter

The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.

A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a millisecond
when a binary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A new debounced
binary input signal is forwarded when the time counter reaches the set DebounceTime
value and the debounced input value is high or when the time counter reaches 0 and
the debounced input value is low. The default setting of DebounceTime is 1 ms.

The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which the
counter does not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down to 0
again.

4.1.2 Oscillation filter

Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic
fields from for example nearby breakers. An oscillation filter is used to reduce the
disturbance from the system when a binary input starts oscillating.

An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state changes during 1 s. If the
counter value is greater than the set value OscBlock, the input signal is blocked. The
input signal is ignored until the oscillation counter value during 1 s is below the set
value OscRelease.

4.1.3 Settings

4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules

Table 20: BIM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

83
Technical manual
Section 4 1MRK505308-UEN B
Binary input and output modules

4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for binary input/output module

Table 21: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in operation
On (On) or not (Off)
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

84
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour

5.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local HMI screen behaviour SCREEN - -

5.1.2 Settings
Table 22: SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DisplayTimeout 1 - 120 Min 1 10 Local HMI display timeout
ContrastLevel -100 - 100 % 10 0 Contrast level for display
DefaultScreen - 0 Default screen
EvListSrtOrder Latest on top - - Latest on top Sort order of event list
Oldest on top
AutoIndicationDRP Off - - Off Automatic indication of disturbance report
On
SubstIndSLD No - - No Substitute indication on single line
Yes diagram
InterlockIndSLD No - - No Interlock indication on single line diagram
Yes
BypassCommands No - - No Enable bypass of commands
Yes

5.2 Local HMI signals

5.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local HMI signals LHMICTRL - -

5.2.2 Function block

85
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK505308-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD

IEC09000320-1-en.vsd
IEC09000320 V1 EN

Figure 3: LHMICTRL function block

5.2.3 Signals
Table 23: LHMICTRL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CLRLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

Table 24: LHMICTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI
are cleared
LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not
active

5.3 Basic part for LED indication module

5.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN - -
Basic part for LED indication HW GRP1_LED1 - - -
module GRP1_LED15

GRP2_LED1 -
GRP2_LED15

GRP3_LED1 -
GRP3_LED15

86
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.3.2 Function block

LEDGEN
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK

IEC09000321-1-en.vsd
IEC09000321 V1 EN

Figure 4: LEDGEN function block

GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G

IEC09000322 V1 EN

Figure 5: GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example. The 15 LEDs in each of the three
groups have a similar function block.

5.3.3 Signals
Table 25: LEDGEN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs

Table 26: LEDGEN Output signals

Name Type Description
NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input is
set
ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are
acknowledged

Table 27: GRP1_LED1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1

87
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK505308-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.3.4 Settings
Table 28: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
tMax 0.1 - 100.0 s 0.1 1.0 Maximum time for the definition of a
disturbance

Table 29: GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SequenceType Follow-S - - Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI alarm
Follow-F group 1
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_OFF Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is off
LabelRed 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is red
LabelYellow 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is yellow
LabelGreen 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is green

5.3.5 Monitored data

Table 30: GRP1_LED1 Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
LEDStatus INTEGER 1=Red flash - Status of LED 1, local
2=Red steady HMI alarm group 1
3=Yellow flash
4=Yellow steady
5=Green flash
6=Green steady
0=Off

5.4 LCD part for HMI function keys control module

5.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
LCD part for HMI Function Keys Control FNKEYMD1 - - -
module FNKEYMD5

88
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.4.2 Function block

FNKEYMD1
^LEDCTL1 ^FKEYOUT1

IEC09000327 V1 EN

Figure 6: FNKEYMD1 function block

Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block for
every function key button.

5.4.3 Signals
Table 31: FNKEYMD1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key

Table 32: FNKEYMD1 Output signals

Name Type Description
FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key

5.4.4 Settings
Table 33: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Mode Off - - Off Output operation mode
Toggle
Pulsed
PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled by
LCDFn1
LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state

Table 34: FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type Off - - Off Function key type
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut Menu shortcut for
function key

89
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK505308-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.5 Operation principle

5.5.1 Local HMI

IEC13000239-2-en.vsd

IEC13000239 V2 EN

Figure 7: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:

Keypad
Display (LCD)
LED indicators
Communication port for PCM600

90
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

5.5.1.1 Display

The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome display with a resolution of 320 x 240
pixels. The character size can vary. The amount of characters and rows fitting the view
depends on the character size and the view that is shown.

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

1 2

3 4
IEC13000063-2-en.vsd
IEC13000063 V2 EN

Figure 8: Display layout

1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

91
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK505308-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too long
to be shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is indicated
with three dots.
The content area shows the menu content.
The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in and
the object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600.
If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar appears
on the right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not
fit in the display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.

IEC13000045-2-en.vsd
IEC13000045 V2 EN

Figure 9: Truncated path

The number after the function instance, for example ETHFRNT:1, indicates the
instance number.

The function button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the
function buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a
feedback signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the
required signal with PCM600.

92
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC13000281-1-en.vsd
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN

Figure 10: Function button panel

The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs. Three
alarm LED pages are available.

IEC13000240-1-en.vsd
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN

Figure 11: Alarm LED panel

The function button and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel
is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the
ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both the panels have dynamic width that
depends on the label string length that the panel contains.

5.5.1.2 LEDs

The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Ready, Start and
Trip.

93
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK505308-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

There are 15 programmable alarm LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can
indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The alarm texts related to
each three-color LED are divided into three pages.

5.5.1.3 Keypad

The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different
views or menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset
indications, provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as
menu shortcut or control buttons.

94
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

24

1
23
2
18
3

19
4

6 20

21

7 22

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

IEC15000157-2-en.vsd

IEC15000157 V2 EN

Figure 12: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-
buttons and RJ-45 communication port

1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 Key
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Not in use
18 Multipage

95
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK505308-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

19 Menu
20 Clear
21 Help
22 Communication port
23 Programmable indication LEDs
24 IED status LEDs

5.5.2 LED

5.5.2.1 Functionality

The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx

(x=1-15) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs.
The input and output signals of the function blocks are configured with PCM600. The
input signal for each LED is selected individually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is
controlled by the GRPn_LEDx (n=1-3) function block that controls the color and the
operating mode.

Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or
restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as
signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality.

5.5.2.2 Status LEDs

There are three status LEDs above the LCD in front of the IED: green, yellow and red.

The green LED has a fixed function that presents the healthy status of the IED. The
yellow and red LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that
a disturbance report is triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The
red LED can be used to indicate a trip command.

Here is a typical configuration of the status LEDs:

Green LED: unlit > no power; blinking > startup or abnormal situation (IED is not
in service); steady > IED is in service
Yellow LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > IED is in Testmode (IED
is not in normal service); steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the
yellow LED on has been active
Red LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > user performs a common write
from PCM600; steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the red LED
on has been active

96
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder function,
DRPRDRE, by connecting a start or trip signal from the actual function to a BxRBDR
binary input function block using the PCM600, and configuring the setting to Off,
Start or Trip for that particular signal.

5.5.2.3 Indication LEDs

Operating modes
Collecting mode

LEDs that are used in the collecting mode of operation are accumulated
continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable
when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system. When all three inputs (red,
yellow and green) are connected to different sources of events for the same
function block, collecting mode shows the highest priority LED color that was
activated since the latest acknowledgment was made. If a number of different
indications were made since the latest acknowledgment, it is not possible to get
a clear view of what triggered the latest event without looking at the sequence of
events list. A condition for getting the sequence of events is that the signals have
been engineered in the disturbance recorder.

Re-starting mode

In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs
and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs
defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S)
will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to
end a settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the
maximum time limit has elapsed. In sequence 6, the restarting or reset mode
means that upon occurrence of any new event, all previous indications will be
reset. This facilitates that only the LED indications related to the latest event is
shown.

Acknowledgment/reset
From local HMI
The active LED indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a
common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is
positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is
performed via the button and menus on the LHMI.

From function input

The active LED indications can also be acknowledged/reset via an input,
CLRLEDS, to the function block LHMICTRL. This input can for example
be configured to a binary input operated from an external push button or a

97
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK505308-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

function button. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered.
This means that even if the button is continuously pressed, the
acknowledgment/reset only affects indications active at the moment when
the button is first pressed.

Automatic reset
The automatic reset can only be performed for LED indications defined for
re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When
the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting
indications will be indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequence
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type, the LED follows
the input signal completely. For the Latched type, each LED latches to the
corresponding input signal until it is reset.

The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED
separately. The following 6 sequences are available:
Sequence 1: Follow-S
Sequence 2: Follow-F
Sequence 3: LatchedAck-F-S
Sequence 4: LatchedAck-S-F
Sequence 5: LatchedColl-S
Sequence 6: LatchedReset-S

For sequence 1 and 2, which are of the Follow type, the acknowledgment (Ack ) /reset
function is not applicable because the indication shown by the LED follows its input
signal. Sequence 3 and 4, which are of the Latched type with acknowledgement, are
only working in collecting (Coll) mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched
type and collecting mode while Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and
re-starting (Reset) mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning
S = Steady and F = Flash.

At the activation of the input signal to any LED, the indication on the corresponding
LED obtains a color that corresponds to the activated input, and operates according to
the selected sequence diagrams shown below.

In the sequence diagrams the different statuses of the LEDs are shown using the
following symbols:

98
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

= No indication = Steady light = Flash

G= Green Y= Yellow R= Red

IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN

Figure 13: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows the corresponding input signals all the time with a steady light.
It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other
LEDs in its operation.

Activating
signal

LED

IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN

Figure 14: Operating Sequence 1 (Follow-S)

If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to the same LED, the
priority color it shows is in accordance with the color described above. An example of
the operation when two colors are activated in parallel to the same LED is shown in
figure15.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

LED G G R G

IEC09000312_1_en.vsd
IEC09000312 V1 EN

Figure 15: Operating sequence 1, two colors

Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead
of showing steady light.

Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal,
the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the

99
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK505308-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets
a steady light.

Activating
signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN

Figure 16: Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S

The sequence described below is valid only if the same function block
is used for all three colour LEDs.

When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the

indication with higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent of
if the low priority indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. In figure 17 it
is shown the sequence when a signal of lower priority becomes activated after
acknowledgment has been performed on a higher priority signal. The low priority
signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high priority signal resets.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R R G
LED

Acknow
IEC09000313_1_en.vsd
IEC09000313 V1 EN

Figure 17: Operating Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S), 2 colors involved

If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained.
Acknowledgment of indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low
priority indications, which are not visible according to figure 18.

100
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G Y R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000314-1-en.vsd
IEC09000314 V1 EN

Figure 18: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priority

indication the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged according
to figure 19.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G G R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000315-1-en.vsd
IEC09000315 V1 EN

Figure 19: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light
have been alternated.

Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation
of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to
sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the
reset that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new
reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the
other LEDs in its operation.

101
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK505308-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal

LED

Reset

IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN

Figure 20: Operating Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S

That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with
lower priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according
to figure21.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R G
LED

Reset
IEC09000316_1_en.vsd
IEC09000316 V1 EN

Figure 21: Operating sequence 5, two colors

Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
LEDs set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still
activated will not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive
edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active
signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its
operation of LEDs set for other sequences.

Timing diagram for sequence 6

Figure 22 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

102
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance
tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN

Figure 22: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance

Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has
elapsed.

Disturbance Disturbance

tRestart tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN

Figure 23: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

103
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK505308-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Figure 24 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one
has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN

Figure 24: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 25 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

104
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN

Figure 25: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

5.5.3 Function keys

5.5.3.1 Functionality

Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the left
of the LCD, that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each
button has an indication LED that can be configured in the application configuration.

When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate
between default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control
a binary signal.

5.5.3.2 Operation principle

Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled

from the LHMI function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the output
status of the actual function block will change. These binary outputs can in turn be
used to control other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks, binary I/O
outputs etc.

FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and

parameters that control the behavior of the function block. These settings and
parameters are normally set using the PST.

105
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK505308-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Operating sequence
The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or
PULSED.

Setting OFF

This mode always sets the outputs to a low value (0).

Input value

Output value

IEC09000330-2-en.vsd

IEC09000330 V2 EN

Figure 26: Sequence diagram for setting OFF

Setting TOGGLE

In this mode the output toggles each time the function key has been pressed for more
than 500ms. Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block executes.
The function block execution is marked with a dotted line below.

Input value
500ms 500ms 500ms

Output value

IEC09000331_1_en.vsd

IEC09000331 V2 EN

Figure 27: Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE

Setting PULSED

In this mode the output sets high (1) when the function key has been pressed for more
than 500ms and remains high according to set pulse time. After this time the output
will go back to 0. The input attribute is reset when the function block detects it being
high and there is no output pulse.

Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since the
edge was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the output is
zero; else the trigger edge is lost.

106
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Input value
500ms 500ms 500ms 500ms

pulse time pulse time pulse time

Output value

IEC09000332_2_en.vsd

IEC09000332 V2 EN

Figure 28: Sequence diagram for setting PULSED

Input function
All function keys work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain
function button is of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this function
block becomes active, and will light the yellow function button LED when high. This
functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set to off. It has
been implemented this way for safety reasons; the idea is that the function key LEDs
should always reflect the actual status of any primary equipment monitored by these
LEDs.

107
Technical manual
108
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Section 6 Differential protection

6.1 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF

6.1.1 Identification
IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
Function description
identification identification device number

1Ph High impedance differential Id

HZPDIF 87
protection

SYMBOL-CC V2 EN

6.1.2 Functionality
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF functions can be used when
the involved CT cores have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing
characteristics. It utilizes an external CT secondary current summation by wiring.
Actually all CT secondary circuits which are involved in the differential scheme are
connected in parallel. External series resistor, and a voltage dependent resistor which
are both mounted externally to the IED, are also required.

The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IED accessories in the Product Guide.

HZPDIF can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars, reactors, motors, auto-

transformers, capacitor banks and so on. One such function block is used for a high-
impedance restricted earth fault protection. Three such function blocks are used to
form three-phase, phase-segregated differential protection. Several function block
instances (for example, six) can be available in a single IED.

6.1.3 Function block

HZPDIF
ISI* TRIP
BLOCK ALARM
BLKTR MEASVOLT

IEC05000363-2-en.vsd
IEC05000363 V2 EN

Figure 29: HZPDIF function block

109
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

6.1.4 Signals
Table 35: HZPDIF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ISI GROUP - Single phase current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip

Table 36: HZPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
MEASVOLT REAL Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side

6.1.5 Settings
Table 37: HZPDIF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
U>Alarm 5 - 500 V 1 10 Alarm voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to activate alarm
U>Trip 10 - 900 V 1 100 Operate voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
SeriesResistor 50 - 20000 Ohm 1 250 Value of series resistor in Ohms

6.1.6 Monitored data

Table 38: HZPDIF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MEASVOLT REAL - kV Measured RMS voltage
on CT secondary side

6.1.7 Operation principle

High impedance protection system is a simple technique which requires that all CTs,
used in the protection scheme, have relatively high knee point voltage, similar
magnetizing characteristic and the same ratio. These CTs are installed in all ends of
the protected object. In order to make a scheme all CT secondary circuits belonging to
one phase are connected in parallel. From the CT junction points a measuring branch

110
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

is connected. The measuring branch is a series connection of one variable setting

resistor (or series resistor) RS with high ohmic value and an over-current element.
Thus, the high impedance differential protection responds to the current flowing
through the measuring branch. However, this current is result of a differential voltage
caused by this parallel CT connection across the measuring branch. Non-linear
resistor (that is, metrosil) is used in order to protect entire scheme from high peak
voltages which may appear during internal faults. Typical high impedance differential
scheme is shown in Figure 30. Note that only one phase is shown in this figure.

RS

3 U
I
1
I> (50) 5

2
GUID-5CEAF088-D92B-45E5-B98F-3083894A694C V1 EN

Figure 30: HZPDIF scheme

Where in the Figure:

1. shows one main CT secondary winding connected in parallel with all other CTs,
from the same phase, connected to this scheme.
2. shows the scheme earthing point.

It is of utmost importance to insure that only one earthing point

exists in such protection scheme.

3. shows the setting (stabilizing) resistor RS.

4. shows the over-current measuring element.

The series connection of stabilizing resistor and over-current

element is designated as measuring branch.

5. shows the non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil).

6. U is the voltage across the CT paralleling point (for example, across the
measuring branch).
7. I is the current flowing through the measuring branch.

111
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

U and I are interrelated in accordance with the following formula

U=RS I.

Due to the parallel CT connections the high impedance differential relay can only
measure one current and that is the relay operating quantity. That means that there is
no any stabilizing quantity (that is, bias) in high-impedance differential protection
schemes. Therefore in order to guaranty the stability of the differential relay during
external faults the operating quantity must not exceed the set pickup value. Thus, for
external faults, even with severe saturation of some of the current transformers, the
voltage across the measuring branch shall not rise above the relay set pickup value. To
achieve that a suitable value for setting resistor RS is selected in such a way that the
saturated CT secondary winding provides a much lower impedance path for the false
differential current than the measuring branch. In case of an external fault causing
current transformer saturation, the non-saturated current transformers drive most of
the spill differential current through the secondary winding of the saturated current
transformer and not through the measuring brunch of the relay. The voltage drop
across the saturated current transformer secondary winding appears also across the
measuring brunch, however it will typically be relatively small. Therefore, the pick-
up value of the relay has to be set above this false operating voltage.

See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.

6.1.7.1 Logic diagram

The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance
differential protection function HZPDIF, see Figure 31.

The function utilizes the raw samples from the single phase current input connected to
it. Thus the twenty samples per fundamental power system cycle are available to the
HZPDIF function. These current samples are first multiplied with the set value for the
used stabilizing resistor in order to get voltage waveform across the measuring branch.
The voltage waveform is then filtered in order to get its RMS value. Note that used
filtering is designed in such a way that it ensures complete removal of the DC current
component which may be present in the primary fault current. The voltage RMS value
is then compared with set Alarm and Trip thresholds. Note that the TRIP signal is
intentionally delayed on drop off for 30 ms within the function. The measured RMS
voltage is available as a service value from the function. The function has block and
trip block inputs available as well.

112
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

IEC05000301 V1 EN

Figure 31: Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection
HZPDIF

6.1.8 Technical data

Table 39: HZPDIF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (10-900) V 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
I=U/R 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio >95% at (30-900) V -

Maximum U>Trip2/SeriesResistor 200 W -
continuous power
Operate time at 0 Min = 5 ms
to 10 x Ud Max = 15 ms

Reset time at 10 Min = 75 ms

to 0 x Ud Max = 95 ms

Critical impulse 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud -

time
Operate time at 0 Min = 25 ms
to 2 x Ud Max = 35 ms

Reset time at 2 to Min = 50 ms

0 x Ud Max = 70 ms

Critical impulse 15 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Ud -

time

113
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

6.2 Low impedance restricted earth fault protection

REFPDIF

6.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Restricted earth-fault protection, low REFPDIF 87N
impedance
IdN/I

SYMBOL-AA V1 EN

6.2.2 Functionality
Restricted earth-fault protection, low-impedance function REFPDIF can be used on
all directly or low-impedance earthed windings. The REFPDIF function provides
high sensitivity and high speed tripping as it protects each winding separately and thus
does not need inrush stabilization.

The REFPDIF function is a percentage biased function with an additional zero

sequence current directional comparison criterion. This gives excellent sensitivity and
stability during through faults.

REFPDIF can also protect autotransformers. Five currents are measured at the most
complicated configuration as shown in Figure 32.

CT CT
YNdx
CT CB CB
Y d
CB CB

Autotransformer
CT
IED

The most typical CT CB CB CT

application
The most complicated
application - autotransformer

IEC05000058-2-en.vsd

IEC05000058-2 V1 EN

Figure 32: Examples of applications of the REFPDIF

114
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

6.2.3 Function block

REFPDIF
I3P* TRIP
I3PW1CT1* START
I3PW1CT2* DIROK
I3PW2CT1* BLK2H
I3PW2CT2* IRES
BLOCK IN
IBIAS
IDIFF
ANGLE
I2RATIO

IEC06000251_2_en.vsd
IEC06000251 V2 EN

Figure 33: REFPDIF function block

6.2.4 Signals
Table 40: REFPDIF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for neutral current input
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT1 GROUP - Group signal for primary CT1 current input
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT2 GROUP - Group signal for primary CT2 current input
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT1 GROUP - Group signal for secondary CT1 current input
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT2 GROUP - Group signal for secondary CT2 current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 41: REFPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip by restricted earth fault protection function
START BOOLEAN Start by restricted earth fault protection function
DIROK BOOLEAN Directional Criteria has operated for internal fault
BLK2H BOOLEAN Block due to 2-nd harmonic
IRES REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. residual current
IN REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. neutral current
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current
IDIFF REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current
ANGLE REAL Direction angle from zerosequence feature
I2RATIO REAL Second harmonic ratio

115
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

6.2.5 Settings
Table 42: REFPDIF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IdMin 4.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 10.0 Maximum sensitivity in % of IBase
CTFactorPri1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 CT factor for HV side CT1 (CT1rated/
HVrated current)
CTFactorPri2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 CT factor for HV side CT2 (CT2rated/
HVrated current)
CTFactorSec1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 CT factor for MV side CT1 (CT1rated/
MVrated current)
CTFactorSec2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 CT factor for MV side CT2 (CT2rated/
MVrated current)

Table 43: REFPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ROA 60 - 90 Deg 1 60 Relay operate angle for zero sequence
directional feature

Table 44: REFPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.2.6 Monitored data

Table 45: REFPDIF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IRES REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
residual current
IN REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
neutral current
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias
current
IDIFF REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
differential current
ANGLE REAL - deg Direction angle from
zerosequence feature
I2RATIO REAL - - Second harmonic ratio

116
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

6.2.7 Operation principle

6.2.7.1 Fundamental principles of the restricted earth-fault protection

Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance function (REFPDIF) detects earth

faults on earthed power transformer windings, most often an earthed star winding.
REFPDIF is a unit protection of the differential type. Since REFPDIF is based on the
zero sequence current, which theoretically only exists in case of an earth fault,
REFPDIF can be made very sensitive regardless of normal load currents. It is the
fastest protection a power transformer winding can have. The high sensitivity and the
high speed tend to make such a protection unstable. Special measures must be taken
to make it insensitive to conditions for which it should not operate, for example, heavy
through faults of phase-to-phase type or heavy external earth faults.

REFPDIF is a differential protection of the low impedance type. All three-phase

currents, and the neutral point current, must be fed separately to REFPDIF. The
fundamental frequency components of all currents are extracted from all input
currents, while other eventual zero sequence components, such as the 3rd harmonic
currents, are fully suppressed. Then the residual current phasor is calculated from the
three line current phasors. This zero sequence current phasor is added to the neutral
current vectorially, in order to obtain differential current.

The following facts may be observed from Figure 34 and Figure 35, where the three
line CTs are shown as connected together in order to measure the residual 3Io current,
for the sake of simplicity.

These three zone of protection

zero-sequence
currents are not measured
Izs1
L1 L1

Power Izs1
L2 L2
system
Izs1 L3
L3
3Izs1

Uzs Current in the neutral

IL1+ IL2+IL3 = 3I0 (measured as IN ) serves
3I0 = 3Izs1 IN = -3Izs1 as a directional reference
Ifault (Summation in the IED) because it has the same
direction for both internal
Return path through
transformer and external faults.
Return path via
power system
External
fault
block operate Zero-sequence differential
region
IN current for external fault
3I0
Idiff = abs(3I0 + IN )
block Idiff = 3Izs1 - 3Izs1 = 0
ROA
External Internal
fault block fault
ROA = Relay Operate Angle
region region
IEC09000107-3-en.vsd
IEC09000107-3 V1 EN

Figure 34: Zero sequence currents at an external earth fault

117
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

zone of protection

Izs2 Izs1
L1 L1
Power Izs2 Izs1
L2 L2
system
Izs2 Izs1 L3
L3
3Izs1

Uzs Current in the neutral

IL1+ IL2+IL3 = 3I0 (measured as IN ) serves
IN = -3Izs1 as a directional reference
3I0 = -3Izs2 Ifault
(Summation in the IED) because it has the same
direction for both internal
and external faults.
Return path via Return path
power system through transformer
External
Zero-sequence differential
fault
block operate
region current for internal fault
3I0 Idiff = abs(3I0 + IN )
Idiff = 3Izs2 + 3Izs1 > 0
block IN (reference) Idiff = Ifault
ROA
External Internal
fault
block fault ROA = Relay Operate Angle
region region
IEC09000108-3-en.vsd
IEC09000108-3 V1 EN

Figure 35: Zero sequence currents at an internal earth fault

1. For an external earth fault (Figure 34), the residual current 3Io and the neutral
current IN have equal magnitude, but they are seen within the IED as 180 degrees
out-of-phase if the current transformers are connected as in Figure 34, which is
the ABB recommended connection. The differential current becomes zero as
both CTs ideally measure exactly the same component of the earth- fault current.
2. For an internal fault, the total earth- fault current is composed generally of two
zero sequence currents. One zero sequence current (3IZS1) flows towards the
power transformer neutral point and into the earth, while the other zero sequence
current (3IZS2) flows into the connected power system. These two primary
currents can be expected to have approximately opposite directions (about the
same zero sequence impedance angle is assumed on both sides of the earth fault).
However, on the secondary CT sides of the current transformers, they will be
approximately in phase if the current transformers are oriented as in Figure 32,
which is the orientation recommended by ABB. The magnitudes of the two
currents may be different, dependent on the magnitudes of zero sequence
impedances of both sides. No current can flow towards the power system, if the
only point where the system is earthed, is at the protected power transformer.
Likewise, no current can flow into the power system, if the winding is not
connected to the power system (circuit breaker open and power transformer
energized from the other side).
3. For both internal and external earth faults, the current in the neutral connection IN
always has the same direction, which is towards the earth (except in case of
autotransformers where the direction can vary).
4. The two internally processed zero sequence currents are 3Io and IN. The vectorial
sum is the REFPDIF differential current, which is equal to Idiff = IN +3Io .

118
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

The line zero sequence (residual) current is calculated from 3 line (terminal) currents.
A bias quantity must give stability against false operations due to high through fault
currents. To stabilize REFPDIF at external faults, a fixed bias characteristic is
implemented.

REFPDIF should also be stable against heavy phase-to-phase internal faults, not
including earth. These faults may also give false zero sequence currents due to
saturated line CTs. Such faults, however are without neutral current, and can thus be
eliminated as a source of danger.

As an additional measure against unwanted operation, a directional check is made in

agreement with the above points 1 and 2. Operation is only allowed if the currents 3Io
and IN (as shown in Figure 34 and Figure 35) are both within the operating region. By
taking a smaller ROA, REFPDIF can be made more stable under heavy external fault
conditions, as well as under the complex conditions, when external faults are cleared
by other protections.

6.2.7.2 Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance differential protection

Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance (REFPDIF) is a protection of

differential type, a unit protection, whose settings are independent of any other
protection. It has some advantages compared to the transformer differential
protection. It is less complicated, as no current phase correction or magnitude
correction are needed, not even in the case of an eventual on-load tap changer (OLTC).
REFPDIF is not sensitive to inrush and overexcitation currents. The only danger is an
eventual current transformer saturation.

REFPDIF has only one operate-bias characteristic, which is described in the table 46
and shown in Figure 36.
Table 46: Data of the operate-bias characteristic of REFPDIF
Default sensitivity Idmin Max. base Min. base sensitivity End of zone First slope Second
(zone 1) sensitivity Idmin Idmin (zone 1) 1 slope
(zone 1)
% IBase % IBase % IBase % IBase % %
30 5 100 125 70 100

The differential protection REFPDIF calculates a differential current and a bias

current. In case of internal earth faults, the differential current is theoretically equal to
the total earth-fault current. The bias current is supposed to give stability to REFPDIF.
The bias current is a measure of how high the currents are and how difficult the
conditions are under which the CTs operate. With a high bias, difficult conditions can
be suspected, and it will be more likely that the calculated differential current has a
component of a false current, primarily due to CT saturation. This law is formulated
by the operate-bias characteristic. This characteristic divides the Idiff - Ibias plane in
two areas. The area above the operate-bias characteristic is the operate area, while the
one below is the block area, see Figure 36.

119
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Zero-
sequence
diff. current 5
in per unit Characteristic if
IdMin = 1.0 pu
D I operate
slope = ----------------* 100 % 4
D I restrain Operate
conditionally
3
IdMin range: 0.04 1.00 IBase
Slope 100%
Reset Ratio in all sections: 2
0.95 (a constant) Section 1 Sec. 2 Section 3

1
The characteristic
IdMin Restrain
can be moved Slope 70%
up and down 0
(vertically) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
by changing End Section 1 bias current
the setting IdMin in per unit
End Section 2
IEC98000017-5-en.vsd
IEC98000017-5 V1 EN

Figure 36: Operate - bias characteristic of the Restricted earth-fault protection,

low impedance REFPDIF

6.2.7.3 Calculation of differential current and bias current

The differential current (operate current), as a fundamental frequency phasor, is

calculated as (with designations as in Figure 34 and Figure 35):

Idiff = IN + 3 Io
EQUATION1533 V1 EN (Equation 1)

where:

IN is current in the power transformer neutral as a fundamental frequency phasor.

3Io is residual current of the power transformer terminal currents as a phasor.

If there are two three-phase CT inputs, as in breaker-and-a-half configurations, see

figure 10, then their respective residual currents are added within the REFPDIF
function so that:

I3PW1 = I3PW1CT1 + I3PW1CT2

where the signals are defined in the input and output signal tables for REFPDIF.

The bias current is a measure (expressed internally as a true fundamental frequency

current in Amperes) of how difficult the conditions are under which the instrument
current transformers operate. Dependent on the magnitude of the bias current, the

120
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

corresponding zone (section) of the operate-bias characteristic is applied, when

deciding whether to trip, or not to trip. In general, the higher the bias current, the higher
the differential current required to produce a trip.

The bias current is the highest current of all separate input currents to REFPDIF, that
is, of current in phase L1, phase L2, phase L3, and the current in the neutral point
(designated as IN in Figure 34 and in Figure 35).

If there are two feeders included in the zone of protection of REFPDIF, as in case of
an auto-transformer with two feeders included on both sides, then the respective bias
current is found as the relatively highest of the following currents:

1
current[1] = max (I3PW1CT1)
CTFactorPri1
EQUATION1526 V1 EN (Equation 2)

1
current[2] = max (I3PW1CT2)
CTFactorPri2
EQUATION1527 V1 EN (Equation 3)

1
current[3] = max (I3PW2CT1)
CTFactorSec1
EQUATION1528 V1 EN (Equation 4)

1
current[4] = max (I3PW2CT2)
CTFactorSec2
EQUATION1529 V1 EN (Equation 5)

current[5] = IN
EQUATION1530 V1 EN (Equation 6)

The bias current is thus generally equal to none of the input currents. If all primary
ratings of the CTs were equal to IBase, then the bias current would be equal to the
highest current in Amperes. IBase shall be set equal to the rated current of the
protected winding where REFPDIF function is applied.

6.2.7.4 Detection of external earth faults

External faults are more common than internal earth faults for which the restricted
earth-fault protection should operate. It is important that the restricted earth-fault
protection remains stable during heavy external earth and phase-to-phase faults, and
also when such a heavy external fault is cleared by some other protection such as
overcurrent, or earth-fault protection. The conditions during a heavy external fault,
and particularly immediately after the clearing of such a fault may be complex. The
circuit breakers poles may not open exactly at the same moment, some of the CTs
may still be highly saturated, and so on.

121
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

The detection of external earth faults is based on the fact that for such a fault a high
neutral current appears first, while a false differential current only appears if one or
more current transformers saturate.

An external earth fault is thus assumed to have occurred when a high neutral current
suddenly appears, while at the same time the differential current Idiff remains low, at
least for a while. This condition must be detected before a trip request is placed within
REFPDIF. Any search for external fault is aborted if a trip request has been placed. A
condition for a successful detection is that it takes not less than 4ms for the first CT to
saturate.

For an internal earth fault, a true differential current develops immediately, while for
an external fault it only develops if a CT saturates. If a trip request comes first, before
an external fault could be positively detected, then it must be an internal fault.

If an external earth fault has been detected, then the REFPDIF is temporarily
desensitized.

Directional criterion
The directional criterion is applied in order to positively distinguish between internal
and external earth faults. This check is an additional criterion, which should prevent
malfunctions at heavy external earth faults, and during the disconnection of such
faults by other protections. Earth faults on lines connecting the power transformer
occur much more often than earth faults on a power transformer winding. It is
important therefore that the Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance
(REFPDIF) must remain stable during an external fault, and immediately after the
fault has been cleared by some other protection.

For an external earth faults with no CT saturation, the residual current in the lines
(3Io) and the neutral current (IN in Figure 34) are theoretically equal in magnitude and
are 180 degrees out-of-phase. The current in the neutral (IN) serves as a directional
reference because it has the same direction for both internal and external earth faults.
The directional criterion in REFPDIF protection makes it a current-polarized
protection.

However, if one or more CTs saturate under external fault conditions, then the
measured currents 3Io and IN may no longer be equal, nor will their positions in the
complex plane be exactly 180 degrees apart. There is a risk that the resulting false
differential current Idiff enters the operate area of the operate-restrain characteristic
under external fault conditions. If this happens, a directional test may prevent a
malfunction.

A directional check is only executed if:

1. a trip request signal has been issued (REFPDIF function START signal set to 1)
2. the residual current in lines (3Io) is at least 3% of the IBase current.

If a directional check is either unreliable or not possible to do, due to too small
currents, then the direction is cancelled as a condition for an eventual trip.

122
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

If a directional check is executed, the REFPDIF protection operation is only allowed

if currents 3Io and IN (as seen in Figure 34 and Figure 35) are both within the operating
region determined by the set value of ROA, in degrees.

ROA = 60 to 90 degrees; where ROA stands for Relay Operate Angle.

Second harmonic analysis

When energizing a transformer a false differential current may appear in earth fault
protection, low impedance function (REFPDIF). The phase CTs may saturate due to
a high DC component with a long duration, but the current through the neutral CT does
not have either the same DC component or the same amplitude and the risk for
saturation of this CT is not as high. As a result the differential current due to the
saturation may be so high that it reaches the operate characteristic. A calculation of the
content of 2nd harmonic in the neutral current is made when the neutral current,
residual current and bias current are within some windows and some timing criteria
are fulfilled. If the ratio between second and fundamental harmonic exceeds 40%,
REFPDIF is blocked.

6.2.7.5 Algorithm of the restricted earth-fault protection

1. Check if current in the neutral Ineutral (IN) is less than 50% of the base sensitivity
Idmin. If yes, only service values are calculated, then REFPDIF algorithm is not
used.
2. If current in the Ineutral (IN) is more than 50% of Idmin, then determine the bias
current Ibias.
3. Determine the differential (operate) current Idiff as a phasor, and calculate its
magnitude.
4. Check if the point P(Ibias, Idiff) is above the operate-bias characteristic. If yes,
increment the trip request counter by 1. If the point P(Ibias, Idiff) is found to be
below the operate-bias characteristic, then the trip request counter is reset to zero.
5. If the trip request counter is still zero, search for an eventual heavy external earth
fault. The search is only made if the neutral current is at least 50% of the Idmin
current. If an external earth fault has been detected, a flag is set which remains set
until the external fault has been cleared. The external fault flag is reset to zero
when Ineutral falls below 50% of the base sensitivity Idmin. Any search for an
external fault is aborted if trip request counter is more than zero.
6. As long as the external fault persists, an additional temporary trip condition is
introduced. This means that REFPDIF is temporarily desensitized.
7. If point P(Ibias, Idiff) is found to be above the operate-bias characteristic), so that
trip request counter is more than zero, a directional check can be made. The
directional check is made only if Iresidual (3Io) is more than 3% of the IBase
current. If the result of the check means external fault, then the internal trip
request is reset. If the directional check cannot be executed, then direction is no
longer a condition for a trip.
8. When neutral current, residual current and bias current are within some windows
and some timing criteria are fulfilled, the ratio of 2nd to fundamental harmonic is

123
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

calculated. If it is found to be above 60% the trip request counter is reset and TRIP
remains zero.
9. Finally, a check is made if the trip request counter is equal to, or higher than 2. If
yes, and at the same instance of time tREFtrip, the actual bias current at this instance
of time tREFtrip is at least 50% of the highest bias current Ibiasmax (Ibiasmax is the
highest recording of any of the three phase currents measured during the
disturbance), then REFPDIF sets output TRIP to 1. If the counter is less than 2,
the TRIP signal remains zero.

6.2.8 Technical data

Table 47: REFPDIF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate characteristic Adaptable 1.0% of Ir for I Ir
1.0% of I for I > Ir

Reset ratio >95% -

Minimum pickup (4.0-100.0)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Directional characteristic Fixed 180 degrees or 60 to 90 2.0 degrees

degrees
Operate time, trip at 0 to 10 x Min = 15 ms -
IdMin Max = 30 ms
Reset time, trip at 10 to 0 x IdMin Min = 15 ms -
Max = 30 ms
Second harmonic blocking 60.0% of fundamental (hidden 1.0% of Ir
setting)

124
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

6.3 Line differential protection

6.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number

Line differential protection, 3 CT sets, 3Id/I>

L3CPDIF 87L
2-3 line ends

SYMBOL-HH V1 EN

Line differential protection, 6 CT sets, 3Id/I>

L6CPDIF 87L
3-5 line ends

SYMBOL-HH V1 EN

Line differential protection 3 CT sets, 3Id/I>

LT3CPDIF 87LT
with in-zone transformers, 2-3 line ends

SYMBOL-HH V1 EN

Line differential protection 6 CT sets, 3Id/I>

LT6CPDIF 87LT
with in-zone transformers, 3-5 line ends

SYMBOL-HH V1 EN

Line differential logic LDLPSCH - 87L

6.3.2 Functionality

6.3.2.1 Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF

Line differential protection applies the Kirchhoff's law and compares the currents
entering and leaving the protected multi-terminal circuit, consisting of overhead
power lines, power transformers and cables. Under the condition that there are no in-
line or tap (shunt) power transformers within the zone of protection, it offers a phase-
segregated fundamental frequency current based differential protection with high
sensitivity and provides phase selection information for single-pole tripping.

The three-terminal version is used for conventional two-terminal lines with or without
a 1 circuit breaker arrangement in one end, as well as three-terminal lines with single
breaker arrangements at all terminals.

125
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Protected zone

IED Communication channel IED

IEC05000039-3-en.vsd
IEC05000039 V3 EN

Figure 37: Example of application on a conventional two-terminal line

The six-terminal versions are used for conventional two-terminal lines with 1 circuit
breaker arrangements in both ends, as well as multi-terminal lines with up to five
terminals.

Protected zone

IED Comm. Channel IED

Comm. Channel Comm. Channel

IED

IEC05000040_2_en.vsd
IEC05000040 V2 EN

Figure 38: Example of application on a three-terminal line with 1 breaker

arrangements

The current differential algorithm provides high sensitivity for internal faults and it
has excellent stability for external faults. Current samples from all CTs are exchanged
between the IEDs in the line ends (master-master mode) or sent to one IED (master-
slave mode) for evaluation.

A restrained dual biased slope evaluation is made where the bias current is the highest
phase current in any line end, giving a secure through-fault stability even with heavily
saturated CTs. In addition to the restrained evaluation, an unrestrained (instantaneous)
high differential current setting can be used for fast tripping of internal faults with very
high currents.

A special feature with this function is that applications with small power transformers
(rated current less than 50% of the differential current setting IdMin) connected as line
taps (that is, as shunt power transformers), without measurements of currents in the
tap, can be handled. The normal load current is considered to be negligible, and special
measures must be taken in the event of a short circuit on the LV side of the transformer.
In this application, the tripping of the differential protection can be time-delayed for
low differential currents to achieve coordination with downstream overcurrent IEDs.
The local protection of the small tap power transformer is given the time needed to
disconnect the faulty transformer.

A line charging current compensation provides increased sensitivity of line

differential protection.

126
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

6.3.2.2 Line differential protection 3 or 6 CT sets, with in-zone transformers

LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF

Two two-winding power transformers or one three-winding power transformer can be

included in the line differential protection zone. Both two- and three-winding
transformers are correctly represented with vector group compensations made in the
algorithm. The function includes 2nd and 5th harmonic restraint and zero-sequence
current elimination. The phase-segregated differential protection with single-pole
tripping is usually not possible in such applications.

Protected zone

IED Comm. Channel IED

Comm. Channel Comm. Channel

IED

IEC05000042_2_en.vsd
IEC05000042 V2 EN

Figure 39: Example of application on a three-terminal line with an in-line power

transformer in the protection zone

6.3.2.3 Analog signal transfer for line differential protection

The line differential protection function can be arranged as a master-master system or

a master-slave system alternatively. In the former, current samples are exchanged
between all IEDs, and an evaluation is made in each IED. This means that a 64 kbit/
s communication channel is needed between every IED included in the same line
differential protection zone. In the latter, current samples are sent from all slave IEDs
to one master IED where the evaluation is made, and trip signals are sent to the remote
ends when needed. In this system, a 64 kbit/s communication channel is only needed
between the master, and each one of the slave IEDs. The Master-Slave condition for
the differential function appears automatically when the setting Operation for the
differential function is set to Off.

It is recommended to use the same firmware version as well as

hardware version for a specific RED670 scheme.

127
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Protected zone

IED IED

Comm.
Channels

IED IED IED

IEC0500043_2_en.vsd
IEC05000043 V2 EN

Figure 40: Five terminal lines with master-master system

Protected zone

RED RED
670 670

Comm.
Channels

RED RED RED

670 670 670

en05000044.vsd
IEC05000044 V1 EN

Figure 41: Five terminal line with master-slave system

Current samples from IEDs located geographically apart from each other, must be
time coordinated so that the current differential algorithm can be executed correctly.
In the IED, it is possible to make this coordination in two different ways. The echo
method of time synchronizing is normally used whereas for applications where
transmit and receive times can differ, the optional built in GPS receivers can be used.

The communication link is continuously monitored, and an automatic switchover to

a standby link is possible after a preset time.

128
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

6.3.3 Function block

L3CPDIF
I3P1* TRIP
I3P2* TRL1
I3P3* TRL2
TRL3
STARTRES
STARTUNR
STARTENH
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
INTFAULT
EXTFAULT
BLK2H
BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
ALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG

IEC06000252-3-en.vsd
IEC06000252 V3 EN

Figure 42: L3CPDIF function block

129
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

L6CPDIF
I3P1* TRIP
I3P2* TRL1
I3P3* TRL2
I3P4* TRL3
I3P5* STARTRES
I3P6* STARTUNR
STARTENH
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
INTFAULT
EXTFAULT
BLK2H
BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
ALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG

IEC06000253-3-en.vsd
IEC06000253 V3 EN

Figure 43: L6CPDIF function block

130
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

LT3CPDIF
I3P1* TRIP
I3P2* TRL1
I3P3* TRL2
TRL3
STARTRES
STARTUNR
STARTENH
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
INTFAULT
EXTFAULT
BLK2H
BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
ALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG

IEC06000254-3-en.vsd
IEC06000254 V3 EN

Figure 44: LT3CPDIF function block

131
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

LT6CPDIF
I3P1* TRIP
I3P2* TRL1
I3P3* TRL2
I3P4* TRL3
I3P5* STARTRES
I3P6* STARTUNR
STARTENH
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
INTFAULT
EXTFAULT
BLK2H
BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
ALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG

IEC06000255-3-en.vsd
IEC06000255 V3 EN

Figure 45: LT6CPDIF function block

LDLPSCH
CTFAIL TRIP
OUTSERV TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
TRL3
TRLOCAL
TRLOCL1
TRLOCL2
TRLOCL3
TRREMOTE
DIFLBLKD

IEC13000302-1-en.vsd
IEC13000302 V1 EN

Figure 46: LDLPSCH function block

6.3.4 Signals
Table 48: L3CPDIF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Three phase current grp2 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P3 GROUP - Three phase current grp3 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL

132
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Table 49: L3CPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common, main, trip output signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
STARTRES BOOLEAN Start of restrained differential protection
STARTUNR BOOLEAN Start of unrestrained differential protection
STARTENH BOOLEAN Start of enhanced restrained differential protection
START BOOLEAN Common, main, start output signal
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
INTFAULT BOOLEAN Internal fault has been detected
EXTFAULT BOOLEAN External fault has been detected
BLK2H BOOLEAN Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic
BLK2HL1 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1
BLK2HL2 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L2
BLK2HL3 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L3
BLK5H BOOLEAN Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic
BLK5HL1 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1
BLK5HL2 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L2
BLK5HL3 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L3
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained differential current
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a
delay ...
IDL1 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L1
IDL2 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L2
IDL3 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L3
IDL1MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase
L1
IDL2MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase
L2
IDL3MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase
L3
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1, L2,
L3
IDNSMAG REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential
current

133
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Table 50: L6CPDIF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Three phase current grp2 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P3 GROUP - Three phase current grp3 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P4 GROUP - Three phase current grp4 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P5 GROUP - Three phase current grp5 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P6 GROUP - Three phase current grp6 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL

Table 51: L6CPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common, main, trip output signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
STARTRES BOOLEAN Start of restrained differential protection
STARTUNR BOOLEAN Start of unrestrained differential protection
STARTENH BOOLEAN Start of enhanced restrained differential protection
START BOOLEAN Common, main, start output signal
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
INTFAULT BOOLEAN Internal fault has been detected
EXTFAULT BOOLEAN External fault has been detected
BLK2H BOOLEAN Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic
BLK2HL1 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1
BLK2HL2 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L2
BLK2HL3 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L3
BLK5H BOOLEAN Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic
BLK5HL1 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1
BLK5HL2 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L2
BLK5HL3 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L3
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained differential current
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a
delay ...
Table continues on next page

134
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Name Type Description

IDL1 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L1
IDL2 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L2
IDL3 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L3
IDL1MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase
L1
IDL2MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase
L2
IDL3MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase
L3
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1, L2,
L3
IDNSMAG REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential
current

Table 52: LT3CPDIF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Three phase current grp2 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P3 GROUP - Three phase current grp3 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL

Table 53: LT3CPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common, main, trip output signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
STARTRES BOOLEAN Start of restrained differential protection
STARTUNR BOOLEAN Start of unrestrained differential protection
STARTENH BOOLEAN Start of enhanced restrained differential protection
START BOOLEAN Common, main, start output signal
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
INTFAULT BOOLEAN Internal fault has been detected
EXTFAULT BOOLEAN External fault has been detected
BLK2H BOOLEAN Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic
BLK2HL1 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1
BLK2HL2 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L2
Table continues on next page

135
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Name Type Description

BLK2HL3 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L3
BLK5H BOOLEAN Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic
BLK5HL1 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1
BLK5HL2 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L2
BLK5HL3 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L3
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained differential current
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a
delay ...
IDL1 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L1
IDL2 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L2
IDL3 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L3
IDL1MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase
L1
IDL2MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase
L2
IDL3MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase
L3
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1, L2,
L3
IDNSMAG REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential
current

Table 54: LT6CPDIF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Three phase current grp2 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P3 GROUP - Three phase current grp3 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P4 GROUP - Three phase current grp4 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P5 GROUP - Three phase current grp5 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P6 GROUP - Three phase current grp6 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL

Table 55: LT6CPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common, main, trip output signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
Table continues on next page

136
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Name Type Description

TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
STARTRES BOOLEAN Start of restrained differential protection
STARTUNR BOOLEAN Start of unrestrained differential protection
STARTENH BOOLEAN Start of enhanced restrained differential protection
START BOOLEAN Common, main, start output signal
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
INTFAULT BOOLEAN Internal fault has been detected
EXTFAULT BOOLEAN External fault has been detected
BLK2H BOOLEAN Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic
BLK2HL1 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1
BLK2HL2 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L2
BLK2HL3 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L3
BLK5H BOOLEAN Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic
BLK5HL1 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1
BLK5HL2 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L2
BLK5HL3 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L3
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained differential current
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a
delay ...
IDL1 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L1
IDL2 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L2
IDL3 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L3
IDL1MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase
L1
IDL2MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase
L2
IDL3MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase
L3
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1, L2,
L3
IDNSMAG REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential
current

Table 56: LDLPSCH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
CTFAIL BOOLEAN 0 CT failure indication from local CT supervision
OUTSERV BOOLEAN 0 Input for indicating that the terminal is out of service
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

137
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Table 57: LDLPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip from differential protection system
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
TRLOCAL BOOLEAN Trip from local differential function
TRLOCL1 BOOLEAN Trip from local differential function in phase L1
TRLOCL2 BOOLEAN Trip from local differential function in phase L2
TRLOCL3 BOOLEAN Trip from local differential function in phase L3
TRREMOTE BOOLEAN Trip from remote differential function
DIFLBLKD BOOLEAN Local line differential function blocked

6.3.5 Settings
Table 58: L3CPDIF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IdMin 0.20 - 2.00 IB 0.01 0.30 Oper - restr charact., section 1 sensitivity,
multiple IBase
IdMinHigh 0.20 - 10.00 IB 0.01 0.80 Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of
IBase
tIdMinHigh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in
sec
IdUnre 1.00 - 50.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained differential current limit,
multiple of IBase
NegSeqDiffEn Off - - On Off/On selection for internal / external fault
On discriminator
NegSeqROA 30.0 - 120.0 Deg 1.0 60.0 Internal/external fault discriminator
Operate Angle, degrees
IMinNegSeq 0.01 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple of
IBase
CrossBlockEn No - - No Off/On selection of the cross -block logic
Yes
ChargCurEnable Off - - Off Off/On selection for compensation of
On charging currents
AddDelay Off - - Off Off/On selection for delayed diff. trip
On command
IMaxAddDelay 0.20 - 5.00 IB 0.01 1.00 Below limit, extra delay can be applied,
multiple of IBase
tDefTime 0.000 - 6.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time additional delay in seconds
tMinInv 0.001 - 6.000 s 0.001 0.010 Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds
Table continues on next page

138
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurveType ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time 19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite
ANSI Very inv. time delay.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
k 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 1.00 Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse
delays
IdiffAlarm 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.15 Sustained differential current alarm, factor
of IBase
tAlarmdelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Delay for alarm due to sustained
differential current, in s

Table 59: L3CPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, as multiple of reference
current IBase
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, as multiple of reference
current IBase
SlopeSection2 10.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3 30.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain
characteristic, in %
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 1.0 10.0 Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 1.0 25.0 Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
p 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 0.02 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
a 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 0.14 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
b 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
c 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
OpenCTEnable Off - - On Open CTEnable Off/On
On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open
CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function
is activated

139
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Table 60: L3CPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
NoOfUsedCTs 2 - - 2 Total number of 3-Ph CT sets connected
3 to diff protection

Table 61: L6CPDIF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IdMin 0.20 - 2.00 IB 0.01 0.30 Oper - restr charact., section 1 sensitivity,
multiple IBase
IdMinHigh 0.20 - 10.00 IB 0.01 0.80 Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of
IBase
tIdMinHigh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in
sec
IdUnre 1.00 - 50.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained differential current limit,
multiple of IBase
NegSeqDiffEn Off - - On Off/On selection for internal / external fault
On discriminator
NegSeqROA 30.0 - 120.0 Deg 1.0 60.0 Internal/external fault discriminator
Operate Angle, degrees
IMinNegSeq 0.01 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple of
IBase
CrossBlockEn No - - No Off/On selection of the cross -block logic
Yes
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 1.0 10.0 Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 1.0 25.0 Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
ChargCurEnable Off - - Off Off/On selection for compensation of
On charging currents
AddDelay Off - - Off Off/On selection for delayed diff. trip
On command
IMaxAddDelay 0.20 - 5.00 IB 0.01 1.00 Below limit, extra delay can be applied,
multiple of IBase
tDefTime 0.000 - 6.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time additional delay in seconds
tMinInv 0.001 - 6.000 s 0.001 0.010 Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds
Table continues on next page

140
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurveType ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time 19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite
ANSI Very inv. time delay.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
k 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 1.00 Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse
delays
IdiffAlarm 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.15 Sustained differential current alarm, factor
of IBase
tAlarmdelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Delay for alarm due to sustained
differential current, in s

Table 62: L6CPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, as multiple of reference
current IBase
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, as multiple of reference
current IBase
SlopeSection2 10.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3 30.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain
characteristic, in %
p 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 0.02 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
a 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 0.14 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
b 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
c 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
OpenCTEnable Off - - On Open CTEnable Off/On
On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open
CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function
is activated

141
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Table 63: L6CPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
NoOfUsedCTs 2 - - 2 Total number of 3-Ph CT sets connected
3 to diff protection
4
5
6

Table 64: LT3CPDIF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IdMin 0.20 - 2.00 IB 0.01 0.30 Oper - restr charact., section 1 sensitivity,
multiple IBase
IdMinHigh 0.20 - 10.00 IB 0.01 0.80 Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of
IBase
tIdMinHigh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in
sec
IdUnre 1.00 - 50.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained differential current limit,
multiple of IBase
NegSeqDiffEn Off - - On Off/On selection for internal / external fault
On discriminator
NegSeqROA 30.0 - 120.0 Deg 1.0 60.0 Internal/external fault discriminator
Operate Angle, degrees
IMinNegSeq 0.01 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple of
IBase
CrossBlockEn No - - No Off/On selection of the cross -block logic
Yes
ChargCurEnable Off - - Off Off/On selection for compensation of
On charging currents
AddDelay Off - - Off Off/On selection for delayed diff. trip
On command
IMaxAddDelay 0.20 - 5.00 IB 0.01 1.00 Below limit, extra delay can be applied,
multiple of IBase
tDefTime 0.000 - 6.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time additional delay in seconds
tMinInv 0.001 - 6.000 s 0.001 0.010 Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds
Table continues on next page

142
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurveType ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time 19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite
ANSI Very inv. time delay.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
k 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 1.00 Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse
delays
IdiffAlarm 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.15 Sustained differential current alarm, factor
of IBase
tAlarmdelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Delay for alarm due to sustained
differential current, in s

Table 65: LT3CPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, as multiple of reference
current IBase
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, as multiple of reference
current IBase
SlopeSection2 10.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3 30.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain
characteristic, in %
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 1.0 10.0 Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 1.0 25.0 Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
p 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 0.02 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
a 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 0.14 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
b 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
c 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
OpenCTEnable Off - - On Open CTEnable Off/On
On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open
CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function
is activated

143
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Table 66: LT3CPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
NoOfUsedCTs 2 - - 2 Total number of 3-Ph CT sets connected
3 to diff protection
ZerSeqCurSubtr Off - - Off Off/On for elimination of zero seq. from
On diff. and bias curr
TraAOnInpCh No Transf A - - No Transf A Power transformer A applied on input
1 channel X
2
3
RatVoltW1TraA 1.0 - 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on
winding 1 (HV winding)
RatVoltW2TraA 1.0 - 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on
winding 2 (LV winding)
ClockNumTransA 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Transf. A phase shift in multiples of 30
1 [30 deg lag] deg, 5 for 150 deg
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg lag]
7 [210 deg lag]
8 [240 deg lag]
9 [270 deg lag]
10 [300 deg lag]
11 [330 deg lag]
TraBOnInpCh No Transf B - - No Transf B Power transformer B applied on input
1 channel X
2
3
RatVoltW1TraB 1.0 - 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on
winding 1 (HV winding)
RatVoltW2TraB 1.0 - 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on
winding 2 (LV winding)
ClockNumTransB 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Transf. B phase shift in multiples of 30
1 [30 deg lag] deg, 2 for 60 deg
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg lag]
7 [210 deg lag]
8 [240 deg lag]
9 [270 deg lag]
10 [300 deg lag]
11 [330 deg lag]

144
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Table 67: LT6CPDIF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IdMin 0.20 - 2.00 IB 0.01 0.30 Oper - restr charact., section 1 sensitivity,
multiple IBase
IdMinHigh 0.20 - 10.00 IB 0.01 0.80 Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of
IBase
tIdMinHigh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in
sec
IdUnre 1.00 - 50.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained differential current limit,
multiple of IBase
NegSeqDiffEn Off - - On Off/On selection for internal / external fault
On discriminator
NegSeqROA 30.0 - 120.0 Deg 1.0 60.0 Internal/external fault discriminator
Operate Angle, degrees
IMinNegSeq 0.01 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple of
IBase
CrossBlockEn No - - No Off/On selection of the cross -block logic
Yes
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 1.0 10.0 Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 1.0 25.0 Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
ChargCurEnable Off - - Off Off/On selection for compensation of
On charging currents
AddDelay Off - - Off Off/On selection for delayed diff. trip
On command
IMaxAddDelay 0.20 - 5.00 IB 0.01 1.00 Below limit, extra delay can be applied,
multiple of IBase
tDefTime 0.000 - 6.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time additional delay in seconds
tMinInv 0.001 - 6.000 s 0.001 0.010 Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds
CurveType ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time 19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite
ANSI Very inv. time delay.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Table continues on next page

145
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

k 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 1.00 Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse
delays
IdiffAlarm 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.15 Sustained differential current alarm, factor
of IBase
tAlarmdelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Delay for alarm due to sustained
differential current, in s

Table 68: LT6CPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, as multiple of reference
current IBase
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, as multiple of reference
current IBase
SlopeSection2 10.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3 30.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain
characteristic, in %
p 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 0.02 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
a 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 0.14 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
b 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
c 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
OpenCTEnable Off - - On Open CTEnable Off/On
On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open
CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function
is activated

Table 69: LT6CPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
NoOfUsedCTs 2 - - 2 Total number of 3-Ph CT sets connected
3 to diff protection
4
5
6
ZerSeqCurSubtr Off - - Off Off/On for elimination of zero seq. from
On diff. and bias curr
Table continues on next page

146
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TraAOnInpCh No Transf A - - No Transf A Power transformer A applied on input
1 channel X
2
3
4
5
6
RatVoltW1TraA 1.0 - 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on
winding 1 (HV winding)
RatVoltW2TraA 1.0 - 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on
winding 2 (LV winding)
ClockNumTransA 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Transf. A phase shift in multiples of 30
1 [30 deg lag] deg, 5 for 150 deg
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg lag]
7 [210 deg lag]
8 [240 deg lag]
9 [270 deg lag]
10 [300 deg lag]
11 [330 deg lag]
TraBOnInpCh No Transf B - - No Transf B Power transformer B applied on input
1 channel X
2
3
4
5
6
RatVoltW1TraB 1.0 - 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on
winding 1 (HV winding)
RatVoltW2TraB 1.0 - 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on
winding 2 (LV winding)
ClockNumTransB 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Transf. B phase shift in multiples of 30
1 [30 deg lag] deg, 2 for 60 deg
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg lag]
7 [210 deg lag]
8 [240 deg lag]
9 [270 deg lag]
10 [300 deg lag]
11 [330 deg lag]

Table 70: LDLPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
TestModeSet Off - - Off Test mode On/Off
On
ReleaseLocal Block all - - Block all Release of local terminal for trip under test
Release local mode

147
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

6.3.6 Monitored data

Table 71: L3CPDIF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPENCTIN INTEGER - - Open CT on Input : 1 for
input 1, 2 for input 2
OPENCTPH INTEGER - - Open CT in Phase : 1 for
L1, 2 for L2, 3 for L3
IDL1MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
differential current, phase
L1
IDL2MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
differential current, phase
L2
IDL3MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
differential current, phase
L3
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias
current, common for L1,
L2, L3
IDNSMAG REAL - A Magnitude of the
negative sequence
differential current
NSANGLE REAL - deg Angle between local and
remote neg. seq. currents
ICHARGE REAL - A Amount of compensated
charging current

Table 72: L6CPDIF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPENCTIN INTEGER - - Open CT on Input : 1 for
input 1, 2 for input 2
OPENCTPH INTEGER - - Open CT in Phase : 1 for
L1, 2 for L2, 3 for L3
IDL1MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
differential current, phase
L1
IDL2MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
differential current, phase
L2
IDL3MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
differential current, phase
L3
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias
current, common for L1,
L2, L3
Table continues on next page

148
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

IDNSMAG REAL - A Magnitude of the
negative sequence
differential current
NSANGLE REAL - deg Angle between local and
remote neg. seq. currents
ICHARGE REAL - A Amount of compensated
charging current

Table 73: LT3CPDIF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPENCTIN INTEGER - - Open CT on Input : 1 for
input 1, 2 for input 2
OPENCTPH INTEGER - - Open CT in Phase : 1 for
L1, 2 for L2, 3 for L3
IDL1MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
differential current, phase
L1
IDL2MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
differential current, phase
L2
IDL3MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
differential current, phase
L3
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias
current, common for L1,
L2, L3
IDNSMAG REAL - A Magnitude of the
negative sequence
differential current
NSANGLE REAL - deg Angle between local and
remote neg. seq. currents
ICHARGE REAL - A Amount of compensated
charging current

Table 74: LT6CPDIF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPENCTIN INTEGER - - Open CT on Input : 1 for
input 1, 2 for input 2
OPENCTPH INTEGER - - Open CT in Phase : 1 for
L1, 2 for L2, 3 for L3
IDL1MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
differential current, phase
L1
IDL2MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
differential current, phase
L2
Table continues on next page

149
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

IDL3MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
differential current, phase
L3
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias
current, common for L1,
L2, L3
IDNSMAG REAL - A Magnitude of the
negative sequence
differential current
NSANGLE REAL - deg Angle between local and
remote neg. seq. currents
ICHARGE REAL - A Amount of compensated
charging current

6.3.7 Operation principle

6.3.7.1 Algorithm and logic

The Line differential protection function evaluates measured current values from
local and remote line ends in order to distinguish between internal or external faults or
undisturbed conditions.

The local currents are fed to the IED via the analog input modules and then they pass
the analog-to-digital converter, as shown in Figure 47.

150
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Local end Remote end

Remote end IED

LDCM

Local end IED

Current
samples from
local end
Analog Input A/D
Module Converter Current
Pre-processing
samples from
Block
remote end
LDCM

Line Diffferential Function

CH1IL1RE [magnitude] Trip by unrestrained differential protection

Trip commands
CH1IL1IM Calculation of Differential 1 TRIP
CH1IL2RE fundamental and bias currents
Start L1
CH1IL2IM frequency Magnitudes of applied to
differential differential operate / bias -, Start L2
currents Output logic: TRL1
currents (3x) and unrestrained Start L3 TRL2
Currents from
all ends as & bias current characteristics TRL3
Bias current St L1 low sens - 2nd harmonic block
phasors STARTRES
- 5th harmonic block
St L2 low sens STARTUNR
CH1IL1SM St L3 low sens STARTENH
- Cross block logic
CH1IL2SM Calculation
CH1IL3SM of [samples] 2nd h. block
- Enhanced trip for START
CH2IL1SM instantaneous internal faults STL1
differential Harmonic STL2
Instantaneous analysis - Decreased STL3
currents
Curr. samples differential 5th h. block sensitivity for

Information
from all ends (3x) ( 2nd and 5th)
currents external faults BLK2H
(samples) BLK2HL1
- BLK2HL2
CH1INSRE Conditional trip for BLK2HL3
CH1INSIM Calculation simultaneous external
of and internal faults BLK5H
CH1INSRE High sensitive Internal fault
negative-- BLK5HL1
CH1INSIM Two to six internal/external fault BLK5HL2
sequence contributions discriminator BLK5HL3
External fault -
differential to neg. seq. Conditional extra time
Neg. seq. current differential delay for trip signals
currents from current as INTFAULT
(1x)
all ends phasors EXTFAULT
as phasors

IEC05000294-4-en.vsd
IEC05000294 V3 EN

Figure 47: A simplified block diagram of the power line differential protection

The IED receives the remote currents as samples via a communication link. When
entering the IED, they are processed in the Line Differential Communication Module
(LDCM) where they are time-coordinated with the local current samples, and
interpolated in order to be comparable with the local samples.

151
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

In the preprocessing block, the real and imaginary parts of the fundamental frequency
phase currents and negative sequence currents are derived by means of fundamental
frequency numerical Fourier filters. Together with the current samples, which are
required to internally estimate the 2nd and the 5th harmonic contents in the
instantaneous differential currents, they are then forwarded to the differential function
block where three kinds of analyses are carried out.

The first analysis is the classical differential and bias current evaluation with the
characteristic as seen in Figure 48. Line differential protection is phase-segregated
where the differential current is the vectorial sum of all measured currents taken
separately for each phase. The bias current, on the other hand, is considered the
greatest phase current in any line end and it is common for all the tree phases. The two
slopes (SlopeSection1, SlopeSection2) and breakpoints (EndSection1, EndSection2)
can be set in PCM600 or via the local human-machine interface (LHMI).

Current values found to be above the characteristic formed by IdMin and the dual
slope will give a start in that phase. The level IdMinHigh is a setting value that is used
to temporarily decrease the sensitivity in situations when the protected line circuit is
just energized, that is, connected to the power system at one end.

There is also an unrestrained high differential current setting that can be used for fast
tripping of internal faults with very high currents. This unrestrained protection is
phase-segregated, that is, it is known which phase(s) require a trip command.

152
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Operate current
[ in pu of IBase]
Operate
5
unconditionally

UnrestrainedLimit
4

Operate IdMinHigh
3 C
conditionally
A B

2
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3

SlopeSection3
1
IdMin
SlopeSection2 Restrain
0
0 1 2 3 4 5

EndSection1 Restrain current

EndSection2 [ in pu of IBase]

en05000300.vsd
IEC05000300 V1 EN

Figure 48: Description of the restrained and the unrestrained operate

characteristics

where:

slope = D Ioperate 100%

D Irestrain
EQUATION1246 V1 EN

and where the restrained characteristic is defined

by the settings:

1. IdMin
2. EndSection1
3. EndSection2
4. SlopeSection2
5. SlopeSection3

The second analysis is the 2nd and 5th harmonic analysis of the three instantaneous
differential currents. Occurrence of these harmonics over a level that is set separately
for each one blocks tripping action from the biased slope evaluation. Harmonics

153
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

blocking based on 2nd and 5th harmonics is used only used if one of the following
conditions are fulfilled:
When a power transformer is included in the protected zone.
When the bias current is less than 125 % Ibase.
When an external fault has been detected by the negative sequence internal/
external fault discriminator and 200 ms after that.

The third analysis is the negative sequence current analysis. Effectively this is a fault
discriminator that distinguishes between internal and external faults. The directional
test is made so that the end with the highest negative sequence current is found. Then,
the sum of the negative sequence currents at all other circuit ends is calculated.
Finally, the relative phase angle between these two negative sequence currents is
determined. The characteristic for this fault discriminator is shown in Figure 49,
where the directional characteristic is defined by the two setting parameters
IminNegSeq and NegSeqRoa.

90 deg
120 deg
If one or the Internal/external
other of fault boundary
currents is too
low, then no
measurement
NegSeqROA
is done, and
(Relay
120 degrees
Operate
is mapped
Angle)

180 deg 0 deg

IMinNegSeq

External Internal
fault fault
region region

270 deg en05000188-3-en.vsd

IEC05000188 V3 EN

Figure 49: Operate characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator

The reference direction (that is, the positive direction) of currents in a power line is
considered to be towards the line. Thus, when both negative sequence currents to be
compared have this direction, the phase difference between them is ideally zero.

An internal fault can be suspected. In the opposite case, when one negative sequence
current is entering and the other is leaving the protected object, the phase difference
will ideally be 180 degrees. An external fault can be suspected. If either the local or the
sum of the remote negative sequence currents or both is below the set level, the fault

154
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

discriminator does not make any fault classification and the value 120 degrees is set.
This value is an indication that negative sequence directional comparison has not been
possible. In this case, neither internal nor external fault is signalized. When an external
fault is detected, the 2nd and 5th harmonic analysis is activated for 200 ms. This gives
better stability against unwanted trips. Under an external fault condition, the cross
block logic algorithm is active as well.

When a fault is classified as internal by the negative sequence fault discriminator, a

trip command is issued under the condition that at least one start signal has been
issued, while all eventual block signals (issued by the harmonic analysis of the
instantaneous differential currents) are ignored.

For all differential functions it is the common trip that shall be used to
initiate a trip of a breaker. The separate trip signals from the different
parts lacks the safety against maloperation. This does in some cases
result in a 6 ms time difference between, for example restrained trip is
issued and common trip is issued. The separate trip signals shall only
be used for information purpose of which part that has caused the trip.

With reference to Figure 47, the outputs from the three analysis blocks are fed to the
output logic. Figure 50 shows a simplified block diagram of this output logic where
only trip commands and no alarm signals are shown for simplicity.

155
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Trip unrestrained L1
TRIP
Trip unrestrained L2 OR
Trip unrestrained L3

Start L1 TRL1
AND OR
Start L2 OR AND
OR
Start L3 TRL2
AND OR
OR AND
OR
TRL3
AND OR
St L1 IdMinHigh OR AND
OR
St L2 IdMinHigh
St L3 IdMinHigh

Internal fault
AND
NegSeqDiffEn

tIdMinHigh
AND t
External fault
OR
Line energizing

Diff curr L1 2nd harm AND

OR OR
Diff curr L1 5th harm
Diff curr L2 2nd harm AND
OR OR
Diff curr L2 5th harm
nd
Diff curr L3 2 harm AND
OR OR
Diff curr L3 5th harm

OR
AND

CrossBlockEn

IEC05000295-3-en.vsd
IEC05000295 V3 EN

Figure 50: Simplified block diagram

Remembering that current values plotted above the characteristic formed by IdMin
and the dual slope in Figure 49 are said to give a start, the output logic can be
summarized as follows:

A start in one phase, gives a trip under the condition that the content of the 2nd and
the 5th harmonic is below the set level for these harmonics in the three separate
instantaneous differential currents. Otherwise it is blocked as long as the
harmonic is above the set level. However, when a line is energized the current

156
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

setting value IdMinHigh is used. Effectively this means that the line A-B-C in
Figure 48 forms the characteristic. The harmonic block scheme is generally not
applied if there are no in-line or shunt power transformers within the protection
zone. In other words, if there are no in-line or tap (shunt) power transformers
within the protection zone, then no harmonics can prevent a trip command. This
makes the response of the differential protection faster in approximately 90% of
all cases.
Current values above the unrestrained limit, gives a trip irrespective of any
presence of harmonics.
Classification of a fault as internal by the negative sequence currents based fault
discriminator, gives a trip under the condition that at least one start signal has
been issued, that is, set to 1 (TRUE). The negative sequence current based fault
discriminator itself is not phase-sensitive, and the start signals are required to
determine which phases were affected by the fault. This means that any harmonic
blocking is then overridden. The harmonic block scheme is not applied if there are
no in-line or tap (shunt) power transformers within the protection zone. In other
words, if there are no in-line or tap power transformers within the protection zone,
then harmonics cannot prevent a trip command. This makes the response of the
protection faster in the majority of cases. If there is no power transformer within
the protected circuit, then the 2nd and 5th harmonic analysis is only activated
temporarily under external fault conditions, or when the bias current is lower than
1. 25 IBase.
Classification of a fault as external by the negative sequence fault discriminator
will cause the harmonic logic scheme to be applied under the duration of the
external fault signal, at least for 200 ms. Even the cross block logic scheme is then
active.

The compensation of charging currents can be selected active or inactive by setting

ChargCurEnable Yes or No. The compensation works so that the fundamental
frequency differential current that is measured under steady state undisturbed
conditions, is identified and then subtracted making the resulting differential current
zero (or close to zero). This action is made separately for each phase. The magnitude
of the subtracted pre-fault currents in Amperes can be read at any time as the service
value ICHARGE.

Values of the pre-fault differential currents are not updated under disturbance
conditions. The updating process is resumed 50 ms after normal conditions have been
restored. Normal conditions are only assumed if there are no start signals, neither
internal nor external fault is declared, the power system is symmetrical.

The change in the charging current that the fault causes by decreasing the system
voltage is not considered in the algorithm. For more information, see the application
manual.

Note that all small pre-fault differential currents are subtracted, regardless of their
origin. Besides the true charging currents, the following currents are eliminated:

157
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Small false differential currents due to small errors (inequalities) of current

transformers.
Small false differential currents because of off-nominal load tap changer
positions when a power transformer is included in the protected zone.
Load currents of tap power transformers included in the protected zone.

6.3.7.2 Time synchronization

In a numerical line differential protection, current samples from protections located

geographically apart from each other, must be time coordinated so that the currents
from the different line ends can be compared without introducing irrelevant errors.
Accuracy requirements on this time coordination are extremely high.

As an example, an inaccuracy of 0.1 ms in a 50 Hz system gives a maximum amplitude

error approximately around 3% whilst an inaccuracy of 1 ms gives a maximum
amplitude error of approximately 31%. The corresponding figures for a 60 Hz system
are 4% and 38% respectively.

In Line differential protection, the time coordination is made with the so-called echo
method. The echo method can be complemented with GPS synchronization as an
option.

Each IED has an accurate local clock with a very small time drift. This clock makes
time tagging of telegrams, and the echo method is then used to find out the time
difference between the clocks in two ends of a power line.

Referring to Figure 51, it works such that the transmission time to send a message from
station B to station A (T1 T2) and receive a message from A to B (T3 T4) is
measured. The time instances T2 and T3 are taken with the local clock reference of
station A, and the time instances T1 and T4 are taken with the local clock reference of
station B.

T2 T3
A

B
T1 T4
en05000293.vsd
IEC05000293 V1 EN

Figure 51: Measuring time differences

Calculation of the delay time one-way Td and the time difference t between the
clocks in A and B is then possible to do with equation 8 and equation 9, which are only
valid under the condition that the send and receive times are equal.

158
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

(T2 - T1 ) + (T4 - T3 )
Td =
2
EQUATION1358 V1 EN (Equation 8)

(T1 + T4 ) - (T2 + T3 )
Dt =
2
EQUATION1359 V1 EN (Equation 9)

t is calculated every time a telegram is received, and the time difference is then used
to adjust and interpolate the current measurements from the remote end before the
current differential algorithm is executed.

The echo method can be used in telecommunications transmission networks with

varying signal propagation delay as long as there is delay symmetry, that is, the send
and receive delays are equal. The delay variation can depend on the signal going
different routes in the network from time to other.

When the delay symmetry is lost, the expression for t given above is no longer valid.
Under these conditions GPS synchronization of the local IED clocks must be used.

Including the optional GPS, means that there will be one GPS receiver module in each
IED, synchronizing its local IED clock. As GPS synchronization is very accurate, in
the order of 1 s, all IEDs in the same line differential scheme will have the same clock
reference. It is then possible to detect asymmetric transmission time delay and
compensate for it.

When the IED is equipped with GPS, this hardware is integrated in the IED. Besides
the GPS receiver itself, it also consists of filters and regulators for post processing of
the GPS time synch pulse, which is necessary to achieve a reliable GPS
synchronization. Especially short interruptions and spurious out of synch GPS signals
are handled securely in this way.

When GPS synchronization is used, an interruption in the GPS signal leads to

freewheeling during 8 seconds that is, during this time the synchronization benefits
from the stability in the local clocks. If the interruption persists more than 8 seconds,
either fall back to the echo synchronization method or blocking of Line differential
protection function is made, as selected through setting parameter GPSSyncErr.

6.3.7.3 Analog signal communication for line differential protection

Communication principle
For a two-terminal line, the current from the local CT needs to be communicated over
a 64 kbit/s channel to the remote line end, and the remote end current communicated
back on the same channel. If there is, for example, a three terminal line another 64 kbit/
s channel will be needed to exchange the same local current with the third line end
current.

In one-and-a-half breaker arrangements, there are two local currents meaning two 64
kbit/s channels to each remote substation. Alternatively, it is possible to add together

159
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

the two local currents before sending them and in that way reduce the number of
communication channels needed. This is achieved by selecting proper setting for
parameter TransmCurr (CT-SUM, CT-DIFF1 or CT-DIFF2). However, information
about bias currents is reduced if the alternative option is followed. For further
information and discussions on this matter, refer to the Application manual.

The communication can be arranged as a master-master system or a master-slave

system alternatively. Figure 52 shows a master-master system for a five-terminal line.
Here current samples are exchanged between all IEDs, and an evaluation is made in
each IED. This means that a 64 kbit/s communication channel is needed between
every IED included in the same line differential protection zone.

Protected zone

IED IED

Comm. Channels

IED IED IED

IEC05000292_2_en.vsd
IEC05000292 V2 EN

Figure 52: 5terminal line with master-master system

In the master-slave system, current samples are sent from all slave IEDs to one master
IED where the evaluation is made and trip signals are sent to the remote ends when
needed. In this system, a 64 kbit/s communication channel is only needed between the
master, and each one of the slave IEDs, as shown in figure 53.

Protected zone

IED IED

Comm. Channels

IED IED IED

IEC05000291_2_en.vsd
IEC05000291 V2 EN

Figure 53: 5terminal line with master-slave system

The master-slave configuration is achieved by setting parameter Operation in the

slaves to Off for Line differential protection function, and setting parameter
ChannelMode to On for the LDCMs in the slaves.

160
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Test mode
Line differential protection function in one IED can be set in test mode. This can block
the trip outputs on that IED, and set the remote IEDs in a remote test mode, so that
injected currents can be echoed back phase shifted and with a settable amplitude. The
trip outputs in the remote IEDs can also be blocked automatically. For further
information, refer to the installation and commissioning manual.

Communication of current sampled values

The currents are sampled twenty times per power system cycle in the protection
terminals, but the communication exchange is made only once every 5 ms. This means
that at in each telegram sent, 5 consecutive current samples in a 50 Hz system and 6
consecutive current samples in a 60 Hz system (three phases each sampling instant)
are included. Figure 54 shows the principle.

Current Current Current Current Current Current Current Current

sample sample sample sample sample sample sample sample
telegram telegram telegram telegram telegram telegram telegram telegram
sent sent sent sent sent sent sent sent

Time
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 (ms)

en05000290.vsd
IEC05000290 V1 EN

Figure 54: Communication of current sampled values.

where:
x is the current sampling moment

Redundant communication channels

With redundant communication channels, as shown in figure 55, both channels are in
operation continuously but with one of them favoured as a primary channel.

161
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Telecom. Network
LD LD
CM CM
LD LD
CM CM
Telecom. Network

Primary
channel
Secondary redundant
channel en05000289.vsd
IEC05000289 V1 EN

Figure 55: Direct fibre optical connection between two IEDs with LDOM over
longer distances.

If communication is lost on the primary channel, switchover to the secondary channel

is made after a settable time delay RedChSwTime. Return of the primary channel will
cause a switchback after another settable time delay RedChRturnTime.

For a three-, four- or five-terminals line in a master-master configuration, a loss of one

communication channel will not cause the line differential protection to be
unserviceable. Instead it will automatically revert to a partial master-slave mode with
the two IEDs that have an unserviceable communication link between them, will serve
as slaves.

For more details about the remote communication see section "" and the application
manual.

6.3.7.4 Open CT detection feature

Line differential protection has a built-in, advanced open CT detection feature.

A sudden inadvertently opened CT circuit may cause an unexpected and unwanted

operation of the Line differential protection under normal load conditions. Damage of
secondary equipment may occur due to high voltage from open CT circuit outputs. It
is always an advantage, from the point of view of security and reliability, to have the
open CT detection function to block the Line differential protection function in case
of an open CT condition, and produce an alarm signal to the operational personnel to
quickly correct the open CT condition.

The built-in open CT feature can be enabled or disabled by the setting parameter
OpenCTEnable (Off/On). When enabled, this feature tries to prevent mal-operation
when a loaded main CT connected to Line differential protection is by mistake open
circuited on the secondary side. Note that this feature can only detect interruption of
one CT phase current at a time. If two or even all three-phase currents of one set of CTs
are accidentally interrupted at precisely the same time, this feature cannot operate.
Line differential protection generates a trip signal if the false differential current is

162
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

sufficiently high. An open CT circuit is typically detected in 1214 ms, and if the load
in the protected circuit is relatively high, about the nominal load, the unwanted trip
cannot always be prevented. Still, the information about what was the cause of the
open CT secondary circuit, is vital.

The principle applied to detect an open CT is a simple pattern recognition method,

similar to the waveform check used by the Power Transformer Differential Protection
in order to detect the magnetizing inrush condition. The open CT detection principle
is based on the fact that for an open CT, the current in the phase with the open CT
suddenly drops to zero (that is, as seen by the protection), while the currents of the
other two phases continue as before.

The open CT function is supposed to detect an open CT under normal conditions, that
is, with the protected multi-terminal circuit under normal load (10...120% of the rated
load). If the load currents are very low or zero, the open CT condition cannot be
detected. In addition to load condition requirement, Open CT function also checks the
differential current on faulty phase. If the differential current is lower than 10% of
IBase, the open CT condition cannot be detected. Therefore, the Open CT algorithm
only detects an open CT if the load on the power transformer protected object is
10...120% of rated load and the differential current is higher than 10% of IBase on that
phase. The search for an open CT starts 60 seconds (50 seconds in 60 Hz systems) after
the bias current has entered the 10...120% range. The Open CT detection feature can
also be explicitly deactivated by setting: OpenCTEnable = 0 (Off).

If an open CT is detected and the output OPENCT set to 1, then all the differential
functions are blocked, except the unrestrained (instantaneous) differential. An alarm
signal is also produced after a settable delay (tOCTAlarmDelay) to report to
operational personnel for quick remedy actions once the open CT is detected. When
the open CT condition is removed (that is, the previously open CT is reconnected), the
functions remain blocked for a specified interval of time, which is also defined by a
setting (tOCTResetDelay). This is to prevent an eventual mal-operation after the
reconnection of the previously open CT secondary circuit.

The open CT algorithm provides detailed information about the location of the
defective CT secondary circuit. The algorithm clearly indicates the IED side, CT input
and phase in which an open CT condition has been detected. These indications are
provided via the following outputs from the Line differential protection function:

1. Output OPENCT provides instant information to indicate that an open CT circuit

has been detected.
2. Output OPENCTAL provides a time-delayed alarm that the open CT circuit has
been detected. Time delay is defined by the parameter tOCTAlarmDelay.
3. Integer output OPENCTIN provides information on the local HMI regarding
which open CT circuit has been detected (1=CT input No 1; 2=CT input No 2).
4. Integer output OPENCTPH provides information on the local HMI regarding in
which phase an open CT circuit has been detected (1=Phase L1; 2= Phase L2; 3=
Phase L3).

163
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Once the open CT condition is declared, the algorithm stops to search for further open
CT circuits. It waits until the first open CT circuit has been corrected. Note that once
the open CT condition has been detected, it can be reset automatically within the
differential function. It is not possible to externally reset an open CT condition. To
reset the open CT circuit alarm automatically, the following conditions must be
fulfilled:

Bias current is for at least one minute smaller than 120%

The open CT condition in the defective CT circuit has been corrected (for
example, current asymmetry disappears)
The above two conditions are fulfilled for a longer time than defined by the
setting parameter tOCTResetDelay

If an open CT has been detected in a separate group of three CTs, the algorithm is reset
either when the missing current returns to the normal value, or when all three currents
become zero. After the reset, the open CT detection algorithm starts again to search for
open CT circuits within the protected zone.

6.3.7.5 Binary signal transfer

There is space for eight binary signals integrated in the telegram of the line differential
analog communication.

6.3.7.6 Line differential coordination function LDLPSCH

Line differential coordination function (LDLPSCH) is a support function to the Line

differential protection functions. The function gathers and coordinates local IED
signals and the signals from remote IEDs between the Line differential protection
functions and the LDCM communication module.

The function acts as the interface to and from Line differential protection.

The task of LDLPSCH is to transfer the signals via LDCM between IEDs in the
protection zone. Once LDLPSCH receives a block or trip signal from one IED, this
block or trip signal is transferred to other IEDs by LDLPSCH function.

When the line differential protection function in local IED is set to test mode,
LDLPSCH sets the remote IEDs in a remote test mode and block the trip outputs in the
remote IEDs. Figure 56 shows a simplified block diagram which illustrates block
signal handling by LDLPSCH.

164
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Block signal Logic of LDLPSCH

TestModeRemoteTerm1 0

TestModeRemoteTerm2 0
>=1
0
TestModeRemoteTerm3 0
0

>=1 50 ms
TestModeRemoteTerm4 0

0
t
BlockRemoteTerm1 0

>=1 0
BlockRemoteTerm2 0
0
BlockRemoteTerm3 0 0

>=1
BlockRemoteTerm4 0
0 0 LocalDiffBlock

50 ms
0 LOCALDIFFBLOCKED
OPEN CT BLK t

TestModeInput 0
CTFailOCTToRemote
& (signal to LDCM)
0

& 50 ms TestModeToRemote
0 0 t
TestModeSet &
0 0
1 0

>=1
0 0 Block Remote Trip
ReleaseLocal
0 0

>=1
0 Block Remote Trip
TERMINALOUTOFSERVICE 0 0
0
>=1 >=1
0
100 ms 0
BlockToRemote
BLCOK 0
t 0

IEC13000259-2-en.vsd
IEC13000259 V2 EN

Figure 56: Block signal logic of LDLPSCH

When LDLPSCH receives the trip signal from local IED (or remote IED), this trip
signal is transferred to remote IEDs (or local IED) in the protection zone. Figure 57
shows a simplified block diagram which illustrates trip signal handling by LDLPSCH.

165
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Trip Signal Logic of LDLPSCH

DiffTripL1

DiffTripL2

DiffTripL3
0 TRIPL1LOCAL
&
0 0

>=1
0 0 TRIPL1
0
0

&
0 TripL1ToRemote
0

TripL1RemoteTerm1 0
>=1
>=1 0 0 TRIP
TripL1RemoteTerm2 0
0 0
TripL1RemoteTerm3 0
& 0

TripL1RemoteTerm4 0 0

0 TRIPL2LOCAL
&
0 0

>=1
0 0 TRIPL2
0
0
&
0

0
0
&
0 TripL2ToRemote

TripL2RemoteTerm1 0 >=1
>=1 TRIPLOCAL
TripL2RemoteTerm2 0
0 0

0
TripL2RemoteTerm3 0
0

TripL2RemoteTerm4 0

TRIPL3LOCAL
0

&
0 0

>=1
BlockLocalTrip 0 0 TRIPL3
1
0
0

&
0 TripL3ToRemote
BlockTripToRemote
1 0
0

>=1
TripL3RemoteTerm1 0 0 0 TRIPREMOTE
TripL3RemoteTerm2 0
>=1
0 0 0
TripL3RemoteTerm3 0
&
TripL3RemoteTerm4 0 0

BlockRemoteTrip 0
1

IEC13000260-2-en.vsd
IEC13000260 V2 EN

Figure 57: Trip signal logic of LDLPSCH

Some of the signals in the above block diagrams are used as the internal signals by
LDLPSCH. Table Internal signals describes the source or destination of these internal
signals.
Table 75: Internal signals
Internal signals Source of destination Description
testModeRemoteTerm1 Signal from LDCM Test mode from remote terminal
1
testModeRemoteTerm2 Signal from LDCM Test mode from remote terminal
2
testModeRemoteTerm3 Signal from LDCM Test mode from remote terminal
3
Table continues on next page

166
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B
Internal signals
testModeRemoteTerm4
blockRemoteTerm1
blockRemoteTerm2
blockRemoteTerm3
blockRemoteTerm4
testModeInput
diffTripL1
diffTripL2
diffTripL3
tripL1RemoteTerm1
tripL1RemoteTerm2
tripL1RemoteTerm3
tripL1RemoteTerm4
tripL2RemoteTerm1
tripL2RemoteTerm2
tripL2RemoteTerm3
tripL2RemoteTerm4
tripL3RemoteTerm1
tripL3RemoteTerm2
tripL3RemoteTerm3
tripL3RemoteTerm4
tripL1ToRemote
tripL2ToRemote
tripL3ToRemote
Table continues on next page
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
Source of destination Description
Signal from LDCM Test mode from remote terminal
4
Signal from LDCM Block from remote terminal 1
Signal from LDCM Block from remote terminal 2
Signal from LDCM Block from remote terminal 3
Signal from LDCM Block from remote terminal 4
Signal from test mode function Input for forcing the function into
test mode
Signal from differential function Trip from local differential
function in phase L1
Signal from differential function Trip from local differential
function in phase L2
Signal from differential function Trip from local differential
function in phase L3
Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 1 in
phase L1
Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 2 in
phase L1
Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 3 in
phase L1
Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 4 in
phase L1
Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 1 in
phase L2
Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 2 in
phase L2
Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 3 in
phase L2
Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 4 in
phase L2
Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 1 in
phase L3
Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 2 in
phase L3
Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 3 in
phase L3
Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 4 in
phase L3
Signal to LDCM Trip to remote terminals phase
L1
Signal to LDCM Trip to remote terminals phase
L2
Signal to LDCM Trip to remote terminals phase
L3
167
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Internal signals Source of destination Description

localDiffBlock Signal to differential function Block local line differential
function operation
blockToRemote Signal to LDCM Block to be sent to remote
terminals
testModeToRemote Signal to LDCM Test mode indication to be sent
to remote terminals

6.3.8 Technical data

Table 76: L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (20-200)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

SlopeSection2 (10.0-50.0)% -
SlopeSection3 (30.0-100.0)% -
EndSection 1 (20150)% of IBase -
EndSection 2 (1001000)% of IBase -
Unrestrained limit function (1005000)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Second harmonic blocking (5.0100.0)% of fundamental 1.0% of Ir

Note: fundamental
magnitude = 100% of
Ir

Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0100.0)% of fundamental 2.0% of Ir

Note: fundamental
magnitude = 100% of
Ir

*Inverse characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 1113, 1114
1113, 1114 and table 1115 and table 1115
Critical impulse time 2ms typically at 0 to 10 x IdMin -

Charging current compensation On/Off -

LT3CPDIF (With in-zone transformer enabled and tIdMinHigh set to 0) :
*Operate time, restrained function at Min. = 25 ms -
0 to 10 x IdMin Max. = 35 ms

*Reset time, restrained function at 10 Min. = 5 ms -

to 0 x IdMin Max. = 15 ms

*Operate time, unrestrained function Min. = 5 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdUnre Max. = 15 ms

*Reset time, unrestrained function at Min. = 15 ms -

10 to 0 x IdUnre Max. = 30 ms

**Operate time, unrestrained Min. = 10 ms -

negative sequence function Max. = 25 ms
**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -
sequence function Max. = 30 ms
L3CPDIF and L6CPDIF (With tIdMinHigh set to 0):
Table continues on next page

168
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

*Operate time, restrained function at Min. = 10 ms -
0 to 10 x IdMin Max. = 20 ms

*Reset time, restrained function at 10 Min. = 15 ms -

to 0 x IdMin Max. = 25 ms

*Operate time, unrestrained function Min. = 5 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdUnre Max. = 15 ms

*Reset time, unrestrained function at Min. = 15 ms -

10 to 0 x IdUnre Max. = 30 ms

**Operate time, unrestrained Min. = 10 ms -

negative sequence function Max. = 20 ms
**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -
sequence function Max. = 35 ms
The data in the table are valid for a single IED with two local current input groups.
*Note: Data obtained with single input current group.
**Note: Data obtained with two input current groups. The rated symmetrical currents are applied on both
sides as pre- and after-fault currents. The fault is performed by increasing one phase current to double
on one side and decreasing same phase current to zero on the other side.

6.4 Additional security logic for differential protection

LDRGFC

6.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Additional security logic for differential LDRGFC - 11
protection

6.4.2 Functionality
Additional security logic for differential protection (LDRGFC) can help the security
of the protection especially when the communication system is in abnormal status or
for example when there is unspecified asymmetry in the communication link. It helps
to reduce the probability for mal-operation of the protection. LDRGFC is more
sensitive than the main protection logic to always release operation for all faults
detected by the differential function. LDRGFC consists of four sub functions:

Phase-to-phase current variation

Zero sequence current criterion
Low voltage criterion
Low current criterion

Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current samples as input and it calculates
the variation using the sampling value based algorithm. Phase-to-phase current
variation function is major one to fulfill the objectives of the startup element.

169
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Zero sequence criterion takes the zero sequence current as input. It increases the
security of protection during the high impedance fault conditions.

Low voltage criterion takes the phase voltages and phase-to-phase voltages as inputs.
It increases the security of protection when the three-phase fault occurred on the weak
end side.

Low current criterion takes the phase currents as inputs and it increases the
dependability during the switch onto fault case of unloaded line.

The differential function can be allowed to trip as no load is fed through the line and
protection is not working correctly.

Features:

Startup element is sensitive enough to detect the abnormal status of the protected
system
Startup element does not influence the operation speed of main protection
Startup element would detect the evolving faults, high impedance faults and three
phase fault on weak side
It is possible to block the each sub function of startup element
Startup signal has a settable pulse time

6.4.3 Function block

LDRGFC
I3P* START
U3P* STCVL1L2
BLOCK STCVL2L3
BLKCV STCVL3L1
BLKUC STUC
BLK3I0 ST3I0
BLKUV STUV
REMSTUP

IEC14000015-1-en.vsd
IEC14000015 V1 EN

Figure 58: LDRGFC function block

6.4.4 Signals
Table 77: LDRGFC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKCV BOOLEAN 0 Block of ph to ph current variation criterion
BLKUC BOOLEAN 0 Block of the low current criterion
Table continues on next page

170
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Name Type Default Description

BLK3I0 BOOLEAN 0 Block of zero sequence current criterion
BLKUV BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage criterion
REMSTUP BOOLEAN 0 Startup signal of remote end

Table 78: LDRGFC Output signals

Name Type Description
START BOOLEAN General startup signal
STCVL1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal for current variation criterion for phase
L1L2
STCVL2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal for current variation criterion for phase
L2L3
STCVL3L1 BOOLEAN Start signal for current variation criterion for phase
L3L1
STUC BOOLEAN Start signal for low current criterion
ST3I0 BOOLEAN Start signal for zero sequence current criterion
STUV BOOLEAN Start signal for under voltage criterion

6.4.5 Settings
Table 79: LDRGFC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
tStUpReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Reset delay for startup signal
OperationCV Off - - On Operation current variation Off/On
On
ICV> 1 - 100 %IB 1 20 Fixed threshold for ph to ph current
variation criterion
OperationUC Off - - On Operation low current criterion Off/On
On
IUC< 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Start value for low current operation in %
of IBase
Operation3I0 Off - - On Operation zero sequence current criterion
On Off/On
I3I0> 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Start value for zero sequence current
criterion in % of IBase
OperationUV Off - - On Operation under voltage criterion Off/On
On
UPhN< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Start value for phase voltage criterion in %
of UBase
UPhPh< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Start value for ph to ph voltage criterion in
% of UBase

171
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

Table 80: LDRGFC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tCV 0.000 - 0.005 s 0.001 0.002 Time delay for phase to phase current
variation
tUC 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay for low current criterion
t3I0 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for zero sequence current
criterion
tUV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for low voltage criterion

Table 81: LDRGFC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.4.6 Monitored data

Table 82: LDRGFC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current RMS value for
phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current RMS value for
phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current RMS value for
phase L3
3I0 REAL - A Zero sequence current
value
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for
phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for
phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for
phase L3
UL12 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for ph
to ph L1L2
UL23 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for ph
to ph L2L3
UL31 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for ph
to ph L3L1

6.4.7 Operation principle

Additional security logic for differential protection (LDRGFC) takes the current
samples, current RMS values, phase voltage values, phase-to-phase voltage values,
zero sequence current and remote side startup signals as inputs.

172
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Startup signal becomes activated when any one of the current variation startup signal,
zero sequence current startup signal, voltage startup signal, and current startup signal
is activated.

Phase-to-phase current variation takes current samples and generates the startup
signal by comparing with the start value.

If the zero sequence current value is greater than the start value of zero sequence
current then the zero sequence current startup signal will be activated.

Voltage startup signal becomes activated when the any of phase voltage and line
voltage is less than the voltage start value and the remote startup signal has to be
activated.

Current startup signal becomes activated when the current value in all phases is less
than current start value.

Phase-to-phase current variation

Phase-to-phase current variation one is main startup element. It covers most of the
abnormal status of the system. The phase-to-phase current variation fails in high
impedance faults, three-phase fault on weak side and switch onto fault on unloaded
line because of low sensitivity in these cases.

Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current samples as input and the signal is
evaluated using the sampling value based algorithm.

The phase-to-phase current variation criterion is shown below:

DiFF > 1.8DIT + DI ZD

EQUATION2255 V1 EN

Where:
i sampling value of phase-to-phase current variation

IZD setting of fixed threshold, which corresponds to setting ICV>. The default value for the
setting is 0.2IBase, where IBase is the base current.
IT float threshold

It is the full-circle integral of the phase-to-phase current variation

1 2T -1
DI T = | DiFF (t - n) |
T n =T
EQUATION2256 V1 EN

Where:
T count of sample values in one cycle

173
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

i is calculated using the below formula:

Di (k ) = [i ( k ) - i (k - N )] - [i (k - N ) - i (k - 2 N )]
= i ( k ) - 2i ( k - N ) + i (k - 2 N )
EQUATION2257 V1 EN

N is the number of samples in one cycle.

tCV
STCVL1L2
t
cont

I3P Current variation tCV

STCVL2L3
subfunction t
i
tCV
STCVL3L1
t

OR STCV
cont

IEC10000295-1-en.vsd
IEC10000295 V1 EN

Figure 59: Current variation logic diagram

tCV is the time setting for the change of current criterion. Phase current samples are
included in input signal I3P.

Zero sequence current criterion

Zero sequence criterion is mainly for detection of remote IED high resistance faults or
some gradual faults. The criterion takes the zero sequence current as input. Zero
sequence current is compared with I3I0> for the t3I0 time to generate the zero
sequence current startup signal.

I3P a
a>b t3I0
I3IO> b ST3I0
AND t

BLK3I0
BLOCK OR

IEC09000778-2-en.vsd
IEC09000778 V2 EN

Figure 60: Zero sequence current criterion logic diagram

174
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Here I3I0> is the setting of the maximum possible non-faulted zero sequence current
for the protected line. The default value for this setting is 0.1 IBase where IBase is
the rated current of the CT.

t3I0 is the time setting for the zero sequence current criterion.

The zero sequence current criterion can be blocked by activating the BLK3I0 input
signal.

Low voltage criterion

Low voltage criterion is mainly for detection of the three phase faults occurring on
weak side with pre fault no load condition. The low voltage criterion takes the voltage
phase values, voltage phase-to-phase values and remote startup signals as inputs. The
logic for low voltage criterion is shown below:

U3P (UPhN) a
a<b
UPhN< b
OR
U3P (UPhPh) a
a<b
UPhPh< b
tUV STUV
REMSTUP (Recived)
AND t

BLKUV
BLOCK OR

IEC09000779-2-en.vsd
IEC09000779 V2 EN

Figure 61: Low voltage criterion logic diagram

Voltage phase value is compared with the start value of voltage phase and voltage
phase-to-phase value is compared with the start value of voltage phase-to-phase. If
any of the phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltages is below the set voltage levels for
some time duration (tUV) then the low voltage START signal becomes activated after
receiving the remote startup signal. Low voltage criterion can be blocked by activating
BLKUV input signal.

If there are more than one remote IED, all the startup signals of the remote ends are
logically OR to obtain the REMSTUP signal from the remote side as input.

Low current criterion

The current in each phase is compared to the set current level. If all currents are below
setting IUC<, the STUC output is activated after the set delay tUC.

175
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK505308-UEN B
Differential protection

I3P
a
a<b tUC
IUC< b STUC
AND t

BLKUC
BLOCK OR

IEC09000780-2-en.vsd
IEC09000780 V2 EN

Figure 62: Low current criterion logic diagram

Security logic for differential protection

The configuration for the additional security logic for differential protection is shown
in Figure 63. The function will release tripping of the line differential protection up to
the end of timer tStUpReset.

Phase-phase STCV
i
current variation

Zero sequence ST3IO

I0 > tStUpReset
current criterion START Local side start-up
t
Send signal to
Low voltage
OR remote side
criterion STUV
ULOW <

Low current
criterion STUC
I0 <

REMSTUP

IEC10000296-2-en.vsd

IEC10000296 V2 EN

Figure 63: Additional security logic for differential protection. Logic diagram for
start up element.

6.4.8 Technical data

Table 83: LDRGFC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current, zero (1-100)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir
sequence current
Operate current, low current (1-100)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir
operation
Operate voltage, phase to (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
neutral
Operate voltage, phase to (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
phase
Table continues on next page

176
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Independent time delay, zero (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms
sequence current at 0 to 2 x Iset whichever is greater

Independent time delay, low (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms

current operation at 2 x Iset to 0 whichever is greater

Independent time delay, low (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms

voltage operation at 2 x Uset to whichever is greater
0
Reset time delay for startup (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms
signal at 0 to 2 x Uset whichever is greater

177
Technical manual
178
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Section 7 Impedance protection

7.1 Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral

characteristic ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS, ZDRDIR

7.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral ZMQPDIS 21
characteristic (zone 1)

S00346 V1 EN

Distance protection zone, quadrilateral ZMQAPDIS 21

characteristic (zone 2-5)

S00346 V1 EN

Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR 21D

Z<->

IEC09000167 V1 EN

7.1.2 Functionality
The line distance protection is an up to five (depending on product variant) zone full
scheme protection function with three fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three
fault loops for phase-to-earth faults for each of the independent zones. Individual
settings for each zone in resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use as back-
up protection for transformer connected to overhead lines and cables of different types
and lengths.

ZMQPDIS together with Phase selection with load encroachment FDPSPDIS has
functionality for load encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect high
resistive faults on heavily loaded lines, as shown in figure64.

179
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Forward
operation

Reverse
operation

en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN

Figure 64: Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase selection
with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS activated

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built-in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single-phase autoreclosing.

Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone 1 at

load exporting end at phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.

The distance protection zones can operate independently of each other in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.

7.1.3 Function block

ZMQPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
VTSZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC06000256-2-en.vsd
IEC06000256 V2 EN

Figure 65: ZMQPDIS function block

180
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

ZMQAPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
VTSZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC09000884-1-en.vsd
IEC09000884 V1 EN

Figure 66: ZMQAPDIS function block (zone 2 - 5)

The two inputs I3P Three phase group signal for current and U3P
Three phase group signal for voltage, must be connected to non-
adaptive SMAI blocks if ANY OF THE ZONES are set for
directional operation. That is, the parameter DFTReference in used
SMAI must be set to InternalDFTRef. If adaptive SMAI block is used
this might result in a wrong directional and reach evaluation.

ZDRDIR
I3P* STDIRCND
U3P*
IEC10000007-2-en.vsd

IEC10000007 V2 EN

Figure 67: ZDRDIR function block

7.1.4 Signals
Table 84: ZMQPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

181
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Table 85: ZMQPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

Table 86: ZMQAPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Table 87: ZMQAPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

182
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 88: ZDRDIR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

Table 89: ZDRDIR Output signals

Name Type Description
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per measuring
loop

7.1.5 Settings

Signals and settings for ZMQPDIS are valid for zone 1 while signals
and settings for ZMQAPDIS are valid for zone 2 - 5

Table 90: ZMQPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
RFPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph
RFPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Phase
On loops
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
Table continues on next page

183
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for Phase-
Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 1000 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate residual current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 91: ZMQPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

Table 92: ZMQAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
RFPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph
RFPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Phase
On loops
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for Phase-
Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

184
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 93: ZMQAPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

Table 94: ZDRDIR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase-phase current
for Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 Deg 1 115 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for
forward direction

Table 95: ZDRDIR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.1.6 Monitored data

Table 96: ZDRDIR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
L2R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2
L2X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2
L3R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3
L3X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3

185
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.1.7 Operation principle

7.1.7.1 Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which
means that each fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults for
forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 68 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for up to five,

impedance-measuring zones. There are 3 to 5 zones depending on product type and
variant.

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV

IEC05000458-2-en.vsd
IEC05000458 V2 EN

Figure 68: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent
distance protection IED with six measuring elements.

7.1.7.2 Impedance characteristic

The distance measuring zone includes six impedance measuring loops; three intended
for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as, three-phase
faults.

The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional
impedance characteristics presented in figure 69 and figure 70. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per phase reach.

186
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/loop)

R1+Rn

RFPE RFPE

X0-X1
Xn =
3
X1+Xn R0-R1
Rn =
3
jN jN
R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE RFPE

X1+Xn

RFPE RFPE
IEC11000427-1-en.vsd

R1+Rn
IEC11000427 V1 EN

Figure 69: Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring, ohm/loop domain

187
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/phase)

RFPP R1 RFPP
2 2
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PEPG--X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
33
XX
X00PE
0PE
PG --1X
-X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW===
XNFW
XNFW
3
X1 3 3

j j
R (Ohm/phase)

RFPP RFPP
2 2

X1

RFPP R1 RFPP
2 2
IEC11000428-1-en.vsd
IEC11000428 V1 EN

Figure 70: Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 71. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive
reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

188
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

IL1 R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1

IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault
IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP
IEC08000282-2-en.vsd
IEC08000282 V2 EN

Figure 71: Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 71 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The settings and RFPP are the eventual fault
resistances in the faulty place.

Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 71, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.

The zone can be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction

through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in
figure 72. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for forward
and reverse direction (there are different forward and reverse settings - Zx and ZxRev
respectively, where x = 1 - 5). Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.

189
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

IEC05000182-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000182 V2 EN

Figure 72: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones

7.1.7.3 Minimum operating current

The operation of Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS)

is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.

For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.

ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector sum
of the three-phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLn < IMinOpPP.

ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.

All three current limits IMinOpPE, IMinOpIN and IMinOpPP are

automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to
operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir = Reverse.

7.1.7.4 Measuring principles

Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The

190
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

apparent impedances at phase-to-phase faults follow equation 10 (example for a phase

L1 to phase L2 fault).

UL1 UL2
Zapp = -------------------------
I L1 IL2
EQUATION1222 V1 EN (Equation 10)

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-earth

faults (example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 11.

U L1
Z app =
I L1 + I N KN
EQUATION1223 V2 EN (Equation 11)

Where:
are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
U L1
I L1
IN

KN
is defined as:

Z 0 - Z1
KN =
3 Z1
EQUATION-2105 V2 EN

Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN

Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN

Where
R0 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0 is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1 is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach
X1 is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

191
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same reach
along the line for all types of faults.

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and

reactance X.

The formula given in equation 11 is only valid for radial feeder application without
load. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault, conventional
distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end.
The IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such
applications.

Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter.
The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into
memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of
voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from
the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to
the loop impedance according to equation 12,

X Di
U = R i + ------ -----
w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN (Equation 12)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ ------------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION354 V1 EN (Equation 13)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ -----------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION355 V1 EN (Equation 14)

with

w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN (Equation 15)

where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency

192
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value
of the voltage and substitutes it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for
the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:

Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION357 V1 EN (Equation 16)

Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 Dt -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) DIm ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION358 V1 EN (Equation 17)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set
zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping
results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive
voltage transformers or by other factors.

The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked
positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited
directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

7.1.7.5 Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance quadrilateral

function ZDRDIR. Equation 18 and equation 19 are used to classify that the fault is in
forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault.

0.8 U 1L1 + 0.2 U 1L1 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION725 V2 EN (Equation 18)

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

193
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

0.8 U 1L1 L 2 + 0.2 U 1L1 L 2 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1 L 2
EQUATION726 V2 EN (Equation 19)

where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 115 degrees, see figure 73.
is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1
U 1L1
is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1
U 1L1M
is phase current in phase L1
I L1
is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U 1L1L 2
is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U 1L1L 2 M
is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
I L1L 2

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (as shown in figure 73). It should not be changed unless system studies
have shown the necessity.

ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the output
STDIRCND.

STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

194
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

ArgNegRes

ArgDir
R

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN

Figure 73: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in
Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds
5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.

After 100 ms the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

195
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.1.7.6 Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops:
phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by L1N, L2N and L3N. The phase-to-
phase signals are designated by L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1.

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 74.

Two types of function block, ZMQPDIS and ZMQAPDIS, are used in the IED.
ZMQPDIS is used for zone 1 and ZMQAPDIS for zone 2 - 5.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
FDPSPDIS within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function
into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. Input signal
STCND is connected to FDPSPDIS or FMPSPDIS function output STCNDZ.

The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance
measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the relevant signals
depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It must be configured to the
STDIR output on ZDRDIR function.

196
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

STZMPP
OR
STCND

AND STNDL1L2
L1L2

STNDL2L3
L2L3 AND

L3L1 AND STNDL3L1

AND STNDL1N
L1N

AND STNDL2N
L2N

STNDL3N
L3N AND

OR STPE

OR
VTSZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLOCFUNC BLK

99000557-2.vsd
IEC99000557-TIFF V3 EN

Figure 74: Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND, external start
condition

Composition of the phase start signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-
directional mode, is presented in figure 75.

IEC00000488-TIFF V1 EN

Figure 75: Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

197
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 76.

STNDL1N
AND
DIRL1N
STZMPE.
OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND

STNDL3N 15 ms
OR STL1
AND AND t
DIRL3N

STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2 AND 15 ms
OR STL2
AND t
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3 AND
15 ms
OR STL3
STNDL3L1 AND t
DIRL3L1 AND

STZMPP
OR

BLK

15 ms
OR START
AND t

IEC09000888-2-en.vsd
IEC09000888 V2 EN

Figure 76: Composition of start signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in
figure 77.

198
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Timer tPP=On
STZMPP AND tPP
AND
t

BLOCFUNC
OR OR
tPE
t
AND
Timer tPE=On AND
STZMPE 15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP
BLK OR

STL1 AND TRL1

STL2 AND TRL2

STL3 AND TRL3

IEC09000887-3-en.vsdx

IEC09000887 V3 EN

Figure 77: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone

7.1.8 Technical data

Table 97: ZMQPDIS Technical data
Function
Number of zones
Minimum operate residual
current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, phase-
to-phase and phase-to-earth
Positive sequence reactance
Positive sequence resistance
Zero sequence reactance
Zero sequence resistance
Fault resistance, phase-to-earth
Fault resistance, phase-to-phase
Dynamic overreach
Table continues on next page
Range or value Accuracy
Max 5 with selectable -
direction
(5-1000)% of IBase -
(10-1000)% of IBase -
(0.10-3000.00) /phase 2.0% static accuracy
2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
(0.01-1000.00) /phase Conditions:
(0.10-9000.00) /phase Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
(0.01-3000.00) /phase
(0.10-9000.00) /loop
(0.10-3000.00) /loop
<5% at 85 degrees -
measured with CVTs and
0.5<SIR<30

199
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Definite time delay Ph-Ph and (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is greater
Ph-E operation
Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 x Min. = 20 ms -
Zreach Max. = 50 ms

7.2 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with

fixed angle FDPSPDIS

7.2.1 Identification

7.2.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase selection with load FDPSPDIS 21
encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic Z<phs

SYMBOL-DD V1 EN

7.2.2 Functionality
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. Due to environmental considerations, the rate of expansion and reinforcement
of the power system is reduced, for example, difficulties to get permission to build
new power lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of
fault, so that single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role
in this matter. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle
FDPSPDIS is designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance
function dependent on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make
fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FDPSPDIS has a built-in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive
setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with
the load.

The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important
information about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis.

A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements

continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare them
with the set values.

200
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.2.3 Function block

FDPSPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* START
BLOCK STFWL1
DIRCND STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STNDPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
STCNDZ
STCNDLE

IEC14000047-1-en.vsd
IEC10000047 V2 EN

Figure 78: FDPSPDIS function block

7.2.4 Signals
Table 98: FDPSPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Table 99: FDPSPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip output
START BOOLEAN Start in any phase or loop
STFWL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction
STFWL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction
STFWPE BOOLEAN Earth fault detected in forward direction
STRVL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction
STRVL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction
STRVPE BOOLEAN Earth fault detected in reverse direction
Table continues on next page

201
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

STNDL1 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L1
STNDL2 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L2
STNDL3 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L3
STNDPE BOOLEAN Non directional start, phase-earth
STFW1PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for single-phase fault
STFW2PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for two- phase fault
STFW3PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for thre-phase fault
STPE BOOLEAN Current conditions release of phase-earth
measuring elements
STPP BOOLEAN Current conditions release of phase-phase
measuring elements
STCNDZ INTEGER Start condition (Z< with LE and 3I0 E/F detection)
STCNDLE INTEGER Start condition (only LE and 3I0 E/F detection)

7.2.5 Settings
Table 100: FDPSPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
INBlockPP 10 - 100 %IPh 1 40 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase
measuring loops
INReleasePE 10 - 100 %IPh 1 20 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth
measuring loops
RLdFw 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Forward resistive reach within the load
impedance area
RLdRv 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Reverse resistive reach within the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Load angle determining the load
impedance area
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
RFFwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
RFRvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
RFFwPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
RFRvPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse
IMinOpPP 5 - 500 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate delta current for Phase-
Phase loops
IMinOpPE 5 - 500 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

202
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 101: FDPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OperationZ< Off - - On Operation of impedance based
On measurement
OperationI> Off - - Off Operation of current based measurement
On
IPh> 10 - 2500 %IB 1 120 Start value for phase over-current
element
IN> 10 - 2500 %IB 1 20 Start value for trip from 3I0 over-current
element
TimerPP Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph
TimerPE Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to trip, Ph-E

Table 102: FDPSPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.2.6 Operation principle

The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase selection measuring
elements is the same as for the distance zone measuring function. Phase selection with
load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic FDPSPDIS includes six impedance
measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for
phase-to-phase faults as well as for three-phase faults.

The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the

combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of
faults.

A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements

continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current, and compare them
with the set values. The current signals are filtered by Fourier's recursive filter, and
separate trip counter prevents too high overreaching of the measuring elements.

The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FDPSPDIS uses information from

the directional function to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or reverse
direction.

The start condition STCNDZ is essentially based on the following criteria:

203
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

1. Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without earth
connection
2. Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
3. Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The current start condition STCNDLE is based on the following criteria:

1. Residual current criteria

2. No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the load
area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be determined by
the minimum operating current limits.
3. Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The STCNDLE output is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the

distance zones directional function. There are outputs from FDPSPDIS that indicate
whether a start is in forward or reverse direction or non-directional, for example
STFWL1, STRVL1 and STNDL1.

These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional
function and the impedance setting of FDPSPDIS function. Their operating
characteristics are illustrated in figure 79.

X X X

R
R R

Non-directional (ND) Forward (FW) Reverse (RV)

en08000286.vsd
IEC08000286 V1 EN

Figure 79: Characteristics for non-directional, forward and reverse operation of

Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic
FDPSPDIS

The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, (for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment").

The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming
from the directional function . It shall be connected to the STDIR output on ZDRDIR,

204
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

directional measuring block. This information is also transferred to the input

DIRCND on the distance measuring zones, that is, the ZMQPDIS, distance measuring
block.

The code built up for the directionality is as follows:

STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have start in forward
direction in phase L1. If the binary code is 3 then we have start in forward direction in
phase L1 and L2, binary code 192 means start in reverse direction in phase L1 and
L2A and B etc.

The STCNDZ or STCNDLE output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary

coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct
fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the STCND input
on the ZMQPDIS, distance measuring block.

The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:

STCND = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32

7.2.6.1 Phase-to-earth fault

For a phase-to-earth fault, the measured impedance by FDPSPDIS will be according

to equation 20.

Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase

selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS.

ULn
ZPHSn =
ILn
EQUATION1255 V1 EN (Equation 20)

where:
n corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)

The characteristic for FDPSPDIS function at phase-to-earth fault is according to

figure 80. The characteristic has a fixed angle for the resistive boundary in the first
quadrant of 60.

The resistance RN and reactance XN are the impedance in the earth-return path
defined according to equation 21 and equation 22.

205
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

R0 - R1
RN =
3
EQUATION1256 V1 EN (Equation 21)

X 0 - X1
XN =
3
EQUATION1257 V1 EN (Equation 22)

X (ohm/loop)
Kr(X1+XN)

RFRvPE RFFwPE

X1+XN

60 deg
RFFwPE

RFRvPE R (Ohm/loop)
60 deg
X1+XN

1
Kr =
tan(60deg)

RFRvPE RFFwPE

Kr(X1+XN)
en06000396.vsd
IEC06000396 V2 EN

Figure 80: Characteristic of FDPSPDIS for phase-to-earth fault (setting

parameters in italic), ohm/loop domain (directional lines are drawn as
"line-dot-dot-line")

Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to
equation 23 and equation 24.

3 I0 0.5 IMinOpPE
EQUATION2108 V1 EN (Equation 23)

206
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

3 I0 INReleasePE
------------------------------------ Iphmax
100
EQUATION766 V1 EN (Equation 24)

where:
IMinOpPE is the minimum operation current for forward zones
INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phase-
to-earth fault loops (in %).
Iphmax is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.

7.2.6.2 Phase-to-phase fault

For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FDPSPDIS will be according

to equation 25.

ULm - ULn
ZPHS =
-2 ILn
EQUATION1258 V1 EN (Equation 25)

ULm is the leading phase voltage, ULn the lagging phase voltage and ILn the phase
current in the lagging phase n.

The operation characteristic is shown in figure 81.

207
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

X (W / phase)
0.5RFRvPP 0.5RFFwPP

KrX1

X1
0.5RFFwPP
60 deg

R (W / phase)
60 deg
0.5RFRvPP
X1
1
Kr =
tan(60 deg)

KrX1

0.5RFRvPP 0.5RFFwPP
IEC09000047-2-en.vsd
IEC09000047 V2 EN

Figure 81: The operation characteristics for FDPSPDIS at phase-to-phase fault

(setting parameters in italic, directional lines drawn as "line-dot-dot-
line"), ohm/phase domain

In the same way as the condition for phase-to-earth fault, there are current conditions
that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop. Those are
according to equation 26 or equation 27.

3I 0 < IMinOpPE
EQUATION2109 V1 EN (Equation 26)

INBlockPP
3I 0 < Iph max
100
EQUATION2110 V1 EN (Equation 27)

where:
IMinOpPE is the minimum operation current for earth measuring loops,
INBlockPP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and
Iphmax is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.

208
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.2.6.3 Three-phase faults

The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase
fault, that is equation 25, equation 26 and equation 27 are used to release the operation
of the function.

However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all

directions. At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counter-
clockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 82.

X (ohm/phase)

4 X1
3

90 deg

0.5RFFwPPK3

X1K3 4 RFFwPP
6

R (ohm/phase)

0.5RFRvPPK3
2
K3 =
3 30 deg

IEC05000671-5-en.vsd
IEC05000671 V5 EN

Figure 82: The characteristic of FDPSPDIS for three-phase fault (setting

parameters in italic)

7.2.6.4 Load encroachment

Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always
active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.

The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 83. As illustrated, the resistive
blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the
sector is the same in all four quadrants.

209
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

RLdFw
ArgLd ArgLd
R

ArgLd ArgLd
RLdRv

IEC09000042-1-en.vsd
IEC09000042 V1 EN

Figure 83: Characteristic of load encroachment function

The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is

dependent on the chosen operation mode of FDPSPDIS function. When output signal
STCNDZ is selected, the characteristic for FDPSPDIS (and also zone measurement
depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment characteristic (see
figure 84, left illustration).

When output signal STCNDLE is selected, the operation characteristic will be as the
right illustration in figure 84. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum
operation current and the distance measuring zones.

210
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

X X

R R

STCNDZ STCNDLE

IEC10000099-1-
en.vsd
IEC10000099 V1 EN

Figure 84: Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation mode

when load encroachment is activated

When FDPSPDIS is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the
resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 85. The figure shows a
distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area is
highlighted in black.

211
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone

Distance measuring zone

Load encroachment
characteristic

Directional line

en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN

Figure 85: Operating characteristic in forward direction when load

encroachment is activated

Figure 85 is valid for phase-to-earth. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation the
operate area is transformed according to figure 86. Notice in particular what happens
with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone. Due to the 30-
degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 90 degrees instead of
the original 60 degrees. The blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at
the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach around the R-axis.
Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load encroachment
characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.

212
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

X (W / phase)
Phase selection
Quadrilateral zone

Distance measuring zone

R (W / phase)

IEC09000049-1-en.vsd

IEC09000049 V1 EN

Figure 86: Operating characteristic for FDPSPDIS in forward direction for three-
phase fault, ohm/phase domain

The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is
presented in fig 87. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement as
the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic
clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same time
the characteristic will "shrink", divided by 2/3, from the full RLdFw and RLdRv
reach, which is valid at load or three-phase fault.

213
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

IEC08000437.vsd

IEC08000437 V1 EN

Figure 87: Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases

There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the quadrilateral
characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected by a fault
between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage in quadrant
one. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant four should not be a
problem even for applications on series compensated lines.

7.2.6.5 Minimum operate currents

The operation of the Phase selection with load encroachment function (FDPSPDIS) is
blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn<IMinOpPE, where ILn is the RMS value
of the current in phase Ln.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if (2ILn<IMinOpPP).

7.2.6.6 Simplified logic diagrams

Figure 88 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-

earth operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and

214
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

logic circuits, when only a phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase measurement is available

within the IED.

LDEblock

3I 0 0.5 IMinOpPE IRELPE

& 15 ms
t STPE
&
INReleasePE
3I 0 Iphmax
100 STCNDLE
Bool to &
BLOCK integer

15 ms
3I 0 < IMinOpPE & t STPP
10 ms 20 ms
OR & t t
IRELPP
INBlockPP
3I 0 < Iphmax
100

IEC09000149_2_en.vsd
IEC09000149 V2 EN

Figure 88: Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth operating conditions (residual

current criteria)

A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A STCNDLE

output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment characteristic and
current criteria, refer to figure 88. This signal can be configured to STCND functional
input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of
the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone measuring elements, residual current and
the load encroachment characteristic.

Figure 89 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase selective

signals STNDLn. Internal signals ZMLnN and ZMLmLn (m and n change between
one and three according to the phase number) represent the fulfilled operating criteria
for each separate loop measuring element, that is, within the characteristic.

215
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

INDL1N
INDL2N
INDL3N

15 ms
STNDPE
IRELPE OR t

LDEblockL1N
AND 15 ms
ZML1N STNDL1
OR t
LDEblockL2N
AND
ZML2N
15 ms
LDEblockL3N STNDL2
OR t
AND
ZML3N

LDEblockL1L2 15 ms
STNDL3
AND OR t
ZML1L2
LDEblockL2L3
AND INDL1L2
ZML2L3
LDEblockL3L1 INDL2L3
AND
ZML3L1 INDL3L1
IRELPP 15 ms
STNDPP
OR t

IEC00000545-3-en.vsd
IEC00000545-TIFF V3 EN

Figure 89: Composition on non-directional phase selection signals

Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is

presented schematically in figure 91 and figure 90. The directional criteria appears as
a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase selectivity
for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex network
configurations. Internal signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the corresponding
directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm. Designation FW
(figure 91) represents the forward direction as well as the designation RV (figure 90)
represents the reverse direction. All directional signals are derived within the
corresponding digital signal processor.

Figure 90 presents additionally a composition of a STCNDZ output signal, which is

created on the basis of the continuation of the impedance measuring conditions and the
load encroachment characteristic. This signal can be configured to STCND functional
input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of
the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone measuring elements and their phase
related starting and tripping signals.

216
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

INDL1N
AND
DRVL1N
INDL1L2 15 ms STRVL1
AND OR t
DRVL1L2
INDL3L1
AND
DRVL3L1 15 ms
STRVPE
INDL2N OR t
AND
DRVL2N
INDL1L2 15 ms
STRVL2
AND OR t

INDL2L3 INDL1N
AND INDL2N
DRVL2L3
INDL3N Bool to STCNDZ
INDL3N INDL1L2 integer
AND INDL2L3
DRVL3N INDL3L1
INDL2L3 15 ms
STRVL3
AND OR t

INDL3L1
15 ms
AND STRVPP
OR t

IEC00000546_2_en.vsd

IEC00000546-TIFF V2 EN

Figure 90: Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction

217
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

AND

INDL1N
AND 15 ms 15 ms
DFWL1N STFW1PH
AND OR t t
INDL1L2
15 ms STFWL1
AND OR t
DFWL1L2
INDL3L1
AND
AND
DFWL3L1 15 ms
STFWPE
INDL2N OR t
AND
DFWL2N
AND 15 ms
INDL1L2 STFWL2
t
AND OR
15 ms 15 ms
INDL2L3 STFW2PH
AND OR t t
AND
DFWL2L3
INDL3N
AND AND
DFWL3N 15 ms
STFWL3
t
INDL2L3
AND OR
15 ms
INDL3L1 STFW3PH
AND t
AND

15 ms
STFWPP
OR t

IEC05000201_2_en.vsd

IEC05000201 V2 EN

Figure 91: Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction

Figure 92 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and START, where
internal signals STNDPP, STFWPP and STRVPP are the equivalent to internal
signals STNDPE, STFWPE and STRVPE, but for the phase-to-phase loops.

218
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

TimerPP=Off
tPP
AND AND
t
TRIP
OR OR
tPE
TimerPE=Off
t
AND AND

STNDPP

STFWPP OR
STRVPP
START
OR
STNDPE

STFWPE OR
STRVPE

IEC08000441_2_en.vsd

IEC08000441-1 V2 EN

Figure 92: TRIP and START signal logic

219
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.2.7 Technical data

Table 103: FDPSPDIS technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (5-500)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reactive reach, positive (0.503000.00) /phase 2.5% static accuracy

sequence
Resistive reach, positive
sequence
Reactive reach, zero sequence
Resistive reach, zero sequence
Fault resistance, phase-to-earth
faults, forward and reverse
Fault resistance, phase-to-phase
faults, forward and reverse
Load encroachment criteria:
Load resistance, forward and
reverse
Safety load impedance angle
Reset ratio
2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
(0.101000.00) /phase Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
(0.509000.00) /phase Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
(0.503000.00) /phase degrees
(1.009000.00) /loop
(0.503000.00) /loop
(1.003000.00) /phase
(5-70) degrees
105% typically -

7.3 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral

characteristic for series compensated lines
ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS, ZDSRDIR

7.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral ZMCPDIS 21
characteristic for series compensated
lines (zone 1)

S00346 V1 EN

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral ZMCAPDIS 21

characteristic for series compensated
lines (zone 2-5)

S00346 V1 EN

Directional impedance quadrilateral, ZDSRDIR 21D

including series compensation
Z<->

IEC09000167 V1 EN

220
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.3.2 Functionality
The line distance protection is a, up to five zone full scheme protection with three fault
loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault for each
of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and reactive reach
give flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.

Quadrilateral characteristic is available.

ZMCPDIS function has functionality for load encroachment which increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.

Forward
operation

Reverse
operation

en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN

Figure 93: Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with load

encroachment function activated

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.

Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm for the quadrilateral function prevents
overreaching of zone1 at load exporting end at phase to earth-faults on heavily loaded
power lines.

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.

221
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.3.3 Function block

ZMCPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
VTSZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC07000036-2-en.vsd
IEC07000036 V2 EN

Figure 94: ZMCPDIS function block

ZMCAPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
VTSZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC09000890-1-en.vsd
IEC09000890 V1 EN

Figure 95: ZMCAPDIS function block

ZDSRDIR
I3P* STFW
U3P* STRV
STDIRCND

IEC07000035-2-en.vsd
IEC07000035 V2 EN

Figure 96: ZDSRDIR function block

7.3.4 Signals

Input and output signals is shown for zone 1, zone 2 - 5 are equal.

Table 104: ZMCPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
Table continues on next page

222
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Table 105: ZMCPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

Table 106: ZMCAPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Table 107: ZMCAPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
Table continues on next page

223
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

Table 108: ZDSRDIR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

Table 109: ZDSRDIR Output signals

Name Type Description
STFW BOOLEAN Start in forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start in reverse direction
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per measuring
loop

7.3.5 Settings

Settings for ZMCPDIS are valid for zone 1, while settings for
ZMCAPDIS are valid for zone 2 - 5

Table 110: ZMCPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Phase
On loops
X1FwPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, forward
R1PP 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
RFFwPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
X1RvPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, reverse
RFRvPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
Table continues on next page

224
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
X1FwPE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, forward
R1PE 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
X0PE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E
R0PE 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 47.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
RFFwPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
X1RvPE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, reverse
RFRvPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for Phase-
Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 1000 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate residual current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 111: ZMCPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

Table 112: ZMCAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Phase
On loops
X1FwPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, forward
R1PP 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
RFFwPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
Table continues on next page

225
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

X1RvPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, reverse
RFRvPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
X1FwPE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, forward
R1PE 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
X0PE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E
R0PE 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 47.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
RFFwPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
X1RvPE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, reverse
RFRvPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for Phase-
Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 113: ZMCAPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

Table 114: ZDSRDIR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OperationSC NoSeriesComp - - SeriesComp Special directional criteria for voltage
SeriesComp reversal
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase-phase current
for Phase-Phase loops
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 Deg 1 130 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for
forward direction
Table continues on next page

226
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

INReleasePE 10 - 100 %IPh 1 20 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth
measuring loops
INBlockPP 10 - 100 %IPh 1 40 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase
measuring loops
OperationLdCh Off - - On Operation of load discrimination
On characteristic
RLdFw 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Forward resistive reach within the load
impedance area
RLdRv 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Reverse resistive reach within the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Load angle determining the load
impedance area
X1FwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, forward
R1PP 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 7.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
RFFwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
X1RvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, reverse
RFRvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
X1FwPE 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, forward
R1PE 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 7.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
X0FwPE 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E,
forward
R0PE 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 20.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
RFFwPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
X1RvPE 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, reverse
X0RvPE 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E,
reverse
RFRvPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse

Table 115: ZDSRDIR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

227
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.3.6 Monitored data

Table 116: ZDSRDIR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
L2R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2
L2X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2
L3R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3
L3X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3

7.3.7 Operation principle

7.3.7.1 Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which
means that earth fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults for
forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 97 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones.

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV

IEC05000458-2-en.vsd
IEC05000458 V2 EN

Figure 97: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault

228
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent
distance protection IED with six measuring elements.

7.3.7.2 Impedance characteristic

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines

(ZMCPDIS) include six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-
earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as, three-phase faults.

The distance measuring zone operates according to the non-directional impedance

characteristics presented in figure 98 and figure 99. The phase-to-earth characteristic
is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase characteristic presents
the per-phase reach.

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+RNFw
X 0 PE - X 1FwPE
RFRvPE RFFwPE XNFw =
3
PG- -
XX00PE 1RVPG 1RvPE
1XRVPE
X
XNRV XNRv
XNRV == =XXNFw
3

3 X 1FwPE
XX0 PE - X-1X
0 PG FWPE
1FWPG
XNFW==
XNFW
X1FwPE+XNFw 3 3 R0 PE - R1PE
RNFw =
jN jN 3
R (Ohm/loop)

RFRvPE RFFwPE

X1RvPE+XNRv

jN

RFRvPE RFFwPE
IEC09000625-1-en.vsd
IEC09000625 V1 EN

Figure 98: Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop

domain

229
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/phase)

RFRvPP R1PP RFFwPP

2 2
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PEPG- -
X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
3 3
XX
X00
PE
0 PE
-X
PG --1X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW =
XNFW==
XNFW
X1FwPP 3 33

j j
jN R (Ohm/phase)

RFRvPP RFFwPP
2 2

X1RvPP

jN

RFRvPP RFFwPP
2 2
IEC09000632-1-en.vsd
IEC09000632 V1 EN

Figure 99: Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 100. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive
reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

230
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

IL1 R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1

IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault
IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP
IEC08000282-2-en.vsd
IEC08000282 V2 EN

Figure 100: Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 100 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE and RFPP is the eventual fault
resistance in the fault place.

Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 100, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.

The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction

through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in
figure 101. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach is
symmetric, forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both
directions.

231
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

IEC05000182-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000182 V2 EN

Figure 101: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

7.3.7.3 Minimum operating current

The operation of Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series

compensated lines (ZMCPDIS,ZMCAPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.

For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.

ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector sum
of the three phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLnAB (BC or CA)< IMinOpPP.

ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.

All three current limits IMinOpPE, IMinOpIN and IMinOpPP are

automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to
operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir=Reverse.

7.3.7.4 Measuring principles

Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The

232
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 28 (example

for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault).

UL1 UL2
Zapp = -------------------------
I L1 IL2
EQUATION1222 V1 EN (Equation 28)

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase.

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-E faults

(example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 29.

U L1
Z app =
I L1 + I N KN
EQUATION1223 V2 EN (Equation 29)

Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:

Z 0 - Z1
KN =
3 Z1
EQUATION-2105 V2 EN

Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN

Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN

Where
R0 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0 is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1 is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach
X1 is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current at the IED point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and

reactance X.

233
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

The formula given in equation 29 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications.
When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault, conventional
distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end.
IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such
applications.

Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter.
The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into
memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of
voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from
the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to
the loop impedance according to equation 30,

X Di
U = R i + ------ -----
w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN (Equation 30)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ ------------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION354 V1 EN (Equation 31)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ -----------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION355 V1 EN (Equation 32)

with

w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN (Equation 33)

where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value
of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for
the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:

234
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION357 V1 EN (Equation 34)

Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 Dt -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) DIm ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION358 V1 EN (Equation 35)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set
zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping
results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive
voltage transformers or by other factors.

The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked
positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited
directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

7.3.7.5 Directionality for series compensation

In the basic distance protection function, the control of the memory for polarizing
voltage is performed by an undervoltage control. In case of series compensated line,
a voltage reversal can occur with a relatively high voltage also when the memory must
be locked. Thus, a simple undervoltage type of voltage memory control can not be
used in case of voltage reversal. In the option for series compensated network the
polarizing quantity and memory are controlled by an impedance measurement
criterion.

The polarizing voltage is a memorized positive sequence voltage. The memory is

continuously synchronized via a positive sequence filter. The memory is starting to
run freely instantaneously when a voltage change is detected in any phase. A non-
directional impedance measurement is used to detect a fault and identify the faulty
phase or phases.

At a three phase fault when no positive sequence voltage remains (all three phases are
disconnected) the memory is used for direction polarization during 100 ms.

The memory predicts the phase of the positive sequence voltage with the pre-fault
frequency. This extrapolation is made with a high accuracy and it is not the accuracy
of the memory that limits the time the memory can be used. The network is at a three
phase fault under way to a new equilibrium and the post-fault condition can only be
predicted accurately for a limited time from the pre-fault condition.

In case of a three phase fault after 100 ms the phase of the memorized voltage can not
be relied upon and the directional measurement has to be blocked. The achieved
direction criteria are sealed-in when the directional measurement is blocked and kept
until the impedance fault criteria is reset (the direction is stored until the fault is
cleared).

235
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

This memory control allows in the time domain unlimited correct directional
measurement for all unsymmetrical faults also at voltage reversal. Only at three phase
fault within the range of the set impedance reach of the criteria for control of the
polarization voltage the memory has to be used and the measurement is limited to 100
ms and thereafter the direction is sealed-in. The special impedance measurement to
control the polarization voltage is set separately and has only to cover (with some
margin) the impedance to fault that can cause the voltage reversal.

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance

quadrilateral, including series compensation (ZDSRDIR) function. Equation 36 and
equation 37 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for phase-to-earth
fault and phase-to-phase fault.

U 1L1M
- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION2004 V2 EN (Equation 36)

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to:

U 1L1L 2 M
- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1L 2
EQUATION2006 V2 EN (Equation 37)

where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 115 degrees, see Figure 102.
U1L1M is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1

IL1 is phase current in phase L1

U1L1L2M is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

IL1L2 is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively, see Figure 102, and it should not be changed unless system studies have
shown the necessity.

ZDSRDIR generates a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the
evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4.

236
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

ArgNegRes

ArgDir
R

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN

Figure 102: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.

7.3.7.6 Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops: phase-
to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by Ln, where n represents the

corresponding phase number (L1, L2, and L3). The phase-to-phase signals are
designated by LnLm, where n and m represent the corresponding phase numbers
(L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1).

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 103.

Two types of function block, ZMCPDIS and ZMCAPDIS, are used in the IED.
ZMCPDIS is used for zone 1 and ZMCAPDIS for zone 2 - 5.

237
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone
measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition
separately. It is connected to Phase selection with load enchroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic (FDPSPDIS) function output STCNDZ.

STZMPP
OR
STCND

AND STNDL1L2
L1L2

STNDL2L3
L2L3 AND

L3L1 AND STNDL3L1

AND STNDL1N
L1N

AND STNDL2N
L2N

STNDL3N
L3N AND

OR STPE

OR
VTSZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLOCFUNC BLK

99000557-2.vsd
IEC99000557-TIFF V3 EN

Figure 103: Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND

Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-
directional mode, is presented in figure 104.

238
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

IEC00000488-TIFF V1 EN

Figure 104: Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 105.

STNDL1N
AND
DIRL1N
STZMPE.
OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND

STNDL3N 15 ms
OR STL1
AND AND t
DIRL3N

STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2 AND 15 ms
OR STL2
AND t
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3 AND
15 ms
OR STL3
STNDL3L1 AND t
DIRL3L1 AND

STZMPP
OR

BLK

15 ms
OR START
AND t

IEC09000888-2-en.vsd
IEC09000888 V2 EN

Figure 105: Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in
figure 106.

239
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Timer tPP=On
STZMPP AND tPP
AND
t

BLOCFUNC
OR OR
tPE
t
AND
Timer tPE=On AND
STZMPE 15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP
BLK OR

STL1 AND TRL1

STL2 AND TRL2

STL3 AND TRL3

IEC09000887-3-en.vsdx

IEC09000887 V3 EN

Figure 106: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

7.3.8 Technical data

Table 117: ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS Technical data
Function
Number of zones
Minimum operate residual
current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph
and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance
Positive sequence resistance
Zero sequence reactance
Zero sequence resistance
Fault resistance, Ph-E
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph
Dynamic overreach
Definite time delay Ph-Ph and
Ph-E operation
Table continues on next page
Range or value Accuracy
Max 5 with selectable direction -
(5-1000)% of IBase -
(10-1000)% of IBase -
(0.10-3000.00) /phase 2.0% static accuracy
2.0 degrees static angular
(0.10-1000.00) /phase accuracy
(0.01-9000.00) /phase Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
(0.01-3000.00) /phase Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
(0.10-9000.00) /loop Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
(0.10-3000.00) /loop
<5% at 85 degrees measured -
with CCVTs and 0.5<SIR<30
(0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater

240
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 x Min. = 20 ms -
Zreach Max. = 50 ms

7.4 Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic

ZMHPDIS

7.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE
identification C37.2 device
number
Full-scheme distance protection, mho ZMHPDIS 21
characteristic

S00346 V1 EN

7.4.2 Functionality
The numerical mho line distance protection is a, up to four zone full scheme protection
for back-up detection of short circuit and earth faults.

The four zones have fully independent measuring and settings, which gives high
flexibility for all types of lines.

The IED can be used up to the highest voltage levels. It is suitable for the protection
of heavily loaded lines and multi-terminal lines where the requirement for tripping is
one-, two- and/or three-pole.

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable phase selection makes the function suitable in applications with
single phase autoreclosing.

Built-in selectable zone timer logic is also provided in the function.

Adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching at phase-to-earth faults

on heavily loaded power lines, see Figure 107.

241
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

jX

Operation area Operation area

Operation area

No operation area No operation area

IEC07000117-2-en.vsd
IEC07000117 V2 EN

Figure 107: Load encroachment influence on the offset mho characteristic

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode (offset). This makes them suitable,
together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and
cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines
and so on.

The possibility to use the phase-to-earth quadrilateral impedance characteristic

together with the mho characteristic increases the possibility to overcome eventual
lack of sensitivity of the mho element due to the shaping of the curve at remote end
faults.

The integrated control and monitoring functions offer effective solutions for operating
and monitoring all types of transmission and sub-transmission lines.

7.4.3 Function block

ZMHPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
CURR_INP* TRL2
VOLT_INP* TRL3
POL_VOLT* TRPE
BLOCK TRPP
BLKZ START
BLKZMTD STL1
BLKHSIR STL2
BLKTRIP STL3
BLKPE STPE
BLKPP STPP
EXTNST STTIMER
INTRNST
DIRCND
STCND*
LDCND

IEC06000423-2-en.vsd
IEC06000423 V3 EN

Figure 108: ZMHPDIS function block

242
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.4.4 Signals

Table 118: ZMHPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Connection for current sample signals
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Connection for voltage sample signals
SIGNAL
CURR_INP GROUP - Connection for current signals
SIGNAL
VOLT_INP GROUP - Connection for voltage signals
SIGNAL
POL_VOLT GROUP - Connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Block due to fuse failure
BLKZMTD BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for blocking of time domaine function
BLKHSIR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks time domain function at high SIR
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all operate output signals
BLKPE BOOLEAN 0 Blocks phase-to-earth operation
BLKPP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks phase-to-phase operation
EXTNST BOOLEAN 0 External start
INTRNST BOOLEAN 0 Internal start
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
LDCND INTEGER 0 External load condition (loop enabler)

Table 119: ZMHPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip General
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip phase L3
TRPE BOOLEAN Trip phase-to-earth
TRPP BOOLEAN Trip phase-to-phase
START BOOLEAN Start General
STL1 BOOLEAN Start phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start phase L3
STPE BOOLEAN Start phase-to-earth
STPP BOOLEAN Start phase-to-phase
STTIMER BOOLEAN Start timer

243
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.4.5 Settings

Table 120: ZMHPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
DirMode Off - - Forward Direction mode
Offset
Forward
Reverse
LoadEncMode Off - - Off Load encroachment mode Off/On
On
ReachMode Overreach - - Overreach Reach mode Over/Underreach
Underreach
ZnTimerSel Timers seperated - - Timers seperated Zone timer selection
Timers linked
Internal start
Start from PhSel
External start
OpModePE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
ZPE 0.005 - 3000.000 Ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Positive sequence impedance setting for
Phase-Earth loop
ZAngPE 10 - 90 Deg 1 85 Angle for positive sequence line
impedance for Phase-Earth loop
KN 0.00 - 3.00 - 0.01 0.80 Magnitude of earth return compensation
factor KN
KNAng -180 - 180 Deg 1 -15 Angle for earth return compensation
factor KN
ZRevPE 0.005 - 3000.000 Ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Reverse reach of the phase to earth
loop(magnitude)
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay time for operation of phase to earth
elements
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operation phase to earth current
OpModePP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Phase
On loops
ZPP 0.005 - 3000.000 Ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Impedance setting reach for phase to
phase elements
ZAngPP 10 - 90 Deg 1 85 Angle for positive sequence line
impedance for Phase-Phase elements
ZRevPP 0.005 - 3000.000 Ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Reverse reach of the phase to phase
loop(magnitude)
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay time for operation of phase to phase
IMinOpPP 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operation phase to phase
current

244
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 121: ZMHPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OffsetMhoDir Non-directional - - Non-directional Direction mode for offset mho
Forward
Reverse
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-ph

Table 122: ZMHPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.4.6 Operation principle

7.4.6.1 Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which
means that each fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults are
executed in parallel for all zones.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. So each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection function with six measuring elements.

7.4.6.2 Impedance characteristic

Each instance can be selected to be either forward or reverse with positive sequence
polarized mho characteristic; alternatively self polarized offset mho characteristics is
also available. One example of the operating characteristic is shown in Figure 109 A)
where zone 5 is selected offset mho.

The directional mho characteristic of Figure 109 B) has a dynamic expansion due to
the source impedance. Instead of mho characteristic crossing origin, which is only
valid where the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is moved to the
coordinates of the negative source impedance giving an expansion of the circle of
Figure 109 B).

245
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

A B
jx X

Mho, zone4

Mho, zone3 Zs=0

Mho, zone2 R

Mho, zone1

Zs=Z1

Zs=2Z1

R
Offset mho, zone5

IEC09000143-3-en.vsd

IEC09000143 V3 EN

Figure 109: Mho, offset mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the mho characteristic

The polarization quantities used for the mho circle are 100% memorized positive
sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho
circle during faults than a plain cross polarized characteristic. However, if the source
impedance is high, the dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the security
of the function too much with high loading and mild power swing conditions.

The mho distance element has a load encroachment function which cuts off a section
of the characteristic when enabled. The function is enabled by setting the setting
parameter LoadEnchMode to On. Enabling of the load encroachment function
increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering with the load
impedance. The algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the Faulty phase
identification with load encroachment for mho function FMPSPDIS, where also the
relevant settings can be found. Information about the load encroachment from
FMPSPDIS to the zone measurement is given in binary format to the input signal
LDCND.

7.4.6.3 Basic operation characteristics

Each impedance zone can be switched On and Off by the setting parameter
Operation.

Each zone can be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the parameter
DirMode .

246
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

The operation for phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase fault can be individually

switched On and Off by the setting parameter OpModePE and OpModePP.

For critical applications such as for lines with high SIRs as well as CVTs, it is possible
to improve the security by setting the parameter ReachMode to Underreach. In this
mode the reach for faults close to the zone reach is reduced by 20% and the filtering
is also introduced to increase the accuracy in the measuring. If the ReachMode is set to
Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and no extra filtering introduced.
The latter setting is recommended for overreaching pilot zone, zone 2 or zone 3
elements and reverse zone where overreaching on transients is not a major issue either
because of less likelihood of overreach with higher settings or the fact that these
elements do not initiate tripping unconditionally.

The offset Mho characteristic can be set in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by

the setting parameter OffsetMhoDir. When Forward or Reverse is selected a
directional line is introduced. Information about the directional line is given from the
directional element and given to the measuring element as binary coded signal to the
input DIRCND.

The zone reach for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault is set individually in
polar coordinates.

The impedance is set by the parameters ZPE and ZPP and the corresponding
arguments by the parameters ZAngPE and ZAngPP.

Compensation for earth -return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the
parameter KNMag and KNAng where KNMag is the magnitude of the earth-return
path and KNAng is the difference of angles between KNMag and ZPE .

Z0-Z1
KNMag =
3 Z1
EQUATION1579 V1 EN (Equation 38)

KNAng = arg
( Z 0 - Z1

3 Z1
)
EQUATION1580 V1 EN (Equation 39)

where
Z0 is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in /phase
Z1 is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in /phase

The phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase measuring loops can be time delayed

individually by setting the parameter tPE and tPP respectively. To release the time

247
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

delay, the operation mode for the timers, OpModetPE and OpModetPP, has to be set
to On. This is also the case for instantaneous operation.

The operate timers triggering input depends on the parameter ZnTimerSel setting. The
parameter ZnTimerSel can be set to:

Timers separated: Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the

respective measuring loop start signals.
Timers linked: Start of any of the phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase loops will
trigger both the phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase timers.
Internal start: Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the
INTRNST input.
Start from PhSel: The phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by
the STCND and LDCND inputs. Each of the two inputs consist binary status
information related to the six measuring loops. Hence if any of the measuring
loop status is high in both two inputs STCND and LDCND, then the timers will be
triggered. In case when LoadEnchMode is off then only STCND enables the timer.

It is not recommended to use this timer setting for the Zone

instance where LoadEnchMode is off.

External start: Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the

EXTNST input.

The function can be blocked in the following ways:

activating of input BLOCK blocks the whole function

activating of the input BLKZ (fuse failure) blocks all output signals
activating of the input BLKZMTD blocks the delta based time domain algorithm
activating of the input BLKHSIR blocks the instantaneous part of the algorithm
for high SIR values
activating of the input BLKTRIP blocks all output signals
activating the input BLKPE blocks the phase-to-earth fault loop outputs
activating the input BLKPP blocks the phase-to-phase fault loop outputs

The activation of input signal BLKZ can be made by external fuse failure function or
from the loss of voltage check in the Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC). In both
cases the output BLKZ in the Mho supervision logic shall be connected to the input
BLKZ in the Mho distance function block (ZMHPDIS)

The input signal BLKZMTD is activated during some ms after fault has been detected
by ZSMGAPC to avoid unwanted operations due to transients. It shall be connected
to the BLKZMTD output signal of ZSMGAPC function.

At SIR values >10, the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the built-
in resonance circuit in the CVT, which reduce the secondary voltage for a while. The
input BLKHSIR is connected to the output signal HSIR on ZSMGAPC for increasing

248
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

of the filtering and high SIR values. This is valid only when permissive underreach
scheme is selected by setting ReachMode=Underreach.

7.4.6.4 Theory of operation

The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of an operating phasor and a
polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference polarizing phasor by
90 degrees or more, the function operates and gives a trip output.

Phase-to-phase fault

Mho
The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as in Figure 110. The condition for deriving
the angle is according to equation 40.

EQUATION1789 V2 EN (Equation 40)

where

U L1L2 is the voltage vector difference between phases L1 and L2

EQUATION1790 V2
EN

I L1L2 is the current vector difference between phases L1 and L2

EQUATION1791 V2
EN

ZPP is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault

Upol is the polarizing voltage

The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage

(UL1L2 for phase L1 to L2 fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of the
Mho circle for close in faults.

Operation occurs if 90270

249
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

IL1L2X
Ucomp = UL1L2 - IL1L2 ZPP

IL1L2 ZPP

Upol
UL1L2

IL1L2R

en07000109.vsd
IEC07000109 V1 EN

Figure 110: Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase L1-to-L2
fault

Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the
setting parameters ZPP and ZRevPP. The vector ZPP in the impedance plane has the
settable angle AngZPP and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPP+180.

The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle between the two
compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater than or equal to 90 (figure
111). The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.

The angle for L1-to-L2 fault can be defined according to equation 41.

U -IL1L2 ZPP
b = arg
U-(-IL1L2 ZRevPP)
EQUATION1792 V1 EN (Equation 41)

where

U is the UL1L2 voltage

EQUATION1800 V1 EN

ZRevPP is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in reverse direction

250
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

IL1L2jX

Ucomp1 = UL1L2 - IL1L2 ZPP

IL1L2 ZPP

U
Ucomp2 = U = IFZF=UL1L2
IL1L2R

- IL1L2 Z RevPP
en07000110.vsd

IEC07000110 V1 EN

Figure 111: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase L1-
to-L2 fault.

Operation occurs if 90270.

Offset mho, forward direction

When forward direction has been selected for the offset mho, an extra criteria beside
the one for offset mho (90<<270) is introduced, that is the angle between the
voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second quadrant and fourth
quadrant. See figure 112. Operation occurs if 90270 and ArgDirArgNegRes.

where
ArgDir is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
ArgNegRes is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
is calculated according to equation 41

The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the mho
directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) for information
about the mho directional element.

251
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

IL1L2jX

ZPP

UL1L2

ArgNegRes f

IL1L2
ArgDir

en07000111.vsd
IEC07000111 V1 EN

Figure 112: Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase L1-
to-L2 fault

Offset mho, reverse direction

The operation area for offset mho in reverse direction is according to figure 113. The
operation area in second quadrant is ArgNegRes+180.

Operation occurs if 90270 and 180 - ArgDir ArgNegRes + 180

The is derived according to equation 41 for the mho circle and is the angle between
the voltage and current.

252
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

ZPP

ArgNegRes

IL1L2

ArgDir R

UL1L2

ZRevPP

en06000469.eps
IEC06000469 V1 EN

Figure 113: Operation characteristic for reverse phase L1-to-L2 fault

Phase-to-earth fault

Mho
The measuring of earth faults uses earth-return compensation applied in a
conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence
from the earth-return path.

For an earth fault in phase L1, the compensation voltage Ucomp can be derived, as
shown in Figure 114.

253
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Ucomp = U pol - I L1 Z loop

EQUATION1793 V1 EN (Equation 42)

where
Upol is the polarizing voltage (memorized UL1 for Phase L1-to- earth fault)

Zloop is the loop impedance, which in general terms can be expressed as

(
Z1+ZN = Z 1 1 + KN )
where
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance of the line (Ohm/phase)

KN is the zero-sequence compensator factor

The angle between the Ucomp and the polarize voltage Upol for a L1-to-earth fault
is

= arg U L1 I L1 + 3I 0 KN ZPE arg (Upol )

( )

GUID-A9492CDF-D3B7-4DC5-8E06-6638BEE2540B V2 EN (Equation 43)

where
UL1 is the phase voltage in faulty phase L1

IL1 is the phase current in faulty phase L1

3I0 is the zero-sequence current in faulty phase L1

KN Z0-Z1
3 Z1
the setting parameter for the zero sequence
compensation consisting of the magnitude KN and
the angle KNAng.
Upol is the 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage
UL1

254
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

IL1X

IL1ZN
Ucomp

IL1 Zloop
IL1ZPE
Upol

f
IL1 (Ref) IL1R

en06000472_2.vsd
IEC06000472 V2 EN

Figure 114: Simplified offset mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase L1-
to-earth fault

Operation occurs if 90270.

Offset mho
The characteristic for offset mho at earth fault is a circle containing the two vectors
from the origin ZPE and ZRevPE where ZPE and ZrevPE are the setting reach for the
positive sequence impedance in forward respective reverse direction. The vector ZPE
in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPE and the angle for ZRevPP is
AngZPE+180.

The condition for operation at phase-to-earth fault is that the angle between the two
compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90 see figure 115.
The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.

The angle for L1-to-earth fault can be defined as

UL1- IL1L ZPE

b = arg
UL1-(- IL1 Z Re vPE )
EQUATION1802 V1 EN (Equation 44)

is the phase L1 voltage

U L1
EQUATION1
805 V1 EN

255
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

IL1L 2 jX

U comp1 = UL1 - I L1 ZPE

IL1 ZPE

UL1
U comp2 = UL1 - (-IL1 ZRevPE)
IL1L2 R

- I L1 Z Re vPe

en 06000465.vsd
IEC06000465 V1 EN

Figure 115: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase L1-
to-earth fault

Operation occurs if 90270.

Offset mho, forward direction

In the same way as for phase-to-phase fault, selection of forward direction of offset
mho will introduce an extra criterion for operation. Beside the basic criteria for offset
mho according to equation 44 and 90270, also the criteria that the angle between
the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second and fourth
quadrant. See figure 116. Operation occurs if 90270 and ArgDirArgNegRes.

where
ArgDir is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
ArgNegRes is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
is calculated according to equation 44

256
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

IL1 jX

UL1

ArgNegRes f

IL1 IL1R

ArgDir

en 06000466.vsd
IEC06000466 V1 EN

Figure 116: Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for L1-to-
earth fault

Offset mho, reverse direction

In the same way as for offset in forward direction, the selection of offset mho in
reverse direction will introduce an extra criterion for operation compare to the normal
offset mho. The extra is that the angle between the fault voltage and the fault current
shall lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. The operation area in
second quadrant is limited by the blinder defined as 180 -ArgDir and in fourth
quadrant ArgNegRes+180, see figure 117.

The conditions for operation of offset mho in reverse direction for L1-to-earth fault is
90270 and 180-ArgdirArgNegRes+180.

The is derived according to equation 44 for the offset mho circle and is the angle
between the voltage and current.

257
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

ZPE

ArgNegRes

IL
1
ArgDir R

UL1
ZRevPE

en06000470.eps
IEC06000470 V1 EN

Figure 117: Simplified characteristic for offset mho in reverse direction for L1-to-
earth fault

7.4.6.5 Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops:
phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by L1N, L2N and L3N. The phase-to-
phase signals are designated by L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1.

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 118.

The ZMHPDIS function block is used in the IED for each zone.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
Phase selection with load encroachment function FMPSPDIS within the IED, which

258
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean
expressions for each condition separately. Input signal STCND is connected from
FMPSPDIS function output signal STCNDPHS.

The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance
measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the relevant signals
depending on the setting of the parameter DirMode. Input signal DIRCND must be
configured to the STDIRCND output signal on ZDMRDIR function.

OffsetMhoDir=
Non-directional
AND AND
DirMode=Offset

STCND T
AND F

AND
LoadEnchMode=
On/Off
LDCND
T
True F
AND Release

DIRCND

OffsetMhoDir=
Forward/Reverse
AND
DirMode=
Forward/Reverse

BLKZ
BLOCK OR

IEC11000216-1-en.vsd
IEC11000216 V1 EN

Figure 118: Simplified logic for release start signal

When load encroachment mode is switched on (LoadEnchMode=On), start signal

STCND is also checked against LDCND signal.

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 118.

Composition of the phase start signals is presented in figure 75.

259
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Release STPE
OR

AND
STL1N STL1
OR

AND
STL2N

AND
STL3N
STL2
OR
AND
STL1L2

AND
STL2L3
STL3
OR
AND
STL3L1

START
OR

STPP
OR

IEC11000217-1-en.vsd
IEC11000217 V1 EN

Figure 119: Composition of starting signals

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in
figure 77.

260
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Timer tPP=On tPP

AND t
STPP
OR
Timer tPE=On tPE
AND t
STPE

15ms
BLKTRIP AND t
TRIP

STL1 AND TRL1

AND TRL2
STL2

STL3 AND TRL3

IEC11000218-1-en.vsd
IEC11000218 V1 EN

Figure 120: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone

Zone timer logic for the distance protection is symbolically presented in figure 121.

STPE

BLOCK
TRPE
&
tON
& 1 t
a
Internal a=b
start b STTIMER
&

Internal
a
a<b
start b
tON
1 t && TRPP
&

STPP
ZnTimerSel
FALSE 1 timers seperated

1 2 timers linked
internalCommonStart
3 internal start
phSelStart 4 start from phSel
externalCommonStart
5 external start

IEC12000463-3-en.vsd

IEC12000463 V2 EN

Figure 121: Zone timer logic

261
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.4.7 Technical data

Table 123: ZMHPDIS technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones, Ph-E -
Minimum operate current (1030)% of IBase -
Positive sequence impedance, (0.0053000.000) W/phase 2.0% static accuracy
Ph-E loop Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Positive sequence impedance (1090) degrees
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
angle, Ph-E loop
Angle: 85 degrees
Reverse reach, Ph-E loop (0.0053000.000) /phase
(Magnitude)
Magnitude of earth return (0.003.00)
compensation factor KN
Angle for earth compensation (-180180) degrees
factor KN
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured -
with CVTs and 0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay Ph-Ph and Ph- (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 60 ms whichever is
E operation greater
Operate time 22 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.5 to 1.5 x Zreach Min = 30 ms -
Max = 45 ms

7.5 Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for

earth faults ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS

7.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fullscheme distance protection, ZMMPDIS 21
quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 1)

S00346 V1 EN

Fullscheme distance protection, ZMMAPDIS 21

quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 2-5)

S00346 V1 EN

262
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.5.2 Functionality
The line distance protection is an up to five (depending on product variant) zone full
scheme protection function with three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault for each of
the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and reactive reach
give flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.

The Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth fault functions have
functionality for load encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect high
resistive faults on heavily loaded lines , see Figure 64.

Forward
operation

Reverse
operation

en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN

Figure 122: Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase selection,
quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle function FRPSPDIS
activated

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.

Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone1 at load

exporting end at phase to earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.

263
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.5.3 Function block

ZMMPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
BLKZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC06000454-2-en.vsd
IEC06000454 V2 EN

Figure 123: ZMMPDIS function block

ZMMAPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
BLKZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC09000947-1-en.vsd
IEC09000947 V1 EN

Figure 124: ZMMAPDIS function block

7.5.4 Signals
Table 124: ZMMPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Table 125: ZMMPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
Table continues on next page

264
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

Table 126: ZMMAPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Table 127: ZMMAPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

265
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.5.5 Settings
Table 128: ZMMPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
RFPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate residual current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 129: ZMMPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

Table 130: ZMMAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
RFPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
Table continues on next page

266
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 131: ZMMAPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.5.6 Operation principle

7.5.6.1 Full scheme measurement

The different fault loops within the IED are operating in parallel in the same principle
as a full scheme measurement.

Figure 125 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones l.

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 5

en07000080.vsd
IEC07000080 V1 EN

Figure 125: The different measuring loops at line-earth fault and phase-phase
fault.

7.5.6.2 Impedance characteristic

The distance measuring zone include three impedance measuring loops; one fault loop
for each phase.

The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional
impedance characteristics presented in Figure 126. The characteristic is illustrated
with the full loop reach.

267
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+Rn

RFPE RFPE

X0PE-X1PE
Xn =
3
X1PE+Xn R0PE-R1PE
Rn =
3
jN jN
R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE RFPE

X1PE+Xn

RFPE RFPE
en08000280-2-en.vsd

R1PE+Rn
IEC08000280 V1 EN

Figure 126: Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop

domain.

The fault loop reach may also be presented as in Figure 127.

ILn R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 ) en06000412.vsd
IEC06000412 V1 EN

Figure 127: Fault loop model

268
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

The R1 and jX1 in Figure 127 represent the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE is presented in order to convey the
fault resistance reach.

The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward, Off or Reverse direction
through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in
Figure 128. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it is conform for
forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

IEC05000182-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000182 V2 EN

Figure 128: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

7.5.6.3 Minimum operating current

The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.

For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.

ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector sum
of the three phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.

Both current limits IMinOpPE and IMinOpIN are automatically

reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in
reverse direction, that is, OperationDir=Reverse.

269
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.5.6.4 Measuring principles

Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits.

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3).

The calculation of the apparant impedances at phase-to-earth fault follow equation 45

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner.

U L1
Z app =
I L1 + I N KN
EQUATION1223 V2 EN (Equation 45)

Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:

Z 0 - Z1
KN =
3 Z1
EQUATION-2105 V2 EN

Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN

Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN

Where
R0 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0 is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1 is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach
X1 is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same reach
along the line for all types of faults.

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and

reactance X.

270
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

The formula given in equation 45 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications.
When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault, conventional
distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end.
IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such
applications.

Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter.
The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into
memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of
voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from
the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to
the loop impedance according to equation 46,

X Di
U = R i + ------ -----
w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN (Equation 46)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ ------------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION354 V1 EN (Equation 47)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ -----------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION355 V1 EN (Equation 48)

with

w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN (Equation 49)

where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value
of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for
the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:

271
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION357 V1 EN (Equation 50)

Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 Dt -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) DIm ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION358 V1 EN (Equation 51)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set
zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping
results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive
voltage transformers or by other factors.

The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked
positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited
directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

7.5.6.5 Directionality

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the Directional impedance element
for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR function. Equation 52 is used to classify that the
fault is in forward direction for line-to-earth fault.

0.85 U1L1 + 0.15 U1L1M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION1617 V1 EN (Equation 52)

where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 115 degrees, see figure 129.
U1L1 is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1

U1L1M is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1

IL1 is phase current in phase L1

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 129) and it should not be changed unless system studies have
shown the necessity.

ZDMRDIR gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIRCND depending on the
evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4
etc.

272
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

ArgNegRes

ArgDir
R

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN

Figure 129: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds

5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.

After 100 ms, the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

273
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.5.6.6 Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring phase-to-earth
loops.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by LnE, where n represents the

corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E).

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 130.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone
measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition
separately. It is connected to the Phase selection with load enchroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS) function output STCNDZ.

The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance
measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals on the
DIRCND input depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It shall be
configured to the DIRCND output on the Directional impedance element for mho
characteristic (ZDMRDIR) function.

274
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

STCND

AND STNDL1N
L1N

AND STNDL2N
L2N

STNDL3N
L3N AND

OR STNDPE

OR
BLKZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLK

en06000408-2.vsd
IEC06000408 V2 EN

Figure 130: Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND

Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-
directional mode, is presented in figure 131.

STNDL1N 15 ms
AND t STL1

STNDL2N 15 ms
AND t STL2

STNDL3N 15 ms
AND t STL3

15 ms
AND t START
OR

BLK

en06000409.vsd
IEC06000409 V1 EN

Figure 131: Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 132.

275
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

STNDL1N
DIRL1N AND
OR STZMPE.
&
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND

STNDL3N 15 ms
STL1
& t
DIRL3N AND

15 ms
STL2
& t

15 ms
STL3
& t

BLK

15 ms
OR START
& t

en07000081.vsd
IEC07000081 V1 EN

Figure 132: Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in
figure 133.

Timer tPE=On tPE

AND t
STZMPE
15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP

STL1 AND TRL1

STL2 AND TRL2

STL3 AND TRL3

en07000082.vsd
IEC07000082 V1 EN

Figure 133: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

276
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.5.7 Technical data

Table 132: ZMMPDIS technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction -
Minimum operate current (10-30)% of IBase -
Positive sequence reactance (0.50-3000.00) W/phase 2.0% static accuracy
2.0 degrees static angular
Positive sequence resistance (0.10-1000.00) /phase accuracy
Zero sequence reactance (0.50-9000.00) /phase Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Zero sequence resistance (0.50-3000.00) /phase Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Fault resistance, Ph-E (1.00-9000.00) W/loop Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured -
with CCVTs and 0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay Ph-Ph and Ph- (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
E operation greater
Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms

7.6 Directional impedance element for mho

characteristic and additional distance protection
directional function for earth faults ZDMRDIR,
ZDARDIR

7.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional impedance element for mho ZDMRDIR 21D
characteristic

S00346 V1 EN

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Additional distance protection ZDARDIR -
directional function for earth faults

S00346 V1 EN

277
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.6.2 Functionality
The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be supervised by a phase unselective
directional function based on symmetrical components (option).

7.6.3 Function block

ZDMRDIR
I3P* DIR_CURR
U3P* DIR_VOLT
DIR_POL
STFW
STRV
STDIRCND

IEC06000422_2_en.vsd
IEC06000422 V2 EN

Figure 134: ZDMRDIR function block

ZDARDIR
I3P* STFWPE
U3P* STRVPE
I3PPOL* DIREFCND
DIRCND

IEC06000425-2-en.vsd
IEC06000425 V2 EN

Figure 135: ZDARDIR function block

7.6.4 Signals
Table 133: ZDMRDIR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

Table 134: ZDMRDIR Output signals

Name Type Description
CURR GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for current signals to Mho function
VOLT GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for voltage signals to Mho function
POL GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for polarization voltage signals to Mho
function
STFW BOOLEAN Start in forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start in reverse direction
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per measuring
loop

278
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 135: ZDARDIR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current signals
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage signals
SIGNAL
I3PPOL GROUP - Polarisation current signals
SIGNAL
DIRCND INTEGER 0 Binary coded directional signal

Table 136: ZDARDIR Output signals

Name Type Description
STFWPE BOOLEAN Forward start signal from phase-to-ground
directional element
STRVPE BOOLEAN Reverse start signal from phase-to-ground
directional element
DIREFCND INTEGER Start direction Binary coded

7.6.5 Settings
Table 137: ZDMRDIR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DirEvalType Impedance - - Comparator Directional evaluation mode Impedance /
Comparator Comparator
Imp/Comp
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 Deg 1 115 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for
forward direction
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase-phase current
for Phase-Phase loops

Table 138: ZDMRDIR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

279
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Table 139: ZDARDIR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PolMode -3U0 - - -3U0 Polarization quantity for opt dir function for
-U2 P-E faults
IPol
Dual
-3U0Comp
-U2comp
AngleRCA -90 - 90 Deg 1 75 Characteristic relay angle (= MTA or base
angle)
I> 5 - 200 %IB 1 5 Minimum operation current in % of IBase
UPol> 4 - 100 %UB 1 4 Minimum polarizing voltage in % of UBase
IPol> 5 - 100 %IB 1 10 Minimum polarizing current in % of IBase

Table 140: ZDARDIR Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AngleOp 90 - 180 Deg 1 160 Operation sector angle
Kmag 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 40.00 Boost-factor in -U0comp and -U2comp
polarization

Table 141: ZDARDIR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.6.6 Monitored data

Table 142: ZDMRDIR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
L2R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2
L2X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2
L3R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3
L3X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3

280
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.6.7 Operation principle

7.6.7.1 Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance element for
mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR). Equation 53 and equation 54 are used to classify that
the fault is in the forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault
respectively.

0.85 U1L1 + 0.15 U1L1M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION1617 V1 EN (Equation 53)

0.85 U1L1L 2 + 0.15 U1L1L 2M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1L 2
EQUATION1619 V1 EN (Equation 54)

Where:
ArgDir Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15
(= -15 degrees)
ArgNegRes Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
115 degrees, see figure 136 for mho characteristics.
U1L1 Positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1

U1L1M Positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1

IL1 Phase current in phase L1

U1L1L2 Voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

U1L1L2M Memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

IL1L2 Current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

The default settings for ArgDir and ArgNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 136) and they should not be changed unless system studies
show the necessity.

If one sets DirEvalType to Comparator (which is recommended when using the mho
characteristic) then the directional lines are computed by means of a comparator-type
calculation, meaning that the directional lines are based on mho-circles (of infinite
radius). The default setting value Impedance otherwise means that the directional
lines are implemented based on an impedance calculation equivalent to the one used
for the quadrilateral impedance characteristics.

When Directional impedance element for mho characteristic

(ZDMRDIR) is used together with Fullscheme distance protection,
mho characteristic (ZMHPDIS) the following settings for parameter
DirEvalType is vital:

281
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

alternative Comparator is strongly recommended

alternative Imp/Comp should generally not be used
alternative Impedance should not be used. This altenative is
intended for use together with Distance protection zone,
quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS)

X
Zset reach point

ArgNegRes

-ArgDir R

-Zs
en06000416.vsd

IEC06000416 V1 EN

Figure 136: Setting angles for discrimination of forward fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.

The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows: STDIRCND
= L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32

Example: If only L1Nstart, the value is 1, if start in L1N and L3N are detected, the
value is 1+4=5.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds

5% of the set base voltage UBase, thus the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored. After 100ms, the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the
condition seals in.

282
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

If the fault has caused tripping, the trip continues.

If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operate value, no directional
indications will be given until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its
rated value.

The Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) function has
the following output signals:

The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the evaluation and
is derived from a binary coded signal as follows:

bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6

(2048) (1024) (512) (256) (128) (64)
STRVL3L1= STRVL2L3= STRVL1L2= STRVL3N=1 STRVL2N=1 STRVL1N=1
1 1 1
bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
(32) (16) (8) (4) (2) (1)
STFWL3L1= STFWL2L3= STFWL1L2= STFWL3N=1 STFWL2N=1 STFWL1N=1
1 1 1

The STFW output is a logical signal with value 1 or 0. It is made up as an OR-function

of all the forward starting conditions, that is, STFWL1N, STFWL2N, STFWL3N,
STFWL1L2, STFWL2L3 and STFWL3L1. The STRV output is similar to the STFW
output, the only difference being that it is made up as an OR-function of all the reverse
starting conditions, that is, STRVL1N, STRVL2N, STRVL3N, STRVL1L2,
STRVL2L3 and STRVL3L1.

7.6.7.2 Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults

ZDARDIR

A Mho element needs a polarizing voltage to operate. The positive-sequence memory-

polarized elements are generally preferred. The benefits include:

The greatest amount of expansion for improved resistive coverage. These

elements always expand back to the source.
Memory action for all fault types. This is very important for close-in three-phase
faults.
A common polarizing reference for all six distance-measuring loops. This is
important for single-pole tripping, during a pole-open period.

There are however some situations that can cause security problems like reverse phase
to phase faults and double phase-to-earth faults during high load periods. To solve
these, additional directional element is used.

283
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

For phase-to-earth faults, directional elements using sequence components are very
reliable for directional discrimination. The directional element can be based on one of
following types of polarization:

Zero-sequence voltage
Negative-sequence voltage
Zero-sequence current

These additional directional criteria are evaluated in the Additional distance

protection directional function for earth faults (ZDARDIR).

Zero-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zero-
sequence voltage and the zero-sequence current at the location of the protection. The
measurement principle is illustrated in figure 137.

- 3U 0

AngleOp
AngleRCA

3I 0

en06000417.vsd
IEC06000417 V1 EN

Figure 137: Principle for zero-sequence voltage polarized additional directional

element

Negative-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the

negative-sequence voltage and the negative-sequence current at the location of the
protection.

Zero-sequence current polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zero-
sequence current at the location of the protection and some reference zero-sequence
current, for example, the current in the neutral of a power transformer.

The principle of zero-sequence voltage polarization with zero-sequence current

compensation is described in figure 138. The same also applies for the negative-
sequence function.

284
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Z0 SA I0 I0
Z0 Line Z0 SB
Charac te ris tic
ang le
U0 U0
K*I0

U0 + K*I0
IF
en06000418.vsd
IEC06000418 V1 EN

Figure 138: Principle for zero sequence compensation

Note that the sequence based additional directional element cannot give per phase
information about direction to fault. This is why it is an AND-function with the normal
directional element that works on a per phase base. The enable signals are per phase
and to enable the measuring element in a specific phase, both the additional directional
element and the normal directional element, for that phase must indicate correct
direction.

These polarization quantities, voltage and current, are stabilized against minimum
polarizing voltage (UPOL>) and current (IPOL>). That means if polarizing voltage is
greater than UPOL> setting, and if polarizing current is greater than IPol>, then only
they are used for direction determination.

Normal
directional Release of distance
element measuring element
L1N, L2N, L3N L1N, L2N, L3N
AND

Additional
directional AND per
element phase

en06000419.vsd
IEC06000419 V1 EN

Figure 139: Earth distance element directional supervision

7.7 Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC

7.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Mho Impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC - -

285
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.7.2 Functionality
The Mho impedance supervision logic (ZSMGAPC) includes features for fault
inception detection and high SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for loss
of potential logic as well as for the pilot channel blocking scheme.

ZSMGAPC can mainly be decomposed in two different parts:

1. A fault inception detection logic

2. High SIR detection logic

7.7.3 Function block

ZSMGAPC
I3P* BLKZMTD
U3P* BLKCHST
BLOCK CHSTOP
REVSTART HSIR
BLOCKCS
CBOPEN

IEC06000426-2-en.vsd
IEC06000426 V2 EN

Figure 140: ZSMGAPC function block

7.7.4 Signals
Table 143: ZSMGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase current samples and DFT magnitude
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase phase-neutral voltage samples and
SIGNAL DFT magnitude
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of the function
REVSTART BOOLEAN 0 Indication of reverse start
BLOCKCS BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the blocking carrier signal to remote end
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Indicates that the breaker is open

Table 144: ZSMGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLKZMTD BOOLEAN Block signal for blocking of time domained mho
BLKCHST BOOLEAN Blocking signal to remote end to block
overreaching zone
CHSTOP BOOLEAN Stops the blocking signal to remote end
HSIR BOOLEAN Indication of source impedance ratio above set limit

286
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.7.5 Settings
Table 145: ZSMGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PilotMode Off - - Off Pilot mode Off/On
On
Zreach 0.1 - 3000.0 Ohm 0.1 38.0 Line impedance
IMinOp 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operating current for SIR
measurement

Table 146: ZSMGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DeltaI 0 - 200 %IB 1 10 Current change level in % of IBase for fault
inception detection
Delta3I0 0 - 200 %IB 1 10 Zero seq current change level in % of
IBase
DeltaU 0 - 100 %UB 1 5 Voltage change level in % of UBase for
fault inception detection
Delta3U0 0 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero seq voltage change level in % of
UBase
SIRLevel 5 - 15 - 1 10 Settable level for source impedance ratio

Table 147: ZSMGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.7.6 Operation principle

7.7.6.1 Fault inception detection

The aim for the fault inception detector is to quickly detect that a fault has occurred in
the system. The fault detector detects a fault when there is a sufficient change in at
least one current and at the same time there is a sufficient change in at least one
voltage. A change is defined roughly by the difference between the present
instantaneous value and the one from one power system cycle before. The change is
sufficient if it exceeds the related threshold value. DeltaI and DeltaU for phase
currents and voltages. Delta3I0 and Delta3U0 for residual current and voltage.

If the setting PilotMode is set to On in blocking scheme and the fault inception
function has detected a system fault, a block signal BLKCHST is issued and send to
remote end in order to block the overreaching zones. Different criteria has to be
fulfilled for sending the BLKCHST signal:

287
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

1. The setting PilotMode has to be set to On

2. The breaker has to be closed, that is, the input signal CBOPEN should not be
actived
3. A reverse fault should have been detected while the carrier send signal is not
blocked, that is, input signal REVSTART is activated and input signal BLOCKCS
is not activated or a fault inception is detected and input signal CSBLOCK is not
activated.

If it is later detected that it was an internal fault that made the function issue the
BLKCHST signal, the function issues a CHSTOP signal to unblock the remote end. The
criteria that have to be fulfilled for this are:

1. The function has to be in pilot mode, that is, the setting PilotMode has to be set to
On
2. The carrier send signal should be blocked, that is, input signal BLOCKCS is On
and,
3. A reverse fault should not have been detected while the carrier send signal was
not blocked, that is, input REVSTART should not have been activated before
BLOCKCS.

If loss of voltage is detected, but not a fault inception, the distance protection function
is blocked. This is also the case if a fuse failure is detected by the external fuse failure
function and activate the input FUSEFAIL. Those blocks are generated by activating
the output BLKZ, which are connected to the input BLKZ on the distance Mho function
block.

During fault inception a lot of transients are developed which in turn might cause the
distance function to overreach. The Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC) increases the
filtering during the most transient period of the fault. This is done by activating the
output BLKZMTD, which is connected to the input BLKZMTD on mho distance
function block.

High SIR detection

High SIR values increases the likelihood that CVT will introduce a prolonged and
distorted transient, increasing the risk for overreach of the distance function.

The SIR function calculates the SIR value as the source impedance divided by the
setting Zreach and activates the output signal HSIR if the calculated value for any of
the six basic shunt faults exceed the setting SIRLevel. The HSIR signal is intended to
block the delta based mho impedance function.

288
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.8 Faulty phase identification with load encroachment

FMPSPDIS

7.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Faulty phase identification with load FMPSPDIS 21
encroachment for mho

S00346 V1 EN

7.8.2 Functionality
The ability to accurately and reliably classify different types of fault so that single
phase tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important roll in today's power
systems.

The phase selection function is design to accurately select the proper fault loop(s) in
the distance function dependent on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some
cases interfere with the distance protection zone reach and cause unwanted operation.
Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the
possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of the measuring zones without interfering
with the load.

The output signals from the phase selection function produce important information
about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis as well.

7.8.3 Function block

FMPSPDIS
I3P* STL1
U3P* STL2
BLOCK STL3
ZSTART STPE
TR3PH STCNDPHS
1POLEAR STCNDPLE
STCNDLE
START

IEC06000429-2-en.vsd
IEC06000429 V2 EN

Figure 141: FMPSPDIS function block

289
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.8.4 Signals
Table 148: FMPSPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
ZSTART BOOLEAN 0 Start from underimpdeance function
TR3PH BOOLEAN 0 Three phase tripping initiated
1POLEAR BOOLEAN 0 Single pole autoreclosing in progress

Table 149: FMPSPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
STL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3
STPE BOOLEAN Earth fault detected
STCNDPHS INTEGER Binary coded starts from phase selection
STCNDPLE INTEGER Binary coded starts from ph sel with load
encroachment
STCNDLE INTEGER Binary coded starts from load encroachment only
START BOOLEAN Indicates that something has started

7.8.5 Settings
Table 150: FMPSPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IMaxLoad 10 - 5000 %IB 1 200 Maximum load for identification of three
phase fault in % of IBase
RLd 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Load encroachment resistive reach in
ohm/phase
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 20 Load encroachment inclination of load
angular sector

Table 151: FMPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DeltaIMinOp 5 - 100 %IB 1 10 Delta current level in % of IBase
DeltaUMinOp 5 - 100 %UB 1 20 Delta voltage level in % of UBase
U1Level 5 - 100 %UB 1 80 Pos seq voltage limit for identification of 3-
ph fault
Table continues on next page

290
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

I1LowLevel 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Pos seq current level for identification of 3-
ph fault in % of IBase
U1MinOp 5 - 100 %UB 1 20 Minimum operate positive sequence
voltage for ph sel
U2MinOp 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Minimum operate negative sequence
voltage for ph sel
INRelPE 10 - 100 %IB 1 20 3I0 limit for release ph-e measuring loops
in % of max phase current
INBlockPP 10 - 100 %IB 1 40 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase
measuring loops in % of max phase
current

Table 152: FMPSPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.8.6 Operation principle

7.8.6.1 The phase selection function

Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS) function
can be decomposed into six different parts:

1. A high speed delta based current phase selector

2. A high speed delta based voltage phase selector
3. A symmetrical components based phase selector
4. Fault evaluation and selection logic
5. A load encroachment logic
6. A blinder logic

The total function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

Delta based current and voltages

The delta based fault detection function uses adaptive technique and is based on patent
US4409636.

The aim of the delta based phase selector is to provide very fast and reliable phase
selection for releasing of tripping from the high speed Mho measuring element and is
essential to Directional Comparison Blocking scheme (DCB), which uses Power Line
Carrier (PLC) communication system along the protected line.

The current and voltage samples for each phase passes through a notch filter that filters
out the fundamental components. Under steady state load conditions or when no fault
is present, the output of the filter is zero or close to zero. When a fault occurs, currents
and voltages change resulting in sudden changes in the currents and voltages resulting

291
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

in non-fundamental waveforms being introduced on the line. At this point the notch
filter produces significant non-zero output. The filter output is processed by the delta
function. The algorithm uses an adaptive relationship between phases to determine if
a fault has occurred, and determines the faulty phases.

The current and voltage delta based phase selector gives a real output signal if the
following criterion is fulfilled (only phase L1 shown):

Max(UL1,UL2,UL3)>DeltaUMinOp

Max(IL1,IL2,IL3)>DeltaIMinOp

where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3
DeltaUMinOp and DeltaIMinOp
are the voltage change between sample t and sample t-1
are the minimum harmonic level settings for the voltage and current filters
to decide that a fault has occurred. A slow evolving fault may not produce
sufficient harmonics to detect the fault; however, in such a case speed is
no longer the issue and the sequence components phase selector will
operate.

The delta voltages ULn and delta current ILn (n index for phase order) are the
voltage and current between sample t and sample t-1.

The delta phase selector employs adaptive techniques to determine the fault type. The
logic determines the fault type by summing up all phase values and dividing by the
largest value. Both voltages and currents are filtered out and evaluated. The condition
for fault type classification for the voltages and currents can be expressed as:

FaulType =
( UL1, UL2, UL3)
MAX ( UL1, UL 2, UL3)
EQUATION1621 V2 EN (Equation 55)

FaulType =
( IL1, IL2, IL3)
MAX ( IL1, IL 2, IL3)
EQUATION1622 V2 EN (Equation 56)

The value of FaultType for different shunt faults are as follows:

Under ideal conditions: (Patent pending)

Single phase-to-earth; FaultType=1
Phase-to-phase fault FaultType=2
Three-phase fault; FaultType=3

The output signal is 1 for single phase-to-earth fault, 2 for phase-to-phase fault and 3
for three-phase fault. At this point the filter does not know if earth was involved or not.

292
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Typically there are induced harmonics in the non-faulted lines that will affect the
result. This method allows for a significant tolerance in the evaluation of FaultType
over its entire range.

When a single phase-to-earth fault has been detected, the logic determines the largest
quantity, and asserts that phase. If phase-to-phase fault is detected, the two largest
phase quantities will be detected and asserted as outputs.

The faults detected by the delta based phase selector are coordinated in a separate
block. Different phases of faults may be detected at slightly different times due to
differences in the angles of incidence of fault on the wave shape. Therefore the output
is forced to wait a certain time by means of a timer. If the timer expires, and a fault is
detected in one phase only, the fault is deemed as phase-to-earth. This way a
premature single phase-to-earth fault detection is not released for a phase-to-phase
fault. If, however, earth current is detected before the timer expires, the phase-to-earth
fault is released sooner.

If another phase picks up during the time delay, the wait time is reduced by a certain
amount. Each detection of either phase-to-earth or additional phases further reduce the
initial time delay and allow the delta phase selector output to be faster. There is no time
delay if all three phases are faulty.

The delta function is released if the input DELTAREL is activated at the same time as
input DELTABLK is not activated. Activating the DELTABLK input blocks the delta
function. The release signal has an internal pulse timer of 100 ms. When the
DELTAREL signal has disappeared the delta logic is reset. In order not to get too
abrupt change, the reset is decayed in pre-defined steps.

Symmetrical component based phase selector

The symmetrical component phase selector uses preprocessed calculated sequence
voltages and currents as inputs. It also uses sampled values of the phase currents. All
the symmetrical quantities mentioned further in this section are with reference to
phase L1.

The function is made up of four main parts:

A Detection of the presence of earth fault

B A phase-to-phase logic block based on U1/U2 angle relationship

C A phase-to-earth component based on patent US5390067 where the angle relationships between
U2/I0 and U2/U1 is evaluated to determine earth fault or phase- to-phase to earth fault

D Logic for detection of three-phase fault

Presence of earth-fault detection

This detection of earth fault is performed in two levels, first by evaluation of the
magnitude of zero sequence current, and secondly by the evaluation of the zero and
negative sequence voltage. It is a complement to the earth-fault signal built-in in the
Symmetrical component based phase selector.

293
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

The complementary based zero-sequence current function evaluates the presence of

earth fault by calculating the 3I0 and comparing the result with the setting parameter
INRelPE. The output signal is used to release the earth-fault loop. It is a complement
to the earth-fault signal built-in in the sequence based phase selector. The condition
for releasing the phase-to-earth loop is as follows:

The output from this detection is used to release the earth-fault loop.

|3I0|>maxIph INRelPE

where:
|3I0| is the magnitude of the zero sequence current 3I0

maxIph is the maximum magnitude of the phase currents

INRelPE is a setting parameter for the relation between the magnitude of 3I0 and the maximum
phase current

The earth-fault loop is also released if the evaluation of the zero sequence current by
the main sequence function meets the following conditions:

|3I0|>IBase 0.5

|3I0|>maxIph INRelPE

where:
maxIph is the maximal current magnitude found in any of the three phases
INRelPE is the setting of 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-earth measuring loop in % of IBase
IBase is the global setting of the base current (A)

In systems where the source impedance for zero sequence is high the change of zero
sequence current may not be significant and the above detection may fail. In those
cases the detection enters the second level, with evaluation of zero and negative
sequence voltage. The release of the earth-fault loops can then be achieved if all of the
following conditions are fulfilled:

|3U0|>|U2| 0.5

|3U0|>|U1| 0.2

|U1|> UBase 0.2/(3)

and

3I0<0.1 IBase

or

3I0<maxIph INRelPE

294
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

where:
3U0 is the magnitude of the zero sequence voltage

U2 is the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage at the relay measuring point

k5 is design parameter
ILmax is the maximal phase current
IMinOp is the setting of minimum operate phase current in % of IBase

Phase-to-phase fault detection

The detection of phase-to-phase fault is performed by evaluation of the angle
difference between the sequence voltages U2 and U1.

IEC06000383-2-en.vsd
IEC06000383 V2 EN

Figure 142: Definition of fault sectors for phase-to-phase fault

The phase-to-phase loop for the faulty phases will be determined if the angle between
the sequence voltages U2 and U1 lies within the sector defined according to figure 142
and the following conditions are fulfilled:

|U1|>U1MinOP

|U2|>U2MinOp

where:
U1MinOP and U2MinOp are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operate voltages

The positive sequence voltage U1L1 in figure 142 above is reference.

If there is a three-phase fault, there will not be any release of the individual phase
signals, even if the general conditions for U2 and U1 are fulfilled.

295
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase-to-earth-fault detection

The detection of phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase-to-earth fault (US patent
5390067) is based on two conditions:

1. Angle relationship between U2 and I0

2. Angle relationship between U2 and U1

The condition 1 determines faulty phase at single phase-to-earth fault by evaluating

the argument between U2 and I0.

80

L2-E sector L3-E sector

U2L1
(Ref)

200
L1-E sector
320

IEC06000384_2_en.vsd
IEC06000384 V3 EN

Figure 143: Condition 1: Definition of faulty phase sector as angle between U2

and I0

The angle is calculated in a directional function block and gives the angle in radians
as input to the U2 and I0 function block. The input angle is released only if the fault is
in forward direction. This is done by the directional element. The fault is classified as
forward direction if the angle between U0 and I0 lies between 20 to 200 degrees, see
figure 144.

296
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Forward 20

200 Reverse

en06000385.vsd

IEC06000385 V1 EN

Figure 144: Directional element used to release the measured angle between Uo
and I0

The input radians are summarized with an offset angle and the result evaluated. If the
angle is within the boundaries for a specific sector, the phase indication for that sector
will be active see figure 143. Only one sector signal is allowed to be activated at the
same time.

The sector function for condition 1 has an internal release signal which is active if the
main sequence function has classified the angle between U0 and I0 as valid. The
following conditions must be fulfilled for activating the release signals:

|U2|>U2MinOp

|3I0|> 0.05 IBase

|3I0|>maxIph INRelPE

where:
U2 and IN are the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage and zero-
sequence current (3I0)

U2MinOp is the setting parameter for minimum operating negative sequence

voltage
maxIph is the maximum phase current
INRelPE is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth loop

The angle difference is phase shifted by 180 degrees if the fault is in reverse direction.

The condition 2 looks at the angle relationship between the negative sequence voltage
U2 and the positive sequence voltage U1. Since this is a phase-to-phase voltage
relationship, there is no need for shifting phases if the fault is in reverse direction. A
phase shift is introduced so that the fault sectors will have the same angle boarders as
for condition 1. If the calculated angle between U2 and U1 lies within one sector, the

297
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

corresponding phase for that sector will be activated. The condition 2 is released if
both the following conditions are fulfilled:

|U2|>U2MinOp

|U1|>U1MinOP

where:
|U1| and |U2| are the magnitude of the positive and negative sequence voltages.

U1MinOP and U2MinOp are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operating voltages.

140
L3-E sector
20

U1L1
(Ref)
L1-E sector
L2-E sector

260 IEC06000413_2_en.vsd
IEC06000413 V2 EN

Figure 145: Condition 2: U2 and U1 angle relationship

If both conditions are true and there is sector match, the fault is deemed as single
phase-to-earth. If the sectors, however, do not match the fault is determined to be the
complement of the second condition, that is, a phase-to-phase-to- earth fault.

Condition 1 and Condition 2 Fault type

L3-E L3-E L3-E
L2-E L1-E L2-L3-E

The sequence phase selector is blocked when earth is not involved or if a three-phase
fault is detected.

Three-phase fault detection

Unless it has been categorized as a single or two-phase fault, the function classifies it
as a three-phase fault if the following conditions are fulfilled:

|U1|<U1Level

298
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

and

|I1|>I1LowLevel

or

|I1|>IMaxLoad

where:
|U1| and |I1| are the positive sequence voltage and current magnitude

U1Level , are the setting of limits for positive sequence voltage and current
I1LowLevel
IMaxLoad is the setting of the maximum load current

The output signal for detection of three-phase fault is only released if not earth fault
and phase-to-phase fault in the main sequence function is detected.

The conditions for not detecting earth fault are the inverse of equation 5 to 10.

The condition for not detecting phase-to-phase faults is determined by three

conditions. Each of them gives condition for not detecting phase-to-phase fault. Those
are:

1:
earth fault is detected
or
|3I0|> 0.05 IBase

and
|3I0|>maxIph INRelPE

2:
phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase faults are not fulfilled
and
maxIph<0.1 IBase
and
|I2|<0.1 maxIph

3:
|3I0|>maxIph INBlockPP

or
|I2|<maxIph I2ILmax

where:
maxIph is the maximum of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3
INRelPE is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-earth fault loops
Table continues on next page

299
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

|I2| is the magnitude of the negative sequence current

I2ILmax is the setting parameter for the relation between negative sequence current to
the maximum phase current in percent of IBase
INBlockPP is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for blocking phase to phase measuring
loops

Fault evaluation and selection logic

The phase selection logic has an evaluation procedure that can be simplified according
to figure 146. Only phase L1 is shown in the figure. If the internal signal 3 Phase fault
is activated, all four outputs START, STL1, STL2 and STL3 gets activated.

a a>b FaultPriority
DeltaIL1 then c=a c Adaptive release
b else c=b dependent on result
from Delta logic
DeltaUL1

Sequence based
function a<b
a
L1L2 fault
then c=b c
OR b else c=a OR
L1N fault

3 Phase fault

STL1
IL1Valid &

BLOCK

IEC06000386-2-en.vsd
IEC06000386 V2 EN

Figure 146: Simplified diagram for fault evaluation, phase L1

Load encroachment logic

Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always
activated in faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS)
function but the influence on the zone measurement can be switched On/Offin the
respective impedance measuring function.

The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 147. As illustrated, the resistive
reach in forward and reverse direction and the angle of the sector is the same in all four
quadrants. The reach for the phase selector will be reduced by the load encroachment
function, as shown in figure 147.

300
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Blinder
Blinder provides a mean to discriminate high load from a fault. The operating
characteristic is illustrated in figure 147. There are six individual measuring loops
with the blinder functionality. Three phase-to-earth loops which estimate the
impedance according to

Zn = Uph / Iph

and three phase-to-phase loops according to

Zph-ph = Uph-ph / Iph-ph

The start operations from respective loop are binary coded into one word and provides
an output signal STCNDPLE.
X jX

Operation area Operation area

RLd
ArgLd ArgLd
R

ArgLd R
ArgLd
RLd

Operation area

No operation area No operation area

en06000414.vsd
IEC06000414 V1 EN

Figure 147: Influence on the characteristic by load encroachment logic

Outputs
The output of the sequence components based phase selector and the delta logic phase
selector activates the output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3. If an earth fault is detected
the signal STPE gets activated.

The phase selector also gives binary coded signals that are connected to the zone
measuring element for opening the correct measuring loop(s). This is done by the
signal STCNDPHS. If only one phase is started (L1, L2 or L3), the corresponding
phase-to-earth element is enabled. STPE is expected to be made available for two-
phase and three-phase faults for the correct output to be selected. The fault loop is
indicated by one of the decimal numbers below.

The output STCNDPHS provides release information from the phase selection part
only. STCNDLE provides release information from the load encroachment part only.
STCNDPLE provides release information from the phase selection part and the load

301
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

encroachment part combined, that is, both parts have to issue a release at the same time
(this signal is normally not used in the zone measuring element). In these signals, each
fault type has an associated value, which represents the corresponding zone measuring
loop to be released. The values are presented in table 152.

0= no faulted phases
1= L1E
2= L2E
3= L3E
4= -L1L2E
5= -L2L3E
6= -L3L1E
7= -L1L2L3E
8= -L1L2
9= -L2L3
10= -L3L1
11= L1L2L3

An additional logic is applied to handle the cases when phase-to-earth outputs are to
be asserted when the earth input G is not asserted.

The output signal STCNDPLE is activated when the load encroachment is operating.

STCNDPLE is connected to the input STCND for selected quadrilateral impedance

measuring zones to be blocked. The signal must be connected to the input LDCND for
selected mho impedance measuring zones .

The load encroachment at the measuring zone must be activated to

release the blocking from the load encroachment function.

7.8.7 Technical data

Table 153: FMPSPDIS technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Load encroachment criteria: (1.003000.00) W/phase 2.0% static accuracy
Load resistance, forward and (570) degrees Conditions:
reverse Voltage range: (0.11.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.530) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

302
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.9 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral

characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS,
ZMRAPDIS and ZDRDIR

7.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral ZMRPDIS 21
characteristic, separate settings (zone
1)

S00346 V1 EN

Distance protection zone, quadrilateral ZMRAPDIS 21

characteristic, separate settings (zone
2-5)

S00346 V1 EN

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR Z<-> 21D

7.9.2 Functionality
The line distance protection is up to five zone full scheme protection with three fault
loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault for each
of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and reactive
reach gives flexibility for use as back-up protection for transformer connected to
overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.

Mho alternative quadrilateral characteristic is available.

ZMRPDIS together with Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable

angle FRPSPDIS has functionality for load encroachment, which increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines, as shown in figure
64.

303
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Forward
operation

Reverse
operation

en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN

Figure 148: Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase selection,
quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle function FRPSPDIS
activated

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built-in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single pole tripping and autoreclosing.

Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone 1 at

load exporting end at phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines and so
on.

7.9.3 Function block

ZMRPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
BLKZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC08000248-1-en.vsd
IEC08000248 V1 EN

Figure 149: ZMRPDIS function block

304
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

ZMRAPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
BLKZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC08000290_1_en.vsd
IEC08000290 V1 EN

Figure 150: ZMRAPDIS function block

ZDRDIR
I3P* STDIRCND
U3P*
IEC10000007-2-en.vsd

IEC10000007 V2 EN

7.9.4 Signals
Table 154: ZMRPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Table 155: ZMRPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

305
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Table 156: ZMRAPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Table 157: ZMRAPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

Table 158: ZDRDIR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - group connection for current abs 2
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - group connection for voltage abs 2
SIGNAL

Table 159: ZDRDIR Output signals

Name Type Description
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per measuring
loop

306
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.9.5 Settings
Table 160: ZMRPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1PP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-
Ph
R1PP 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
X1PE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-E
R1PE 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
RFPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph
X0PE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E
RFPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
R0PE 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Phase
On loops
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for Phase-
Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 1000 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate residual current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 161: ZMRPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

307
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Table 162: ZMRAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1PP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-
Ph
R1PP 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
X1PE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-E
R1PE 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
RFPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph
X0PE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E
RFPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
R0PE 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Phase
On loops
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for Phase-
Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 163: ZMRAPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

308
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 164: ZDRDIR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase-phase current
for Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 Deg 1 115 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for
forward direction

Table 165: ZDRDIR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.9.6 Operation principle

7.9.6.1 Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which
means that each fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults for
forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 68 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for up to five,

impedance-measuring zones. There are 3 to 5 zones depending on product type and
variant.

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV

IEC05000458-2-en.vsd
IEC05000458 V2 EN

Figure 151: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current

309
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent
distance protection IED with six measuring elements.

7.9.6.2 Impedance characteristic

The distance measuring zone includes six impedance measuring loops; three intended
for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as, three-phase
faults.

The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional
impedance characteristics presented in figure 69 and figure 70. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per phase reach.

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+Rn

RFPE RFPE

X0PE-X1PE
Xn =
3
X1PE+Xn R0PE-R1PE
Rn =
3
jN jN
R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE RFPE

X1PE+Xn

RFPE RFPE
en08000280-2-en.vsd

R1PE+Rn
IEC08000280 V1 EN

Figure 152: Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring , ohm/loop domain

310
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/phase)

RFPP R1PP RFPP

2 2
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PEPG- -
X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
3 3
XX
X00
PE
0 PE
-X
PG --1X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW =
XNFW==
XNFW
X1PP 3 33

j j
R (Ohm/phase)

RFPP RFPP
2 2

X1PP

RFPP R1PP RFPP

2 2
en07000062.vsd
IEC07000062 V2 EN

Figure 153: Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 71. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive
reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

311
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

IL1 R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1

IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault
IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP
IEC08000282-2-en.vsd
IEC08000282 V2 EN

Figure 154: Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 71 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The settings RFPE and RFPP are the eventual
fault resistances in the faulty place.

Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 71, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.

The zone can be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction

through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in
figure 72. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for forward
and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.

312
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

IEC05000182-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000182 V2 EN

Figure 155: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones

7.9.6.3 Minimum operating current

The operation of Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMRPDIS)

is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.

For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops can be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.

ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector sum
of the three-phase currents, that is residual current 3I0.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLn< IMinOpPP.

ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.

All three current limits IMinOpPE, IMinOpIN and IMinOpPP are

automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to
operate in reverse direction, that is OperationDir=Reverse

7.9.6.4 Measuring principles

Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The

313
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

apparent impedances at phase-to-phase faults follow equation 10 (example for a phase

L1 to phase L2 fault).

UL1 UL2
Zapp = -------------------------
I L1 IL2
EQUATION1222 V1 EN (Equation 57)

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-earth

faults (example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 11.

U L1
Z app =
I L1 + I N KN
EQUATION1223 V2 EN (Equation 58)

Where:
are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
U L1
I L1
IN

KN
is defined as:

Z 0 - Z1
KN =
3 Z1
EQUATION-2105 V2 EN

Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN

Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN

Where
R0 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0 is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1 is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach
X1 is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

314
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same reach
along the line for all types of faults.

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and

reactance X.

The formula given in equation 11 is only valid for radial feeder application without
load. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault, conventional
distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end.
The IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such
applications.

Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter.
The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into
memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of
voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from
the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to
the loop impedance according to equation 12,

X Di
U = R i + ------ -----
w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN (Equation 59)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ ------------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION354 V1 EN (Equation 60)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ -----------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION355 V1 EN (Equation 61)

with

w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN (Equation 62)

where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency

315
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value
of the voltage and substitutes it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for
the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:

Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION357 V1 EN (Equation 63)

Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 Dt -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) DIm ( I ) Re ( I )
EQUATION358 V1 EN (Equation 64)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set
zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping
results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive
voltage transformers or by other factors.

The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked
positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited
directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

7.9.6.5 Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance quadrilateral

function ZDRDIR. Equation 18 and equation 19 are used to classify that the fault is in
forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault.

0.8 U 1L1 + 0.2 U 1L1 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION725 V2 EN (Equation 65)

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

316
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

0.8 U 1L1 L 2 + 0.2 U 1L1 L 2 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1 L 2
EQUATION726 V2 EN (Equation 66)

where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 115 degrees, see figure 73.
is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1
U 1L1
is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1
U 1L1M
is phase current in phase L1
I L1
is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U 1L1L 2
is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U 1L1L 2 M
is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
I L1L 2

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (as shown in figure 73). It should not be changed unless system studies
have shown the necessity.

ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the output
STDIRCND.

STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

317
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

ArgNegRes

ArgDir
R

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN

Figure 156: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in
Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds
5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.

After 100 ms the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

318
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.9.6.6 Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops:
phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by L1N, L2N and L3N.. The phase-to-
phase signals are designated by L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1.

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 74.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
FRPSPDIS within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function
into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. Input signal
STCND is connected to FRPSPDISfunction output STCNDZ.

The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance
measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals
depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It must be configured to the
STDIRCND output on directional function ZDRDIR function.

319
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

STZMPP
OR
STCND

AND STNDL1L2
L1L2

STNDL2L3
L2L3 AND

L3L1 AND STNDL3L1

AND STNDL1N
L1N

AND STNDL2N
L2N

STNDL3N
L3N AND

OR STPE

OR
VTSZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLOCFUNC BLK

99000557-2.vsd
IEC99000557-TIFF V3 EN

Figure 157: Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND, external start
condition

Composition of the phase start signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-
directional mode, is presented in figure 75.

320
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

STNDL1N
OR
STNDL2N 15 ms
AND t STL1
STNDL3N
STNDL1L2 OR 15 ms
AND t STL2
STNDL2L3
15 ms
STNDL3L1 AND t STL3
OR
15 ms
AND t START
OR

BLK

IEC09000889-1-en.vsd
IEC09000889 V1 EN

Figure 158: Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 76.

STNDL1N
AND
DIRL1N
STZMPE.
OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND

STNDL3N 15 ms
OR STL1
AND AND t
DIRL3N

STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2 AND 15 ms
OR STL2
AND t
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3 AND
15 ms
OR STL3
STNDL3L1 AND t
DIRL3L1 AND

STZMPP
OR

BLK

15 ms
OR START
AND t

IEC09000888-2-en.vsd
IEC09000888 V2 EN

Figure 159: Composition of start signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in
figure 77.

321
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Timer tPP=On
STZMPP AND tPP
AND
t

BLOCFUNC
OR OR
tPE
t
AND
Timer tPE=On AND
STZMPE 15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP
BLK OR

STL1 AND TRL1

STL2 AND TRL2

STL3 AND TRL3

IEC09000887-3-en.vsdx

IEC09000887 V3 EN

Figure 160: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone

7.9.7 Technical data

Table 166: ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable -
direction
Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of IBase -
current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, phase- (10-1000)% of IBase -
to-phase and phase-to-earth
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) / 2.0% static accuracy
phase 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Positive sequence resistance (0.01-1000.00) / Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
phase
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Zero sequence reactance (0.10-9000.00) / Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
phase
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) /
phase
Fault resistance, phase-to-earth (0.10-9000.00) /loop
Fault resistance, phase-to-phase (0.10-3000.00) /loop
Table continues on next page

322
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees -
measured with CVTs
and 0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay phase-phase (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is greater
and phase-earth operation
Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 x Min. = 20 ms -
Zreach Max. =50 ms

7.10 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with

settable angle FRPSPDIS

7.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase selection, quadrilateral FRPSPDIS 21
characteristic with settable angle
Z<phs

SYMBOL-DD V1 EN

7.10.2 Functionality
The ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that single
pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in today's power
systems. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS is
designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance function dependent
on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make
fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FRPSPDIS has a built-in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive
setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with
the load.

The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important
information about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis.

A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements

continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare them
with the set values.

323
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.10.3 Function block

FRPSPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* START
BLOCK STFWL1
DIRCND STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STNDPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
STCNDZ
STCNDLE

IEC08000430-2-en.vsd
IEC08000430 V2 EN

Figure 161: FRPSPDIS function block

7.10.4 Signals
Table 167: FRPSPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Table 168: FRPSPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip output
START BOOLEAN Start in any phase or loop
STFWL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction
STFWL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction
STFWPE BOOLEAN Earth fault detected in forward direction
STRVL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction
STRVL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction
STRVPE BOOLEAN Earth fault detected in reverse direction
Table continues on next page

324
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

STNDL1 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L1
STNDL2 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L2
STNDL3 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L3
STNDPE BOOLEAN Non directional start, phase-earth
STFW1PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for single-phase fault
STFW2PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for two- phase fault
STFW3PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for thre-phase fault
STPE BOOLEAN Current conditions release of phase-earth
measuring elements
STPP BOOLEAN Current conditions release of phase-phase
measuring elements
STCNDZ INTEGER Start condition (Z< with LE and 3I0 E/F detection)
STCNDLE INTEGER Start condition (only LE and 3I0 E/F detection)

7.10.5 Settings
Table 169: FRPSPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
INBlockPP 10 - 100 %IPh 1 40 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase
measuring loops
INReleasePE 10 - 100 %IPh 1 20 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth
measuring loops
RLdFw 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Forward resistive reach within the load
impedance area
RLdRv 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Reverse resistive reach within the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Load angle determining the load
impedance area
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1PP 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
R1PE 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 1.50 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0PE 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
RFFwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
RFRvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
RFFwPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
RFRvPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse
IMinOpPP 5 - 500 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate delta current for Phase-
Phase loops
IMinOpPE 5 - 500 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

325
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Table 170: FRPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TimerPP Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph
TimerPE Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to trip, Ph-E

Table 171: FRPSPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.10.6 Operation principle

The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase selection measuring
elements is the same as for the distance zone measuring function. Phase selection,
quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS) includes six impedance
measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for
phase-to-phase as well as for three-phase faults.

The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the

combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of
faults.

The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FRPSPDIS uses information from

the directional function ZDRDIR to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or
reverse direction.

The start condition STCNDZ is essentially based on the following criteria:

Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without earth
connection
Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The current start condition STCNDLE is based on the following criteria:

Residual current criteria

No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the load
area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be determined by
the minimum operating current limits.
Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

326
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

The STCNDLE output is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the

distance zones directional function ZDRDIR.

There are output from FRPSPDIS that indicate whether a start is in forward or reverse
direction or non-directional, for example STFWL1, STRVL1 and STNDL1.

These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional
function and the impedance setting of FRPSPDIS function. Their operating
characteristics are illustrated in figure 79.

X X X

R
R R

Non-directional (ND) Forward (FW) Reverse (RV)

en08000286.vsd
IEC08000286 V1 EN

Figure 162: Characteristics for non-directional, forward and reverse operation of

Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
(FRPSPDIS)

The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment".

The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming
from the directional function ZDRDIR. It shall be connected to the STDIR output on
ZDRDIR. This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on the distance
measuring zones, that is, the ZMRPDIS block.

The code built up for the directionality is as follows:

STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have start in forward
direction in phase L1. If the binary code is 3 then we have start in forward direction in
phase L1 and L2 etc.

327
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

The STCNDZ or STCNDLE output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary

coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct
fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the STCND input
on the ZMRPDIS distance measuring zones block.

The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:

STCNDZ = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32

7.10.6.1 Phase-to-earth fault

For a phase-to-earth fault, the measured impedance by FRPSPDIS is according to

equation 20.

Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase

selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
(FRPSPDIS).

ULn
ZPHSn =
ILn
EQUATION1255 V1 EN (Equation 67)

where:
n corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)

The characteristic for FRPSPDIS function at phase-to-earth fault is according to

figure 80. The characteristic has a settable angle for the resistive boundary in the first
quadrant of 70.

The resistance RN and reactance XN are the impedance in the earth-return path
defined according to equation 23 and equation 24.

R 0 PE - R1PE
RN =
3
EQUATION-2125 V1 EN (Equation 68)
R0 - R1
RN =
3
EQUATION1256 V1 EN (Equation 68)

X 0 - X1
XN =
3
EQUATION1257 V1 EN (Equation 69)

328
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

X (ohm/loop)
R1PE+RN

RFRvPE RFFwPE

X1+XN

RFFwPE

RFRvPE R (Ohm/loop)

X1+XN

RFRvPE RFFwPE

R1PE+RN
IEC09000633-1-en.vsd
IEC09000633 V1 EN

Figure 163: Characteristic of FRPSPDIS for phase to earth fault (directional lines
are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line")

Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to
equation 23 and equation 24.

3 I0 0.5 IMinOpPE
EQUATION2108 V1 EN (Equation 70)

3 I0 INReleasePE
------------------------------------ Iphmax
100
EQUATION766 V1 EN (Equation 71)

where:
IMinOpPE is the minimum operation current for forward zones
INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phase-
to-earth fault loops (in %).
Iphmax is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.

329
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.10.6.2 Phase-to-phase fault

For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FRPSPDIS is according to

equation 25.

ULm - ULn
ZPHS =
-2 ILn
EQUATION1258 V1 EN (Equation 72)

ULm is the leading phase voltage, ULn the lagging phase voltage and ILn the phase
current in the lagging phase n.

The operation characteristic is shown in figure 81.

X (ohm/phase)

0.5FRvPP
R1PP 0.5RFFwPP

X1
0.5RFFwPP

R (ohm/phase)

0.5RFRvPP
X1

R1PP
0.5RFRvPP 0.5RFFwPP
IEC09000634-1-en.vsd
IEC09000634 V1 EN

Figure 164: The operation characteristic for FRPSPDIS at phase-to-phase fault

(directional lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line")

In the same way as the condition for phase-to-earth fault, there are current conditions
that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop. Those are
according to equation 26 or equation 27.

330
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

3I 0 < IMinOpPE
EQUATION2109 V1 EN (Equation 73)

INBlockPP
3I 0 < Iph max
100
EQUATION2110 V1 EN (Equation 74)

where:
IMinOpPE is the minimum operation current for forward earth measuring loops,
INBlockPP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and
Iphmax is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.

7.10.6.3 Three-phase faults

The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase
fault, that is equation 25, equation 26 and equation 27 are used to release the operation
of the function.

However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all

directions. At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counter-
clockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 82.

331
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

X (ohm/phase)

4 X1PP
3

0.5RFFwPPK3

X1K3 30 deg 2
RFwPP
3

R (ohm/phase)

0.5RFRvPPK3

K3 = 2 / sqrt(3)
30 deg

IEC09000635-1-en.vsd
IEC09000635 V2 EN

Figure 165: The characteristic of FRPSPDIS for three-phase fault (set angle 70)

7.10.6.4 Load encroachment

Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always
active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.

The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 84. As illustrated, the resistive
blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the
sector is the same in all four quadrants.

332
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

RLdFw
ArgLd ArgLd
R

ArgLd ArgLd
RLdRv

IEC09000042-1-en.vsd
IEC09000042 V1 EN

Figure 166: Characteristic of load encroachment function

The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is

dependent on the chosen operation mode of FRPSPDIS function. When output signal
STCNDZ is selected, the characteristic for FRPSPDIS (and also zone measurement
depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment characteristic, see
figure 85.

When output signal STCNDI is selected, the operation characteristic will be as in

figure 84. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current and
the distance measuring zones.

333
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

X X

R R

STCNDZ STCNDLE

IEC10000099-1-
en.vsd
IEC10000099 V1 EN

Figure 167: Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation mode

when load encroachment is activated

When FRPSPDIS is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the
resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 85. The figure shows a
distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area of
the zone together with the load encroachment is highlighted in black.

334
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone

Distance measuring zone

Load encroachment
characteristic

Directional line

en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN

Figure 168: Operating characteristic in forward direction when load

encroachment is activated

Figure 85 is valid for phase-to-earth. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation the
operate area is transformed according to figure 86. Notice in particular what happens
with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone. Due to the 30-
degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 100 degrees instead of
the original 70 degrees (if the angle setting is 70 degrees). The blinder that is
nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase the
resistive reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to
use the load encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load
impedance.

335
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

X (W / phase)
Phase selection
Quadrilateral zone

Distance measuring zone

R (W / phase)

IEC09000049-1-en.vsd

IEC09000049 V1 EN

Figure 169: Operating characteristic for FRPSPDIS in forward direction for three-
phase fault, ohm/phase domain

The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is
presented in fig 87. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement as
the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic
clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same time
the characteristic will "shrink" by 2/3, from the full RLdFw and RLdRv reach, which
is valid at load or three-phase fault.

336
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

IEC08000437.vsd

IEC08000437 V1 EN

Figure 170: Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases

There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the quadrilateral
characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected by a fault
between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage in quadrant
one. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant four should not be a
problem even for applications on series compensated lines.

7.10.6.5 Minimum operate currents

The operation of Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle

(FRPSPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain
threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn<IMinOpPE, where ILn is the RMS value
of the current in phase Ln.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if (2ILn<IMinOpPP).

337
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.10.6.6 Simplified logic diagrams

Figure 88 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-

earth operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and
logic circuits, when only a phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase measurement is available
within the IED.

LDEblock

3I 0 0.5 IMinOpPE IRELPE

& 15 ms
t STPE
&
INReleasePE
3I 0 Iphmax
100 STCNDLE
Bool to &
BLOCK integer

15 ms
3I 0 < IMinOpPE & t STPP
10 ms 20 ms
OR & t t
IRELPP
INBlockPP
3I 0 < Iphmax
100

IEC09000149_2_en.vsd
IEC09000149 V2 EN

Figure 171: Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth operating conditions (residual

current criteria)

A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A STCNDLE

output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment characteristic and
current criteria, refer to figure 88. This signal can be configured to STCND functional
input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of
the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone measuring elements and their phase
related starting and tripping signals.

Figure 89 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase selective

signals STNDLn. Internal signals ZMLnN and ZMLmLn (m and n change between
one and three according to the phase number) represent the fulfilled operating criteria
for each separate loop measuring element, that is within the characteristic.

338
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

INDL1N
INDL2N
INDL3N

15 ms
STNDPE
IRELPE OR t

LDEblockL1N
AND 15 ms
ZML1N STNDL1
OR t
LDEblockL2N
AND
ZML2N
15 ms
LDEblockL3N STNDL2
OR t
AND
ZML3N

LDEblockL1L2 15 ms
STNDL3
AND OR t
ZML1L2
LDEblockL2L3
AND INDL1L2
ZML2L3
LDEblockL3L1 INDL2L3
AND
ZML3L1 INDL3L1
IRELPP 15 ms
STNDPP
OR t

IEC00000545-3-en.vsd
IEC00000545-TIFF V3 EN

Figure 172: Composition on non-directional phase selection signals

Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is

presented schematically in figure 90 and figure 91. The directional criteria appears as
a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase selectivity
for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex network
configurations. Internal signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the corresponding
directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm. Designation FW
(figure 91) represents the forward direction as well as the designation RV (figure 90)
represents the reverse direction. All directional signals are derived within the
corresponding digital signal processor.

Figure 90 presents additionally a composition of a STCNDZ output signal, which is

created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be configured
to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way
influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone measuring
elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals.

339
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

INDL1N
AND
DRVL1N
INDL1L2 15 ms STRVL1
AND OR t
DRVL1L2
INDL3L1
AND
DRVL3L1 15 ms
STRVPE
INDL2N OR t
AND
DRVL2N
INDL1L2 15 ms
STRVL2
AND OR t

INDL2L3 INDL1N
AND INDL2N
DRVL2L3
INDL3N Bool to STCNDZ
INDL3N INDL1L2 integer
AND INDL2L3
DRVL3N INDL3L1
INDL2L3 15 ms
STRVL3
AND OR t

INDL3L1
15 ms
AND STRVPP
OR t

IEC00000546_2_en.vsd

IEC00000546-TIFF V2 EN

Figure 173: Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction

340
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

AND

INDL1N
AND 15 ms 15 ms
DFWL1N STFW1PH
AND OR t t
INDL1L2
15 ms STFWL1
AND OR t
DFWL1L2
INDL3L1
AND
AND
DFWL3L1 15 ms
STFWPE
INDL2N OR t
AND
DFWL2N
AND 15 ms
INDL1L2 STFWL2
t
AND OR
15 ms 15 ms
INDL2L3 STFW2PH
AND OR t t
AND
DFWL2L3
INDL3N
AND AND
DFWL3N 15 ms
STFWL3
t
INDL2L3
AND OR
15 ms
INDL3L1 STFW3PH
AND t
AND

15 ms
STFWPP
OR t

IEC05000201_2_en.vsd

IEC05000201 V2 EN

Figure 174: Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction

Figure92 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and START, where internal
signals STNDPP, STFWPP and STRVPP are the equivalent to internal signals
STNDPE, STFWPE and STRVPE, but for the phase-to-phase loops.

341
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

TimerPP=Off
tPP
AND AND
t
TRIP
OR OR
tPE
TimerPE=Off
t
AND AND

STNDPP

STFWPP OR
STRVPP
START
OR
STNDPE

STFWPE OR
STRVPE

IEC08000441_2_en.vsd

IEC08000441-1 V2 EN

Figure 175: TRIP and START signal logic

342
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.10.7 Technical data

Table 172: FRPSPDIS technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (5-500)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reactive reach, positive (0.503000.00) /phase 2.0% static accuracy

sequence
Resistive reach, positive
sequence
Reactive reach, zero sequence
Resistive reach, zero sequence
Fault resistance, Ph-E faults,
forward and reverse
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph faults,
forward and reverse
Load encroachment criteria:
Load resistance, forward and
reverse
Safety load impedance angle
Reset ratio
(0.101000.00) /phase
(0.509000.00) /phase
(0.503000.00) /phase
(1.009000.00) /loop
(0.503000.00) /loop
(1.003000.00) /phase
(5-70) degrees
105% typically
2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
-

7.11 High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS

7.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
High speed distance protection zone ZMFPDIS 21
(zone 1)

S00346 V1 EN

7.11.2 Functionality
The High speed distance protection (ZMFPDIS) is providing sub-cycle, down
towards half-cycle, operate time for basic faults within 60% of the line length and up
to around SIR 5. At the same time, it is specifically designed for extra care during
difficult conditions in high voltage transmission networks, like faults on long heavily
loaded lines and faults generating heavily distorted signals. These faults are handled
with outmost security and dependability, although sometimes with reduced operating
speed.

343
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

The ZMFPDIS function is a six zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for
phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults for each of the
independent zones, which makes the function suitable in applications with single-
phase autoreclosing.

The zones can operate independently of each other in directional (forward or reverse)
or non-directional mode. However, zone1 and zone2 is designed to measure in
forward direction only, while one zone (ZRV) is designed to measure in the reverse
direction. This makes them suitable, together with a communication scheme, for
protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as
parallel lines, multi-terminal lines, and so on.

A new built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of the

distance zones in the load exporting end during phase-to-earth faults on heavily
loaded power lines. It also reduces underreach in the importing end.

The ZMFPDIS function-block itself incorporates a phase-selection element and a

directional element, contrary to previous designs in the 670-series, where these
elements were represented with separate function-blocks.

The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change

criteria (i.e. delta quantities), with significantly increased dependability. There is also
a phase selection criterion operating in parallel which bases its operation only on
voltage and current phasors.

The directional element utilizes a set of well-established quantities to provide fast and
correct directional decision during various power system operating conditions,
including close-in three-phase faults, simultaneous faults and faults with only zero-
sequence in-feed.

344
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.11.3 Function block

ZMFPDIS
I3P* TRIPZ1
U3P* TRL1Z1
BLOCK TRL2Z1
VTSZ TRL3Z1
BLKZ1 TRIPZ2
BLKZ2 TRL1Z2
BLKZ3 TRL2Z2
BLKZ4 TRL3Z2
BLKZ5 TRIPZ3
BLKZRV TRIPZ4
BLKTRZ1 TRIPZ5
BLKTRZ2 TRIPZRV
BLKTRZ3 STARTZ1
BLKTRZ4 STNDZ1
BLKTRZ5 STARTZ2
BLKTRZRV STL1Z2
STL2Z2
STL3Z2
STNDZ2
STARTZ3
STNDZ3
STARTZ4
STNDZ4
STARTZ5
STNDZ5
STARTZRV
STL1ZRV
STL2ZRV
STL3ZRV
STNDZRV
STARTND
STFWL1
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP

IEC11000433-1-en.vsd
IEC11000433 V1 EN

Figure 176: ZMFPDIS function block

7.11.4 Signals
Table 173: ZMFPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire
function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire
function
Table continues on next page

345
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 1
BLKZ2 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 2
BLKZ3 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 3
BLKZ4 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 4
BLKZ5 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 5
BLKZRV BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of reverse
zone
BLKTRZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 1
BLKTRZ2 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 2
BLKTRZ3 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 3
BLKTRZ4 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 4
BLKTRZ5 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 5
BLKTRZRV BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of reverse
zone

Table 174: ZMFPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIPZ1 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 1 - forward
direction
TRL1Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRL2Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L2 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRL3Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L3 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRIPZ2 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 2 - forward
direction
TRL1Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRL2Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRL3Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRIPZ3 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone
direction
TRIPZ4 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone
direction
TRIPZ5 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone
direction
TRIPZRV BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone RV - reverse
dir.
STARTZ1 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 - forward
direction
STNDZ1 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 - any
direction
STARTZ2 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 - forward
direction
STL1Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction
STL2Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction
Table continues on next page

346
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

STL3Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction
STNDZ2 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 - any
direction
STARTZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone
direction
STNDZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - any
direction
STARTZ4 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone
direction
STNDZ4 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - any
direction
STARTZ5 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone
direction
STNDZ5 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - any
direction
STARTZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV -
reverse dir.
STL1ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone RV - reverse direction
STL2ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L2 from zone RV - reverse direction
STL3ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L3 from zone RV - reverse direction
STNDZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV - any
direction
STARTND BOOLEAN Fault detected in any phase or phases - any
direction
STNDL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - any direction
STNDL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - any direction
STNDL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - any direction
STFWL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction
STFWL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction
STFWPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - forward
direction
STRVL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction
STRVL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction
STRVPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - reverse
direction
STFW1PH BOOLEAN Single-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW2PH BOOLEAN Two-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase fault detected - forward direction
STPE BOOLEAN Ph-E zone measurement enabled - any direction
STPP BOOLEAN Ph-Ph zone measurement enabled - any direction

347
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.11.5 Settings
Table 175: ZMFPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode Off / On
On
RLdFw 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 60.00 Resistance determining the load
impedance area - forward
RLdRv 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 60.00 Resistance determining the load
impedance area - reverse
XLd 0.01 - 10000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 400.00 Reactance determining the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Angle determining the load impedance
area
CVTtype Any - - Passive type CVT selection determining filtering of the
Passive type function
None (Magnetic)
OpModeZ1 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 1
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1PPZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 1
R1PPZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 1
X1PEZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, zone 1
R1PEZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,
zone 1
X0Z1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 1
R0Z1 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 1
RFPPZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1
RFPEZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 1
tPPZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 1
tPEZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 1
IMinOpPPZ1 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 1
IMinOpPEZ1 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 1
OpModeZ2 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 2
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1Z2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, zone
2
R1Z2 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone 2
X0Z2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 2
R0Z2 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 2
Table continues on next page

348
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

RFPPZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 2
RFPEZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 2
tPPZ2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 2
tPEZ2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 2
IMinOpPPZ2 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 2
IMinOpPEZ2 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 2
OpModeZ3 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 3
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
DirModeZ3 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 3 (which will be the Fw
Forward direction of zone 3)
Reverse
X1Z3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, zone
3
R1Z3 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone 3
X0Z3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 3
R0Z3 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 3
RFPPZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3
RFPEZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 3
tPPZ3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 3
tPEZ3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 3
IMinOpPPZ3 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 3
IMinOpPEZ3 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 3
OpModeZ4 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 4
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
DirModeZ4 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 4 (which will be the Fw
Forward direction of zone 4)
Reverse
X1Z4 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, zone
4
R1Z4 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone 4
X0Z4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 4
R0Z4 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 4
RFPPZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4
RFPEZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 4
tPPZ4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 4
tPEZ4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 4
IMinOpPPZ4 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 4
Table continues on next page

349
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IMinOpPEZ4 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 4
OpModeZ5 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 5
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
DirModeZ5 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 5 (which will be the Fw
Forward direction of zone 5)
Reverse
X1Z5 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, zone
5
R1Z5 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone 5
X0Z5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 5
R0Z5 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 5
RFPPZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5
RFPEZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 5
tPPZ5 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.600 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 5
tPEZ5 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.600 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 5
IMinOpPPZ5 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 5
IMinOpPEZ5 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 5
OpModeZRV Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone RV
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1ZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, zone
RV
R1ZRV 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone
RV
X0ZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone RV
R0ZRV 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone RV
RFPPZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV
RFPEZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone RV
tPPZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone RV
tPEZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone RV
IMinOpPPZRV 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone RV
IMinOpPEZRV 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone RV

350
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 176: ZMFPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ZoneLinkStart Phase Selection - - Phase Selection Select. of start source for all ZoneLinked
1st starting zone trip delay timers
INReleasePE 5 - 400 %IPh 1 400 3I0 limit for releasing Phase-to-Earth
measuring loops
TimerModeZ1 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 1
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ1 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 1
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ2 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 2
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ2 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 2
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ3 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 3
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ3 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 3
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ4 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 4
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ4 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 4
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ5 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 5
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ5 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 5
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZRV Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone RV
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZRV LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone RV
ZoneLink
No Links

351
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Table 177: ZMFPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.11.6 Monitored data

Table 178: ZMFPDIS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L1L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L2L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L3L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
L2R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2
L2X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2
L3R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3
L3X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3

7.11.7 Operation principle

Settings, input and output names are sometimes mentioned in the following text
without its zone suffix (i.e. BLKZx instead of BLKZ3) when the description is equally
valid for all zones.

7.11.7.1 Filtering

Practically all voltage, current and impedance quantities used within the ZMFPDIS
function are derived from fundamental frequency phasors filtered by a half cycle
filter.

352
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

The phasor filter is frequency adaptive in the sense that its coefficients are changed
based on the estimated power system frequency.

A half cycle filter will not be able to reject both even and odd harmonics. So, while odd
harmonics will be completely attenuated, accuracy will be affected by even
harmonics. Even harmonics will not cause the distance zones to overreach however;
instead there will be a slightly variable underreach, on average in the same order as the
magnitude ratio between the harmonic and fundamental component.

7.11.7.2 Distance measuring zones

Th different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which means that earth
fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults for forward and reverse
faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 97 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the six distance
zones.

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV

IEC05000458-2-en.vsd
IEC05000458 V2 EN

Figure 177: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault

Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection
function with six measuring elements.

Tansients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the transient overreach of a
distance protection. At the same time these transients can be very diverse in nature
from one type to the other; in fact, more diverse than can be distinguished by the
algorithm itself in the course of a few milliseconds. So, a setting (CVTtype) is
introduced in order to inform the algorithm about the type of CVT applied and thus
providing the advantage of knowing how performance should be optimized, even
during the first turbulent milliseconds of the fault period.

There are basically two types of CVTs from the function point of view, the passive and
the active type, which refers to the type of ferro-resonance suppression device that is
employed. The active type requires more rigorous filtering which will have a negative

353
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

impact on operate times. However, this will be evident primarily at higher source
impedance ratios (SIRs), SIR 5 and above, or close to the reach limit.

The IEC 60044-5 transient classification is of little or no use in this connection. It is

not primarily the damping of transients that is important; it is the frequency content of
the transients that is decisive, i.e. how difficult it is to filter out the specific frequency.
So, even if two CVTs, one passive and the other active type, comply with the same
transient class, the active type requires more extensive filtering in order to avoid
transient overreach.

For avoiding overreach and at the same time achieving fast operate times, a
supplementary circular characteristic that includes some alternative processing is
implemented. One such circular characteristic exists for every measuring loop and
quadrilateral characteristic. There are no specific reach settings for this circular zone.
It uses the normal quadrilateral zone settings to determine a reach that will be
appropriate. This implies that the circular characteristic will always have somewhat
shorter reach than the quadrilateral zone.

7.11.7.3 Phase-selection criteria

The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change

criteria (i.e. delta quantities), with significantly increased dependability. Naturally,
there is also a phase selection criterion operating in parallel which bases its operation
only on voltage and current phasors.

The phase-selection element can, owing to the current change criteria, distinguish
faults with minimum influence from load and fault impedance. In other words, it is not
restricted by a load encroachment characteristic during the current change phase. This
significantly improves performance for remote phase-to-earth faults on heavily
loaded lines. One exception however is three-phase faults, for which the load
encroachment characteristic always has to be applied, in order to distinguish fault
from load.

The continuous criteria will in the vast majority of cases operate in parallel and carry
on the fault indication after the current change phase has ended. Only in some
particularly difficult faults on heavily loaded lines the continuous criteria might not be
sufficient, for example, when the estimated fault impedance resides within the load
area defined by the load encroachment characteristic. In this case, the indication will
be restricted to a pulse lasting for one or two power system cycles.

Phase-to-phase-earth faults (also called double earth faults) will practically always
activate phase-to-phase zone measurements. Measurement in two phase-to-earth
loops at the same time is associated with so-called simultaneous faults: two earth
faults at the same time, one each on the two circuits of a double line, or when the zero
sequence current is relatively high due to a source with low Z0/Z1 ratio. In fact, in
these situations zone measurement will be released both for the related phase-to-earth
loops and the phase-to-phase loop simultaneously. On the other hand, simultaneous
faults closer to the remote bus will gradually take on the properties of a phase-to-

354
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

phase-earth fault and the function will eventually use phase-to-phase zone
measurements also here.

In cases where the fault current infeed is more or less completely of zero sequence
nature (all phase currents in phase), the measurement will be performed in the phase-
to-earth loops only for a phase-to-phase-earth fault.

However, should it be desirable to use phase-to-earth (and only phase-to-earth) zone

measurement for phase-to-phase-earth faults, there is a setting INReleasePE that can
be lowered from its excessive default value to the level above which phase-to-earth
measurement should be activated.

7.11.7.4 Directional criteria

Several criteria are employed when making the directional decision. The basis is
provided by comparing a sum of positive sequence voltage and memory voltage with
phase currents. For extra security, especially in making a very fast decision, this
method is complemented with an equivalent comparison where, instead of the phase
current, the change in phase current is used. Moreover, a basic negative sequence
directional evaluation is taken into account as a reliable reference during high load
condition. Finally, a zero sequence directional evaluation is used whenever there is
more or less exclusive zero sequence in-feed.

The directional sectors that represent forward direction, one per measuring loop, are
defined by the following equations.

15 < arg
( (1 k ) U1 L1 + k U 1L1M )
< 120
I L1
EQUATION2546 V2 EN (Equation 75)

15 < arg
( (1 k ) U1 L1L 2 + k U 1L1L 2 M )
< 120
I L1L 2
EQUATION2547 V2 EN (Equation 76)

Where:
U1L1 is the positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1.

U1L1M is the positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1.

IL1 is the phase current in phase L1.

U1L1L2 is the voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

U1L1L2M is the memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

IL1L2 is the current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

k is the factor determining the amount of memory voltage.

The corresponding reverse directional sectors range from 165 to -60 degrees. The
value of the k factor determining the amount of memory voltage used is normally 0.8.

355
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

However, if the SeriesComp option is chosen (only available in ZMFCPDIS) the

value is changed to 0.95.

7.11.7.5 Fuse failure

The ZMFPDIS function has to be blocked by an additional function like the Fuse
failure supervision (FUFSPVC) or an equivalent external device. Typically, the
binary input VTSZ is used for this purpose.

7.11.7.6 Power swings

There is need for external blocking of the ZMFPDIS function during power swings,
either from the Power Swing Blocking function (ZMRPSB) or an external device.

7.11.7.7 Measuring principles

All ZMFPDIS zones operate according to the non-directional impedance

characteristics presented in Figure 178 and Figure 179. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is given in ohms-per-loop domain while the phase-to-phase
characteristic is given in ohms-per-phase domain.

356
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+Rn

RFPE RFPE

X0PE-X1PE
Xn =
3
X1PE+Xn R0PE-R1PE
Rn =
3
jN jN
R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE RFPE

X1PE+Xn

RFPE RFPE
IEC11000415-1-en.vsd

R1PE+Rn
IEC11000415 V1 EN

Figure 178: ZMFPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring, ohm/loop

domain

357
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/phase)

RFPP R1PP RFPP

2 2
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE PG- -
X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
33
XXX00PE
0PE-
PG -
X-1X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW===
XNFW
XNFW
3
X1PP 3 3

j j
R (Ohm/phase)

RFPP RFPP
2 2

X1PP

RFPP R1PP RFPP

2 2
IEC11000416-1-en.vsd
IEC11000416 V1 EN

Figure 179: ZMFPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring, ohm/loop

domain

The faulty loop in relation to the fault type can be presented as in Figure 180. The main
intention with this illustration is to make clear how the fault resistive reach should be
interpreted and set. Note in particular that the setting RFPP always represents the total
fault resistance of the loop, regardless the fact that the fault resistance (arc) may be
divided into parts like for three-phase or phase-to-phase faults. The R1 + jX1 represent
the positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location.

358
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

IL1 R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
RFPE
fault in phase L1
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1

IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault or Phase-to-
phase-earth fault IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP
IEC11000419-2-en.vsd
IEC11000419 V2 EN

Figure 180: Fault loop model

7.11.7.8 Load encroachment

In some cases the measured load impedance might enter the set zone characteristic
without any fault on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment
and it might occur when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is
transferred on the protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated to the
left in Figure 181. A load impedance within the characteristic would cause an
unwanted trip. The traditional way of avoiding this situation is to set the distance zone
resistive reach with a security margin to the minimum load impedance. The drawback
with this approach is that the sensitivity of the protection to detect resistive faults is
reduced.

The IED has a built in feature which shapes the characteristic according to the
characteristic shown in Figure 181. The load encroachment algorithm will increase
the possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-earth faults at
remote line end. For example, for a given setting of the load angle ArgLd, the resistive
blinder for the zone measurement can be set according to Figure 181 affording higher

359
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load
encroachment. Separate resistive blinder setting is available in forward and reverse
direction.

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines,
where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and
necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be
used on heavy loaded, medium long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get
sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not a major problem. See
section "".

X X

Z1 Z1

Load impedance
area in forward ArgLd
R
direction R

RLdRv RLdFw

IEC09000248-2-en.vsd
IEC09000248 V2 EN

Figure 181: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic

7.11.7.9 Simplified logic schemes

PHSL1, PHSL2,...PHSL3L1 are internal binary logical signals from the Phase-
selection element. They correspond directly to the six loops of the distance zones and
determine which loops should be released to operate.

FWL1, FWL2,...FWL3L1 and RVL1, RVL2,...RVL3L1 are the internal binary

signals from the Directional element. An FW signal is activated if the criteria for a
forward fault or load is fulfilled for its particular loop. The equivalent applies to the
reverse (RV) signals.

The internal input 'IN present' is activated if the residual current (3I0) exceeds 10% of
the maximum phase current magnitude and at the same time is above 5% of IBase.
However, if current transformer saturation is detected, this criterion is changed to
residual voltage (3U0) exceeding 5% of UBase/sqrt(3) instead.

360
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

FW(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z1

FW(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z2

RV(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)ZRV

DirModeZ3-5
TRUE (1) Non-directional
FW(Ln & LmLn) Forward DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z3-5
RV(Ln & LmLn) Reverse

IEC12000137-2-en.vsd
IEC12000137 V2 EN

Figure 182: Connection of directional signals to Zones

PEZx
OR
ZML1Zx
PHSL1 AND
DIRL1Zx AND
ZML2Zx
PHSL2 AND
DIRL2Zx AND
ZML3Zx L1Zx
OR
PHSL3 AND
DIRL3Zx AND

ZML1L2Zx L2Zx
OR
PHSL1L2 AND
DIRL1L2Zx AND
ZML2L3Zx L3Zx
PHSL2L3 AND OR
DIRL2L3Zx AND
ZML3L1Zx
PHSL3L1 AND
DIRL3L1Zx AND

PPZx
OR

NDZx
OR

IEC12000140-1-en.vsd
IEC12000140 V1 EN

Figure 183: Intermediate logic

361
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

TimerModeZx =
Enable Ph-Ph,
Ph-E

PPZx AND tPPZx

OR AND
AND t
TZx
PEZx AND tPEZx OR
OR
AND t
AND

BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKZx OR
BLKTRZx
OR TimerLinksZx
LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
ZoneLinkStart LoopLink & ZoneLink
OR
STPHS Phase Selection No Links
1st starting zone
LNKZ1 FALSE (0)
LNKZ2
LNKZRV LNKZx
AND
LNKZ3 OR
TimerLinksZx =
LNKZ4 LoopLink & ZoneLink
LNKZ5

IEC12000139-3-en.vsdx

IEC12000139 V3 EN

Figure 184: Logic for linking of timers

362
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

15 ms
TZx
t TRIPZx
AND

BLKTRZx
TRL1Zx
OR AND
BLOCK
VTSZ TRL2Zx
OR AND
BLKZx
TRL3Zx
AND
15 ms
L1Zx
t STL1Zx
AND
15 ms
L2Zx
t STL2Zx
AND
15 ms
L3Zx
t STL3Zx
AND

PPZx 15 ms
PEZx OR t STARTZx
AND

15 ms
NDZx
t STNDZx
AND

IEC12000138-1-en.vsd
IEC12000138 V1 EN

Figure 185: Start and trip outputs

363
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

15 ms
OR t STPE
AND
PHSL1
15 ms
PHSL2 OR t
AND
PHSL3
15 ms
OR t
PHSL1L2 AND

PHSL2L3 15 ms
OR t
AND
PHSL3L1
15 ms
OR t STPP
AND

BLOCK STARTND
OR
VTSZ OR
STPHS

IEC12000133-1-en.vsd
IEC12000133 V1 EN

Figure 186: Additional start outputs 1

364
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

PHSL1
FWL1 AND
PHSL2 15 ms
FWL2 AND OR t STFWL1
AND
PHSL3
FWL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STFWL2
AND
FWL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
FWL2L3 AND OR t STFWL3
PHSL3L1 AND
FWL3L1 AND
OR
STFWPE
IN present AND

STFW1PH
=1
BLOCK
VTSZ OR

STFW2PH
=2

STFW3PH
=3

IEC12000134-1-en.vsd
IEC12000134 V1 EN

Figure 187: Additional start outputs 2

PHSL1
RVL1 AND
PHSL2 15 ms
RVL2 AND OR t STRVL1
AND
PHSL3
RVL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STRVL2
AND
RVL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
RVL2L3 AND OR t STRVL3
PHSL3L1 AND
RVL3L1 AND
OR
STRVPE
IN present AND

BLOCK
VTSZ OR

IEC12000141-1-en.vsd
IEC12000141 V1 EN

Figure 188: Additional start outputs 3

365
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.11.8 Technical data

Table 179: ZMFPDIS, ZMFCPDIS technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones 3 selectable -
directions, 3 fixed
directions
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph (5-6000)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir
and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance (0.01 - 3000.00) ohm/
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop phase
Positive sequence resistance (0.00 - 1000.00) ohm/
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop phase
Zero sequence reactance reach (0.01 - 9000.00) ohm/p 2.0% of static accuracy
2.0 deg static angular accuracy
Zero sequence resistive reach (0.00 - 3000.00) ohm/p Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Fault resistance reach, Ph-E and (0.01 -9000.00) ohm/l
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Ph-Ph
Angle: At 0 deg and 85 deg
Dynamic overreach < 5% at 85 deg
measured with CVTs
and 0.5 < SIR < 30
Definite time delay to trip, Ph-E (0.000-60.000) s 2.0% or 35 ms whichever is greater
and Ph-Ph operation
Operate time 16 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min = 20 ms -
Max = 35 ms
Reset ratio 105% typically -

7.12 High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS

7.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
High speed distance protection zone ZMFCPDIS 21
(zone 1-6)

S00346 V1 EN

7.12.2 Functionality
High speed distance protection (ZMFCPDIS) provides sub-cycle, down towards half-
cycle, operate time for basic faults within 60% of the line length and up to around SIR
5. At the same time, it is specifically designed for extra care during difficult conditions
in high voltage transmission networks, like faults on long heavily loaded lines and

366
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

faults generating heavily distorted signals. These faults are handled with outmost
security and dependability, although sometimes with reduced operating speed.

High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS is fundamentally the same function as

ZMFPDIS but provides more flexibility in zone settings to suit more complex
applications, such as series compensated lines. In operation for series compensated
networks, the parameters of the directional function are altered to handle voltage
reversal.

The ZMFCPDIS function is a six-zone full scheme protection with three fault loops
for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults for each of the
independent zones, which makes the function suitable in applications with single-
phase autoreclosing.

The zones can operate independently of each other in directional (forward or reverse)
or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with a communication
scheme, for protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations,
such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines, and so on.

A new built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of the

distance zones in the load exporting end during phase-to-earth faults on heavily
loaded power lines. It also reduces underreach in the importing end.

The ZMFCPDIS function block incorporates a phase-selection element and a

directional element, contrary to previous designs in the 670series, where these
elements were represented with separate function blocks.

The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change

criteria, with significant increased dependability. Naturally, there is also a part
operating with continuous criteria that operates in parallel

The directional element utilizes a set of well-established quantities to provide fast and
correct directional evaluation during various conditions, including close-in three-
phase faults, simultaneous faults and faults with only zero-sequence in-feed.

367
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.12.3 Function block

ZMFCPDIS
I3P* TRIPZ
U3P* TRIPZ1
BLOCK TRL1Z1
VTSZ TRL2Z1
BLKZ1 TRL3Z1
BLKZ2 TRIPZ2
BLKZ3 TRL1Z2
BLKZ4 TRL2Z2
BLKZ5 TRL3Z2
BLKZRV TRIPZ3
BLKTRZ1 TRIPZ4
BLKTRZ2 TRIPZ5
BLKTRZ3 TRIPZRV
BLKTRZ4 STARTZ
BLKTRZ5 STARTZ1
BLKTRZRV STNDZ1
STARTZ2
STL1Z2
STL2Z2
STL3Z2
STNDZ2
STARTZ3
STNDZ3
STARTZ4
STNDZ4
STARTZ5
STNDZ5
STARTZRV
STL1ZRV
STL2ZRV
STL3ZRV
STNDZRV
STARTND
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STFWL1
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
ZL1
ZL1RANG
ZL1ANGL
ZL2
ZL2RANG
ZL2ANGL
ZL3
ZL3RANG
ZL3ANGL

IEC11000422.vsdx

IEC11000422 V2 EN

Figure 189: ZMFCPDIS function block

368
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.12.4 Signals
Table 180: ZMFCPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire
function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire
function
BLKZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 1
BLKZ2 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 2
BLKZ3 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 3
BLKZ4 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 4
BLKZ5 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of zone 5
BLKZRV BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of reverse
zone
BLKTRZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 1
BLKTRZ2 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 2
BLKTRZ3 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 3
BLKTRZ4 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 4
BLKTRZ5 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 5
BLKTRZRV BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of reverse
zone

Table 181: ZMFCPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIPZ1 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 1 - forward
direction
TRL1Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRL2Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L2 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRL3Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L3 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRIPZ2 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 2 - forward
direction
TRL1Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRL2Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRL3Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRIPZ3 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone
direction
TRIPZ4 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone
direction
Table continues on next page

369
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

TRIPZ5 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone
direction
TRIPZRV BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone RV - reverse
dir.
STARTZ1 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 - forward
direction
STNDZ1 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 - any
direction
STARTZ2 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 - forward
direction
STL1Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction
STL2Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction
STL3Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction
STNDZ2 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 - any
direction
STARTZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone
direction
STNDZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - any
direction
STARTZ4 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone
direction
STNDZ4 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - any
direction
STARTZ5 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone
direction
STNDZ5 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - any
direction
STARTZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV -
reverse dir.
STL1ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone RV - reverse direction
STL2ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L2 from zone RV - reverse direction
STL3ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L3 from zone RV - reverse direction
STNDZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV - any
direction
STARTND BOOLEAN Fault detected in any phase or phases - any
direction
STNDL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - any direction
STNDL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - any direction
STNDL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - any direction
STFWL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction
STFWL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction
STFWPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - forward
direction
STRVL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction
Table continues on next page

370
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

STRVL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction
STRVPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - reverse
direction
STFW1PH BOOLEAN Single-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW2PH BOOLEAN Two-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase fault detected - forward direction
STPE BOOLEAN Ph-E zone measurement enabled - any direction
STPP BOOLEAN Ph-Ph zone measurement enabled - any direction

7.12.5 Settings
Table 182: ZMFCPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode Off / On
On
OperationSC NoSeriesComp - - NoSeriesComp Selection of series compensation
SeriesComp operation Off / On
RLdFw 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 60.00 Resistance determining the load
impedance area - forward
RLdRv 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 60.00 Resistance determining the load
impedance area - reverse
XLd 0.01 - 10000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 400.00 Reactance determining the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Angle determining the load impedance
area
CVTtype Any - - Passive type CVT selection determining the filtering of
Passive type the function
None (Magnetic)
OpModeZ1 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 1
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1FwPPZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 1, forward dir.
R1FwPPZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph, zone
1, forward dir.
RFPPZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1,
forw & rev dir.
X1RvPPZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1,
reverse direction
X1FwPEZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone
1, forward dir.
R1FwPEZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone
1, forward dir.
X0FwPEZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone 1,
forward direction
Table continues on next page

371
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

R0FwPEZ1 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone 1,
forward direction
RFPEZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 1, forw
& rev dir.
X1RvPEZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone 1,
reverse direction
tPPZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 1
tPEZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 1
IMinOpPPZ1 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 1
IMinOpPEZ1 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 1
OpModeZ2 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 2
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1FwPPZ2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 2, forward dir.
R1FwPPZ2 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph, zone
2, forward dir.
RFPPZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 2,
forw & rev dir.
X1RvPPZ2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 2,
reverse direction
X1FwPEZ2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone
2, forward dir.
R1FwPEZ2 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone
2, forward dir.
X0FwPEZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone 2,
forward direction
R0FwPEZ2 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone 2,
forward direction
RFPEZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 2, forw
& rev dir.
X1RvPEZ2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone 2,
reverse direction
tPPZ2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 2
tPEZ2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 2
IMinOpPPZ2 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 2
IMinOpPEZ2 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 2
OpModeZ3 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 3
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
DirModeZ3 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 3 (which will be the Fw
Forward direction of zone 3)
Reverse
Table continues on next page

372
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

X1FwPPZ3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 3, zone direction
R1FwPPZ3 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph, zone
3, zone direction
RFFwPPZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3,
zone direction
X1RvPPZ3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3,
opposite to zone dir
RFRvPPZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3,
opposite to zone dir.
X1FwPEZ3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone
3, zone direction
R1FwPEZ3 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone
3, zone direction
X0FwPEZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone 3,
zone direction
R0FwPEZ3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone 3,
zone direction
RFFwPEZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 3,
zone direction
X1RvPEZ3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone 3,
opposite to zone dir
RFRvPEZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 3,
opposite to zone dir.
tPPZ3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 3
tPEZ3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 3
IMinOpPPZ3 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 3
IMinOpPEZ3 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 3
OpModeZ4 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 4
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
DirModeZ4 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 4 (which will be the Fw
Forward direction of zone 4)
Reverse
X1FwPPZ4 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 4, zone direction
R1FwPPZ4 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph, zone
4, zone direction
RFFwPPZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4,
zone direction
X1RvPPZ4 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4,
opposite to zone dir
RFRvPPZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4,
opposite to zone dir.
X1FwPEZ4 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone
4, zone direction
Table continues on next page

373
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

R1FwPEZ4 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone
4, zone direction
X0FwPEZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone 4,
zone direction
R0FwPEZ4 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone 4,
zone direction
RFFwPEZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 4,
zone direction
X1RvPEZ4 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone 4,
opposite to zone dir
RFRvPEZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 4,
opposite to zone dir.
tPPZ4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 4
tPEZ4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 4
IMinOpPPZ4 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 4
IMinOpPEZ4 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 4
OpModeZ5 Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone 5
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
DirModeZ5 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 5 (which will be the Fw
Forward direction of zone 5)
Reverse
X1FwPPZ5 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,
zone 5, zone direction
R1FwPPZ5 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph, zone
5, zone direction
RFFwPPZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5,
zone direction
X1RvPPZ5 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5,
opposite to zone dir
RFRvPPZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5,
opposite to zone dir.
X1FwPEZ5 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone
5, zone direction
R1FwPEZ5 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone
5, zone direction
X0FwPEZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone 5,
zone direction
R0FwPEZ5 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone 5,
zone direction
RFFwPEZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 5,
zone direction
X1RvPEZ5 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone 5,
opposite to zone dir
RFRvPEZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 5,
opposite to zone dir.
Table continues on next page

374
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPPZ5 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.600 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 5
tPEZ5 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.600 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 5
IMinOpPPZ5 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 5
IMinOpPEZ5 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 5
OpModeZRV Disable-Zone - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E loops,
Enable Ph-E zone RV
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
X1FwPPZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph,
zone RV, reverse dir.
R1FwPPZRV 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph, zone
RV, reverse dir.
RFPPZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV,
rev & forw dir.
X1RvPPZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react, reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV,
forward direction
X1FwPEZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react, reach, Ph-E, zone RV,
reverse direction
R1FwPEZRV 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone
RV, reverse dir.
X0FwPEZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-E, zone
RV, reverse direction
R0FwPEZRV 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-E, zone RV,
reverse direction
RFPEZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone RV,
rev & forw dir.
X1RvPEZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-E, zone RV,
forward direction
tPPZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone RV
tPEZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone RV
IMinOpPPZRV 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph-ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone RV
IMinOpPEZRV 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone RV

Table 183: ZMFCPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ZoneLinkStart Phase Selection - - Phase Selection Select. of start source for all ZoneLinked
1st starting zone trip delay timers
INReleasePE 5 - 400 %IPh 1 400 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth
measuring loops
TimerModeZ1 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 1
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
Table continues on next page

375
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TimerLinksZ1 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 1
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ2 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 2
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ2 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 2
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ3 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 3
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ3 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 3
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ4 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 4
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ4 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 4
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ5 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 5
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ5 LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone 5
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZRV Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone RV
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZRV LoopLink (tPP-tPE) - - LoopLink (tPP- How start of trip delay timers should be
LoopLink & tPE) linked for zone RV
ZoneLink
No Links

Table 184: ZMFCPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

376
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.12.6 Monitored data

Table 185: ZMFCPDIS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L1L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L2L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L3L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
L2R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2
L2X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2
L3R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3
L3X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3

7.12.7 Operation principle

Settings, input and output names are sometimes mentioned in the following text
without its zone suffix (i.e. BLKZx instead of BLKZ3) when the description is equally
valid for all zones.

7.12.7.1 Filtering

Practically all voltage, current and impedance quantities used within the ZMFCPDIS
function are derived from fundamental frequency phasors filtered by a half-cycle
filter.

The phasor filter is frequency adaptive in the sense that its coefficients are changed
based on the estimated power system frequency.

A half-cycle filter will not be able to reject both even and odd harmonics. So, while
odd harmonics will be completely attenuated, accuracy will be affected by even
harmonics. Even harmonics will not cause the distance zones to overreach; instead

377
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

there will be a slightly variable underreach, on average in the same order as the
magnitude ratio between the harmonic and the fundamental component.

7.12.7.2 Distance measuring zones

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which
means that earth fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults for
forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 97 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the six distance
zones.

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV

IEC05000458-2-en.vsd
IEC05000458 V2 EN

Figure 190: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent
distance protection function with six measuring elements.

It is well-known that transients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the
transient overreach of a distance protection. At the same time these transients can be
very diverse in nature from one type to the other; in fact, more diverse than can be
distinguished by the algorithm itself in the course of a few milliseconds. So, a setting
is introduced in order to inform the algorithm about the type of CVT applied and thus
providing the advantage of knowing how performance should be optimized, even
during the first turbulent milliseconds of the fault period.

There are basically two types of CVTs from the function point of view, the passive and
the active type, which refers to the type of ferro-resonance suppression device that is
employed. The active type requires more rigorous filtering which will have a negative
impact on operate times. However, this will be evident primarily at higher source
impedance ratios (SIRs), SIR 5 and above, or close to the reach limit.

It is worth mentioning here that the IEC 60044-5 transient classification is of little or
no use in this connection. It is not primarily the damping of transients that is important;

378
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

it is the frequency content of the transients that is decisive, i.e. how difficult it is to
filter out the specific frequency. So, even if two CVTs, one passive and the other active
type, comply with the same transient class, the active type requires more extensive
filtering in order to avoid transient overreach.

For avoiding overreach and at the same time achieving fast operate times, a
supplementary circular characteristic that includes some alternative processing
(retained from REL 531) is implemented. One such circular characteristic exists for
every measuring loop and quadrilateral characteristic. There are no specific reach
settings for this circular zone. It uses the normal quadrilateral zone settings to
determine a reach that will be appropriate. This implies that the circular characteristic
will always have somewhat shorter reach than the quadrilateral zone.

7.12.7.3 Phase-selection element

The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change

criteria. The current change criteria itself can however only be relied on for a short
period following the fault inception (during what we will call the current change
phase). Subsequent switching in the network may render the change in current invalid.
So, naturally, the phase-selection element also operates on continuous criteria.

The phase-selection element can, owing to the current change criteria, distinguish
faults with minimum influence from load and fault impedance. In other words, it is not
restricted by a load encroachment characteristic during the current change phase. This
significantly improves performance for remote phase-to-earth faults on heavily
loaded lines. One exception, however, is three-phase faults, for which the load
encroachment characteristic always has to be applied, in order to distinguish fault
from load.

The continuous criteria will in the vast majority of cases operate in parallel and carry
on the fault indication after the current change phase has ended. Only in some
particularly difficult faults on heavily loaded lines the continuous criteria might not be
sufficient, for example, when the estimated fault impedance resides within the load
area defined by the load encroachment characteristic. In this case, the indication will
be restricted to a pulse lasting for one or two power system cycles.

Phase-to-phase-earth faults (also called double earth faults) will practically always
activate phase-to-phase zone measurements. This is a substantial difference compared
to the previous phase selection function in the 500- and 600-series (that is,
FDPSPDIS). Measurement in two phase-to-earth loops at the same time is associated
with so-called simultaneous faults: two earth faults at the same time, one each on the
two circuits of a double line, or when the zero sequence current is relatively high due
to a source with low Z0/Z1 ratio.In fact, in these situations zone measurement will be
released both for the related phase-to-earth loops and the phase-to-phase loop
simultaneously. On the other hand, simultaneous faults closer to the remote bus will
gradually take on the properties of a phase-to-phase-earth fault and the function will
eventually use phase-to-phase zone measurements also here.

379
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

In cases where the fault current infeed is more or less completely lack of zero sequence
nature (all phase currents in phase), the measurement will be performed in the phase-
to-earth loops only for a phase-to-phase-earth fault.

However, should it be desirable to use phase-to-earth (and only phase-to-earth) zone

measurement for phase-to-phase-earth faults, the setting INReleasePE can be lowered
from its excessive default value to the level above which phase-to-earth measurement
should be activated.

7.12.7.4 Directional element

Several criteria are employed when making the directional decision. The basis is
provided by comparing a sum of positive sequence voltage and memory voltage with
phase currents. This has been the standard method up to now in the 600-series
(ZDRDIR). For extra security, especially in making a very fast decision, this method
is complemented with an equivalent comparison where, instead of the phase current,
the change in phase current is used. Moreover, a basic negative sequence directional
evaluation is taken into account as a reliable reference during high load condition.
Finally, zero sequence directional evaluation is used whenever there is more or less
exclusive zero sequence in-feed.

Fundamentally, the directional sectors that represent forward direction, one per
measuring loop, are defined by the following equations (examples for L1and L1L2
only):

15 < arg
( (1 k ) U1 L1 + k U 1L1M )
< 120
I L1
EQUATION2546 V2 EN (Equation 77)

15 < arg
( (1 k ) U1 L1L 2 + k U 1L1L 2 M )
< 120
I L1L 2
EQUATION2547 V2 EN (Equation 78)

Where:
U1L1 is the positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1.

U1L1M is the positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1.

IL1 is the phase current in phase L1.

U1L1L2 is the voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

U1L1L2M is the memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

IL1L2 is the current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

k is the factor determining the amount of memory voltage.

The corresponding reverse directional sectors range from 165 to -60 degrees. The
value of the k factor determining the amount of memory voltage used is normally 0.8.

380
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

However, if the SeriesComp option is chosen (only available in ZMFCPDIS) the value
is changed to 0.95.

7.12.7.5 Fuse failure

The ZMFCPDIS function has to be blocked by an additional function like the Fuse
failure supervision (FUFSPVC) or an equivalent external device. Typically, the
binary input VTSZ is used for this purpose.

However, to guarantee that also very fast operation is blocked in a fuse failure
situation, there is a built-in supervision based on change in current that will delay
operation before the FUFSPVC blocking signal is received. The delay will be
introduced if no (vector) magnitude change greater than 5% of IBase has been
detected in any of the phase currents.

7.12.7.6 Power swings

There is need for external blocking of the ZMFCPDIS function during power swings,
either from the Power Swing Blocking function (ZMRPSB) or an external device.

7.12.7.7 Measuring principles

All ZMFCPDIS zones operate according to the non-directional impedance

characteristics presented in figure 191 and figure 192. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per-phase reach.

381
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+RNFw
X 0 PE - X 1FwPE
RFRvPE RFFwPE XNFw =
3
PG- -
XX00PE 1RVPGX 1RvPE
X 1XRVPE
XNRVXNRv
XNRV == = XNFw
33 X 1FwPE
XX0 PE - X-1X
0 PG FWPE
1FWPG
XNFW==
XNFW
X1FwPE+XNFw 3 3R0 PE - R1PE
RNFw =
jN jN 3
R (Ohm/loop)

RFRvPE RFFwPE

X1RvPE+XNRv

jN

RFRvPE RFFwPE

R1PE+RNRv IEC11000417-1-en.vsd

IEC11000417 V1 EN

Figure 191: ZMFCPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/

loop domain

382
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/phase)

RFRvPP R1PP RFFwPP

2 2
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE PG- -
X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
33
XXX00PE
0PE-
PG -
X-1X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW===
XNFW
XNFW
3
X1FwPP 3 3

j j
jN R (Ohm/phase)

RFRvPP RFFwPP
2 2

X1RvPP

jN

RFRvPP RFFwPP
2 2
IEC11000418-1-en.vsd
IEC11000418 V1 EN

Figure 192: ZMFCPDIS Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops

Note that for ZMFCPDIS, the reverse zone ZRV, as well as any of
zones 3-5, that are set to DirMode=Reverse will get their operating
impedances inverted (rotated 180 degrees) internally in order to make
use of the main settings, which are the settings designated Fw.
Therefore, a reverse zone will have its Fw-settings (RFFwPPZRV,
X1FwPEZ3, and so on) applied in the third quadrant, that is, towards
the busbar instead of the line.

The fault loop reach in relation to each fault type may also be presented as in figure
180. The main intention with this illustration is to make clear how the fault resistive
reach should be interpreted. Note in particular that the setting RFPP always represents
the total fault resistance of the loop, even while the fault resistance (arc) may be
divided into parts like for three-phase or phase-to-phase-to-earth faults. The R1 and
jX1 represent the positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault
location.

383
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

IL1 R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
RFPE
fault in phase L1
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1

IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault or Phase-to-
phase-earth fault IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP
IEC11000419-2-en.vsd
IEC11000419 V2 EN

Figure 193: Fault loop model

7.12.7.8 Simplified logic schemes

PHSL1, PHSL2,...PHSL3L1 are internal binary logical signals from the Phase-
selection element. They correspond directly to the six loops of the distance zones and
determine which loops should be released to possibly issue a start or a trip.

FWL1, FWL2,...FWL3L1 and RVL1, RVL2,...RVL3L1 are the internal binary

signals from the Directional element. An FW signal is set true if the criteria for a
forward fault or load is fulfilled for its particular loop. The equivalent applies to the
reverse (RV) signals.

The internal input 'IN present' is true if the residual current (3I0) exceeds 7% of IBase.
However, if current transformer saturation is detected, this criterion is changed to
residual voltage (3U0) exceeding 5% of UBase/sqrt(3) instead.

384
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

15 ms
OR t STPE
AND
PHSL1
15 ms
PHSL2 OR t
AND
PHSL3
15 ms
OR t
PHSL1L2 AND

PHSL2L3 15 ms
OR t
AND
PHSL3L1
15 ms
OR t STPP
AND

BLOCK STARTND
OR
VTSZ OR
STPHS

IEC12000133-1-en.vsd
IEC12000133 V1 EN

Figure 194: Additional start outputs 1

385
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

PHSL1
FWL1 AND
PHSL2 15 ms
FWL2 AND OR t STFWL1
AND
PHSL3
FWL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STFWL2
AND
FWL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
FWL2L3 AND OR t STFWL3
PHSL3L1 AND
FWL3L1 AND
OR
STFWPE
IN present AND

STFW1PH
=1
BLOCK
VTSZ OR

STFW2PH
=2

STFW3PH
=3

IEC12000134-1-en.vsd
IEC12000134 V1 EN

Figure 195: Additional start outputs 2

FW(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z1

FW(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z2

RV(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)ZRV

DirModeZ3-5
TRUE (1) Non-directional
FW(Ln & LmLn) Forward DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z3-5
RV(Ln & LmLn) Reverse

IEC12000137-2-en.vsd
IEC12000137 V2 EN

Figure 196: Connection of directional signals to zones

386
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

15 ms
TZx
t TRIPZx
AND

BLKTRZx
TRL1Zx
OR AND
BLOCK
VTSZ TRL2Zx
OR AND
BLKZx
TRL3Zx
AND
15 ms
L1Zx
t STL1Zx
AND
15 ms
L2Zx
t STL2Zx
AND
15 ms
L3Zx
t STL3Zx
AND

PPZx 15 ms
PEZx OR t STARTZx
AND

15 ms
NDZx
t STNDZx
AND

IEC12000138-1-en.vsd
IEC12000138 V1 EN

Figure 197: Start and trip outputs

387
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

TimerModeZx =
Enable Ph-Ph,
Ph-E

PPZx AND tPPZx

OR AND
AND t
TZx
PEZx AND tPEZx OR
OR
AND t
AND

BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKZx OR
BLKTRZx
OR TimerLinksZx
LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
ZoneLinkStart LoopLink & ZoneLink
OR
STPHS Phase Selection No Links
1st starting zone
LNKZ1 FALSE (0)
LNKZ2
LNKZRV LNKZx
AND
LNKZ3 OR
TimerLinksZx =
LNKZ4 LoopLink & ZoneLink
LNKZ5

IEC12000139-3-en.vsdx

IEC12000139 V3 EN

Figure 198: Logic for linking of timers

388
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

PHSL1
RVL1 AND
PHSL2 15 ms
RVL2 AND OR t STRVL1
AND
PHSL3
RVL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STRVL2
AND
RVL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
RVL2L3 AND OR t STRVL3
PHSL3L1 AND
RVL3L1 AND
OR
STRVPE
IN present AND

BLOCK
VTSZ OR

IEC12000141-1-en.vsd
IEC12000141 V1 EN

Figure 199: Additional start outputs 3

389
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

PEZx
OR
ZML1Zx
PHSL1 AND
DIRL1Zx AND
ZML2Zx
PHSL2 AND
DIRL2Zx AND
ZML3Zx L1Zx
OR
PHSL3 AND
DIRL3Zx AND

ZML1L2Zx L2Zx
OR
PHSL1L2 AND
DIRL1L2Zx AND
ZML2L3Zx L3Zx
PHSL2L3 AND OR
DIRL2L3Zx AND
ZML3L1Zx
PHSL3L1 AND
DIRL3L1Zx AND

PPZx
OR

NDZx
OR

IEC12000140-1-en.vsd
IEC12000140 V1 EN

Figure 200: Intermediate logic

390
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.12.8 Technical data

Table 186: ZMFCPDIS technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones 3 selectable -
directions, 3 fixed
directions
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph (5 - 6000)% of IBase 1.0% of In
and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance (30 - 3000) /phase
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop
Positive sequence resistance (30 - 3000) /phase
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop
Zero sequence reactance reach (100.00 - 9000.00) /p " +- 2.0% static accuracy +- 2.0 deg static
angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage
Zero sequence resistive reach (15.00 - 3000.00) /p range: (0.1 - 1.1) x Ur Current range: (0.5
- 30) x Ir Angle: At 0 deg and 85 deg"
Fault resistance reach, Ph-E and (1.00 - 9000.00) /l
Ph-Ph
Dynamic overreach < 5% at 85 deg
measured with CVT's
and 0.5 < SIR <30
Definite time delay to trip, Ph-E (0.000 - 60.000) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is greater
and Ph-Ph operation
Operate time 16 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min = 20 ms
-
Max = 35 ms
Reset ratio 105% typically -

7.13 Power swing detection ZMRPSB

7.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Power swing detection ZMRPSB 68

Zpsb

SYMBOL-EE V1 EN

7.13.2 Functionality
Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy loads or trip of big generation
plants.

391
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Power swing detection function ZMRPSB is used to detect power swings and initiate
block of all distance protection zones. Occurrence of earth-fault currents during a
power swing inhibits the ZMRPSB function, to allow fault clearance.

7.13.3 Function block

ZMRPSB
I3P* START
U3P* ZOUT
BLOCK ZIN
BLKI01
BLKI02
BLK1PH
REL1PH
BLK2PH
REL2PH
I0CHECK
TRSP
EXTERNAL

IEC06000264-2-en.vsd
IEC06000264 V2 EN

Figure 201: ZMRPSB function block

7.13.4 Signals
Table 187: ZMRPSB Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKI01 BOOLEAN 0 Block inhibit of start output for slow swing condition
BLKI02 BOOLEAN 0 Block inhibit of start output for subsequent residual
current detection
BLK1PH BOOLEAN 0 Block one-out-of-three-phase operating mode
REL1PH BOOLEAN 0 Release one-out-of-three-phase operating mode
BLK2PH BOOLEAN 0 Block two-out-of-three-phase operating mode
REL2PH BOOLEAN 0 Release two-out-of-three-phase operating mode
I0CHECK BOOLEAN 0 Residual current (3I0) detection used to inhibit start
output
TRSP BOOLEAN 0 Single-pole tripping command issued by tripping
function
EXTERNAL BOOLEAN 0 Input for external detection of power swing

392
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 188: ZMRPSB Output signals

Name Type Description
START BOOLEAN Power swing detected
ZOUT BOOLEAN Measured impedance within outer impedance
boundary
ZIN BOOLEAN Measured impedance within inner impedance
boundary

7.13.5 Settings
Table 189: ZMRPSB Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
X1InFw 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Inner reactive boundary, forward
R1LIn 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Line resistance for inner characteristic
angle
R1FInFw 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance coverage to inner
resistive line, forward
X1InRv 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Inner reactive boundary, reverse
R1FInRv 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance line to inner resistive
boundary, reverse
OperationLdCh Off - - On Operation of load discrimination
On characteristic
RLdOutFw 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Outer resistive load boundary, forward
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 25 Load angle determining load impedance
area
RLdOutRv 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Outer resistive load boundary, reverse
kLdRFw 0.50 - 0.90 Mult 0.01 0.75 Multiplication factor for inner resistive load
boundary, forward
kLdRRv 0.50 - 0.90 Mult 0.01 0.75 Multiplication factor for inner resistive load
boundary, reverse
tEF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Timer for overcoming single-pole
reclosing dead time
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate current in % of IBase

Table 190: ZMRPSB Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tP1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.045 Timer for detection of initial power swing
tP2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.015 Timer for detection of subsequent power
swings
tW 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.250 Waiting timer for activation of tP2 timer
Table continues on next page

393
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tH 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Timer for holding power swing START
output
tR1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Timer giving delay to inhibit by the residual
current
tR2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Timer giving delay to inhibit at very slow
swing

Table 191: ZMRPSB Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.13.6 Operation principle

Power swing detection (ZMRPSB ) function comprises an inner and an outer
quadrilateral measurement characteristic with load encroachment, as shown in
figure 202.

Its principle of operation is based on the measurement of the time it takes for a power
swing transient impedance to pass through the impedance area between the outer and
the inner characteristics. Power swings are identified by transition times longer than
a transition time set on corresponding timers. The impedance measuring principle is
the same as that used for the distance protection zones. The impedance and the
characteristic passing times are measured in all three phases separately.

One-out-of-three or two-out-of-three operating modes can be selected according to

the specific system operating conditions.

394
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

X1OutFw jX ZL R1LIn
X1InFw DFw

j
DRv
R1FInRv R1FInFw
DFw
ArgLd j

ArgLd
DRv
DFw

DFw

R
DFw
DRv

RLdInRv RLdInFw
DFw

DRv
RLdOutRv RLdOutFw

j DRv X1InRv
X1OutRv

IEC09000222_1_en.vsd
IEC09000222 V1 EN

Figure 202: Operating characteristic for ZMRPSB function (setting parameters in

italic)

The impedance measurement within ZMRPSB function is performed by solving

equation 79 and equation 80 (n = 1, 2, 3 for each corresponding phase L1, L2 and L3).

ULn
Re Rset
I Ln
EQUATION1183 V2 EN (Equation 79)

ULn
Im Xset
ILn
EQUATION1184 V2 EN (Equation 80)

The Rset and Xset are R and X boundaries.

7.13.6.1 Resistive reach in forward direction

To avoid load encroachment, the resistive reach is limited in forward direction by

setting the parameter RLdOutFw which is the outer resistive load boundary value
while the inner resistive boundary is calculated according to equation 81.

395
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

RLdInFw = kLdRFwRLdOutFw
EQUATION1185 V2 EN (Equation 81)

where:
kLdRFw is a settable multiplication factor less than 1

The slope of the load encroachment inner and outer boundary is defined by setting the
parameter ArgLd.

The load encroachment in the fourth quadrant uses the same settings as in the first
quadrant (same ArgLd and RLdOutFw and calculated value RLdInFw).

The quadrilateral characteristic in the first quadrant is tilted to get a better adaptation
to the distance measuring zones. The angle is the same as the line angle and derived
from the setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the line resistance
for the inner boundary R1LIn. The fault resistance coverage for the inner boundary is
set by the parameter R1FInFw.

From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a distance
between the inner and outer boundary, DFw, is calculated. This value is valid for R
direction in first and fourth quadrant and for X direction in first and second quadrant.

7.13.6.2 Resistive reach in reverse direction

To avoid load encroachment in reverse direction, the resistive reach is limited by

setting the parameter RLdOutRv for the outer boundary of the load encroachment
zone. The distance to the inner resistive load boundary RLdInRv is determined by
using the setting parameter kLdRRv in equation 82.

RLdInRv = kLdRRvRLdOutRv
EQUATION1187 V2 EN (Equation 82)

where:
kLdRRv is a settable multiplication factor less than 1

From the setting parameter RLdOutRv and the calculated value RLdInRv, a distance
between the inner and outer boundary, DRv, is calculated. This value is valid for R
direction in second and third quadrant and for X direction in third and fourth quadrant.

The inner resistive characteristic in the second quadrant outside the load
encroachment part corresponds to the setting parameter R1FInRv for the inner
boundary. The outer boundary is internally calculated as the sum of DRv+R1FInRv.

The inner resistive characteristic in the third quadrant outside the load encroachment
zone consist of the sum of the settings R1FInRv and the line resistance R1LIn. The

396
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

argument of the tilted lines outside the load encroachment is the same as the tilted lines
in the first quadrant. The distance between the inner and outer boundary is the same
as for the load encroachment in reverse direction, that is DRv.

7.13.6.3 Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction

The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in forward direction correspond to the
setting parameter X1InFw and the outer boundary is defined as X1InFw + DFw,

where:
DFw = RLdOutFw - KLdRFw RLdOutFw

The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in reverse direction correspond to the
setting parameter X1InRv for the inner boundary and the outer boundary is defined as
X1InRv + DRv.

where:
DRv = RLdOutRv - KLdRRv RLdOutRv

7.13.6.4 Basic detection logic

The operation of the Power swing detection ZMRPSB is only released if the
magnitude of the current is above the setting of the min operating current, IMinOpPE.

ZMRPSB function can operate in two operating modes:

The 1 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of the
three phases. Figure 203 presents a composition of an internal detection signal
DET-L1 in this particular phase.
The 2 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in at least two
out of three phases. Figure 204 presents a composition of the detection signals
DET1of3 and DET2of3.

Signals ZOUTLn (outer boundary) and ZINLn (inner boundary) in figure 203 are
related to the operation of the impedance measuring elements in each phase separately
(n represents the corresponding L1, L2 and L3). They are internal signals, calculated
by ZMRPSB function.

The tP1 timer in figure 203 serve as detection of initial power swings, which are
usually not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timer become activated for the
detection of the consecutive swings, if the measured impedance exit the operate area
and returns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. The upper part of
figure 203 (internal input signal ZOUTL1, ZINL1, AND-gates and tP-timers) are
duplicated for phase L2 and L3. All tP1 and tP2 timers in the figure have the same
settings.

397
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

ZOUTL1 AND
0-tP1
ZINL1 0 OR
-loop
0-tP2
-loop
AND
0
OR DET-L1
AND AND

ZOUTL2 OR
ZOUTL3

detected 0
0-tW

IEC05000113-2-en.vsd
IEC05000113 V2 EN

Figure 203: Detection of power swing in phase L1

DET-L1
DET-L2 DET1of3 - int.
>1
DET-L3

&

DET2of3 - int.
& >1

&

IEC01000057-2-en.vsd
IEC01000057-TIFF V2 EN

Figure 204: Detection of power swing for 1-of-3 and 2-of-3 operating mode

398
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

ZOUTL1 ZOUT
OR
ZOUTL2 ZINL1
ZIN
ZOUTL3 AND ZINL2 OR

ZINL3
tEF
TRSP
t AND

I0CHECK

10 ms
AND t
BLKI02 OR

tR1
AND t INHIBIT
OR
-loop
tR2
BLKI01 AND t
BLOCK
-loop
DET1of3 - int.
REL1PH
AND
BLK1PH
tH
DET2of3 - int. OR t
REL2PH
AND
BLK2PH OR START
AND
EXTERNAL

en05000114.vsd
IEC05000114 V1 EN

Figure 205: Simplified block diagram for ZMRPSB function

7.13.6.5 Operating and inhibit conditions

Figure 205 presents a simplified logic diagram for the Power swing detection function
ZMRPSB. The internal signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the detailed logic
diagrams in figure 203 and figure 204 respectively.

Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration of the

functional input signals REL1PH, BLK1PH, REL2PH, and BLK2PH.

The load encroachment characteristic can be switched off by setting the parameter
OperationLdCh = Off, but notice that the DFw and DRv will still be calculated from
RLdOutFw and RLdOutRv. The characteristic will in this case be only quadrilateral.

There are four different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal:

399
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Logical 1 on functional input BLOCK inhibits the output START signal

instantaneously.
The INHIBIT internal signal is activated, if the power swing has been detected
and the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic for the
time, which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to disable
this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLKI01 functional input.
The INHIBIT internal signal is activated after the time delay, set on tR1 timer, if
an earth-fault appears during the power swing (input IOCHECK is high) and the
power swing has been detected before the earth-fault (activation of the signal
I0CHECK). It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1
signal to the BLKI02 functional input.
The INHIBIT logical signals becomes logical 1, if the functional input I0CHECK
appears within the time delay, set on tEF timer and the impedance has been seen
within the outer characteristic of ZMRPSB operate characteristic in all three
phases. This function prevents the operation of ZMRPSB function in cases, when
the circuit breaker closes onto persistent single-phase fault after single-phase
autoreclosing dead time, if the initial single-phase fault and single-phase opening
of the circuit breaker causes the power swing in the remaining two phases.

7.13.7 Technical data

Table 192: ZMRPSB technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Reactive reach (0.10-3000.00) W/phase 2.0% static accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
Resistive reach (0.101000.00) W/loop
degrees
Power swing detection operate (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 10 ms whichever
time is greater
Second swing reclaim operate (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 20 ms whichever
time is greater
Minimum operate current (5-30)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

7.14 Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF

7.14.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF - -

400
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.14.2 Functionality
Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF is a function that gives an instantaneous
trip at the closing of breaker onto a fault. A dead-line detection check is provided to
activate ZCVPSOF when the line is dead.

Mho distance protections cannot operate for switch onto fault condition when the
phase voltages are close to zero. An additional logic based on UI Level is used for this
purpose.

ZCVPSOF is a complementary function to the distance protection function. It is

enabled for operation either by the closing command to the circuit breaker (normally
closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker) or automatically by the dead-line
detection. Once enabled, it remains active for tSOTF duration after the enabling signal
is reset. The protection function can be enabled for tripping during the activated time,
freely selected from the functions included in the terminal. The start of any of the
selected protection functions during the enabled condition results in an immediate
TRIP output from the function.

7.14.3 Function block

IEC06000459 V3 EN

Figure 206: ZCVPSOF function block

7.14.4 Signals

Table 193: ZCVPSOF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current DFT
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage DFT
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
START_DLYD BOOLEAN 0 Start from function to be accelerated with delay by
SOTF
BC BOOLEAN 0 External enabling of SOTF
ZACC BOOLEAN 0 Distance zone to be accelerated by SOTF

Table 194: ZCVPSOF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip output

401
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.14.5 Settings

Table 195: ZCVPSOF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
AutoInitMode DLD disabled - - DLD disabled Automatic switch onto fault initialization
Voltage
Current
Current & Voltage
Mode Impedance - - UILevel Mode of operation of SOTF Function
UILevel
UILvl&Imp
IPh< 1 - 100 %IB 1 20 Current level for detection of dead line in
% of IBase
UPh< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Voltage level for detection of dead line in
% of UBase
tDuration 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay for UI detection (s)
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Drop off delay time of switch onto fault
function
tDLD 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Delay time for activation of dead line
detection
tOperate 0.03 - 120.00 s 0.01 0.03 Time delay to operate of switch onto fault
function

Table 196: ZCVPSOF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.14.6 Monitored data

Table 197: ZCVPSOF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3

402
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.14.7 Operation principle

The automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF can be activated externally (by the
breaker-closed input) or internally (automatically) with the dead-line detection using
the UI level-based logic.

When the setting AutoInitMode is DLD disabled, ZCVPSOF is activated by an

external binary input BC.

When the setting AutoInitMode is set to either Voltage, Current or Current & Voltage
modes, ZCVPSOF is activated by the dead-line detection.

The activation from the dead-line detection function is released if the internal signal
DeadLine from the UlLevel Detector function is activated at the same time as the
inputs ZACC and START_DLYD are not activated at least for the duration of tDLD.
The internal signal DeadLine from the UlLevel Detector function is activated under
any of the following conditions:
If all three-phase currents are below the setting IPh< and the AutoInitMode
setting is set to Current
If all three-phase voltages are below the setting UPh< and the AutoInitMode
setting is set to Voltage
If all three-phase currents and voltages are below the settings IPh< and UPh< and
the AutoInitMode setting is set to Current & Voltage

The activated signal is extended for the duration of tSOTF.

To get the TRIP signal, one of the different operate modes must also be selected with
the Mode parameter.
Mode = Impedance; TRIP is released if the input ZACC is activated (connected
normally to the nondirectional distance protection zone) or the START_DLYD
input is activated with a set time delay of tOperate
Mode = UlLevel; TRIP is released if UlLevel detector is activated
Mode = UlLvl&Imp; TRIP is released based either on the impedance-measured
criteria or UlLevel detection

The SOTF UlLevel Detector logic is based on current and voltage levels. The internal
signal SOTFUILevel is activated if the phase voltage is below the set UPh< and the
corresponding phase current is above the set IPh< for a time longer than the duration
set by tDuration.

The function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

The measured phase voltages and currents are provided as service values.

403
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

BLOCK
15ms
BC TRIP
& t

ZACC tSOTF
tDLD t
START_DLYD 1
& t

1
tOperate
t

I3P
U3P

DeadLine
IPh< UILevel tDuration
Detector t
UPh<

AutoInitMode

&
Mode = Impedance

SOTFUILevel
& 1
Mode = UILevel

1
&
Mode = UILvl&Imp

IEC07000084 V3 EN

Figure 207: Simplified logic diagram for Automatic switch onto fault logic

7.14.8 Technical data

Table 198: ZCVPSOF technical data
Parameter Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, detection of dead line (1100)% of 0.5% of Ur
UBase
Operate current, detection of dead line (1100)% of 1.0% of Ir
IBase
Time delay to operate for the switch onto fault function (0.03-120.00) s 2.0% or 20 ms
whichever is greater
Time delay for UI detection (s) (0.000-60.000) s 2.0% or 20 ms
whichever is greater
Delay time for activation of dead line detection (0.000-60.000) s 2.0% or 20 ms
whichever is greater
Drop-off delay time of switch onto fault function (0.000-60.000) s 2.0% or 30 ms
whichever is greater

7.15 Power swing logic PSLPSCH

404
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.15.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Power swing logic PSLPSCH - -

7.15.2 Functionality
Power Swing Logic (PSLPSCH) is a complementary function to Power Swing
Detection (ZMRPSB) function. It provides possibility for selective tripping of faults
on power lines during system oscillations (power swings or pole slips), when the
distance protection function should normally be blocked. The complete logic consists
of two different parts:

Communication and tripping part: provides selective tripping on the basis of

special distance protection zones and a scheme communication logic, which are
not blocked during the system oscillations.
Blocking part: blocks unwanted operation of instantaneous distance protection
zone 1 for oscillations, which are initiated by faults and their clearing on the
adjacent power lines and other primary elements.

7.15.3 Function block

PSLPSCH
BLOCK TRIP
STZMUR STZMURPS
STZMOR BLKZMUR
STPSD BLKZMOR
STDEF CS
STZMPSD
CACC
AR1P1
CSUR
CR

IEC07000026-3-en.vsd
IEC07000026 V3 EN

Figure 208: PSLPSCH function block

7.15.4 Signals
Table 199: PSLPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
STZMUR BOOLEAN 0 Start of the underreaching zone
STZMOR BOOLEAN 0 Start of the overreaching zone
STPSD BOOLEAN 0 Power swing detected
STDEF BOOLEAN 0 Start from Earth Fault Protection in forward or
reverse direction
Table continues on next page

405
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Type Default Description

STZMPSD BOOLEAN 0 Operation of Power Swing Detection external
characteristic
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching ZM zone to be accelerated
AR1P1 BOOLEAN 0 Single pole auto-reclosing in progress
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier send by the underreaching power-swing
zone
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive signal during power swing detection
operation

Table 200: PSLPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip through Power Swing Logic
STZMURPS BOOLEAN Start of Underreaching zone controlled by PSL to
be used in configuration
BLKZMUR BOOLEAN Block trip of underreaching impedance zone
BLKZMOR BOOLEAN Block trip of overreaching distance protection
zones
CS BOOLEAN Carrier send signal controlled by the power swing

7.15.5 Settings
Table 201: PSLPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tDZ 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.050 Permitted max oper time diff between
higher and lower zone
tDZMUR 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Delay for oper of underreach zone with
detected diff in oper time
tCS 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Conditional timer for sending the CS at
power swings
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Conditional timer for tripping at power
swings
tBlkTr 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Timer for blocking the overreaching zones
trip

7.15.6 Operation principle

7.15.6.1 Communication and tripping logic

Communication and tripping logic as used by the power swing distance protection
zones is schematically presented in figure 209.

406
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

STDEF
AR1P1 &

STPSD tCS
CS
BLOCK & t &

CSUR
BLKZMPS
tBlkTr &
tTrip t
t

CACC TRIP
>1
CR &

en06000236.vsd
IEC06000236 V1 EN

Figure 209: Simplified logic diagram power swing communication and tripping
logic

The complete logic remains blocked as long as there is a logical one on the BLOCK
functional input signal. Presence of the logical one on the STDEF functional input
signal also blocks the logic as long as this block is not released by the logical one on
the AR1P1 functional input signal. The functional output signal BLKZMPS remains
logical one as long as the function is not blocked externally (BLOCK is logical zero)
and the earth-fault is detected on protected line (STDEF is logical one), which is
connected in three-phase mode (AR1P1 is logical zero). Timer tBlkTr prolongs the
duration of this blocking condition, if the measured impedance remains within the
operate area of the Power Swing Detection (ZMRPSB) function (STPSD input
active). The BLKZMPS can be used to block the operation of the power-swing zones.

Logical one on functional input CSUR, which is normally connected to the TRIP
functional output of a power swing carrier sending zone, activates functional output
CS, if the function is not blocked by one of the above conditions. It also activates the
TRIP functional output.

Initiation of the CS functional output is possible only, if the STPSD input has been
active longer than the time delay set on the security timer tCS.

Simultaneous presence of the functional input signals PLTR_CRD and CR (local trip
condition) also activates the TRIP functional output, if the function is not blocked by
one of the above conditions and the STPSD signal has been present longer then the
time delay set on the trip timer tTrip.

7.15.6.2 Blocking logic

Figure 210 presents the logical circuits, which control the operation of the
underreaching zone (zone 1) at power swings, caused by the faults and their clearance
on the remote power lines.

407
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

&

BLKZMH
&
STZML tZL
STZMLL
BLOCK & t >1
&
STMZH tDZ
STZMPSD & t
>1
STPSD

&
-loop

en06000237.vsd
IEC06000237 V1 EN

Figure 210: Control of underreaching distance protection (Zone 1) at power

swings caused by the faults and their clearance on adjacent lines and
other system elements

The logic is disabled by a logical one on functional input BLOCK. It can start only if
the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

STPSD functional input signal must be a logical zero. This means, that Power
swing detection (ZMRPSB) function must not detect power swinging over the
protected power line.
STZMPSD functional input must be a logical one. This means that the impedance
must be detected within the external boundary of ZMRPSB function.
STZMOR functional input must be a logical one. This means that the fault must
be detected by the overreaching distance protection zone, for example zone 2.

The STZMURPS functional output, which can be used in complete terminal logic
instead of a normal distance protection zone 1, becomes active under the following
conditions:

If the STZMUR signal appears at the same time as the STZMOR or if it appears
with a time delay, which is shorter than the time delay set on timer tDZ.
If the STZMUR signal appears after the STZMOR signal with a time delay longer
than the delay set on the tDZ timer, and remains active longer than the time delay
set on the tZL timer.

The BLKZMOR functional output signal can be used to block the operation of the
higher distance protection zone, if the fault has moved into the zone 1 operate area
after tDZ time delay.

408
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 202: PSLPSCH technical data

Function
Permitted maximum
operating time difference
between higher and lower
zone
Delay for operation of
underreach zone with
detected difference in
operating time
Conditional timer for sending
the CS at power swings
Conditional timer for tripping
at power swings
Timer for blocking the
overreaching zones trip
Range or value Accuracy
(0.000 60.0000) s 0,2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
(0.000 60.0000) s 0,2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
(0.000 60.0000) s 0,2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
(0.000 60.0000) s 0,2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
(0.000 60.0000) s 0,2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater

7.16 Pole slip protection PSPPPAM

7.16.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM Ucos 78

7.16.2 Functionality
Sudden events in an electric power system such as large changes in load, fault
occurrence or fault clearance, can cause power oscillations referred to as power
swings. In a non-recoverable situation, the power swings become so severe that the
synchronism is lost, a condition referred to as pole slipping. The main purpose of the
pole slip protection (PSPPPAM) is to detect, evaluate, and take the required action for
pole slipping occurrences in the power system.

409
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.16.3 Function block

PSPPPAM
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLKGEN START
BLKMOTOR ZONE1
EXTZONE1 ZONE2
GEN
MOTOR
SFREQ
SLIPZOHM
SLIPZPER
UCOS
UCOSPER

IEC10000045-1-en.vsd
IEC10000045 V1 EN

Figure 211: PSPPPAM function block

7.16.4 Signals
Table 203: PSPPPAM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKGEN BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in generating direction
BLKMOTOR BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in motor direction
EXTZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Extension of zone1 with zone2 region

Table 204: PSPPPAM Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip1 after the N1Limit slip in zone1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip2 after the N2Limit slip in zone2
START BOOLEAN Common start signal
ZONE1 BOOLEAN First slip in zone1 region
ZONE2 BOOLEAN First slip in zone2 region
GEN BOOLEAN Generator is faster than the system
MOTOR BOOLEAN Generator is slower than the system
SFREQ REAL Slip frequency
SLIPZOHM REAL Slip impedance in ohms
SLIPZPER REAL Slip impedance in percent of ZBase
UCOS REAL UCosPhi voltage
UCOSPER REAL UCosPhi voltage in percent of UBase

410
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.16.5 Settings
Table 205: PSPPPAM Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation On / Off
On
OperationZ1 Off - - On Operation Zone1 On / Off
On
OperationZ2 Off - - On Operation Zone2 On / Off
On
ImpedanceZA 0.00 - 1000.00 % 0.01 10.00 Forward impedance in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZB 0.00 - 1000.00 % 0.01 10.00 Reverse impedance in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZC 0.00 - 1000.00 % 0.01 10.00 Impedance of zone1 limit in % of Zbase
AnglePhi 72.00 - 90.00 Deg 0.01 85.00 Angle of the slip impedance line
StartAngle 0.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 110.0 Rotor angle for the start signal
TripAngle 0.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 90.0 Rotor angle for the trip1 and trip2 signals
N1Limit 1 - 20 - 1 1 Count limit for the trip1 signal
N2Limit 1 - 20 - 1 3 Count limit for the trip2 signal

Table 206: PSPPPAM Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ResetTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time without slip to reset all signals

Table 207: PSPPPAM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MeasureMode PosSeq - - PosSeq Measuring mode (PosSeq, L1L2, L2L3,
L1L2 L3L1)
L2L3
L3L1
InvertCTcurr No - - No Invert current direction
Yes
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

411
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.16.6 Monitored data

Table 208: PSPPPAM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SFREQ REAL - Hz Slip frequency
SLIPZOHM REAL - Ohm Slip impedance in ohms
SLIPZPER REAL - % Slip impedance in
percent of ZBase
UCOS REAL - kV UCosPhi voltage
UCOSPER REAL - % UCosPhi voltage in
percent of UBase

7.16.7 Operation principle

If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in the impedance
and voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signaled. If the generator is
slower than the power system, the rotor movement is from left to right and motoring
is signaled (the power system drives the generator as if it were a motor).

The movements in the impedance plane can be seen in Figure 212. The transient
behavior is described by the transient EMF's EA and EB, and by X'd, XT and the
transient system impedance ZS.

412
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Zone 1 Zone 2

EB Xd XT XS EA

IED
B A

jX

XS

Pole slip
impedance XT
d Apparent generator
movement impedance R

Xd

IEC06000437_2_en.vsd
IEC06000437 V2 EN

Figure 212: Movements in the impedance plain

where:
X'd = transient reactance of the generator

XT = short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer

ZS = impedance of the power system A

The detection of rotor angle is enabled when:

the minimum current exceeds 0.10 IN (IN is IBase parameter set under general
setting).
the maximum voltage falls below 0.92 UBase
the voltage Ucos (the voltage in phase with the generator current) has an angular
velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and
the corresponding direction is not blocked.

413
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

en07000004.vsd
IEC07000004 V1 EN

Figure 213: Different generator quantities as function of the angle between the
equivalent generators

An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle exceeds
the angle set for 'WarnAngle'.

Slipping is detected when:

a change of rotor angle of min. 50 ms is recognized

the slip line is crossed between ZA and ZB.

When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in zone
1 and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone 1 when
signal EXTZONE1 is high (external device detects the direction of the centre of
slipping).

After the first slip, the signals ZONE1 or ZONE2 and depending on the direction of
slip - either GEN or MOTOR are issued.

Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line is
crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements.

Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the rate of rotor
movement has reduced in relation to the preceding slip or the slip line is crossed in the
opposite direction outside ZA-ZB. A further slip in the opposite direction within ZA-
ZB resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip.

414
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

The TRIP1 tripping command and signal are generated after N1 slips in zone 1,
providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle. The TRIP2 signal is generated after
N2 slips in zone 2, providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle.

All signals are reset if:

the direction of movement reverses

the rotor angle detector resets without a slip being counted or
no rotor relative movement was detected during the time ResetTime.

Imin > 0.10 IBase

Ucos< 0.92 UBase AND

START
AND
0.2 Slip.Freq. 8 Hz

startAngle

ZONE1
AND
Z cross line ZC - ZB

ZONE2
AND
Z cross line ZA - ZC

Counter
a
ab
N1Limit b TRIP1
AND

tripAngle OR
TRIP

Counter
a
ab
N2Limit b TRIP2
AND

IEC07000005.vsd

IEC07000005 V2 EN

Figure 214: Simplified logic diagram for pole slip protection PSPPPAM

415
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.16.8 Technical data

Table 209: PSPPPAM technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase 2.0% of Ur/Ir

Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters (1 - 20) -

7.17 Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM

7.17.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM 78

<

7.17.2 Functionality
The out-of-step protection OOSPPAM function in the IED can be used for both
generator protection and as well for line protection applications.

The main purpose of the OOSPPAM function is to detect, evaluate, and take the
required action during pole slipping occurrences in the power system.

The OOSPPAM function detects pole slip conditions and trips the generator as fast as
possible, after the first pole-slip if the center of oscillation is found to be in zone 1,
which normally includes the generator and its step-up power transformer. If the center
of oscillation is found to be further out in the power system, in zone 2, more than one
pole-slip is usually allowed before the generator-transformer unit is disconnected. A
parameter setting is available to take into account the circuit breaker opening time. If
there are several out-of-step relays in the power system, then the one which finds the
center of oscillation in its zone 1 should operate first.

Two current channels I3P1 and I3P2 are available in OOSPPAM function to allow the
direct connection of two groups of three-phase currents; that may be needed for very
powerful generators, with stator windings split into two groups per phase, when each
group is equipped with current transformers. The protection function performs a
simple summation of the currents of the two channels I3P1 and I3P2.

416
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.17.3 Function block

OOSPPAM
I3P1* TRIP
I3P2* TRIPZ1
U3P* TRIPZ2
BLOCK START
BLKGEN GENMODE
BLKMOT MOTMODE
EXTZ1 R
X
SLIPFREQ
ROTORANG
UCOSPHI

IEC12000188-3-en.vsd
IEC12000188 V3 EN

Figure 215: OOSPPAM function block

7.17.4 Signals
Table 210: OOSPPAM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Group connection for three-phase current input 1
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Group connection for three-phase current input 2
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for three-phase voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKGEN BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in generating direction
BLKMOT BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in motor direction
EXTZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Extension of zone1 reach to zone2 settings

Table 211: OOSPPAM Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip, issued when either zone 1 or zone 2
give trip
TRIPZ1 BOOLEAN Zone 1 trip
TRIPZ2 BOOLEAN Zone 2 trip
START BOOLEAN Set when measured impedance enters lens
characteristic
GENMODE BOOLEAN Generator rotates faster than the system during
pole slip
MOTMODE BOOLEAN Generator rotates slower than the system during
pole slip
R REAL Real part of measured positive-sequence
impedance % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
X REAL Imaginary part of measured positive-seq
impedance % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
Table continues on next page

417
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

SLIPFREQ REAL Slip frequency in Hz
ROTORANG REAL Rotor angle as estimated by the out-of-step
function
UCOSPHI REAL Estimated Ucos(Phi) voltage during pole slip, in V

7.17.5 Settings
Table 212: OOSPPAM Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationZ1 Off - - On Operation Zone1 Off / On
On
ReachZ1 1.00 - 100.00 % ZFw 0.01 50.00 Percentage part of total forward
impedance; defines Z1 reach
OperationZ2 Off - - On Operation Zone2 Off / On
On
tBreaker 0.000 - 1.000 s 0.001 0.040 Breaker opening time; use default 0s
value if it is unknown

Table 213: OOSPPAM Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NoOfSlipsZ1 1 - 20 - 1 1 Number of pole-slips in zone 1 required to
get zone 1 trip
NoOfSlipsZ2 1 - 60 - 1 3 Number of pole-slips in zone 2 required to
get zone 2 trip
tReset 1.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 6.000 Time without any slip required to
completely reset function

Table 214: OOSPPAM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
ForwardR 0.00 - 1000.00 %ZB 0.01 1.00 Real part of total forward impedance for
Z2, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
ForwardX 0.00 - 1000.00 %ZB 0.01 10.00 Imag. part of total forward impedance for
Z2, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
ReverseR 0.00 - 1000.00 %ZB 0.01 1.00 Real part of source impedance behind
relay, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
ReverseX 0.00 - 1000.00 %ZB 0.01 10.00 Imag. part of source impedance behind
relay, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
InvertCTCurr No - - No Invert current direction
Yes

418
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 215: OOSPPAM Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StartAngle 90.0 - 130.0 Deg 0.1 110.0 Angle between two rotors to get the start
signal, in deg
TripAngle 15.0 - 90.0 Deg 0.1 60.0 Maximum rotor angle to allow trip signals,
in deg

7.17.6 Monitored data

Table 216: OOSPPAM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CURRENT REAL - A Magnitude of the
measured positive-
sequence current, in A
VOLTAGE REAL - kV Magnitude of the
measured positive-
sequence voltage, in V
R REAL - % Real part of measured
positive-sequence
impedance % of UBase/
(sqrt(3)*IBase)
X REAL - % Imaginary part of
measured positive-seq
impedance % of UBase/
(sqrt(3)*IBase)
SLIPFREQ REAL - Hz Slip frequency in Hz
ROTORANG REAL - deg Rotor angle as estimated
by the out-of-step
function
UCOSPHI REAL - kV Estimated Ucos(Phi)
voltage during pole slip,
in V

7.17.7 Operation principle

General
Under balanced and stable conditions, a generator operates with a constant rotor angle
(power angle), delivering active electrical power to the power system, which is
approximately equal to the input mechanical power on the generator axis.The currents
and voltages are constant and stable. An out-of-step condition is characterized by
periodic changes in the rotor angle, that leads to a wild flow of the synchronizing
power; so there are also periodic changes of rotational speed, currents and voltages.
When displayed in the complex impedance plane, these changes are characterized by
a cyclic change in the complex load impedance Z(R, X) as measured at the terminals
of the generator, or at the location of the instrument transformers of a power line
connecting two power subsystems. This is shown in Figure 216.

419
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

1.5 trajectory
of Z(R, X)

to the 3rd
The 2nd pole-slip

Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms

1 The 1st X in Ohms
pole slip
pole slip
occurred Pre-disturbance
occurred
RE normal load
- - - - -
- - - - ----------- - - - - Z(R, X)
0.5 - ---
3 ----
---- --
Zone 2 -- - 1 ---- - 0
- - 2 -- -
- --- -
^ --^ ^ ^ ^ --^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ---- -
-
- -- ^ ^-- ^ ^ ^ -^
Zone 1
0 -
- ---- --- -
-
- -
-- relay --
- -
- --- -- - R in Ohms
limit of reach -- -- -- -
-
-- --- -- -
--
lens determined - - ----- ------ 0- - - pre-disturbance Z(R, X)
- -
------
- -- - - - --- -
-0.5 by the setting - 1 Z(R, X) under 3-phase fault
StartAngle = 120 SE 2 Z(R, X) when fault cleared
3 Z when pole-slip declared

-1
-1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
IEC10000109-1-en.vsd
IEC10000109 V1 EN

Figure 216: Loci of the complex impedance Z(R, X) for a typical case of generator
losing step after a short circuit that was not cleared fast enough

Under typical, normal load conditions, when the protected generator supplies the
active and the reactive power to the power system, the complex impedance Z(R, X) is
in the 1st quadrant, point 0 in Figure 216. One can see that under a three-phase fault
conditions, the centre of oscillation is at the point of fault, point 1, which is logical, as
all three voltages are zero or near zero at that point. Under the fault conditions the
generator accelerated and when the fault was finally cleared, the complex impedance
Z(R, X) jumped to the point 2. By that time, the generator has already lost its step, Z(R,
X) continues its way from the right-hand side to the left-hand side, and the 1st pole-
slip cannot be avoided. If the generator is not immediately disconnected, it will
continue pole-slipping see Figure 216, where two pole-slips (two pole-slip cycles)
are shown. Under out-of-step conditions, the centre of oscillation is where the locus of
the complex impedance Z(R, X) crosses the (impedance) line connecting the points
SE (Sending End), and RE (Receiving End). The point on the SE RE line where the
trajectory of Z(R, X) crosses the impedance line can change with time and is mainly
a function of the internal induced voltages at both ends of the equivalent two-machine
system, that is, at points SE and RE.

Measurement of the magnitude, direction and rate-of-change of load impedance

relative to a generators terminals provides a convenient and generally reliable means
of detecting whether machines are out-of-step and pole-slipping is taking place.
Measurement of the rotor (power) angle is important as well.

Rotor (power) angle can be thought of as the angle between the two lines, connecting
point 0 in Figure 216, that is, Z(R, X) under normal load, with the points SE and RE,
respectively. These two lines are not shown in Figure 216. Normal values of the power
angle, that is, under stable, steady-state, load conditions, are from 30 to 60 electrical

420
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

degrees. It can be observed in Figure 217 that the angle reaches 180 degrees when the
complex impedance Z(R, X) crosses the impedance line SE RE. It then changes the
sign, and continues from -180 degrees to 0 degrees, and so on. Figure 217 shows the
rotor (power) angle and the magnitude of Z(R, X) against time for the case from Figure
216.

4
|Z| in Ohms
rotor (power)
3 normal angle in rad
angle
Impe dance Z in Ohm and rotor a ngle in radian

load
Z(R, X) unde r fa ult lies |Z|
2
on the impe dance line
or nea r (for 3-ph faults )
1
0
0
fault 500 ms
-1 fa ult
occ urrs
Unde r 3-pha s e fa ult
condition rotor a ngle 3
-2
of a pp. 180 de gre e s
is m e a s ure d ...
2
-3 Z(R,X) cros s e d
1 1 the im pe da nce line , Z-line ,
conne cting points S E - RE
-4
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
Time in millis econds

IEC10000110-2-en.vsd

IEC10000110 V2 EN

Figure 217: Rotor (power) angle and magnitude of the complex impedance Z(R,
X) against the time

In order to be able to fully understand the principles of OOSPPAM, a stable case, that
is, a case where the disturbance does not make a generator to go out-of-step, must be
shown.

421
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

1
SE RE
G X [Ohm]
0.8 Z(R,X) 20 ms
fault
relay after line out
- - - RE - - -
0.6 - - -- -
-- ---- ----- 4 - - pre-fault

Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms

- -- ---
zone 2 - - - - -
-- --- - Z(R,X)
0.4 - ---- --- 2 -
- -
- -- -1 5
- ---- fault --- -
0.2 X-line ^ -^ ^ ^ ^ ---^ ^ 3 -- -
- ^ ^ -
^ ^ ^ ^ ^-- ^ ^ ^ -^
-
--
- --- Z-line -- - 0
- --- --- - 6
0 - -- -- -
- --
- --- - R
limit of - -
-- relay lens - -- -
-- -
-0.2 reach - -- 110 ---- -
zone 1- - --- - -
--- --- -
- --- --- -
-0.4 -- --- ------ -
-- -- -- --
- - -- - - -- - -
-0.6 SE
0 pre-fault Z(R, X)
this circle forms 3 Z(R, X) under fault
-0.8 the right-hand side 5 Z 20 ms after line out
edge of the lens 6 pow er line reclosed
-1
-1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms IEC10000111-1-en.vsd
IEC10000111 V1 EN

Figure 218: A stable case where the disturbance does not make the generator to
go out-of-step

It shall be observed that for a stable case, as shown in Figure 218, where the
disturbance does not cause the generator to lose step, the complex impedance Z(R, X)
exits the lens characteristic on the same side (point 4) it entered it (point 2), and never
re-enters the lens. In a stable case, where the protected generator remains in
synchronism, the complex impedance returns to quadrant 1, and, after the oscillations
fade, it returns to the initial normal load position (point 0), or near.

7.17.7.1 Lens characteristic

A precondition in order to be able to construct a suitable lens characteristic is that the

power system in which OOSPPAM is installed, is modeled as a two-machine
equivalent system, or as a single machine infinite bus equivalent power system.
Then the impedances from the position of OOSPPAM in the direction of the normal
load flow (that is from the measurement point to the remote system) can be taken as
forward. The lens characteristic, as shown in Figure216 and Figure218, is obtained so
that two equal in size but differently offset Mho characteristics are set to overlap. The
resultant lens characteristic is the loci of complex impedance Z(R, X) for which the
rotor (power) angle is constant, for example 110 degrees or 120 degrees; if the rotor
(power) angle approaches this value, then there is a high risk to have an out of step
condition. The limit-of- reach circle is constructed automatically by the algorithm; it
is about 10% wider than the the circle that has the line SE-RE as diameter (that is the
out-of-step characteristic which corresponds to the rotor (power) angle of 90 degrees).
Figure 219 illustrates construction of the lens characteristic for a power system.

422
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

X
Position of the OOS
- - - RE- - -
0.6 - - - - relay is the origin of
- - --
- -- ----
- -- -the R - X plane
- - --- Ze --
---
-
- Zone 2 -- -
0.4 X-line - - - - -

Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms

--
- --
- -
-- -
determined -- Zline
- - -- -
by the ^ ^- ^ -
- --
0.2 ^ ^ ^-- ^ - -
setting - - ^ ^ ^ ^ - -
--- ^ ^ ^ --- ^
ReachZ1 - -- -- ^ ^ ^-
Ztr
- --- -- - R
0 - Zone 1 -- --
- -
-- relay -
- -- 120 -- Z(R,X) -
- -- -- -
- Z-line ---
-0.2 - -- Zgen -
-- --
limit-of-reach -
-
-- --- -
-- Lens is the - locus
--
--
circle depends on - --
-- -- of constant
-
rotor (power)
-0.4 - -- --- -
the position of the -
- - -- - --- angle,
-
- e.g. 120.
-
points SE and RE - - -- - - - - - -Lens' width determined
SE
-0.6 by the setting StartAngle

-0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1

Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
IEC10000112-1-en.vsd
IEC10000112 V1 EN

Figure 219: Construction of the lens characteristic for a power system

ReverseZ
ReverseZ(ReverseR, ReverseX)) ForwardZ(ForwardR, ForwardX)

Zgen(Rgen , Xgen) Ztr(Rtr, Xtr) Zline(Rline, Xline) Zeq(Req, Xeq)

Generator Transformer Infinite power

13.8 kV 13.8 / 220 kV system
Power line System
13.8 kV 220 kV equivalent
G d Y

SE RE

Out-Of-Step ReverseR = Rg ForwardR = Rtr + Rline + Req

REG ReverseX = Xd ForwardX = Xtr + Xline + Xeq
protection
OOSPPAM
All impedances must be referred to the generator voltage 13.8 kV

IEC10000113-2-en.vsd
IEC10000113 V2 EN

Figure 220: Example of an actual power system

To be able to automatically construct the lens characteristic for a system shown in

Figure 220, the actual power system must be modeled as a two-machine equivalent
system, or as a single machine infinite bus equivalent system, the following
information is necessary: Zgen(Rgen, Xgen), Ztr(Rtr, Xtr), Zline(Rline, Xline),
Zeq(Req, Xeq), and the setting StartAngle , for example 120 degrees. All impedances
must be referred to the voltage level where the out-of-step protection relay is placed;
in the case shown in Figure 220 the relay is connected to the terminals of the generator
and, therefore, the previous quantities shall be referred to the generator nominal

423
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

voltage and nominal current. The impedances from the position of the out-of-step
protection in the direction of the normal load flow can be taken as forward.

The out-of-step relay, as in Figure 220 looks into the system and the impedances in
that direction are forward impedances:
ForwardX = Xtr + Xline + Xeq (All values referred to generator voltage)
ForwardR = Rtr + Rline + Req (All values referred to generator voltage)

The impedances that can be measured in the reverse direction are:

ReverseX = Xd' (Generator transient reactance suitable for this protection)
ReverseR = Rg (Relatively very small, can often be neglected)

Resistances are much smaller than reactances, but in general can not be neglected. The
ratio (ForwardX + ReverseX) / (ForwardR + ReverseR) determines the inclination of
the Z-line, connecting the point SE (Sending End) and RE (Receiving End), and is
typically approximately 85 degrees. While the length of the Z-line depends on the
values of ForwardX, ReverseX, ForwardR, and ReverseR, the width of the lens is a
function of the setting StartAngle .The lens is broader for smaller values of the
StartAngle , and becomes a circle for StartAngle = 90 degrees.

When the complex impedance Z(R, X) enters the lens, pole slipping is imminent, and a
start signal is issued. The angle recommended to form the lens is 110 or 120 degrees,
because it is this rotor (power) angle where problems with dynamic stability usually
begin. Rotor (power) angle 120 degrees is sometimes called the angle of no return
because if this angle is reached under generator power swings, the generator is most
likely to lose step.

7.17.7.2 Detecting an out-of-step condition

An out-of-step condition is characterized by periodic changes of the rotor angle, that

leads to a wild flow of the synchronizing power; so there are also periodic changes of
rotational speed, currents and voltages. When displayed in the complex impedance
plane, these changes are characterized by a cyclic change in the complex load
impedance Z(R, X) as measured at the terminals of the generator, or at the location of
the instrument transformers of a power line connecting two power sub-systems. This
was shown in Figure 216. When a synchronous machine is out-of-step, pole-slips
occur. To recognize a pole-slip, the complex impedance Z(R,X) must traverse the lens
from right to left in case of a generator and in the opposite direction in case of a motor.
Another requirement is that the travel across the lens takes no less than a specific
minimum traverse time, typically 40...60 milliseconds. The above timing is used to
discriminate a fault from an out-of-step condition. In Figure 216, some important
points on the trajectory of Z(R, X) are designated. Point 0: the pre-fault, normal load
Z(R, X). Point 1: impedance Z under a three-phase fault with low fault resistance: Z
lies practically on, or very near, the Z-line. Transition of the measured Z from point 0
to point 1 takes app. 20 ms, due to Fourier filters. Point 2: Z immediately after the fault
has been cleared. Transition of the measured Z from point 1 to point 2 takes
approximately 20 ms, due to Fourier filters. The complex impedance then travels in

424
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

the direction from the right to the left, and exits the lens on the opposite side. When the
complex impedance exits the lens on the side opposite to its entrance, the 1st pole-slip
has already occurred and more pole-slips can be expected if the generator is not
disconnected. Figure 216 shows two pole-slips. Figures like Figure 216 and Figure
218 are always possible to draw by means of the analog output data from the pole-slip
function, and are of great help with eventual investigations of the performance of the
out-of-step function.

7.17.7.3 Maximum slip frequency

A pole-slip may be detected if it has a slip frequency lower than a maximum value
fsMax. The specific value of fsMax depends on the setting (parameter) StartAngle
(which determines the width of the lens characteristic). A parameter in this calculation
routine is the value of the minimum traverse time, traverseTimeMin. The minimum
traverse time is the minimum time that the travel of the complex impedance Z(R, X)
through the lens, from one side to the other, must last in order to recognize that a pole-
slip has occurred. The value of the internal constant traverseTimeMin is a function of
the set StartAngle.For values of StartAngle <= 110, traverseTimeMin = 50 ms. For
values StartAngle > 110, traverseTimeMin = 40 ms. The expression which relates the
maximum slip frequency fsMax and the traverseTimeMin is as follows:

1000 StartAngle []
fsMax [ Hz ] 1.000 -
traverseTimeMin [ ms ] 180 []
IECEQUATION2319 V1 EN (Equation 83)

The maximum slip frequency fsMax for traverseTimeMin = 50 ms is:

StartAngle = 90 fsMax = 20 0.500 = 10.000 Hz

StartAngle = 100 fsMax = 20 0.444 = 8.888 Hz
StartAngle = 110 fsMax = 20 0.388 = 7.777 Hz (default 110)

The maximum slip frequency fsMax for traverseTimeMin = 40 ms is:

StartAngle = 120 fsMax = 25 0.333 = 8.333 Hz

StartAngle = 130 fsMax = 25 0.277 = 6.944 Hz

The minimum value of fsMax is 6.994 Hz. When StartAngle = 110 degrees, fsMax =
7.777 Hz. This implies, that the default StartAngle = 110 degrees covers 90% of cases
as, the typical final slip frequency is between 2 - 5Hz. In practice, however, before the
slip frequency, for example 7.777 Hz, is reached, at least three pole-slips have
occurred. In other words, if we consider a linear increase of frequency from 50 Hz to
57.777 Hz, at least three pole-slips will occur (in fact: (57.777 - 50) / 2 = 3.889). The
exact instantaneous slip-frequency expressed in Hz (corresponding to number of pole
slips per second) is difficult to calculate. The easiest and most exact method is to
measure time between two successive pole slips. This means that, the instantaneous
slip-frequency is measured only after the second pole-slip, if the protected machine is

425
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

not already disconnected after the first pole-slip. The measured value of
slipsPerSecond (SLIPFREQ) is equal to the average slip-frequency of the machine
between the last two successive pole-slips.

7.17.7.4 Taking care of the circuit breaker

Although out-of-step events are relatively rare, the out-of-step protection should take
care of the circuit breaker health. The electromechanical stress to which the breaker is
exposed shall be minimized. The maximum currents flowing under out-of-step
conditions can be even greater that those for a three-phase short circuit on generator
terminals; see Figure 222. The currents flowing are highest at rotor angle 180 degrees,
and smallest at 0 degrees, where relatively small currents flow. To open the circuit
breaker at 180 degrees, when not only the currents are highest, but the two internal
(that is, induced) voltages at both ends are in opposition, could be fatal for the circuit
breaker. There are two methods available in order to minimize the stress; the second
method is more advanced than the first one.

The first method

The circuit breaker is only allowed to break the current when the rotor angle has
become less than the set value TripAngle, on its way to 0 electrical degrees. A
recommended value for the setting TripAngle is 90 degrees or less, for example 60
degrees. Figure 221 illustrates the case with TripAngle = 90 degrees. The offset Mho
circle represents loci of the complex impedance Z(R, X) for which the rotor (power)
angle is 90 degrees. If the circuit breaker must not open before the rotor angle has
reached 90 degrees on its way towards 0 degrees, then it is clear that the circle delimits
the R X plane into a no trip and a trip region. For TripAngle = 90 degrees, the
trip command will be issued at point 3 when the complex impedance Z(R, X) exits the
circle. By that time the relay logic had already ascertained the loss of step, and the
general decision to trip the generator has already been taken.

The second method

This method is more exact. If the break-time of the circuit breaker is known, (and
specified as the setting tBreaker) than it is possible to initiate a trip (break) command
almost exactly tBreaker milliseconds before the rotor (power) angle reaches 0
degrees, where the currents are at their minimum possible values. The breaker
contacts open at almost exactly 0 degrees, as illustrated in Figure 222 for tBreaker =
0.060 s. The point in time when the breaker opening process must be initiated is
estimated by solving on-line the so called synchronizer differential equation. Note
that if tBreaker is left on the initial (default) value, which is zero (0), then the
alternative setting TripAngle decides when the trip command is given. If specified
tBreaker > 0, for example tBreaker = 0.040 second, then automatically, the TripAngle
is ignored and the second, more exact method applied.

426
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

X[Ohm]
0.6 trip RE - Receiving End (infinite bus)
region
loci of Z(R, X)
0.4 3

Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms

no trip
region 1
here rotor here
0.2 2
angle rotor angle
is -90 no trip is +90
rotor angle
region
= 180
0 no trip
relay
region R[Ohm]
inside Z - line connects
points SE & RE
-0.2 circle
this circle
is loci of
outside the
the rotor
-0.4 circle is the trip
angle = 90
region for
TripAngle <= 90 SE - Sending End (generator)

-0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8

Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
IEC10000114-1-en.vsd
IEC10000114 V1 EN

Figure 221: The imaginary offset Mho circle represents loci of the impedance
Z(R, X) for which the rotor angle is 90 degrees

35
very high currents due
Current in kA, trip command to CB, rotor angle in rad

pos. seq. current in kA

to out-of-step condition
30 trip command to CB
rotor angle in radian
after 1st
fault cleared pole slip
25
2nd

20 current increases under

fault conditions
current decreases
15
fault
occurs
10 min. current
trip command
normal load current issued here
tBreaker = 60 ms
5

rotor angle
0
angle towards 0

-5
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200
Time in milliseconds
IEC10000115-1-en.vsd
IEC10000115 V1 EN

Figure 222: Trip initiation when the break-time of the circuit breaker is known

427
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.17.7.5 Design

At every execution of the function the following is calculated: active power P, reactive
power Q, rotor angle ROTORANG, quantity UCOSPHI, the positive-sequence current
CURRENT and voltage VOLTAGE. All other quantities, that can as well be read as
outputs, are only calculated if the Z(R, X) enters the limit of reach zone, which is a
circle in the complex (R X) plane. When the complex impedance Z(R, X) enters the
limit-of-reach region, the algorithm:
determines in which direction the impedance Z moves, that is, the direction the
lens is traversed
measures the time taken to traverse the lens from one side to the other one

If the traverse time is more than the limit 40 or 50 ms, a pole-slip is declared. If the
complex impedance Z(R, X) exits the lens on the same side it entered, then it is a stable
case and the protected machine is still in synchronism. If a pole-slip has been detected,
then it is determined in which zone the centre of oscillation is located. If the number
of actual pole-slips exceeds the maximum number of allowed pole-slips in either of
the zones, a trip command is issued taking care of the circuit breaker safety.

R R
UPSRE Calculation of X X
UPSIM R and X parts
of the complex Z(R,X)
UPSMAG
positive-
IPSRE
sequence Z(R,X) NO
IPSIM
impedance within limit of Return
Z(R, X) reach?

YES UCOSPHI

Z(R,X) ROTORANG
within lens NO
Function alert
characteristic?
SLIPFREQ

YES GENMODE

Z(R,X) MOTMODE
LEFT Z(R,X) RIGHT NO
exited lens
entered lens
on the left- hand
from?
Motor losing Generator losing side?
step ? step ?
YES

Was
traverse time NO
more than
Calculation of 50 ms?
P
positive- sequence YES (pole- slip!)
active power P, Q TRIP
>= 1
reactive power Q, Number
ZONE 2 NO
rotor angle UCOSPHI
of pole- slips
ROTORANG exceeded in TRIPZ1
a zone? Open
and
ROTORANG circuit
UCOSPHI ZONE 1 TRIPZ2
breaker
safely

IEC10000116-3-en.vsd
IEC10000116 V3 EN

Figure 223: OOSPPAM Simplified function block

428
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.17.8 Technical data

Table 217: OOSPPAM technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase 2.0% of Ur/(3 Ir)

Rotor start angle (90.0 - 130.0) degrees 5.0 degrees

Rotor trip angle (15.0 - 90.0) degrees 5.0 degrees
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters (1 - 20) -

7.18 Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ

7.18.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ - -

7.18.2 Functionality
Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ is intended to be used in isolated or high
impedance earthed networks where there is a requirement to trip only one of the faulty
lines at cross-country fault.

Phase preference logic inhibits tripping for single phase-to-earth faults in isolated and
high impedance earthed networks, where such faults are not to be cleared by distance
protection. For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the leading or the lagging
phase-earth loop for measurement and initiates tripping of the preferred fault based on
the selected phase preference. A number of different phase preference combinations
are available for selection.

7.18.3 Function block

PPLPHIZ
I3P* START
U3P* ZREL
BLOCK
RELL1N
RELL2N
RELL3N
STCND

IEC07000029-2-en.vsd
IEC07000029 V2 EN

Figure 224: PPLPHIZ function block

7.18.4 Signals

429
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Table 218: PPLPHIZ Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
RELL1N BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the L1 to earth loop
RELL2N BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the L2 to earth loop
RELL3N BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the L3 to earth loop
STCND INTEGER 0 Integer coded external release signals

Table 219: PPLPHIZ Output signals

Name Type Description
START BOOLEAN Indicates start for earth fault(s), regardless of
direction
ZREL INTEGER Integer coded output release signal

7.18.5 Settings

Table 220: PPLPHIZ Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OperMode No Filter - - No Filter Operating mode (c=cyclic,a=acyclic)
NoPref
1231c
1321c
123a
132a
213a
231a
312a
321a
UPN< 0 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate value of phase undervoltage in %
of UBase/sqrt(3)
UPP< 0 - 100 %UB 1 50 Operate value of line to line undervoltage
(% of UBase)
3U0> 5 - 300 %UB 1 20 Operate value of residual voltage in % of
UBase/sqrt(3)
IN> 10 - 200 %IB 1 20 Operate value of residual current (% of
IBase)
tUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Pickup-delay for residual voltage
tOffUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Dropoff-delay for residual voltage
tIN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Pickup-delay for residual current

430
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 221: PPLPHIZ Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.18.6 Operation principle

Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ has 10 operation modes, which can be set by the
parameter OperMode. The different modes and their explanation are shown in
table 222 below. The difference between cyclic and acyclic operation can be
explained by the following example. Assume a L1 fault on one line and a L3 fault on
another line. For OperMode = 1231c the line with L3 fault will be tripped (L3 before
L1) while for OperMode = 123a the line with L1 1 fault will be tripped (L1 before
L3).
Table 222: Operation modes for Phase preference logic
OperMode Description
No filter No filter, phase-to-phase measuring loops are not blocked during single phase-to-
earth faults. Tripping is allowed without any particular phase preference at cross-
country faults
No pref No preference, trip is blocked during single phase-to-earth faults, trip is allowed
without any particular phase preference at cross-country fault
1231 c Cyclic 1231c; L1 before L2 before L3 before L1
1321 c Cyclic 1321c; L1 before L3 before L2 before L1
123 a Acyclic 123a; L1 before L2before L3
132 a Acyclic 132a; L1 before L3 before L2
213 a Acyclic 213a; L2 before L1 before L3
231 a Acyclic 231a; L2 before L3 before L1
312 a Acyclic 312a; L3 before L1 before L2
321 a Acyclic 321a; L3 before L2 before L1

The function can be divided into two parts; one labeled voltage and current
discrimination and the second one labeled phase preference evaluation, see
figure 225.

The aim with the voltage and current discrimination part is to discriminate faulty
phases and to determine if there is a cross-country fault. If cross-country fault is
detected, an internal signal Detected cross-country fault is created and sent to the
phase preference part to be used in the evaluation process for determining the
condition for trip.

The voltage and current discrimination part gives phase segregated start signals if the
respective measured phase voltage is below the setting parameter UPN< at the same
time as the zero sequence voltage is above the setting parameter 3U0>. If there is a
start in any phase the START output signal will be activated.

431
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

The internal signal for detection of cross-country fault, DetectCrossCountry, that

come from the voltage and current discrimination part of the function can be achieved
in three different ways:

1. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN> for a time longer
than the setting of pick-up timer tIN.
2. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN> at the same time
as the magnitude of 3U0 has been above the setting parameter 3U0> during a time
longer than the setting of pick-up timer tUN.
3. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN> at the same time
as one of the following conditions are fulfilled:
the measured phase-to-phase voltage in at least one of the phase
combinations has been below the setting parameter UPP< for more than 20
ms.
At least two of the phase voltages are below the setting parameter UPN< for
more than 20 ms.

The second part, phase preference evaluation, uses the internal signal
DetectCrossCountry from the voltage and current evaluation together with the input
signal STCND together with phase selection start condition (from phase selection
functions) connected to input STCND, and the information from the setting parameter
OperMode are used to determine the condition for trip. To release the Phase
preference logic, at least two out of three phases must be faulty. The fault
classification whether it is a single phase-to-earth, two-phase or cross-country fault
and which phase to be tripped at cross-country fault is converted into a binary coded
signal and sent to the distance protection measuring zone to release the correct
measuring zone according to the setting of OperMode. This is done by activating the
output ZREL and it shall be connected to the input STCND on the distance zone
measuring element.

The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows: STCND =
L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32. Example: if only L1N
start the value is 1, if start L1N and L3N are choosen, the value is 1+4=5.

The release signals from phase selection will only be gated with the cross-country
check from IN and UN but without time delay. If no phase selection start has occurred,
the release is based on current and voltage discriminating part only.

The input signal STCND consist of binary information of fault type and is connected
to the output STCND on phase selection function. The fault must be activated in at
least two phases to be classified as a cross-country fault in the phase preference part
of the logic.

The input signals RELLnN (where 1<n<3) are additional fault release signals that can
be connected to external protection functions through binary input.

The output START and trip signals can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK

432
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1UL2
UL2UL3
UL3UL1
IN Voltage and START
AND
UN Current
Discrimination
UPN<

UPP<

IN>
Detect Cross-
UN0> Country fault

OperMode
RELL1N ZREL
Phase Preference AND
RELL2N Evaluation
RELL3N
STCND

BLOCK

IEC09000220_1_en.vsd
IEC09000220 V2 EN

Figure 225: Simplified block diagram for Phase preference logic

Table 223: PPLPHIZ technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, phase-to-phase (1 - 100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
and phase-to-neutral
undervoltage
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -
Operate value, residual voltage (5 - 300)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U
Ur
0.5% of U at U >
Ur

Reset ratio, residual voltage > 95% -

Operate value, residual current (10 - 200)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s 0.2% or 25 ms
residual current at 0 to 2 x Iset whichever is
greater
Table continues on next page

433
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK505308-UEN B
Impedance protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s 0.2% or 25 ms
residual voltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x whichever is
Uset greater

Independent dropoff-delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s 0.2% or 25 ms

residual voltage at 1.2 to 0.8 x whichever is
Uset greater

Operating mode No Filter, NoPref

Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a, 312a, 321a

434
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Section 8 Current protection

8.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase

output PHPIOC

8.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Instantaneous phase overcurrent PHPIOC 50
protection 3-phase output
3I>>

SYMBOL-Z V1 EN

8.1.2 Functionality
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and
short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.

8.1.3 Function block

PHPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRL1
ENMULT TRL2
TRL3

IEC04000391-2-en.vsd
IEC04000391 V2 EN

Figure 226: PHPIOC function block

8.1.4 Signals

Table 224: PHPIOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase current
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current start value multiplier

435
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Table 225: PHPIOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal from any phase
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3

8.1.5 Settings

Table 226: PHPIOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode 2 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Select operation mode 2-out of 3 / 1-out of
1 out of 3 3
IP>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate phase current level in % of IBase

Table 227: PHPIOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level

Table 228: PHPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

8.1.6 Monitored data

Table 229: PHPIOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

8.1.7 Operation principle

The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the fundamental
frequency components, as well as sampled values of each phase current. These phase
current values are fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase

436
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

output function PHPIOC. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set
operation current value of the function (IP>>). If a phase current is larger than the set
operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal
will, without delay, activate the output signal TRLn (n=1,2,3) for this phase and the
TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.

There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the parameter

is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter is set to 2 out
of 3 at least two phase signals must be activated for trip.

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
(StValMult) via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation value
needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.

PHPIOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.

8.1.8 Technical data

Table 230: PHPIOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (502500)% of -

IBase
Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15ms -
Max. = 25ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5ms -

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 25ms -
Max. = 40 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

8.2 Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase

output OC4PTOC

437
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

8.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC 51/67
3-phase output

TOC-REVA V2 EN

8.2.2 Functionality
The four step three-phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC has an inverse
or definite time delay independent for step 1 to 4 separately.

All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined time characteristic.

The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory. The
function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of the
steps.

Second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block
each step individually

438
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.2.3 Function block

OC4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TR1
BLOCK TR2
BLKTR TR3
BLKST1 TR4
BLKST2 TRL1
BLKST3 TRL2
BLKST4 TRL3
ENMULT1 TR1L1
ENMULT2 TR1L2
ENMULT3 TR1L3
ENMULT4 TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
TR3L1
TR3L2
TR3L3
TR4L1
TR4L2
TR4L3
START
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STL1
STL2
STL3
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
ST3L1
ST3L2
ST3L3
ST4L1
ST4L2
ST4L3
ST2NDHRM
DIRL1
DIRL2
DIRL3
IEC06000187-3-en.vsd

IEC06000187 V3 EN

Figure 227: OC4PTOC function block

8.2.4 Signals
Table 231: OC4PTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step1
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step2
Table continues on next page

439
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step3
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step4
ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step1
ENMULT2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step2
ENMULT3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step3
ENMULT4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step4

Table 232: OC4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TR3 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step3
TR4 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step4
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L3
TR3L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L1
TR3L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L2
TR3L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L3
TR4L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase L1
TR4L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase L2
TR4L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase L3
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2
ST3 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step3
ST4 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step4
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
Table continues on next page

440
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Type Description

STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L3
ST3L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L1
ST3L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L2
ST3L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L3
ST4L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L1
ST4L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L2
ST4L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L3
ST2NDHRM BOOLEAN Second harmonic detected
DIRL1 INTEGER Direction for phase1
DIRL2 INTEGER Direction for phase2
DIRL3 INTEGER Direction for phase3

8.2.5 Settings
Table 233: OC4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
AngleRCA 40 - 65 Deg 1 55 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
AngleROA 40 - 89 Deg 1 80 Relay operation angle (ROA)
StartPhSel 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3,
2 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
3 out of 3
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

441
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step
ANSI Very inv. 1
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I1> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 1000 Operating phase current level for step 1 in
% of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Independent (definite) time delay of step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in % of
IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step
1
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step
ANSI Very inv. 2
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 500 Operating phase current level for step 2 in
% of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Independent (definite) time delay of step 2
Table continues on next page

442
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

k2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2
IMin2 1 - 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step2 in % of
IBase
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
I2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step
2
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step
ANSI Very inv. 3
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I3> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 250 Operating phase current level for step 3 in
% of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Independent (definite) time delay of step 3
k3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 3
IMin3 1 - 10000 %IB 1 33 Minimum operate current for step3 in % of
IBase
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 3
I3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step
3
DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

443
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step
ANSI Very inv. 4
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I4> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 175 Operating phase current level for step 4 in
% of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Independent (definite) time delay of step 4
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 4
IMin4 1 - 10000 %IB 1 17 Minimum operate current for step4 in % of
IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 4
I4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step
4

Table 234: OC4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IMinOpPhSel 1 - 100 %IB 1 7 Minimum current for phase selection in %
of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in % of
fundamental curr
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 1
Table continues on next page

444
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 1
HarmBlock1 Off - - Off Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 2
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 2
HarmBlock2 Off - - Off Enable block of step 2 from harmonic
On restrain
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 3
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 3
HarmBlock3 Off - - Off Enable block of step 3 from harmonic
On restrain
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 4
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Table continues on next page

445
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 4
HarmBlock4 Off - - Off Enable block of step 4 from harmonic
On restrain

Table 235: OC4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MeasType DFT - - DFT Selection between DFT and RMS
RMS measurement
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

8.2.6 Monitored data

Table 236: OC4PTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DIRL1 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL2 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL3 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

446
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.2.7 Operation principle

The Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC is divided into four different
sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3 and 4, an
operation mode is set by DirModex: Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse.

The protection design can be divided in four parts:

The direction element

The harmonic Restraint Blocking function
The four step over current function
The mode selection

If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter

DirModex shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

4 step over current

Direction dirPh1Flt element faultState
faultState
Element One element for each
dirPh2Flt step
I3P dirPh3Flt START

U3P

TRIP

Harmonic harmRestrBlock
Restraint
Element

enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4

en05000740-2-en.vsd

IEC05000740 V2 EN

Figure 228: Functional overview of OC4PTOC

447
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

A common setting for all steps, StartPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase
currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3
or 3 out of 3.

The sampled analogue phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function

block. Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four step
phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output function OC4PTOC, it is possible to
select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to
select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).

If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and
higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS
option is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in addition
to the fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from the current
DC component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected current values
are fed to OC4PTOC.

In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the
set operation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If a phase current
is larger than the set operation current, outputs START, STx, STL1, STL2 and STL3
are, without delay, activated. Output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3 are common for
all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the activation. The START
signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall be noted that the selection
of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the operation of directional part of
OC4PTOC.

Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the local
HMI for OC4PTOC function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in service
operational checking of the function.

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in
relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the
pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain
current level.

The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as current
angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the
directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement
at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a
combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%). The
following combinations are used.

448
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Phase-phase short circuit:

U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2 I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
EQUATION1449 V1 EN (Equation 84)

U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3 I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
EQUATION1450 V1 EN (Equation 85)

U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1 I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
EQUATION1451 V1 EN (Equation 86)

Phase-earth short circuit:

U refL1 = U L1 I dirL1 = I L1
EQUATION1452 V1 EN (Equation 87)

U refL 2 = U L 2 I dirL 2 = I L 2
EQUATION1453 V1 EN (Equation 88)

U refL 3 = U L 3 I dirL 3 = I L 3
EQUATION1454 V1 EN (Equation 89)

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds

4% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.

After 100 ms, the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals
in.
If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and
an angle window AngleROA.

449
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Reverse

Uref

RCA
ROA

ROA Forward

Idir

en05000745.vsd
IEC05000745 V1 EN

Figure 229: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle
sector from AngleRCA for directional borders.

A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set:
IminOpPhSel.

If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time
characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available.
It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The possibilities for
inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse characteristics".

All four steps in OC4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The binary
input BLKSTx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.

450
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Characteristx=DefTime
|IOP| AND
tx TRx
a OR
a>b
Ix> b

AND
STx

txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC12000008.vsd
IEC12000008.vsd

IEC12000008 V2 EN

Figure 230: Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC

Different types of reset time can be selected as described in section "Inverse

characteristics".

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (IxMult x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set

operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the
operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching
state. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals
from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The trip signals from
the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

8.2.8 Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of the Four step overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC can
be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental
frequency component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined by
parameter 2ndHarmStab setting, any of the four overcurrent stages can be selectively
blocked by parameter HarmRestrainx setting. When 2nd harmonic restraint feature is
active, the OC4PTOC function output signal 2NDHARMD will be set to logical value
one.

451
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

BLOCK

a
a>b
0.07*IBase b

a
a>b
b
Extract second AND
IOP
harmonic current a
a>b
component b

2ndH_BLOCK_Int
Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab

IEC13000014-2-en.vsd
IEC13000014 V2 EN

Figure 231: Second harmonic blocking

8.2.9 Technical data

Table 237: OC4PTOC technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (502500)% of -

lBase
Min. operating current (1-10000)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (40.065.0) degrees 2.0 degrees

Relay operating angle (ROA) (40.089.0) degrees 2.0 degrees
2nd harmonic blocking (5100)% of 2.0% of Ir
fundamental
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x (0.000-60.000) s 0.2 % or 35 ms whichever is
Iset greater

Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s 2.0 % or 40 ms whichever is

greater
Inverse characteristics, see 16 curve types See table 1113, table 1114 and table
table 1113, table 1114 and table 1115
1115
Operate time, start non-directional Min. = 15 ms
at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at Min. = 15 ms
2 to 0 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x -
Iset

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

452
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection

EFPIOC

8.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC 50N
protection
IN>>

IEF V1 EN

8.3.2 Functionality
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC has a low transient
overreach and short tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous earth-fault
protection, with the reach limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line at
minimum source impedance. EFPIOC is configured to measure the residual current
from the three-phase current inputs and can be configured to measure the current from
a separate current input.

8.3.3 Function block

EFPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK
BLKAR
MULTEN

IEC06000269-2-en.vsd
IEC06000269 V2 EN

Figure 232: EFPIOC function block

8.3.4 Signals

Table 238: EFPIOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKAR BOOLEAN 0 Block input for auto reclose
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current multiplier

453
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Table 239: EFPIOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal

8.3.5 Settings

Table 240: EFPIOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IN>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase

Table 241: EFPIOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level

Table 242: EFPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

8.3.6 Monitored data

Table 243: EFPIOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IN REAL - A Residual current

8.3.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current, as
well as from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This current
value is fed to the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC). In a
comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the
function (IN>>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal
from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output
signal TRIP.

454
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via
a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation value
needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.

EFPIOC function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals from
the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated
during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.

8.3.8 Technical data

Table 244: EFPIOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (502500)% of -

lBase
Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x -
Iset

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 25 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x -
Iset

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

8.4 Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero

sequence or negative sequence directionality)
EF4PTOC

8.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step residual overcurrent EF4PTOC 51N/67N
4(IN>)
protection
4
alt
4
TEF-REVA V2 EN

455
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

8.4.2 Functionality
The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite
time delay independent for each step.

All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined characteristic.

EF4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the

steps.

IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or
negative sequence.

Second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.

EF4PTOC can be used as main protection for phase-to-earth faults.

EF4PTOC can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the case of the
primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer
circuit failure.

Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication

logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weak-end
infeed functionality are available as well.

Residual current can be calculated by summing the three phase currents or taking the
input from neutral CT

8.4.3 Function block

EF4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIN1
I3PPOL* TRIN2
I3PDIR* TRIN3
BLOCK TRIN4
BLKTR TRSOTF
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 STIN1
BLKST3 STIN2
BLKST4 STIN3
ENMULT1 STIN4
ENMULT2 STSOTF
ENMULT3 STFW
ENMULT4 STRV
CBPOS 2NDHARMD
CLOSECB
OPENCB

IEC06000424-4-en.vsdx

IEC06000424 V4 EN

Figure 233: EF4PTOC function block

8.4.4 Signals

456
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Table 245: EF4PTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
I3PPOL GROUP - Group connection for polarizing current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (Start and trip)
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (Start and trip)
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (Start and trip)
ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step1
ENMULT2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step2
ENMULT3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step3
ENMULT4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step4
CBPOS BOOLEAN 0 Breaker position
CLOSECB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker close command
OPENCB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker open command

Table 246: EF4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TRIN1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRIN2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TRIN3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TRIN4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
TRSOTF BOOLEAN Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STIN1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
STIN2 BOOLEAN Start signal step 2
STIN3 BOOLEAN Start signal step 3
STIN4 BOOLEAN Start signal step 4
STSOTF BOOLEAN Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault
function
Table continues on next page

457
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Name Type Description

STFW BOOLEAN Start signal forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start signal reverse direction
2NDHARMD BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block signal

8.4.5 Settings

Table 247: EF4PTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA)
polMethod Voltage - - Voltage Type of polarization
Current
Dual
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 1 Minimum voltage level for polarization in
% of UBase
IPolMin 2 - 100 %IB 1 5 Minimum current level for polarization in
% of IBase
RNPol 0.50 - 1000.00 Ohm 0.01 5.00 Real part of source impedance used for
current polarisation
XNPol 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 40.00 Imaginary part of source imp. used for
current polarisation
IN>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in % of
fundamental curr
BlkParTransf Off - - Off Enable blocking at energizing of parallel
On transformers
UseStartValue IN1> - - IN4> Current level blk at parallel transf (step1,
IN2> 2, 3 or 4)
IN3>
IN4>
SOTF Off - - Off SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/
SOTF Undertime/SOTF&Undertime)
UnderTime
SOTF&UnderTime
ActivationSOTF Open - - Open Select signal to activate SOTF: CB-Open/
Closed -Closed/ -Close cmd
CloseCommand
StepForSOTF Step 2 - - Step 2 Select start from step 2 or 3 to start SOTF
Step 3
HarmBlkSOTF Off - - Off Enable harmonic restrain function in
On SOTF
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay for SOTF
t4U 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Switch-onto-fault active time
Table continues on next page

458
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ActUnderTime CB position - - CB position Select signal to activate under time (CB
CB command Pos / CB Command)
tUnderTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay for under time
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Residual current operate level for step 1 in
% of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of step 1 when definite time
char. is selected
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected time
characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum operate residual current for step
1 in % of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 1
IN1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 1
HarmBlock1 Off - - On Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

459
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN2> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 50 Residual current operate level for step 2 in
% of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay of step 2 when definite time
char. is selected
k2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 2 selected time
characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum operate residual current for step
2 in % of IBase
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 2
IN2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 2
HarmBlock2 Off - - On Enable block of step 2 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 3
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN3> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 33 Residual current operate level for step 3 in
% of IBase
Table continues on next page

460
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay of step 3 when definite time
char. is selected
k3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 3 selected time
characteristic
IMin3 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 33 Minimum operate residual current for step
3 in % of IBase
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 3
IN3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 3
HarmBlock3 Off - - On Enable block of step 3 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN4> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 17 Residual current operate level for step 4 in
% of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay of step 4 when definite time
char. is selected
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 4 selected time
characteristic
IMin4 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 17 Minimum operate residual current for step
4 in % of IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 4
IN4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 4
HarmBlock4 Off - - On Enable block of step 4 from harmonic
On restrain

461
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Table 248: EF4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step2
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step3
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
Table continues on next page

462
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step4
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4

Table 249: EF4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
SeqTypeIDir Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for directional
Neg seq current
SeqTypeIPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq current
SeqTypeUPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq voltage

8.4.6 Monitored data

Table 250: EF4PTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
IPol REAL - A Polarizing current level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle between
voltage and current
IPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing current angle

463
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

8.4.7 Operation principle

This function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the
configuration tool:

1. I3P, input used for Operating Quantity. Supply the zero-sequence magnitude
measuring functionality.
2. U3P, input used for Voltage Polarizing Quantity. Supply either zero or
negative sequence voltage to the directional functionality
3. I3PPOL, input used for Current Polarizing Quantity. Provide polarizing
current to the directional functionality. This current is normally taken from the
grounding of a power transformer.
4. I3PDIR, input used for Directional detection. Supply either zero or negative
sequence current to the directional functionality.

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in
the Configuration Tool within PCM600.

8.4.7.1 Operating quantity within the function

The function always uses Residual Current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The
residual current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to
EF4PTOC function input I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be for example,
connected to:
parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases
(Holm-Green connection).
one single core balance, current instrument transformer (cable CT).
one single current instrument transformer located between power system
star point and earth (that is, current transformer located in the star point of a
star connected transformer winding).
one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a
protected object (that is, current transformer located between two star
points of double star shunt capacitor bank).
2. calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function Analog
Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such
case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the
pre-processing block by using the following formula (will take I2 from SMAI
AI3P connected to I3PDIR input which was connected to I3P input also):

If zero sequence current is selected,

Iop = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

EQUATION1874 V2 EN (Equation 90)

464
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor
magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC protection to compare it with the set operation
current value of the four steps (IN1>, IN2>, IN3> or IN4>). If the residual current is
larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional mode a
signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will, without delay,
activate the output signal STINx (x=step 1-4) for this step and a common START
signal.

8.4.7.2 Internal polarizing

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction
to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).

The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.

Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual current
(3I0) as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to
EF4PTOC function input I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then typically
connected to one single current transformer located between power system star
point and earth (current transformer located in the star point of a star connected
transformer winding).
For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT input
can be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in all three
phases (Holm-Green connection).
2. calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function analog input
I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In
such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs
into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

IPol = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

EQUATION2018 V2 EN (Equation 92)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

465
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This phasor is
then multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance in order to
calculate equivalent polarizing voltage UIPol in accordance with the following
formula:

UIPol = Z 0s IPol = (RNPol + j XNPol) IPol

EQUATION1877 V2 EN (Equation 93)

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).

In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be

bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.

Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage
based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:

UTotPol=UUPol + UIPol=UPol + Z 0s IPol = UPol + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) Ipol

IECEQUATION2408 V1 EN (Equation 94)

UPol and IPol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence
component depending upon the user selection.

Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with the
phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault (Forward/
Reverse).

8.4.7.3 External polarizing for earth-fault function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx to provide
external directional control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the
following functions if available in the IED:

1. Distance protection directional function.

2. Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose
protection function.

8.4.7.4 Directional detection for earth fault function

Zero sequence components will be used for detecting directionality for earth fault
function. In some cases zero sequence quantities might detect directionality wrong.
Negative sequence quantities will be used in such scenario. The user can select either
zero sequence components or negative sequence components for detecting
directionality with the parameter SeqTypeIPol. I3PDIR input always connected to the
same source as I3P input.

466
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.4.7.5 Base quantities within the protection

The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED. Base
current (IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in
primary amperes. Base voltage (UBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase
voltage of the protected object in primary kV.

8.4.7.6 Internal earth-fault protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

1. Four residual overcurrent steps.

2. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based earth-fault protection
schemes (permissive or blocking).
3. Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking
during switching of parallel transformers.
4. Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of
breaker problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

8.4.7.7 Four residual overcurrent steps

Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as measuring
quantity. Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in
facilities:

Directional mode can be set to Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this

parameter setting the directional mode of the step is selected. It shall be noted that
the directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the residual
overcurrent step itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common
directional supervision element.
Residual current start value.
Type of operating characteristic (inverse or definite time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select inverse or definite time delay for the earth-fault
protection. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are
available. For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to section
"Inverse characteristics".
Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset / ANSI Reset). By this
parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step. For the
complete list of available reset curves please refer to section "".

467
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay
and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (On/Off). By this parameter
setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic
content in the residual current exceeds the preset level.
Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary
signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup
value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 234.

BLKTR
EMULTX

IMinx Characteristx=DefTime
X T b
a>b
F a
tx TRINx
AND AND
|IOP|
a OR t
a>b
b

STINx
INxMult AND
X T
INx> F
AND Inverse
BLKSTx
AND
BLOCK Characteristx=Inverse

txmin
2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int
OR t
HarmRestrainx=Off

DirModex=Off OR STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC10000008.vsd

IEC10000008 V5 EN

Figure 234: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x = step 1, 2, 3 or 4

The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output
signals for respective step, and STINx and TRINx, can be blocked from the binary
input BLKSTx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary
input BLKTR.

8.4.7.8 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function

It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent steps
shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the

468
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

directional supervision element and the integrated directional

comparison function.

The protection has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current lop
is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting
polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the
following three ways:

1. When polMethod = Voltage, UPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

2. When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
3. WhenpolMethod = Dual, UPol + IPol ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in figure 235, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.

Operating area

STRV
0.6 * IN>DIR
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for STRV 40% of
IN>DIR RCA +85 deg

RCA
65 Upol = -3U 0

-RCA +85 deg

RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
IN>DIR

STFW

I op = 3I0

Operating area
Characteristic
for STFW IEC11000243-1-en.ai

IEC11000243 V1 EN

Figure 235: Operating characteristic for earth-fault directional element using the
zero sequence components

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

469
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is bigger

than 40% of I>Dir and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward and
reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will set
EF4PTOC function output binary signals:

1. STFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is bigger

than setting parameter I>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in
forward direction.
2. STRV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is bigger
than 60% of setting parameter I>Dir and directional supervision element detects
fault in reverse direction.

These signals shall be used for communication based earth-fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated

directional comparison step is shown in figure 236:

470
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

| IopDir |
a
a>b STRV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b
AND STFW
I>Dir b
FORWARD_Int

X
0.4

FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
polMethod=Voltage
OR
UPolMin

Characteristic
Directional
polMethod=Dual UPol IPolMin
T
I3PDIR
polMethod=Current 0.0 F
OR
UTotPol
IPol AND REVERSE_Int
T RVS
0.0 F

UIPol STAGE1_DIR_Int
RNPol Complex X T STAGE2_DIR_Int
XNPol Number 0.0 F STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND

IEC07000067-5-en.vsd

IEC07000067 V5 EN

Figure 236: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
step

8.4.7.9 Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of four step residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC

can be chosen for each step by a parameter setting HarmRestrainx. If the ratio of the
2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the
residual current exceeds the preset level (defined by parameter 2ndHarmStab) then
2NDHARMD function output signal is set to logical value one and harmonic
restraining feature to the function block will be applicable.

Blocking from 2nd harmonic element activates if all three criteria are satisfied:

471
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

1. Current fundamental frequency component > IMinOpHarmBlk

2. Current second harmonic component > IMinOpHarmBlk
3. Ratio of the 2nd harmoinc component in relation to the fundamental frequency
component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined parameter
2ndHarmStab setting

If all the above three conditions are fulfilled then 2NDHARMD function output signal
is set to logical value one and harmonic restraining feature to the function block is
applicable.

In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking can
be set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be
required to stabilize EF4PTOC during switching of parallel transformers in the
station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If
one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the
asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial saturation
of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd
harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers is in phase opposition. The
summation of the two currents thus gives a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual
fundamental current is however significant. The inrush current of the transformer in
service before the parallel transformer energizing, is a little delayed compared to the
first transformer. Therefore we have high 2nd harmonic current component initially.
After a short period this current is however small and the normal 2nd harmonic
blocking resets. If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain
signal is latched as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a
selected step current level by using setting UseStartValue.

This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-
in feature is activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously
fulfilled:

1. Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf = On.

2. Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70ms.
3. Residual current magnitude is higher than the set start value for one of the four
residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting UseStartValue it is possible to
select which one of the four start values that will be used (IN1> or IN2> or IN3>
or IN4>).

Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking
signal is sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined by
parameter setting UseStartValue (see condition 3 above).

Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in figure 237.

472
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

BLOCK

a
a>b
0.07*IBase b

a
a>b
b
Extract second AND
IOP
harmonic current a
a>b
component b

Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab

q-1

t=70ms OR
t AND OR 2ndH_BLOCK_Int

BlkParTransf=On

a
a>b
b
UseStartValue
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>

q-1 = unit delay

IEC13000015-3-en.vsd

IEC13000015 V3 EN

Figure 237: Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers
feature

8.4.7.10 Switch on to fault feature

Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault logic
(SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate either
SOTF or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk
to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing sequence. The
SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations. The time during
which SOTF and Under-Time logics will be active after activation is defined by the
setting parameter t4U.

The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected by
setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from change
in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse. The setting
parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB position open change, CB
position closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual current start from

473
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set delay tSOTF.
This delay is normally set to a short time (default 200 ms).

The Under-Time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The Under-Time
logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function.
The Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This
enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker
closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately
after switching of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is activated either from
change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command
pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter ActUnderTime. In case of a start
from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is
normally set to a relatively short time (default 300 ms). Practically the Under-Time
logic acts as circuit breaker pole-discordance protection, but it is only active
immediately after breaker switching. The Under-Time logic can only be used in
solidly or low impedance grounded systems.

SOTF

Open
t4U
Closed
ActivationSOTF
Close command
tSOTF
AND
AND t
STIN2

StepForSOTF
STIN3

OperationMode
BLOCK
OFF
SOTF
UNDERTIME TRIP
UnderTime

tUnderTime
SOTF or
AND
2nd Harmonic
HarmResSOFT t UnderTime

OR

Open
Close OR

t4U

ActUnderTime
Close command AND

STIN4

IEC06000643-4-en.vsd

IEC06000643 V4 EN

Figure 238: Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features

EF4PTOC Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF4PTOC
function is shown in figure 239:

474
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

signal to
commu nica tion
sche me
Directio nal Che ck
Elemen t

4 step over current

INP ol Directio n
ope ratin gCurrent elemen t TRIP
Elemen t
3U0 One ele me nt fo r ea ch
earthFaultDir ection step
3I0
ang leValid
I3PDIR
DirMode
ena bleDir

harmRestrB lock
3I0 Harmonic
Restrain t 1
Elemen t

star t step 2, 3 and 4

Blocking at par allel

transfor mer s
SwitchO nTo Fa ult
TRIP

CB
DirMode pos
or cmd
ena bleDir
Mode
Sele ction ena bleStep1-4

Directio nalMode1-4

IEC06000376-2-en.vsd

IEC06000376 V3 EN

Figure 239: Functional overview of EF4PTOC

8.4.8 Technical data

Table 251: EF4PTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (1-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I < Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (1-2500)% of lBase -

Operate current for directional (1100)% of lBase For RCA 60 degrees:
comparison 2.5% of Ir at I Ir
2.5% of I < Ir

Independent time delay for step (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

1, 2, 3, and 4 greater at 0 to 2 x Iset

Inverse characteristics, see table 18 curve types See table 1113, table 1114 and
1113, table 1114 and table 1115 table 1115
Second harmonic restrain (5100)% of fundamental 2.0% of Ir
operation
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees 2.0 degrees
Minimum polarizing voltage (1100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Table continues on next page

475
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Real part of source Z used for (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -
current polarization
Imaginary part of source Z used (0.503000.00) W/phase -
for current polarization
Operate time, start function at 0 to Min 18 ms -
2 x Iset Max 28 ms

Reset time, start function at 2 to 0 Min 18 ms -

x Iset Max 28 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

8.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC

8.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification device number
Four step negative sequence NS4PTOC 46I2
overcurrent protection I2
4
alt
4

IEC10000053 V1 EN

8.5.2 Functionality
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC) has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for each step separately.

All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined characteristic.

The directional function is voltage polarized.

NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the

steps.

NS4PTOC can be used as main protection for unsymmetrical fault; phase-phase short
circuits, phase-phase-earth short circuits and single phase earth faults.

NS4PTOC can also be used to provide a system backup for example, in the case of the
primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer
circuit failure.

476
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication

logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. The same logic as for
directional zero sequence current can be used. Current reversal and weak-end infeed
functionality are available.

8.5.3 Function block

NS4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
I3PDIR* TR1
U3P* TR2
BLOCK TR3
BLKTR TR4
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 ST1
BLKST3 ST2
BLKST4 ST3
ENMULT1 ST4
ENMULT2 STFW
ENMULT3 STRV
ENMULT4

IEC10000054-2-en.vsd
IEC10000054 V2 EN

Figure 240: NS4PTOC function block

8.5.4 Signals
Table 252: NS4PTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (Start and trip)
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (Start and trip)
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (Start and trip)
ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step1
ENMULT2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step2
ENMULT3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step3
ENMULT4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step4

477
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Table 253: NS4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TR2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TR3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TR4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal step 2
ST3 BOOLEAN Start signal step 3
ST4 BOOLEAN Start signal step 4
STFW BOOLEAN Forward directional start signal
STRV BOOLEAN Reverse directional start signal

8.5.5 Settings
Table 254: NS4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Minimum voltage level for polarization in
% of UBase
I2>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

478
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Negative sequence current op level for
step 1 in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of step 1 when definite time
char. is selected
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected time
characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum current for step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 1
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-2> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 50 Negative sequence current op level for
step 2 in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay of step 2 when definite time
char. is selected
Table continues on next page

479
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

k2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 2 selected time
characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum current for step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 2
I2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 2
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 3
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-3> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 33 Negative sequence current op level for
step 3 in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay of step 3 when definite time
char. is selected
k3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 3 selected time
characteristic
IMin3 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 33 Minimum current for step 3
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 3
I3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 3
DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

480
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-4> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 17 Negative sequence current op level for
step 4 in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay of step 4 when definite time
char. is selected
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 4 selected time
characteristic
IMin4 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 17 Minimum current for step 4
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 4
I4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 4

Table 255: NS4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
Table continues on next page

481
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step2
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step3
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step4
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
Table continues on next page

482
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4

Table 256: NS4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

8.5.6 Monitored data

Table 257: NS4PTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle between
voltage and current

8.5.7 Operation principle

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function has the
following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool:

1. I3P, input used for Operating Quantity.

2. U3P, input used for Polarizing Quantity.
3. I3PDIR, input used for "Directional finding"

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in
the Configuration Tool within PCM600.

8.5.7.1 Operating quantity within the function

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function always uses
negative sequence current (I2) for its operating quantity. The negative sequence
current is calculated from three-phase current input within the IED. The pre-
processing block calculates I2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block
by using the following formula:

483
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

1
I2 = (
IL1 + a IL 2 + a IL 3
2
)
3
EQUATION2266 V2 EN (Equation 95)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
a is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1120 deg

a2 similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1240 deg

The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC protection to compare it with the
set operation current value of the four steps (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If the negative
sequence current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-
directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal,
without delay, activates the output signal STx (x=1 - 4) for this step and a common
START signal.

8.5.7.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the
fault (Forward/Reverse).

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function uses the
voltage polarizing method.

NS4PTOC uses the negative sequence voltage -U2 as polarizing quantity U3P. This
voltage is calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED. The pre-
processing block calculates -U2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing
block by using the following formula:

1
UPol = -U 2 = - (UL1 + a 2 UL 2 + a UL3 )
3
EQUATION2267 V2 EN

where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

To use this all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.

This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing

484
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

the magnitude of polarizing voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined by
setting UpolMin.

Note that U2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the required
inversion of the polarizing voltage within the function.

8.5.7.3 External polarizing for negative sequence function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x
indicates the relevant step within the protection) to provide external directional
control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following functions if
available in the IED:

Distance protection directional function

Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose
protection function

8.5.7.4 Internal negative sequence protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

Four negative sequence overcurrent steps

Directional supervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with
integrated directional comparison step for communication based negative
sequence protection schemes (permissive or blocking)

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

8.5.7.5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages

Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 (negative sequence current) as

measuring quantity. Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built-in
facilities:

Operating mode (Off/ Non-directional /Forward / Reverse). By this parameter

setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. Note that the directional
decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the overcurrent stage itself. The
direction of the fault is determined in common Directional Supervision
Element described in the next paragraph.
Negative sequence current pickup value.
Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for negative sequence
overcurrent function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics
are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves, refer to Chapter ""

485
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI reset).By this

parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For
the complete list of available reset curves, refer to Chapter ""
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay
and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Multiplier for scaling of the set negative sequence current pickup value by
external binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase negative
sequence current pickup value when function binary input ENMULTx has
logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in the
following figure:

BLKTR

Characteristx=DefTime AND
TRx
|IOP| AND
tx
a OR
a>b
ENMULTx b

STx
IxMult AND
X T
Ix> F
txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC09000683.vsd
IEC09000683 V3 EN

Figure 241: Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4

NS4PTOC can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start
signals from NS4PTOC for each stage can be blocked from the binary input
BLKSTx. The trip signals from NS4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input
BLKTR.

8.5.7.6 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function

At least one of the four negative sequence overcurrent steps must be

set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional

486
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

supervision element and the integrated directional comparison

function.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in figure 235, to determine the direction of the fault.

Reverse
Area

AngleRCA Upol=-U2

Forward
Area
Iop = I2

IEC10000031-1-en.vsd
IEC10000031 V1 EN

Figure 242: Operating characteristic for fault directional element

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

Directional element is internally enable to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than

40% of I>Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and
reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, set

NS4PTOC output binary signals:

487
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

1. STFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward area,

see fig 235 (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting I>Dir)
2. STRV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse
area, see fig 235. (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting
I>Dir)

These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated

directional comparison step is shown in figure 236:

|Iop|
a a>
STRV
b b REVERSE_Int
AND
0.6
X
a a>
STFW
I>Dir b b FORWARD_Int
AND

X
0.4

FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
C h a r a c e ri s ti c
D i r e c ti o n a l

UPolMin

IPolMin
t

Iop

UPol
AND REVERSE_Int
RVS

STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND

IEC07000067-4.vsd

IEC07000067-4 V2 EN

Figure 243: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
step

488
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.5.8 Technical data

Table 258: NS4PTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, negative (1-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
sequence current, step 1-4 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase -

Independent time delay for (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
step 1, 2, 3, and 4 at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

Inverse characteristics, see 16 curve types See table 1113, table 1114 and
table 1113, table 1114 and table 1115
table 1115
Minimum operate current for (1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
steps 1 - 4 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees 2.0 degrees

Operate value, negative (1100)% of IBase For RCA 60 degrees:
current for directional release 2.5% of Ir at I Ir
2.5% of I at I > Ir

Minimum polarizing voltage (1100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Real part of negative (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

sequence source impedance
used for current polarization
Imaginary part of negative (0.503000.00) W/phase -
sequence source impedance
used for current polarization
Operate time, start function at Min = 15 ms -
0 to 2 x Iset Max = 30 ms

Reset time, start function at 2 Min = 15 ms -

to 0 x Iset Max = 30 ms

Critical impulse time, start 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

function
Impulse margin time, start 15 ms typically -
function
Transient overreach <10% at = 100 ms -

8.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE

8.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Sensitive directional residual over SDEPSDE - 67N
current and power protection

489
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

8.6.2 Functionality
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase-to-earth fault current is
significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth fault
protection is that the magnitude of the phase-to-earth fault current is almost
independent of the fault location in the network.

Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-to-
earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual
current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and
the residual voltage (-3U0), compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively,
the function can be set to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle .

Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-
to-earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual
power component 3I0 3U0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current
and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle.

A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or
inverse time delay.

A backup neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional residual
overvoltage protection.

In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances
between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has -90 phase
shift compared to the residual voltage ( 3U0). The characteristic angle is chosen to -90
in such a network.

In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil earthed, with a parallel resistor, the
active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used
for the earth fault detection. In such networks, the characteristic angle is chosen to 0.

As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the
selectivity of the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.

When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and
when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider the
following:

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better

sensitivity. The setting possibilities of this function are down to 0.25 % of IBase,
1 A or 5 A. This sensitivity is in most cases sufficient in high impedance network
applications, if the measuring CT ratio is not too high.
Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse
time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed networks,
with large capacitive earth fault currents. In such networks, the active fault
current would be small and by using sensitive directional residual power
protection, the operating quantity is elevated. Therefore, better possibility to
detect earth faults. In addition, in low impedance earthed networks, the inverse

490
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

time characteristic gives better time-selectivity in case of high zero-resistive fault

currents.

Phase
currents
IN

Phase-
ground
voltages
UN

IEC13000013-1-en.vsd
IEC13000013 V1 EN

Figure 244: Connection of SDEPSDE to analog preprocessing function block

Overcurrent functionality uses true 3I0, i.e. sum of GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3.
For 3I0 to be calculated, connection is needed to all three phase inputs.

Directional and power functionality uses IN and UN. If a connection is made to

GRPxN this signal is used, else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2
and GRPxL3 the internally calculated sum of these inputs (3I0 and 3U0) will be used.

8.6.3 Function block

SDEPSDE
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRDIRIN
BLOCK TRNDIN
BLKTR TRUN
BLKTRDIR START
BLKNDN STDIRIN
BLKUN STNDIN
STUN
STFW
STRV
STDIR
UNREL

IEC07000032-2-en.vsd
IEC07000032 V2 EN

Figure 245: SDEPSDE function block

491
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

8.6.4 Signals
Table 259: SDEPSDE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the outputs of the function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the trip outputs of the function
BLKTRDIR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the directional operate outputs of the
function
BLKNDN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs
BLKUN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs

Table 260: SDEPSDE Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip of the function
TRDIRIN BOOLEAN Trip of the directional residual over current function
TRNDIN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over current
TRUN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over voltage
START BOOLEAN General start of the function
STDIRIN BOOLEAN Start of the directional residual over current
function
STNDIN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over current
STUN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over voltage
STFW BOOLEAN Start of directional function for a fault in forward
direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start of directional function for a fault in reverse
direction
STDIR INTEGER Direction of fault. A general signal common to all
three mode of residual over current protection
UNREL BOOLEAN Residual voltage release of operation of all
directional modes

492
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.6.5 Settings
Table 261: SDEPSDE Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode 3I0Cosfi - - 3I0Cosfi Selection of operation mode for protection
3I03U0Cosfi
3I0 and fi
DirMode Forward - - Forward Direction of operation forward or reverse
Reverse
RCADir -179 - 180 Deg 1 -90 Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp -10.0 - 10.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Relay characteristic angle compensation
ROADir 0 - 90 Deg 1 90 Relay open angle ROA used as release in
phase mode, in deg
INCosPhi> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res over
current in % of IBase
SN> 0.25 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv time
count in % of SBase
INDir> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 5.00 Set level for directional residual over
current prot in % of IBase
tDef 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Definite time delay directional residual
overcurrent, in sec
SRef 0.03 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Reference value of res power for inverse
time count in % of SBase
kSN 0.00 - 2.00 - 0.01 0.10 Time multiplier setting for directional
residual power mode
OpINNonDir> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overcurrent protection
INNonDir> 1.00 - 400.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 Set level for non directional residual over
current in % of IBase
tINNonDir 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for non-directional residual
over current, in sec
TimeChar ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Norm. inv. Operation curve selection for IDMT
ANSI Very inv. operation
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Table continues on next page

493
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves, in sec
kIN 0.05 - 2.00 - 0.01 1.00 IDMT time mult for non-dir res over current
protection
OpUN> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overvoltage protection
UN> 1.00 - 200.00 %UB 0.01 20.00 Set level for non-directional residual over
voltage in % of UBase
tUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for non-directional residual
over voltage, in sec
INRel> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Residual release current for all directional
modes in % of IBase
UNRel> 1.00 - 300.00 %UB 0.01 3.00 Residual release voltage for all direction
modes in % of UBase

Table 262: SDEPSDE Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Time delay used for reset of definite
timers, in sec
tPCrv 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Setting P for customer programmable
curve
tACrv 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Setting A for customer programmable
curve
tBCrv 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Setting B for customer programmable
curve
tCCrv 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Setting C for customer programmable
curve
ResetTypeCrv Immediate - - IEC Reset Reset mode when current drops off.
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tPRCrv 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Setting PR for customer programmable
curve
tTRCrv 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Setting TR for customer programmable
curve
tCRCrv 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Setting CR for customer programmable
curve

Table 263: SDEPSDE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selection for function groups

Table 264: SDEPSDE Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
RotResU 0 deg - - 180 deg Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if
180 deg necessary

494
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.6.6 Monitored data

Table 265: SDEPSDE Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
INCOSPHI REAL - A Magnitude of residual
current along the
polarizing quantity
3I0cos(Fi-RCA)
IN REAL - A Measured magnitude of
the residual current 3I0
UN REAL - kV Measured magnitude of
the residual voltage 3U0
SN REAL - MVA Measured magnitude of
residual power
3I03U0cos(Fi-RCA)
ANG FI-RCA REAL - deg Angle between 3U0 and
3I0 minus RCA (Fi-RCA)

8.6.7 Operation principle

8.6.7.1 Function inputs

The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P
and U3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage are taken from pre-
processor blocks.

The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0cos

is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage (|
=ang(3I0)-ang(Uref)|). The reference voltage (Uref) is the polarizing quantity which
is used for directionality and is defined as Uref = -3U0 ejRCADir, that is -3U0 inversely
rotated by the set characteristic angle RCADir. RCADir is normally set equal to 0 in
a high impedance earthed network with a neutral point resistor as the active current
component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is set equal to -90 in
an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when
3I0cos gets larger than the set value.

495
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

RCADir = 0o,ROADir = 90o

3I0

j = ang(3I0 ) - ang(3Uref )
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 cosj

IEC06000648-4-en.vsd
IEC06000648 V4 EN

Figure 246: RCADir set to 0

Uref
RCADir = 90 , ROADir = 90

3I0

3I0 cos

= ang (3I0 ) ang (Uref )

3U0

IEC06000649_3_en.vsd
IEC06000649 V3 EN

Figure 247: RCADir set to -90

For trip, the operating quantity 3I0 cos , the residual current 3I0, and the residual
voltage 3U0 must be larger than the set levels : INCosPhi>, INRel> and UNRel>.
Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 251.

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set delay
tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated. The trip from this
sub-function has definite time delay.

496
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

ROADir is Relay Operating Angle. ROADir is identifying a window around the

reference direction in order to detect directionality. Figure 248 shows the restrictions
made by the ROADir.

RCADir = 0o

3I0
Operate area

j
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 cos j

ROADir

IEC06000650_2_en.vsd
IEC06000650 V2 EN

Figure 248: Characteristic with ROADir restriction

The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as 3I0cos ( + 180) the set value.

It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle
error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the Figure 249:

497
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

RCADir = 0

Operate area

-3U0 =Uref

Instrument
transformer
angle error
RCAcomp
Characteristic after
angle compensation

3I0 (prim) 3I0 (to prot)

IEC06000651-3-en.vsd

IEC06000651 V3 EN

Figure 249: Explanation of RCAComp

Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 3U0 cos

is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage
(Uref = -3U0 e-jRCA) compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (|
=ang(3I0)ang(Uref)|). The function operates when 3I0 3U0 cos gets larger than
the set value SN>. Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 251.

For trip, the residual power 3I0 3U0 cos , the residual current 3I0 and the release
voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set delay
tDef or after the inverse time delay (setting kSN) the binary output signals TRIP and
TRDIRIN get activated.

The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is
defined as 3I0 3U0cos ( + 180) the set value.

498
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time
delay.

The inverse time delay is defined as:

kSN (3I0 3U 0 cos j(reference))

t inv =
3I0 3U 0 cos j(measured)
EQUATION1942 V2 EN (Equation 96)

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and

The function will operate if the residual current is larger than the set value and the
angle | = ang(3I0)-ang(Uref)| is within the sector RCADir ROADir

RCADir = 0

ROADir = 80

Operate area

3I0

-3U0

IEC06000652-3-en.vsd
IEC06000652 V3 EN

Figure 250: Example of characteristic

For trip, Residual current 3I0 shall be larger than both INRel> and INDir>, and
residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the UNRel>. In addition, the angle shall be
in the set area defined by ROADir and RCADir. Refer to the simplified logical diagram
in Figure 251.

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set delay
tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.

The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180 ROADir

499
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

This variant has definite time delay.

Directional functions
For all the directional functions there are directional start signals STFW: fault in the
forward direction, and STRV: fault in the reverse direction. Even if the directional
function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction, a fault in the reverse
direction will give the start signal STRV. Also if the directional function is set to
operate for faults in the reverse direction, a fault in the forward direction will give the
start signal STFW.

Non-directional earth fault current protection

This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle. The
function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as
alternative or backup to distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure
selectivity the distance protection can block the non-directional earth fault current
function via the input BLKNDN.

The non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as sum
of the phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect cross-country faults with
high residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for the sensitive earth fault
protection will saturate.

This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time
delay (TimeChar parameter). The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC
60255-3.

For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level (INNonDir>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN.

When the function picks up, binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the output
signal STNDIN remains active for the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time
delay the binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN get activated.

Residual overvoltage release and protection

All the directional functions shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher
than a set level UNRel>.

In addition, there is also a separate non-directional residual over voltage protection,

with its own definite time delay tUN and set level UN>.

For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set level (UN>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN.

When the function picks up, binary output signal STUN is activated. If the output
signal STUN is active for the set delay tUNNonDir, the binary output signals TRIP
and TRUN get activated. A simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown
in Figure 251.

500
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

OpINNonDir> = On
STNDIN
&
INNonDir>
t
TRNDIN
TimeChar IN
OpUN> = On
STUN
&
UN>
tUN TRUN
t

OpMode = 3I0Cosfi
INRel>

UNRel> & &

tDef
INCosPhi> t

OpMode = 3I0 and fi

& STDIRIN
INDir> &
1

tDef TRDIRIN
t 1
OpMode = 3I03U0Cosfi
& &
SN>
t
S
1 N
STFW
RCADir Direction &
Detection
RCAComp Logic STRV
&
ROADir

DirMode = Forward

DirMode = Reverse
IEC06000653.vsd

IEC06000653 V4 EN

Figure 251: Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth fault current protection

8.6.8 Technical data

Table 266: SDEPSDE technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate level for 3I0cosj (0.25-200.00)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
directional residual 1.0% of I at I > Ir
overcurrent
Operate level for 3I03U0 cosj (0.25-200.00)% of SBase 1.0% of Sr at S Sr
directional residual power 1.0% of S at S > Sr

Operate level for 3I0 and j (0.25-200.00)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at Ir

residual overcurrent 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Table continues on next page

501
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate level for non- (1.00-400.00)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
directional overcurrent 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate level for non- (1.00-200.00)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

directional residual 0.5% of U at U > Ur
overvoltage
Residual release current for all (0.25-200.00)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
directional modes 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Residual release voltage for (1.00-300.00)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

all directional modes 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate time for non- Min = 40 ms

directional residual
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset Max = 65 ms

Reset time for non-directional Min = 40 ms

residual overcurrent at 2 to 0 x
Iset Max = 65 ms

Operate time for directional Min = 115 ms

residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x
Iset Max = 165 ms

Reset time for directional Min = 25 ms

residual overcurrent at 2 to 0 x
Iset Max = 65 ms

Independent time delay for (0.000 60.000) sec 0.2% or 80 ms whichever is

non-directional residual greater
overvoltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x
Uset
Independent time delay for (0.000 60.000) sec 0.2% or 80 ms whichever is
non-directional residual greater
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Independent time delay for (0.000 60.000) sec 0.2% or 180 ms whichever is
directional residual greater
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Inverse characteristics 16 curve types See table 1113, table 1114 and table
1115
Relay characteristic angle (-179 to 180) degrees 2.0 degrees
RCA
Relay Open angle ROA (0 to 90) degrees 2.0 degrees

8.7 Thermal overload protection, one time constant,

Celsius/Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR

502
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, one time LCPTTR 26
constant, Celsius

Thermal overload protection, one time LFPTTR 26

constant, Fahrenheit

8.7.2 Functionality
The increasing utilization of the power system closer to the thermal limits has
generated a need of a thermal overload protection for power lines.

A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the
introduction of the thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to
operate closer to the thermal limits.

The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable
time constant and a thermal memory. The temperature is displayed in either Celsius or
Fahrenheit, depending on whether the function used is LCPTTR (Celsius) or LFPTTR
(Fahrenheit).

An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the
line is tripped.

Estimated time to trip before operation, and estimated time to reclose after operation
are presented.

503
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

8.7.3 Function block

LCPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR ALARM
ENMULT LOCKOUT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET

IEC13000199-1-en.vsd
IEC13000199 V1 EN

LFPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR ALARM
ENMULT LOCKOUT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET

IEC13000301-1-en.vsd
IEC13000301 V1 EN

Figure 252: LCPTTR/LFPTTR function bloc

8.7.4 Signals
Table 267: LCPTTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or
more lines
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

Table 268: LFPTTR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or
more lines
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

504
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Table 269: LCPTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
START BOOLEAN Start Signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal

Table 270: LFPTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
START BOOLEAN Start Signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal

8.7.5 Settings
Table 271: LCPTTR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
TRef 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 End temperature rise above ambient of
the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 The load current (in % of IBase) leading to
TRef temperature
IMult 1-5 - 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used
for two or more lines
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes.
AlarmTemp 0 - 200 Deg C 1 80 Temperature level for start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 75 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
tPulse 0.05 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Operate pulse length. Minimum one
execution cycle
AmbiSens Off - - Off External temperature sensor available
On
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 100 Deg C 1 20 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off.
DefaultTemp -50 - 300 Deg C 1 50 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup

Table 272: LCPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

505
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Table 273: LFPTTR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
TRef 0 - 600 Deg F 1 160 End temperature rise above ambient of
the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 The load current (in % of IBase) leading to
TRef temperature
IMult 1-5 - 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used
for two or more lines
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes.
AlarmTemp 0 - 400 Deg F 1 175 Temperature level for start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 600 Deg F 1 195 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 - 600 Deg F 1 170 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
tPulse 0.05 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Operate pulse length. Minimum one
execution cycle
AmbiSens Off - - Off External temperature sensor available
On
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 250 Deg F 1 60 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off.
DefaultTemp -50 - 600 Deg F 1 100 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup

Table 274: LFPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

8.7.6 Monitored data

Table 275: LCPTTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in
min)
TENRECL REAL - - Estimated time to reset of
lockout (in min)
TEMP REAL - deg Calculated temperature
of the device
TEMPAMB REAL - deg Ambient temperature
used in the calculations
TERMLOAD REAL - - Temperature relative to
operate temperature

506
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Table 276: LFPTTR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in
min)
TENRECL REAL - - Estimated time to reset of
lockout (in min)
TEMP REAL - Temperature Calculated temperature
Fahrenheit of the device
TEMPAMB REAL - Temperature Ambient temperature
Fahrenheit used in the calculations
TERMLOAD REAL - - Temperature relative to
operate temperature

8.7.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the
RMS value is derived. These phase current values are fed to the thermal overload
protection, one time constant LCPTTR/LFPTTR function. The temperature is
displayed either in Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on whether LCPTTR/LFPTTR
function is selected.

From the largest of the three-phase currents a final temperature is calculated according
to the expression:

2
I
Q final = Tref
I ref

EQUATION1167 V1 EN (Equation 97)

where:
I is the largest phase current,
Iref is a given reference current and

Tref is steady state temperature rise corresponding to Iref

The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature. If this

temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level, TripTemp, a START
output signal is activated.

The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

507
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Dt

Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t
-

EQUATION1168 V1 EN (Equation 98)

where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature,

Qn-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step,

Qfinal is the calculated final temperature with the actual current,

Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and

t is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)

The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by

adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The
ambient temperature can be taken from a separate sensor or can be given a constant
value. The calculated component temperature is available as a real figure signal,
TEMP.

When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the output
signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level
TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set.

There is also a calculation of the present time to operate with the present current. This
calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the
operation temperature:

Q - Qoperate
toperate = -t ln final
Q final - Q n

EQUATION1169 V1 EN (Equation 99)

The calculated time to trip is available as a real figure signal, TTRIP.

After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to
reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when
the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting ReclTemp.

The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.
The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.

Q - Qlockout _ release
tlockout _ release = -t ln final
Q final - Q n

EQUATION1170 V1 EN (Equation 100)

508
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

In the above equation, the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient
temperature. The calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure signal,
TENRECL. This signal is enabled when the LOCKOUT output is activated.

In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines. This
is often used where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting the parameter
IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current on one line is used in
the protection algorithm by dividing the measured current by the total number of
cables. To activate this option the input ENMULT must be activated.

The protection has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated
temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when
secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.

509
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

START
Final Temp > Trip Temp

TEMP
Calculation of actual
temperature

AMBTEMP ALARM
Actual Temp > Alarm Temp

I3P

Calculation of final
temperature
ENMULT
TRIP

Actual Temp > Trip Temp

SENSFLT

LOCKOUT
Lockout logic

Actual Temp < Recl Temp

BLOCK

TTRIP
Calculation of time to trip
BLKTR

TENRECL
Calculation of time to reset
of lockout

IEC09000637-2-en.vsd

IEC09000637 V2 EN

Figure 253: Functional overview of LCPTTR/LFPTTR

510
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.7.8 Technical data

Table 277: LCPTTR/LFPTTR technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Reference current (2-400)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Reference temperature (0-300)C, (0 - 600)F 1.0C, 2.0F

Operate time: Time constant t = (11000) IEC 60255-8,
minutes 5.0% or 200
ms whichever is
greater
I - Ip
2 2
t = t ln
2 2 TTrip - TAmb 2
I - Ip - T I ref

ref
EQUATION13000039 V2 EN (Equation 101)

TTrip= set operate temperature

TAmb = ambient temperature
Tref = temperature rise above ambient at Iref
Iref = reference load current
I = actual measured current
Ip = load current before overload occurs

Alarm temperature (0-200)C, (0-400)F 2.0C, 4.0F

Operate temperature (0-300)C, (0-600)F 2.0C, 4.0F
Reset level temperature (0-300)C, (0-600)F 2.0C, 4.0F

8.8 Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and

output CCRBRF

8.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF

SYMBOL-U V1 EN

8.8.2 Functionality
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast backup tripping of surrounding
breakers in case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF can be current-based,
contact-based or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.

511
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve
high security against inadvertent operation.

Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.

CCRBRF can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single phase
tripping applications. For the three-phase version of CCRBRF the current criteria can
be set to operate only if two out of four for example, two phases or one phase plus the
residual current start. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip command.

CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a single- or three-phase re-trip of the

own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect
initiation due to mistakes during testing.

8.8.3 Function block

CCRBRF
I3P* TRBU
BLOCK TRBU2
START TRRET
STL1 TRRETL1
STL2 TRRETL2
STL3 TRRETL3
CBCLDL1 CBALARM
CBCLDL2
CBCLDL3
CBFLT

IEC06000188-2-en.vsd
IEC06000188 V2 EN

Figure 254: CCRBRF function block

8.8.4 Signals
Table 278: CCRBRF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
START BOOLEAN 0 Three phase start of breaker failure protection
function
STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L3
CBCLDL1 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1
CBCLDL2 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L2
CBCLDL3 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L3
CBFLT BOOLEAN 0 CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip
instantaneously

512
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Table 279: CCRBRF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRBU BOOLEAN Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2 BOOLEAN Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection
function
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRETL1 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase
L1
TRRETL2 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase
L2
TRRETL3 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase
L3
CBALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for faulty circuit breaker

8.8.5 Settings
Table 280: CCRBRF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
FunctionMode Current - - Current Detection for trip based on Current/
Contact Contact/Current&Contact
Current/Contact
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 - - 1 out of 3 Back-up trip modes: 2 out of 4 or 1 out of 3
1 out of 3 or 1 out of 4
1 out of 4
RetripMode Retrip Off - - Retrip Off Oper mode of re-trip logic: OFF/CB Pos
CB Pos Check Check/No CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
IP> 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate phase current level in % of IBase
IN> 2 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of re-trip
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip
t2MPh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase
start
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Trip pulse duration

Table 281: CCRBRF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
I>BlkCont 5 - 200 %IB 1 20 I> in % of IBase block operation using
Function Mode Contact
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.030 Additional time delay to t2 for a second
back-up trip
tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay for alarm when faulty circuit
breaker indicated

513
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Table 282: CCRBRF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

8.8.6 Monitored data

Table 283: CCRBRF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Measured current in
phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Measured current in
phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Measured current in
phase L3
IN REAL - A Measured residual
current

8.8.7 Operation principle

Breaker failure protection CCRBRF is initiated from protection trip command, either
from protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.

The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selective
start signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second attempt to
open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. For
transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used. The re-trip function
can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line protection. The re-trip
function can be done with or without current check. With the current check the re-trip
is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate
current level.

The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
start the back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected
by the function, by detection of either low current through RMS evaluation and a
special adapted current algorithm or by open contact indication. The special algorithm
enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening, that is, fast resetting of the
current measurement. If the current and/or contact detection has not detected breaker
opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip is initiated.

Further the following possibilities are available:

The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up
trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up
trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed
breaker.
In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4

514
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high
residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or
residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.
The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the
setting of phase current detection.
It is possible to have different back-up time delays for single-phase faults and for
multi-phase faults.
The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this
option activated for small load currents only.
It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the
circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.

START 30 ms

STL1 OR BFP Started L1

150 ms
AND S
SR Q t Time out L1
R AND
BLOCK
OR
Reset L1
Retrip Time Out L1
BackupTrip L1 OR

IEC09000976-1-en.vsd

IEC09000976 V1 EN

Figure 255: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF starting logic

IP>
a
a>b
b
FunctionMode Current
OR AND Reset L1
OR
Contact
1 Time out L1
Current and Contact OR
AND
Current High L1

IL1 CB Closed L1
AND
OR
BFP Started L1

a AND AND
a>b OR AND
I>BlkCont b

CBCLDL1 Contact Closed L1

AND

IEC09000977-1-en.vsd

IEC09000977 V1 EN

Figure 256: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF, CB position evaluation

515
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

t1 TRRETL3
BFP Started L1 From other
t Retrip Time Out L1 TRRETL2 TRRET
phases OR

tPulse
RetripMode No CBPos Check AND
OR TRRETL1
OR

1
OR AND

CB Pos Check
AND
CB Closed L1
CBFLT

IEC09000978-3-en.vsd

IEC09000978 V3 EN

Figure 257: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function

BFP Started L1
BFP Started L2 AND

BFP Started L3

AND
IN
a
a>b
IN> b

BUTripMode Contact Closed L1

2 out of 4
1 out of 4 OR
1
1 out of 3 OR
Current High L2
From other
Current High L3
phases
Current High L1 AND

CBFLT
AND

t2
BFP Started L1 Backup Trip L1
t AND
OR
t2MPh

AND t

AND
OR OR
tPulse
From other Backup Trip L2 OR TRBU
OR
phases Backup Trip L3
From other BFP Started L2 2 of 3
phases BFP Started L3 tPulse
t3
OR
TRBU2
S Q t
R SR
AND

IEC09000979-3-en.vsd

IEC09000979 V3 EN

Figure 258: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip logic function

Internal logical signals Current High L1, Current High L2, Current High L3 have
logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting
parameter IP>.

516
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.8.8 Technical data

Table 284: CCRBRF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate phase (5-200)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
current 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, phase > 95% -

current
Operate residual (2-200)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
current 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual > 95% -

current
Phase current level (5-200)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
for blocking of 1.0% of I at I > Ir
contact function
Reset ratio > 95% -
Operate time for 10 ms typically -
current detection
Reset time for current 15 ms maximum -
detection
Time delay for re-trip (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

Time delay for back- (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever is

up trip at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

Time delay for back- (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 20 ms whichever is

up trip at multi-phase greater
start at 0 to 2 x Iset

Additional time delay (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 20 ms whichever is

for a second back-up greater
trip at 0 to 2 x Iset

Time delay for alarm (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever is

for faulty circuit greater
breaker

8.9 Stub protection STBPTOC

8.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Stub protection STBPTOC 50STB

3I>STUB

SYMBOL-T V1 EN

517
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

8.9.2 Functionality
When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line disconnector
is opened in multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will mostly be
outside on the disconnected part. The primary line distance protection will thus not be
able to operate and must be blocked.

The stub protection STBPTOC covers the zone between the current transformers and
the open disconnector. The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released
from a normally open, NO (b) auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.

8.9.3 Function block

STBPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR
RELEASE

IEC05000678-2-en.vsd
IEC05000678 V2 EN

Figure 259: STBPTOC function block

8.9.4 Signals
Table 285: STBPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
RELEASE BOOLEAN 0 Release of stub protection

Table 286: STBPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip
START BOOLEAN General start

518
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.9.5 Settings
Table 287: STBPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
ReleaseMode Release - - Release Release of stub protection
Continuous
I> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate current level in % of IBase

Table 288: STBPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay

Table 289: STBPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

8.9.6 Monitored data

Table 290: STBPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

8.9.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS
value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to a
comparator in the stub protection function STBPTOC. In a comparator the RMS
values are compared to the set operating current value of the function I>.

If a phase current is larger than the set operating current the signal from the comparator
for this phase is activated. This signal will, in combination with the release signal from
line disconnection (RELEASE input), activate the timer for the TRIP signal. If the
fault current remains during the timer delay t, the TRIP output signal is activated. The
function can be blocked by activation of the BLOCK input.

519
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION

BLOCK

TRIP
STIL1 AND

STIL2 OR

STIL3

RELEASE

en05000731.vsd
IEC05000731 V1 EN

Figure 260: Simplified logic diagram for Stub protection

8.9.8 Technical data

Table 291: STBPTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating current (5-2500)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50-2500)% of IBase -

Independent time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever
delay at 0 to 2 x Iset is greater

Operate time, start at Min. = 10 ms -

0 to 2 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start at 2 Min. = 10 ms -

to 0 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

8.10 Pole discordance protection CCPDSC

520
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC 52PD

PD

SYMBOL-S V1 EN

8.10.2 Functionality
An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal
stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or
negative sequence current functions.

Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation persists
the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation.

The Pole discordance protection function CCPDSC operates based on information

from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional
criteria from unsymmetrical phase currents when required.

8.10.3 Function block

CCPDSC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKDBYAR
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
POLE2CL
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL

IEC13000305-1-en.vsd
IEC13000305 V1 EN

Figure 261: CCPDSC function block

8.10.4 Signals
Table 292: CCPDSC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKDBYAR BOOLEAN 0 Block of function at CB single phase auto re-closing
cycle
Table continues on next page

521
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Name Type Default Description

CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Close order to CB
OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Open order to CB
EXTPDIND BOOLEAN 0 Pole discordance signal from CB logic
POLE1OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole one opened indication from CB
POLE1CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole one closed indication from CB
POLE2OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole two opened indication from CB
POLE2CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole two closed indication from CB
POLE3OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole three opened indication from CB
POLE3CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole three closed indication from CB

Table 293: CCPDSC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal to CB
START BOOLEAN Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay

8.10.5 Settings
Table 294: CCPDSC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay between trip condition and trip
signal
ContSel Off - - Off Contact function selection
PD signal from CB
Pole pos aux cont.
CurrSel Off - - Off Current function selection
CB oper monitor
Continuous monitor
CurrUnsymLevel 0 - 100 % 1 80 Unsym magn of lowest phase current
compared to the highest.
CurrRelLevel 0 - 100 %IB 1 10 Current magnitude for release of the
function in % of IBase

Table 295: CCPDSC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

522
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.10.6 Monitored data

Table 296: CCPDSC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IMin REAL - A Lowest phase current
IMax REAL - A Highest phase current

8.10.7 Operation principle

The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact
based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary
contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discordance is indicated, see figure 262.
circuit breaker

Pole discordance signal from circuit breaker

en05000287.vsd

IEC05000287 V2 EN

Figure 262: Pole discordance external detection logic

This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this
signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.

There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase
contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED, see figure 263.

523
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

C.B.

poleOneClosed from C.B.

poleTwoClosed from C.B.

poleThreeClosed from C.B.

+
poleOneOpened from C.B.

poleTwoOpened from C.B.

poleThreeOpened from C.B.

en05000288.vsd
IEC05000288 V1 EN

Figure 263: Pole discordance signals for internal logic

In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole
discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay.

Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current

measurement. The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each
phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. The smallest and the
largest phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is lower than the setting
CurrUnsymLevel times the largest phase current the settable trip timer (tTrip) is
started. The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP signal is a pulse
150 ms long. The current based pole discordance function can be set to be active either
continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open or close command.

The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing
function, so that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences with
a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used.

The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based Pole discordance
protection function CCPDSC is shown in figure 264.

524
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

BLOCK
OR
BLKDBYAR

PolPosAuxCont

AND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
Discordance
POLE2CL
detection
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL t 150 ms
t TRIP
AND
OR

PD Signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND

CLOSECMD t+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD

AND

Unsymmetry current
detection

en05000747.vsd
IEC05000747 V1 EN

Figure 264: Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function CCPDSC -

contact and current based

CCPDSC is blocked if:

The IED is in TEST mode and CCPDSC has been blocked from the local HMI
The input signal BLOCK is high
The input signal BLKDBYAR is high

The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance
protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal
functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal
function outputs.

The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single phase
autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal 1PT1 on
SMBRRECfunction block. If the autoreclosing function is an external device, then
BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input in the IED and this binary input is
connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing in progress from the external
autoreclosing device.

If the pole discordance protection is enabled, then two different criteria can generate
a trip signal TRIP:

Pole discordance signaling from the circuit breaker.

Unsymmetrical current detection.

525
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

8.10.7.1 Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close the pole
discordance status, then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole
discordance signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact
for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for each phase
connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval tTrip (0-60 s), a 150 ms trip
pulse command TRIP is generated by the Polediscordance function.

8.10.7.2 Unsymmetrical current detection

Unsymmetrical current indicated if:

any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the
three phases.
the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevel of IBase.

If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal
signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time
delay tTrip if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has
received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms
limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions.

The pole discordance protection is informed that a trip or close command has been
given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command
information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can
be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field
(that is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software
connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (that is close command from a
control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

8.10.8 Technical data

Table 297: CCPDSC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (0100)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Independent time delay between (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 25 ms whichever is

trip condition and trip signal greater

8.11 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP

526
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37
P<
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN

8.11.2 Functionality
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as
a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate
as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration
is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect
it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the low forward power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect
the generator itself.

Figure 265 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a
higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for
unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set
the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about
2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to
the generator is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.

When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive
value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).

527
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Underpower IED Overpower IED

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN

Figure 265: Protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

8.11.3 Function block

GUPPDUP
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 START
BLOCK2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

IEC07000027-2-en.vsd
IEC07000027 V2 EN

Figure 266: GUPPDUP function block

8.11.4 Signals
Table 298: GUPPDUP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2

528
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Table 299: GUPPDUP Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2
START BOOLEAN Common start
START1 BOOLEAN Start of stage 1
START2 BOOLEAN Start of stage 2
P REAL Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power in % of SBase
Q REAL Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in % of SBase

8.11.5 Settings
Table 300: GUPPDUP Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
UnderPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Stage 1 underpower setting in Angle1
direction in % of SBase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 1
TripDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
UnderPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of SBase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 2
TripDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 2

Table 301: GUPPDUP Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
k 0.000 - 0.999 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % SBase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % SBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 5% of Ir
Table continues on next page

529
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 100% of Ir
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 100% of Ur
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 100% of Ir

Table 302: GUPPDUP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - Pos Seq Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

8.11.6 Monitored data

Table 303: GUPPDUP Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power in % of
SBase
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power in % of
SBase

8.11.7 Operation principle

A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown
in figure 267. The function has two stages with individual settings.

530
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) < t TRIP1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
START1

S(angle) < t TRIP2

Power2
START2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

IEC09000018-2-en.vsd
IEC09000018 V2 EN

Figure 267: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 304.
Table 304: Complex power calculation
Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN (Equation 102)
Arone
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN (Equation 103)
PosSeq
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq*
EQUATION1699 V1 EN (Equation 104)
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN (Equation 105)
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN (Equation 106)
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN (Equation 107)
Table continues on next page

531
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation

L1
S = 3 U L1 I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN (Equation 108)
L2
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN (Equation 109)
L3
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN (Equation 110)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is

calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle
is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting

Power1(2). For directional underpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is
activated if the calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For
directional overpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is activated if the
calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay
TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At
activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip
from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.

To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-power1(2)). For
generator low forward power protection the power setting is very low, normally down
to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a
smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2),
Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2)

For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-
power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.

If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value, the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out and
that the timer of the stage will reset.

8.11.7.1 Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This
will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

532
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
EQUATION1959 V1 EN (Equation 111)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
TD

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k=0.92
in case of slow operating functions.

8.11.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation
at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and
above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 268.

533
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

IEC05000652 V2 EN

Figure 268: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Analog outputs (Monitored data) from the function can be used for service values or
in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent
of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in
percent of base power: QPERCENT.

8.11.8 Technical data

Table 305: GUPPDUP technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Power level (0.0500.0)% of SBase 1.0% of Sr at S Sr
for Step 1 and Step 2 1.0% of S at S > Sr
where

S r = 1.732 U r I r

Characteristic angle (-180.0180.0) degrees 2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2
Independent time delay to (0.01-6000.00) s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
operate for Step 1 and Step 2 at greater
2 to 0.5 x Sr and k=0.000

534
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.12 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP

8.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32
P>
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN

8.12.2 Functionality
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as
a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate
as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration
is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect
it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the
generator itself.

Figure 269 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a
higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for
unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set
the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about
2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to
the generator is higher than 1%.

When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive
value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).

535
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Underpower IED Overpower IED

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN

Figure 269: Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

8.12.3 Function block

GOPPDOP
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 START
BLOCK2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

IEC07000028-2-en.vsd
IEC07000028 V2 EN

Figure 270: GOPPDOP function block

8.12.4 Signals
Table 306: GOPPDOP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2

536
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Table 307: GOPPDOP Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2
START BOOLEAN Common start
START1 BOOLEAN Start of stage 1
START2 BOOLEAN Start of stage 2
P REAL Active power P in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power P in % of SBase
Q REAL Reactive power Q in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power Q in % of SBase

8.12.5 Settings
Table 308: GOPPDOP Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
OverPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 1 overpower setting in Angle1
direction in % of SBase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 1
TripDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
OverPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 2 overpower setting in Angle2
direction in % of SBase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 2
TripDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 2

537
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Table 309: GOPPDOP Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
k 0.000 - 0.999 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of
SBase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of
SBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 100% of Ir
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 100% of Ur
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 100% of Ir

Table 310: GOPPDOP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - Pos Seq Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

538
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.12.6 Monitored data

Table 311: GOPPDOP Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active power P in MW
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power P in % of
SBase
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power Q in
MVAr
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power Q in % of
SBase

8.12.7 Operation principle

A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown
in figure 271. The function has two stages with individual settings.

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) > t TRIP1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
START1

S(angle) > t TRIP2

Power2
START2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

IEC06000567-2-en.vsd
IEC06000567 V2 EN

Figure 271: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 312.

539
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

Table 312: Complex power calculation

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN (Equation 112)
Arone
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN (Equation 113)
PosSeq
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq*
EQUATION1699 V1 EN (Equation 114)
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN (Equation 115)
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN (Equation 116)
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN (Equation 117)
L1
S = 3 U L1 I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN (Equation 118)
L2
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN (Equation 119)
L3
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN (Equation 120)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is

calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle
is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting

Power1(2). A start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component
is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2)
signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages
a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a
common signal TRIP will be activated.

To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) drop-power1(2)). For
generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to
0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller

540
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2),
Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) Hysteresis1(2)

For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-
power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.

If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out ant
that the timer of the stage will reset.

8.12.7.1 Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This
will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
EQUATION1959 V1 EN (Equation 121)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k =
0.92 in case of slow operating functions.

8.12.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation
at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and
above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 272.

541
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

IEC05000652 V2 EN

Figure 272: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance
report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base power:
PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base
power: QPERCENT.

8.12.8 Technical data

Table 313: GOPPDOP technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Power level (0.0500.0)% of SBase 1.0% of Sr at S Sr
for Step 1 and Step 2 1.0% of S at S > Sr

Characteristic angle (-180.0180.0) degrees 2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2
Operate time, start at 0.5 to 2 x Min. =10 ms
Sr and k=0.000
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 2 to 0.5 x Sr Min. = 35 ms
and k=0.000
Max. = 55 ms
Independent time delay to (0.01-6000.00) s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
operate for Step 1 and Step 2 at greater
0.5 to 2 x Sr and k=0.000

542
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.13 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

8.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC - 46

8.13.2 Functionality
Conventional protection functions cannot detect the broken conductor condition.
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC function, consisting of continuous phase
selective current unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED is connected, gives
an alarm or trip at detecting broken conductors.

8.13.3 Function block

BRCPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR

IEC07000034-2-en.vsd
IEC07000034 V2 EN

Figure 273: BRCPTOC function block

8.13.4 Signals
Table 314: BRCPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip

Table 315: BRCPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Operate signal of the protection logic
START BOOLEAN Start signal of the protection logic

543
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

8.13.5 Settings
Table 316: BRCPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
Iub> 50 - 90 %IM 1 50 Highest and lowest phase currents
difference in % of highest phase current
IP> 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Minimum phase current for operation of
Iub> in % of IBase
tOper 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Operate time delay

Table 317: BRCPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay in reset

Table 318: BRCPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

8.13.6 Monitored data

Table 319: BRCPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IUNBAL REAL - - Measured unbalance of
phase currents

8.13.7 Operation principle

Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC) detects a broken conductor condition by
detecting the asymmetry between currents in the three phases. The current-measuring
elements continuously measure the three-phase currents.

The current asymmetry signal output START is set on if:

The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the
phase with the highest current is greater than set percentage Iub> of the highest
phase current
The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>.
The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value IP>

544
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel lines.
If a conductor breaks in one phase on one line, the parallel line will experience an
increase in current in the same phase. This might result in the first two conditions
being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set
time tOper the TRIP output is activated.

The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in
figure 274

BRCPTOC is disabled (blocked) if:

The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the local HMI
test menu (BlockBRC=Yes).
The input signal BLOCK is high.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a
block command from external devices, or can be software connected to other internal
functions of the IED itself to receive a block command from internal functions.

The output trip signal TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to
the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
and
Block BRCPTOC=Yes
START

Function Enable
BLOCK or
tOper
TRIP
and t
Unsymmetrical
Current Detection
STI

IL1<50%IP>

IL2<50%IP> or

IL3<50%IP>

IEC09000158-3-en.vsd
IEC09000158 V3 EN

Figure 274: Simplified logic diagram for Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

545
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

8.13.8 Technical data

Table 320: BRCPTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum phase current for operation (5100)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Unbalance current operation (5090)% of maximum current 1.0% of Ir

Independent operate time delay (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms

whichever is greater
Independent reset time delay (0.010-60.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms
whichever is greater
Start time at current change from Ir to 0 Min. = 25 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time at current change from 0 to Ir Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 20 ms

8.14 Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection

VRPVOC

8.14.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent VRPVOC I>/U< 51V
protection

8.14.2 Functionality
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection (VRPVOC) function can be used as
generator backup protection against short-circuits.

The overcurrent protection feature has a settable current level that can be used either
with definite time or inverse time characteristic. Additionally, it can be voltage
controlled/restrained.

One undervoltage step with definite time characteristic is also available within the
function in order to provide functionality for overcurrent protection with undervoltage
seal-in.

546
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.14.3 Function block

VRPVOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TROC
BLOCK TRUV
BLKOC START
BLKUV STOC
STUV

IEC12000184-1-en.vsd

IEC12000184 V1 EN

Figure 275: VRPVOC function block

8.14.4 Signals
Table 321: VRPVOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function both stages
BLKOC BOOLEAN 0 Block of voltage restraint overcurrent stage (ANSI
51V)
BLKUV BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function

Table 322: VRPVOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TROC BOOLEAN Trip signal from voltage restrained overcurrent
stage
TRUV BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STOC BOOLEAN Start signal from voltage restrained overcurrent
stage
STUV BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function

547
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

8.14.5 Settings
Table 323: VRPVOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartCurr 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Start current level in % of IBase
Characterist ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Norm. inv. Time delay curve type for 51V Voltage
ANSI Very inv. restrained overcurrent
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
tDef_OC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Definite time delay for Over Current
k 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for Inverse Definite
Minimum Time curves
tMin 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for Inverse Definite
Minimum Time curve
Operation_UV Off - - Off Operation of under-voltage stage (ANSI
On 27) Off / On
StartVolt 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage for start of under-voltage stage in
% of UBase
tDef_UV 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Definite time time delay when used for
Under-Voltage
EnBlkLowV Off - - Off Enable internal low voltage level blocking
On for Under-Voltage
BlkLowVolt 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 3.0 Internal low voltage level for blocking of
UV in % of UBase

Table 324: VRPVOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
VDepMode Step - - Slope Voltage dependent mode OC (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 25.0 Start current level in % of pickup when U<
25% of UBase
UHighLimit 30.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting in % of UBase

Table 325: VRPVOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

548
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.14.6 Monitored data

Table 326: VRPVOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IMAX REAL - A Maximum phase current
magnitude
UUMIN REAL - kV Minimum ph-to-ph
voltage magnitude

8.14.7 Operation principle

8.14.7.1 Measured quantities

The voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC function is always

connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration
tool (ACT), but it will always measure the maximum of the three-phase currents and
the minimum of the three phase-to-phase voltages. If frequency tracking mode for
preprocessing blocks is used, then the function operates properly in wide frequency
range (e.g. 10-90 Hz).

8.14.7.2 Base quantities

GlobalBaseSel defines the particular Global Base Values Group where the base
quantities of the function are set. In that Global Base Values Group:

IBase shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary
amperes.

UBase shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in

primary kV.

8.14.7.3 Overcurrent protection

The overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity
with the set start level. The overcurrent step starts if the magnitude of the measured
current quantity is higher than the set level.

Voltage restraint/control feature

The overcurrent protection operation is made dependent of a measured voltage
quantity. This means that the start level of the overcurrent step is not constant but
decreases with the decrease in magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. This
feature affects the start current value of both definite time and inverse time IDMT
overcurrent protection; in particular the overcurrent with IDMT curve operates faster
during low voltage conditions. Two different types of dependencies are available:

Voltage restrained overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode = Slope); the

start level of the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 276. The
voltage restrained characteristic is defined by the two points: (0.25*UBase ;

549
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

VDepFact *StartCurr/100*IBase) and (UHighLimit/100*UBase; StartCurr/

100*IBase). In the first point the factor 0.25 that multiply UBase cannot be
changed.

Start level of the current

StartCurr

VDepFact * StartCurr

0,25 UHighLimit
UBase
IEC10000123-2-en.vsd
IEC10000123 V2 EN

Figure 276: Example for start level of the current variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode = Step); the

start level of the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 277.

Start level of the current

StartCurr

VDepFact * StartCurr

UHighLimit UBase

IEC10000124-2-en.vsd
IEC10000124 V2 EN

Figure 277: Example for start level of the current variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

550
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.14.7.4 Logic diagram

DEF time
selected
TROC
OR

MaxPhCurr
a STOC
a>b
b

StartCurr
X Inverse

Inverse
Voltage time
control or selected
restraint
feature

MinPh-PhVoltage

IEC10000214-1-en.vsd

IEC10000214 V1 EN

Figure 278: Simplified internal logic diagram for overcurrent function

DEF time
selected TRUV

MinPh-phVoltage a
b>a
b STUV
AND
StartVolt

Operation_UV=On

BLKUV

IEC10000213-1-en.vsd

IEC10000213 V1 EN

Figure 279: Simplified internal logic diagram for undervoltage function

8.14.7.5 Undervoltage protection

The undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the lowest measured phase-
phase voltage quantity with the set start level. The undervoltage step starts if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is lower than the set level.

551
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK505308-UEN B
Current protection

The start signal starts a definite time delay. If the value of the start signal is logical
TRUE for longer than the set time delay, the undervoltage step sets its trip signal to
logical TRUE.

This undervoltage functionality together with additional ACT logic can be used to
provide functionality for overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in.

8.14.8 Technical data

Table 327: VRPVOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Start overcurrent (2.0 - 5000.0)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, > 95% -

overcurrent
Operate time, start Min. = 15 ms -
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x
Iset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start Min. = 15 ms -

overcurrent at 2 to 0 x
Iset Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start Min. = 5 ms -

overcurrent at 0 to 10 Max. = 20 ms
x Iset

Reset time, start Min. = 20 ms -

overcurrent at 10 to 0 Max. = 35 ms
x Iset

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay to operate at 0 to greater
2 x Iset

Inverse time 13 curve types See tables 1113 and 1114

characteristics,
see tables 1113 and
1114
Minimum operate time (0.00 - 60.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
for inverse time greater
characteristics
High voltage limit, (30.0 - 100.0)% of UBase 1.0% of Ur
voltage dependent
operation
Start undervoltage (2.0 - 100.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio, < 105% -

undervoltage
Operate time start Min. = 15 ms -
undervoltage at 2 to 0
x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time start Min. = 15 ms -

undervoltage at 0 to 2
x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Table continues on next page

552
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
delay to operate, greater
undervoltage at 2 to 0
x Uset

Internal low voltage (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase 0.25% of Ur

blocking
Overcurrent: -
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically
Undervoltage: -
Critical impulse time 10ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically

553
Technical manual
554
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

Section 9 Voltage protection

9.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

9.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27

3U<

SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
V2 EN

9.1.2 Functionality
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions.
Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) function can be used to open circuit
breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed
back-up to primary protection.

UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

UV2PTUV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

555
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

9.1.3 Function block

UV2PTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3

IEC06000276-2-en.vsd
IEC06000276 V2 EN

Figure 280: UV2PTUV function block

9.1.4 Signals
Table 328: UV2PTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 329: UV2PTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TR2L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L3
START BOOLEAN General start signal
Table continues on next page

556
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

Name Type Description

ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2
ST2L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L3

9.1.5 Settings
Table 330: UV2PTUV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step
Inverse curve A 1
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3,
2 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in %
of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
IntBlkSel1 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1
Block of trip
Block all
IntBlkStVal1 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of
UBase, step 1
tBlkUV1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking
for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step
Inverse curve A 2
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Table continues on next page

557
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3,
2 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
U2< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in %
of UBase, step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2
IntBlkSel2 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2
Block of trip
Block all
IntBlkStVal2 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of
UBase, step 2
tBlkUV2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking
for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

Table 331: UV2PTUV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 2
Linearly decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
Table continues on next page

558
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

Table 332: UV2PTUV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh RMS
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

9.1.6 Monitored data

Table 333: UV2PTUV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3

9.1.7 Operation principle

Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) is used to detect low power system
voltage. UV2PTUV has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If one,
two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding START
signal is generated. UV2PTUV can be set to START/TRIP based on 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If the voltage
remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay,
the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to disconnection
of the related high voltage equipment, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is
available, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking level the function is
blocked and no START or TRIP signal is generated.The time delay characteristic is
individually chosen for each step and can be either definite time delay or inverse time
delay.

559
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

UV2PTUV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-earth true RMS value or phase-to-phase true RMS value.
The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The voltage related
settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-to-phase voltage.
This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage under:

U < (%) UBase(kV )

3
EQUATION1429 V2 EN (Equation 122)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:

U < (%) UBase(kV)

EQUATION1990 V1 EN (Equation 123)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root
of three.

9.1.7.1 Measurement principle

Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV measures phase-to-earth or phase-

to-phase voltages and compare against set values, U1< and U2<. The parameters
OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START outputs.
Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be lower than the
corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.1.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
Un < -U

Un <
EQUATION1431 V2 EN (Equation 124)

560
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

where:
Un< Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

k 480
t= 2.0
+ 0.055
Un < - U
32 - 0.5
Un <
EQUATION1432 V2 EN (Equation 125)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

kA
t= p
+D
Un < - U
B -C
Un <
EQUATION1433 V2 EN (Equation 126)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un< down to Un< (1.0
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un< (1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the
programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B -C > 0
100
EQUATION1435 V1 EN (Equation 127)

The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details
of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 25.3 "Inverse
characteristics".

561
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

Voltage

UL1
UL2
UL3

IDMT Voltage

Time

IEC12000186-1-en.vsd

IEC12000186 V1 EN

Figure 281: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse
time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases
during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time
(tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the
inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. Here it should be noted that after
leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not
sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that for the
undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the
voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset
the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during
the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See
figure 282 and figure 283.

562
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

tIReset1

Voltage
tIReset1
Measured
START Voltage
HystAbs1
TRIP

U1<

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous
decreased IEC05000010-4-en.vsd

IEC05000010 V4 EN

Figure 282: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

563
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage
tIReset1
START
START
HystAbs1 Measured Voltage
TRIP

U1<

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Instantaneous Linearly decreased
IEC05000011-en-3.vsd

IEC05000011 V3 EN

Figure 283: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different
reset types

Definite timer delay

When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 284.
Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in
figure 285 and figure 286 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s,
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

564
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

ST1

U t1
a tReset1
TR1
t
a<b t
U1< R
b
AND

IEC09000785-3-en.vsd
IEC09000785 V3 EN

Figure 284: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, DT operation

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000039-3-en.vsd
IEC10000039 V3 EN

Figure 285: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset

565
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000040-3-en.vsd
IEC10000040 V3 EN

Figure 286: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 operation

9.1.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV partially or

completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the
trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the START outputs of step 1, are blocked. The
characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking
can also be set to Off resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings
and functionality are valid also for step 2.

In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get
very low. The event will START both the under voltage function and the blocking
function, as seen in figure 287. The delay of the blocking function must be set less than
the time delay of under voltage function.

566
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

U Disconnection

Normal voltage

U1<

U2<

tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2

Time

Block step 1

Block step 2
en05000466.vsd

IEC05000466 V1 EN

Figure 287: Blocking function

9.1.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral

voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to the
set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration.
A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria
to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step undervoltage protection
UV2PTUV is schematically shown in Figure 288.

567
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 < U1< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode1 ST1L2
UL2 Comparator Phase 2
1 out of 3
UL2 < U1< 2 out of 3 ST1L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 Start t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 < U1< IntBlkStVal1 &
OR ST1
Trip
Output
START Logic TR1L1

Step 1 TR1L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3

TR1
OR

Comparator ST2L1
UL1 < U2< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode2 ST2L2
Comparator Phase 2
UL2 < U2< 1 out of 3
2 out of 3 Start t2 ST2L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t2Reset
Comparator IntBlkStVal2 &
UL3 < U2< Trip ST2
Output OR
Logic
START TR2L1

Step 2
TR2L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3

TR2
OR
START
OR

TRIP
OR

IEC05000834-2-en.vsd
IEC05000834 V2 EN

Figure 288: Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

568
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

9.1.8 Technical data

Table 334: UV2PTUV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, low (1.0100.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
and high step
Absolute hysteresis (0.050.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Internal blocking (150)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

level, step 1 and step
2
Inverse time - See table 1125
characteristics for
step 1 and step 2, see
table 1125
Definite time delay, (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 40ms whichever is
step 1 at 1.2 to 0 x greater
Uset

Definite time delay, (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40ms whichever is

step 2 at 1.2 to 0 x greater
Uset

Minimum operate (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 40ms whichever is

time, inverse greater
characteristics
Operate time, start at Min= 15 ms -
2 to 0 x Uset Max= 30 ms

Reset time, start at 0 Min= 15 ms -

to 2 x Uset Max= 30 ms

Operate time, start at Min= 5 ms -

1.2 to 0 x Uset Max= 25 ms

Reset time, start at 0 Min= 15 ms -

to 1.2 x Uset Max= 35 ms

Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1.2 to 0 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

9.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV

9.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59

3U>

SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN V2 EN

569
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

9.2.2 Functionality
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as
sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.

OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.

OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

9.2.3 Function block

OV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3

IEC06000277-2-en.vsd
IEC06000277 V2 EN

Figure 289: OV2PTOV function block

9.2.4 Signals
Table 335: OV2PTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 336: OV2PTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
Table continues on next page

570
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

Name Type Description

TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TR2L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L3
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2
ST2L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L3

9.2.5 Settings
Table 337: OV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step
Inverse curve A 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3,
2 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in %
of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Table continues on next page

571
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step
Inverse curve A 2
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3,
2 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
U2> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in %
of UBase, step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

Table 338: OV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT
curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 2
Linearly decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
Table continues on next page

572
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT
curve, step 2

Table 339: OV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh RMS
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

9.2.6 Monitored data

Table 340: OV2PTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3

9.2.7 Operation principle

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV is used to detect high power system
voltage. OV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or three-
phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding START signal is issued.
OV2PTOV can be set to START/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of
the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains above the set
value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip
signal is issued.

The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either,
definite time delay or inverse time delay.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage UBase,
which is set in kV, phase-to-phase.

OV2PTOV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The
choice of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.

573
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase
voltage. OV2PTOV will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of
the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage over:

U > (%) UBase( kV )

3
EQUATION1434 V1 EN (Equation 128)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

U > (%) UBase(kV)

EQUATION1993 V1 EN (Equation 129)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root
of three.

9.2.7.1 Measurement principle

All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
U1> for Step 1 and U2> for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2
influence the requirements to activate the START outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3
or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to
issue the corresponding START signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis is included.

9.2.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
U - Un >

Un >
IECEQUATION2422 V1 EN (Equation 130)

574
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

k 480
t 2.0
0.035
U Un
32 0.5
Un

IECEQUATION2423 V2 EN (Equation 131)

The type C curve is described as:

k 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
U - Un >
32 - 0.5
U n >
IECEQUATION2425 V1 EN (Equation 132)

The customer programmable curve is defined by the below equation, where A, B, C,

D, k and p are settings:

kA
t= p
+D
U -Un >
B -C
Un >
EQUATION1439 V2 EN (Equation 133)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up to Un> (1.0 +
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the
programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B -C > 0
100
EQUATION1435 V1 EN (Equation 134)

The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time
delay integration, see figure 290. The details of the different inverse time
characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics".

575
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

Voltage
IDMT Voltage

UL1
UL2
UL3

Time

IEC05000016-2-en.vsd

IEC05000016 V2 EN

Figure 290: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Operation of the trip signal requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the
inverse time mode (IDMT). If the START condition, with respect to the measured
voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined
reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the
inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after that the defined reset
time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the
START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only
return back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for each step is settable
HystAbsn (where n means either 1 or 2 respectively) to allow a high and accurate reset
of the function. For OV2PTOV the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend
on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways
to reset the timer: either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen
during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time.

576
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

tIReset1

tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP

U1>

HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t

Instantaneous Time
IEC09000055-2-en.vsd

IEC09000055 V2 EN

Figure 291: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

577
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage tIReset1
START TRIP
START HystAbs1

U1>

Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased IEC05000020-3-en.vsd

IEC05000020 V3 EN

Figure 292: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different
reset types

Definite time delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure 293.
Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in
figure 285 and figure 286 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s (where n
means either 1 or 2 respectively), instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage
is ensured.

578
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

ST1

U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay

IEC10000100-2-en.vsd
IEC10000100 V2 EN

Figure 293: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, definite time delay, DT operation

U1>

START

TRIP

tReset1

t1

IEC10000037-2-en.vsd
IEC10000037 V2 EN

Figure 294: Example for step 1, Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset

579
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

U1>

START

TRIP

tReset1

t1

IEC10000038-2-en.vsd
IEC10000038 V2 EN

Figure 295: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

9.2.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV partially or

completely, by binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

9.2.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth

voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The phase voltages are individually compared
to the set value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3
criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step overvoltage protection
(OV2PTOV) is schematically described in figure 296.

580
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 > U1> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST1L2
UL2 Comparator OpMode1 Phase 2
UL2 > U1> 1 out of 3
Start ST1L3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 > U1> & ST1
OR
Trip
START Output TR1L1
Logic

Time integrator Step 1 TR1L2

TRIP
MaxVoltSelect tIreset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3

OR TR1

Comparator ST2L1
UL1 > U2> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST2L2
Comparator OpMode2 Phase 2
UL2 > U2> 1 out of 3
Start ST2L3
2 out of 3
Phase 3 t2
3 out of 3
Comparator t2Reset
UL3 > U2> & ST2
OR
Trip
START Output TR2L1
Logic

Time integrator Step 2 TR2L2

MaxVoltSelect tIreset2 TRIP
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3

TR2
OR

START
OR

TRIP
OR

IEC05000013-2-en.vsd

IEC05000013-WMF V2 EN

Figure 296: Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV

581
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

9.2.8 Technical data

Table 341: OV2PTOV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate (1.0-200.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
voltage, step 1 0.5% of U at U > Ur
and 2
Absolute (0.050.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
hysteresis 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time - See table 1124

characteristics
for steps 1 and
2, see
table 1124
Definite time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
delay, low step greater
(step 1) at 0 to
1.2 x Uset

Definite time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is

delay, high step greater
(step 2) at 0 to
1.2 x Uset

Minimum (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is greater

operate time,
Inverse
characteristics
Operate time, Min. = 15 ms -
start at 0 to 2 x Max. = 30 ms
Uset

Reset time, start Min. = 15 ms -

at 2 to 0 x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, Min. = 20 ms -

start at 0 to 1.2 x Max. = 35 ms
Uset

Reset time, start Min. = 5 ms -

at 1.2 to 0 x Uset Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

time
Impulse margin 15 ms typically -
time

582
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

9.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV

9.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
3U0
TRV V1 EN

9.3.2 Functionality
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during earth faults.

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV function calculates the

residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from
a single voltage input transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point voltage
transformer.

ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

Reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earth faults.

9.3.3 Function block

ROV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR2
BLKST1 START
BLKTR2 ST1
BLKST2 ST2

IEC06000278-2-en.vsd
IEC06000278 V2 EN

Figure 297: ROV2PTOV function block

9.3.4 Signals
Table 342: ROV2PTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
Table continues on next page

583
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 343: ROV2PTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2

9.3.5 Settings
Table 344: ROV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step
Inverse curve A 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step
1 in % of UBase
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step
Inverse curve A 2
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U2> 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 45.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step
2 in % of UBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
Table continues on next page

584
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

Table 345: ROV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT
curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 2
Linearly decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT
curve, step 2

585
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

Table 346: ROV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

9.3.6 Monitored data

Table 347: ROV2PTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ULevel REAL - kV Magnitude of measured
voltage

9.3.7 Operation principle

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is used to detect high single-
phase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3U0. The residual voltage can
be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer
or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings are
connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the three-phase voltages
and internally in the IED calculate the corresponding residual voltage and connect this
calculated residual voltage to ROV2PTOV. ROV2PTOV has two steps with separate
time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage remains above the set value for a
time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is
issued.

The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either,
definite time delay or inverse time delay.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV,
phase-phase.

9.3.7.1 Measurement principle

The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
U1> and U2>.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.3.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:

586
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
U - Un >

Un >
IECEQUATION2422 V1 EN (Equation 135)

where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

k 480
t 2.0
0.035
U Un
32 0.5
Un

IECEQUATION2423 V2 EN (Equation 136)

The type C curve is described as:

k 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
U - Un >
32 - 0.5
U>
IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN (Equation 137)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

kA
t= p
+D
U -Un >
B -C
Un >
EQUATION1439 V2 EN (Equation 138)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up to Un> (1.0 +
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the
programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

587
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

CrvSatn
B -C > 0
100
EQUATION1440 V1 EN (Equation 139)

The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse
characteristics".

TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for
the inverse time mode (IDMT).

If the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay
time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for
the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding
START output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed.

Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition
must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the
hysteresis area. Also notice that for the overvoltage function IDMT reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period.
However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value
is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 291 and figure 292.

588
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

tIReset1

tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP

U1>

HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t

Instantaneous Time
IEC09000055-2-en.vsd

IEC09000055 V2 EN

Figure 298: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

589
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage tIReset1
START TRIP
START HystAbs1

U1>

Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased IEC05000020-3-en.vsd

IEC05000020 V3 EN

Figure 299: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

Definite timer delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure 300.
Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in
figure 285 and figure 286 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s,
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

590
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

ST1

U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay

IEC10000100-2-en.vsd
IEC10000100 V2 EN

Figure 300: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, Definite time delay, DT operation

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000039-3-en.vsd
IEC10000039 V3 EN

Figure 301: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset

591
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000040-3-en.vsd
IEC10000040 V3 EN

Figure 302: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

9.3.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV partially

or completely, by binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all START and trip inputs related to step 2

9.3.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage.

Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is
compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. The design of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV) is
schematically described in figure 303.

592
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

UN Comparator Phase 1 ST1

UN > U1>
Start TR1
START t1
tReset1
&
Trip
Time integrator Output
tIReset1 TRIP
Logic
ResetTypeCrv1
Step 1

ST2
Comparator Phase 1
UN > U2> TR2
Start
t2
START tReset2
& START
Trip OR
Time integrator Output
TRIP Logic
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TRIP
Step 2 OR

IEC05000748_2_en.vsd
IEC05000748 V2 EN

Figure 303: Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV

9.3.8 Technical data

Table 348: ROV2PTOV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, (1.0-200.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
step 1 and step 2 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Absolute (0.050.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

hysteresis 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time - See table 1126

characteristics for
low and high step,
see table 1126
Definite time delay (0.006000.00) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
low step (step 1) at greater
0 to 1.2 x Uset

Definite time delay (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is

high step (step 2) greater
at 0 to 1.2 x Uset

Table continues on next page

593
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum operate (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
time greater
Operate time, start Min. = 15 ms -
at 0 to 2 x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at Min. = 15 ms -

2 to 0 x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start Min. = 20 ms -

at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Max. = 35 ms

Reset time, start at Min. = 5 ms -

1.2 to 0 x Uset Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

time
Impulse margin 15 ms typically -
time

9.4 Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH

9.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH 24

U/f >

SYMBOL-Q V1 EN

9.4.2 Functionality
When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a
magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated
components that are not designed to carry flux. This will cause eddy currents to flow.
These eddy currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and
adjacent parts in a relatively short time. The function has settable inverse operating
curves and independent alarm stages.

9.4.3 Function block

OEXPVPH
I3P* TRIP
U3P* START
BLOCK ALARM
RESET

IEC05000329-2-en.vsd
IEC05000329 V3 EN

Figure 304: OEXPVPH function block

594
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

9.4.4 Signals
Table 349: OEXPVPH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset operation

Table 350: OEXPVPH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip from overexcitation function
START BOOLEAN Overexcitation above set operate level
(instantaneous)
ALARM BOOLEAN Overexcitation above set alarm level (delayed)

9.4.5 Settings
Table 351: OEXPVPH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
V/Hz> 100.0 - 180.0 %UB/f 0.1 110.0 Operate level of V/Hz at no load and rated
freq in % of (UBase/frated)
V/Hz>> 100.0 - 200.0 %UB/f 0.1 140.0 High level of V/Hz above which tMin is
used, in % of (UBase/frated)
XLeak 0.000 - 200.000 Ohm 0.001 0.000 Winding leakage reactance in primary
ohms
TrPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec)
tMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Minimum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve,
in sec
tMax 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 1800.00 Maximum trip delay for V/Hz inverse
curve, in sec
tCooling 0.10 - 9000.00 s 0.01 1200.00 Transformer magnetic core cooling time
constant, in sec
CurveType IEEE - - IEEE Inverse time curve selection, IEEE/Tailor
Tailor made made
kForIEEE 1 - 60 - 1 1 Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type
curve
AlarmLevel 50.0 - 120.0 % 0.1 100.0 Alarm operate level as % of operate level
tAlarm 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Alarm time delay, in sec

595
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

Table 352: OEXPVPH Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t1Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 7200.00 Time delay t1 (longest) for tailor made
curve, in sec
t2Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 3600.00 Time delay t2 for tailor made curve, in sec
t3Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 1800.00 Time delay t3 for tailor made curve, in sec
t4Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 900.00 Time delay t4 for tailor made curve, in sec
t5Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 450.00 Time delay t5 for tailor made curve, in sec
t6Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 225.00 Time delay t6 (shortest) for tailor made
curve, in sec

Table 353: OEXPVPH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MeasuredU PosSeq - - L1L2 Selection of measured voltage
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
MeasuredI L1L2 - - L1L2 Selection of measured current
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

9.4.6 Monitored data

Table 354: OEXPVPH Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TMTOTRIP REAL - s Calculated time to trip for
overexcitation, in sec
VPERHZ REAL - V/Hz Voltage to frequency ratio
in per-unit
THERMSTA REAL - % Overexcitation thermal
status in % of trip level

9.4.7 Operation principle

The importance of Overexcitation protection (OEXPVPH) function is growing as the
power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate near their
designated limits most of the time.

Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types.
This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the
improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. If an
emergency that causes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged

596
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

unless corrective action is taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend an

overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system.

Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination with

below-normal frequency. Such conditions may occur when a transformer unit is
loaded, but are more likely to arise when the transformer is unloaded, or when loss of
load occurs. Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular danger to
experience overexcitation conditions. It follows from the fundamental transformer
equation, see equation 140, that the peak flux density Bmax is directly proportional to
induced voltage E, and inversely proportional to frequency f and turns n.

E = 4.44 f n B max A
EQUATION898 V2 EN (Equation 140)

The relative excitation M is therefore according to equation 141.

E f
M ( p.u.) =
( Ur ) ( fr )
IECEQUATION2296 V1 EN (Equation 141)

Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing. If

the core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically 1.9
Tesla), the flux will no longer be contained within the core, but will extend into other
(non-laminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to eddy current
circulations.

Overexcitation will result in:

overheating of the non-laminated metal parts

a large increase in magnetizing currents
an increase in core and winding temperature
an increase in transformer vibration and noise

Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative volt per hertz
(V/Hz) ratio. Protection initiates a reduction of excitation, and if this fails, or if this is
not possible, the TRIP signal will disconnect the transformer from the source after a
delay ranging from seconds to minutes, typically 5-10 seconds.

Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected

generator unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are subjected
to a wide range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of the turbine.
In such cases, OEXPVPH (24) may trip the field breaker during a start-up of a
machine, by means of the overexcitation ALARM signal. If this is not possible, the
power transformer can be disconnected from the source, after a delay, by the TRIP
signal.

The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers operate continuously at not
more than 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the

597
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

ratio of the actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not exceed
1.1 times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a sustained
basis, see equation 142.

E
---- 1.1 Ur
------
f fr
EQUATION900 V1 EN (Equation 142)

or equivalently, with 1.1 Ur = V/Hz> according to equation 143.

E V Hz >

f fr
IECEQUATION2297 V2 EN (Equation 143)

where:
V/Hz> is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.

V/Hz> is a setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 180%. If the user does not
know exactly what to set, then the default value for V/Hz> = 110 % given by the IEC
60076-1 standard shall be used.

In OEXPVPH, the relative excitation M is expressed according to equation 144.

E f
M ( p.u.) =
Ur fr
IECEQUATION2299 V1 EN (Equation 144)

It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1 for
any E and f, where the ratio E/f is equal to Ur/fr. A power transformer is not
overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M V/Hz>, V/Hz> expressed in % of
Ur/fr.

The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage U which is in

general not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For no
load condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power transformer the
internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the voltage U which is
measured and fed to OEXPVPH , depending on the direction of the power flow
through the power transformer, the power transformer side where OEXPVPH is
applied, and the power transformer leakage reactance of the winding. It is important
to specify in the application configuration on which side of the power transformer
OEXPVPH is placed.

As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full load,
0.8 power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the transformer
core, will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage, no load, rated
frequency, provided that the short circuit impedance X can be equally divided

598
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

between the primary and the secondary winding: Xleak = Xleak1 = Xleak2 = Xsc / 2
= 0.075 pu.

OEXPVPH calculates the internal induced voltage E if Xleak (meaning the leakage
reactance of the winding where OEXPVPH is connected) is known to the user. The
assumption taken for two-winding power transformers that Xleak = Xsc / 2 is
unfortunately most often not true. For a two-winding power transformer the leakage
reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on the core
with respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers the
situation is still more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage reactance,
then it should applied. If a user has no idea about it, Xleak can be set to Xc/2.
OEXPVPH protection will then take the given measured voltage U, as the induced
voltage E.

It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events such

as loss-of-load, etc. A high phase-to-earth voltage does not mean overexcitation. For
example, in an unearthed power system, a single phase-to-earth fault means high
voltages of the healthy two phases-to-earth, but no overexcitation on any winding.
The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially unchanged. The important
voltage is the voltage between the two ends of each winding.

9.4.7.1 Measured voltage

If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where overexcitation

protection is applied, then Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH shall be set to
measure this voltage, MeasuredU. The particular voltage which is used determines the
two currents that must be used. This must be chosen with the setting MeasuredI.

It is extremely important that MeasuredU and MeasuredI are set to

same value.

If, for example, voltage UL1L2 is fed to OEXPVPH, then currents IL1, and IL2 must
be applied. From these two input currents, current IL1L2 = IL1 - IL2 is calculated
internally by the OEXPVPH algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage must be higher
than 70% of the rated value, otherwise the protection algorithm exits without
calculating the excitation. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of
relative excitation V/Hz shows 0.000.

If three phase-to-earth voltages are available from the side where overexcitation is
connected, then OEXPVPH shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage and
current. In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current
are used by OEXPVPH. A check is made if the positive sequence voltage is higher
than 70% of rated phase-to-earth voltage, when below this value, OEXPVPH exits
immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and the
displayed value of relative excitation V/Hz shows 0.000.

599
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

OEXPVPH can be connected to any power transformer side, independent from

the power flow.
The side with a possible load tap changer must not be used.

9.4.7.2 Operate time of the overexcitation protection

The operate time of OEXPVPH is a function of the relative overexcitation.

Basically there are two different delay laws available to choose between:

the so called IEEE law, and

a tailor-made law.

The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on
analysis of the various transformers overexcitation capability characteristics. They
can match the transformer core capability well.

The square law is according to equation 145.

0.18 k 0.18 k
top = 2
= 2
M overexcitation
V Hz> - 1

IECEQUATION2298 V2 EN (Equation 145)

where:
M the relative excitation
V/Hz> is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and
k is time multiplier for inverse time functions, see figure 306.
Parameter k (time multiplier setting) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.

The relative excitation M is calculated using equation146

Umeasured
Umeasured frated
=
fmeasured
M =
UBase UBase fmeasured

frated
IECEQUATION2404 V1 EN (Equation 146)

An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral

expression, which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to
equation 147.

600
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

top

(M (t) - V Hz > ) dt 0.18 k

2

IECEQUATION2300 V1 EN (Equation 147)

A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (that is, j = n) where it
becomes true that:

n
2
Dt ( M(j) V/Hz> ) 0.18 k
j=k
EQUATION906 V1 EN (Equation 148)

where:
Dt is the time interval between two successive executions of OEXPVPH and
M(j) - V/Hz> is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is given
as Ur/fr.

As long as M > V/Hz> (that is, overexcitation condition), the above sum can only be
larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will be
tripped at j = n.

Inverse delays as per figure 306, can be modified (limited) by two special definite
delay settings, namely tMax and tMin, see figure 305.

delay in s

tMax

under - inverse delay law

excitation

overexcitation
tMin
0 Mmax - V/Hz> Overexcitation M-V/Hz>

M=V/Hz> Mmax Excitation M

V/Hz> Emax E (only if f = fr = const)

99001067.vsd
IEC99001067 V1 EN

Figure 305: Restrictions imposed on inverse delays by tMax and tMin

A definite maximum time, tMax, can be used to limit the operate time at low degrees
of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than tMax will not be allowed. In case the
inverse delay is longer than tMax, OEXPVPH trips after tMax seconds.

601
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

A definite minimum time, tMin, can be used to limit the operate time at high degrees
of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than tMin, OEXPVPH function
trips after tMin seconds. The inverse delay law is not valid for values exceeding
Mmax. The delay will be tMin, irrespective of the overexcitation level, when values
exceed Mmax (that is, M>V/Hz>).

Time (s) IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES

1000

100

k = 60

k = 20

k = 10
10 k=9
k=8
k=7
k=6
k=5
k=4
k=3

k=2

k=1
1
1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40

OVEREXCITATION IN % (M-Emaxcont)*100)

en01000373.vsd

IEC01000373 V1 EN

Figure 306: Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation

The critical value of excitation M is determined indirectly via OEXPVPH setting V/

Hz>>. V/Hz>> can be thought of as a no-load voltage at rated frequency, where the
inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, tMin. If, for example, V/
Hz>> = 140 %, then M is according to equation 149.

(V Hz>> ) / f
M= = 1.40
Ur/fr
IECEQUATION2286 V1 EN (Equation 149)

602
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In this
case the interval between M = V/Hz>, and M = Mmax is automatically divided into
five equal subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5 and t6) as shown in
figure 307. These times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5 => t6.

delay in s

tMax

under- tMin
excitation Overexcitation M-Emaxcont
0 Mmax - Emaxcont Excitation M

Emaxcont Mmax
99001068.vsd
IEC99001068 V1 EN

Figure 307: An example of a Tailor-Made delay characteristic

Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by linear
interpolation.

Should it happen that tMax be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the actual
delay would be tMax. Above Mmax, the delay can only be tMin.

9.4.7.3 Cooling

Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH is basically a thermal protection; therefore a

cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied.
Parameter Setting tool is an OEXPVPH setting, with a default time constant tCooling
of 20 minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their previous
normal values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is assumed to be
reached not before approximately 5 times tCooling minutes. If an overexcitation
condition would return before that, the time to trip will be shorter than it would be
otherwise.

9.4.7.4 Overexcitation protection function measurands

A monitored data value, TMTOTRIP, is available on the local HMI and in PCM600.
This value is an estimation of the remaining time to trip (in seconds), if the
overexcitation remained on the level it had when the estimation was done. This
information can be useful during small or moderate overexcitation situations.

If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is tMax, then the estimation of the
remaining time to trip is done against tMax.

The relative excitation M, shown on the local HMI and in PCM600 has a monitored
data value VPERHZ and is calculated from the expression:

603
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

E f
M ( p.u.) =
Ur fr
IECEQUATION2299 V1 EN (Equation 150)

If VPERHZ value is less than setting V/Hz> (in %), the power transformer is
underexcited. If VPERHZ is equal to V/Hz> (in %), the excitation is exactly equal to
the power transformer continuous capability. If VPERHZ is higher than V/Hz>, the
protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if VPERHZ = 1.100, while
V/Hz> = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum continuous
excitation limit.

The monitored data value THERMSTA shows the thermal status of the protected
power transformer iron core. THERMSTA gives the thermal status in % of the trip
value which corresponds to 100%. THERMSTA should reach 100% at the same time,
as TMTOTRIP reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then for some
reason not switched off, THERMSTA shall go over 100%.

If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by tMax, and/or tMin, then
the Thermal status will generally not reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP
reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the very long
delay is limited by tMax, then the OEXPVPH TRIP output signal will be set to 1 before
the Thermal status reaches 100%.

9.4.7.5 Overexcitation alarm

A separate step, AlarmLevel, is provided for alarming purpose. It is normally set 2%

lower than (V/Hz>) and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the operator
an early warning.

604
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

9.4.7.6 Logic diagram

BLOCK
AlarmLevel
tAlarm ALARM
&
t

M>V/Hz>
TRIP
&
V/Hz>
U3P Calculation
Ei k
M
of internal M=
I3P induced (Ei / f) IEEE law &
voltage Ei (Ur / fr) tMax 1
M t
Tailor-made law
M>V/Hz>>
tMin
Xleak
t
V/Hz>>

M = relative V/Hz as service value

IEC05000162-3-en.vsd
IEC05000162 V3 EN

Figure 308: A simplified logic diagram of the Overexcitation protection

OEXPVPH

Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are
calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and
frequency are separately checked against their respective limit values.

9.4.8 Technical data

Table 355: OEXPVPH technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start (100180)% of (UBase/frated) 0.5% of U

Operate value, alarm (50120)% of start level 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate value, high level (100200)% of (UBase/frated) 0.5% of U

Curve type IEEE or customer defined 5.0 % or 45 ms,

whichever is greater
(0.18 k )
IEEE : t =
( M - 1) 2

EQUATION1319 V1 EN (Equation 151)

where M = (E/f)/(Ur/fr)
Minimum time delay for inverse (0.00060.000) s 1.0% or 45 ms,
function whichever is greater
Maximum time delay for inverse (0.009000.00) s 1.0% or 45 ms,
function whichever is greater
Alarm time delay (0.009000.00) 1.0% or 45 ms,
whichever is greater

605
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

9.5 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV

9.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV - 60

9.5.2 Functionality
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages from
two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one
trip step.

9.5.3 Function block

VDCPTOV
U3P1* TRIP
U3P2* START
BLOCK ALARM
U1LOW
U2LOW
UL1DIFF
UL2DIFF
UL3DIFF

IEC06000528-2-en.vsd
IEC06000528 V2 EN

Figure 309: VDCPTOV function block

9.5.4 Signals
Table 356: VDCPTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P1 GROUP - Bus voltage
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Capacitor voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 357: VDCPTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Voltage differential protection operated
START BOOLEAN Start of voltage differential protection
ALARM BOOLEAN Voltage differential protection alarm
U1LOW BOOLEAN Loss of U1 voltage
Table continues on next page

606
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

Name Type Description

U2LOW BOOLEAN Loss of U2 voltage
UL1DIFF REAL Differential Voltage phase L1
UL2DIFF REAL Differential Voltage phase L2
UL3DIFF REAL Differential Voltage phase L3

9.5.5 Settings
Table 358: VDCPTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
BlkDiffAtULow No - - Yes Block operation at low voltage
Yes
UDTrip 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 5.0 Operate level, in % of UBase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for voltage differential operate,
in seconds
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for voltage differential reset, in
seconds
UDAlarm 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 2.0 Alarm level, in % of UBase
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Time delay for voltage differential alarm,
in seconds
U1Low 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of UBase
U2Low 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of UBase
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time for undervoltage block

Table 359: VDCPTOV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
RFL1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L1
U2L1*RFL1=U1L1
RFL2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L2
U2L2*RFL2=U1L2
RFL3 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L3
U2L3*RFL3=U1L3

Table 360: VDCPTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

607
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

9.5.6 Monitored data

Table 361: VDCPTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1DIFF REAL - kV Differential Voltage
phase L1
UL2DIFF REAL - kV Differential Voltage
phase L2
UL3DIFF REAL - kV Differential Voltage
phase L3

9.5.7 Operation principle

The Voltage differential protection function VDCPTOV (60) is based on comparison
of the amplitudes of the two voltages connected in each phase. Possible differences
between the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive voltage transformers can be
compensated for with a ratio correction factors RFLx. The voltage difference is
evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level UDAlarm or trip level UDATrip signals for
alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given after definite time delay tAlarm
respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage supplies are also supervised with
undervoltage settings U1Low and U2Low. The outputs for loss of voltage U1LOW
resp U2LOW will be activated. The U1 voltage is supervised for loss of individual
phases whereas the U2 voltage is supervised for loss of all three phases.

Loss of all U1 or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This
blocking can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow = No.

VDCPTOV function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary
BLOCK input. It can, for example, be activated from Fuse failure supervision function
FUFSPVC.

To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as service

value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve full balance
in normal service.

The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 310.

608
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

UDTripL1>
AND

UDTripL2> O tReset tTrip

AND
R t t
AND TRIP

UDTripL3>
AND
AND START

UDAlarmL1>
AND

UDAlarmL2> O tAlarm
AND
R t AND ALARM

UDAlarmL3>
AND

U1<L1
tAlarm
U1<L2 AND t U1LOW
AND

U1<L3 AND

OR
BlkDiffAtULow

U2<L1
t1
U2<L2 AND t U2LOW
AND

U2<L3

BLOCK

en06000382-2.vsd

IEC06000382 V3 EN

Figure 310: Principle logic for Voltage differential function VDCPTOV

9.5.8 Technical data

Table 362: VDCPTOV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage difference for alarm and (2.0100.0) % of UBase 0.5% of Ur
trip
Under voltage level (1.0100.0) % of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Independent time delay for (0.00060.000)s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is

voltage differential alarm at 0.8 to greater
1.2 x UDAlarm
Independent time delay for (0.00060.000)s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
voltage differential trip at 0.8 to greater
1.2 x UDTrip
Independent time delay for (0.00060.000)s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
voltage differential reset at 1.2 to greater
0.8 x UDTrip

609
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

9.6 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

9.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV - 27

9.6.2 Functionality
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is suitable for use in networks with an automatic
system restoration function. LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip command to the
circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time longer than
the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.

The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC.

9.6.3 Function block

LOVPTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
CBOPEN
VTSU

IEC07000039-2-en.vsd
IEC07000039 V2 EN

Figure 311: LOVPTUV function block

9.6.4 Signals
Table 363: LOVPTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the all outputs
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open
VTSU BOOLEAN 0 Block from voltage circuit supervision

Table 364: LOVPTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal

610
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

9.6.5 Settings
Table 365: LOVPTUV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
UPE 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate voltage in % of base voltage
UBase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Operate time delay

Table 366: LOVPTUV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tPulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Duration of TRIP pulse
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to block when all 3ph voltages
are not low
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay for enable the function after
restoration

Table 367: LOVPTUV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

9.6.6 Operation principle

The operation of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is based on line voltage
measurement. LOVPTUV is provided with a logic, which automatically recognizes if
the line was restored for at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three
phases are required to be low before the output TRIP is activated. The START output
signal indicates start.

Additionally, LOVPTUV is automatically blocked if only one or two phase voltages

have been detected low for more than tBlock.

LOVPTUV operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at least
tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open circuit
breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the function
block.

Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a length
set by setting tPulse.

The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse-failure function (BLKU input)

and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated circuit
breaker.

611
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a
block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal
functions. LOVPTUV is also blocked when the IED is in TEST status and the function
has been blocked from the HMI test menu. (Blocked=Yes).

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
&
Blocked = Yes

START
BLOCK >1
Function Enable tTrip tPulse TRIP
STUL1N & t

STUL2N &
only 1 or 2 phases are low for
Latched at least 10 s (not three)
STUL3N Enable
&

tBlock
>1 t

CBOPEN Reset Enable

>1
&
VTSU
tRestore
>1 Set Enable
t
>1
Line restored for
at least 3 s

IEC07000089_2_en.vsd

IEC07000089 V2 EN

Figure 312: Simplified diagram of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

612
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

9.6.7 Technical data

Table 368: LOVPTUV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (1100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Pulse timer when disconnecting (0.05060.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever is

all three phases greater
Time delay for enabling the (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
functions after restoration greater
Operate time delay when (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
disconnecting all three phases greater
Time delay to block when all three (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
phase voltages are not low greater

9.7 Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC

9.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device
number
Radial feeder PAPGAPC U< 27
protection

9.7.2 Functionality
The PAPGAPC function is used to provide protection of radial feeders having passive
loads or weak end in-feed sources. It is possible to achieve fast tripping using
communication system with remote end or delayed tripping not requiring
communication or upon communication system failure. For fast tripping, scheme
communication is required. Delayed tripping does not require scheme
communication.

The PAPGAPC function performs phase selection using measured voltages. Each
phase voltage is compared to the opposite phase-phase voltage. A phase is deemed to
have a fault if its phase voltage drops below a settable percentage of the opposite
phase-phase voltage. The phase - phase voltages include memory. This memory
function has a settable time constant.

The voltage-based phase selection is used for both fast and delayed tripping. To
achieve fast tripping, scheme communication is required. Delayed tripping does not
require scheme communication. It is possible to permit delayed tripping only upon
failure of the communications channel by blocking the delayed tripping logic with a
communications channel healthy input signal.

On receipt of the communications signal, phase selective outputs for fast tripping are
set based on the phase(s) in which the phase selection function has operated.

613
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

For delayed tripping, single pole and three pole delays are separately and
independently settable. Furthermore, it is possible to enable or disable single pole and
three pole delayed tripping. For single phase faults, it is possible to include a residual
current check in the tripping logic. Three pole tripping is always selected for phase
selection on more than one phase. Three pole tripping will also occur if the residual
current exceeds the set level during fuse failure for a time longer than the three pole
trip delay time.

9.7.3 Function block

PAPGAPC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIN
BLOCK TRL1
BLKTR TRL2
BLKST TRL3
BLKDLFLT ARST
FUSEFAIL ARST3PH
COMOK ARSTL1
CR ARSTL2
CBCLD ARSTL3
POLEDISC

IEC14000004-1-en.vsd
IEC14000004 V1 EN

Figure 313: PAPGAPC function block

9.7.4 Signals
Table 369: PAPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group parameter for current signals
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group parameter for voltage signals
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip
BLKST BOOLEAN 0 Block Start
BLKDLFLT BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the delayed fault clear functionality
FUSEFAIL BOOLEAN 0 Block from fuse failure function
COMOK BOOLEAN 0 Telecommunication link healthy
CR BOOLEAN 0 Received communication signal
CBCLD BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker is closed
POLEDISC BOOLEAN 0 The position of CB poles differs (pole discordance)

614
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

Table 370: PAPGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip
TRIN BOOLEAN Trip caused by residual current detection
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip phase L3
ARST BOOLEAN Start signal to the autorecloser function
ARST3PH BOOLEAN Three phase reclosing to be performed
ARSTL1 BOOLEAN Autoreclosing start phase L1
ARSTL2 BOOLEAN Autoreclosing start phase L2
ARSTL3 BOOLEAN Autoreclosing start phase L3

9.7.5 Settings
Table 371: PAPGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
UPhSel< 30 - 100 % 1 60 Faulted phase voltage in % of
quadrilateral phase-phase voltage divided
by sqrt (3)
Tau 1 - 60 sec 1 5 Time constant for reference voltage
FastOperation Off - - Off Enable fast fault clearing function
On
t3Ph 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for three phase operation
IN> 10 - 150 %IB 1 50 Residual current detection level in % of
IBase
ResCurrCheck Off - - Off Enable residual current check for delayed
On operation at single-phase faults
Del1PhOp 3Ph - - 3Ph Enable delayed operation for single phase
1Ph faults
t1Ph 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for single phase operation
Del3PhOp Off - - Off Enable delayed 3-phase operation
On
ResCurrOper Off - - Off Enabling signal for residual current
On operation
tResCurr 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay for residual current indication

Table 372: PAPGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

615
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

9.7.6 Monitored data

Table 373: PAPGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage DFT amplitude in
Phase1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage DFT amplitude in
Phase2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage DFT amplitude in
Phase3
IN REAL - A Residual current DFT
amplitude

9.7.7 Principle of operation

9.7.7.1 Faulted phase selection

The faulted phase selection is based on voltage measurement. Each phase voltage
magnitude (rms) is compared with the quadrature phase phase voltage, which is
obtained by passing full wave rectified signal through an exponential filter.

The filter updates the output if the output magnitude is lower than input voltage.
However, when the input voltage is lower than output magnitude, the output decreases
with a settable time constant of Tau. The desired filter response is depicted in
Figure314.

Time constant=Tau Output from

filter
Rectified
input signal

en01000140.vsd
IEC14000006 V2 EN

Figure 314: Desired filter response

Phase Lx is deemed to have faulted if the phase Lx voltage is lower than filtered
quadrature phase phase voltage times UPhSel< set value. The phase selection for
remaining phases can be performed in the similar way. The logic diagram for faulted
phase selection is shown in Figure 315.

616
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

Z-1

U3P* ABS
MAX

-t
EXP

Tau

a PHSLx
a<b
3 b

UPhSel<

IEC14000007-1-en.vsd
IEC14000007 V1 EN

Figure 315: Simplified logic diagram for faulted phase selection

9.7.7.2 Residual current detection

PAPGAPC (27) detects the presence of residual current if the residual current exceeds
the set IN> value and lasts for a period of 600 ms.

The output TRIN is high after a set time of tResCurr if the setting ResCurrOper is
enabled.

The output TRIN is blocked by enabling either of BLOCK or BLKTR inputs.

I3P* 600 ms
a STIN
a>b t
b
IN> tResCurr
t
TRIN
ResCurrOper &

BLOCK
BLKTR _1
>

IEC14000008-1-en.vsd

IEC14000008 V1 EN

Figure 316: Simplified logic diagram for residual current detection

9.7.7.3 Fast fault clearance

Operation at the remote end of the line with passive loads or weak sources is obtained
as follows. The fault clearing at remote end is initiated by CR signal received from the
other end of the feeder. Fast fault clearing can be enabled by the FastOperation
setting. The function is enabled for 650 ms upon receiving the carrier signal from the

617
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

other end. It generates the start signal STLx depending on the status of the faulty
phase(s). The presence of FUSEFAIL inhibits the operation of fault clearance on
faulty phase(s) and the corresponding logic diagram is depicted in Figure 317. The fast
fault clearance operation is blocked upon failure of the communication channel input
COMOK.

650 ms
CR
&

FUSEFAIL

COMOK
& & STL 1
FastOperation

PHSL1

& STL2
PHSL2

& STL 3
PHSL3

IEC14000009-2-en.vsd

IEC14000009 V2 EN

Figure 317: Simplified logic diagram for fast fault clearance

9.7.7.4 Delayed fault clearance

Delayed fault clearance does not require scheme communication. It is possible to

permit delayed tripping upon the failure of the communication channel input COMOK.

It is possible to select delayed single- and three pole tripping by choosing the
appropriate settings Del1PhOp and Del3PhOp. Furthermore, time delays for single-
and three pole tripping can independently be set by t1Ph and t3Ph.

For single phase faults, ResCurrCheck is included in the tripping logic. It is also
possible to select either single- or three pole tripping for single phase faults occurring
in the system. Three pole tripping is always selected for phase selection of more than
one phase.

In case of a fuse failure condition, that is FUSEFAIL is high, single- and three pole
tripping are inhibited, however, three pole tripping occurs if the residual current
exceeds the set level during fuse failure for a time longer than the three pole trip delay
time of t3Ph.

The inputs BLKDLFLT and COMOK inhibit the delayed operation for faulty phase(s).

618
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

Start signal STLx is enabled as soon as the fault is detected in any phase(s).

COMOK
&
FastOperation
BLKDLFLT &

FUSEFAIL

STIN
1 &
ResCurrCheck

Del1PhOp
t1Ph
STL1
PHSL1 & t &
1
t1Ph
STL2
PHSL2 & t &
1
t1Ph STL3
PHSL3 & t &
1

1 &

&
Del3PhOp

t3Ph
2 & 1 t

&

IEC14000010-2-en.vsd

IEC14000010 V2 EN

Figure 318: Simplified logic diagram for delayed fault clearance

9.7.7.5 Trip and autoreclose logic

The start signals for each phase are generated from both the fast fault clearance and
delayed fault clearance. Upon receiving the start signal STLx in phase(s), the
corresponding phase trip signal TRLx is issued. A general trip signal, TRIP is also
generated.

The single or three phase operation of autorecloser depends on the status of CBCLD
and the existence of pole discrepancy, indicated by the input POLEDISC. If
conditions for reclosing are fulfilled, a start signal ARSTLx is issued for the faulty
phase(s).

A general start signal, ARST is also generated. If more than one phase seems to be
detected faulty, three phase autoreclosing signal ARST3PH is issued.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs.

Start output signals ARSTLx, ARST and ARST3PH are blocked by enabling BLKST
input and the activation of the BLKTR input deactivates all trip outputs.

619
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK505308-UEN B
Voltage protection

STL1
TRL1
&

STL2
TRL2
&

STL3
TRL3
&

1 TRIP
&

BLOCK
BLKTR 1

BLKST 1

& ARSTL1
&

& ARSTL2
&

& ARSTL3
&
POLEDISC
100 ms
CBCLD &
t 1
1 ARST
&

1 ARST3PH
&

IEC14000011-2-en.vsd

IEC14000011 V2 EN

Figure 319: Simplified logic diagram for trip and autoreclose logic

9.7.8 Technical data

Table 374: PAPGAPC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Residual current detection (10 - 150)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio >95% at (50 - 150)% of IBase -
Operate time, residual current Min. = 15 ms -
detection at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Independent time delay to (0.000 - 60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
operate, residual current greater
detection at 0 to 2 x Iset

Voltage based phase selection (30 - 100)% of UBase 1.0% of Ur

Reset ratio <115% -

Operate time, voltage based Min. = 15 ms -
phase selection at 1.2 to 0.8 x
Uset Max. = 30 ms

Independent time delay to (0.000 60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is

operate, voltage based phase greater
selection at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset

620
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 10
Frequency protection

Section 10 Frequency protection

10.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF

10.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81

f<

SYMBOL-P V1 EN

10.1.2 Functionality
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of generation in the network.

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF measures frequency with high accuracy, and is

used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup and so
on. Separate definite time delays are provided for operate and restore.

SAPTUF is provided with undervoltage blocking.

The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two
phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about
how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog
inputs/Setting guidelines

10.1.3 Function block

SAPTUF
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP RESTORE
BLKREST BLKDMAGN
FREQ

IEC06000279_2_en.vsd
IEC06000279 V2 EN

Figure 320: SAPTUF function block

621
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK505308-UEN B
Frequency protection

10.1.4 Signals
Table 375: SAPTUF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output

Table 376: SAPTUF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
START BOOLEAN General start signal
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low voltage
amplitude
FREQ REAL Measured frequency

10.1.5 Settings
Table 377: SAPTUF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 Hz 0.01 48.80 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 50.10 Restore frequency value
TimerMode Definite timer - - Definite timer Setting for choosing timer mode
Volt based timer
UNom 50.0 - 150.0 %UB 1.0 100.0 Nominal voltage for voltage based timer in
% of UBase
UMin 50.0 - 150.0 %UB 1.0 90.0 Lower operation limit for voltage based
timer in % of UBase
Exponent 0.0 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 For calculation of the curve form for
voltage based timer
tMax 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Maximum time operation limit for voltage
based timer
tMin 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Minimum time operation limit for voltage
based timer

622
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 10
Frequency protection

Table 378: SAPTUF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

10.1.6 Monitored data

Table 379: SAPTUF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ULevel REAL - kV Level of measured
voltage
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency

10.1.7 Operation principle

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF is used to detect low power system frequency.
SAPTUF can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time
delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied, the time delay will be
longer if the voltage is higher, and the delay will be shorter if the voltage is lower. If
the frequency remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the
chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip
due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage
controlled blocking of the function is available from the preprocessing function, that
is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function,
the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued.

10.1.7.1 Measurement principle

The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously,

and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency function is
dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the
setting MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI preprocessing function, which is described in
the Basic IED Functions chapter and is set as a percentage of a global base voltage
parameter, SAPTUF gets blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage
settings are made in percent of the setting UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase
voltage in kV.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

10.1.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for underfrequency protection SAPTUF can be either a settable
definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay
depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low

623
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK505308-UEN B
Frequency protection

voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the setting tDelay
sets the time delay.

For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings
UNom, UMin, Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to figure 321 and
equation 152. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time delay to
apply.

Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay tDelay. If the START condition, with respect to the measured
frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user
defined reset time, tReset, the START output is reset, after that the defined reset time
has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return
back to the hysteresis area.

On the RESTORE output of SAPTUF a 100ms pulse is issued, after a time delay
corresponding to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency returns to the
level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.

10.1.7.3 Voltage dependent time delay

Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system,
except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to
decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the
voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas
with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced, to
make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At
constant voltage, U, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to
equation 152. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a similar
way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and overvoltage
functions.
Exponent
U - UMin
t= ( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
UNom - UMin
EQUATION1182 V1 EN (Equation 152)

where:
t is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),
U is the measured voltage
Exponent is a setting,
UMin, UNom are voltage settings corresponding to
tMax, tMin are time settings.

The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 321, for:

624
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 10
Frequency protection

UMin = 90%
UNom = 100%
tMax = 1.0 s
tMin = 0.0 s
Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4

1
0
1
Exponenent
TimeDlyOperate [s]

2
3
0.5 4

0
90 95 100

U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd
IEC05000075 V1 EN

Figure 321: Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for underfrequency

protection SAPTUF. The time delay to operate is plotted as a function
of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 respectively.

10.1.7.4 Blocking

It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF partially or completely, by

binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function both the START and the TRIP outputs are blocked.

10.1.7.5 Design

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the

positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The time
integrator can operate either due to a definite delay time or to the special voltage
dependent delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of

625
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK505308-UEN B
Frequency protection

RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore. The design
of underfrequency protection SAPTUF is schematically described in figure 322.

Block
BLOCK BLKDMAGN
OR
Comparator
MinValFreqMeas

Voltage Time integrator

Start
TimerOperation Mode & START
Selector START
Frequency Comparator Trip
f < StartFrequency Output
tDelay TRIP Logic

tReset TRIP

Comparator RESTORE
tRestore
f > RestoreFreq

IEC05000726-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000726 V2 EN

Figure 322: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF

10.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF

10.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81

f>

SYMBOL-O V1 EN

626
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 10
Frequency protection

10.2.2 Functionality
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.

Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power
network. Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause
over frequency.

SAPTOF measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used mainly for generation
shedding and remedial action schemes. It is also used as a frequency stage initiating
load restoring. A definite time delay is provided for operate.

SAPTOF is provided with an undervoltage blocking.

The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two
phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about
how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog
inputs/Setting guidelines

10.2.3 Function block

SAPTOF
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
FREQ

IEC06000280_2_en.vsd
IEC06000280 V2 EN

Figure 323: SAPTOF function block

10.2.4 Signals
Table 380: SAPTOF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output

Table 381: SAPTOF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
START BOOLEAN General start signal
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low amplitude
FREQ REAL Measured frequency

627
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK505308-UEN B
Frequency protection

10.2.5 Settings
Table 382: SAPTOF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFrequency 35.00 - 90.00 Hz 0.01 51.20 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Operate time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset

Table 383: SAPTOF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

10.2.6 Monitored data

Table 384: SAPTOF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ULevel REAL - kV Level of measured
voltage
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency

10.2.7 Operation principle

Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is used to detect high power system frequency.
SAPTOF has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set
value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding
TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency
measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function
is available from the preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set
blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no START
or TRIP signal is issued.

10.2.7.1 Measurement principle

The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured

continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. Overfrequency
protection SAPTOF is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude
decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI preprocessing function,
which is discussed in the Basic IED Functions chapter and is set as a percentage of a
global base voltage parameter UBase, SAPTOF is blocked and the output
BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the UBase, which

628
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 10
Frequency protection

should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of the output

START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

10.2.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is a settable definite time
delay, specified by the setting tDelay.

TRIP signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay, tReset. If the START condition, with respect to the measured
frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user
defined reset time, tReset, the START output is reset, after that the defined reset time
has elapsed. It is to be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return
back to the hysteresis area.

The total time delay consists of the set value for time delay plus
minimum operate time of the start function (80 - 90 ms).

10.2.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block overfrequency protection SAPTOF partially or completely, by

binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function both the START and the TRIP outputs are blocked.

10.2.7.4 Design

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the

positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the
power system. The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design of
overfrequency protection SAPTOF is schematically described in figure 324.

629
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK505308-UEN B
Frequency protection

BLOCK
BLKTRIP BLOCK
OR BLKDMAGN
Comparator
MinValFreqMeas

Start
&
Trip
Voltage Time integrator Output
Logic
Definite Time Delay START START
Frequency Comparator
f > StartFrequency tDelay
TRIP
tReset
TRIP

IEC05000735-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000735 V2 EN

Figure 324: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTOF

10.2.8 Technical data

Table 385: SAPTOF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function (35.00-90.00) Hz 2.0 mHz
at symmetrical three-phase
voltage
Operate time, start at fset - Min. = 80 ms -
fn = 50Hz
0.02 Hz to fset + 0.02 Hz Max. = 95 ms
Min. = 65 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Max. = 80 ms
Reset time, start at fset + 0.02 Min. = 15 ms -
Hz to fset - 0.02 Hz Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, definite time (0.000-60.000)s 0.2% 100 ms

function at fset -0.02 Hz to fset whichever is greater
+ 0.02 Hz
Reset time, definite time (0.000-60.000)s 0.2% 120 ms,
function at fset + 0.02 Hz to fset whichever is greater
- 0.02 Hz

630
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 10
Frequency protection

10.3 Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC

10.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC 81

df/dt >
<

SYMBOL-N V1 EN

10.3.2 Functionality
The rate-of-change frequency protection function SAPFRC gives an early indication
of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC measures frequency with high
accuracy, and can be used for generation shedding, load shedding and remedial action
schemes. SAPFRC can discriminate between a positive or negative change of
frequency. A definite time delay is provided for operate.

SAPFRC is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation is based on

positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phase-
neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog inputs,
refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/Setting guidelines.

10.3.3 Function block

SAPFRC
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP RESTORE
BLKREST BLKDMAGN

IEC06000281-2-en.vsd
IEC06000281 V2 EN

Figure 325: SAPFRC function block

10.3.4 Signals
Table 386: SAPFRC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output

631
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK505308-UEN B
Frequency protection

Table 387: SAPFRC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Operate/trip signal for frequency gradient
START BOOLEAN Start/pick-up signal for frequency gradient
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low amplitude

10.3.5 Settings
Table 388: SAPFRC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFreqGrad -10.00 - 10.00 Hz/s 0.01 0.50 Frequency gradient start value, the sign
defines direction
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay in positive / negative
frequency gradient mode
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore frequency value
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset

10.3.6 Monitored data

Table 389: SAPFRC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STARTDUR REAL - % Start duration in percents
of the total operation time

10.3.7 Operation principle

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC is used to detect fast power system
frequency changes at an early stage. SAPFRC has a settable definite time delay. If the
rate-of-change of frequency remains below the set value, for negative rate-of-change,
for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP signal is issued. If the rate-
of-change of frequency remains above the set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a
time period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an
unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude a
voltage controlled blocking of the function is available from the preprocessing
function. If the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing
function the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued. If the
frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.

632
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 10
Frequency protection

10.3.7.1 Measurement principle

The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured

continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFreqGrad. Rate-of-change
frequency protection SAPFRC is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the
voltage magnitude decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing
function, which is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter, SAPFRC is
blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting
StartFreqGrad, controls if SAPFRC reacts on a positive or on a negative change in
frequency. If SAPFRC is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting
StartFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, then
a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a
value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of StartFreqGrad, sets
SAPFRC to START and TRIP for frequency increases.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

10.3.7.2 Time delay

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC has a settable definite time delay,

tTrip. .

Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues
for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the START condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a
user defined reset time, tReset, the START output is reset, after that the defined reset
time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the
START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only
return back into the hysteresis area.

The RESTORE output of SAPFRC is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of
tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to
RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the
restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality
is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled
if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the restore period, defined by
the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.

10.3.7.3 Blocking

Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) can be partially or totally blocked,

by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output

633
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK505308-UEN B
Frequency protection

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function, both the START and the TRIP outputs are blocked.

10.3.7.4 Design

Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) measuring element continuously

measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting
StartFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power
system switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay time.
When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE
output is issued after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued.
The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used
for raising or lowering frequency conditions. The design of SAPFRC is schematically
described in figure 326.

BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKRESET BLOCK
OR

Voltage Comparator BLKDMAGN

MinValFreqMeas

Start
Rate-of-Change Time integrator &
Comparator
of Frequency Trip
If
Definite Time Delay Output
[StartFreqGrad<0 START START
Logic
AND
tDelay
df/dt < StartFreqGrad]
OR
tReset
[StartFreqGrad>0
AND
TRIP
df/dt > StartFreqGrad]
Then
START

Frequency Comparator RESTORE

tRestore
f > RestoreFreq

IEC05000835-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000835 V2 EN

Figure 326: Simplified logic diagram for SAPFRC

634
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 10
Frequency protection

10.3.8 Technical data

Table 390: SAPFRC Technical data
Function
Operate value, start function
Operate value, restore
enable frequency
Definite restore time delay
Definite time delay for
frequency gradient trip
Definite reset time delay
Range or value Accuracy
(-10.00-10.00) Hz/s 10.0 mHz/s
(45.00-65.00) Hz 2.0 mHz
(0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 100 ms whichever is
greater
(0.200-60.000) s 0.2% or 120 ms whichever is
greater
(0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250 ms whichever is
greater

635
Technical manual
636
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Section 11 Multipurpose protection

11.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC

11.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 2(I>/U<) -

11.1.2 Functionality
The General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) can be utilized as a negative
sequence current protection detecting unsymmetrical conditions such as open phase
or unsymmetrical faults.

CVGAPC can also be used to improve phase selection for high resistive earth faults,
outside the distance protection reach, for the transmission line. Three functions are
used, which measures the neutral current and each of the three phase voltages. This
will give an independence from load currents and this phase selection will be used in
conjunction with the detection of the earth fault from the directional earth fault
protection function.

637
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK505308-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

11.1.3 Function block

CVGAPC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TROC1
BLOCK TROC2
BLKOC1 TRUC1
BLKOC1TR TRUC2
ENMLTOC1 TROV1
BLKOC2 TROV2
BLKOC2TR TRUV1
ENMLTOC2 TRUV2
BLKUC1 START
BLKUC1TR STOC1
BLKUC2 STOC2
BLKUC2TR STUC1
BLKOV1 STUC2
BLKOV1TR STOV1
BLKOV2 STOV2
BLKOV2TR STUV1
BLKUV1 STUV2
BLKUV1TR BLK2ND
BLKUV2 DIROC1
BLKUV2TR DIROC2
UDIRLOW
CURRENT
ICOSFI
VOLTAGE
UIANGLE

IEC05000372-2-en.vsd
IEC05000372 V2 EN

Figure 327: CVGAPC function block

11.1.4 Signals
Table 391: CVGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC1
BLKOC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
OC1
BLKOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC2
BLKOC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
OC2
BLKUC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC1
BLKUC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC1
BLKUC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC2
BLKUC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC2
BLKOV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV1
Table continues on next page

638
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKOV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV1
BLKOV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV2
BLKOV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV2
BLKUV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV1
BLKUV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV1
BLKUV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV2
BLKUV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV2

Table 392: CVGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TROC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1
TROC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2
TRUC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1
TRUC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2
TROV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1
TROV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2
TRUV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1
TRUV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STOC1 BOOLEAN Start signal from overcurrent function OC1
STOC2 BOOLEAN Start signal from overcurrent function OC2
STUC1 BOOLEAN Start signal from undercurrent function UC1
STUC2 BOOLEAN Start signal from undercurrent function UC2
STOV1 BOOLEAN Start signal from overvoltage function OV1
STOV2 BOOLEAN Start signal from overvoltage function OV2
STUV1 BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function UV1
STUV2 BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function UV2
BLK2ND BOOLEAN Block from second harmonic detection
DIROC1 INTEGER Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse)
DIROC2 INTEGER Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse)
UDIRLOW BOOLEAN Low voltage for directional polarization
CURRENT REAL Measured current value
ICOSFI REAL Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL Angle between voltage and current

639
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK505308-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

11.1.5 Settings
Table 393: CVGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CurrentInput phase1 - - MaxPh Select current signal which will be
phase2 measured inside function
phase3
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
VoltageInput phase1 - - MaxPh Select voltage signal which will be
phase2 measured inside function
phase3
PosSeq
-NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
OperHarmRestr Off - - Off Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Off /
On On
l_2nd/l_fund 10.0 - 50.0 % 1.0 20.0 Ratio of second to fundamental current
harmonic in %
BlkLevel2nd 10 - 5000 %IB 1 5000 Harm analyse disabled above this current
level in % of fundamental current
EnRestrainCurr Off - - Off Enable current restrain function On / Off
On
RestrCurrInput PosSeq - - PosSeq Select current signal which will be used for
NegSeq curr restrain
3*ZeroSeq
Max
RestrCurrCoeff 0.00 - 5.00 - 0.01 0.00 Restraining current coefficient
RCADir -180 - 180 Deg 1 -75 Relay Characteristic Angle
ROADir 1 - 90 Deg 1 75 Relay Operate Angle
LowVolt_VM 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Below this level in % of UBase setting
ActLowVolt takes over
Operation_OC1 Off - - Off Operation OC1 Off / On
On
Table continues on next page

640
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

StartCurr_OC1 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC1 in % of
IBase
CurveType_OC1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for OC1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of OC1
k_OC1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OC1
IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in % of
IBase
tMin_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves for OC1
VCntrlMode_OC1 Voltage control - - Off Control mode for voltage controlled OC1
Off function
VDepMode_OC1 Step - - Step Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact_OC1 0.02 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC1 is
U dependent
ULowLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of
UBase
UHighLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of
UBase
HarmRestr_OC1 Off - - Off Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
DirMode_OC1 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,
Forward reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC1 I&U - - I&U Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for
IcosPhi&U OC1
ActLowVolt1_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1
Block (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Memory
Operation_OC2 Off - - Off Operation OC2 Off / On
On
StartCurr_OC2 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC2 in % of
IBase
Table continues on next page

641
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK505308-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurveType_OC2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for OC2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of OC2
k_OC2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OC2
IMin2 1 - 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step2 in % of
IBase
tMin_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves for OC2
VCntrlMode_OC2 Voltage control - - Off Control mode for voltage controlled OC2
Off function
VDepMode_OC2 Step - - Step Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact_OC2 0.02 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC2 is
U dependent
ULowLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of
UBase
UHighLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of
UBase
HarmRestr_OC2 Off - - Off Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
DirMode_OC2 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,
Forward reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC2 I&U - - I&U Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for
IcosPhi&U OC2
ActLowVolt2_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2
Block (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Memory
Operation_UC1 Off - - Off Operation UC1 Off / On
On
EnBlkLowI_UC1 Off - - Off Enable internal low current level blocking
On for UC1
BlkLowCurr_UC1 0 - 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for UC1
in % of IBase
StartCurr_UC1 2.0 - 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in %
of IBase
Table continues on next page

642
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of UC1
tResetDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve UC1
HarmRestr_UC1 Off - - Off Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
Operation_UC2 Off - - Off Operation UC2 Off / On
On
EnBlkLowI_UC2 Off - - Off Enable internal low current level blocking
On for UC2
BlkLowCurr_UC2 0 - 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for UC2
in % of IBase
StartCurr_UC2 2.0 - 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in %
of IBase
tDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of UC2
HarmRestr_UC2 Off - - Off Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
Operation_OV1 Off - - Off Operation OV1 Off / On
On
StartVolt_OV1 2.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of
UBase
CurveType_OV1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for OV1
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite time
use of OV1
tMin_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for
OV1
k_OV1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OV1
Operation_OV2 Off - - Off Operation OV2 Off / On
On
StartVolt_OV2 2.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of
UBase
CurveType_OV2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for OV2
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite time
use of OV2
tMin_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for
OV2
k_OV2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OV2
Operation_UV1 Off - - Off Operation UV1 Off / On
On
StartVolt_UV1 2.0 - 150.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in %
of UBase
Table continues on next page

643
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK505308-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurveType_UV1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for UV1
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite time
use of UV1
tMin_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for
UV1
k_UV1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for UV1
EnBlkLowV_UV1 Off - - On Enable internal low voltage level blocking
On for UV1
BlkLowVolt_UV1 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1
in % of UBase
Operation_UV2 Off - - Off Operation UV2 Off / On
On
StartVolt_UV2 2.0 - 150.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in %
of UBase
CurveType_UV2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for UV2
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite time
use of UV2
tMin_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for
UV2
k_UV2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for UV2
EnBlkLowV_UV2 Off - - On Enable internal low voltage level blocking
On for UV2
BlkLowVolt_UV2 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV2
in % of UBase

Table 394: CVGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CurrMult_OC1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve OC1
P_OC1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OC1
A_OC1 0.000 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OC1
B_OC1 0.000 - 99.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OC1
Table continues on next page

644
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

C_OC1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for OC1
PR_OC1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for OC1
TR_OC1 0.005 - 600.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for OC1
CR_OC1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for OC1
CurrMult_OC2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for OC2
ResCrvType_OC2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC2
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve OC2
P_OC2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OC2
A_OC2 0.000 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OC2
B_OC2 0.000 - 99.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OC2
C_OC2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for OC2
PR_OC2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for OC2
TR_OC2 0.005 - 600.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for OC2
CR_OC2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for OC2
tResetDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve UC2
ResCrvType_OV1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV1
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of OV1
tResetIDMT_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for OV1
A_OV1 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OV1
B_OV1 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OV1
C_OV1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for OV1
D_OV1 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for OV1
P_OV1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OV1
Table continues on next page

645
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK505308-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ResCrvType_OV2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of OV2
tResetIDMT_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for OV2
A_OV2 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OV2
B_OV2 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OV2
C_OV2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for OV2
D_OV2 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for OV2
P_OV2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OV2
ResCrvType_UV1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV1
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of UV1
tResetIDMT_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for UV1
A_UV1 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for UV1
B_UV1 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for UV1
C_UV1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for UV1
D_UV1 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for UV1
P_UV1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for UV1
ResCrvType_UV2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of UV2
tResetIDMT_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for UV2
A_UV2 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for UV2
B_UV2 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for UV2
C_UV2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for UV2
D_UV2 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve for UV2
P_UV2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for UV2

646
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Table 395: CVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

11.1.6 Monitored data

Table 396: CVGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DIROC1 INTEGER 1=Forward - Directional mode of OC1
0=Non- (nondir, forward,reverse)
directional
2=Reverse
DIROC2 INTEGER 1=Forward - Directional mode of OC2
0=Non- (nondir, forward,reverse)
directional
2=Reverse
CURRENT REAL - A Measured current value
ICOSFI REAL - A Measured current
multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL - kV Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL - deg Angle between voltage
and current

11.1.7 Operation principle

11.1.7.1 Measured quantities within CVGAPC

General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function is always connected to

three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will
always measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in
the setting tool.

The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 397.
Table 397: Current selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the
parameter Comment
CurrentInput
1 Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 current phasor
2 Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 current phasor
3 Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 current phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
current phasor
5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence
current phasor
Table continues on next page

647
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK505308-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Set value for the

parameter Comment
CurrentInput
6 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
current phasor multiplied by factor 3
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which
is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between
the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current
phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to
0 all the time
10 Phase1-Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and phase
L2 current phasor (IL1-IL2)

11 Phase2-Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and phase
L3 current phasor (IL2-IL3)

12 Phase3-Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L3 current phasor and phase
L1 current phasor ( IL3-IL1)

13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which
is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between
the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current
phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the
time

The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 398:
Table 398: Voltage selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the
parameter Comment
VoltageInput
1 Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor
2 Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 voltage phasor
3 Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 voltage phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
voltage phasor
5 -NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence
voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180
in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used.
6 -3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be
intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the
directional feature when used.
Table continues on next page

648
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Set value for the

parameter Comment
VoltageInput
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which
is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between
the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage
phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to
0 all the time
10 Phase1-Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L1 voltage phasor and phase
L2 voltage phasor (UL1-UL2)

11 Phase2-Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L2 voltage phasor and phase
L3 voltage phasor (UL2-UL3)

12 Phase3-Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L3 voltage phasor and phase
L1 voltage phasor ( UL3-UL1)

13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which
is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between
the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage
phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the
time

It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 398 is always applicable
regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be
connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2 & UL3 or three
phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information about actual VT
connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will
then take automatic care about it.

The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 399 for built-in current
restraint feature:
Table 399: Restraint current selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the
parameter RestrCurr Comment
1 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
current phasor
2 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence
current phasor
3 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
current phasor multiplied by factor 3
4 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude

649
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK505308-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

11.1.7.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for
pickup levels of all measuring stages, shall be entered as setting parameters for every
CVGAPC function.

Base current shall be entered as:

1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the
measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 397.
2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by 3
(1.732*Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as
shown in table 397.

Base voltage shall be entered as:

1. rated phase-to-earth voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 398.
2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 398.

11.1.7.3 Built-in overcurrent protection steps

Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity
(see table 397) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will pickup
if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set level.
However depending on other enabled built-in features this overcurrent pickup might
not cause the overcurrent step start signal. Start signal will only come if all of the
enabled built-in features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time.

Second harmonic feature

The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component in
the measured current quantity (see table 397). However it shall be noted that this
feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected:

PosSeq (positive sequence current)

NegSeq (negative sequence current)
UnbalancePh (unbalance phase current)
UnbalancePh-Ph (unbalance ph-ph current)

This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first harmonic
ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.

650
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Directional feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent on the relevant
phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 397) and measured voltage
phasor (see table 398). In protection terminology it means that the General currrent
and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function can be made directional by enabling this
built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step will only operate if the current
flow is in accordance with the set direction (Forward, which means towards the
protected object, or Reverse, which means from the protected object). For this feature
it is of the outmost importance to understand that the measured voltage phasor (see
table 398) and measured current phasor (see table 397) will be used for directional
decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user to select the appropriate
current and voltage signals in order to get a proper directional decision. CVGAPC
function will NOT do this automatically. It will simply use the current and voltage
phasors selected by the end user to check for the directional criteria.

Table 400 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones) for
these two quantities from traditional directional relays.
Table 400: Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Set value for the Set value for the
parameter parameter Comment
CurrentInput VoltageInput
PosSeq PosSeq Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to
-90 depending on the power system voltage level (X/
R ratio)
NegSeq -NegSeq Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to
-90 depending on the power system voltage level (X/
R ratio)
3ZeroSeq -3ZeroSeq Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to -90
depending on the power system earthing (that is,
solidly earthed, earthed via resistor)
Phase1 Phase2-Phase3 Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Phase2 Phase3-Phase1 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase
is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Phase3 Phase1-Phase2 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45

Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional
feature is enabled.

Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & U and IcosPhi&U.
The first principle, referred to as "I & U" in the parameter setting tool, checks that:

the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the
relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 328).

651
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK505308-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

U=-3U0
RCADir

Ipickup ROADir I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000252.vsd
IEC05000252 V1 EN

Figure 328: I & U directional operating principle for CVGAPC function

where:
RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50

The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool, checks
that:

that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle
between the current phasor and the mta line
that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by
the Icos() straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting;
see figure 328).

652
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 11
Multipurpose protection

U=-3U0
RCADir

Ipickup ROADir F I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000253.vsd
IEC05000253 V1 EN

Figure 329: CVGAPC, IcosPhi&U directional operating principle

where:
RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50

Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature
shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the pre-
set value. User can select one of the following three options:

Non-directional (operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage)

Block (operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage)
Memory (memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)

It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms.
After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during
memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage
goes above set voltage memory limit.

Voltage restraint/control feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a measured
voltage quantity (see table 398). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent
step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the
measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available:

Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)

653
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK505308-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

ULowLimit_OC1 UHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324.vsd
IEC05000324 V1 EN

Figure 330: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Step)

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

UHighLimit_OC1 Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000323.vsd
IEC05000323 V1 EN

Figure 331: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with
magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will as
well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves
(overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage conditions).

654
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Current restraint feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a restraining
current quantity (see table 399). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent
step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the
restraining current.

IMeasured
ea ain
ar tr
te es
e ra ff *Ir
Op oe
s trC
e
I>R
IsetHigh

IsetLow

atan(RestrCoeff)

Restraint
en05000255.vsd

IEC05000255 V1 EN

Figure 332: Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude

This feature will simply prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current
magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for
calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve
operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude.

When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay
in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user
setting.

11.1.7.4 Built-in undercurrent protection steps

Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the
magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 397) with the set pickup level.
The undercurrent step will pickup and set its start signal to one if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The start signal will start
definite time delay with set time delay. If the start signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the setting.

655
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK505308-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

11.1.7.5 Built-in overvoltage protection steps

Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 398) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level.

The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user
setting.

11.1.7.6 Built-in undervoltage protection steps

Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 398) with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level.

The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user
setting.

11.1.7.7 Logic diagram

The simplified internal logics, for CVGAPC function are shown in the following
figures.

656
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 11
Multipurpose protection

IED
ADM CVGAPC function

Current and voltage selection

settings

Phasor calculation of
scaling with CT ratio

individual currents
A/D conversion
Selection of which current Selected current
and voltage shall be given to

Phasors &
samples
the built-in protection Selected voltage
elements

Restraint current selection

Selected restraint current

A/D conversion scaling

Selection of restraint current

Phasor calculation of
individual voltages
with CT ratio

Phasors &
samples

IEC05000169_2_en.vsd

IEC05000169 V2 EN

Figure 333: Treatment of measured currents and voltages within IED for CVGAPC function

Figure 333 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for
multipurpose protection function

The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection
function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and
kilovolts.

1. Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase

current and one three-phase voltage input.
2. Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one three-
phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
3. Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase
voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.

The multipurpose protection function:

1. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 397) for
internally measured current.
2. Selects one voltage from the three-phase input system (see table 398) for
internally measured voltage.
3. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 399) for
internally measured restraint current.

657
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK505308-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

CURRENT

UC1
nd TRUC1
2 Harmonic
Selected current restraint
STUC2
UC2
TRUC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint

STOC1
OC1 TROC1

2nd Harmonic BLK2ND

restraint 1
Selected restraint current
Current restraint
DIROC1
Directionality
Voltage control /
restraint

STOC2
OC2 TROC2

2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint 1
UDIRLOW

Directionality DIROC2

Voltage control /
restraint

STOV1
OV1 TROV1

STOV2
OV2 TROV2

STUV1
Selected voltage
UV1 TRUV1

STUV2
UV2 TRUV2

VOLTAGE

en05000170.vsd
IEC05000170 V1 EN

Figure 334: CVGAPC function main logic diagram for built-in protection elements

658
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Logic in figure 334 can be summarized as follows:

1. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each
protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its
START and TRIP output signals.
2. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following
four figures.
3. Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps
(internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.

a
a>b AND
BlkLevel2nd b

Enable
second Second harmonic
harmonic check DEF time BLKTRO C1 TROC1
selected DEF AND
OR
a
a>b
b
OC1=On STOC1
AND
StartCurr_OC1 BLKOC1
X
Inverse

Voltage Directionali ty DIR_OK Inverse

control or time
check selected
restrai nt
feature

Selected v oltage
Curren t
Restrai nt
Feature
Selected restrain current Imea sure d > k Irestra int

IEC05000831-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000831 V2 EN

Figure 335: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step that is, OC1 (step OC2 has the
same internal logic)

659
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK505308-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Bin input: BLKUC1TR

Selected current a TRUC1

b>a
DEF AND
b
StartCurr_UC1
AND

Operation_UC1=On
STUC1

Bin input: BLKUC1

en05000750.vsd

IEC05000750 V1 EN

Figure 336: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step that is, UC1 (step UC2 has the
same internal logic)

DEF time BLKTROV1

selected DEF TROV1
AND
OR
Selected voltage a
a>b
b STOV1
StartVolt_OV1
AND

Inverse
Operation_OV1=On
Inverse time
BLKOV1 selected

en05000751.vsd

IEC05000751 V1 EN

Figure 337: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step OV1 (step OV2 has the same
internal logic)

660
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 11
Multipurpose protection

DEF time BLKTRUV

selected DEF 1 TRUV1
AND
OR
Selected voltage a
b>a
b STUV1
AND
StartVolt_UV1

Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
BLKUV1 selected

en05000752.vsd

IEC05000752 V1 EN

Figure 338: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step UV1 (step UV2 has the same
internal logic)

11.1.8 Technical data

Table 401: CVGAPC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Measuring current phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -
input NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2-
phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
Measuring voltage phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -
input NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2-
phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
Start overcurrent, (2 - 5000)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
step 1 - 2 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Start undercurrent, (2 - 150)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir

step 1 - 2 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay, overcurrent at greater
0 to 2 x Iset, step 1 - 2

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay, undercurrent greater
at 2 to 0 x Iset, step 1 -
2
Overcurrent (non-
directional):
Start time at 0 to 2 x Min. = 15 ms -
Iset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 2 to 0 x Min. = 15 ms -

Iset Max. = 30 ms

Table continues on next page

661
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK505308-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Start time at 0 to 10 x Min. = 5 ms -
Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time at 10 to 0 Min. = 20 ms -

x Iset Max. = 35 ms

Undercurrent:
Start time at 2 to 0 x Min. = 15 ms -
Iset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 0 to 2 x Min. = 15 ms -

Iset Max. = 30 ms

Overcurrent:
Inverse time 16 curve types See table 1113, 1114 and table
characteristics, see ""
table 1113, 1114 and
table ""
Overcurrent:
Minimum operate (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
time for inverse greater
curves, step 1 - 2
Voltage level where (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
voltage memory
takes over
Start overvoltage, (2.0 - 200.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
step 1 - 2 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Start undervoltage, (2.0 - 150.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

step 1 - 2 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay, overvoltage at greater
0.8 to 1.2 x Uset, step
1-2
Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
delay, undervoltage greater
at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset,
step 1 - 2
Overvoltage:
Start time at 0.8 to 1.2 Min. = 15 ms -
x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 1.2 to Min. = 15 ms -

0.8 x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Undervoltage:
Start time at 1.2 to 0.8 Min. = 15 ms -
x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 1.2 to Min. = 15 ms -

0.8 x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Overvoltage:
Inverse time 4 curve types See table 1124
characteristics, see
table 1124
Undervoltage:
Table continues on next page

662
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Inverse time 3 curve types See table 1125
characteristics, see
table 1125
High and low voltage (1.0 - 200.0)% of UBase 1.0% of Ur at U Ur
limit, voltage 1.0% of U at U > Ur
dependent operation,
step 1 - 2
Directional function Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse -
Relay characteristic (-180 to +180) degrees 2.0 degrees
angle
Relay operate angle (1 to 90) degrees 2.0 degrees
Reset ratio, > 95% -
overcurrent
Reset ratio, < 105% -
undercurrent
Reset ratio, > 95% -
overvoltage
Reset ratio, < 105% -
undervoltage
Overcurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undercurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Overvoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.2 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undervoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

663
Technical manual
664
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 12
System protection and control

Section 12 System protection and control

12.1 Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC

12.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC - -

12.1.2 Functionality
The multi-purpose filter function block, SMAIHPAC, is arranged as a three-phase
filter. It has very much the same user interface (e.g. inputs and outputs) as the standard
pre-processing function block SMAI. However the main difference is that it can be
used to extract any frequency component from the input signal. Thus it can, for
example, be used to build sub-synchronous resonance protection for synchronous
generator.

12.1.3 Function block

SMAIHPAC
BLOCK AI3P
G3P* AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4

IEC13000180-1-en.vsd
IEC13000180 V1 EN

12.1.4 Signals

Table 402: SMAIHPAC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
G3P GROUP - Analog input group from SMAI
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

665
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK505308-UEN B
System protection and control

Table 403: SMAIHPAC Output signals

Name Type Description
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 3-phase group
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 1
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 2
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 3
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 4

12.1.5 Settings

Table 404: SMAIHPAC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConnectionType Ph - Ph - - Ph - N Analogue input connection type
Ph - N
SetFrequency 2.0 - 500.0 Hz 0.1 50.0 Desired frequency to be extracted by the
filter
FreqBandWidth 0.0 - 60.0 Hz 0.1 0.0 Extra added frequency band around the
set frequency
FilterLength 0.1 s - - 1.0 s Approximate length of the filtering window
0.2 s in seconds
0.5 s
1.0 s
2.0 s
4.0 s
OverLap 0 - 95 % 5 20 Filtering window overlap between two
calculations in percent

12.1.6 Operation principle

For all four analogue input signals into this filter (i.e. three phases and the residual
quantity) the input samples from the TRM module which are coming at rate of 20
samples per fundamental system cycle are first stored. When enough samples are
available in the internal memory, the phasor values at set frequency defined by the
setting parameter SetFrequency are calculated. The following values are internally
available for each of the calculated phasors:
Magnitude
Phase angle
Exact frequency of the extracted signal

Note that the special filtering algorithm is used to extract these phasors. This
algorithm is different from the standard one-cycle Digital Fourier Filter typically used
by the numerical IEDs. This filter provides extremely good accuracy of measurement
and excellent noise rejection, but at the same time it has much slower response time.
It is capable to extract phasor (i.e. magnitude, phase angle and actual frequency) of

666
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 12
System protection and control

any signal (e.g. 37,2Hz) present in the waveforms of the connected CTs and/or VTs.
The magnitude and the phase angle of this phasor are calculated with very high
precision. For example the magnitude and phase angle of the phasor can be estimated
even if it has magnitude of one per mille (i.e. 1 ) in comparison to the dominating
signal (e.g. the fundamental frequency component). Several instances of this function
block are provided. These instances are fully synchronized between each-other in
respect of phase angle calculation. Thus if two multi-purpose filters are used for some
application, one for current and the second one for the voltage signals, the power
values (i.e. P & Q) at the set frequency can be calculated from them by the over-/under-
power function or CVMMXN measurement function block.

In addition to these phasors the following quantities are internally calculated as well:
Phasors for the individual phases as well as phase-to-phase phasors
True RMS value of the input signal over all samples available in the memory
Positive sequence phasor
Negative sequence phasor
Zero sequence phasor
etc.

In order to properly calculate phase-to-phase phasors from the individual phase

phasors or vice versa, the setting parameters ConnectionType is provided. It defines
what quantities (i.e. individual phases or phase-to-phase quantities) are physically
connected to the IED analogue inputs by wiring. Then the IED knows which one of
them are the measured quantities and the other one is then internally calculated. This
setting is only important for the VT inputs, because the CTs are typically star
connected all the time.

Thus when this filter is used in conjunction with multi-purpose protection function or
overcurrent function or over-voltage function or over-power function many different
protection applications can be arranged. For example the following protection,
monitoring or measurement features can be realized:
Sub-synchronous resonance protection for turbo generators
Sub-synchronous protection for wind turbines/wind farms
Detection of sub-synchronous oscillation between HVDC links and synchronous
generators
Super-synchronous protection
Detection of presence of the geo-magnetic induced currents
Overcurrent or overvoltage protection at specific frequency harmonic, sub-
harmonic, inter-harmonic etc.
Presence of special railway frequencies (e.g. 16.7Hz or 25Hz) in the three-phase
power system
Sensitive reverse power protection
Stator or rotor earth fault protection for special injection frequencies (e.g. 25Hz)
etc.

667
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK505308-UEN B
System protection and control

The filter output can also be connected to the measurement function blocks such as
CVMMXN (Measurements), CMMXU (Phase current measurement), VMMXU
(Phase-phase voltage measurement), etc.

The filter has as well additional capability to report the exact frequency of the
extracted signal. Thus the user can check the actual frequency of some phenomenon
in the power system (e.g. frequency of the sub-synchronous currents) and compare it
with expected value obtained previously by either calculation or simulation. For the
whole three-phase filter group the frequency of the signal connected to the first input
(i.e. phase L1) is reported. This value can be then used either by over-/under-
frequency protections or reported to the built-in HMI or any other external client via
the measurement blocks such is the CVMMXN.

How many samples in the memory are used for the phasor calculation depends on the
setting parameter FilterLength. Table 405 gives overview of the used number of
samples for phasor calculation by the filter. Note that the used number of samples is
always a power of number two.
Table 405: Length of the filtering window
Value for parameter Used No of samples for Corresponding length of Corresponding length of
FilterLength calculation (fixed, the input waveform in the input waveform in
independent from rated miliseconds for 50Hz miliseconds for 60Hz
frequency) power system power system
0.1 s 128 = 27 128 ms 107 ms

0.2 s 256 = 28 256 ms 213 ms

0.5 s 512 = 29 512 ms 427 ms

1.0 s 1024 = 210 1024 ms 853 ms

2.0 s 2048 = 211 2048 ms 1707 ms

4.0 s 4096 = 212 4096 ms 3413 ms

Note that the selected value for the parameter FilterLength automatically defines
certain filter properties as described below:

First in order to secure proper filter operation the selected length of the filter shall
always be longer than three complete periods of the signal which shall be extracted.
Actually the best results are obtained if at least five complete periods are available
within the filtering window. Thus, this filter feature will limit which filter lengths can
be used to extract low frequency signals. For example if 16,7 Hz signal shall be
extracted the minimum filter length in milliseconds shall be:

1000
3 = 180ms
16.7
EQUATION000028 V1 EN (Equation 153)

Thus based on the data from Table 405 the minimum acceptable value for this
parameter would be FilterLength = 0.2 s but more accurate results will be obtained
by using FilterLength = 0.5 s

668
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 12
System protection and control

Second feature which is determined by the selected value for parameter FilterLength
is the capability of the filter to separate the desired signal from the other disturbing
signals which may have similar frequency value. Note that the filter output will be the
phasor with the highest magnitude within certain pass frequency band around the
SetFrequency. Table 406 defines the natural size of this pass frequency band for the
filter, depending on the selected value for parameter FilterLength.
Table 406: Pass frequency band due to FilterLength
Value for parameter FilterLength For 50Hz power system For 60Hz power system
0.1 s 22.5 Hz 27.0 Hz
0.2 s 11.5 Hz 14.0 Hz
0.5 s 6.0 Hz 7.2 Hz
1.0 s 3.0 Hz 3.6 Hz
2.0 s 1.5 Hz 1.8 Hz
4.0 s 0.8 Hz 1.0 Hz

Thus the longer length of the filter the better capability it has to reject the disturbing
signals close to the required frequency component and any other noise present in the
input signal waveform. For example if 46 Hz signal wants to be extracted in 50Hz
power system, then from Table 406 it can be concluded that FilterLength=1,0 s shall
be selected as a minimum value. However if frequency deviation of the fundamental
frequency signal in the power system are taken into account it may be advisable to
select FilterLength=2,0 s for such application.

Note that in case when no clear magnitude peak exist in the set pass frequency band
the filter will return zero values for the phasor magnitude and angle while the signal
frequency will have value minus one. Finally the set value for parameter FilterLength
also defines the response time of the filter after a step change of the measured signal.
The filter will correctly estimate the new signal magnitude once 75% of the filter
length has been filed with the new signal value (i.e. after the change).

If for any reason this natural frequency band shall be extended (e.g. to get accurate but
wider filter) it is possible to increase the pass band by entering the value different from
zero for parameter FreqBandWidth. In such case the total filter pass band can be
defined as:

(value given in Table 406 + one-half of the set FreqBandWidth value)

Example if in 60Hz system the selected values are FilterLength =1.0 s and
FreqBandWidth = 5.0 the total filter pass band will be (3.6+5.0/2)= 6.1 Hz.

It shall be noted that the phasor calculation is relatively computation demanding

(required certain amount of the CPU processing time). In order to control the CPU
usage for this filter, the setting parameter OverLap is used. This setting parameter
defines how often the new phasor value is calculated during time period defined by the
set value for the parameter FilterLength (see Table 405). The following list gives

669
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK505308-UEN B
System protection and control

some examples how this parameter influence the calculation rate for the extracted
phasor:
when OverLap=0% the new phasor value is calculated only once per
FilterLength
when OverLap=50% the new phasor value is calculated two times per
FilterLength
when OverLap=75% the new phasor value is calculated four times per
FilterLength
when OverLap=90% the new phasor value is calculated ten times per
FilterLength

12.1.7 Filter calculation example

In the following Figure an example from an installation of this filter on a large, 50 Hz
turbo generator with a rating in excess of 1000 MVA is presented. In this installation
filter is used to measure the stator sub-synchronous resonance currents. For this
particular installation the following settings were used for the filter:
SetFrequency= 31.0 Hz
FilterLength= 1.0 s
OverLap = 75%
FreqBandWidth= 0.0 Hz

IEC13000178-2-en.vsd

IEC13000178 V3 EN

Figure 339: Example of filter calculation

670
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 12
System protection and control

The data shown in the Figure comes from the comtrade file captured by the IED. The
following traces are presented in this Figure.

a) Waveforms of the stator three-phase currents given in primary kA.

b) RMS value of the sub-synchronous resonance current extracted by the filter in

primary amperes.

c) Frequency of the extracted sub-synchronous resonance current provided by the

filter in Hz.

Note the very narrow scale on the y-axle for b) and c). Such small scale as well
indicates with which precision and consistency the filter calculates the phasor
magnitude and frequency of the extracted stator sub-synchronous current component.

The following can be observed in the Figure:

The stator total RMS current value is around 33 kA primary.
The measured magnitude of the sub-synchronous current is around 173 A
primary (that is, 0.5% of the fundamental 50 Hz component).
The frequency of this sub-synchronous current component is 31.24 Hz.

With above given settings the sub-synchronous current magnitude and frequency are
calculated approximately four times per second (that is, correct value is four times per
1024 ms).

671
Technical manual
672
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 13
Secondary system supervision

Section 13 Secondary system supervision

13.1 Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC

13.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC - 87

13.1.2 Functionality
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of
many protection functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negative-
sequence current functions.

It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurrence of open

CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will
stress the secondary circuit.

Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC) compares the residual current from a three
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input
taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.

A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to

block protection functions expected to give inadvertent tripping.

13.1.3 Function block

CCSSPVC
I3P* FAIL
IREF* ALARM
BLOCK
IEC13000304-1-en.vsd
IEC13000304 V1 EN

Figure 340: CCSSPVC function block

Signal IREF must be connected in the configuration.

673
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK505308-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

13.1.4 Signals
Table 407: CCSSPVC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase current input
SIGNAL
IREF GROUP - Residual reference current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 408: CCSSPVC Output signals

Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for current circuit failure

13.1.5 Settings
Table 409: CCSSPVC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IMinOp 10 - 200 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate current differential level
in % of IBase

Table 410: CCSSPVC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Ip>Block 20 - 500 %IB 1 150 Block of the function at high phase
current, in % of IBase

Table 411: CCSSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

13.1.6 Operation principle

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC compares the absolute value of the vectorial
sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| and the absolute value of the residual current
|Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 341.

The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:

674
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 13
Secondary system supervision

The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of the
numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|.
The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than the
set operate value IMinOp.
No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms.
CCSSPVC is enabled by setting Operation = On.

The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being
activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will
be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND-
gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase
current supervision element(s) operate, for example, during a fault.

I>Ip>Block
BLOCK
IL1 IL1 I>IMinOp
IL2 +
IL2
IL3 IL3 -
+ +
I ref Iref + x -
0,8
1,5 x Ir
AND OR FAIL
10 ms

20 ms 100 ms

150 ms 1s ALARM
OPERATION
BLOCK

en05000463.tif
IEC05000463 V2 EN

Figure 341: Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC

The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 342.

675
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK505308-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

| I phase | - | I ref |

Slope = 1

Operation
Slope = 0.8
area
I MinOp

| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd

IEC99000068 V1 EN

Figure 342: Operate characteristics

Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S I
phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.

13.1.7 Technical data

Table 412: CCSSPVCtechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (10-200)% of IBase 10.0% of Ir at I Ir
10.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, Operate current >90%

Block current (20-500)% of IBase 5.0% of Ir at I Ir
5.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, Block current >90% at (50-500)% of IBase

13.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC

13.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC - -

676
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 13
Secondary system supervision

13.2.2 Functionality
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function FUFSPVC is to block voltage
measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage
transformer and the IED in order to avoid inadvertent operations that otherwise might
occur.

The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection methods,
negative sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional delta voltage
and delta current detection.

The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated
or high-impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence quantities.

The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low
impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities.

The selection of different operation modes is possible by a setting parameter in order

to take into account the particular earthing of the network.

A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the
fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in
practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station
operations.

13.2.3 Function block

FUFSPVC
I3P* BLKZ
U3P* BLKU
BLOCK 3PH
CBCLOSED DLD1PH
MCBOP DLD3PH
DISCPOS STDI
BLKTRIP STDIL1
STDIL2
STDIL3
STDU
STDUL1
STDUL2
STDUL3

IEC14000065-1-en.vsd
IEC14000065 V1 EN

Figure 343: FUFSPVC function block

677
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK505308-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

13.2.4 Signals
Table 413: FUFSPVC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
CBCLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Active when circuit breaker is closed
MCBOP BOOLEAN 0 Active when external MCB opens protected voltage
circuit
DISCPOS BOOLEAN 0 Active when line disconnector is open
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operation of function when active

Table 414: FUFSPVC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLKZ BOOLEAN Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKU BOOLEAN General start of function
3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase start of function
DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases
STDI BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in current
STDIL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L1
STDIL2 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L2
STDIL3 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L3
STDU BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in voltage
STDUL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L1
STDUL2 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L2
STDUL3 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L3

678
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 13
Secondary system supervision

13.2.5 Settings
Table 415: FUFSPVC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode Off - - UZsIZs Operating mode selection
UNsINs
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
UZsIZs AND
UNsINs
OptimZsNs
3U0> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of residual overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I0< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of residual undercurrent
element in % of IBase
3U2> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of neg seq overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I2< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of neg seq undercurrent
element in % of IBase
OpDUDI Off - - Off Operation of change based function
On Off/On
DU> 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level of change in phase voltage
in % of UBase
DI< 1 - 100 %IB 1 15 Operate level of change in phase current
in % of IBase
UPh> 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of phase voltage in % of
UBase
IPh> 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of phase current in % of
IBase
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealln< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of seal-in phase voltage in
% of UBase
IDLD< 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Operate level for open phase current
detection in % of IBase
UDLD< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level for open phase voltage
detection in % of UBase

Table 416: FUFSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

679
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK505308-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

13.2.6 Monitored data

Table 417: FUFSPVC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0 REAL - A Magnitude of zero
sequence current
3I2 REAL - A Magnitude of negative
sequence current
3U0 REAL - kV Magnitude of zero
sequence voltage
3U2 REAL - kV Magnitude of negative
sequence voltage

13.2.7 Operation principle

13.2.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection

The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and
voltages in all three phases and calculates, see figure 344:

the zero-sequence voltage 3U0

the zero-sequence current 3I0
the negative sequence current 3I2
the negative sequence voltage 3U2

The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0> and 3I0<,
3U2> and 3I2<.

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero-
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0> and the measured zero-sequence
current is below the set value 3I0<.

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U2> and the measured negative
sequence current is below the set value 3I2<.

A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence
current will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the
two line ends.

680
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 13
Secondary system supervision

Sequence Detection
3I0< CurrZeroSeq
IL1
Zero 3I0
sequence
filter 100 ms CurrNegSeq
a
IL2 a>b t
b
Negative 3I2
sequence
IL3 filter FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
100 ms
a
a>b t
3I2< b
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
3U0>
VoltZeroSeq
UL1
Zero
sequence a 3U0
a>b
b
filter
UL2 VoltNegSeq

Negative
sequence a 3U2
a>b
UL3 filter b

3U2>

IEC10000036-2-en.vsd

IEC10000036 V2 EN

Figure 344: Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part

The calculated values 3U0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3U2 are available as service values on local
HMI and monitoring tool in PCM600.

Input and output signals

The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and
DLD3PH from dead line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions
occur:

The input BLOCK is activated

The input BLKTRIP is activated and the internal signal FuseFailStarted is not
present
The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off
The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been
blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure
supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal
functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal
function outputs.

The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output from any of the
protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the
operation of the fuse failure is blocked; a fixed drop-out timer prolongs the block for
100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during the

681
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK505308-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse
failure might operate.

The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is
activated. The dead line detection signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.

The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to
the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary
circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block
all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of
OpMode selector. The additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of
MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due
to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.

The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to
the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the
position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause
malfunction of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is
connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is
disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated.

The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, energizing check and so on) except for the impedance
protection.

The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection
function.

13.2.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 345. The calculation of
the changes of currents and voltages is based on a sample analysis algorithm. The
calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and DU>.
The algorithm detects a fuse failure if a sufficient change in voltage without a
sufficient change in current is detected in each phase separately. The following
quantities are calculated in all three phases:

The change in voltage DU

The change in current DI

The internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal is activated if the following conditions are

fulfilled:

The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above UPh> for more than
1.5 cycles (i.e. 30 ms in a 50 Hz system)
The magnitudes of DU in three phases are higher than the corresponding setting
DU>
The magnitudes of DI in three phases are below the setting DI<

682
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 13
Secondary system supervision

In addition to the above conditions, at least one of the following conditions shall be
fulfilled in order to activate the internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal:

The magnitude of the phase currents in three phases are higher than the setting
IPh>
The circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = True)

The first criterion means that detection of failure in three phases together with high
current for the three phases will set the output. The measured phase current is used to
reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low,
a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) may be followed by current
change lower than the setting DI<, and therefore a false fuse failure might occur.

The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled at the same time
as circuit breaker is closed. If CBCLOSED input is connected to FALSE , then only
the first criterion can enable the delta function.If the DUDI detections of three phases
set the internal signal FuseFailDetDUDI at the level high, then the signal
FuseFailDetDUDI will remain high as long as the voltages of three phases are lower
then the setting Uph>.

In addition to fuse failure detection, two internal signals DeltaU and DeltaI are also
generated by the delta current and delta voltage DUDI detection algorithm. The
internal signals DelatU and DeltaI are activated when a sudden change of voltage, or
respectively current, is detected. The detection of the sudden change is based on a
sample analysis algorithm. In particular DelatU is activated if at least three
consecutive voltage samples are higher then the setting DU>. In a similar way DelatI
is activated if at least three consecutive current samples are higher then the setting
DI<. When DeltaU or DeltaI are active, the output signals STDUL1, STDUL2,
STDUL3 and respectively STDIL1, STDIL2, STDIL3, based on a sudden change of
voltage or current detection, are activated with a 20 ms time off delay. The common
start output signals STDU or STDI are activated with a 60 ms time off delay, if any
sudden change of voltage or current is detected.

The delta function (except the sudden change of voltage and current
detection) is deactivated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to Off.

683
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK505308-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

DUDI Detection
DUDI detection Phase 1
DeltaIL1
IL1
IL2
IL3 DI detection based on sample analysis OR

DI<

UL1

DU detection based on sample analysis

AND
DU>
1.5 cycle 20 ms DeltaUL1
a
a>b t t
UPh> b

IL1 DeltaIL2
IL2 DUDI detection Phase 2
DeltaUL2
IL3
UL2 Same logic as for phase 1

IL1 DeltaIL3
DUDI detection Phase 3
IL2
DeltaUL3
IL3
UL3 Same logic as for phase 1

UL1
a
a<b
b

IL1
a
a>b
IPh> b AND

OR AND
CBCLOSED AND OR

UL2
a
a<b
b

IL2
a
a>b
b AND

OR AND
AND OR

UL3
a
a<b
b

IL3
a
a>b
b AND

OR AND
AND OR FuseFailDetDUDI
AND

IEC12000166-3-en.vsd

IEC12000166 V3 EN

Figure 345: Simplified logic diagram for the DU/DI detection part

684
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 13
Secondary system supervision

intBlock
STDI
AND

20 ms
DeltaIL1 STDIL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaIL2
t STDIL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaIL3
t
STDIL3
AND

STDU
AND

20 ms
DeltaUL1 STDUL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaUL2
t STDUL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaUL3
t
STDUL3
AND

IEC12000165-1-en.vsd

IEC12000165 V1 EN

Figure 346: Internal signals DeltaU or DeltaI and the corresponding output
signals

13.2.7.3 Dead line detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 347. A dead phase
condition is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their
respective setting values UDLD< and IDLD<. If at least one phase is considered to be
dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated. If all
three phases are considered to be dead the output DLD3PH is activated

685
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK505308-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

Dead Line Detection

IL1
a
a<b AllCurrLow
b
AND
IL2
a
a<b
b

IL3
a
a<b
b

IDLD<
DeadLineDet1Ph
UL1
a AND
a<b
b OR DLD1PH
AND
UL2
a AND
a<b
b
AND DLD3PH
UL3 AND
a AND
a<b
b

UDLD<

intBlock

IEC10000035-1-en.vsd
IEC10000035 V2 EN

Figure 347: Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part

13.2.7.4 Main logic

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 348. The fuse failure
supervision function (FUFSPVC) can be switched on or off by the setting parameter
Operation to On or Off.

For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode

selector, OpMode, has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating
modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The different operation
modes are:

Off. The negative and zero sequence function is switched off.

UNsINs. Negative sequence is selected.
UZsIZs. Zero sequence is selected.
UZsIZs OR UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in
parallel (OR-condition for operation).
UZsIZs AND UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in
series (AND-condition for operation).
OptimZsNs. Optimum of negative and zero sequence current (the function that
has the highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will
be activated).

The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to On. When
selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.

686
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 13
Secondary system supervision

As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq,

FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDUDI, and the specific functionality is released,
the function will activate the output signal BLKU. The output signal BLKZ will be
activated as well if the internal dead phase detection, DeadLineDet1Ph, is not
activated at the same time. The output BLKU can be used for blocking voltage related
measuring functions (under voltage protection, energizing check, and so on). The
output BLKZ shall be used to block the impedance protection functions.

If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting parameter
SealIn is set to On it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase voltages is below
the set value USealIn<. This will keep the BLKU and BLKZ signals activated as long
as any phase voltage is below the set value USealIn<. If all three phase voltages drop
below the set value USealIn< and the setting parameter SealIn is set to On the output
signal 3PH will also be activated. The signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ will now be
active as long as any phase voltage is below the set value USealIn<.

If SealIn is set to On the fuse failure condition lasting more then 5 seconds is stored in
the non-volatile memory in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary power
interruption or re-start due to configuration change) it uses the stored value in its non-
volatile memory and re-establishes the conditions that were present before the shut
down. All phase voltages must be restored above USealIn< before fuse failure is de-
activated and resets the signals BLKU, BLKZ and 3PH.

The output signal BLKU will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the
setting USealIn< for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence voltage has
been above the set value 3U0> and 3U2> for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents
are below the setting IDLD< (criteria for open phase detection) and the circuit breaker
is closed (input CBCLOSED is activated).

If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT
secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in
order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of
the setting of OpMode or OpDUDI. An additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs
the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage
dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the
miniature circuit breaker.

The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to
the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function does not have to be affected
since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the distance
protection.

687
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK505308-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST

TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes

BLOCK intBlock
OR
BLKTRIP 20 ms 100 ms
AND t t
FusefailStarted

All UL < USealIn<

OR
AND
3PH
AND
SealIn = On AND

AND
Any UL < UsealIn<

FuseFailDetDUDI
AND 5s
OpDUDI = On
OR t
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND

AND

FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND

UNsINs OR
UZsIZs OR
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
OpMode
UZsIZs AND UNsINs
OptimZsNs
OR
CurrZeroSeq
a AND
CurrNegSeq a>b
b

AND

DeadLineDet1Ph 200 ms
AND BLKZ
t OR AND
150 ms
MCBOP t

AND BLKU
60 s
t OR OR
All UL > UsealIn<
AND

VoltZeroSeq 5s
VoltNegSeq OR t

AllCurrLow
CBCLOSED

DISCPOS IEC10000033-2-en.vsd

IEC10000033 V2 EN

Figure 348: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main
logic

688
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 13
Secondary system supervision

13.2.8 Technical data

Table 418: FUFSPVCtechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Operate current, zero sequence (1100)% of IBase 0.5% of Ir

Operate voltage, negative sequence (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Operate current, negative sequence (1100)% of IBase 0.5% of Ir

Operate voltage change level (1-100)% of UBase 10.0% of Ur

Operate current change level (1100)% of IBase 10.0% of Ir

Operate phase voltage (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Operate phase current (1100)% of IBase 0.5% of Ir

Operate phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Operate phase dead line current (1100)% of IBase 0.5% of Ir

Operate time, start, 1 ph, at 1 to 0 x Ur Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start, 1 ph, at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms

13.3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC

13.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC VTS 60

13.3.2 Functionality
Different protection functions within the protection IED operates on the basis of
measured voltage at the relay point. Some example of protection functions are:

Distance protection function.

Undervoltage function.
Energisation function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.

These functions can operate unintentionally, if a fault occurs in the secondary circuits
between voltage instrument transformers and the IED. These unintentional operations
can be prevented by VDSPVC.

689
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK505308-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage measurement circuit,

based on phase wise comparison of voltages of main and pilot fused circuits.
VDSPVC blocking output can be configured to block functions that need to be
blocked in case of faults in the voltage circuit.

13.3.3 Function block

VDSPVC
U3P1* MAINFUF
U3P2* PILOTFUF
BLOCK U1L1FAIL
U1L2FAIL
U1L3FAIL
U2L1FAIL
U2L2FAIL
U2L3FAIL

IEC14000048-1-en.vsd
IEC12000142 V2 EN

Figure 349: VDSPVC function block

13.3.4 Signals
Table 419: VDSPVC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P1 GROUP - Main fuse voltage
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Pilot fuse voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 420: VDSPVC Output signals

Name Type Description
MAINFUF BOOLEAN Block of main fuse failure
PILOTFUF BOOLEAN Alarm of pilot fuse failure
U1L1FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L1
U1L2FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L2
U1L3FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L3
U2L1FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L1
U2L2FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L2
U2L3FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L3

690
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 13
Secondary system supervision

13.3.5 Settings
Table 421: VDSPVC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode Off / On
On
Ud>MainBlock 10.0 - 80.0 %UB 0.1 20.0 Blocking picked up voltage level in % of
UBase when main fuse fails
Ud>PilotAlarm 10.0 - 80.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Alarm picked up voltage level in % of
UBase when pilot fuse fails
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealIn 0.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Operate level of seal-in voltage in % of
UBase

Table 422: VDSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

Table 423: VDSPVC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConTypeMain Ph-N - - Ph-N Selection of connection type for main fuse
Ph-Ph group
ConTypePilot Ph-N - - Ph-N Selection of connection type for pilot fuse
Ph-Ph group

13.3.6 Monitored data

Table 424: VDSPVC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage phase
L1 for alarm functionality
UL2DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage phase
L2 for alarm functionality
UL3DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage phase
L3 for alarm functionality
UL1DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage phase
L1 for block functionality
UL2DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage phase
L2 for block functionality
UL3DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage phase
L3 for block functionality

691
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK505308-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

13.3.7 Operation principle

VDSPVC requires six voltage inputs, which are the three phase voltages on main and
pilot fuse groups. The initial voltage difference between the two groups is theoretical
zero in the healthy condition. Any subsequent voltage difference will be due to a fuse
failure.

If the main fuse voltage becomes smaller than the pilot fuse voltage (vMainL1 <
vPilotL1 or vMainL2 < vPilotL2 or vMainL3 < vPilotL3) and the voltage difference
exceeds the operation level (Ud>MainBlock), a blocking signal will be initiated to
indicate the main fuse failure and block the voltage-dependent functions. In addition,
the function also indicates the phase in which the voltage reduction has occurred.

If the pilot fuse voltage becomes smaller than the main fuse voltage (vPilotL1 <
vMainL1 or vPilotL2 < vMainL2 or vPilotL3 < vMainL3) and the voltage difference
exceeds the operation level (Ud>PilotAlarm), an alarm signal will be initiated to
indicate the pilot fuse failure and also the faulty phase where the voltage reduction
occurred.

When SealIn is set to On and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds, the
blocked protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditions are
restored above the USealIn setting. Fuse failure outputs are deactivated when normal
voltage conditions are restored.

5s
a
a<b AND OR t
USealIn b

SealIn=0

vPilotL1
+
vMainL1 -
MAX a U1L1FAIL
OR
a>b AND
Ud>MainBlock b MAINFAIL
OR
0

MIN ABS a
a>b AND U2L1FAIL
Ud> PilotAlarm b
BLOCK
OR PILOTFAIL

vPilotL2 U1L2FAIL
vMainL2 Phase L2, same as Phase L1 U2L2FAIL

vPilotL3 U1L3FAIL
vMainL3 Phase L3, same as Phase L1 U2L3FAIL

IEC12000144-1-en.vsd

IEC12000144 V1 EN

Figure 350: Simplified logic diagram VDSPVC

692
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 13
Secondary system supervision

13.3.8 Technical data

Table 425: VDSPVC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, block of main fuse (10.0-80.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
failure
Reset ratio <110%
Operate time, block of main fuse Min. = 5 ms
failure at 1 to 0 x Ur
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, block of main fuse Min. = 15 ms
failure at 0 to 1 x Ur
Max. = 30 ms
Operate value, alarm for pilot (10.0-80.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
fuse failure
Reset ratio <110%
Operate time, alarm for pilot fuse Min. = 5 ms
failure at 1 to 0 x Ur
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, alarm for pilot fuse Min. = 15 ms
failure at 0 to 1 x Ur
Max. = 30 ms

693
Technical manual
694
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Section 14 Control

14.1 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing

SESRSYN

14.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and SESRSYN 25
synchronizing
sc/vc

SYMBOL-M V1 EN

14.1.2 Functionality
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.

Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN function checks that

the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one
side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.

SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and
1 breaker or ring busbar arrangements.

Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can
have different settings.

For systems, which are running asynchronous, a synchronizing function is provided.

The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of
circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. The
synchronizing function evaluates voltage difference, phase angle difference, slip
frequency and frequency rate of change before issuing a controlled closing of the
circuit breaker. Breaker closing time is a parameter setting.

695
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.1.3 Function block

SESRSYN
U3PBB1* SYNOK
U3PBB2* AUTOSYOK
U3PLN1* AUTOENOK
U3PLN2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
B1QOPEN TSTENOK
B1QCLD USELFAIL
B2QOPEN B1SEL
B2QCLD B2SEL
LN1QOPEN LN1SEL
LN1QCLD LN2SEL
LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR
LN2QCLD SYNFAIL
UB1OK UOKSYN
UB1FF UDIFFSYN
UB2OK FRDIFSYN
UB2FF FRDIFFOK
ULN1OK FRDERIVA
ULN1FF UOKSC
ULN2OK UDIFFSC
ULN2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE UDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
UBUS
ULINE
MODEAEN
MODEMEN

IEC10000046-1-en.vsd
IEC10000046 V1 EN

Figure 351: SESRSYN function block

14.1.4 Signals
Table 426: SESRSYN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3PBB1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL busbar 1
U3PBB2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL busbar 2
U3PLN1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL line 1
U3PLN2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL line 2
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Block synchronizing
BLKSC BOOLEAN 0 Block synchro check
BLKENERG BOOLEAN 0 Block energizing check
Table continues on next page

696
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Name Type Default Description

B1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
B1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
B2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus2
B2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus2
LN1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
line1
LN1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
line1
LN2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
line2
LN2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
line2
UB1OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer OK
UB1FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
UB2OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer OK
UB2FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN1OK BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer OK
ULN1FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN2OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK
ULN2FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of manual energizing mode

Table 427: SESRSYN Output signals

Name Type Description
SYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK
AUTOENOK BOOLEAN Automatic energizing check OK
MANSYOK BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK
MANENOK BOOLEAN Manual energizing check OK
TSTSYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK test output
TSTMANSY BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK test output
TSTENOK BOOLEAN Energizing check OK test output
Table continues on next page

697
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

USELFAIL BOOLEAN Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL BOOLEAN Bus1 selected
B2SEL BOOLEAN Bus2 selected
LN1SEL BOOLEAN Line1 selected
LN2SEL BOOLEAN Line2 selected
SYNPROGR BOOLEAN Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL BOOLEAN Synchronizing failed
UOKSYN BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set
limits
UDIFFSYN BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFSYN BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFFOK BOOLEAN Frequency difference in band for synchronizing
FRDERIVA BOOLEAN Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
UOKSC BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes above set limits
UDIFFSC BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PHDIFFA BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto
operation
FRDIFFM BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Manual
operation
PHDIFFM BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual
Operation
INADVCLS BOOLEAN Inadvertent circuit breaker closing
UDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of voltage in p.u of set
voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of phase angle
UBUS REAL Bus voltage
ULINE REAL Line voltage
MODEAEN INTEGER Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN INTEGER Selected mode for manual energizing

14.1.5 Settings
Table 428: SESRSYN Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationSynch Off - - Off Operation for synchronizing function
On Off/On
UHighBusSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing in
% of UBaseBus
Table continues on next page

698
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UHighLineSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchronizing in
% of UBaseLine
UDiffSynch 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.10 Voltage difference limit for synchronizing
in p.u of set voltage base value
FreqDiffMin 0.003 - 0.250 Hz 0.001 0.010 Minimum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqDiffMax 0.050 - 0.500 Hz 0.001 0.200 Maximum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqRateChange 0.000 - 0.500 Hz/s 0.001 0.300 Maximum allowed frequency rate of
change
tBreaker 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.080 Closing time of the breaker
tClosePulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Breaker closing pulse duration
tMaxSynch 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 600.00 Resets synch if no close has been made
before set time
tMinSynch 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Minimum time to accept synchronizing
conditions
OperationSC Off - - On Operation for synchronism check function
On Off/On
UHighBusSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck in
% of UBaseBus
UHighLineSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in
% of UBaseLine
UDiffSC 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.15 Voltage difference limit for synchrocheck
in p.u of set voltage base value
FreqDiffA 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Auto
FreqDiffM 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Manual
PhaseDiffA 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between bus
and line Auto
PhaseDiffM 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between bus
and line Manual
tSCA 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto
tSCM 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck
Manual
AutoEnerg Off - - DLLB Automatic energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnerg Off - - Both Manual energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnergDBDL Off - - Off Manual dead bus, dead line energizing
On
UHighBusEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for energizing check
in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for energizing check
in % of UBaseLine
Table continues on next page

699
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ULowBusEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBB 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit bus for energizing check
in % of UBaseBus
ULowLineEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBL 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit line for energizing check
in % of UBaseLine
UMaxEnerg 50.0 - 180.0 %UB 1.0 115.0 Maximum voltage for energizing in % of
UBase, Line and/or Bus
tAutoEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for automatic energizing
check
tManEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for manual energizing check

Table 429: SESRSYN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SelPhaseBus1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
GblBaseSelBus 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, Bus
GblBaseSelLine 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, Line
SelPhaseBus2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
CBConfig No voltage sel. - - No voltage sel. Select CB configuration
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB

700
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Table 430: SESRSYN Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseShift -180 - 180 Deg 1 0 Additional phase angle for selected line
voltage

14.1.6 Monitored data

Table 431: SESRSYN Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UDIFFME REAL - - Calculated difference of
voltage in p.u of set
voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL - Hz Calculated difference of
frequency
PHDIFFME REAL - deg Calculated difference of
phase angle
UBUS REAL - kV Bus voltage
ULINE REAL - kV Line voltage

14.1.7 Operation principle

14.1.7.1 Basic functionality

The synchrocheck function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are
simultaneously within their set limits.

The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them
to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the actual
measured quantities match the set conditions.

The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and
also determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit
breaker, from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all
measured conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output
is timed to give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker
and the closing circuit.

For double bus single circuit breaker and 1 circuit breaker arrangements, the
SESRSYN function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage
selection. For double bus single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the correct
voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For 1 circuit
breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the
bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers.

701
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the
setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this
document. For application related information, please refer to the application manual.

14.1.7.2 Logic diagrams

Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the SESRSYN
function components such as Synchrocheck, Synchronizing, Energizing check and
Voltage selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.

Synchrocheck
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
measured in the IED centrally and are available for the synchrocheck function for
evaluation. By setting the phases used for SESRSYN, with the settings SelPhaseBus1,
SelPhaseBus2, SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2, a compensation is made
automatically for the voltage amplitude difference and the phase angle difference
caused if different setting values are selected for both sides of the breaker. If needed
an additional phase angle adjustment can be done for selected line voltage with the
PhaseShift setting.

When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start.

The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for
UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC.

If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with the
set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference: FreqDiffA,
FreqDiffM, PhaseDiffA, PhaseDiffM and UDiffSC. If additional phase angle
adjustment is done with the PhaseShift setting, the adjustment factor is deducted from
the line voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency
difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not
exceed the set value FreqDiff.

Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available
and used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as required.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and selective block of the Synchrocheck function respectively.
Input TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.

The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be
delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.

702
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions.

UOKSC shows that the voltages are high, UDIFFSC, FRDIFFA, FRDIFFM,
PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and
phase angle difference conditions are out of limits.

Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicates that the circuit
breaker has been closed at wrong phase angle by mistake. The output is activated, if
the voltage conditions are fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference
between bus and line is suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to smaller
than 5 degrees.

Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.

OperationSC = On
AND TSTAUTSY
AND

TSTSC

InvalidSelection AND
BLKSC
OR AUTOSYOK
BLOCK AND
BLOCK
0-60 s
AND t
tSCA

UDiffSC 50 ms
AND t
UHighBusSC
UOKSC
AND
UHighLineSC
UDIFFSC
1
FRDIFFA
FreqDiffA 1

PHDIFFA
PhaseDiffA 1

UDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue

32 ms 100 ms
AND t INADVCLS
PhDiff > 60 AND

PhDiff < 5

IEC07000114-5-en.vsd
IEC07000114 V5 EN

Figure 352: Simplified logic diagram for the Auto Synchrocheck function

Synchronizing
When the function is set to OperationSynch = On the measuring will be performed.

703
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values
for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the voltages are
both live. Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the set value for
UDiffSynch, which is a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both sides are higher
than the set values and the voltage difference between bus and line is acceptable, the
measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency
FreqDiffMax and FreqDiffMin, rate of change of frequency FreqRateChange and
phase angle, which has to be smaller than the internally preset value of 15 degrees.

Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency
will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation
to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle
release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK
output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function resets. The function
will also reset if the synchronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set
tMaxSynch time. This prevents that the function is, by mistake, maintained in
operation for a long time, waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively.
TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate output.

704
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

OperationSynch=On

TSTSYNCH

STARTSYN

InvalidSelection
SYNPROGR
AND
Block AND
S
OR
R
BLKSYNCH

UDiffSynch
50 ms SYNOK
AND
UHighBusSynch AND t

UHighLineSynch OR

FreqDiffMax TSTSYNOK
AND
FreqDiffMin

tClose
FreqRateChange Pulse
AND

fBus&fLine 5Hz tMax

Phase Diff < 15 deg Synch
SYNFAIL
AND
PhaseDiff=closing angle

FreqDiff
Close pulse
in advance
tBreaker

IEC06000636-4-en.vsd

IEC06000636 V4 EN

Figure 353: Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function

Energizing check
Voltage values are measured in the IED and are available for evaluation by the
Energizing check function.

The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are
live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg and
ULowBusEnerg for bus energizing and UHighLineEnerg and ULowLineEnerg for
line energizing.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.

The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the
Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs
AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision
conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed independently for
MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing direction can also be
selected by an integer input AENMODE respective MENMODE, which for example,
can be connected to a Binary to Integer function block (B16I). Integers supplied shall

705
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

be 1=Off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both. Not connected input will mean that the
setting is done from Parameter Setting tool. The active position can be read on outputs
MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and
3=Both.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function respective block of the Energizing check function. TSTENERG
will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a
separate test output.

manEnergOpenBays
MANENOK
OR

TSTENERG

BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK

selectedFuseOK

UHighBusEnerg
DLLB tManEnerg
AND
OR t
AND
OR
ULowLineEnerg AND

ManEnerg BOTH

ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND

UHighLineEnerg

TSTENOK
ManEnergDBDL AND AND

UMaxEnerg
fBus and fLine 5 Hz

IEC14000031-1-en.vsd

IEC14000031 V1 EN

Figure 354: Manual energizing

706
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

TSTENERG

BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK

selectedFuseOK

UHighBusEnerg
DLLB tAutoEnerg
AND
OR t
AND OR
AUTOENOK
ULowLineEnerg AND

AutoEnerg BOTH

ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND

UHighLineEnerg

TSTENOK
UMaxEnerg AND

fBus and fLine 5 Hz

IEC14000030-1-en.vsd

IEC14000030 V1 EN

Figure 355: Automatic energizing

BLKENERG
BLOCK OR manEnergOpenBays
AND

ManEnerg

1 bus CB
CBConfig AND

B1QOPEN
LN1QOPEN AND
OR
B1QCLD
B2QOPEN
AND

LN2QOPEN

1 bus alt. CB AND OR

AND
OR

B2QCLD
AND

Tie CB
AND
AND
OR

AND

IEC14000032-1-en.vsd

IEC14000032 V1 EN

Figure 356: Open bays

707
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Fuse failure supervision

External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected
to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN function in the IED.
Alternatively, the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used when
available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must
be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs
labelled FF must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit
is faulty.

The UB1OK/UB2OK and UB1FF/UB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and
the ULN1OK/ULN2OK and ULN1FF/ULN2FF inputs are related to the line voltage.
Configure them to the binary input or function outputs that indicate the status of the
external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the
energizing check function is blocked. The synchronizing and the synchrocheck
function requires full voltage on both sides, thus no blocking at fuse failure is needed.

Voltage selection
The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformers
for the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN function and determines
the voltages fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check functions.
This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and MCB
supervision.

The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.

If No voltage sel. is set the voltages used will be U-Line1 and U-Bus1. This setting is
also used in the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure
supervision for the used inputs must also be connected.

The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are used for the
Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check inputs.

For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts
to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible to use an
inverter for one of the positions.

If breaker or disconnector positions not are available for deciding if energizing is

allowed, it is considered to be allowed to manually energize. This is only allowed for
manual energizing in 1 breaker and Tie breaker arrangements. Manual energization
of a completely open diameter in 1 1/2 CB switchgear is allowed by internal logic.

Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars

The setting CBConfig selected for Double Bus activates the voltage selection for
single CB and double busbars. This function uses the binary input from the
disconnectors auxiliary contacts B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-
B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector
connected to bus 1 is closed and the disconnector connected to bus 2 is opened the bus
1 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 2 voltage. The outputs B1SEL
and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage.

708
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage
transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the MCB for Bus 1 and UB2OK-
UB2FF supervises the MCB for Bus 2. ULN1OK and ULN1FF supervises the MCB
for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively
be used dependent on the available signal. If a VT failure is detected in the selected
voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the
selected bus or line voltages have a VT failure. This output as well as the function can
be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in
figure 357.

B1QOPEN
B1SEL
B1QCLD AND

B2QOPEN B2SEL
AND
1
B2QCLD
invalidSelection
AND

bus1Voltage busVoltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
AND
UB2OK AND
UB2FF OR USELFAIL
AND

ULN1OK
ULN1FF OR

BLOCK

en05000779-2.vsd
IEC05000779 V2 EN

Figure 357: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars

Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement

Note that with 1 breaker schemes three Synchrocheck functions must be used for the
complete diameter. Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breaker is
described.

With the setting parameter CBConfig the selection of actual CB location in the 1 1/2
circuit breaker switchgear is done. The settings are: 1 1/2 Bus CB, 1 1/2 alt. Bus CB or
Tie CB.

709
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and
circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN
function. For the bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to the
busbar and the other side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar
depending on the best selection of voltage circuit.

Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD,

LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors
respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL
will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1
voltage, which indicates B1SEL.

The fuse supervision is connected to ULN1OK-ULN1FF, ULN2OK-ULN2FF and

with alternative Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available from
each fuse (MCB).

The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and the
other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage. Four different output
combinations are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.

The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit
breaker is closed.
The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 circuit
breaker is closed.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If
a VT failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is set. This
output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a MCB trip. This output
as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function
block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in figure 358
and for the tie circuit breaker in figure 359.

710
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD

B1QOPEN
LN2SEL
B1QCLD AND AND
B2SEL
OR
LN2QOPEN
AND invalidSelection
LN2QCLD AND
AND
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD AND

line1Voltage lineVoltage

line2Voltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK
UB1FF OR

OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR

USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR

ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000780-2.vsd

IEC05000780 V2 EN

Figure 358: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2 breaker
arrangement

711
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
B1SEL
1

B1QOPEN AND
AND
B1QCLD AND

line1Voltage busVoltage

bus1Voltage
LN2QOPEN
LN2SEL
LN2QCLD AND
B2SEL
1
invalidSelection
OR
B2QOPEN AND
AND
B2QCLD AND

line2Voltage lineVoltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR

OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR

USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR

ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000781-2.vsd

IEC05000781 V2 EN

Figure 359: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2 breaker
arrangement.

712
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.1.8 Technical data

Table 432: SESRSYN technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -

Voltage high limit for (50.0-120.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

synchronizing and 0.5% of U at U > Ur
synchrocheck
Reset ratio, synchrocheck > 95% -
Frequency difference limit (0.003-1.000) Hz 2.5 mHz
between bus and line for
synchrocheck
Phase angle difference limit (5.0-90.0) degrees 2.0 degrees
between bus and line for
synchrocheck
Voltage difference limit (0.02-0.5) p.u 0.5% of Ur
between bus and line for
synchronizing and
synchrocheck
Time delay output for (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
synchrocheck when angle greater
difference between bus and
line jumps from PhaseDiff
+ 2 degrees to PhaseDiff - 2
degrees
Frequency difference (0.003-0.250) Hz 2.5 mHz
minimum limit for
synchronizing
Frequency difference (0.050-0.500) Hz 2.5 mHz
maximum limit for
synchronizing
Maximum allowed frequency (0.000-0.500) Hz/s 10.0 mHz/s
rate of change
Breaker closing pulse (0.050-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
duration greater
tMaxSynch, which resets (0.000-6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
synchronizing function if no greater
close has been made before
set time
Minimum time to accept (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
synchronizing conditions greater
Voltage high limit for (50.0-120.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
energizing check 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, voltage high limit > 95% -

Voltage low limit for
energizing check
Reset ratio, voltage low limit
Maximum voltage for
energizing
(10.0-80.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
< 105% -
(50.0-180.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur

Table continues on next page

713
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Function Range or value Accuracy

Time delay for energizing (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 100 ms whichever is
check when voltage jumps greater
from 0 to 90% of Urated
Operate time for Min = 15 ms
synchrocheck function when Max = 30 ms
angle difference between bus
and line jumps from
PhaseDiff + 2 degrees to
PhaseDiff - 2 degrees
Operate time for energizing Min = 70 ms
function when voltage jumps Max = 90 ms
from 0 to 90% of Urated

14.2 Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase

operation SMBRREC

14.2.1 Identification
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase SMBRREC 79
and/or 3 phase
O->I

SYMBOL-L V1 EN

14.2.2 Functionality
The autorecloser SMBRREC function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-
reclosing for single or multi-breaker applications.

Up to five three-phase reclosing attempts can be included by parameter setting. The

first attempt can be single-, two and/or three phase for single phase or multi-phase
faults respectively.

Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A

priority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only close
if the fault proved to be transient.

Each autoreclosing function is configured to co-operate with the synchrocheck

function.

The autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/or delayed three pole

autoreclosing.

714
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.2.3 Function block

SMBRREC
ON BLOCKED
OFF SETON
BLKON READY
BLKOFF ACTIVE
RESET SUCCL
INHIBIT UNSUCCL
START INPROGR
STARTHS 1PT1
TRSOTF 2PT1
SKIPHS 3PT1
ZONESTEP 3PT2
TR2P 3PT3
TR3P 3PT4
THOLHOLD 3PT5
CBREADY PERMIT1P
CBPOS PREP3P
PLCLOST CLOSECB
SYNC WFMASTER
WAIT COUNT1P
RSTCOUNT COUNT2P
MODEINT COUNT3P1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
COUNT3P5
COUNTAR
MODE

IEC06000189-2-en.vsd
IEC06000189 V2 EN

Figure 360: SMBRREC function block

14.2.4 Signals
Table 433: SMBRREC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ON BOOLEAN 0 Switches the AR On (at ExternalCtrl = On)
OFF BOOLEAN 0 Switches the AR Off (at ExternalCtrl = On)
BLKON BOOLEAN 0 Sets the AR in blocked state
BLKOFF BOOLEAN 0 Releases the AR from the blocked state
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Resets the AR to initial conditions
INHIBIT BOOLEAN 0 Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
START BOOLEAN 0 Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip
signal
STARTHS BOOLEAN 0 Start HS reclosing without SC: t13PhHS
TRSOTF BOOLEAN 0 Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from
SOTF
SKIPHS BOOLEAN 0 Will skip the high speed shot and continue on
delayed shots
ZONESTEP BOOLEAN 0 Coordination between local AR and down stream
devices
TR2P BOOLEAN 0 Signal to the AR that a two-phase tripping occurred
TR3P BOOLEAN 0 Signal to the AR that a three-phase tripping
occurred
Table continues on next page

715
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Name Type Default Description

THOLHOLD BOOLEAN 0 Hold the AR in wait state
CBREADY BOOLEAN 0 CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow
start / close
CBPOS BOOLEAN 0 Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open
PLCLOST BOOLEAN 0 Power line carrier or other form of permissive signal
lost
SYNC BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing check fulfilled (for 3Ph attempts)
WAIT BOOLEAN 0 Wait for master (in Multi-breaker arrangements)
RSTCOUNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets all counters
MODEINT INTEGER 0 Integer input used to set the reclosingMode,
alternative to setting

Table 434: SMBRREC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The AR is in blocked state
SETON BOOLEAN The AR operation is switched on, operative
READY BOOLEAN Indicates that the AR function is ready for a new
sequence
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Reclosing sequence in progress
SUCCL BOOLEAN Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl
UNSUCCL BOOLEAN Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the
reclaim time
INPROGR BOOLEAN Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open
time
1PT1 BOOLEAN Single-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
2PT1 BOOLEAN Two-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
3PT1 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1
3PT2 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 2
3PT3 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 3
3PT4 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 4
3PT5 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 5
PERMIT1P BOOLEAN Permit single-phase trip, inverse signal to PREP3P
PREP3P BOOLEAN Prepare three-phase trip, control of the next trip
operation
CLOSECB BOOLEAN Closing command for CB
WFMASTER BOOLEAN Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential
reclosing
COUNT1P INTEGER Counting the number of single-phase reclosing
shots
COUNT2P INTEGER Counting the number of two-phase reclosing shots
COUNT3P1 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot
1
Table continues on next page

716
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Name Type Description

COUNT3P2 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot
2
COUNT3P3 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot
3
COUNT3P4 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot
4
COUNT3P5 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot
5
COUNTAR INTEGER Counting total number of reclosing shots
MODE INTEGER Integer output for reclosing mode

14.2.5 Settings
Table 435: SMBRREC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
ExternalCtrl Off - - Off To be set On if AR is to be used with
On external control; Off / On
ARMode 3 phase - - 1/2/3ph The AR mode selection e.g. 3ph, 1/3ph
1/2/3ph
1/2ph
1ph+1*2ph
1/2ph+1*3ph
1ph+1*2/3ph
t1 1Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open time for shot 1, single-phase
t1 3Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 6.000 Open time for shot 1, delayed reclosing
3ph
t1 3PhHS 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 0.400 Open time for shot 1, high speed reclosing
3ph
tReclaim 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Duration of the reclaim time
tSync 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum wait time for synchrocheck OK
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Maximum trip pulse duration
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Duration of the circuit breaker closing
pulse
tCBClosedMin 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Min time that CB must be closed before
new sequence allows
tUnsucCl 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Wait time for CB before indicating
Unsuccessful/Successful
Priority None - - None Priority selection between adjacent
Low terminals None/Low/High
High
tWaitForMaster 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Maximum wait time for release from
Master

717
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Table 436: SMBRREC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NoOfShots 1 - - 1 Max number of reclosing shots 1-5
2
3
4
5
StartByCBOpen Off - - Off To be set ON if AR is to be started by CB
On open position
CBAuxContType NormClosed - - NormOpen Select the CB aux contact type NC/NO for
NormOpen CBPOS input
CBReadyType CO - - CO Select type of circuit breaker ready signal
OCO CO/OCO
t1 2Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open time for shot 1, two-phase
t2 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 2, three-phase
t3 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 3, three-phase
t4 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 4, three-phase
t5 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 5, three-phase
Extended t1 Off - - Off Extended open time at loss of permissive
On channel Off/On
tExtended t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 3Ph Dead time is extended with this value
at loss of perm ch
tInhibit 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Inhibit reclosing reset time
CutPulse Off - - Off Shorten closing pulse at a new trip Off/On
On
Follow CB Off - - Off Advance to next shot if CB has been
On closed during dead time
AutoCont Off - - Off Continue with next reclosing-shot if
On breaker did not close
tAutoContWait 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Wait time after close command before
proceeding to next shot
UnsucClByCBChk NoCBCheck - - NoCBCheck Unsuccessful closing signal obtained by
CB check checking CB position
BlockByUnsucCl Off - - Off Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing
On
ZoneSeqCoord Off - - Off Coordination of down stream devices to
On local prot units AR

14.2.6 Operation principle

14.2.6.1 Logic Diagrams

The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding of
the functionality.

718
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.2.6.2 Auto-reclosing operation Off and On

Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting parameters
and through external control. With the setting Operation = On, the function is
activated while with the setting Operation = Off the function is deactivated. With the
setting Operation = On and ExternalCtrl = On , the activation/deactivation is made by
input signal pulses to the inputs ON/OFF, for example, from a control system.

When the function is set On and is operative the output SETON is activated (high). If
the input conditions CBPOS and CBREADY also are fulfilled, the automatic recloser
is prepared to start the reclosing cycle and the output signal READY on the
SMBRREC function block is activated (high).

14.2.6.3 Auto-reclosing mode selection

The Auto-reclosing mode is selected with setting ARMode = 3phase, 1/2/3ph, 1/2ph,
1ph+1*2ph, 1/2ph+1*3ph, 1ph+1*2/3ph.

As an alternative to setting the mode can be selected by connecting an integer, for

example from function block B16I to input MODEINT.

Following integers shall be used: 1=3phase, 2=1/2/3ph, 3=1/2ph, 4=1ph+1*2ph,

5=1/2ph+1*3ph or 6=1ph+1*2/3ph.

When a valid integer is connected to the input MODEINT the selected ARMode
setting will be invalid and the MODEINT input value will be used instead. The
selected mode is reported as an integer on the output MODE.

14.2.6.4 Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle

The usual way to start a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it when a selective line
protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the START input. Activation
of the START input only will start the 3 phase open timer. It should be necessary to
adjust three-phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) for different power system
configurations or during tripping at different protection stages. The input STARTHS
(start high-speed reclosing) can also be used to start a 3 phase dead time without
synchro check condition..

To start a new auto-reclosing cycle, a number of conditions of input signals need to be

met. The inputs are:

CBREADY: CB ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged operating gear
CBPOS: to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and start
was applied
No BLKON or INHIBIT signal shall be present.

After the start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal Started is set.
It can be interrupted by a signal to the INHIBIT input.

719
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

To start auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals,

one has to configure the CB Open position signal to inputs CBPOS and START and
set a parameter StartByCBOpen = On and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normally
closed). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual trip commands to
input INHIBIT.

The logic for switching the auto-recloser On/Off and the starting of the reclosing is
shown in figure 361. The following should be considered:

Setting Operation can be set to Off or On. ExternalCtrl offers the possibility of
switching by external signals to inputs ON and OFF.
SMBRREC is normally started by selective tripping. It is either a Zone 1 or
Communication aided trip, or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function
must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both
alternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the function.
START makes a first attempt with synchrocheck, STARTHS makes its first
attempt without synchrocheck. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5.
Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a time before the starting
occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to perform an auto-
reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs CBPOS and CBREADY.

Operation:On

AND
External Ctrl: On

OR
ON AND SETON
S
OR
OFF AND R

autoInitiate

initiate
OR
Additional conditions
TRSOTF AND
CBReady
start
120 ms
CBREADY AND
t AND
AND S
tCBClosedMin
CBPOS
t R
NC AND
CB Closed
CBAuxContType OR
Blocking conditions AND
NO AND READY
AND
OR
Inhibit conditions

count 0

IEC05000782-3-en.vsd

IEC05000782 V3 EN

Figure 361: Auto-reclosing Off/On and start

14.2.6.5 Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1

It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and one
extension time. There are separate settings for single- , two- and three-phase auto-
reclosing open times, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If only the START input signal is applied,

720
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

and an auto-reclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the auto-

reclosing open time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activated
in connection with the input START, the auto-reclosing open time for two-phase or
three-phase reclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting facility for three-
phase high-speed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS available for use when required. It is
activated by input STARTHS.

An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normal
shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for
permissive line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time
difference in fault clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open time
can then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter Extended t1
= On and the input PLCLOST.

14.2.6.6 Long trip signal

In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The
user can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, the
auto-reclosing open time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Off, a long trip
signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input INHIBIT.

Extended t1: On

PLCLOST Extend t1
initiate AND OR AND
AND
tTrip
t
AND
start

long duration
AND
(inhibit SMBRREC)

IEC05000783.vsd

IEC05000783 V3 EN

Figure 362: Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulse detection

Reclosing checks and the reclaim timer

When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions
must be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals are
exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. In three-
phase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It is possible to

721
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

use a synchrocheck function in the same physical device or an external one. The
release signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosing function input SYNC.
If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input can be set to TRUE (set
high). At confirmation from the synchro-check, or if the reclosing is of single-phase
or two-phase type, the signal passes on. At three-phase high-speed reclosing started by
STARTHS, synchronization is not checked, and the state of the SYNC input is
disregarded.

By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the

readiness of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing
command. If the CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready
for an Open-Close-Open sequence) this condition may not be fulfilled during the dead
time and at the moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition was however
checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB is prepared
for a Close-Open sequence.

The synchro-check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval,
tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted and
blocked.

The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which
the reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as
a continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB closing
command is given.

A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state in
the reclosing sequence.

722
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

t1 1Ph
"SMBRREC Open time" timers
t

From logic for OR 1P2PTO

t1 2Ph
reclosing t
programs
1P2PTO t1 3Ph HS
t
3PHSTO
3PHSTO
3PT1TO
t1 3Ph
3PT2TO t
3PT1TO
3PT3TO OR
AND
3PT4TO OR Pulse AR
3PT5TO AND

SYNC
initiate AND Blocking out
CBReady AND OR

SMRREC State
tSync Control
AND t COUNTER
0 Shot 0
CL Shot 1
1
2 Shot 2
3 Shot 3
Pulse (above) tReclaim
AND t R 4 Shot 4
OR Shot 5
5
TR2P LOGIC
TR3P reclosing Reclaim Timer On
1PT1
programs
start 2PT1
initiate 3PHS
INPROGR
Shot 0 3PT1 OR
Shot 1 3PT2
Shot 2
Shot 3 3PT3
Shot 4
Shot 5 3PT4
PERMIT1P
3PT5
PREP3P
1
Blocking out tInhibit
t
OR
Inhibit
Long duration OR
INHIBIT Reclaim Timer On
IEC05000784.vsd

IEC05000784 V3 EN

Figure 363: Reclosing Reclaim and Inhibit timers

Pulsing of the CB closing command

The CB closing command, CLOSECB is a pulse with a duration set by parameter
tPulse. For circuit-breakers without anti-pumping function, the close pulse cutting

723
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

described below can be used. This is done by selecting the parameter CutPulse=On.
In case of a new AR start pulse, the closing command pulse is cut (interrupted). The
minimum duration of the pulse is always 50 ms. See figure 364

When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is

incremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total number
of reclosing commands issued.

tTrip
pulse tPulse
**) AND CLOSECB
OR
initiate
50 ms CloseCB

1PT1 AND COUNT1P

counter

2PT1 AND
counter
COUNT2P

3PT1 AND COUNT3P1

counter

3PT2 AND COUNT3P2

counter

3PT3 AND COUNT3P3

counter

3PT4 AND COUNT3P4

counter

3PT5 AND COUNT3P5

counter

counter COUNTAR
RSTCOUNT

**) Only if "CutPulse" = On

IEC05000785.vsd

IEC05000785 V2 EN

Figure 364: Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters

Transient fault
After the reclosing command the reclaim timer tReclaim starts running for the set
time. If no tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.

Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal

If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and number of set reclosing shot
have been done, a new input signal connected to START or TRSOTF appears, the

724
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The timers for the first shot can
no longer be started. Depending on the setting for the number of reclosing shots,
further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence will be ended. After the reclaim
time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but the CB remains open. The CB
closed data at the CBPOS input will be missing. Because of this, the reclosing function
will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle.

Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and start is received after the
last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. The
signal resets once the reclaim time has elapsed. The unsuccessful signal can also be
made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should then
be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does not respond
to the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the output UNSUCCL
is set high after time tUnsucCl.

initiate
block start AND
OR UNSUCCL
AND S

shot 0
R

UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck

Pulse OR tUnsucCl
AND
AND t
CBclosed

IEC05000786_High.vsd

IEC05000786 V2 EN

Figure 365: Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing

Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequence

The auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosing
shots (if selected) even if the start signals are not received from the protection
functions, but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting parameter
AutoCont = On and tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function to proceed
without a new start.

725
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

tAutoContWait
t

AND

CloseCB
AND S Q

AND

CBClosed
OR

initiate

IEC05000787.vsd
IEC05000787 V2 EN

Figure 366: Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5

Start of reclosing from CB open information

If a user wants to apply starting of auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of
from protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode
is selected by a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = On. One needs then to block
reclosing at all manual trip operations. Typically, one also set CBAuxContType =
NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC (normally closed) to
inputs CBPOS and START. When the signal changes from CB closed to CB open an
auto-reclosing start pulse of limited length is generated and latched in the function,
subject to the usual checks. Then the reclosing sequence continues as usual. One needs
to connect signals from manual tripping and other functions, which shall prevent
reclosing, to the input INHIBIT.

726
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

StartByCBOpen = On
1

START AND

STARTHS AND
autoiniate
1
100 ms
AND

100 ms
AND

IEC05000788.vsd
IEC05000788 V2 EN

Figure 367: Pulsing of the start inputs

14.2.6.7 Time sequence diagrams

Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient and
permanent faults are shown below in figures 368 to 371.

Fault
CB POS
Closed Open Closed
CB READY CO)

START (Trip)
SYNC
tReclaim
READY

INPROG

1PT1

ACTIVE

CLOSE CB t1 1Ph tPulse

PREP3P

SUCCL

Time

en04000196-3-en.vsd
IEC04000196 V3 EN

Figure 368: Transient single-phase fault. Single -phase reclosing

727
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Fault
CB POS Open
Closed Open C C
CB READY (CO)

START (Trip)

TR3P
SYNC

READY

INPROGR

3PT1 t1 3Ph

3PT2 t2 3Ph

ACTIVE tReclaim

CLOSE CB tPulse tPulse

PREP3P

UNSUCCL
Time

en04000197-
2.vsd
IEC04000197 V2 EN

Figure 369: Permanent fault. Three-phase trip. Two-shot reclosing

728
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Fault
CBCLOSED
CBREADY(CO)

START

TR3P
SYNC

READY
INPROGR

1PT1

3PT1

3PT2
CLOSE CB t1s

P3P

UNSUC CL tReclaim

en04000198-2.vsd
IEC04000198 V2 EN

Figure 370: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phase

single-shot reclosing

729
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Fault
CBCLOSED
CBREADY(CO)

START

TR3P

SYNC

READY

INPROGR

1PT1

3PT1

3PT2
t2
CLOSE CB t1s

P3P

UNSUC CL tReclaim

en04000199-
2.vsd
IEC04000199 V2 EN

Figure 371: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph,
two-shot reclosing

14.2.7 Technical data

Table 437: SMBRREC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of autoreclosing shots 1-5 -
Autoreclosing open time:
shot 1 - t1 1Ph (0.000-120.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms
shot 1 - t1 2Ph whichever is greater
shot 1 - t1 3PhHS
shot 1 - t1 3Ph
shot 2 - t2 3Ph (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms
shot 3 - t3 3Ph whichever is greater
shot 4 - t4 3Ph
shot 5 - t5 3Ph
Extended autorecloser open time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms
whichever is greater
Minimum time CB must be closed before AR (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms
becomes ready for autoreclosing cycle whichever is greater
Maximum operate pulse duration (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
Reclaim time (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
Circuit breaker closing pulse length (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
Table continues on next page

730
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Function Range or value Accuracy

Wait for master release (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
Inhibit reset time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms
whichever is greater
Autorecloser maximum wait time for sync (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 45 ms
whichever is greater
CB check time before unsuccessful (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 45 ms
whichever is greater
Wait time after close command before (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms
proceeding to next shot whichever is greater

14.3 Interlocking

14.3.1 Functionality
The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage
switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent
material damage and/or accidental human injury.

Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements,
each handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each IED
is not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs
communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.

The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the
system at any given time.

14.3.2 Operation principle

The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED.
The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function.
Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus.

The reservation function (see section "Functionality") is used to ensure that HV

apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which
arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication
system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the interlocking condition
of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the operation is
performed.

After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on
the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other
operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching
devices that may affect it.

731
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay.
The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and the
switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have different
modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard
interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking
signals can include the following kind of information:

Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)

Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
External release (to add special conditions for release)
Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch)
Output signals to release the HV apparatus

The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as

shown in figure 372.

Apparatus control
Interlocking
modules
modules in
SCILO SCSWI
other bays SXSWI

Apparatus control
modules
Interlocking SCILO SCSWI SXCBR
module

Apparatus control
modules
en04000526.vsd SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

IEC04000526 V1 EN

Figure 372: Interlocking module on bay level

Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:

Unearthed busbars
Busbars connected together
Other bays connected to a busbar
Received data from other bays is valid

Figure 373 illustrates the data exchange principle.

732
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Station bus

Bay 1 Bay n Bus coupler

Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Disc QB1 and QB2 closed WA1 unearthed
WA1 unearthed
WA1 and WA2 interconn

...
WA1 not earthed WA1 not earthed
WA2 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay

..
WA1

WA2
QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QC1 QC2

QA1 QA1 QA1

QB9 QB9

en05000494.vsd
IEC05000494 V1 EN

Figure 373: Data exchange between interlocking modules

When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input board
error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for
execution of the function will not be given.

On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the
interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.

For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:

The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and earthing

switches are always identical.
Earthing switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid earthing switches, are
normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they
are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line
voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If there is no
line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set to
no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating.
Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example, without
load/voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, that is,
the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the earthing switch operation
is concerned.
Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems.
Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit
breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed
connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely
isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed connections, or
if they are earthed on both sides.
Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its
bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing

733
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between CB

and transformer.
Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar
transfer is in progress.

To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of

standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the
interlocking conditions are available:

Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE

Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC
Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO
Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS
Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC
Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES
Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B
1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B

The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific

requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration
tool PCM600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these
specific conditions.

The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the
transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in
TR are intended for transfer to other bays.

14.3.3 Logical node for interlocking SCILO

14.3.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logical node for interlocking SCILO - 3

14.3.3.2 Functionality

The Logical node for interlocking SCILO function is used to enable a switching
operation if the interlocking conditions permit. SCILO function itself does not
provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in
separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic.

734
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.3.3.3 Function block

SCILO
POSOPEN EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN

IEC05000359-2-en.vsd
IEC05000359 V2 EN

Figure 374: SCILO function block

14.3.3.4 Signals
Table 438: SCILO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN BOOLEAN 0 Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN BOOLEAN 0 Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

Table 439: SCILO Output signals

Name Type Description
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is
enabled
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is
enabled

14.3.3.5 Logic diagram

The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the
interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end
position for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case
EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the
same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the
interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit
breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable signals come from the
interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller
(SCSWI). One instance per switching device is needed.

735
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

POSOPEN SCILO
POSCLOSE =1 1
EN_OPEN
&
>1
&

OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN & EN_CLOSE
>1
&
en04000525.vsd

IEC04000525 V1 EN

Figure 375: SCILO function logic diagram

14.3.4 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES

14.3.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES - 3

14.3.4.2 Functionality

The interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES) function is used for one busbar
earthing switch on any busbar parts according to figure 376.

QC

en04000504.vsd
IEC04000504 V1 EN

Figure 376: Switchyard layout BB_ES

736
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.3.4.3 Function block

BB_ES
QC_OP QCREL
QC_CL QCITL
BB_DC_OP BBESOPTR
VP_BB_DC BBESCLTR
EXDU_BB

IEC05000347-2-en.vsd
IEC05000347 V2 EN

Figure 377: BB_ES function block

14.3.4.4 Logic diagram

BB_ES
VP_BB_DC QCREL
BB_DC_OP QCITL
EXDU_BB & 1

QC_OP BBESOPTR
QC_CL BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd

IEC04000546 V1 EN

14.3.4.5 Signals
Table 440: BB_ES Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QC_OP BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position
QC_CL BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position
BB_DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC BOOLEAN 0 Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are
valid
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar
part

Table 441: BB_ES Output signals

Name Type Description
QCREL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is allowed
QCITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is forbidden
BBESOPTR BOOLEAN QC on this busbar part is in open position
BBESCLTR BOOLEAN QC on this busbar part is in closed position

14.3.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS

737
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.3.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS - 3

14.3.5.2 Functionality

The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS) function is used for one bus-
section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 378. The function
can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1 QB1 QB2 QC2

QA1

QC3 QC4

en04000516.vsd
A1A2_BS
IEC04000516 V1 EN

Figure 378: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS

738
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.3.5.3 Function block

A1A2_BS
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPITL
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLITL
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1ITL
QC3_OP QB2REL
QC3_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC3REL
QC4_CL QC3ITL
S1QC1_OP QC4REL
S1QC1_CL QC4ITL
S2QC2_OP S1S2OPTR
S2QC2_CL S1S2CLTR
BBTR_OP QB1OPTR
VP_BBTR QB1CLTR
EXDU_12 QB2OPTR
EXDU_ES QB2CLTR
QA1O_EX1 VPS1S2TR
QA1O_EX2 VPQB1TR
QA1O_EX3 VPQB2TR
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2

IEC05000348-2-en.vsd
IEC05000348 V2 EN

Figure 379: A1A2_BS function block

739
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.3.5.4 Logic diagram

A1A2_BS
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL =1 VPS1QC1
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL =1 VPS2QC2
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1
QA1O_EX1 QA1OPITL
1
VPQB2
QB2_OP
&
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
&
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3

VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC3 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC4 QB1ITL
1
VPS1QC1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S1QC1_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC3
VPS1QC1
&
QC3_CL
S1QC1_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

en04000542.vsd

IEC04000542 V1 EN

740
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

VPQA1
VPQC3 QB2REL
VPQC4 & >1
QB2ITL
VPS2QC2 1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S2QC2_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
&
QC4_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

VPQB1 QC3REL
VPQB2 QC3ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC4REL
QB2_OP
QC4ITL
1

QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR

QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP S1S2OPTR
QB2_OP >1 S1S2CLTR
QA1_OP 1
VPQB1
VPS1S2TR
VPQB2 &
VPQA1
en04000543.vsd

IEC04000543 V1 EN

14.3.5.5 Signals
Table 442: A1A2_BS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar
transfer
Table continues on next page

741
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Name Type Default Description

EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to busbar
1 and 2
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw.
QC1 or QC2
QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 443: A1A2_BS Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC4REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is allowed
QC4ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is forbidden
S1S2OPTR BOOLEAN No bus section connection between bus section 1
and 2
S1S2CLTR BOOLEAN Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and
2 exists
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPS1S2TR BOOLEAN Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2 are
valid
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

14.3.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC

742
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.3.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section A1A2_DC - 3
disconnector

14.3.6.2 Functionality

The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC) function is used for one
bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 380. A1A2_DC
function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.

QB
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1 QC2

A1A2_DC en04000492.vsd

IEC04000492 V1 EN

Figure 380: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC

14.3.6.3 Function block

A1A2_DC
QB_OP QBOPREL
QB_CL QBOPITL
S1QC1_OP QBCLREL
S1QC1_CL QBCLITL
S2QC2_OP DCOPTR
S2QC2_CL DCCLTR
S1DC_OP VPDCTR
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBCL_EX1
QBCL_EX2
QBOP_EX1
QBOP_EX2
QBOP_EX3

IEC05000349-2-en.vsd
IEC05000349 V2 EN

Figure 381: A1A2_DC function block

743
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.3.6.4 Logic diagram

A1A2_DC
QB_OP
VPQB VPDCTR
QB_CL =1
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
S1QC1_OP
VPS1QC1
S1QC1_CL =1
S2QC2_OP
VPS2QC2
S2QC2_CL =1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS1_DC & >1 QBOPREL
S1QC1_OP QBOPITL
1
S2QC2_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_ES

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1

VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS2_DC &
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_ES

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2

VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
S1QC1_CL &
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QBOP_EX3

en04000544.vsd

IEC04000544 V1 EN

IEC04000545 V1 EN

14.3.6.5 Signals
Table 444: A1A2_DC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QB_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB is in open position
QB_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
Table continues on next page

744
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Name Type Default Description

S2QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
S1DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open
position
S2DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open
position
VPS1_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are
valid
VPS2_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are
valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw.
QC1 or QC2
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc conn to section
1 and 2
QBCL_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector
QB
QBCL_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector
QB
QBOP_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector
QB
QBOP_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector
QB
QBOP_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector
QB

Table 445: A1A2_DC Output signals

Name Type Description
QBOPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is allowed
QBOPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is forbidden
QBCLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QB is allowed
QBCLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QB is forbidden
DCOPTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in open position
DCCLTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in closed position
VPDCTR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)

14.3.7 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC

14.3.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC - 3

745
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.3.7.2 Functionality

The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) function is used for a bus-coupler
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 382. The function
can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar
arrangement without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB20 QB7
QC1

QA1

QC2

en04000514.vsd
IEC04000514 V1 EN

Figure 382: Switchyard layout ABC_BC

746
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.3.7.3 Function block

ABC_BC
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPITL
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLITL
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1ITL
QB7_OP QB2REL
QB7_CL QB2ITL
QB20_OP QB7REL
QB20_CL QB7ITL
QC1_OP QB20REL
QC1_CL QB20ITL
QC2_OP QC1REL
QC2_CL QC1ITL
QC11_OP QC2REL
QC11_CL QC2ITL
QC21_OP QB1OPTR
QC21_CL QB1CLTR
QC71_OP QB220OTR
QC71_CL QB220CTR
BBTR_OP QB7OPTR
BC_12_CL QB7CLTR
VP_BBTR QB12OPTR
VP_BC_12 QB12CLTR
EXDU_ES BC12OPTR
EXDU_12 BC12CLTR
EXDU_BC BC17OPTR
QA1O_EX1 BC17CLTR
QA1O_EX2 BC27OPTR
QA1O_EX3 BC27CLTR
QB1_EX1 VPQB1TR
QB1_EX2 VQB220TR
QB1_EX3 VPQB7TR
QB2_EX1 VPQB12TR
QB2_EX2 VPBC12TR
QB2_EX3 VPBC17TR
QB20_EX1 VPBC27TR
QB20_EX2
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2

IEC05000350-2-en.vsd
IEC05000350 V2 EN

Figure 383: ABC_BC function block

747
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.3.7.4 Logic diagram

ABC_BC
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB20_OP
QB20_CL =1 VPQB20
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1 QA1OPITL
QA1O_EX1 1
VPQB20
QB20_OP &
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP &
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQB7 & 1
VPQB20
en04000533.vsd

IEC04000533 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VP_BC_12
&
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3

en04000534.vsd

IEC04000534 V1 EN

748
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VP_BC_12
&
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3

en04000535.vsd

IEC04000535 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQB20 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB7ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC71
QA1_OP
QB20_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC71
&
QC2_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX2
VPQA1
VPQB7 QB20REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB20ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB7_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC21
&
QC2_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX2

en04000536.vsd

IEC04000536 V1 EN

749
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB20 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB7
QC2REL
VPQB2
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB20_OP
QB7_OP
QB2_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB20_OP QB220OTR
QB2_OP & QB220CTR
VPQB20 1
VQB220TR
VPQB2 &
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
QA1_OP BC12OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC12CLTR
QB20_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC12TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB20
QA1_OP BC17OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC17CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC17TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB7
QA1_OP BC27OPTR
QB2_OP >1 BC27CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC27TR
VPQB2 &
VPQB7
en04000537.vsd

IEC04000537 V1 EN

14.3.7.5 Signals
Table 446: ABC_BC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in closed position
QB20_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB20 is in open position
QB20_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB20 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
Table continues on next page

750
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
QC71_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open
position
QC71_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed
position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar
transfer
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing
switches
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to
WA1/WA2 busbars
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any other bus coupler
bay
QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB20_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB20
QB20_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB20
QB7_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7

Table 447: ABC_BC Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
Table continues on next page

751
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QB7REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is allowed
QB7ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is forbidden
QB20REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB20 is allowed
QB20ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB20 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB220OTR BOOLEAN QB2 and QB20 are in open position
QB220CTR BOOLEAN QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position
QB7OPTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in open position
QB7CLTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
BC12OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA2
BC12CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1
and WA2
BC17OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA7
BC17CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1
and WA7
BC27OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between
WA2 and WA7
BC27CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA2
and WA7
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VQB220TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid (open or
closed)
VPQB7TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or
closed)
VPBC12TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
VPBC17TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA7 are valid
VPBC27TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and
WA7 are valid

752
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.3.8 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH

14.3.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_CONN - 3
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_A - 3
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_B - 3

14.3.8.2 Functionality

The interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter (BH_CONN, BH_LINE_A,

BH_LINE_B) functions are used for lines connected to a 1 1/2 breaker diameter
according to figure 384.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC1

QA1 QA1

QC2 QC2

QB6 QB6

QC3 QC3
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B

QB61 QA1 QB62

QB9 QB9
QC1 QC2
QC9 QC9

BH_CONN
en04000513.vsd

IEC04000513 V1 EN

Figure 384: Switchyard layout 1 1/2 breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and
BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the 1 1/2 breaker switchyard
layout.

753
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.3.8.3 Function blocks

BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB1OPTR
CQA1_CL QB1CLTR
CQB61_OP VPQB1TR
CQB61_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7

IEC05000352-2-en.vsd
IEC05000352 V2 EN

Figure 385: BH_LINE_A function block

754
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB2OPTR
CQA1_CL QB2CLTR
CQB62_OP VPQB2TR
CQB62_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7

IEC05000353-2-en.vsd
IEC05000353 V2 EN

Figure 386: BH_LINE_B function block

BH_CONN
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB61_OP QB61REL
QB61_CL QB61ITL
QB62_OP QB62REL
QB62_CL QB62ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2

IEC05000351-2-en.vsd
IEC05000351 V2 EN

Figure 387: BH_CONN function block

755
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.3.8.4 Logic diagrams

BH_CONN
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL =1 VP1QC3
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL =1 VP2QC3
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB62 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VP1QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
1QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC1
VP1QC3
&
QC1_CL
1QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB62ITL
1
VP2QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
2QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC2
VP2QC3
&
QC2_CL
2QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB62 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB62_OP QC2ITL
1
en04000560.vsd

IEC04000560 V1 EN

756
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB61_OP
CQB61_CL =1 VPCQB61
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000554.vsd

IEC04000554 V1 EN

757
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB61 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB61_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1

VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB61
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3

en04000555.vsd

IEC04000555 V1 EN

CQB61_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1

VOLT_OFF
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000556.vsd

IEC04000556 V1 EN

758
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB62_OP
CQB62_CL =1 VPCQB62
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB2 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000557.vsd

IEC04000557 V1 EN

759
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

VPQA1
VPQC1 QB2REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

VPQB2 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB2_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB62 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB62_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1

VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB62
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3

en04000558.vsd

IEC04000558 V1 EN

CQB62_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1

VOLT_OFF
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000559.vsd

IEC04000559 V1 EN

760
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.3.8.5 Signals
Table 448: BH_LINE_A Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC11
QB6_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table continues on next page

761
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Name Type Default Description

QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 449: BH_LINE_A Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB6REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is allowed
QB6ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

Table 450: BH_LINE_B Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
Table continues on next page

762
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC21
QB6_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

763
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Table 451: BH_LINE_B Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB6REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is allowed
QB6ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

Table 452: BH_CONN Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
1QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 1 is in open position
1QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 1 is in closed position
2QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 2 is in open position
2QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 2 is in closed position
QB61_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
Table continues on next page

764
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Name Type Default Description

QB61_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB62_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB62_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62

Table 453: BH_CONN Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB61REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is allowed
QB61ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is forbidden
QB62REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is allowed
QB62ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden

14.3.9 Interlocking for double CB bay DB

14.3.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_A - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_B - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_LINE - 3

14.3.9.2 Functionality

The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including
DB_BUS_A, DB_BUS_B and DB_LINE functions are used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement according to figure 388.

765
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC4

QA1 QA2

DB_BUS_A DB_BUS_B
QC2 QC5

QB61 QB62

QC3

QB9
DB_LINE

QC9

en04000518.vsd
IEC04000518 V1 EN

Figure 388: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_BUS_A handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and the
disconnectors and earthing switches of this section. DB_BUS_B handles the circuit
breaker QA2 that is connected to busbar WA2 and the disconnectors and earthing
switches of this section.

766
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.3.9.3 Logic diagrams

DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB1 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

en04000547.vsd

IEC04000547 V1 EN

VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB1 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000548.vsd

IEC04000548 V1 EN

767
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB62 QA2CLREL
VPQB2 & QA2CLITL
1
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB62ITL
1
VPQC3
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC5
VPQC3
&
QC5_CL
QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1

VPQC4
VPQC21
&
QC4_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

en04000552.vsd

IEC04000552 V1 EN

VPQB62 QC4REL
VPQB2 QC4ITL
& 1
QB62_OP QC5REL
QB2_OP QC5ITL
1
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000553.vsd

IEC04000553 V1 EN

768
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

DB_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQA2 QB9REL
VPQC1 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QA2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1

& en04000549.vsd

IEC04000549 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2 & >1
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB62
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX2
VPQA2
VPQB61
&
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA2_OP
QB61_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX3
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
VPQB61
VPQB62
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX4
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
QC3_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX5
en04000550.vsd

IEC04000550 V1 EN

769
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

VPQB61
VPQB62 QC3REL
VPQB9 &
QC3ITL
1
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB9
VPVOLT QC9REL
QB9_OP &
QC9ITL
1
VOLT_OFF
en04000551.vsd

IEC04000551 V1 EN

14.3.9.4 Function block

DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB61REL
QB1_CL QB61ITL
QB61_OP QB1REL
QB61_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QB1OPTR
QC3_CL QB1CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2

IEC05000354-2-en.vsd
IEC05000354 V2 EN

Figure 389: DB_BUS_A function block

770
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

DB_LINE
QA1_OP QB9REL
QA1_CL QB9ITL
QA2_OP QC3REL
QA2_CL QC3ITL
QB61_OP QC9REL
QB61_CL QC9ITL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5

IEC05000356-2-en.vsd
IEC05000356 V2 EN

Figure 390: DB_LINE function block

DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP QA2CLREL
QA2_CL QA2CLITL
QB2_OP QB62REL
QB2_CL QB62ITL
QB62_OP QB2REL
QB62_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC4REL
QC4_CL QC4ITL
QC5_OP QC5REL
QC5_CL QC5ITL
QC3_OP QB2OPTR
QC3_CL QB2CLTR
QC21_OP VPQB2TR
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2

IEC05000355-2-en.vsd
IEC05000355 V2 EN

Figure 391: DB_BUS_B function block

771
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.3.9.5 Signals
Table 454: DB_BUS_A Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC11
QB61_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB61_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1

Table 455: DB_BUS_A Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB61REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is allowed
QB61ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

772
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Table 456: DB_BUS_B Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in open position
QA2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
QC5_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in open position
QC5_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC21
QB62_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB62_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 457: DB_BUS_B Output signals

Name Type Description
QA2CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA2 is allowed
QA2CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA2 is forbidden
QB62REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is allowed
QB62ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC4REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is allowed
QC4ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is forbidden
QC5REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC5 is allowed
QC5ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC5 is forbidden
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

773
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Table 458: DB_LINE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QA2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in open position
QA2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
QC5_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in open position
QC5_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse)
failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 459: DB_LINE Output signals

Name Type Description
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden

774
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.3.10 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE

14.3.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE - 3

14.3.10.2 Functionality

The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function is used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 392. The
function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or
a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB7
QC1

QA1

QC2

QB9
QC9

en04000478.vsd
IEC04000478 V1 EN

Figure 392: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE

775
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.3.10.3 Function block

ABC_LINE
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QB7_OP QB7REL
QB7_CL QB7ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
QC11_OP QB1OPTR
QC11_CL QB1CLTR
QC21_OP QB2OPTR
QC21_CL QB2CLTR
QC71_OP QB7OPTR
QC71_CL QB7CLTR
BB7_D_OP QB12OPTR
BC_12_CL QB12CLTR
BC_17_OP VPQB1TR
BC_17_CL VPQB2TR
BC_27_OP VPQB7TR
BC_27_CL VPQB12TR
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
QB7_EX3
QB7_EX4

IEC05000357-2-en.vsd
IEC05000357 V2 EN

Figure 393: ABC_LINE function block

776
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.3.10.4 Logic diagram

ABC_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QA1CLREL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1 QA1CLITL
& 1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB9REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC9
&
QC2_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX2

en04000527.vsd

IEC04000527 V1 EN

777
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

VPQA1 QB1REL
& 1
VPQB2
VPQC1 1 QB1ITL
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES

QB1_EX1

VPQB2 &
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

QB1_EX2

VPQC1 &
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES

QB1EX3

en04000528.vsd

IEC04000528 V1 EN

778
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

VPQA1 QB2REL
& 1
VPQB1
VPQC1 1 QB2ITL
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES

QB2_EX1

VPQB1 &
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

QB2_EX2

VPQC1 &
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES

QB2_EX3

en04000529.vsd

IEC04000529 V1 EN

779
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

VPQC9 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D 1 QB7ITL
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
QC9_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB

BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX1

VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC9
&
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
QA1_CL
QB1_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL

EXDU_BC

QB7_EX2

IEC04000530 V1 EN

780
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

VPQA1
VPQB2
& >1
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
QA1_CL
QB2_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX3
VPQC9
VPQC71
&
QC9_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX4
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
VPQB9 & 1
QC2REL
QB1_OP
QB2_OP QC2ITL
1
QB9_OP
VPQB7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT &
QC9ITL
QB7_OP 1
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
en04000531.vsd

IEC04000531 V1 EN

781
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000532.vsd

IEC04000532 V1 EN

14.3.10.5 Signals
Table 460: ABC_LINE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
Table continues on next page

782
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
QC71_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open
position
QC71_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed
position
BB7_D_OP BOOLEAN 0 Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own
bay are open
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2
BC_17_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA7
BC_17_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA7
BC_27_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA2 and WA7
BC_27_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA2 and WA7
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse)
failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
VP_BB7_D BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7
are valid
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
VP_BC_17 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA7 are valid
VP_BC_27 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and
WA7 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing
switches
EXDU_BPB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay with disconnectors
on WA7
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB7_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7

783
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Table 461: ABC_LINE Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QB7REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is allowed
QB7ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
QB7OPTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in open position
QB7CLTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB7TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or
closed)

14.3.11 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO

14.3.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO - 3

784
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.3.11.2 Functionality

The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO) function is used for a transformer
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 394. The function
is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer.
Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function can be used. This
function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1

QA1
AB_TRAFO
QC2

QC3

QA2
QA2 and QC4 are not
QC4 used in this interlocking

QB3 QB4

en04000515.vsd
IEC04000515 V1 EN

Figure 394: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO

785
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.3.11.3 Function block

AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QB3_OP QB1OPTR
QB3_CL QB1CLTR
QB4_OP QB2OPTR
QB4_CL QB2CLTR
QC3_OP QB12OPTR
QC3_CL QB12CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL VPQB2TR
QC21_OP VPQB12TR
QC21_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BC
QA1_EX1
QA1_EX2
QA1_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3

IEC05000358-2-en.vsd
IEC05000358 V2 EN

Figure 395: AB_TRAFO function block

786
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.3.11.4 Logic diagram

AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB3_OP
QB3_CL =1 VPQB3
QB4_OP
QB4_CL =1 VPQB4
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQC1 & 1

VPQC2
VPQB3
VPQB4
VPQC3
QA1_EX2
QC3_OP
QA1_EX3
QC1_CL >1
QC2_CL
QC3_CL &
QA1_EX1

en04000538.vsd

IEC04000538 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3

en04000539.vsd

IEC04000539 V1 EN

787
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3

en04000540.vsd

IEC04000540 V1 EN

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB3
QC2REL
VPQB4
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB2_OP
QB3_OP
QB4_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000541.vsd

IEC04000541 V1 EN

14.3.11.5 Signals
Table 462: AB_TRAFO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
Table continues on next page

788
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QB3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB3 is in open position
QB3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB3 is in closed position
QB4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB4 is in open position
QB4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB4 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing
switches
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QA1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 463: AB_TRAFO Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
Table continues on next page

789
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or
closed)

14.3.12 Position evaluation POS_EVAL

14.3.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Position evaluation POS_EVAL - -

14.3.12.2 Functionality

Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal
POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals OPENPOS
or CLOSEPOS.

The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.

14.3.12.3 Function block

POS_EVAL
POSITION OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS

IEC09000079_1_en.vsd

IEC09000079 V1 EN

Figure 396: POS_EVAL function block

790
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.3.12.4 Logic diagram

POS_EVAL
Position including quality POSITION OPENPOS
Open/close position of
CLOSEPOS switch device

IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN

Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is not
used.
Input position (Value) Signal quality Output OPENPOS Output CLOSEPOS
0 (Breaker Good 0 0
intermediate)
1 (Breaker open) Good 1 0
2 (Breaker closed) Good 0 1
3 (Breaker faulty) Good 0 0
Any Invalid 0 0
Any Oscillatory 0 0

14.3.12.5 Signals
Table 464: POS_EVAL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position status including quality

Table 465: POS_EVAL Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Close position

14.4 Apparatus control APC

14.4.1 Functionality
The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit
breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is
given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking,
synchrocheck, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.

Apparatus control features:

791
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Select-Execute principle to give high reliability

Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation
Selection and supervision of operator place
Command supervision
Block/deblock of operation
Block/deblock of updating of position indications
Substitution of position and quality indications
Overriding of interlocking functions
Overriding of synchrocheck
Operation counter
Suppression of mid position

Two types of command models can be used:

Direct with normal security
SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security

Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position
is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command is evaluated with an
additional supervision of the status value of the control object. The command
sequence with enhanced security is always terminated by a CommandTermination
service primitive and an AddCause telling if the command was successful or if
something went wrong.

Control operation can be performed from the local HMI with authority control if so
defined.

14.4.2 Operation principle

A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor
bank. The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the
apparatus control function directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic
sequences.

Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation

Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function block that handles
the interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the process
information used by higher-level control functions.

Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised
by one function block (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals used for
the control of a breaker respectively a disconnector are almost the same, the same
function block type is used to handle these two types of apparatuses.

The SCSWI function block is connected either to an SXCBR function block (for
circuit breakers) or to an SXSWI function block (for disconnectors and earthing
switches). The physical process in the switchyard is connected to these two function
blocks via binary inputs and outputs.

792
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and
supervision within the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a control
function reflecting the switchyard configuration. The total number used depends on
the switchyard configuration. These four types are:

Bay control QCBAY

Switch controller SCSWI
Circuit breaker SXCBR
Circuit switch SXSWI

The functions Local Remote (LOCREM) and Local Remote Control

(LOCREMCTRL), to handle the local/remote switch, and the functions Bay reserve
(QCRSV) and Reservation input (RESIN), for the reservation function, also belong to
the apparatus control function. The principles of operation, function blocks, input and
output signals and setting parameters for all these functions are described below.

14.4.3 Error handling

Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will
be set with a value. Table 466 describes the cause values given on local HMI. The
translation to AddCause values specified in IEC 61850-8-1 is shown in Table 467. For
IEC 61850-8-1 edition 2 only addcauses defined in the standard are used, for edition
1 also a number of vendor specific causes are used. The values are available in the
command response to commands from IEC61850-8-1 clients. An output L_CAUSE
on the function block for Switch controller (SCSWI), Circuit breaker (SXCBR) and
Circuit switch (SXSWI) indicates the latest value of the cause during the latest
command.
Table 466: Values for "cause" signal
Cause Name Description Supported
number
0 None Control action successfully executed X
1 Not-supported Given for Cancel request with Direct Control in Ready X
state
2 Blocked-by- Not successful since one of the downstream Loc X
switching-hierarchy switches like in CSWI has the value TRUE
3 Select-failed Cancelled due to an unsuccessful selection (select X
service)
4 Invalid-position Control action is aborted due to invalid switch position X
(Pos in XCBR or XSWI)
5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position (Pos in XCBR X
or XSWI)
6 Parameter-change- Control action is blocked due to running parameter X
in-execution change
7 Step-limit Control action is blocked, because tap changer has X
reached the limit (EndPosR or EndPosL in YLTC)
8 Blocked-by-Mode Control action is blocked, because the LN (CSWI or X
XCBR/XSWI)is in a mode (Mod) which doesnt allow any
switching
Table continues on next page

793
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Cause Name Description Supported

number
9 Blocked-by-process Control action is blocked due to some external event at X
process level that prevents a successful operation, for
example blocking indication (EEHealth in XCBR or
XSWI)
10 Blocked-by- Control action is blocked due to interlocking of switching X
interlocking devices (in CILO attribute EnaOpn.stVal=FALSE or
EnaCls.stVal=FALSE
11 Blocked-by- Control action with synchrocheck is aborted due to X
synchrocheck exceed of time limit and missing synchronism condition
12 Command-already- Control, select or cancel service is rejected, because X
in-execution control action is already running
13 Blocked-by-health Control action is blocked due to some internal event that X
prevents a successful operation (Health)
14 1-of-n-control Control action is blocked, because another control X
action in a domain (for example substation) is already
running (in any XCBR or XSWI of that domain, the
DPC.stSeld=TRUE)
15 Abortion-by-cancel Control action is aborted due to cancel service X
16 Time-limit-over Control action is terminated due to exceed of some time X
limit
17 Abortion-by-trip Control action is aborted due to a trip (PTRC with X
ACT.general=TRUE)
18 Object-not-selected Control action is rejected, because control object was X
not selected
19 Object-already- Select action is not executed, because the addressed X
selected object is already selected
20 No-access-authority Control action is blocked due to lack of access authority X
21 Ended-with- Control action executed but the end position has
overshoot overshoot
22 Abortion-due-to- Control action is aborted due to deviation between the
deviation command value and the measured value
23 Abortion-by- Control action is aborted due to the loss of connection
communication-loss with the client that issued the control
24 Blocked-by- Control action is blocked due to the data attribute X
command CmdBlk.stVal is TRUE
26 Inconsistent- The parameters between successive control services X
parameters are not consistent, for example the ctlNum of Select and
Operate service are different
27 Locked-by-other- Another client has already reserved the object X
client
-22 Wrong_CTL_Model Command from client uses wrong control model X
-24 Blocked_for_Open_ Blocked for Open command X
Cmd
-25 Blocked_For_Close Blocked for Close Command X
_Cmd
-30 longOperationTime Operation time too long X
-31 switchNotStartMovi Switch did not start moving X
ng
Table continues on next page

794
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Cause Name Description Supported

number
-32 persistantIntermedi Switch stopped in intermediate state X
ateState
-33 switchReturnedToIn Switch returned to the initial position X
itPos
-34 switchInBadState Switch is in a bad position state X
-35 notExpectedFinalPo Switch did not reach the expected final position X
sition

Table 467: Translation of cause values for IEC61850 edition 2 and edition 1
Internal Cause AddCause in IEC61850-8-1 Name
Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
0 25 0 None
1 1 1 Not-supported
2 2 2 Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
3 3 3 Select-failed
4 4 4 Invalid-position
5 5 5 Position-reached
6 6 6 Parameter-change-in-execution
7 7 7 Step-limit
8 8 8 Blocked-by-Mode
9 9 9 Blocked-by-process
10 10 10 Blocked-by-interlocking
11 11 11 Blocked-by-synchrocheck
12 12 12 Command-already-in-execution
13 13 13 Blocked-by-health
14 14 14 1-of-n-control
15 15 1 Abortion-by-cancel
16 16 16 Time-limit-over
17 17 17 Abortion-by-trip
18 18 18 Object-not-selected
19 19 3 Object-already-selected
20 20 3 No-access-authority
21 21 - Ended-with-overshoot
22 22 - Abortion-due-to-deviation
23 23 - Abortion-by-communication-loss
24 24 -23 Blocked-by-command
26 26 6 Inconsistent-parameters
27 27 12 Locked-by-other-client
-22 0 -22 Wrong_CTL_Model
Table continues on next page

795
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Internal Cause AddCause in IEC61850-8-1 Name

Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
-24 24 -24 Blocked_for_Open_Cmd
-25 24 -25 Blocked_For_Close_Cmd
-30 24 -30 longOperationTime
-31 16 -31 switchNotStartMoving
-32 16 -32 persistantIntermediateState
-33 22 -33 switchReturnedToInitPos
-34 4 -34 switchInBadState
-35 22 -35 notExpectedFinalPosition

14.4.4 Bay control QCBAY

14.4.4.1 Functionality

The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local
remote control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY
also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within
the bay.

14.4.4.2 Function block

QCBAY
LR_OFF PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID LOC
BL_UPD STA
BL_CMD REM

IEC10000048-2-en.vsd
IEC10000048 V2 EN

Figure 397: QCBAY function block

14.4.4.3 Signals
Table 468: QCBAY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Remote
position
LR_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command

796
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Table 469: QCBAY Output signals

Name Type Description
PSTO INTEGER Value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN Function is blocked for commands
LOC BOOLEAN Local operation allowed
STA BOOLEAN Station operation allowed
REM BOOLEAN Remote operation allowed

14.4.4.4 Settings
Table 470: QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AllPSTOValid Priority - - Priority Override Priority of originators,
No priority commands from both local, station and
remote are allowed
RemoteIncStation No - - No Both Station and Remote control are
Yes allowed but not Local when local remote
switch is in remote

14.4.4.5 Operation principle

The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and
blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch control
functions and voltage control functions. The functionality of the Bay control
(QCBAY) function is mainly described by the LLN0 node in the IEC61850-8-1
edition 2 standard, applied to one bay. In IEC61850 edition 1 the functionality is not
described by the LLN0 node or any other node, therefore the Bay control function is
represented as a vendor specific node in edition 1.

Local panel switch

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch
connected to this function can have three positions (remote/local/off). The positions
are here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station and/or
remote level and local means that operation is allowed from the IED level. The local/
remote switch is also on the control/protection IED itself, which means that the
position of the switch and its validity information are connected internally, not via I/
O boards. When the switch is mounted separately from the IED the signals are
connected to the function via I/O boards.

When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to select
this) is in Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If
the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set
to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate.

797
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the
function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to
QCBAY.

Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source
To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch
position according to Table 471. In addition, there are two parameters that affect the
value of the PSTO signal.

If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LR-switch position is in Local or Remote

state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is permitted to operate from both local
and remote level without any priority. When the external panel switch is in Off
position the PSTO value shows the actual state of the switch that is, 0. In this case it
is not possible to control anything

If the parameter RemoteIncStation is set and the LR-switch position is in Remote state,
the PSTO value is set to 2 (Station or Remote), that is, it is permitted to operate from
both station and remote level without any priority.
Table 471: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel PSTO AllPSTOValid RemoteInc LocSta.CtlVal Possible
switch positions value (setting Station (command) locations that
parameter) (setting shall be able to
parameter) operate
0 = Off 0 - - - Not possible
to operate
1 = Local 1 Priority - - Local Panel
1 = Local 5 No priority - - Local or
Remote level
without any
priority
2 = Remote 6 Priority No TRUE Station level
2 = Remote 7 No priority No FALSE Remote level
2 = Remote 2 Priority Yes - Station or
Remote level
2 = Remote 5 No priority - - Local, Station
or Remote
level without
any priority
3 = Faulty 3 - - - Not possible
to operate

Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the
possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within
a complete bay.

The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:

798
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs
related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands
are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the IED Users tool
in PCM600.

14.4.5 Local/Remote switch LOCREM

The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are connected
via the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control QCBAY
function block. The parameter ControlMode in function block LOCREM is set to
choose if the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external
hardware switch connected via binary inputs.

14.4.5.1 Function block

LOCREM
CTRLOFF OFF
LOCCTRL LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL VALID

IEC05000360-2-en.vsd
IEC05000360 V2 EN

Figure 398: LOCREM function block

LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO10 HMICTR10
PSTO11 HMICTR11
PSTO12 HMICTR12

IEC05000361-2-en.vsd
IEC05000361 V2 EN

Figure 399: LOCREMCTRL function block

799
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.4.5.2 Signals
Table 472: LOCREM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control
LHMICTRL INTEGER 0 LHMI control

Table 473: LOCREM Output signals

Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Control is disabled
LOCAL BOOLEAN Local control is activated
REMOTE BOOLEAN Remote control is activated
VALID BOOLEAN Outputs are valid

Table 474: LOCREMCTRL Input signals

Name Type Default Description
PSTO1 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 1
PSTO2 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 2
PSTO3 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 3
PSTO4 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 4
PSTO5 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 5
PSTO6 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 6
PSTO7 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 7
PSTO8 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 8
PSTO9 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 9
PSTO10 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 10
PSTO11 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 11
PSTO12 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 12

Table 475: LOCREMCTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMICTR1 INTEGER Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR2 INTEGER Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR3 INTEGER Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR4 INTEGER Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR5 INTEGER Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR6 INTEGER Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input
Table continues on next page

800
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Name Type Description

HMICTR7 INTEGER Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR8 INTEGER Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR9 INTEGER Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR10 INTEGER Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR11 INTEGER Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR12 INTEGER Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input

14.4.5.3 Settings
Table 476: LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ControlMode Internal LR-switch - - Internal LR-switch Control mode for internal/external LR-
External LR-switch switch

14.4.5.4 Operation principle

The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the
local/remote switch. The connections are seen in Figure 400, where the inputs on
function block LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used.
When the local HMI is used, the inputs are not used. The switching between external
and local HMI source is done through the parameter ControlMode. The outputs from
the LOCREM function block control the output PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate)
on Bay control (QCBAY).

801
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM

LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM

LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO 10 HMICTR 10
PSTO 11 HMICTR 11
PSTO 12 HMICTR 12

IEC10000052-1-en.vsd
IEC10000052 V2 EN

Figure 400: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two
bays and two screen pages

If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be
different for the included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the local/
remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page
that is presented on the local HMI. The function block Local remote control
(LOCREMCTRL) controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position
to applicable bay and screen page.

The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the IED Users tool
in PCM600.

14.4.6 Switch controller SCSWI

802
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.4.6.1 Functionality

The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly
select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle
and operate on one three-phase device or up to three one-phase devices.

14.4.6.2 Function block

SCSWI
BLOCK EXE_OP
PSTO EXE_CL
L_SEL SEL_OP
L_OPEN SEL_CL
L_CLOSE SELECTED
AU_OPEN RES_RQ
AU_CLOSE START_SY
BL_CMD CANC_SY
RES_GRT POSITION
RES_EXT OPENPOS
SY_INPRO CLOSEPOS
SYNC_OK POLEDISC
EN_OPEN CMD_BLK
EN_CLOSE L_CAUSE
XPOS1 POS_INTR
XPOS2 XOUT
XPOS3

IEC05000337-3-en.vsd
IEC05000337 V3 EN

Figure 401: SCSWI function block

14.4.6.3 Signals
Table 477: SCSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection
L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT BOOLEAN 0 Positive acknowledge that all reservations are
made
RES_EXT BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 0 Closing is permitted at set to true by the
synchrocheck
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation
Table continues on next page

803
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Name Type Default Description

XPOSL1 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL
XPOSL2 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL
XPOSL3 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL

Table 478: SCSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Execute command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Execute command for close direction
SEL_OP BOOLEAN Selected for open command
SEL_CL BOOLEAN Selected for close command
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
RES_RQ BOOLEAN Request signal to the reservation function
START_SY BOOLEAN Starts the external synchronizing function
CANC_SY BOOLEAN Cancels the external synchronizing function,
started through START_SY
POSITION INTEGER Position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position indication
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Closed position indication
POLEDISC BOOLEAN The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after a
set time
CMD_BLK BOOLEAN Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
POS_INTR BOOLEAN Stopped in intermediate position
XOUT BOOLEAN Execution information to XCBR/XSWI

AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are used to issue automated commands

as e.g. for load shedding for opening respectively closing to the
SCSWI function. They work without regard to how the operator place
selector, PSTO, is set. In order to have effect on the outputs EXE_OP
and EXE_CL, the corresponding enable input, EN_OPEN
respectively EN_CLOSE must be set, and that no interlocking is
active.

L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are used for local command

sequence connected to binary inputs. In order to have effect, the
operator place selector, PSTO, must be set to local or to remote with
no priority. If the control model used is Select before operate, Also the
corresponding enable input must be set, and no interlocking is active.

804
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

The L_SEL input must be set before L_OPEN or L_CLOSE is

operated, if the control model is Select before operate.

14.4.6.4 Settings
Table 479: SCSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CtlModel Dir Norm - - SBO Enh Specifies control model type
SBO Enh
PosDependent Always permitted - - Always permitted Permission to operate depending on the
Not perm at 00/11 position
tSelect 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time between select and
execute signals
tResResponse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Allowed time from reservation request to
reservation granted
tSynchrocheck 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil
close conditions
tSynchronizing 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 0.00 Supervision time to get the signal
synchronizing in progress
tExecutionFB 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time from command execution
to termination
tPoleDiscord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Allowed time to have discrepancy
between the poles
SuppressMidPos Off - - On Mid-position is suppressed during the
On time tIntermediate
InterlockChk Sel & Op phase - - Sel & Op phase Selection if interlock check should be
Op phase done in select phase

14.4.6.5 Operation principle

The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select -
execute sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation are
fulfilled. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking,
reservation, blockings and synchrocheck.

Control handling
.
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with
normal security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The
parameter CtlModel defines which one of the two control models is used. The control
model "direct with normal security" does not require a select whereas, the "SBO with
enhanced security" command model requires a select before execution.

Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position
is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised
in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position.
Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the

805
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command
sequence, the sequence is terminated. The last error (L_CAUSE) can be read from the
function block and used for example at commissioning.

There is no relation between the command direction and the actual

position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to
execute a close command.

Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter

PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no
execution command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution command is sent
independent of the position value.

Evaluation of position
The position output from the switches (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to the switch
controller SCSWI. The XPOS1, XPOS2 and XPOS3 input signals receive the
position, time stamps and quality attributes of the position which is used for further
evaluation.

In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control
function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the
resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the one-
phase switches, following principles will be applied:

All switches in open position: switch control position = open

All switches in close position:
One switch =open, two switches= close (or
inversely):
Any switch in intermediate position:
Any switch in bad state:
switch control position = close
switch control position = intermediate
switch control position = intermediate
switch control position = bad state

The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the
time stamp of the last changed phase when it reaches the end position. When it goes
to intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed
phase.

In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change
position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discordance and is
supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance situation, that is, the
positions of the one-phase switches are not equal positions for a time longer than the
setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.

In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values
from the switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch (SXSWI). At error
the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.

806
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Blocking principles
The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY)
and via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.

The different blocking possibilities are:

Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of

position.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands
are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this
function, that is, no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other
functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile
memory.

Dependence on Operator place

For commands from communication protocol, such as IEC 61850-8-1 and DNP, and
through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE, the operator place is evaluated,
and only commands from enabled operator places are accepted, see Table 471.
Commands through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are always from the
local operator place. For commands through the inputs AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE,
the operator place is not evaluated, thus also accepted when the operator place selector
is set to Faulty or Off.

Interaction with synchrocheck and synchronizing functions

The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and the
synchronizing function (SESRSYN). It is assumed that the synchrocheck function is
continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result from the
synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator
performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the synchrocheck state is
omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function,
SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function Circuit breaker
(SXCBR).

When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, SCSWI will
send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the
closing command to SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see
Figure 402. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of the
"synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the
synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-by-
synchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in Figure 406.

807
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

SCSWI SXCBR
EXE_CL
OR CLOSE

SYNC_OK
START_SY
CANC_SY
SY_INPRO
SESRSYN

CLOSECB
Synchro Synchronizing
check function

IEC09000209-2-en.vsd
IEC09000209 V2 EN

Figure 402: Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (synchrocheck

and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function

Time diagrams
The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time
supervision conditions. These timers are explained here.

The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute
command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution
after the selection of the object to operate.

select
execute command
tSelect
timer t1 t1>tSelect, then long-
operation-time in 'cause'
is set

en05000092.vsd

IEC05000092 V1 EN

Figure 403: tSelect

The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, that is, the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation
granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.

808
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

select

reservation request RES_RQ

reservation granted RES_GRT

t1>tResResponse, then 1-
tResResponse
of-n-control in 'cause' is
timer t1
set
IEC05000093-2-en.vsd

IEC05000093 V2 EN

Figure 404: tResResponse

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see Figure 405.

execute command

position L1 open

close

position L2 open

close

position L3 open

close

cmd termination L1

cmd termination L2

cmd termination L3

cmd termination *

position open

close

t1>tExecutionFB, then
tExecutionFB timer long-operation-time in
t1 'cause' is set

* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample . APCtExecutionFB=IEC0

5000094=2=en=Original
.vsd
IEC05000094 V2 EN

Figure 405: tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between
the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at
the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not
start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck conditions
are not fulfilled.

809
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

The parameter tSynchronizing is used to define the maximum allowed time between
the start signal for synchronizing and the confirmation that synchronizing is in
progress.

execute command

SYNC_OK

tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY

SY_INPRO

tSynchronizing t2>tSynchronizing, then

t2 blocked-by-synchrocheck in
'cause' is set

en05000095.vsd

IEC05000095 V1 EN

Figure 406: tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing

14.4.7 Circuit breaker SXCBR

14.4.7.1 Functionality

The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions
and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary
apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to supervise
the switching operation and position.

14.4.7.2 Function block

SXCBR
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE OP_BLKD
BL_OPEN CL_BLKD
BL_CLOSE UPD_BLKD
BL_UPD OPENPOS
POSOPEN CLOSEPOS
POSCLOSE TR_POS
CBOPCAP CNT_VAL
TR_OPEN L_CAUSE
TR_CLOSE EEHEALTH
RS_CNT CBOPCAP
EEH_WARN
EEH_ALM
XIN*

IEC05000338-3-en.vsd

IEC05000338 V4 EN

Figure 407: SXCBR function block

810
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.4.7.3 Signals
Table 480: SXCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
CBOPCAP INTEGER 3 Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
CO, 4 = OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More
TR_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI

Table 481: SXCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for CB
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
TR_POS INTEGER Truck position indication
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or alarm,
2=Warning, 3=Alarm
CBOPCAP INTEGER Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
CO, 4 = OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More

811
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.4.7.4 Settings
Table 482: SXCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count
value)

14.4.7.5 Operation principle

The Circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is used by other functions such as for example,
switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client
residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes
commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time supervision
conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the
function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the
function indicates an appropriate "cause" value, see Table 466.

SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from local HMI,
a binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the
Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) for example. The health of the
external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according to IEC 61850-8-1. The
operation counter functionality and the external equipment health supervision are
independent sub-functions of the circuit breaker function.

Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to
TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the
signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted.
When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) are rejected,
even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the
local/remote switch is described in Figure 408.

812
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN

Figure 408: Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles
SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch
controller, protection functions and autoreclosure.

The blocking possibilities are:

Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function
is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are
rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution
The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position and quality of
the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because that the real process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR will then use
the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the
process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the

position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When
substitution is enabled, the other signals related to the position follow
the substituted position. The substituted values are stored in a non-
volatile memory. If the function is blocked or blocked for update when
the substitution is released, the position value is kept the same as the
last substitution value, but the quality is changed to "questionable, old
data", indicating that the value is old and not reliable.

813
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

When the position of the SXCBR is substituted, its IEC 61850-8-1

data object is marked as substituted", in addition to the substituted
quality, but the position quality of the connected SCSWI is not
dependent on the substitution indication in the quality, so it does not
show that it is derived from a substituted value.

Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 409 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

IEC05000097 V1 EN

Figure 409: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to
be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive
with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 410 shows the principle of
the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect on both
execute output pulses.

814
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd

IEC05000098 V1 EN

Figure 410: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.

If the breaker reaches the final position before the execution pulse
time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the function waits for
the end of the execution pulse before telling the activating function
that the command is completed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed
position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional
condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output
pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the
pulse duration timer has elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and

CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.

An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is

shown in Figure 411 .

815
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd

IEC05000099 V1 EN

Figure 411: Open command with open position indication

14.4.8 Circuit switch SXSWI

14.4.8.1 Functionality

The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of
positions and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to
primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or earthing switches via binary
output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

14.4.8.2 Function block

SXSWI
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE OP_BLKD
BL_OPEN CL_BLKD
BL_CLOSE UPD_BLKD
BL_UPD OPENPOS
POSOPEN CLOSEPOS
POSCLOSE CNT_VAL
SWOPCAP L_CAUSE
RS_CNT EEHEALTH
EEH_WARN SWOPCAP
EEH_ALM
XIN

IEC05000339-3-en.vsd
IEC05000339 V3 EN

Figure 412: SXSWI function block

816
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.4.8.3 Signals
Table 483: SXSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
SWOPCAP INTEGER 4 Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = C,
4 = O and C
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI

Table 484: SXSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for DIS
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or alarm,
2=Warning, 3=Alarm
SWOPCAP INTEGER Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = C,
4 = O and C

817
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.4.8.4 Settings
Table 485: SXSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 15.000 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
SwitchType Load Break - - Disconnector 1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector,
Disconnector 3=EarthSw,4=HighSpeedEarthSw
Earthing Switch
HS Earthing Switch
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count
value)

14.4.8.5 Operation principle

The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) are other functions such as for example,
switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client
residing in another IED or the operator place. SXSWI executes commands, evaluates
block conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all
conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, SXSWI performs the execution
command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate
"cause" value, see Table 466.

SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary
input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point
Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC), for example.

Also, the health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according to
IEC 61850-8-1.

Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to
TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the
signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted.
When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal
IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected.
The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in Figure 413.

818
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN

Figure 413: Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles
SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch
controller, protection functions and autorecloser.

The blocking possibilities are:

Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function
is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are
rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution
The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position and quality of the
switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because the real process value is erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use the
manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the

position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When
substitution is enabled, the other signals related to the position follow
the substituted position. The substituted values are stored in a non-
volatile memory. If the function is blocked or blocked for update when
the substitution is released, the position value is kept the same as the
last substitution value, but the quality is changed to "questionable, old
data", indicating that the value is old and not reliable.

819
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

When the position of the SXSWI is substituted, its IEC 61850-8-1 data
object is marked as substituted", in addition to the substituted
quality, but the position quality of the connected SCSWI is not
dependent on the substitution indication in the quality, so it does not
show that it is derived from a substituted value.

Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 414 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

IEC05000097 V1 EN

Figure 414: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to
be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive
with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 415 shows the principle of
the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect on both
execute output pulses.

820
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd

IEC05000098 V1 EN

Figure 415: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.

If the controlled primary device reaches the final position before the
execution pulse time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the
function waits for the end of the execution pulse before telling the
activating function that the command is completed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position
and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always
activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse
duration timer has elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and

CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.

An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is

shown in Figure 416.

821
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd

IEC05000099 V1 EN

Figure 416: Open command with open position indication

14.4.9 Bay reserve QCRSV

14.4.9.1 Functionality

The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking

information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay,
switchyard part, or complete substation.

14.4.9.2 Function block

QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

IEC05000340-2-en.vsd
IEC05000340 V2 EN

Figure 417: QCRSV function block

822
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.4.9.3 Signals
Table 486: QCRSV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
EXCH_IN INTEGER 0 Used for exchange signals between different
BayRes blocks
RES_RQ1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 1 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 2 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 3 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ4 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 4 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ5 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 5 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ6 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 6 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ7 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 7 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ8 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 8 that requests to do a reservation
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is not possible and the output signals
are reset
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to override the reservation
RES_DATA INTEGER 0 Reservation data coming from function block ResIn

Table 487: QCRSV Output signals

Name Type Description
RES_GRT1 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 1 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT2 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 2 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT3 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 3 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT4 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 4 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT5 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 5 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT6 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 6 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT7 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 7 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT8 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 8 is allowed to
operate
RES_BAYS BOOLEAN Request for reservation of other bays
ACK_TO_B BOOLEAN Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved
RESERVED BOOLEAN Indicates that the bay is reserved
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different
BayRes blocks

823
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.4.9.4 Settings
Table 488: QCRSV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tCancelRes 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Supervision time for canceling the
reservation
ParamRequest1 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 1
ParamRequest2 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 2
ParamRequest3 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 3
ParamRequest4 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 4
ParamRequest5 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 5
ParamRequest6 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 6
ParamRequest7 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 7
ParamRequest8 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 8

14.4.9.5 Operation principle

The Bay reserve (QCRSV) function handles the reservation. QCRSV function starts
to operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay
or if there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve
the function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the own bay is
the input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller (SCWI). The
signals for request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and V_RE_RQ from
function block RESIN. These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN
and are connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV.

The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay only
(TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no
reservation request RES_BAYS is created.

Reservation request of own bay

If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to know
which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with the input
signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the number of the
requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of the current bay can
be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already is reserved by itself
or another bay. This information is available in the output signal RESERVED.

If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx
(where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch

824
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command sequence will be reset
and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal.

Reservation of other bays

When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay that
requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If not, it
will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and wait for
their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done by
activating the output RES_BAYS.

When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the
output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not
acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI
(tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-n-
control" in the "cause" signal.

Reservation request from another bay

When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding
function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped into
the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input RES_DATA in
QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the acknowledgment
from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the bay already is reserved
the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.

Blocking and overriding of reservation

If QCRSV function is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is
blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay. This
can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent
operations from another operator place at the same time.

The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the OVERRIDE
input signal, that is, reserving the own bay without waiting for the external
acknowledge.

Bay with more than eight apparatuses

If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay that is, use of up to eight apparatuses,
the input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE.

If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional
QCRSV. The two QCRSV functions have to communicate and this is done through
the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to Figure 418. If more than one
QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must be
in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.

825
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_BAYS
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 1
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 ACK_TO_B
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 1
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B RESERVED
1
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

IEC05000088_2_en.vsd
IEC05000088 V2 EN

Figure 418: Connection of two QCRSV function blocks

14.4.10 Reservation input RESIN

14.4.10.1 Functionality

The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the reservation information from
other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up
to 60 instances are available).

14.4.10.2 Function block

RESIN1
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

IEC05000341-2-en.vsd
IEC05000341 V2 EN

Figure 419: RESIN1 function block

826
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

RESIN2
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC09000807_1_en.vsd
IEC09000807 V1 EN

Figure 420: RESIN2 function block

14.4.10.3 Signals
Table 489: RESIN1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknow. the reservation req. from
this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reserv. and acknow. signals from another bay
are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay

Table 490: RESIN1 Output signals

Name Type Description
ACK_F_B BOOLEAN All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays
are valid
RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different ResIn
blocks

Table 491: RESIN2 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
EXCH_IN INTEGER 5 Used for exchange signals between different ResIn
blocks
BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknow. the reservation req. from
this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reserv. and acknow. signals from another bay
are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay

827
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Table 492: RESIN2 Output signals

Name Type Description
ACK_F_B BOOLEAN All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays
are valid
RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different ResIn
blocks

14.4.10.4 Settings
Table 493: RESIN1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FutureUse Bay in use - - Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future
Bay future use use

Table 494: RESIN2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FutureUse Bay in use - - Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future
Bay future use use

14.4.10.5 Operation principle

The reservation input (RESIN) function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions.
The logic diagram in Figure 421 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs
of the function block are connected to a receive function block representing signals
transferred over the station bus from another bay.

828
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

EXCH_IN INT

BIN

ACK_F_B
&
FutureUse
1

ANY_ACK
BAY_ACK 1

VALID_TX
&

BAY_VAL 1

RE_RQ_B
1

BAY_RES &
V _RE_RQ
1

BIN
EXCH_OUT
INT

en05000089.vsd
IEC05000089 V1 EN

Figure 421: Logic diagram for RESIN

Figure 422 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules
in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay" used in the
reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions
are connected to the module bay reserve (QCRSV) that handles the reservation
function in the own bay.

829
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
Bay 1 BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay 2 BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay n BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B QCRSV
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT RES_DATA

en05000090.vsd
IEC05000090 V2 EN

Figure 422: Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN

14.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGAPC

14.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic rotating switch for function SLGAPC - -
selection and LHMI presentation

14.5.2 Functionality
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC (or
the selector switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch
functionality compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware
selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions
operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance
issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase portfolio. The selector
switch function eliminates all these problems.

830
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.5.3 Function block

SLGAPC
BLOCK ^P01
PSTO ^P02
UP ^P03
DOWN ^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN

IEC14000005-1-en.vsd
IEC14000005 V1 EN

Figure 423: SLGAPC function block

14.5.4 Signals
Table 495: SLGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command

Table 496: SLGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
P01 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 1
P02 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 2
P03 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 3
P04 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 4
P05 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 5
Table continues on next page

831
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

P06 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 6
P07 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 7
P08 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 8
P09 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 9
P10 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 10
P11 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 11
P12 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 12
P13 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 13
P14 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 14
P15 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 15
P16 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 16
P17 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 17
P18 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 18
P19 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 19
P20 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 20
P21 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 21
P22 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 22
P23 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 23
P24 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 24
P25 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 25
P26 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 26
P27 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 27
P28 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 28
P29 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 29
P30 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 30
P31 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 31
P32 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 32
SWPOSN INTEGER Switch position (integer)

14.5.5 Settings
Table 497: SLGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
NrPos 2 - 32 - 1 32 Number of positions in the switch
OutType Pulsed - - Steady Output type, steady or pulse
Steady
Table continues on next page

832
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate pulse duration, in [s]
tDelay 0.000 - 60000.000 s 0.010 0.000 Time delay on the output, in [s]
StopAtExtremes Disabled - - Disabled Stop when min or max position is reached
Enabled

14.5.6 Monitored data

Table 498: SLGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SWPOSN INTEGER - - Switch position (integer)

14.5.7 Operation principle

The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC)
function has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the
UP input, the function will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
ascending order (for example if the present activated output is P03 and one activates
the UP input then the output P04 will be activated). When a signal is received on the
DOWN input, the function will activate the output next to the present activated output,
in descending order (for example if the present activated output is P03 and one
activates the DOWN input then the output P02 will be activated). Depending on the
output settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, the
output will be active till the time it receives next operation of UP/DOWN inputs. Also,
depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN
activation signal positive front and the output activation.

Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application

Configuration tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired
position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or
remotely, using a select before execute dialog. One can block the function
operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be
kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is
specified through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE
from the Fixed signal function block can be connected. SLGAPC function block has
also an integer value output, that generates the actual position number. The positions
and the block names are fully settable by the user. These names will appear in the
menu, so the user can see the position names instead of a number.

14.5.7.1 Graphical display

There are two possibilities for SLGAPC

833
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual
position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but
only the first three letters of the name will be used.

In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when
building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control, the
following sequence of commands will ensure:

From the graphical display:

Control
Control Single Line Diagram
Measurements Commands
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Change to the "Switches" page Reset
of the SLD by left-right arrows. Authorization
Select switch by up-down Language
arrows

../Control/SLD/Switch
O I ../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control SMBRREC control
WFM Select switch. Press the
WFM
I or O key. A dialog box
Pilot setup appears.
Pilot setup
OFF OFF
Damage control E P: Disc N: Disc Fe
DAL
The pos will not be modified
(outputs will not be activated) until OK Cancel
you press the E-button for O.K.

../Control/SLD/Switch

SMBRREC control
WFM

Pilot setup
OFF

Damage control
DFW

IEC06000421-2-en.vsd
IEC06000421 V2 EN

Figure 424: Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the single line diagram on local HMI.

14.6 Selector mini switch VSGAPC

834
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Selector mini switch VSGAPC - -

14.6.2 Functionality
The Selector mini switch VSGAPC function block is a multipurpose function used for
a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.

VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single line
diagram (SLD) on the local HMI.

14.6.3 Function block

VSGAPC
BLOCK BLOCKED
PSTO POSITION
IPOS1 POS1
IPOS2 POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21

IEC14000066-1-en.vsd
IEC14000066 V1 EN

Figure 425: VSGAPC function block

14.6.4 Signals
Table 499: VSGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input

Table 500: VSGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is
blocked
POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer
POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1

835
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.6.5 Settings
Table 501: VSGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CtlModel Dir Norm - - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model
SBO Enh according to IEC 61850
Mode Steady - - Pulsed Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute
signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght

14.6.6 Operation principle

Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can be used for double purpose, in the same
way as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:

for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the
IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1
and POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed
in the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.

It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is associated

with a controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed on
the screen. A symbol is created and configured in GDE tool in
PCM600.

The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of
operators place, operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote).
An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow
operation from local HMI.

As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit

representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the
desired result.

The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the
name of the string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.

836
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value

0 0 PosUndefined P00
1 0 Position1 P01
0 1 Position2 P10
1 1 PosBadState P11

14.7 Generic communication function for Double Point

indication DPGAPC

14.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Generic communication function for DPGAPC - -
Double Point indication

14.7.2 Functionality
Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC function
block is used to send double indications to other systems, equipment or functions in
the substation through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It is
especially used in the interlocking station-wide logics.

14.7.3 Function block

IEC13000081 V1 EN

Figure 426: DPGAPC function block

14.7.4 Signals
Table 502: DPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication

837
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Table 503: DPGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
POSITION INTEGER Double point indication

14.7.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

14.7.6 Operation principle

When receiving the input signals, DPGAPC sends the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to
the systems, equipment or functions that requests and thus subscribes on these signals.
To be able to get the signals into other systems, equipment or functions, one must use
other tools, described in the Engineering manual and define which function block in
which systems, equipment or functions should receive this information.

14.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC

14.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC - -

14.8.2 Functionality
The Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC function block is a collection
of 8 single point commands that can be used for direct commands for example reset of
LED's or putting IED in "ChangeLock" state from remote. In this way, simple
commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation.
Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by
other means, such as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks. The commands can
be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time.

838
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.8.3 Function block

SPC8GAPC
BLOCK ^OUT1
PSTO ^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8

IEC07000143-3-en.vsd
IEC07000143 V3 EN

Figure 427: SPC8GAPC function block

14.8.4 Signals
Table 504: SPC8GAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the function operation
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection

Table 505: SPC8GAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8

14.8.5 Settings
Table 506: SPC8GAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PulseMode1 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 1
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 1
PulseMode2 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 2
tPulse2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 2
Table continues on next page

839
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PulseMode3 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 3
tPulse3 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 3
PulseMode4 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 4
tPulse4 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 4
PulseMode5 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 5
tPulse5 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 5
PulseMode6 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 6
tPulse6 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 6
PulseMode7 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 7
tPulse7 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 7
PulseMode8 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 8
tPulse8 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 8

14.8.6 Operation principle

The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of the
eight outputs is activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected.
The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if
the signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will
block the operation of the function in case a command is sent, no output will be
activated.

PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions.
Although, PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator
places, only REMOTE operator place is used in SPC8GAPC function.

14.9 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS

14.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
AutomationBits, command function for
AUTOBITS - -
DNP3

840
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.9.2 Functionality
AutomationBits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get into
the configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The
AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC
61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).

14.9.3 Function block

AUTOBITS
BLOCK ^CMDBIT1
PSTO ^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32

IEC09000925-1-en.vsd
IEC09000925 V1 EN

Figure 428: AUTOBITS function block

14.9.4 Signals
Table 507: AUTOBITS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection

841
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Table 508: AUTOBITS Output signals

Name Type Description
CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1
CMDBIT2 BOOLEAN Command out bit 2
CMDBIT3 BOOLEAN Command out bit 3
CMDBIT4 BOOLEAN Command out bit 4
CMDBIT5 BOOLEAN Command out bit 5
CMDBIT6 BOOLEAN Command out bit 6
CMDBIT7 BOOLEAN Command out bit 7
CMDBIT8 BOOLEAN Command out bit 8
CMDBIT9 BOOLEAN Command out bit 9
CMDBIT10 BOOLEAN Command out bit 10
CMDBIT11 BOOLEAN Command out bit 11
CMDBIT12 BOOLEAN Command out bit 12
CMDBIT13 BOOLEAN Command out bit 13
CMDBIT14 BOOLEAN Command out bit 14
CMDBIT15 BOOLEAN Command out bit 15
CMDBIT16 BOOLEAN Command out bit 16
CMDBIT17 BOOLEAN Command out bit 17
CMDBIT18 BOOLEAN Command out bit 18
CMDBIT19 BOOLEAN Command out bit 19
CMDBIT20 BOOLEAN Command out bit 20
CMDBIT21 BOOLEAN Command out bit 21
CMDBIT22 BOOLEAN Command out bit 22
CMDBIT23 BOOLEAN Command out bit 23
CMDBIT24 BOOLEAN Command out bit 24
CMDBIT25 BOOLEAN Command out bit 25
CMDBIT26 BOOLEAN Command out bit 26
CMDBIT27 BOOLEAN Command out bit 27
CMDBIT28 BOOLEAN Command out bit 28
CMDBIT29 BOOLEAN Command out bit 29
CMDBIT30 BOOLEAN Command out bit 30
CMDBIT31 BOOLEAN Command out bit 31
CMDBIT32 BOOLEAN Command out bit 32

14.9.5 Settings
Table 509: AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

842
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Table 510: DNPGEN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On
On

Table 511: CHSERRS485 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BaudRate 300 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baud-rate for serial port
600 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
57600 Bd
115200 Bd

Table 512: CHSERRS485 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DLinkConfirm Never - - Never Data-link confirm
Sometimes
Always
tDLinkTimeout 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Data-link confirm timeout in s
DLinkRetries 0 - 255 - 1 3 Data-link maximum retries
tRxToTxMinDel 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Rx to Tx minimum delay in s
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment
size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment
size
StopBits 1-2 - 1 1 Stop bits
Parity No - - Even Parity
Even
Odd
tRTSWarmUp 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 RTS warm-up in s
tRTSWarmDown 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 RTS warm-down in s
tBackOffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.050 RS485 back-off delay in s
tMaxRndDelBkOf 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 RS485 maximum back-off random delay
in s

843
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Table 513: CH1TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP portfor initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master

Table 514: CH1TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment
size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment
size

Table 515: CH2TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master

Table 516: CH2TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment
size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment
size

844
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Table 517: CH3TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master

Table 518: CH3TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment
size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment
size

Table 519: CH4TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master

Table 520: CH4TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment
size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment
size

Table 521: MSTSER Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
ChToAssociate RS485 - - RS485 Channel to associate to
Optical
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
Table continues on next page

845
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Table 522: MSTSER Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
Table continues on next page

846
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Off - - Off Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-
line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in
s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - Yes Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after
Yes timeout
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout

847
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Table 523: MST1TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

848
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Table 524: MST1TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Off - - Off Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-
line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in
s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after
Yes timeout
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
Table continues on next page

849
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

Table 525: MST2TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Table continues on next page

850
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Table 526: MST2TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Off - - Off Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-
line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in
s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
Table continues on next page

851
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after
Yes timeout
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

Table 527: MST3TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Table continues on next page

852
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Table 528: MST3TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Off - - Off Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Table continues on next page

853
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-
line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in
s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after
Yes timeout
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

Table 529: MST4TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
Table continues on next page

854
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Table 530: MST4TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
Table continues on next page

855
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Off - - Off Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-
line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in
s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after
Yes timeout
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

856
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.9.6 Operation principle

AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be
mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in
DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time.
To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off,
pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were
appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive
100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.

There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the
same way the setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that, upon activation of the
BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts like an
overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon deactivation
of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3 master again,
momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the operator place. The
command can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Local then
no change is applied to the outputs.

14.10 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD

14.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD - -

14.10.2 Functionality
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from
the local HMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for
example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.

857
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK505308-UEN B
Control

14.10.3 Function block

SINGLECMD
BLOCK ^OUT1
^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8
^OUT9
^OUT10
^OUT11
^OUT12
^OUT13
^OUT14
^OUT15
^OUT16

IEC05000698-2-en.vsd
IEC05000698 V3 EN

Figure 429: SINGLECMD function block

14.10.4 Signals
Table 531: SINGLECMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block single command function

Table 532: SINGLECMD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Single command output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Single command output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Single command output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Single command output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Single command output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Single command output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Single command output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Single command output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Single command output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Single command output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Single command output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Single command output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Single command output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Single command output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Single command output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Single command output 16

858
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 14
Control

14.10.5 Settings
Table 533: SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
Steady
Pulsed

14.10.6 Operation principle

Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) function has 16 binary output signals.
The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or
from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13
characters in PCM600.

The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration setting
is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole function block.
The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode, SINGLECMD function
has a memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also
a BLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the outputs.

The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in
functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.

859
Technical manual
860
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

Section 15 Scheme communication

15.1 Scheme communication logic for distance or

overcurrent protection ZCPSCH

15.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Scheme communication logic for ZCPSCH - 85
distance or overcurrent protection

15.1.2 Functionality
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, scheme communication
logic is provided. All types of communication schemes for permissive underreaching,
permissive overreaching, blocking, delta based blocking, unblocking and intertrip are
available.

The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be used for scheme communication
signaling when included.

15.1.3 Function block

ZCPSCH
I3P* TRIP
U3P* CS
BLOCK CHSTOP
BLKTR CRL
BLKCS LCG
CSBLK
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG
CBOPEN

IEC09000004

IEC09000004 V4 EN

Figure 430: ZCPSCH function block

861
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

15.1.4 Signals
Table 534: ZCPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication
logic
BLKCS BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in permissive OR and blocking
schemes
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Permissive distance protection zone signal
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Signal Received
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Indicates that the breaker is open

Table 535: ZCPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip output
CS BOOLEAN Carrier Send signal
CHSTOP BOOLEAN Stops the blocking signal to remote end
CRL BOOLEAN Carrier signal received or missing carrier guard
signal
LCG BOOLEAN Loss of carrier guard signal

15.1.5 Settings
Table 536: ZCPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SchemeType Intertrip - - Permissive UR Scheme type
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
DeltaBlocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Co-ordination time for blocking
communication scheme
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of a carrier send signal

862
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

Table 537: ZCPSCH Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Unblock Off - - Off Operation mode of unblocking logic
NoRestart
Restart
DeltaI 0 - 200 %IB 1 10 Current change level in % of IBase for fault
inception detection
DeltaU 0 - 100 %UB 1 5 Voltage change level in % of UB for fault
inception detection
Delta3I0 0 - 200 %IB 1 10 Zero seq current change level in % of
IBase
Delta3U0 0 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero seq voltage change level in % of
UBase
tSecurity 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Security timer for loss of carrier guard
detection

Table 538: ZCPSCH Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSelector 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

15.1.6 Operation principle

Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue
the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive
schemes, respectively.

A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping
than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a
received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking
scheme.

15.1.6.1 Blocking scheme

The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is

allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has
elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote IED.

The received signal, which shall be connected to CR, is used to not release the zone to
be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The forward
overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACC, see figure 431.

In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the settable
timer tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see figure 431.

The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip by
activating the input BLKTR, Block of signal send by activating the input BLKCS.

863
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND

en05000512.vsd
IEC05000512 V1 EN

Figure 431: Basic logic for trip signal in blocking scheme

Channels for communication in each direction must be available.

15.1.6.2 Permissive underreaching scheme

In a permissive underreaching scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring

element (normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is
detected.in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching
zone to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive
underreaching schemes is normally set to zero.

The logic for trip signal in permissive scheme is shown in figure 432.

tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND

en05000513.vsd
IEC05000513 V1 EN

Figure 432: Logic for trip signal in permissive scheme

The permissive underreaching scheme has the same blocking possibilities as

mentioned for blocking scheme.

15.1.6.3 Permissive overreaching scheme

In a permissive overreaching scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring

element (normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is
detected in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching
zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive
overreaching schemes is normally set to zero.

The logic for trip signal is the same as for permissive underreaching, as in figure 432.

The permissive overreaching scheme has the same blocking possibilities as

mentioned for blocking scheme.

15.1.6.4 Unblocking scheme

In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by

using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a
receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable,
power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used.

864
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present,
even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time longer
than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 433. This also enables
a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission. The
CRG signal is only used in unblocking schemes.

The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the
security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for
signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal
is present again.

CR
tSecurity CRL
t >1
1
CRG
200 ms 150 ms
t OR t AND
AND
LCG

en05000746.vsd
IEC05000746 V1 EN

Figure 433: Guard singal logic with unblocking scheme and with setting Unblock
= Restart

CR
CRL
tSecurity OR
CRG t
1

IEC11000253-1-en.vsd
IEC11000253 V1 EN

Figure 434: Guard singal logic with unblocking scheme and with setting Unblock
= NoRestart

The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):

Off The unblocking function is out of operation

No restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
If CRG disappears a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
Table continues on next page

865
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signalling

15.1.6.5 Intertrip scheme

In the direct intertrip scheme, the send signal CS is sent from an underreaching zone
that is tripping the line.

The received signal CR is directly transferred to a TRIP for tripping without local
criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic.

In case of single-pole tripping in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is performed.

15.1.6.6 Simplified logic diagram

The simplified logic diagram for the complete logic is shown in figure 435.

866
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

Unblock =Off

CR

Unblock =
OR CRL
NoRestart AND
CRL
Unblock =
tSecurit
Restart
y
CRG 1 t AND

200 ms 150 ms LCG

AND
t OR AND t

SchemeType =
Intertrip

CSUR
tSendMi
n AND
OR

BLOCK AND
CSBLK OR
CRL

Schemetype =
Permissive UR AND CS
OR

tCoord
AND 25 ms
OR
t TRIP
CACC t

Schemetype =
Permissive OR

CSOR OR AND

AND

tSendMin
OR
AND
SchemeType =
Blocking

BLKCS

AND

IEC05000515-2-en.vsd
IEC05000515 V2 EN

Figure 435: Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection,

simplified logic diagram

867
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

15.1.7 Technical data

Table 539: ZCPSCH technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type Intertrip -
Permissive Underreach
Permissive Overreach
Blocking
Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
communication scheme whichever is greater
Minimum duration of a send signal (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
Security timer for loss of guard signal (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
detection whichever is greater
Operation mode of unblocking logic Off -
NoRestart
Restart

15.2 Phase segregated scheme communication logic for

distance protection ZC1PPSCH

15.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase segregated Scheme ZC1PPSCH - 85
communication logic for distance
protection

15.2.2 Functionality
Communication between line ends is used to achieve fault clearance for all faults on
a power line. All possible types of communication schemes for example, permissive
underreach, permissive overreach and blocking schemes are available. To manage
problems with simultaneous faults on parallel power lines phase segregated
communication is needed. This will then replace the standard Scheme communication
logic for distance or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH) on important lines where three
communication channels (in each subsystem) are available for the distance protection
communication.

The main purpose of the Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance
protection (ZC1PPSCH) function is to supplement the distance protection function
such that:

868
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line end for which the faults are on
the part of the line not covered by its underreaching zone.
correct phase selection can be maintained to support single-pole tripping for
faults occurring anywhere on the entire length of a double circuit line.

To accomplish this, three separate communication channels, that is, one per phase,
each capable of transmitting a signal in each direction is required.

ZC1PPSCH can be completed with the current reversal and WEI logic for phase
segregated communication, when found necessary in Blocking and Permissive
overreaching schemes.

15.2.3 Function block

ZC1PPSCH
BLOCK TRIP
BLKTR TRL1
BLKTRL1 TRL2
BLKTRL2 TRL3
BLKTRL3 CSL1
CACCL1 CSL2
CACCL2 CSL3
CACCL3 CSMPH
CSURL1 CRLL1
CSURL2 CRLL2
CSURL3 CRLL3
CSORL1
CSORL2
CSORL3
CSBLKL1
CSBLKL2
CSBLKL3
BLKCSL1
BLKCSL2
BLKCSL3
CRL1
CRL2
CRL3
CRMPH

IEC06000427-2-en.vsd
IEC06000427 V2 EN

Figure 436: ZC1PPSCH function block

15.2.4 Signals
Table 540: ZC1PPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Common signal for block of trip output from
communication logic in all phases
BLKTRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication
logic in Phase L1
BLKTRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication
logic in Phase L2
BLKTRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication
logic in Phase L3
Table continues on next page

869
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

Name Type Default Description

CACCL1 BOOLEAN 0 Accelerated Distance protection zone start in
Phase L1
CACCL2 BOOLEAN 0 Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in
Phase L2
CACCL3 BOOLEAN 0 Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in
Phase L3
CSURL1 BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in
Phase L1
CSURL2 BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in
Phase L2
CSURL3 BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in
Phase L3
CSORL1 BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in
Phase L1
CSORL2 BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in
Phase L2
CSORL3 BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in
Phase L3
CSBLKL1 BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in
Phase L1
CSBLKL2 BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in
Phase L2
CSBLKL3 BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in
Phase L3
BLKCSL1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes
in Phase L1
BLKCSL2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes
in Phase L2
BLKCSL3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes
in Phase L3
CRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier signal received in Phase L1
CRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier signal received in Phase L2
CRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier signal received in Phase L3
CRMPH BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Signal received for multiphase fault

Table 541: ZC1PPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip output in any of the phase
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip output in Phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip output in Phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip output in Phase L3
CSL1 BOOLEAN Carrier Send in phase L1
CSL2 BOOLEAN Carrier Send in phase L2
CSL3 BOOLEAN Carrier Send in phase L3
CSMPH BOOLEAN carrier Send for multi phase fault
Table continues on next page

870
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

Name Type Description

CRLL1 BOOLEAN Carrier signal received in Phase L1
CRLL2 BOOLEAN Carrier signal received in Phase L2
CRLL3 BOOLEAN Carrier signal received in Phase L3

15.2.5 Settings
Table 542: ZC1PPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation On / Off
On
Scheme Type Off - - Permissive UR Scheme type
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Trip coordinate time
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of Carrier Send signal

15.2.6 Operation principle

Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue
the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive
schemes, respectively.

A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping
than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a
received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking
scheme.

The Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection

(ZC1PPSCH) function is a logical function built-up from logical elements. It is a
supplementary function to the distance protection, requiring for its operation inputs
from the distance protection and the communication equipment.

The type of communication-aided scheme to be used can be selected by way of the

settings.

The ability to select which distance protection zone is assigned to which input of
ZC1PPSCH makes this logic able to support practically any scheme communication
requirements regardless of their basic operating principle. The outputs to initiate
tripping and sending of the teleprotection signal are given in accordance with the type
of communication-aided scheme selected and the zone(s) and phase(s) of the distance
protection which have operated.

When power line carrier communication channels are used for permissive schemes
communication, unblocking logic which uses the loss of guard signal as a receive

871
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

criteria is provided. This logic compensates for the lack of dependability due to the
transmission of the command signal over the faulted line.

15.2.6.1 Blocking scheme

The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is

allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has
elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote IED. The received signal (sent by
a reverse looking element in the remote IED), which shall be connected to CRLx, is
used to not release the zone to be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after
time tCoord). The overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input
CACCLx, see figure 437. In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CRLx) must
be received before the settable timer tCoord elapses, to prevent an unneccesary trip,
see figure 437.

ZC1PPSCH can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip is
achieved by activating the input BLKTRLx, Block of carrier send is done by
activating the input BLKCSLx.

tCoord 25 ms
CACCLx
t t TRLx
CRLx AND

IEC06000310_2_en.vsd
IEC06000310 V2 EN

Figure 437: Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a blocking scheme

15.2.6.2 Permissive underreach scheme

In a permissive underreach scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring element

(normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is
detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an
overreaching zone (connected to CACCLx) to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed.
The tCoord is in permissive underreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for
trip carrier in permissive scheme is shown in figure 438. Three channels for
communication in each direction must be available.

tCoord 25 ms
CACCLx t t TRLx
CRLx AND

IEC07000088_2_en.vsd
IEC07000088 V2 EN

Figure 438: Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a permissive underreach
scheme

872
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

15.2.6.3 Permissive overreach scheme

In a permissive overreach scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element

(normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is
detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an
overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord is in
permissive overreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier is the
same as for permissive underreach, see figure 437.

The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned
for blocking scheme above. The blocking inputs are activated from the current
reversal logic when this function is included.

Three channels for communication in each direction must be available.

15.2.6.4 Unblocking scheme

In an unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome

by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create
a carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used. As phase segregated
communication schemes uses phases individually and the PLC is typically connected
single-phase or phase-to-phase it is not possible to evaluate which of the phases to
release and the unblocking scheme has thus not been supported.

15.2.6.5 Intertrip scheme

In the direct intertrip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an underreaching
zone that is tripping the line.

The received signal per phase is directly transferred to the trip function block for
tripping without local criteria. The signal is not further processed in the phase
segregated communication logic. In case of single-pole tripping the phase selection
and logic for tripping the three phases is performed in the trip function block.

15.2.6.6 Simplified logic diagram

The simplified logic diagram for one phase is shown in figure 439.

873
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

SchemeType =
Intertrip

CSURLx

tSendMin AND
OR

BLOCK
AND
CSBLKLx OR
CRLx

Scheme Type =
Permissive UR AND CSLx
OR

tCoord
25 ms
AND t TRLx
OR t
CACCLx

Scheme Type =
Permissive OR

CSORLx OR AND

AND

tSendMin
OR

AND
Scheme Type =
Blocking
BLKCSx

AND

CSL1
CSL2 AND

CSL2
OR CSMPH
CSL3 AND

CSL3
CSL1 AND

CSL1
CSL2 GENERAL
OR
CSL3

IEC06000311_2_en.vsd
IEC06000311 V2 EN

Figure 439: Simplified logic diagram for one phase

874
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

15.2.7 Technical data

Table 543: ZC1PPSCH technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type Intertrip -
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
communication scheme whichever is greater
Minimum duration of a carrier send (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
signal whichever is greater

15.3 Current reversal and Weak-end infeed logic for

distance protection 3-phase ZCRWPSCH

15.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed ZCRWPSCH - 85
logic for distance protection 3-phase

15.3.2 Functionality
The ZCRWPSCH function provides the current reversal and weak end infeed logic
functions that supplement the standard scheme communication logic. It is not suitable
for standalone use as it requires inputs from the distance protection functions and the
scheme communications function included within the terminal.

On detection of a current reversal, the current reversal logic provides an output to

block the sending of the teleprotection signal to the remote end, and to block the
permissive tripping at the local end. This blocking condition is maintained long
enough to ensure that no unwanted operation will occur as a result of the current
reversal.

On verification of a weak end infeed condition, the weak end infeed logic provides an
output for sending the received teleprotection signal back to the remote sending end
and other output(s) for local tripping. For terminals equipped for single- and two-pole
tripping, outputs for the faulted phase(s) are provided. Undervoltage detectors are
used to detect the faulted phase(s).

875
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

15.3.3 Function block

ZCRWPSCH
U3P* IRVL
BLOCK TRWEI
IRVBLK TRWEIL1
IRV TRWEIL2
WEIBLK1 TRWEIL3
WEIBLK2 ECHO
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL

IEC06000287-2-en.vsd
IEC06000287 V2 EN

Figure 440: ZCRWPSCH function block

15.3.4 Signals
Table 544: ZCRWPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IRVBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function
IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic
WEIBLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other
protections
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure
function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

Table 545: ZCRWPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
IRVL BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic
TRWEIL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic in phase L1
TRWEIL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic in phase L2
TRWEIL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic in phase L3
ECHO BOOLEAN Carrier send by WEI logic

876
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

15.3.5 Settings
Table 546: ZCRWPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CurrRev Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and
local trip
WEI Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Coordination time for the WEI logic
UPP< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Phase voltage for detection of
fault condition
UPN< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Neutral voltage for detection of
fault condition

Table 547: ZCRWPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

15.3.6 Operation principle

15.3.6.1 Current reversal logic

The current reversal logic can be enabled by setting the parameter CurrRev = On. The
current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRV to recognize the
fault on the parallel line in any of the phases. When the reverse zone has been activated
for a settable time tPickUpRev, it prevents sending of a communication signal and
activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev. This makes it possible for the
receive signal to reset before the carrier aided trip signal is activated due to the current
reversal by the forward directed zone. The logic diagram for current reversal is shown
in Figure 441.

877
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

BLOCK

IRVBLK
tDelayRev
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev IRVL
IRV AND t
t t t

CurrRev = On

IEC15000313-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000313 V1 EN

Figure 441: Simplified logic diagram for current reversal

The prevention of sending the send signal CS and activation of the TRIP in the scheme
communication block ZCPSCH is carried out by connecting the IRVL signal to input
BLOCK in the ZCPSCH function.

The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current
reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set
to zero.

15.3.6.2 Weak-end infeed logic

The weak-end infeed logic (WEI) function sends back (echoes) the received signal
under the condition that no fault has been detected on the weak-end by different fault
detection elements (distance protection in forward or reverse direction).

The WEI function returns the received signal, shown in Figure 442, when:

The setting parameter WEI is set to either Echo or Echo & Trip.
No active signal present on the input BLOCK.
The functional input CRL is active for a time longer than the tPickUpWei setting.
This input is usually connected to the CRL output on the scheme communication
logic ZCPSCH.
The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the WEIBLK1
functional input or to the VTSZ functional input. The later is usually configured
to the VTSZ functional output of the fuse-failure function.
No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 functional
input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as
present within the IED is usually used for this purpose.
The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive signal when local
breaker opens, CBOPEN prior to faults appeared at the end of line.

878
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

BLOCK
VTSZ
WEIBLK1 OR

tPickUpWEI
CRL AND 50 ms 200 ms
t AND
OR t t
ECHO
200 ms AND
WEIBLK2
t

AND

OR
1500 ms
CBOPEN
t

WEI = Echo

IEC05000123-3-en.vsd

IEC05000123 V3 EN

Figure 442: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic Echo

When an echo function is used in both IEDs (should generally be avoided), a spurious
signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-up of the
system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms.

An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of

the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo&Trip. With this setting the Echo and
Trip are working in parallel as in logic shown in Figure 443.

879
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

BLOCK
VTSZ
WEIBLK1 OR
tPickUpWEI
CRL AND 50 ms 200 ms
t AND ECHO
OR t t AND
200 ms
WEIBLK2
t

AND

1500 ms
OR
CBOPEN
t
AND

U3P*
UL1<UPN<
UL2 < UPN<
UL3 < UPN<
UPN< 100 ms
OR
AND t
TRWEI
OR

15 ms
TRWEIL1
U3P*
AND t
UL1L2 <UPP< OR
UL2L3 < UPP<
UL3L1 < UPP<
15 ms
UPP< TRWEIL2
AND t
OR

15 ms
OR TRWEIL3
AND t

WEI = Echo & Trip

IEC00000551-TIFF.vsd
IEC00000551-TIFF V4 EN

Figure 443: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic Echo&Trip

15.3.7 Technical data

Table 548: ZCRWPSCH technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Detection level phase-to-neutral (10-90)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
voltage
Detection level phase-to-phase (10-90)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
voltage
Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
logic whichever is greater
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
Coordination time for weak-end (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
infeed logic whichever is greater

880
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

15.4 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase

segregated communication ZC1WPSCH

15.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed ZC1WPSCH - 85
logic for phase segregated
communication

15.4.2 Functionality
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication
(ZC1WPSCH) function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current reversal
when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with parallel lines
where the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line.

The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the
protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated,
received carrier signal together with local undervoltage criteria and no reverse zone
operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back to
accelerate the sending end.

15.4.3 Function block

ZC1WPSCH
U3P* TRPWEI
BLOCK TRPWEIL1
BLKZ TRPWEIL2
CBOPEN TRPWEIL3
CRL1 IRVOP
CRL2 IRVOPL1
CRL3 IRVOPL2
IRVL1 IRVOPL3
IRVL2 ECHO
IRVL3 ECHOL1
IRVBLKL1 ECHOL2
IRVBLKL2 ECHOL3
IRVBLKL3
WEIBLK
WEIBLKL1
WEIBLKL2
WEIBLKL3
WEIBLKOP
WEIBLKO1
WEIBLKO2
WEIBLKO3

IEC06000477-2-en.vsd
IEC06000477 V2 EN

Figure 444: ZC1WPSCH function block

881
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

15.4.4 Signals
Table 549: ZC1WPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by the fuse-failure
function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L1
CRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L2
CRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L3
IRVL1 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L1
IRVL2 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L2
IRVL3 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic in phase L3
IRVBLKL1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function in Phase L1
IRVBLKL2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function in Phase L2
IRVBLKL3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function in Phase L3
WEIBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic
WEIBLKL1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L1
WEIBLKL2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L2
WEIBLKL3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L3
WEIBLKOP BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other
protection
WEIBLKO1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L1 due to operation of
other protection
WEIBLKO2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L2 due to operation of
other protections
WEIBLKO3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L3 due to operation of
other protections

Table 550: ZC1WPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRPWEI BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic
TRPWEIL1 BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in Phase L1
TRPWEIL2 BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in Phase L2
TRPWEIL3 BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in Phase L3
IRVOP BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
IRVOPL1 BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L1
IRVOPL2 BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L2
IRVOPL3 BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L3
Table continues on next page

882
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

Name Type Description

ECHO BOOLEAN Carrier Send by WEI logic
ECHOL1 BOOLEAN Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L1
ECHOL2 BOOLEAN Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L2
ECHOL3 BOOLEAN Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L3

15.4.5 Settings
Table 551: ZC1WPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OperCurrRev Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and
local trip
OperationWEI Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
UPE< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Earth voltage for detection of
fault condition
UPP< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Phase voltage for detection of
fault condition
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Coordination time for the WEI logic

Table 552: ZC1WPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

15.4.6 Operation principle

15.4.6.1 Current reversal logic

The current reversal logic can be enabled by setting the parameter OperCurrRev =
On. The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRVLx to
recognize the fault on the parallel line in any of the phases. When the reverse zone has
been activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev, it prevents sending
communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev.
This makes it possible for the receive signal to reset before the trip signal is activated
due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone. The logic diagram for current
reversal is shown in Figure 445.

883
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

BLOCK

IRVBLKLx
tDelayRev
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev IRVOPLx
IRVLx & t
t t t

operCurrRev=On

IEC06000474-3-en.vsd
IEC06000474 V3 EN

Figure 445: Simplified logic diagram for current reversal

The prevention of sending carrier send signal CSLx and activating the TRIPLx in the
Scheme communication logic for distance or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH) is
carried out by connecting the IRVOPLx signal to input BLOCKLx in ZCPSCH
function.

The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication
(ZC1WPSCH) function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the
current reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pickup timer
is set to zero.

15.4.6.2 Weak end infeed logic

The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition
that no fault has been detected at the weak end by different fault detection elements
(distance protection in forward and reverse direction).
BLOCK
BLKZ
WEIBLKLx 1 ECHOLx-contd
&
tPickUpWEI
CRLx & 50 ms 200 ms
t &
1 t t
ECHOLx
200 ms &
WEIBLKOx
t

&

1
1500 ms
CBOPEN
t

OperationWEI=Echo

IEC07000085-3-en.vsd
IEC07000085 V3 EN

Figure 446: Simplified logic for weak-end infeed logic Echo

The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, shown in Figure 446, when:

884
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

No active signal present on the input BLOCK.

The input CRLx is active. This input is usually connected to the CRLx output on
the scheme communication logic for distance or Overcurrent protection
(ZCPSCH).
The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the
WEIBLKLx input or to the BLKZ input. The latter is usually configured to the
STGEN output of the fuse-failure function.
No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLKOx input. An
OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as present
within the IED is usually used for this purpose.
The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive signal when local
breaker opens, CBOPEN prior to faults appeared at the end of line.

When an echo function is used in both the IEDs on the protected line (should generally
be avoided), a spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a
continuous lock-up of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200
ms.

An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria when the tripping of

the local breaker is selected. Setting OperationWEI = Echo &Trip together with the
WEI function and ECHOLx, trip signal TRPWEIx has been issued by the echo and
trip logic which is described in Figure 447.
ECHOLx- contd

CBOPEN

U3P*
100 ms
=1
& t
Undervoltage TRPWEI
detection =1
UPE<

15 ms
UPP< TRPWEI1
& t

OperationWEI= Echo & Trip

15 ms
TRPWEI2
& t

15 ms
TRPWEI3
& t

IEC13000278-1-en.vsd

IEC13000278 V1 EN

Figure 447: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic Echo & Trip

15.4.7 Technical data

Table 553: ZC1WPSCH technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Detection level phase to neutral (10-90)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
voltage
Detection level phase to phase (10-90)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
voltage
Reset ratio <105% at (20-90)% of UBase -
Table continues on next page

885
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
Coordination time for weak-end (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
infeed logic whichever is greater

15.5 Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH

15.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH - -

15.5.2 Functionality
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no communication channel
is available, local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH can be used. This logic enables fast
fault clearing and re-closing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not fully
replace a communication channel.

The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser (zone extension) or by the loss-
of-load current (loss-of-load acceleration).

15.5.3 Function block

ZCLCPSCH
I3P* TRZE
BLOCK TRLL
ARREADY
NDST
EXACC
BC
LLACC

IEC13000307-1-en.vsd
IEC13000307 V1 EN

Figure 448: ZCLCPSCH function block

886
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

15.5.4 Signals
Table 554: ZCLCPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
ARREADY BOOLEAN 0 Autoreclosure ready, releases function used for
fast trip
NDST BOOLEAN 0 Non directional criteria used to prevent
instantaneous trip
EXACC BOOLEAN 0 Connected to function used for tripping at zone
extension
BC BOOLEAN 0 Breaker Close
LLACC BOOLEAN 0 Connected to function used for tripping at loss of
load

Table 555: ZCLCPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRZE BOOLEAN Trip by zone extension
TRLL BOOLEAN Trip by loss of load

15.5.5 Settings
Table 556: ZCLCPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
LoadCurr 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Load current before disturbance in % of
IBase
LossOfLoad Off - - Off Enable/Disable operation of Loss of load.
On
ZoneExtension Off - - Off Enable/Disable operation of Zone
On extension
MinCurr 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Lev taken as curr loss due to remote CB
trip in % of IBase
tLowCurr 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay on pick-up for MINCURR
value
tLoadOn 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay on pick-up for load current
release
tLoadOff 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay on drop off for load current
release

887
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

Table 557: ZCLCPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

15.5.6 Operation principle

15.5.6.1 Zone extension

The overreaching zone is connected to the input EXACC. For this reason, configure
the ARREADY functional input to a READY functional output of a used
autoreclosing function or via the selected binary input to an external autoreclosing
device, see figure 449.

This will allow the overreaching zone to trip instantaneously.

IEC05000157 V1 EN

Figure 449: Simplified logic diagram for local acceleration logic

After the autorecloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state,
there will be no ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step
distance time functions.

In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching zone range, an unwanted
autoreclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function at the reclosing attempt will
prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed.

On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by instantaneous
zone (normally zone 1) only the first trip will be "instantaneous".

The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated (common with loss-of-
load acceleration).

15.5.6.2 Loss-of-Load acceleration

When the "acceleration" is controlled by a loss-of-load, the overreaching zone used

for "acceleration" connected to input LLACC is not allowed to trip "instantaneously"

888
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

during normal non-fault system conditions. When all three-phase currents have been
above the set value MinCurr for more than setting tLowCurr, an overreaching zone
will be allowed to trip "instantaneously" during a fault condition when one or two of
the phase currents will become low due to a three-phase trip at the opposite IED, see
figure 450. The current measurement is performed internally and the internal STILL
signal becomes logical one under the described conditions. The load current in a
healthy phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at the opposite IED. Note that
this function will not operate in case of three-phase faults, because none of the phase
currents will be low when the opposite IED is tripped.

IEC05000158 V1 EN

Figure 450: Loss-of-load acceleration - simplified logic diagram

Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during
normal closing.

15.6 Scheme communication logic for residual

overcurrent protection ECPSCH

15.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Scheme communication logic for ECPSCH - 85
residual overcurrent protection

15.6.2 Functionality
To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of the line not covered by the
instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional residual
overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses communication
channels.

In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be

transmitted to the other line end. With directional comparison, a short operate time of

889
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

the protection including a channel transmission time, can be achieved. This short
operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault clearance.

The communication logic module for directional residual current protection enables
blocking as well as permissive under/overreaching, and unblocking schemes. The
logic can also be supported by additional logic for weak-end infeed and current
reversal, included in Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH function.

15.6.3 Function block

ECPSCH
BLOCK TRIP
BLKTR CS
BLKCS CRL
CSBLK LCG
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG

IEC06000288-2-en.vsd
IEC06000288 V2 EN

Figure 451: ECPSCH function block

15.6.4 Signals
Table 558: ECPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking trip due to communication logic
BLKCS BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking CS in Overreach and Blocking
schemes
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse residual overcurrent signal for Carrier
Send
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Signal to be used for tripping by Communication
Scheme
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching residual overcurrent signal for
Carrier Send
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching residual overcurrent signal for
Carrier Send
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Receive for Communication Scheme Logic
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received

890
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

Table 559: ECPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal by communication scheme logic
CS BOOLEAN Carrier Send by Communication Scheme Logic
CRL BOOLEAN Carrier Receive from Communication Scheme
Logic
LCG BOOLEAN loss of carrier guard signal

15.6.5 Settings
Table 560: ECPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SchemeType Off - - Permissive UR Scheme type, Mode of Operation
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Communication scheme coordination
time
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of a carrier send signal

Table 561: ECPSCH Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Unblock Off - - Off Operation mode of unblocking logic
NoRestart
Restart
tSecurity 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Security timer for loss of carrier guard
detection

15.6.6 Operation principle

The four step directional residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC is configured to
give input information, that is directional fault detection signals, to the ECPSCH
logic:

891
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

Input signal CACC is used for tripping of the communication scheme, normally
the start signal of a forward overreaching step of STFW.
Input signal CSBLK is used for sending block signal in the blocking
communication scheme, normally the start signal of a reverse overreaching step
of STRV.
Input signal CSUR is used for sending permissive signal in the underreaching
permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward
underreaching step of STINn, where n corresponds to the underreaching step.
Input signal CSOR is used for sending permissive signal in the overreaching
permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward
overreaching step of STINn, where n corresponds to the overreaching step.

In addition to this a signal from the autoreclosing function should be configured to the
BLKCS input for blocking of the function at a single phase reclosing cycle.

15.6.6.1 Blocking scheme

In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional element
detects an earth fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional element
operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received from the
opposite line end. The time delay, normally 30 40 ms, depends on the
communication transmission time and a chosen safety margin.

One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency) is
needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for zero
and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the
impedance measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The
communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuation will
occur due to the fault.

Blocking schemes are particular favorable for three-terminal applications if there is no

zero-sequence outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to current
reversals because the received signal is maintained long enough to avoid unwanted
operation due to current reversal. There is never any need for weak-end infeed logic,
because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking signal is received
from the weak end. The fault clearing time is however generally longer for a blocking
scheme than for a permissive scheme.

If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no
blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (received
signal) the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.

892
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

IEC05000448 V1 EN

Figure 452: Simplified logic diagram for blocking scheme

15.6.6.2 Permissive under/overreaching scheme

In the permissive scheme the forward directed earth-fault measuring element sends a
permissive signal to the other end, if an earth fault is detected in the forward direction.
The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive signal before
activating a trip signal. Independent channels must be available for the
communication in each direction.

An impedance measuring IED, which works in the same type of permissive mode,
with one channel in each direction, can share the channels with the communication
scheme for residual overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuring IED works in
the permissive overreaching mode, common channels can be used in single line
applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends, use
common channels only if the ratio Z1S/Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source
impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance
measuring and the directional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may detect
a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping.

Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end infeed function is used in the
distance or earth-fault protection.

In case of an internal earth-fault, the forward directed measuring element operates and
sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the CS output (sent signal). Local
tripping is permitted when the forward direction measuring element operates and a
permissive signal is received via the CR binary input (received signal).

The permissive scheme can be of either underreaching or overreaching type. In the

underreaching alternative, an underreaching directional residual overcurrent
measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input signal
CSUR.

893
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

In the overreaching alternative, an overreaching directional residual overcurrent

measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input signal
CSOR. Also the underreaching input signal CSUR can initiate sending.

BLOCK
CRL
CR AND
25 ms

t TRIP
0 - 60 s

CACC AND AND t

50 ms
tCoord
t

AND

BLKCS OR CS
AND
Overreach
CSOR AND 25 ms

CSUR OR t

IEC05000280.vsd

IEC05000280 V4 EN

15.6.6.3 Unblocking scheme

In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by

using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a
receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable,
power line carrier (PLC) communication is used.

The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present,
even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time longer
than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 453. This also enables
a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission.

The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the
security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for
signaling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal
is present again.

894
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

CR
tSecurity CRL
t >1
1
CRG
200 ms 150 ms
t OR t AND
AND
LCG

en05000746.vsd
IEC05000746 V1 EN

Figure 453: Guard signal logic with unblocking scheme

The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):

Off: The unblocking function is out of operation

No restart: Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
If CRG disappears, a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signaling

15.6.7 Technical data

Table 562: ECPSCH technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type Permissive Underreaching -
Permissive Overreaching
Blocking
Communication scheme (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 20 ms whichever is
coordination time greater

15.7 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for

residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH

15.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed ECRWPSCH - 85
logic for residual overcurrent protection

895
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

15.7.2 Functionality
The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH is a supplement to Scheme communication logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECPSCH.

To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the line, the directional earth fault
protection function can be supported with logic that uses tele-protection channels.

This is why the IEDs have available additions to the scheme communication logic.

If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both terminals, overreaching

permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current
reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on the
other line. This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection between the
two buses. To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current reversal logic (transient
blocking logic) can be used.

Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection can basically

operate only when the protection in the remote IED can detect the fault. The detection
requires a sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this IED. The fault
current can be too low due to an opened breaker or high-positive and/or zero-sequence
source impedance behind this IED. To overcome these conditions, weak-end infeed
(WEI) echo logic is used. The weak-end infeed echo is limited to 200 ms to avoid
channel lockup.

15.7.3 Function block

ECRWPSCH
U3P* IRVL
BLOCK TRWEI
IRVBLK ECHO
IRV
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL

IEC06000289-3-en.vsd
IEC06000289 V3 EN

Figure 454: ECRWPSCH function block

15.7.4 Signals
Table 563: ECRWPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IRVBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function
Table continues on next page

896
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

Name Type Default Description

IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI Logic
WEIBLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other
protections
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure
function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

Table 564: ECRWPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
IRVL BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic
ECHO BOOLEAN Permissive signal transmitted as echo signal or in
case of weak end infeed

15.7.5 Settings
Table 565: ECRWPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CurrRev Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and
local trip
WEI Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Coordination time for the WEI logic
3U0> 5 - 70 %UB 1 25 Neutral voltage setting for fault conditions
measurement

Table 566: ECRWPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

897
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

15.7.6 Operation principle

15.7.6.1 Directional comparison logic function

The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreaching and
permissive overreaching schemes.

The circuits for the permissive overreaching scheme contain logic for current reversal
and weak-end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the blocking
overreaching scheme.

Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth fault protection
module to get backup tripping in case the communication equipment malfunctions
and prevents operation of the directional comparison logic.

Connect the necessary signal from the autorecloser for blocking of the directional
comparison scheme, during a single-phase autoreclosing cycle, to the BLOCK input
of the directional comparison module.

15.7.6.2 Fault current reversal logic

The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to the input
signal IRV, which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction. When the reverse
direction element is activated the output signal IRVL is activated which is shown in
Figure 455. The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without tripping. The
output signal IRVL will be connected to the block input on the permissive
overreaching scheme.

When the fault current is reversed on the healthy line, IRV is deactivated and IRVBLK
is activated. The tDelayRev timer delays the reset of the output signal. The signal
blocks operation of the overreach permissive scheme for residual current and thus
prevents unwanted operation caused by fault current reversal.

BLOCK

IRVBLK
tDelayRev
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev AND t
IRVL
IRV
t t t

CurrRev = On

IEC09000031-4-en.vsd

IEC09000031 V4 EN

Figure 455: Simplified logic diagram for current reversal

898
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

15.7.6.3 Weak-end infeed logic

The weak-end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo) or
an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Echo & Trip). The corresponding logic
diagrams are depicted in Figure 456 and Figure 457.

The weak-end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction element,
connected to WEIBLK2 via an OR-gate. If neither the forward nor the reverse
directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms, the weak-end infeed
logic echoes back the received permissive signal as shown in Figure 456 and Figure
457. The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive signal when
CBOPEN is high (local breaker opens) prior to faults appeared at the end of line.

If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last
200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the earth fault
function that is in operation.

CR
BLOCK AND

VTSZ
OR

tPickUpWEI
WEIBLK1
t AND 50 ms 200 ms
AND
OR t t ECHO
200 ms AND
CRL t

WEIBLK2

AND
1500 ms
CBOPEN OR
t

WEI = Echo

IEC09000032-5-en.vsd

IEC09000032 V5 EN

Figure 456: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic - Echo

With the WEI= Echo & Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to the diagram
above. Further, it activates the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions
are fulfilled and the neutral point voltage is above the set operate value for 3U0>.

The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the earth
fault function which is in operation.

899
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

BLOCK

VTSZ
OR

tPickUpWEI
WEIBLK1 t AND 50 ms 200 ms
AND
OR t t ECHO
200 ms AND
t
CRL

AND
WEIBLK2 1500 ms
OR
t

CBOPEN

AND
ST3U0
15 ms TRWEI
a>b AND
3U0> t

WEI = Echo&Trip

IEC09000020-5-en.vsd

IEC09000020 V5 EN

Figure 457: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic - Echo & Trip

The weak-end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of 200
ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo signal to be
sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing action if the weak-
end echo is selected for both line ends.

15.7.7 Technical data

Table 567: ECRWPSCH technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate mode of WEI logic Off -
Echo
Echo & Trip
Operate voltage 3U0 for WEI trip (5-70)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever is

logic greater
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
greater
Coordination time for weak-end (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
infeed logic greater

15.8 Direct transfer trip logic

900
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

15.8.1 Introduction
Direct transfer trip (DTT) logic is used together with Line distance protection function
or other type of line protection. One typical example for use of transfer trip is given
below. When Line distance protection function is extended to cover power lines
feeding the transformer directly and there is a fault in transformer differential area, the
transformer differential protection operates faster than line protection. A trip
command is sent to the remote end of the line. On remote end, before sending a trip
command to the circuit breaker, the certainty of a fault condition is ensured by
checking local criterion in DTT logic.

CR CS TRIP
TRIP
DTT IDIFF>

Xsource VT1

~ CT1
Line
CT2 CT3
Source Power Load
Transformer

en03000120.vsd
IEC03000120 V1 EN

Figure 458: Direct transfer trip

On receiving the CR signal from remote end, Direct transfer trip logic needs to check
additional local criterion, before sending the trip signal to circuit breaker.

DTT logic can be handled in the following separate application functions:

1. Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC

2. Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC
3. Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC
4. Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC
5. Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV
6. Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV
7. Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC
8. Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC
9. Three-phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC
10. Three-phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC

A composite scheme of these functions must be configured in PCM600 configuration

tool, to make a complete DTT scheme as shown in Figure 459. The different
individual local criteria functions can also be used as direct tripping protections,
normally with a time delay.

901
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

CR1

CR2

Impedance protection
Low impedance protection

Breaker Failure Backup trip of breaker failure

protection

Three phase overcurrent

CarrierReceiveLogic

LCCRPTRC
Three phase undercurrent
U3P
CR1

CB Trip output
CR2
Zero sequence overcurrent
protection

LocalCheck
Analog input

Negative sequence overcurrent

protection OR

Zero sequence overvoltage

protection
I3P

Negative sequence overvoltage

protection

Compensated over and

undervoltage protection

Low active power and power

factor protection

Sudden change in current

variation

IEC09000773-1-en.vsd

IEC09000773 V1 EN

Figure 459: Direct transfer trip scheme

15.8.2 Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC

15.8.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Low active power and power factor LAPPGAPC - 37_55
protection

15.8.2.2 Functionality

902
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

Low active power and power factor protection (LAPPGAPC) function measures
power flow. It can be used for protection and monitoring of:

phase wise low active power

phase wise low power factor
phase wise reactive power and apparent power as service values

Following features are available:

Definite time stage for low active power protection

Definite time stage for low power factor protection
Individual enabling of Low active power and Low power factor functions
Low active power trip with 2 selection modes '1 out of 3' and '2 out of 3'
Phase wise calculated values of apparent power, reactive power, active power and
power factor are available as service values
Insensitive to small variations in voltage and current

15.8.2.3 Function block

LAPPGAPC
I3P* TRLAP
U3P* TRLPF
BLOCK TRLPFL1
BLKTR TRLPFL2
TRLPFL3
STLAP
STLPF
STLAPL1
STLAPL2
STLAPL3
STLPFL1
STLPFL2
STLPFL3

IEC09000763-1-en.vsd
IEC09000763 V1 EN

Figure 460: LAPPGAPC function block

15.8.2.4 Signals
Table 568: LAPPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block all trip signals of the funtction

903
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

Table 569: LAPPGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRLAP BOOLEAN Trip low active power
TRLPF BOOLEAN Trip low power factor
TRLPFL1 BOOLEAN Trip low power factor phase 1
TRLPFL2 BOOLEAN Trip low power factor phase 2
TRLPFL3 BOOLEAN Trip low power factor phase 3
STLAP BOOLEAN Start low active power
STLPF BOOLEAN Start low power factor
STLAPL1 BOOLEAN Start low active power phase 1
STLAPL2 BOOLEAN Start low active power phase 2
STLAPL3 BOOLEAN Start low active power phase 3
STLPFL1 BOOLEAN Start low power factor phase 1
STLPFL2 BOOLEAN Start low power factor phase 2
STLPFL3 BOOLEAN Start low power factor phase 3

15.8.2.5 Settings
Table 570: LAPPGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
OperationLAP Off - - Off Operation low active power Off/On
On
OpMode 2 out of 3 - - 2 out of 3 Trip mode low active power 2out of 3 or 1
1 out of 3 out of 3
LAP< 2.0 - 100.0 %SB 0.1 5.0 3 Phase start value for low active power in
% of SBase
tOpLAP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Time delay to operate for low active power
OperationLPF Off - - Off Operation low power factor Off/On
On
LPF< 0.00 - 1.00 - 0.01 0.40 Start value for low power factor
tOpLPF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Time delay to operate for low power factor

Table 571: LAPPGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UGenZeroDb 0.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Zero point Clamping in % of UBase
IGenZeroDb 0.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 3.0 Zero point clamping in % of IBase

904
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

Table 572: LAPPGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

15.8.2.6 Monitored data

Table 573: LAPPGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SL1 REAL - MVA Apparent power for
phase 1
SL2 REAL - MVA Apparent power for
phase 2
SL3 REAL - MVA Apparent power for
phase 3
PL1 REAL - MW Active power for phase 1
PL2 REAL - MW Active power for phase 2
PL3 REAL - MW Active power for phase 3
QL1 REAL - MVAr Reactive power for phase
1
QL2 REAL - MVAr Reactive power for phase
2
QL3 REAL - MVAr Reactive power for phase
3
PFL1 REAL - - Power factor phase 1
PFL2 REAL - - Power factor phase 2
PFL3 REAL - - Power factor phase 3

15.8.2.7 Operation principle

Low active power and low power factor protection (LAPPGAPC) calculates power
and power factor from voltage and current values. Trip signal must be set
independently for low active power and low power factor condition after definite time
delay.

Active power calculation

LAPPGAPC calculates single phase complex power of L1, L2 and L3 loop by

following equations. From this complex apparent power, the real and imaginary parts
can be respective active and reactive power values of respective phases. All the
apparent power values given out of the function are absolute values. The active power
is the real part of the calculated apparent power.

S L1 = U L1 I L1
EQUATION2243 V1 EN (Equation 154)

905
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

S L2 = U L2 IL2
EQUATION2244 V1 EN (Equation 155)

S L3 = U L3 I L3
EQUATION2245 V1 EN (Equation 156)

Power factor calculation

Power factor is a ratio of active power to apparent power. The function calculates
power factor from the calculated values of active power and apparent power of L1, L2
and L3 loop by following equation:

PL1
pf L1 =
S L1
EQUATION2246 V1 EN (Equation 157)

PL 2
pf L 2 =
SL2
EQUATION2247 V1 EN (Equation 158)

PL 3
pf L 3 =
SL3
EQUATION2248 V1 EN (Equation 159)

Active power trip mode

The low active power functionality has a trip mode setting. According to this setting,
trip is activated if the low active power is detected in one out of three phases or two out
of three phases respectively. These two modes are user settable through setting
OpMode.

Zero clamping filtering

The function will do zero clamping to disable the calculation if the current and voltage
values of a particular phase are less than 30% of UBase for voltage and 3% of IBase
for current value.

Calculation

The active power setting value used for detection of under power must be given as a
three-phase value. The design starts to calculate internally the per phase value from
this setting and detect phase wise under power condition individually. The power
factor start value is common for all the three phases.

Phase wise analog values apparent power, active power, reactive power and power
factor are available as service values.

906
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

STLAPLx

P < LAP<
I3P TRLAP
t
Calculation P and
pf
U3P

STLPFLx

pf < pf<
TRLPFLx
t

IEC10000011-1-en.vsd
IEC10000011 V1 EN

Figure 461: Logic diagram of Low active power and low power factor protection
(LAPPGAPC)

15.8.2.8 Technical data

Table 574: LAPPGAPC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, low (2.0-100.0)% of SBase 1.0% of Sr
active power
Reset ratio, low <105% -
active power
Operate value, low 0.00-1.00 0.02
power factor
Independent time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
delay to operate for greater
low active power at
1.2 to 0.8 x Pset

Independent time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is

delay to operate for greater
low power factor at
1.2 to 0.8 x PFset

Critical impulse time, 10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Pset -

low active power
Impulse margin time, 10 ms typically -
low active power

15.8.3 Compensated over and undervoltage protection

COUVGAPC

907
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

15.8.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Compensated over and undervoltage COUVGAPC - 59_27
protection

15.8.3.2 Functionality

Compensated over and undervoltage protection (COUVGAPC) function calculates

the remote end voltage of the transmission line utilizing local measured voltage,
current and with the help of transmission line parameters, that is, line resistance,
reactance, capacitance and local shunt reactor. For protection of long transmission
line for in zone faults, COUVGAPCcan be incorporated with local criteria within
direct transfer trip logic to ensure tripping of the line only under abnormal conditions.

15.8.3.3 Function block

COUVGAPC
I3P* TRUV
U3P* TROV
BLOCK TRUVL1
BLKTR TRUVL2
SWIPOS TRUVL3
TROVL1
TROVL2
TROVL3
STUV
STOV
STUVL1
STUVL2
STUVL3
STOVL1
STOVL2
STOVL3

IEC09000764-1-en.vsd
IEC09000764 V1 EN

Figure 462: COUVGAPC function block

15.8.3.4 Signals
Table 575: COUVGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of the function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all operate outputs
SWIPOS BOOLEAN 1 Local shunt reactor connected or not

908
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

Table 576: COUVGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRUV BOOLEAN Common trip signal for compensated under voltage
TROV BOOLEAN Common trip signal for compensated over voltage
TRUVL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated under voltage of phase
1
TRUVL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated under voltage of phase
2
TRUVL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated under voltage of phase
3
TROVL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated over voltage of phase
1
TROVL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated over voltage of phase
2
TROVL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated over voltage of phase
3
STUV BOOLEAN Common start signal for compensated under
voltage
STOV BOOLEAN Common start signal for compensated over voltage
STUVL1 BOOLEAN Start signal for compensated under voltage of
phase 1
STUVL2 BOOLEAN Start signal for compensated under voltage of
phase 2
STUVL3 BOOLEAN Start signal for compensated under voltage of
phase 3
STOVL1 BOOLEAN Start signal for compensated over voltage of phase
1
STOVL2 BOOLEAN Start signal for compensated over voltage of phase
2
STOVL3 BOOLEAN Start signal for compensated over voltage of phase
3

15.8.3.5 Settings
Table 577: COUVGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
OperationUV Off - - On Operation compensated under voltage
On Off/On
U< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Compensated under voltage level in % of
UBase
tUV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay to trip under voltage
OperationOV Off - - On Operation compensated over voltage Off/
On On
U> 1 - 200 %UB 1 120 Compensated over voltage level in % of
UBase
tOV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to trip over voltage

909
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

Table 578: COUVGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
HystAbs 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Hysteresis absolute for compensated
over/under voltage in % of UBase

Table 579: COUVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
R1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistance per phase
for the line in ohm
X1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance per phase
for the line in ohm
Xc 1.00 - 10000.00 Ohm 0.01 1000.00 Half of equivalent capacitive reactance
per phase in ohm
EnShuntReactor Off - - On Enable setting if shunt reactor connected
On in line
Xsh 1.00 - 10000.00 Ohm 0.01 1500.00 Per phase reactance of local Shunt
Reactor in ohm

15.8.3.6 Monitored data

Table 580: COUVGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CMPUL1 REAL - kV Compensated voltage of
phase 1
CMPUL2 REAL - kV Compensated voltage of
phase 2
CMPUL3 REAL - kV Compensated voltage of
phase 3

15.8.3.7 Operation principle

Compensated over and undervoltage protection (COUVGAPC) function is phase

segregated and mainly used for local criteria check in Direct transfer trip. The
principle is to utilize local measured voltage and current to calculate the voltage at the
remote end of the line.

The main measured inputs to COUVGAPC are three-phase voltage and current
signals. COUVGAPCuses line resistance, reactance and line charging capacitance to
calculate the remote end voltage. It also takes the input for local shunt reactor,
connected at the line side of the line breaker, reactance value. The calculated voltage
is referred to as compensated voltage.

910
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

STOV

TROV
Over voltage

U3P STOVLx
comparator
I3P TRIPOVLx
t
Compensated
SWIPOS voltage calculation STUVLx
EnShuntReactor &
TRIPUVLx
Under voltage t
TRUV
comparator
STUV

IEC09000782-1-en.vsd
IEC09000782 V1 EN

Figure 463: Logic diagram of Compensated over and undervoltage protection

(COUVGAPC)

The formula used for calculation of compensated voltage is as follows:

Uremote = Ulocal (Ilocal j x Ulocal/Xsr + j x Ulocal/Xcp) x Zsetting

Where:
Uremote calculated voltage at the opposite side of line

Ulocal measured local voltage

Ilocal measured local current

Xsr reactance of local line connected shunt reactor, if applicable

Xcp half of equivalent reactance of line distributed capacitor

Above calculated compensated voltage is compared to preset over and under voltage
levels set as percentage of base voltage UBase. If the calculated voltage exceeds
setting in any phase, COUVGAPC generates start and trip signals for that phase and
common start and trip signals. Independent enabling for overvoltage and
undervoltage are available with definite time delay. If shunt reactor is not present in
the system, COUVGAPC does not include any effect of shunt reactor while
calculating the compensated voltage. This shunt reactor calculation is enabled when
both input SWIPOS is 1 and setting parameter EnShuntReactor is On. Run time
change in EnShuntReactor setting parameter restarts the IED and SWIPOS input
signal is used to enable/disable the shunt reactor calculations.

Calculations

All resistance and reactance considered in compensated voltage calculation are

primary side values.
Calculation of shunt reactor reactance in ohms from given MVAr rating:

911
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

2
UN
X sr =
QN
EQUATION2249 V1 EN (Equation 160)

Where:
UN line to line voltage

QN is total three phase MVAr of shunt reactor

If total line capacitance (Ctotal) is known then half line capacitive reactance:

2
X cp =
wCtotal
EQUATION2250 V1 EN (Equation 161)

and if total line capacitive reactance XcTotal is known:

X cp = 2 X cTotal
EQUATION2251 V1 EN (Equation 162)

Compensated voltage for all three phases is available as service values.

15.8.3.8 Technical data

Table 581: COUVGAPC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, (1-100)% of UBase 0,5% of Ur
undervoltage
Absolute (0.0050.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
hysteresis 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Critical impulse 10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8x Uset -

time,
undervoltage
Impulse margin 15 ms typically -
time,
undervoltage
Operate value, (1-200)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at UUr
overvoltage 0.5% of U at U>Ur

Critical impulse 10 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.2 x Uset -

time, overvoltage
Table continues on next page

912
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

Function Range or value Accuracy

Impulse margin 15 ms typically -
time, overvoltage
Independent time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
delay for greater
undervoltage
functionality at 1.2
to 0.8 x Uset

Independent time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is

delay for greater
overvoltage
functionality at 0.8
to 1.2 x Uset

15.8.4 Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC

15.8.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC - 51

15.8.4.2 Functionality

Sudden change in current variation (SCCVPTOC) function is a fast way of finding any
abnormality in line currents. When there is a fault in the system, the current changes
faster than the voltage. SCCVPTOC finds abnormal condition based on phase-to-
phase current variation. The main application is as a local criterion to increase security
when transfer trips are used.

15.8.4.3 Function block

SCCVPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR

IEC09000765-1-en.vsd
IEC09000765 V1 EN

Figure 464: SCCVPTOC function block

913
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

15.8.4.4 Signals
Table 582: SCCVPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase to phase current samples group
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip signals

Table 583: SCCVPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
START BOOLEAN Common start signal

15.8.4.5 Settings
Table 584: SCCVPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
I> 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Fixed threshold setting in % of IBase
tHold 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Hold time for operate signals

Table 585: SCCVPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tDelay 0.000 - 0.005 s 0.001 0.002 Time delay for start and trip signals

Table 586: SCCVPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

15.8.4.6 Operation principle

Sudden change in current variation (SCCVPTOC) function calculates the variation in

phase-to-phase current and gives the START output when this variation crosses the
sum of start level and float threshold for a time of tDelay. The variation is calculated
for all the three phase-to-phase currents.

The variation in the current is calculated using the following equation:

914
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

Di = i ( t ) - 2 i ( t - T ) + i ( t - 2T )
EQUATION2252 V1 EN

Where:
i(t) Amplitude of the current at the present instant
i(t-T) Amplitude of the current at the instant exactly one cycle time before
i(t-2T) Amplitude of the current at the instant exactly two cycle time before

Criteria:

Di > i (1.8 DIT + I >)

EQUATION2253 V1 EN (Equation 163)

I>: start level

It is the full-circle integral of the phase-to-phase current variation

1 2T -1
DIT = Di ( t - n )
T n =T
EQUATION2254 V1 EN (Equation 164)

T: the count of the sampling value in one cycle

If the above criteria becomes true for a time of tDelay, then respective START output
is activated provided the BLOCK input is false, and the respective TRIP outputs is
activated for the time of tHold provided the BLKTR and BLOCK input is false.

15.8.4.7 Technical data

Table 587: SCCVPTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, (5-100)% of IBase 2.0% of Ir
overcurrent
Hold time for operate (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
signal at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

15.8.5 Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC

15.8.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC - 94

915
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

15.8.5.2 Functionality

In Direct transfer trip (DTT) scheme, the received CR signal gives the trip to the circuit
breaker after checking certain local criteria functions in order to increase the security
of the overall tripping functionality. Carrier receive logic (LCCRPTRC) function
gives final trip output of the DTT scheme.

Features:

Carrier redundancy to ensure security in DTT scheme

Blocking function output on CR Channel Error
Phase wise trip outputs

15.8.5.3 Function block

LCCRPTRC
BLOCK TRIP
LOCTR TRL1
LOCTRL1 TRL2
LOCTRL2 TRL3
LOCTRL3
CHERR1
CHERR2
CR1
CR2

IEC09000766-1-en.vsd
IEC09000766 V1 EN

Figure 465: LCCRPTRC function block

15.8.5.4 Signals
Table 588: LCCRPTRC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LOCTR BOOLEAN 0 Local common trip signal coming from DTT
LOCTRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Local trip signal for phase 1 coming from DTT
LOCTRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Local trip signal for phase 2 coming from DTT
LOCTRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Local trip signal for phase 3 coming from DTT
CHERR1 BOOLEAN 0 Channel error indication flag for carrier receive 1
CHERR2 BOOLEAN 0 Channel error indication flag for carrier receive 2
CR1 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive 1
CR2 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive 2

916
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

Table 589: LCCRPTRC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip phase 1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip phase 2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip phase 3

15.8.5.5 Settings
Table 590: LCCRPTRC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
ChMode 2 Out Of 2 - - 2 Out Of 2 Setting to select 1/2 or 2/2 mode
1 Out Of 2
tOperate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay to operate

15.8.5.6 Operation principle

The functionality of the Carrier receive logic (LCCRPTRC) is to release the TRIP
signal for DTT scheme based on the LOCTRL1, LOCTRL2, LOCTRL3, and LOCTR
signals coming from local criterion, and the Carrier receive signals CR1 and CR2.
There are two modes of operation 1 out of 2 and 2 out of 2. In the case of the 1 out of 2
mode if any one of the carrier signal is received then the trip signals will be released,
and in 2 out of 2 mode both the CRs should be high to release trip signal. If any one of
the channel error signals is high in 2 out of 2 mode, then logic automatically switches
to 1 out of 2 mode after a time delay of 200 ms. After switching to 1/2 mode under
channel error condition and if channel error gets cleared the mode will switch back
only after a time delay of 200 ms.

If the input channel error signal is high then the respective carrier receive signal will
be blocked.

The complete function can be blocked by setting the BLOCK input high.

15.8.5.7 Technical data

Table 591: LCCRPTRC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operation mode 1 Out Of 2 -
2 Out Of 2
Independent time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
delay greater

917
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

15.8.6 Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV

15.8.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Negative sequence overvoltage LCNSPTOV - 47
protection

15.8.6.2 Functionality

Negative sequence components are present in all types of fault condition. Negative
sequence voltage and current get high values during unsymmetrical faults.

15.8.6.3 Function block

LCNSPTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR

IEC09000767-1-en.vsd
IEC09000767 V1 EN

Figure 466: LCNSPTOV Function block

15.8.6.4 Signals
Table 592: LCNSPTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip output

Table 593: LCNSPTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal for negative sequence over voltage
START BOOLEAN Start signal for negative sequence over voltage

918
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

15.8.6.5 Settings
Table 594: LCNSPTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
U2> 1 - 200 %UB 1 10 Negative sequence over voltage start
value in % of UBase
tU2 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 2.000 Time delay to operate

Table 595: LCNSPTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

15.8.6.6 Monitored data

Table 596: LCNSPTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
U2 REAL - kV Neagative sequence
voltage value

15.8.6.7 Operation principle

Negative sequence over voltage protection (LCNSPTOV) is a definite time stage

comparator function. The negative sequence input voltage from the SMAI block is
connected as input to the function through a group connection U3P in PCM600. This
voltage is compared against the preset value and a start signal will be set high if the
input negative sequence voltage is greater than the preset value U2>. Trip signal will
be set high after a time delay setting of tU2. There is a BLOCK input which will block
the complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The negative sequence
voltage is also available as service value output U2.

15.8.6.8 Technical data

Table 597: LCNSPTOV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, (1-200)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at UUr
negative sequence 0.5% of U at U>Ur
overvoltage
Reset ratio, >95% at (10200)% of UBase -
negative sequence
overvoltage
Operate time, start Min. = 15 ms -
at 0 to 2 x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Table continues on next page

919
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reset time, start at 2 Min. = 15 ms -
to 0 x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Critical impulse 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

time, negative
sequence
overvoltage
Impulse margin 15 ms typically -
time, negative
sequence
overvoltage
Independent time (0.000-120.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
delay to operate at 0 greater
to 1.2 x Uset

15.8.7 Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV

15.8.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV - 59N

15.8.7.2 Functionality

Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal conditions involving earth.
They can reach considerably high values during earth faults.

15.8.7.3 Function block

LCZSPTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR

IEC09000768-1-en.vsd
IEC09000768 V1 EN

Figure 467: LCZSPTOV function block

15.8.7.4 Signals
Table 598: LCZSPTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block TRIP output

920
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

Table 599: LCZSPTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN TRIP signal for zero sequence over voltage
protection
START BOOLEAN Start signal for zero sequence over voltage
protection

15.8.7.5 Settings
Table 600: LCZSPTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
3U0> 1 - 200 %UB 1 10 Zero sequence voltage start value in % of
UBase
t3U0 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 2.000 Time delay to operate

Table 601: LCZSPTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

15.8.7.6 Monitored data

Table 602: LCZSPTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3U0 REAL - kV Zero sequence voltage
value

15.8.7.7 Operation principle

Zero sequence over voltage protection (LCZSPTOV) is a definite time stage

comparator function. The zero sequence input voltage from the SMAI block is
connected as input to the function through a group connection U3P in PCM600. This
voltage is compared against the preset value and a start signal will be set high if the
input zero sequence voltage is greater than the preset value 3U0>. Trip signal will be
set high after a time delay setting of t3U0. BLOCK input will block the complete
function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The zero sequence voltage will be
available as service value output as 3U0.

921
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

15.8.7.8 Technical data

Table 603: LCZSPTOV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, zero (1-200)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
sequence overvoltage 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, zero >95% at (10200)% of UBase -

sequence overvoltage
Operate time, start at 0 Min. = 15 ms -
to 2 x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2 to Min. = 15 ms -

0 x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Critical impulse time, 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

zero sequence
overvoltage
Impulse margin time, 15 ms typically -
zero sequence
overvoltage
Independent time (0.000-120.000) s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
delay to operate at 0 to greater
1.2 x Uset

15.8.8 Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC

15.8.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Negative sequence overcurrent LCNSPTOC - 46
protection

15.8.8.2 Functionality

Negative sequence components are present in all types of fault condition. They can
reach considerably high values during abnormal operation.

15.8.8.3 Function block

LCNSPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR

IEC09000769-1-en.vsd
IEC09000769 V1 EN

Figure 468: LCNSPTOC Function block

922
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

15.8.8.4 Signals
Table 604: LCNSPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip signal

Table 605: LCNSPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal negative sequence over current
protection
START BOOLEAN Start signal for negative sequence over current
protection

15.8.8.5 Settings
Table 606: LCNSPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
I2> 3 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Negative sequence over current start
value in % of IBase
tI2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to operate

Table 607: LCNSPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

15.8.8.6 Monitored data

Table 608: LCNSPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
I2 REAL - A Neagative sequence
current value

15.8.8.7 Operation principle

Negative sequence overcurrent protection (LCNSPTOC) is a definite time stage

comparator function. The negative sequence input current from the SMAI block is

923
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

connected as input to the function through a group connection I3P in PCM600. This
current is compared against the preset value and a start signal will be set high if the
input negative sequence current is greater than the preset value I2>. Trip signal will
be set high after a time delay setting of tI2. BLOCK input will block the complete
function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The negative sequence current is
available as service value output I2.

15.8.8.8 Technical data

Table 609: LCNSPTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, (3 - 2500)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
negative sequence 1.0% of I at I > Ir
overcurrent
Reset ratio, negative >95% at (502500)% of IBase -
sequence overcurrent
Operate time, start at Min. = 15 ms -
0 to 2 x Iset Max. = 25 ms

Reset time, start at 2 Min. = 15 ms -

to 0 x Iset Max. = 25 ms

Operate time, start at Min. = 10 ms -

0 to 10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start at 10 Min. = 20 ms -

to 0 x Iset Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time, 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

negative sequence 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
overcurrent
Impulse margin time, 15 ms typically -
negative sequence
overcurrent
Independent time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms, whichever is
delay at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

Transient overreach, <5% at = 100 ms -

start function

15.8.9 Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC

15.8.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC - 51N

924
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

15.8.9.2 Functionality

Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal conditions involving earth.
They have a considerably high value during earth faults.

15.8.9.3 Function block

LCZSPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR

IEC09000770-1-en.vsd
IEC09000770 V1 EN

Figure 469: LCZSPTOC Function block

15.8.9.4 Signals
Table 610: LCZSPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip output

Table 611: LCZSPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal for zero sequence over current
protection
START BOOLEAN Start signal for zero sequence over current
protection

15.8.9.5 Settings
Table 612: LCZSPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
3I0> 3 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Zero sequence over current start value in
% of IBase
t3I0 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to operate

Table 613: LCZSPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

925
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

15.8.9.6 Monitored data

Table 614: LCZSPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0 REAL - A Zero sequence current
value

15.8.9.7 Operation principle

Zero sequence overcurrent protection (LCZSPTOC) is a definite time stage

comparator function. The zero sequence input current from the SMAI block is
connected as input to the function through a group connection I3P in PCM600. This
current is compared against the preset value and a start signal will be set high if the
input zero sequence current is greater than the preset value 3I0>. Trip signal will be
set high after a time delay setting of t3I0. BLOCK input will block the complete
function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The zero sequence current is available as
service value output 3I0.

15.8.9.8 Technical data

Table 615: LCZSPTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, zero (3-2500)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at IIr
sequence 1.0% of I at I>Ir
overcurrent
Reset ratio, zero >95% at (502500)% of IBase -
sequence
overcurrent
Operate time, start at Min. = 15 ms -
0 to 2 x Iset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2 Min. = 15 ms -

to 0 x Iset Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start at Min. = 10 ms -

0 to 10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start at Min. = 20 ms -

10 to 0 x Iset Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time, 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

zero sequence 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
overcurrent
Impulse margin time, 15 ms typically -
zero sequence
overcurrent
Independent time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
delay at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

15.8.10 Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC

926
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

15.8.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC - 51

15.8.10.2 Functionality

Three phase overcurrent (LCP3PTOC) is designed for overcurrent conditions.

Features:

Phase wise start and trip signals

Overcurrent protection
Phase wise RMS current is available as service values
Single definite time stage trip function.

15.8.10.3 Function block

LCP3PTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRL1
BLKTR TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3

IEC09000771-1-en.vsd
IEC09000771 V1 EN

Figure 470: LCP3PTOC Function block

15.8.10.4 Signals
Table 616: LCP3PTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs by resetting timers
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip of the function

927
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

Table 617: LCP3PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN Common start signal
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3

15.8.10.5 Settings
Table 618: LCP3PTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation On / Off
On
IOC> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 1000 Start value for 3 phase over current in % of
IBase
tOC 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay to operate

Table 619: LCP3PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

15.8.10.6 Monitored data

Table 620: LCP3PTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current RMS value for
phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current RMS value for
phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current RMS value for
phase L3

15.8.10.7 Operation principle

Three phase overcurrent (LCP3PTOC) is used for detecting over current conditions.
LCP3PTOC starts when the current exceeds the set limit IOC>. It operates with
definite time (DT) characteristics, that is, the function operates after a predefined time

928
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

tOC and resets when the fault current disappears. The function contains a blocking
functionality. It is possible to block the function output, timer or the function itself, if
desired.

15.8.10.8 Technical data

Table 621: LCP3PTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, (5-2500)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
overcurrent 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, > 95% at (50-2500)% of IBase -

overcurrent
Start time at 0 to 2 x Min. = 10 ms -
Iset Max. = 25 ms

Reset time at 2 to 0 x Min. = 20 ms -

Iset Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time, 5 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

overcurrent 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Impulse margin time, 10 ms typically -

overcurrent
Independent time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
delay to operate at 0 greater
to 2 x Iset

15.8.11 Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC

15.8.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC - 37

15.8.11.2 Functionality

Three phase undercurrent function (LCP3PTUC) is designed for detecting loss of load
conditions.

Features:

Phase wise start and trip signals

Phase wise RMS current is available as service values
Single definite time stage trip function

929
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK505308-UEN B
Scheme communication

15.8.11.3 Function block

LCP3PTUC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRL1
BLKTR TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3

IEC09000772-1-en.vsd
IEC09000772 V1 EN

Figure 471: LCP3PTUC Function block

15.8.11.4 Signals
Table 622: LCP3PTUC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs by resetting timers
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip of the function

Table 623: LCP3PTUC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN Common start signal
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3

15.8.11.5 Settings
Table 624: LCP3PTUC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation On / Off
On
IUC< 1.00 - 100.00 %IB 0.01 50.00 Start value for 3 phase under current in %
of IBase
tUC 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to operate

930
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 15
Scheme communication

Table 625: LCP3PTUC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

15.8.11.6 Monitored data

Table 626: LCP3PTUC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current RMS value for
phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current RMS value for
phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current RMS value for
phase L3

15.8.11.7 Operation principle

Three phase undercurrent (LCP3PTUC) is used for detecting sudden load loss which
is considered as fault condition. LCP3PTUC starts when the current is less than the set
limit IUC<. It operates with definite time (DT) characteristics, that is, the function
operates after a predefined time tUC and resets when the load current restores. The
function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function output,
timer or the function itself, if desired.

15.8.11.8 Technical data

Table 627: LCP3PTUC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, (1.00-100.00)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir
undercurrent
Reset ratio, < 105% at (50.00-100.00)% of IBase -
undercurrent
Start time at 2 to 0 x Min. = 15 ms -
Iset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 0 to 2 x Min. = 10 ms -

Iset Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse time, 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

undercurrent
Impulse margin time, 10 ms typically -
undercurrent
Independent time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
delay to operate at 2 greater
to 0 x Iset

931
Technical manual
932
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

Section 16 Logic

16.1 Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC

16.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC 94

I->O

SYMBOL-K V1 EN

16.1.2 Functionality
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved
in the tripping of the fault. It provides a settable pulse prolongation to ensure a trip
pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-
operation with autoreclosing functions.

The trip function block also includes a settable latch functionality for evolving faults
and breaker lock-out.

16.1.3 Function block

SMPPTRC
BLOCK TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRL1
TRIN TRL2
TRINL1 TRL3
TRINL2 TR1P
TRINL3 TR2P
PSL1 TR3P
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTREF
P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

IEC05000707-2-en.vsd
IEC05000707 V2 EN

Figure 472: SMPPTRC function block

933
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

16.1.4 Signals
Table 628: SMPPTRC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)
TRIN BOOLEAN 0 Trip all phases
TRINL1 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase 1
TRINL2 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase 2
TRINL3 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase 3
PSL1 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1
PSL2 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L2
PSL3 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L3
1PTRZ BOOLEAN 0 Zone Trip with a separate phase selection
1PTREF BOOLEAN 0 Single phase DEF Trip for separate phase
selection
P3PTR BOOLEAN 0 Prepare all tripping to be three-phase
SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout
function

Table 629: SMPPTRC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip output signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
TR1P BOOLEAN Tripping single-pole
TR2P BOOLEAN Tripping two-pole
TR3P BOOLEAN Tripping three-pole
CLLKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)

934
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

16.1.5 Settings
Table 630: SMPPTRC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
Program 3 phase - - 1ph/3ph Three ph; single or three ph; single, two or
1ph/3ph three ph trip
1ph/2ph/3ph
tTripMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Minimum duration of trip output signal
tWaitForPHS 0.020 - 0.500 s 0.001 0.050 Secures 3-pole trip when phase selection
failed

Table 631: SMPPTRC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TripLockout Off - - Off On: activate output (CLLKOUT) and trip
On latch, Off: only outp
AutoLock Off - - Off On: lockout from input (SETLKOUT) and
On trip, Off: only inp

16.1.6 Operation principle

The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic common 3-phase output
SMPPTRC is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to secure
the breaker opening.

For three-phase tripping logic common 3-phase output, SMPPTRC has a single input
(TRIN) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the
IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs,
are routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs
binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.

BLOCK
tTripMin TRIP
TRIN OR
AND t

Operation Mode = On

Program = 3Ph

en05000789.vsd
IEC05000789 V1 EN

Figure 473: Simplified logic diagram for three phase trip

SMPPTRC function for single-phase and two-phase tripping has additional phase
segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter

935
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

inputs enable single- phase and two-phase tripping for those functions which do not
have their own phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single trip
output and not phase segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase segregated
trip inputs of the expanded SMPPTRC function. Examples of such protection
functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The expanded SMPPTRC function
has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping (for example, carrier-
aided tripping commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for earth
fault tripping (for example, tripping output from a residual overcurrent protection).

Additional logic, including a timer tWaitForPHS, secures a three-phase trip command

for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase selection signals.

The expanded SMPPTRC function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 (besides
the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary
outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these signals. There are
also separate output signals indicating single-phase, two-phase or three-phase trip.
These signals are important for cooperation with the autorecloser SMBRREC
function.

The expanded SMPPTRC function is equipped with logic which secures correct
operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special
input is also provided which disables single- phase and two-phase tripping, forcing all
tripping to be three-phase.

In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC function block is used for each

breaker. This can be the case if single pole tripping and autoreclosing is used.

The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from
another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three-phase trip,
if desired.

It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of closing
only the choice is by setting TripLockout.

16.1.6.1 Logic diagram

TRINL1

TRINL2
OR
TRINL3

1PTRZ OR
1PTREF
OR
TRIN RSTTRIP
AND
Program = 3 phase

IEC05000517-3-en.vsd
IEC05000517 V3 EN

Figure 474: Three-phase front logic simplified logic diagram

936
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

TRIN

TRINL1

PSL1 L1TRIP
OR
AND

TRINL2

PSL2 L2TRIP
OR
AND

TRINL3

PSL3 L3TRIP
OR
AND

OR

OR OR

- loop
l-oop
OR
AND
AND
AND
1 PTREF AND tWaitForPHS
1 PTRZ OR t

IEC10000056-3-en.vsd

IEC10000056 V3 EN

Figure 475: Phase segregated front logic

937
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

L1TRIP 150 ms
OR
AND t RTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND

L2TRIP 150 ms
OR
AND t STRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND

L3TRIP 150 ms
OR
AND t TTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND
BLOCK OR

OR AND
P3PTR
OR

-loop

IEC10000268-2-en.vsd
IEC10000268 V2 EN

Figure 476: Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode

938
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

BLOCK
tTripMin

tEvolvingFault

tTripMin

tEvolvingFault

tTripMin

tEvolvingFault

IEC05000520-4-en.vsdx

IEC05000520-WMF V4 EN

Figure 477: Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

939
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

IEC05000521-3.vsd

IEC05000521-WMF V3 EN

Figure 478: Final tripping circuits

16.1.7 Technical data

Table 632: SMPPTRC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip action 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph -
Minimum trip pulse length (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever
is greater
3-pole trip delay (0.020-0.500) s 0.2% or 10 ms whichever is
greater
Single phase delay, two phase (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 10 ms whichever is
delay and evolving fault delay greater

16.2 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC

16.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC - -

940
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

16.2.2 Functionality
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip signals and other logical
output signals to different output contacts on the IED.

The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be connected
to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable
pulse or steady output.

16.2.3 Function block

TMAGAPC
BLOCK OUTPUT1
BLK1 OUTPUT2
BLK2 OUTPUT3
BLK3
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32

IEC13000197-1-en.vsd
IEC13000197 V1 EN

Figure 479: TMAGAPC function block

16.2.4 Signals
Table 633: TMAGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 2
Table continues on next page

941
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

Name Type Default Description

BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 3
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16
INPUT17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 17
INPUT18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 18
INPUT19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 19
INPUT20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 20
INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 21
INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 22
INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 23
INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 24
INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 25
INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 26
INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 27
INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 28
INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 29
INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 30
INPUT31 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 31
INPUT32 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 32

Table 634: TMAGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 1 to 32

942
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

16.2.5 Settings
Table 635: TMAGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PulseTime 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output off delay time
ModeOutput1 Steady - - Steady Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput2 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput3 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
Pulsed

16.2.6 Operation principle

The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3
output signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to
provide grouping of connected input signals to the three output signals from the
function block.

Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:

1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value
1 the first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical
value 1 the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1
the third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.

By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime,

OnDelay and OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The OnDelay
is always active and will delay the input to output transition by the set time. The
ModeOutput for respective output decides whether the output shall be steady with an
drop-off delay as set by OffDelay or if it shall give a pulse with duration set by
PulseTime. Note that for pulsed operation and that the inputs are connected in an OR-
function, a new pulse will only be given on the output if all related inputs are reset and
then one is activated again. For steady operation the OffDelay will start when all
related inputs have reset. Detailed logical diagram is shown in figure 480

943
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

PulseTime

t
&
ModeOutput1=Pulsed
INPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
Ondelay Offdelay
&
1
1 t t
INPUT 16

PulseTime

t
&
ModeOutput2=Pulsed

INPUT 17
OUTPUT 2
Ondelay Offdelay
&
1
1 t t
INPUT 32

PulseTime
t
&

ModeOutput3=Pulsed

OUTPUT 3
Ondelay Offdelay
&
1
1 t t

IEC09000612-3-en.vsd
IEC09000612 V3 EN

Figure 480: Trip matrix internal logic

Output signals from TMAGAPC are typically connected to other logic blocks or
directly to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit
breaker(s) the pulse time shall be set to at least 0.150 seconds in order to obtain
satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

16.2.7 Technical data

Table 636: Number of TMAGAPC instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TMAGAPC 6 6 -

16.3 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH

16.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH - -

944
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

16.3.2 Functionality
The group alarm logic function ALMCALH is used to route several alarm signals to
a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

16.3.3 Function block

ALMCALH
BLOCK ALARM
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000181-1-en.vsd
IEC13000181 V1 EN

16.3.4 Signals
Table 637: ALMCALH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

945
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

Table 638: ALMCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

16.3.5 Settings
Table 639: ALMCALH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

16.3.6 Operation principle

The logic for group alarm ALMCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and one
ALARM output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in
order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output ALARM signal
from the function block.

When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the
ALARM output signal will get logical value 1.

The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.

Input 1
200 ms
ALARM
1 t
Input 16

IEC13000191-1-en.vsd

IEC13000191 V1 EN

Figure 481: Group alarm logic

16.3.7 Technical data

Table 640: Number of ALMCALH instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ALMCALH - - 5

946
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

16.4 Logic for group warning WRNCALH

16.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic for group warning WRNCALH - -

16.4.2 Functionality
The group warning logic function WRNCALH is used to route several warning
signals to a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

16.4.3 Function block

WRNCALH
BLOCK WARNING
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000182-1-en.vsd
IEC13000182 V1 EN

16.4.4 Signals
Table 641: WRNCALH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
Table continues on next page

947
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

Table 642: WRNCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
WARNING BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

16.4.5 Settings
Table 643: WRNCALH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

16.4.6 Operation principle

The logic for group warning WRNCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and
1 WARNING output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in
order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output WARNING signal
from the function block.

When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the
WARNING output signal will get logical value 1.

The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.

INPUT1
200 ms
WARNING
1 t
INPUT16

IEC13000192-1-en.vsd

IEC13000192 V1 EN

948
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

16.4.7 Technical data

Table 644: Number of WRNCALH instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
WRNCALH - - 5

16.5 Logic for group indication INDCALH

16.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic for group indication INDCALH - -

16.5.2 Functionality
The group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route several indication
signals to a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

16.5.3 Function block

INDCALH
BLOCK IND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000183-1-en.vsd
IEC13000183 V1 EN

949
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

16.5.4 Signals
Table 645: INDCALH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

Table 646: INDCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
IND BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

16.5.5 Settings
Table 647: INDCALH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

16.5.6 Operation principle

The logic for group indication INDCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and
1 IND output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order
to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output IND signal from the
function block.

950
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the IND
output signal will get logical value 1.

The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.

INPUT1
200 ms
IND
1 t
INPUT16

IEC13000193-1-en.vsd

IEC13000193 V1 EN

16.5.7 Technical data

Table 648: Number of INDCALH instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCALH - 5 -

16.6 Basic configurable logic blocks

The basic configurable logic blocks do not propagate the time stamp and quality of
signals (have no suffix QT at the end of their function name). A number of logic blocks
and timers are always available as basic for the user to adapt the configuration to the
specific application needs. The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and
their features.

These logic blocks are also available as part of an extension logic package with the
same number of instances.

AND function block. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.

GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass
from the input to the output.

INVERTER function block that inverts one input signal to the output.

LLD function block. Loop delay used to delay the output signal one execution
cycle.

951
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

OR function block. Each block has up to six inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.

PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting of operation of outputs, settable pulse time.

RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or
returns to the state it had before the power interruption. RESET input has priority.

SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or
returns to the state it had before the power interruption. The SET input has
priority.

TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay.

XOR function block. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.

16.6.1 AND function block AND

The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The AND function block has up to four inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.

16.6.1.1 Function block

AND
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC14000071-1-en.vsd
IEC14000071 V1 EN

Figure 482: AND function block

952
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

16.6.1.2 Signals
Table 649: AND Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

Table 650: AND Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

16.6.1.3 Technical data

Table 651: Number of AND instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
AND 60 60 160

16.6.2 Controllable gate function block GATE

The Controllable gate function block (GATE) is used for controlling if a signal should
be able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.

16.6.2.1 Function block

GATE
INPUT OUT

IEC04000410-2-en.vsd
IEC04000410 V2 EN

Figure 483: GATE function block

16.6.2.2 Signals
Table 652: GATE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to gate

953
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

Table 653: GATE Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from gate

16.6.2.3 Settings
Table 654: GATE Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

16.6.2.4 Technical data

Table 655: Number of GATE instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
GATE 10 10 20

16.6.3 Inverter function block INV

16.6.3.1 Function block

INV
INPUT OUT

IEC04000404_2_en.vsd
IEC04000404 V2 EN

Figure 484: INV function block

16.6.3.2 Signals
Table 656: INV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input

Table 657: INV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output

954
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

16.6.3.3 Technical data

Table 658: Number of INV instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INV 90 90 240

16.6.4 Loop delay function block LLD

The Logic loop delay function block (LLD) function is used to delay the output signal
one execution cycle, that is, the cycle time of the function blocks used.

16.6.4.1 Function block

LLD
INPUT OUT

IEC15000144.vsd
IEC15000144 V1 EN

Figure 485: LLD function block

16.6.4.2 Signals
Table 659: LLD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 660: LLD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal delayed one execution cycle

16.6.4.3 Technical data

Table 661: Number of LLD instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
LLD 10 10 20

16.6.5 OR function block

The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The OR function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.

955
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

16.6.5.1 Function block

OR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC04000405_2_en.vsd
IEC04000405 V2 EN

Figure 486: OR function block

16.6.5.2 Signals
Table 662: OR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to OR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to OR gate
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 to OR gate
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 to OR gate
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 to OR gate
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 to OR gate

Table 663: OR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from OR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from OR gate

16.6.5.3 Technical data

Table 664: Number of OR instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
OR 69 60 160

16.6.6 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER

The pulse (PULSETIMER) function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting the operation time of outputs. The PULSETIMER has a settable length. When
the input is 1, the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay parameter t. Then
it returns to 0.

956
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

16.6.6.1 Function block

PULSETIMER
INPUT OUT

IEC04000407-3-en.vsd
IEC04000407 V3 EN

Figure 487: PULSETIMER function block

16.6.6.2 Signals
Table 665: PULSETIMER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to pulse timer

Table 666: PULSETIMER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from pulse timer

16.6.6.3 Settings
Table 667: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Time delay of function

16.6.6.4 Technical data

Table 668: Number of PULSETIMER instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.00090000.000) s 0.5% 10 ms

16.6.7 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY

The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory
that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY
function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if,
after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the
power interruption. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher priority over
SET input.

957
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

Table 669: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block

RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1

16.6.7.1 Function block

RSMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000294-1-en.vsd
IEC09000294 V1 EN

Figure 488: RSMEMORY function block

16.6.7.2 Signals
Table 670: RSMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 671: RSMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

16.6.7.3 Settings
Table 672: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

16.6.7.4 Technical data

Table 673: Number of RSMEMORY instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORY 10 10 20

958
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

16.6.8 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY

The Set-reset with memory function block (SRMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory
that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY
function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if,
after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the
power interruption. The input SET has priority.
Table 674: Truth table for SRMEMORY function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0

16.6.8.1 Function block

SRMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC04000408_2_en.vsd
IEC04000408 V2 EN

Figure 489: SRMEMORY function block

16.6.8.2 Signals
Table 675: SRMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 676: SRMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

16.6.8.3 Settings
Table 677: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

959
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

16.6.8.4 Technical data

Table 678: Number of SRMEMORY instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORY 10 10 20

16.6.9 Settable timer function block TIMERSET

The Settable timer function block (TIMERSET) timer has two outputs for the delay of
the input signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also
has an Operation setting On and Off that controls the operation of the timer.

Input
tdelay
On

Off
tdelay

t
IEC08000289-2-en.vsd

IEC08000289 V2 EN

Figure 490: TIMERSET status diagram

16.6.9.1 Function block

TIMERSET
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC04000411-2-en.vsd
IEC04000411 V2 EN

Figure 491: TIMERSET function block

16.6.9.2 Signals
Table 679: TIMERSET Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer

960
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

Table 680: TIMERSET Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output from timer, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output from timer, drop-out delayed

16.6.9.3 Settings
Table 681: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

16.6.9.4 Technical data

Table 682: Number of TIMERSET instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSET 15 15 30 (0.00090000.000) s 0.5% 10 ms

16.6.10 Exclusive OR function block XOR

The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is
inverted. The output signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are
the same.
Table 683: Truth table for XOR function block
INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

16.6.10.1 Function block

XOR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC04000409-2-en.vsd
IEC04000409 V2 EN

Figure 492: XOR function block

961
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

16.6.10.2 Signals
Table 684: XOR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to XOR gate

Table 685: XOR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from XOR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from XOR gate

16.6.10.3 Technical data

Table 686: Number of XOR instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XOR 10 10 20

16.7 Configurable logic blocks Q/T

The configurable logic blocks QT propagate the time stamp and the quality of the
input signals (have suffix QT at the end of their function name).

The function blocks assist the user to adapt the IEDs' configuration to the specific
application needs. The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and their
features.

ANDQT AND function block. The function also propagates the time stamp and
the quality of input signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one
is inverted.

INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group signal. Single position

input is copied to value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied to time part
of SP_OUT output. Quality input bits are copied to the corresponding quality part
of SP_OUT output.

INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group signal input. The value
part of single position input is copied to SI_OUT output. The time part of single
position input is copied to TIME output. The quality bits in the common part and
the indication part of inputs signal are copied to the corresponding quality output.

962
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

INVALIDQT function which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a

"valid" input. Inputs are copied to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality
invalid bit is set, all outputs invalid quality bit will be set to invalid. The time
stamp of an output will be set to the latest time stamp of INPUT and VALID
inputs.

INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input signal and propagates the
time stamp and the quality of the input signal.

ORQT OR function block that also propagates the time stamp and the quality of
the input signals. Each block has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.

PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used, for example, for
pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The function also propagates
the time stamp and the quality of the input signal.

RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to
the state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates the time
stamp and the quality of the input signal.

SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to
the state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates the time
stamp and the quality of the input signal.

TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay. The function also propagates the
time stamp and the quality of the input signal.

XORQT XOR function block. The function also propagates the time stamp and
the quality of the input signals. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.

16.7.1 ANDQT function block

The ANDQT function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The ANDQT function block has four inputs and two outputs.

963
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

16.7.1.1 Function block

ANDQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC09000297-1-en.vsd
IEC09000297 V1 EN

Figure 493: ANDQT function block

16.7.1.2 Signals

Table 687: ANDQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

Table 688: ANDQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

16.7.1.3 Technical data

Table 689: Number of ANDQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ANDQT - 20 100

16.7.2 Single point indication related signals combining function

block INDCOMBSPQT

The value of single point input (SP_IN) is copied to the value part of the SP_OUT
output. The TIME input is copied to the time part of the SP_OUT output. State input
bits are copied to the corresponding state part of the SP_OUT output. If the state or
value on the SP_OUT output changes, the Event bit in the state part is toggled.

INDCOMBSPQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the
signals via IEC 61850.

964
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

16.7.2.1 Function block

INDCOMBSPQT
SP_IN* SP_OUT
TIME*
BLOCKED*
SUBST*
INVALID*
TEST*

IEC15000146.vsd
IEC15000146 V1 EN

Figure 494: INDCOMBSPQT function block

16.7.2.2 Signals

Table 690: INDCOMBSPQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SP_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single point indication
TIME GROUP 0 Timestamp
SIGNAL
BLOCKED BOOLEAN 0 Blocked for update
SUBST BOOLEAN 0 Substitued
INVALID BOOLEAN 0 Invalid value
TEST BOOLEAN 0 Testmode

Table 691: INDCOMBSPQT Output signals

Name Type Description
SP_OUT BOOLEAN Single point indication

16.7.2.3 Technical data

Table 692: Number of INDCOMBSPQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCOMBSPQT - 10 10

16.7.3 Single point input signal attributes converting function block

INDEXTSPQT

The value part of the single point input signal SI_IN is copied to SI_OUT output. The
time part of single point input is copied to the TIME output. The state bits in the
common part and the indication part of the input signal are copied to the corresponding
state output.

965
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

INDEXTSPQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals
via IEC 61850.

16.7.3.1 Function block

INDEXTSPQT
SI_IN* SI_OUT
TIME
BLOCKED
SUBST
INVALID
TEST

IEC14000067-1-en.vsd
IEC14000067 V1 EN

Figure 495: INDEXTSPQT function block

16.7.3.2 Signals

Table 693: INDEXTSPQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SI_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single indication

Table 694: INDEXTSPQT Output signals

Name Type Description
SI_OUT BOOLEAN Single indication
TIME GROUP SIGNAL Timestamp of input
BLOCKED BOOLEAN Blocked for update
SUBST BOOLEAN Substituted
INVALID BOOLEAN Invalid value
TEST BOOLEAN Testmode

16.7.3.3 Technical data

Table 695: Number of INDEXTSPQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDEXTSPQT - 10 10

16.7.4 Invalid logic function block INVALIDQT

Component which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a "valid" input.

The values of the input signals INPUTx (where 1<x<16) are copied to the outputs
OUTPUTx (where 1<x<16). If the input VALID is 0 or if its quality bit is set invalid,

966
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

all outputs OUTPUTx (where 1<x<16) quality bit will be set to invalid. The time
stamp of any output OUTPUTx (where 1<x<16) will be set to the latest time stamp of
any input and the input VALID.

INVALIDQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals
via IEC 61850.

16.7.4.1 Function block

INVALIDQT
INPUT1 OUTPUT1
INPUT2 OUTPUT2
INPUT3 OUTPUT3
INPUT4 OUTPUT4
INPUT5 OUTPUT5
INPUT6 OUTPUT6
INPUT7 OUTPUT7
INPUT8 OUTPUT8
INPUT9 OUTPUT9
INPUT10 OUTPUT10
INPUT11 OUTPUT11
INPUT12 OUTPUT12
INPUT13 OUTPUT13
INPUT14 OUTPUT14
INPUT15 OUTPUT15
INPUT16 OUTPUT16
VALID

iec08000169.vsd
IEC08000169 V1 EN

Figure 496: INVALIDQT function block

16.7.4.2 Signals

Table 696: INVALIDQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 13
Table continues on next page

967
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 16
VALID BOOLEAN 1 Inputs are valid or not

Table 697: INVALIDQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Indication output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Indication output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Indication output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Indication output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Indication output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Indication output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Indication output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Indication output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Indication output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Indication output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Indication output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Indication output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Indication output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Indication output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Indication output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Indication output 16

16.7.4.3 Technical data

Table 698: Number of INVALIDQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INVALIDQT - 6 6

16.7.5 Inverter function block INVERTERQT

The INVERTERQT function block inverts one binary input signal to the output. It can
propagate the quality, value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC 61850.

968
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

16.7.5.1 Function block

INVERTERQT
INPUT OUT

IEC09000299-1-en.vsd
IEC09000299 V1 EN

Figure 497: INVERTERQT function block

16.7.5.2 Signals

Table 699: INVERTERQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 700: INVERTERQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

16.7.5.3 Technical data

Table 701: Number of INVERTERQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INVERTERQT - 20 100

16.7.6 ORQT function block

The ORQT function block (ORQT) is used to form general combinatory expressions
OR with boolean variables. ORQT function block has up to six inputs and two outputs.
One of the outputs is inverted. It can propagate the quality, value and the timestamps
of the signals via IEC 61850.

969
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

16.7.6.1 Function block

ORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC09000298-1-en.vsd
IEC09000298 V1 EN

Figure 498: ORQT function block

16.7.6.2 Signals

Table 702: ORQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6

Table 703: ORQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

16.7.6.3 Technical data

Table 704: Number of ORQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ORQT - 20 100

16.7.7 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT

The pulse timer function block (PULSETIMERQT) can be used, for example, for
pulse extensions or for limiting the operation time of the outputs. PULSETIMERQT
has a settable output pulse length.

970
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

When the input goes to 1, the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay
parameter t. Then it returns to 0.

When the output changes value, the time stamp of the output signal is updated.

The supported quality state bits are propagated from the input to the output at each
execution cycle. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated time stamp on the
output.

PULSETIMERQT can propagate the quality, value and the time stamps of the signals
via IEC 61850.

16.7.7.1 Function block

PULSETIMERQT
INPUT OUT

IEC15000145.vsd
IEC15000145 V1 EN

Figure 499: PULSETIMERQT function block

16.7.7.2 Signals

Table 705: PULSETIMERQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 706: PULSETIMERQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

16.7.7.3 Settings
Table 707: PULSETIMERQT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length

16.7.7.4 Technical data

Table 708: Number of PULSETIMERQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMERQT - 10 30 (0.00090000.000) s 0.5% 10 ms

971
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

16.7.8 Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT

The Reset-set function (RSMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset or
set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORYQT function block has
two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power
interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power
interruption. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, the RESET input has higher priority than the
SET input.

RSMEMORYQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the
signals via IEC 61850.
Table 709: Truth table for RSMEMORYQT function block
RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1

16.7.8.1 Function block

RSMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC14000069-1-en.vsd
IEC14000069 V1 EN

Figure 500: RSMEMORYQT function block

16.7.8.2 Signals

Table 710: RSMEMORYQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 711: RSMEMORYQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

972
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

16.7.8.3 Settings
Table 712: RSMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

16.7.8.4 Technical data

Table 713: Number of RSMEMORYQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORYQT - 10 30

16.7.9 Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT

The Set-reset function (SRMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or
reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORYQT function block
has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power
interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power
interruption. The SET input has priority.

SRMEMORYQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the
signals via IEC 61850.

Table 714: Truth table for SRMEMORYQT function block

SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0

If Memory parameter is On, the output result is stored in semi-retained memory.

16.7.9.1 Function block

SRMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC14000070-1-en.vsd
IEC14000070 V1 EN

Figure 501: SRMEMORYQT function block

973
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

16.7.9.2 Signals

Table 715: SRMEMORYQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 716: SRMEMORYQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

16.7.9.3 Settings
Table 717: SRMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

16.7.9.4 Technical data

Table 718: Number of SRMEMORYQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORYQT - 10 30

16.7.10 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT

The Settable timer function block (TIMERSETQT) has two outputs for delay of the
input signal at pick-up and drop-out. The timer has a settable time delay (t). It also has
an Operation setting On/Off that controls the operation of the timer.

When the output changes value, the timestamp of the output signal is updated. The
supported quality state bits are propagated from the input to the output at each
execution cycle. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the
output.

TIMERSETQT can propagate the quality, value and the timestamps of the signals via
IEC 61850.

974
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

16.7.10.1 Function block

TIMERSETQT
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC14000068-1-en.vsd
IEC14000068 V1 EN

Figure 502: TIMERSETQT function

16.7.10.2 Signals

Table 719: TIMERSETQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 720: TIMERSETQT Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output signal, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output signal, drop-out delayed

16.7.10.3 Settings
Table 721: TIMERSETQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

16.7.10.4 Technical data

Table 722: Number of TIMERSETQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSETQT - 10 30 (0.00090000.000) s 0.5% 10 ms

16.7.11 Exclusive OR function block XORQT

The exclusive OR function (XORQT) function is used to generate combinatory

expressions with boolean variables. XORQT function has two inputs and two outputs.

975
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are
different and 0 if they are equal.
Table 723: Truth table for XORQT function block
INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

XORQT can propagate the quality, value and time stamps of the signals via IEC
61850.

16.7.11.1 Function block

XORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC09000300-1-en.vsd
IEC09000300 V1 EN

Figure 503: XORQT function block

16.7.11.2 Signals

Table 724: XORQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2

Table 725: XORQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

16.7.11.3 Technical data

Table 726: Number of XORQT instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XORQT - 10 30

976
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

16.8 Extension logic package

When extra configurable logic blocks are required, an additional package can be
ordered.
Table 727: Number of instances in the extension logic package
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
AND 40 40 100
GATE - - 49
INV 40 40 100
LLD - - 49
OR 40 40 100
PULSETIMER 5 5 49
SLGAPC 10 10 54
SRMEMORY - - 110
TIMERSET - - 49
VSGAPC 10 10 110
XOR - - 49

16.9 Fixed signals FXDSIGN

16.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -

16.9.2 Functionality
The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can
be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other
function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer,
floating point, string types of signals are available.

977
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

16.9.3 Function block

FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF

IEC05000445-3-en.vsd
IEC05000445 V3 EN

Figure 504: FXDSIGN function block

16.9.4 Signals
Table 728: FXDSIGN Output signals
Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off

16.9.5 Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

16.9.6 Operation principle

There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value
ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value

978
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value

ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value

16.10 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

16.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -

Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16 binary

(logical) signals into an integer.

16.10.2 Function block

B16I
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC07000128-2-en.vsd
IEC07000128 V2 EN

Figure 505: B16I function block

16.10.3 Signals
Table 729: B16I Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
Table continues on next page

979
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

Name Type Default Description

IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

Table 730: B16I Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

16.10.4 Monitored data

Table 731: B16I Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

16.10.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

16.10.6 Operation principle

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of
up to 16 binary inputs INx, where 1x16, to an integer. Each INx represents a value
according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx
= 2x-1 where 1x16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available
on the output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated.
OUT is an integer. When all INx (where 1x16) are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it
corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. The B16I function
is designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is
activated, it will freeze the output at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1x16.

980
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block B16I
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where
1x16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the B16I function block.

16.10.7 Technical data

Table 732: Number of B16I instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
B16I 6 4 8

16.11 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node

representation BTIGAPC

16.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with BTIGAPC - -
logic node representation

981
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

16.11.2 Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function BTIGAPC
is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. The block input
will freeze the output at the last value.

BTIGAPC can receive remote values via IEC 61850 depending on the operator
position input (PSTO).

16.11.3 Function block

BTIGAPC
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC13000303-1-en.vsd
IEC13000303 V1 EN

Figure 506: BTIGAPC function block

16.11.4 Signals
Table 733: BTIGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
Table continues on next page

982
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

Name Type Default Description

IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

Table 734: BTIGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

16.11.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

16.11.6 Monitored data

Table 735: BTIGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

16.11.7 Operation principle

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function
(BTIGAPC) will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx, where 1x16,
to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below from 0 to
32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1x16. The sum of all the
values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the integer
values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx (where
1x16) are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to that integer 65535 is
available on the output OUT. The BTIGAPC function is designed for receiving the
integer input from a station computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK
input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1x16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block BTIGAPC.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
Table continues on next page

983
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where
1x16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the BTIGAPC function block.

16.11.8 Technical data

Table 736: Number of BTIGAPC instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
BTIGAPC 4 4 8

16.12 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16

16.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 - -

16.12.2 Functionality
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16 is used to transform an integer into a
set of 16 binary (logical) signals.

984
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

16.12.3 Function block

IB16
BLOCK OUT1
INP OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC06000501-3-en.vsdx

IEC06000501 V3 EN

Figure 507: IB16 function block

16.12.4 Signals
Table 737: IB16 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input

Table 738: IB16 Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

985
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

16.12.5 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

16.12.6 Operation principle

With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the
remaining OUTx = 0 for (5x16).

OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the table IB16_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.

In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value =1,
OUT2 has a value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The sum of
these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 = 15.

This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where
1x16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) will transfer an integer with a
value between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of activated
outputs OUTx where 1x16. The sum of the values of all OUTx will then be equal
to the integer on input INP. The values of the different OUTx are according to the table
below. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.

When all OUTx where 1x16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that
integer 65535 is connected to input INP. The IB16 function is designed for receiving
the integer input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical
outputs at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1x16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block IB16.
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
Table continues on next page

986
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx (where x
= 1 to 16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be
converted by the IB16 function block.

16.12.7 Technical data

Table 739: Number of IB16 instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
IB16 6 4 8

16.13 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation ITBGAPC

16.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with ITBGAPC - -
logic node representation

16.13.2 Functionality
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function ITBGAPC is
used to transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by the
function to 16 binary coded (logic) output signals.

ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values over IEC 61850 when the R/L
(Remote/Local) push button on the front HMI, indicates that the control mode for the
operator is in position R (Remote i.e. the LED adjacent to R is lit ), and the
corresponding signal is connected to the input PSTO ITBGAPC function block. The

987
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

input BLOCK will freeze the output at the last received value and blocks new integer
values to be received and converted to binary coded outputs.

16.13.3 Function block

ITBGAPC
BLOCK OUT1
PSTO OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC14000012-1-en.vsd
IEC14000012 V1 EN

Figure 508: ITBGAPC function block

16.13.4 Signals
Table 740: ITBGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection

Table 741: ITBGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
Table continues on next page

988
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

Name Type Description

OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

16.13.5 Settings
This function does not have any setting parameters.

16.13.6 Operation principle

An example is used to explain the principle of operation: With integer 15 sent to and
received by the ITBGAPC function on the IEC 61850 the OUTx changes from 0 to 1
on each of the OUT1; OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4. All other OUTx (5x16) remains 0.
The boolean interpretation of this is represented by the assigned values of each of the
outputs OUT1 = 1; and OUT2 = 2; and OUT3= 4; and OUT4 = 8. The sum of these
OUTx (1x4) is equal to the integer 15 received via the IEC 61850 network. The
remaining OUTx = 0 for (5x16).

OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the Table 742. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.

The value of each OUTx for 1x16 (1x16) follows the general formulae: OUTx
= 2x-1 The sum of the values of all activated OUTx = 2x-1 where 1x16 will be equal
to the integer value received over IEC 61850 to the ITBGAPC_1 function block.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function

(ITBGAPC) will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated
via IEC 61850 and connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a combination of
activated outputs OUTx where 1x16. The values represented by the different OUTx
are according to Table 742. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.

The ITBGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station
computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
Table 742: Outputs and their values when activated
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
Table continues on next page

989
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx (1x16)
are active equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted to boolean by
the ITBGAPC function block.

The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer
number that is communicated to the ITBGAPC can only be written to the block while
the PSTO is in position Remote. If PSTO is in position Off or Local, then no
changes are applied to the outputs.

16.13.7 Technical data

Table 743: Number of ITBGAPC instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ITBGAPC 4 4 8

16.14 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGAPC

16.14.1 Identification
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device
identification identification number
Elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC - -

16.14.2 Functionality
Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the
elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high, see also Figure 509.

990
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Integration ACCTIME
with Retain

q-1

a
OVERFLOW
AND
a>b
999 999 s b

a
WARNING
AND
a>b
tWarning b

a
ALARM
AND
a>b
tAlarm b

q-1 = unit delay IEC13000290-2-en.vsd

IEC13000290 V2 EN

Figure 509: TEIGAPC logics

The main features of TEIGAPC

Applicable to long time integration up to 999 999.9 seconds

Supervision of overflow
Possibility to define a warning and an alarm with the resolution of 10
milliseconds
Retain the integration value
Possibilities for blocking and reset of the total integrated time
Report of the integrated time

16.14.3 Function block

TEIGAPC
BLOCK WARNING
IN ALARM
RESET OVERFLOW
ACCTIME

IEC14000014-1-en.vsd
IEC14000014 V1 EN

Figure 510: TEIGAPC function block

16.14.4 Signals
Table 744: TEIGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the integration and block the other outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the
elapsed time, when its value is high
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset the integration time

991
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

Table 745: TEIGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
warning limit
ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
alarm limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
overflow limit
ACCTIME REAL Integrated elapsed time in seconds

16.14.5 Settings
Table 746: TEIGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tWarning 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 600.00 Time limit for warning supervision
tAlarm 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 1200.00 Time limit for alarm supervision

16.14.6 Operation principle

The elapsed time integrator (TEIGAPC) provides

time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has
been high
blocking and reset of the total integrated time
supervision of limit transgression and overflow, the overflow limit is fixed to
999999.9 seconds
retaining of the integrated value

Figure 511 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block Time
Integration covers the logics for the first two items listed above while the block
Transgression Supervision Plus Retain contains the logics for the last two.

992
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 16
Logic

Loop Delay

tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM

BLOCK
RESET ACCTIME
Time Integration
IN

Loop Delay

IEC12000195-4-en.vsd

IEC12000195 V4 EN

Figure 511: TEIGAPC Simplified logic

TEIGAPC main functionalities

integration of the elapsed time when IN has been high
applicable to long time integration (999 999.9 seconds)
output ACCTIME presents integrated value in seconds
integrated value is retained in nonvolatile memory
any retained value with a warning/alarm/overflow is used as initiation
value for the integration following by a restart
RESET: Reset of the integration value. Consequently all other outputs are also
reset
unconditionally on the input IN value
reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero
BLOCK: Freeze the integration and block/reset the other outputs
unconditionally on the signal value
BLOCK request overrides RESET request
Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
overflow if output ACCTIME >999999.9 seconds
alarm if ACCTIME > tAlarm
warning if ACCTIME > tWarning

The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow,
tAlarm and tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.

tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is, there
is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.

993
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK505308-UEN B
Logic

tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms, depending
on the level of the defined values for the parameters.

The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds. The outputs
freeze if an overflow occurs.

16.14.6.1 Operation accuracy

The accuracy of TEIGAPC depends on essentially three factors

function cycle time
the pulse length
the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs

In principle, a shorter function cycle time, longer integrated time length or more pulses
may lead to reduced accuracy.

16.14.6.2 Memory storage

The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non-volatile memory.

16.14.7 Technical data

Table 747: TEIGAPC Technical data
Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy
Elapsed time 3 0 ~ 999999.9 s 0.2% or 20 ms
integration whichever is greater
8 0 ~ 999999.9 s 0.2% or 100 ms
whichever is greater
100 0 ~ 999999.9 s 0.2% or 250 ms
whichever is greater

Table 748: Number of TEIGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TEIGAPC 4 4 4

994
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Section 17 Monitoring

17.1 Measurements

17.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f

SYMBOL-RR V1 EN

Phase current measurement CMMXU -

SYMBOL-SS V1 EN

Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

Current sequence component CMSQI -

measurement
I1, I2, I0

SYMBOL-VV V1 EN

Voltage sequence component VMSQI -

measurement
U1, U2, U0

SYMBOL-TT V1 EN

Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

17.1.2 Functionality
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of
active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital

995
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides

to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power
system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection
and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument
transformers (CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the
measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of
the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify
proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection
function.

The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual

hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,
that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the
impact of noise in the inputs.

Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value
can also be based on periodic reporting.

Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN

The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system

quantities:

P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

PF: power factor
U: phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
I: phase current amplitude
F: power system frequency

,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical
quantities:

I: phase currents (amplitude and angle) (CMMXU)

U: voltages (phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle)
(VMMXU, VNMMXU)

The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using

fundamental frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively
voltage signals. The measured power quantities are available either, as
instantaneously calculated quantities or, averaged values over a period of time (low
pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.

996
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.

The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual

hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component

quantities:

I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, amplitude and angle)

U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, amplitude and
angle).

17.1.3 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

CVMMXN
I3P* S
U3P* S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE

IEC10000016-1-en.vsd
IEC10000016 V1 EN

Figure 512: CVMMXN function block

CMMXU
I3P* IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL

IEC05000699-2-en.vsd
IEC05000699 V2 EN

Figure 513: CMMXU function block

997
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

VMMXU
U3P* UL12
UL12RANG
UL12ANGL
UL23
UL23RANG
UL23ANGL
UL31
UL31RANG
UL31ANGL

IEC05000701-2-en.vsd
IEC05000701 V2 EN

Figure 514: VMMXU function block

CMSQI
I3P* 3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL

IEC05000703-2-en.vsd
IEC05000703 V2 EN

Figure 515: CMSQI function block

VMSQI
U3P* 3U0
3U0RANG
3U0ANGL
U1
U1RANG
U1ANGL
U2
U2RANG
U2ANGL

IEC05000704-2-en.vsd
IEC05000704 V2 EN

Figure 516: VMSQI function block

VNMMXU
U3P* UL1
UL1RANG
UL1ANGL
UL2
UL2RANG
UL2ANGL
UL3
UL3RANG
UL3ANGL

IEC09000850-1-en.vsd
IEC09000850 V1 EN

Figure 517: VNMMXU function block

998
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

17.1.4 Signals
Table 749: CVMMXN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

Table 750: CVMMXN Output signals

Name Type Description
S REAL Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent Power range
P_INST REAL Active Power
P REAL Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER Active Power range
Q_INST REAL Reactive Power
Q REAL Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive Power range
PF REAL Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER Power Factor range
ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage
U REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE INTEGER Calculated voltage range
I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range
F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range

Table 751: CMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL

Table 752: CMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
IL1 REAL IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL1RANG INTEGER IL1 Amplitude range
IL1ANGL REAL IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table continues on next page

999
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Type Description

IL2 REAL IL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL2RANG INTEGER IL2 Amplitude range
IL2ANGL REAL IL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
IL3 REAL IL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL3RANG INTEGER IL3 Amplitude range
IL3ANGL REAL IL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 753: VMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 2
SIGNAL

Table 754: VMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
UL12 REAL UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL12RANG INTEGER UL12 Amplitude range
UL12ANGL REAL UL12 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL23 REAL UL23 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL23RANG INTEGER UL23 Amplitude range
UL23ANGL REAL UL23 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL31 REAL UL31 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL31RANG INTEGER UL31 Amplitude range
UL31ANGL REAL UL31 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 755: CMSQI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 3
SIGNAL

Table 756: CMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3I0 REAL 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG INTEGER 3I0 Amplitude range
3I0ANGL REAL 3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I1 REAL I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I1RANG INTEGER I1 Amplitude range
I1ANGL REAL I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table continues on next page

1000
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Type Description

I2 REAL I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I2RANG INTEGER I2 Amplitude range
I2ANGL REAL I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 757: VMSQI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 4
SIGNAL

Table 758: VMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3U0 REAL 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3U0RANG INTEGER 3U0 Amplitude range
3U0ANGL REAL 3U0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U1 REAL U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U1RANG INTEGER U1 Amplitude range
U1ANGL REAL U1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U2 REAL U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U2RANG INTEGER U2 Amplitude range
U2ANGL REAL U2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 759: VNMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

Table 760: VNMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
UL1 REAL UL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL1RANG INTEGER UL1 Amplitude range
UL1ANGL REAL UL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL2 REAL UL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL2RANG INTEGER UL2 Amplitude range
UL2ANGL REAL UL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL3 REAL UL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL3RANG INTEGER UL3 Amplitude range
UL3ANGL REAL UL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value

1001
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

17.1.5 Settings
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in
PCM600.

These six functions are not handled as a group, so parameter settings are only available
in the first setting group.

The following terms are used in the Unit and Description columns:

UBase: Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage
setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage
supervised object.
IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current
setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the
supervised object.
SBase: Base setting for power values in MVA.

Table 761: CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
SMax 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
SRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
PMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
PRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
QMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
QMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
QRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PFMin -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value
PFMax -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Maximum value
PFRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UMin 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UMax 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
Table continues on next page

1002
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

URepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IMin 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 5.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
FrMin 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
FrMax 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value
FrRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - L1, L2, L3 Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
PowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 - 0.001 1.000 Amplitude factor to scale power
calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle compensation for phase shift
between measured I & U
k 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, U and I

Table 762: CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
SHiHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
PDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
PZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
PHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
PHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
Table continues on next page

1003
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
PLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
QDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
QZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
QHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
QHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
QLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
QLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
PFDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
PFHiHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.800 High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -0.800 Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
UDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
UHiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
ULowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
ULowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
ULimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
IDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
IHiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
ILowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
FrDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
Table continues on next page

1004
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

FrHiHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 65.000 High High limit (physical value)
FrHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 63.000 High limit (physical value)
FrLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 47.000 Low limit (physical value)
FrLowLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
UGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of UBase
IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of IBase
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5%
of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5%
of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir

Table 763: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IL1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
IL1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IL1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
IL1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IL2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IL2Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IL2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Table continues on next page

1005
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IL2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IL3DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IL3Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IL3RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IL3AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

Table 764: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
IL1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5%
of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IL1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IL1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir
IL1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir
IL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
IL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
IL2HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL2HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IL2LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IL2LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IL2Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IL2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
IL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
IL3HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL3HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IL3LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
Table continues on next page

1006
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IL3LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IL3Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IL3LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

Table 765: VMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL12DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
UL12ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL12Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL12RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
UL12AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL23DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL23Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL23RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL23AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL31DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL31Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL31RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL31AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

Table 766: VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL12HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL12HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL12LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
Table continues on next page

1007
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UL12LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
UL12Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in in % of UBase
UL12LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL23HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL23HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL23LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL23LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL23Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL23LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL31HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL31HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL31LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL31LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL31Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL31LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

Table 767: CMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3I0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
3I0Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
3I0Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
3I0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
3I0AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
3I0AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
3I0AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Table continues on next page

1008
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

I1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
I1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I1AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
I1AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
I2Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I2Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I2AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
I2AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

Table 768: CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3I0HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
3I0HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
3I0AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
I1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
Table continues on next page

1009
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

I1AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
I1AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
I2HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I2HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I2LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I2LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I2AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
I2AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value

Table 769: VMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3U0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
3U0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
3U0Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
3U0Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
3U0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
3U0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
3U0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
3U0AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
3U0AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
3U0AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
3U0AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
U1Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U1Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
U1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
Table continues on next page

1010
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

U1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
U2Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U2Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
U2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
U2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U2AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
U2AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
U2AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UAmpPreComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage
at 5% of Ur
UAmpPreComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage
at 30% of Ur
UAmpPreComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage
at 100% of Ur

Table 770: VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3U0HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
3U0HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U1HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U1HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
U1LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U1LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U1AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
U1AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
U1AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
U1AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U2HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U2HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
Table continues on next page

1011
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

U2LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U2LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U2AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

Table 771: VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
UL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL1Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
UL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL1AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL2Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL2AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL3DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL3Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL3RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL3LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL3AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

1012
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Table 772: VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL1HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL1HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL1LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL1LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
UL1Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL2HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL2HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL2LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL2LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL2Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL3HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL3HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL3LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL3LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL3Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase

17.1.6 Monitored data

Table 773: CVMMXN Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
S REAL - MVA Apparent Power
magnitude of deadband
value
P REAL - MW Active Power magnitude
of deadband value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive Power
magnitude of deadband
value
PF REAL - - Power Factor magnitude
of deadband value
U REAL - kV Calculated voltage
magnitude of deadband
value
I REAL - A Calculated current
magnitude of deadband
value
F REAL - Hz System frequency
magnitude of deadband
value

1013
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Table 774: CMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A IL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
IL1ANGL REAL - deg IL1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
IL2 REAL - A IL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
IL2ANGL REAL - deg IL2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
IL3 REAL - A IL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
IL3ANGL REAL - deg IL3 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

Table 775: VMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL12 REAL - kV UL12 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL12ANGL REAL - deg UL12 Angle, magnitude
of reported value
UL23 REAL - kV UL23 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL23ANGL REAL - deg UL23 Angle, magnitude
of reported value
UL31 REAL - kV UL31 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL31ANGL REAL - deg UL31 Angle, magnitude
of reported value

Table 776: CMSQI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0IMAG REAL - - 3I0 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
3I0 REAL - A 3I0 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
3I0ANGIM REAL - - 3I0 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
3I0ANGL REAL - deg 3I0 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
Table continues on next page

1014
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

I1IMAG REAL - - I1 Amplitude, magnitude
of instantaneous value
I1 REAL - A I1 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value
I1ANGIM REAL - - I1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I1ANGL REAL - deg I1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
I2IMAG REAL - - I2 Amplitude, magnitude
of instantaneous value
I2 REAL - A I2 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value
I2ANGIM REAL - - I2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I2ANGL REAL - deg I2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

Table 777: VMSQI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3U0IMAG REAL - - 3U0 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
3U0 REAL - kV 3U0 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
3U0ANGIM REAL - - 3U0 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
3U0ANGL REAL - deg 3U0 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
U1IMAG REAL - - U1 Amplitude, magnitude
of instantaneous value
U1 REAL - kV U1 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value
U1ANGIM REAL - - U1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
U1ANGL REAL - deg U1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
U2IMAG REAL - - U2 Amplitude, magnitude
of instantaneous value
U2 REAL - kV U2 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value
U2ANGIM REAL - - U2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
U2ANGL REAL - deg U2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

1015
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Table 778: VNMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV UL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL1ANGL REAL - deg UL1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
UL2 REAL - kV UL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL2ANGL REAL - deg UL2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
UL3 REAL - kV UL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL3ANGL REAL - deg UL3 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

17.1.7 Operation principle

17.1.7.1 Measurement supervision

The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and
further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-
processing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends
on the type of IED and built-in options.

The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:

Locally by means of the local HMI

Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report
function

Phase angle reference

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General
setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "Analog inputs".

Zero point clamping

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general
setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1, I2,
3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point clamping
might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the measurement values
within CVMMXU.

1016
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function
block by means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 518. The monitoring
has two different modes of operating:

Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or
High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 518.

X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit

X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit

X_RANGE=0

X_RANGE=0 t

Low limit

X_RANGE=2

Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4

IEC05000657-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000657 V2 EN

Figure 518: Presentation of operating limits

Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE).
The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded,
3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The
output may be connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get
measurement supervision as binary signals.

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 518.

The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between
the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one
channel.

Actual value of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting

1017
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The
following basic reporting modes are available:

Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting
(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or
integral dead-band reporting.

In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.

Y
Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)

Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4

Y1 Y5

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5

(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt IEC05000500-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000500 V2 EN

Figure 519: Periodic reporting

Amplitude dead-band supervision

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change
is larger than the Y pre-defined limits that are set by user (UDbRepIn), then the
measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the information
flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 520 shows an example with the amplitude dead-

1018
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.

Value Reported
Y

Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Y
Y
Y2 Y
Y
Y
Y
Y1

IEC99000529-2-en.vsdx

IEC99000529 V2 EN

Figure 520: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than
defined by the Y set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set
limit (XDbRepInt), figure 521, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band
supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.

The last value reported, Y1 in figure 521 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded.
This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following
measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with
small variations that can last for relatively long periods.

1019
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
Value
(1st) Value
A Reported Y5
Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported

t
IEC99000530-2-en.vsdx

IEC99000530 V2 EN

Figure 521: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

17.1.7.2 Measurements CVMMXN

Mode of operation
The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase
voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and
calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the
available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a
parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used
within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:

1020
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
Mode
1 L1, L2, L3 Used when
* * *
S = U L1 I L1 + U L 2 I L 2 + U L 3 I L 3 U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3 three phase-
EQUATION1385 V1 EN to-earth
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3
voltages are
EQUATION1386 V1 EN available
2 Arone Used when
S = U L1 L 2 I L*1 - U L 2 L 3 I L* 3 U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2 three two
phase-to-
(Equation 165) phase
EQUATION1387 V1 EN
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2
voltages are
EQUATION1388 V1 EN (Equation 166) available

3 PosSeq Used when

S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq
*
U = 3 U PosSeq only
symmetrical
(Equation 167) three phase
EQUATION1389 V1 EN
I = I PosSeq
power shall
EQUATION1390 V1 EN (Equation 168) be measured

4 L1L2 Used when

S = U L1 L 2 ( I L*1 - I L* 2 ) U = U L1 L 2 only UL1L2
phase-to-
(Equation 169)
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2 phase
EQUATION1391 V1 EN

voltage is
EQUATION1392 V1 EN (Equation 170) available

5 L2L3 Used when

S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L* 2 - I L* 3 ) U = U L2 L3 only UL2L3
phase-to-
(Equation 171)
I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2 phase
EQUATION1393 V1 EN

voltage is
EQUATION1394 V1 EN (Equation 172) available

6 L3L1 Used when

S = U L 3 L1 ( I L* 3 - I L*1 ) U = U L 3 L1 only UL3L1
phase-to-
(Equation 173)
I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2 phase
EQUATION1395 V1 EN

voltage is
EQUATION1396 V1 EN (Equation 174) available

7 L1 Used when
S = 3 U L1 I L*1 U = 3 U L1 only UL1
phase-to-
(Equation 175) earth voltage
I = I L1
EQUATION1397 V1 EN

is available
EQUATION1398 V1 EN (Equation 176)
8 L2 Used when
S = 3 U L 2 I L* 2 U = 3 U L2 only UL2
phase-to-
(Equation 177) earth voltage
I = IL2
EQUATION1399 V1 EN

is available
EQUATION1400 V1 EN (Equation 178)
9 L3 Used when
S = 3 U L 3 I L* 3 U = 3 U L3 only UL3
phase-to-
(Equation 179) earth voltage
I = I L3
EQUATION1401 V1 EN

is available
EQUATION1402 V1 EN (Equation 180)
* means complex conjugated value

1021
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the
measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes
that is, from 3 to 9 it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power
system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the
P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas:

P = Re( S )
EQUATION1403 V1 EN (Equation 181)

Q = Im( S )
EQUATION1404 V1 EN (Equation 182)

S = S = P +Q
2 2

EQUATION1405 V1 EN (Equation 183)

PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN (Equation 184)

Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function
are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage
phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging
behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor
is leading the voltage phasor.

Each analogue output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to
get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in
figure 522.

1022
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

IEC05000652 V2 EN

Figure 522: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I
and power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in
the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following
recursive formula:

X = k X Old + (1 - k ) X Calculated
EQUATION1407 V1 EN (Equation 185)

where:
X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle

XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

1023
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k
shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.

Zero point clamping

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not
present, it is possible for the end user to set the amplitudeIGenZeroDb level for current
and voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current or
voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power
(P, Q and S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement
supervision functionality, included in CVMMXN, is using these values the zero
clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero
point clamping within measurement supervision, see section "Measurement
supervision").

Compensation facility
In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is
possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by
setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to
multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as amplitude
(setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle (setting parameter
PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are
done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (complex
constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (for
example, around rated power) can be done at site. However, to perform this calibration
it is necessary to have an external power meter with high accuracy class available.

Directionality
If CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and
reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shown
in the following figure 523.

1024
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Busbar

IED

P Q

Protected
Object
IEC09000038-1-en.vsd
IEC09000038-1-EN V1 EN

Figure 523: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when
they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative
values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of
the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have
actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements.
This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0
degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values
when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

Frequency
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained
from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as
an output.

17.1.7.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU

The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-

phase current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the
function can be calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal
use, on the outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by amplitude and angle

1025
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below 5% and

above 100% is constant and linear in between, see figure 522.

Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitude
output has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The supervision
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

17.1.7.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU,

VNMMXU

The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the

configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents
when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations, see above.

The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on the
outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".

17.1.7.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or

voltage (VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other than
X_RANG, are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to
calibrate the signals. Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and
transferred to corresponding output.

Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the
outputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a
corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer
in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

17.1.8 Technical data

Table 779: CVMMXN technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Frequency (0.95-1.05) fr 2.0 mHz

Voltage (0.1-1.5) Ur 0.5% of Ur at UUr

0.5% of U at U > Ur

Connected current (0.2-4.0) Ir 0.5% of Ir at I Ir

0.5% of I at I > Ir

Table continues on next page

1026
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Function Range or value Accuracy

Active power, P
Reactive power, Q
Apparent power, S
0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur 1.0% of Sr at S Sr
0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 1.0% of S at S > Sr
Conditions:
0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur 0.8 x Ur < U < 1.2 Ur
0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 0.2 x Ir < I < 1.2 Ir
0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur
0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir

Power factor, cos () 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur 0.02

0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir

Table 780: CMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Current at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) Ir 0.3% of Ir at I 0.5 Ir
0.3% of I at I > 0.5 Ir

Phase angle at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) Ir 1.0 at 0.1 Ir < I 0.5 Ir

0.5 at 0.5 Ir < I 4.0 Ir

Table 781: VMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (10 to 300) V 0.5% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V 0.5 at U 50 V
0.2 at U > 50 V

Table 782: CMSQI technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Current positive sequence, I1 (0.14.0) Ir 0.3% of Ir at I 0.5 Ir
Three phase settings 0.3% of I at I > 0.5 Ir

Current zero sequence, 3I0 (0.11.0) Ir 0.3% of Ir at I 0.5 Ir

Three phase settings 0.3% of I at I > 0.5 Ir

Current negative sequence, I2 (0.11.0) Ir 0.3% of Ir at I 0.5 Ir

Three phase settings 0.3% of I at I > 0.5 Ir

Phase angle (0.14.0) Ir 1.0 at 0.1 Ir < I 0.5 Ir

0.5 at 0.5 Ir < I 4.0 Ir

1027
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Table 783: VMSQI technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage positive sequence, U1 (10 to 300) V 0.5% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage zero sequence, 3U0 (10 to 300) V 0.5% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage negative sequence, U2 (10 to 300) V 0.5% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V 0.5 at U 50 V
0.2 at U > 50 V

Table 784: VNMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (5 to 175) V 0.5% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (5 to 175) V 0.5 at U 50 V
0.2 at U > 50 V

17.2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG

17.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Gas medium supervision SSIMG - 63

17.2.2 Functionality
Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used for monitoring the circuit breaker condition.
Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is used as input
signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on received
information.

1028
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

17.2.3 Function block

SSIMG
BLOCK PRESSURE
BLK_ALM PRES_ALM
PRESSURE PRES_LO
TEMP TEMP
PRES_ALM TEMP_ALM
PRES_LO TEMP_LO
SET_P_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

IEC09000129-1-en.vsd
IEC09000129 V1 EN

Figure 524: SSIMG function block

17.2.4 Signals

Table 785: SSIMG Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
PRESSURE REAL 0.0 Pressure input from CB
TEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm signal
PRES_LO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout signal
SET_P_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set pressure lockout
SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset pressure and temperature lockout

Table 786: SSIMG Output signals

Name Type Description
PRESSURE REAL Pressure service value
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
PRES_LO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level

1029
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

17.2.5 Settings
Table 787: SSIMG Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PressAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for pressure
PressLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Pressure lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tPressureAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure alarm
tPressureLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetPressAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure alarm
tResetPressLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

17.2.6 Operation principle

Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used to monitor the gas pressure in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of gas density PRES_ALM, PRES_LO, and gas pressure signal
PRESSURE, are taken into account to initiate the alarms PRES_ALM and PRES_LO.
When PRESSURE is less than PressAlmLimit or binary signal from CB PRES_ALM
is high then the gas pressure alarm, PRES_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if
pressure input PRESSURE is less than PressLOLimit or binary signal from CB
PRES_LO is high or temperature input TEMP is above lockout level TempLOLimit
then the gas pressure lockout, PRES_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in pressure of the gas for a very small time, for which the
function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tPressureAlarm or
tPressureLO have been included. If the pressure goes below the settings for more than
these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm PRES_ALM or lockout
PRES_LO will be initiated. The SET_P_LO binary input is used for setting the gas
pressure lockout. The PRES_LO output retains the last value until it is reset by using
the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used with the
setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM can be used
to block the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout
indication.

Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The
signal is monitored to detect high temperature.

1030
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature

alarm TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is greater
than TempLOLimit, then TEMP_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time, for
which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays
tTempAlarm or tTempLockOut have been included. If the temperature goes above the
settings for more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm
TEMP_ALM or lockout TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input is
used for setting the temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last value
until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators
have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input
BLK_ALM can be used to block the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both
alarms and the lockout indication.

17.2.7 Technical data

Table 788: SSIMG Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Pressure alarm level 1.00-100.00 10.0% of set value
Pressure lockout level 1.00-100.00 10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 2.5% of set value
Time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for pressure (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Time delay for pressure lockout (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Reset time delay for (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
temperature alarm greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
lockout greater

17.3 Liquid medium supervision SSIML

17.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Liquid medium supervision SSIML - 71

1031
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

17.3.2 Functionality
Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Binary information based on the oil level in the circuit breaker is used as
input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on
received information.

17.3.3 Function block

SSIML
BLOCK LEVEL
BLK_ALM LVL_ALM
LEVEL LVL_LO
TEMP TEMP
LVL_ALM TEMP_ALM
LEVEL_LO TEMP_LO
SET_L_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

IEC09000128-1-en.vsd
IEC09000128 V1 EN

Figure 525: SSIML function block

17.3.4 Signals

Table 789: SSIML Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
LEVEL REAL 0.0 Level input from CB
TEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
LVL_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Level alarm signal
LEVEL_LO BOOLEAN 0 Level lockout signal
SET_L_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set level lockout
SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset level and temperature lockout

Table 790: SSIML Output signals

Name Type Description
LEVEL REAL Level service value
LVL_ALM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level
LVL_LO BOOLEAN Level below lockout level
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level

1032
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

17.3.5 Settings
Table 791: SSIML Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
LevelAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for level
LevelLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Level lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tLevelAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level alarm
tLevelLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetLevelAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level alarm
tResetLevelLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

17.3.6 Operation principle

Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used to monitor the oil level in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of oil level LVL_ALM, LEVEL_LO and oil level signal
LEVEL are taken into account to initiate the alarms LVL_ALM and LVL_LO. When
LEVEL is less than LevelAlmLimit or binary signal from CB LVL_ALM is high, then
the oil level indication alarm, LVL_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if oil level input
LEVEL is less than LevelLOLimit or binary signal from CB LVL_LO is high or
temperature input TEMP is above lockout level TempLOLimit, then the oil level
indication lockout, LVL_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in oil level for a very small time, for which the function
need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tLevelAlarm or
tLevelLockOut have been included. If the oil level goes below the settings for more
than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm LVL_ALM or lockout
LVL_LO will be initiated. The SET_L_LO binary input is used for setting the gas
pressure lockout. The LVL_LO output retains the last value until it is reset by using
the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used with the
setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM can be used
for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout
indication.

Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The
signal is monitored to detect high temperature.

1033
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature

alarm TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is greater
than TempLOLimit, then TEMP_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time, for
which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays
tTempAlarm or tTempLockOuthave been included. If the temperature goes above the
settings for more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm
TEMP_ALM or lockout TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input is
used for setting the temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last value
until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators
have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input
BLK_ALM can be used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both
alarms and the lockout indication.

17.3.7 Technical data

Table 792: SSIMLTechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Oil alarm level 1.00-100.00 10.0% of set value
Oil lockout level 1.00-100.00 10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 2.5% of set value
Time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for oil lockout (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Reset time delay for (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
temperature alarm greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
lockout greater

17.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR

17.4.1 Identification

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker monitoring SSCBR - -

1034
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

17.4.2 Functionality
The breaker monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different parameters of
the breaker condition. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of
operations reaches a predefined value. For a proper functioning of the circuit breaker,
it is essential to monitor the circuit breaker operation, spring charge indication or
breaker wear, travel time, number of operation cycles and estimate the accumulated
energy during arcing periods.

17.4.3 Function block

SSCBR
I3P* OPENPOS
BLOCK CLOSEPOS
BLKALM INVDPOS
TRIND TRCMD
POSOPEN TRVTOPAL
POSCLOSE TRVTCLAL
PRESALM OPERALM
PRESLO OPERLO
SPRCHRST CBLIFEAL
SPRCHRD MONALM
RSTCBWR IPOWALPH
RSTTRVT IPOWLOPH
RSTIPOW SPCHALM
RSTSPCHT GPRESALM
GPRESLO

IEC13000231-2-en.vsd
IEC13000231 V2 EN

Figure 526: SSCBR function block

17.4.4 Signals
Table 793: SSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarm and lockout indication
BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
TRIND BOOLEAN 0 Trip command from trip circuit
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
PRESALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm indication from CB
PRESLO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout indication from CB
SPRCHRST BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charging started indication signal
SPRCHRD BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charged indication signal
RSTCBWR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB remaining life and operation counter
RSTTRVT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB closing and opening travel times
RSTIPOW BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated I^CurrExponent
RSTSPCHT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB spring charging time

1035
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Table 794: SSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN CB is in open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN CB is in closed position
INVDPOS BOOLEAN CB is in Invalid Position
TRCMD BOOLEAN Open command issued to CB
TRVTOPAL BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRVTCLAL BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value
OPERALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
OPERLO BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
CBLIFEAL BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB reduced to Life alarm level
MONALM BOOLEAN CB 'not operated for long time' alarm
IPOWALPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open travel
time exceeds alarm limit
IPOWLOPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open travel
time exceeds lockout limit
SPCHALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value
GPRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
GPRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level

17.4.5 Settings
Table 795: SSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
PhSel Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Phase selection
Phase L2
Phase L3
RatedOperCurr 100.00 - 5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the breaker
OperNoRated 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Number of operations possible at rated
current
RatedFltCurr 500.00 - 99999.99 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
OperNoFault 1 - 10000 - 1 1000 Number of operations possible at rated
fault current
tTrOpenAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for open travel time
tTrCloseAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for close travel time
OperAlmLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 200 Alarm level for number of operations
OperLOLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 300 Lockout level for number of operations
AccSelCal Aux Contact - - Trip Signal Accumulated energy calculation selection
Trip Signal
Table continues on next page

1036
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurrExponent 0.50 - 3.00 - 0.01 2.00 Current exponent value used for energy
calculation
AccStopCurr 5.00 - 100.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 RMS current level below which energy
accumulation stops
AlmAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Alarm level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB open
travel time
LOAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Lockout level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB open
travel time
SpChAlmTime 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 1.00 Alarm level for spring charging time
InitCBRemLife 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Initial value for remaining life estimates
InactiveAlDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 2000 Alarm level for inactive days counter

Table 796: SSCBR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OpenTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for open travel time
CloseTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for close travel time
DirCoef -3.00 - -0.50 - 0.01 -1.50 Directional coefficient for CB life
calculation
CBLifeAlmLevel 1 - 99999 - 1 5000 Alarm level for CB remaining life
ContTrCorr -0.010 - 0.010 s 0.001 0.005 Correction for time difference in auxiliary
and main contacts open time
OperTimeDelay 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay between change of status of
trip output and start of main contact
separation
tDGasPresAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm
tDGasPresLO 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout
InitCounterVal 0 - 9999 - 1 0 Initial value for number of operations
InitAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 9999.99 - 0.01 0.00 Initial value for accum I^CurrExponent
integr over CB open travel time value
InitInactDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 0 Initial value for inactive days
InactiveAlHrs 0 - 23 Hour 1 0 Alarm time for inactive days counter in
hours

1037
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

17.4.6 Monitored data

Table 797: SSCBR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRVOP REAL - ms Travel time of the CB
during opening operation
TTRVCL REAL - ms Travel time of the CB
during closing operation
NOOPER INTEGER - - Number of CB operation
cycle
CBLIFEPH INTEGER - - CB Remaining life of
respective phase
INADAYS INTEGER - - The number of days CB
has been inactive
IPOWPH REAL - - Accumulated
I^CurrExponent
integrated over CB open
travel time
SPCHT REAL - s The charging time of the
CB spring

17.4.7 Operation principle

The breaker monitoring function includes metering and monitoring subfunctions. The
subfunctions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are On and Off.

The operation of the subfunctions is described by the module diagram as shown in

Figure 527. All the modules in the diagram are explained in subsequent sections.

1038
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

I3P-ILRMSPH
POSCLOSE TTRVOP
POSOPEN CB Contact Travel TTRVCL
BLOCK Time TRVTOPAL
BLKALM TRVTCLAL
RSTTRVT

OPENPOS

CB Status CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS

CBLIFEAL
Remaining Life of CB
CBLIFEPH
RSTCBWR

TRCMD

Accumulated IPOWALPH
energy
I3P-IL IPOWLOPH
TRIND
IPOWPH
RSTIPOW

CB Operation OPERALM
Cycles NOOPER

CB Operation MONALM
Monitoring INADAYS

SPCHALM
SPRCHRST CB Spring Charge SPCHT
SPRCHRD Monitoring
RSTSPCHT

CB Gas Pressure GPRESALM

PRESALM Indication GPRESLO
PRESLO
IEC12000624-3-en.vsd

IEC12000624 V3 EN

Figure 527: Functional module diagram of breaker monitoring

1039
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

17.4.7.1 Circuit breaker contact travel time

The circuit breaker contact travel time subfunction calculates the breaker contact
travel time for opening and closing operations. The operation of the breaker contact
travel time measurement is described in Figure 528.

POSCLOSE TTRVOP
Contact travel
POSOPEN time TTRVCL
calculation
RSTTRVT

TRVTOPAL
Alarm limit
BLOCK check TRVTCLAL
BLKALM
IEC12000615-2-en.vsd

IEC12000615 V2 EN

Figure 528: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker contact travel time

Contact travel time calculation

The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between the state of
change of auxiliary contacts. The opening travel time is measured between the
opening of the POSCLOSE and closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contacts. Similarly,
the closing travel time is measured between the opening of the POSOPEN and closing
of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts. A compensation factor has been added to
consider the time difference between auxiliary contact operation and the actual
physical opening of the breaker main contact.

Main Contact
1

0
POSCLOSE

POSOPEN
1

t1 tOpen t2 t3 tClose t4

tTravelOpen = tOpen + t1 + t2 tTravelClose = tClose + t3 + t4

IEC12000616_2_en.vsd

IEC12000616 V2 EN

Figure 529: Travel time calculation

There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time difference t2
between the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is
completely open. Therefore, a correction factor needs to be added to get the actual
opening time. This factor is added with the OpenTimeCorr (t1+t2) setting. The closing

1040
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

time is calculated by adding the value set with the CloseTimeCorr (t3+t4) setting to
the measured closing time.

The last measured opening travel time (TTRVOP) and the closing travel time
(TTRVCL) are given as service values.

The values can be reset using the Clear menu on the LHMI or by activation the input
RSTCBWR.

Alarm limit check

When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set in the tTrOpenAlm
setting, the TRVTOPAL output is activated. Similarly, when the measured closing
travel time is longer than the value set in the tTrCloseAlm setting, the TRVTCLAL
output is activated.

It is also possible to block the TRVTCLAL and TRVTOPAL alarm signals by activating
the BLOCK input.

17.4.7.2 Circuit breaker status

The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that
is, whether the breaker is in the open, closed or error position. The operation is
described in Figure 530.

Phase current
I3P-ILRMSPH
check

OPENPOS
Contact
POSCLOSE position CLOSEPOS
indicator
POSOPEN INVDPOS

IEC12000613-3-en.vsd

IEC12000613 V3 EN

Figure 530: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status

Phase current check

The module compares the phase current I3P-ILRMSPH to the AccStopCurr setting. If
the current in the selected phase exceeds the set level, it is reported to the contact
position indicator module as closed circuit breaker.

Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open when the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low,
the POSOPEN input is high and the phase current is less than the setting AccStopCurr
value. The circuit breaker is closed when the POSOPEN input is low and the
POSCLOSE input is high. The breaker is in the error state if both auxiliary contacts

1041
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

have the same value or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low and the
POSOPEN input is high but the current is above the setting AccStopCurr.

The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS, CLOSEPOS
and INVDPOS for open, closed and error position respectively.

17.4.7.3 Remaining life of circuit breaker

The Remaining life of circuit breaker subfunction is used to give an indication on the
wear and tear of the circuit breaker. Every time the breaker operates, the life of the
circuit breaker reduces due to wear. The breaker wear depends on the interrupted
current. The remaining life of the breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip
curve provided by the manufacturer. The remaining life is decreased by at least one
when the circuit breaker is opened. The operation of the remaining life of circuit
breaker subfunction is described in Figure 531.

I3P-ILRMSPH
CB remaining CBLIFEPH
POSCLOSE life estimation

RSTCBWR

Alarm limit
BLOCK CBLIFEAL
Check
BLKALM

IEC12000620-3-en.vsd

IEC12000620 V3 EN

Figure 531: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit
breaker

Circuit breaker remaining life estimation

If the interrupted current is less than the rated operating current set using the
RatedOperCurr setting, the remaining operations of the breaker are reduced by one
operation. If the interrupted current is more than the rated fault current set using the
RatedFltCurr setting, the remaining operations of the circuit breaker are reduced by
the set OperNoRated by divided by the set OperNoFault value. If the tripping current
is between these two values, the remaining life of the circuit breaker is calculated
based on the maintenance curve equation given by the manufacturer. The
OperNoRated parameter sets the number of operations the breaker can perform at the
rated current. The OperNoFault parameter sets the number of operations the breaker
can perform at the rated fault current.

Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of a circuit breaker phase drops below the CBLifeAlmLevel
setting, the life alarm CBLIFEAL is activated.

It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary input
BLKALM.

1042
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the
InitCBRemLife parameter. The value can be reset using the Clear menu from LHMI or
by activating the input RSTCBWR.

17.4.7.4 Accumulated energy

The Accumulated energy subfunction calculates the accumulated energy (Iyt) based
on current samples, where the setting CurrExponent (y) ranges from 0.5 to 3.0. The
operation is described in Figure 532.

The TRCMD output is enabled when either of the trip indications from the trip coil
circuit TRIND is high or the breaker status is OPENPOS.

I3P-IL
TRCMD
I3P-ILRMSPH Accumulated
POSCLOSE energy
calculation IPOWPH
TRIND

LRSTIPOW

IPOWALPH
Alarm limit
BLOCK Check IPOWLOPH
BLKALM

IEC12000619-3-en.vsd

IEC12000619 V3 EN

Figure 532: Functional module diagram for estimating accumulated energy

Accumulated energy calculation

Accumulated energy can be calculated either with TRIND or POSCLOSE by selecting
the AccSelCal parameter value accordingly.

The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE or TRIND input events. It ends when
the RMS current is lower than the AccStopCurr setting.

1043
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Main Contact Main Contact

close close

open open
POSCLOSE 1 POSCLOSE 1

0 0

Energy Energy
Accumulation Accumulation
starts starts

ContTrCorr ContTrCorr
(Negative) (Positive)
IEC12000618_1_en.vsd

IEC12000618 V1 EN

Figure 533: Significance of correction factor setting

The ContTrCorr setting is used to determine the accumulated energy in relation to the
time the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation of energy starts
after the auxiliary contact has opened and the delay equal to the value of the
ContTrCorr setting has passed. When the setting is negative, the calculation starts in
advance by the correction time in relation to when the auxiliary contact opened.

Accumulated energy can also be calculated by using the change of state of the trip
output. TRIND is used to get the instance of the trip output and the time delay between
the trip initiation and the opening of the main contact is introduced by the setting
OperTimeDelay.

The accumulated energy output IPOWPH is provided as a service value. The value can
be reset by enabling RSTIPOW through LHMI or by activating the input RSTIPOW.

Alarm limit check

The IPOWALPH alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the set
value AlmAccCurrPwr.

IPOWLOPH is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the limit of the
LOAccCurrPwr setting.

The IPOWALPH and IPOWLOPH outputs can be blocked by activating the binary
input BLOCK.

17.4.7.5 Circuit breaker operation cycles

The circuit breaker operation cycles subfunction counts the number of closing-
opening sequences of the breaker. The operation counter value is updated after each
closing-opening sequence. The operation is described in figure534.

1044
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

POSCLOSE
Operation
POSOPEN NOOPER
counter
RSTCBWR

OPERALM
Alarm limit
BLOCK
Check
OPERLO
BLKALM

IEC12000617 V2 EN

Figure 534: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation cycles

Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state of change of
the auxiliary contact inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.

The number of operations NOOPER is given as a service value. The old circuit
breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the InitCounterVal
parameter and can be reset by Clear CB wear in the Clear menu on the LHMI or
activating the input RSTCBWR.

Alarm limit check

OPERALM is generated when the number of operations exceeds the set value of the
OperAlmLevel threshold setting.

If the number of operations increases and exceeds the limit value set with the
OperLOLevel setting, the OPERLO output is activated.

The binary outputs OPERALM and OPERALO are deactivated when the BLKALM input
is activated.

17.4.7.6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring

The circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction indicates the inactive days of
the circuit breaker and gives an alarm when the number of days exceed the set level.
The operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring is shown in figure 535.

POSCLOSE
Inactive timer INADAYS
POSOPEN

Alarm limit MONALM

BLOCK
Check
BLKALM

IEC12000614 V2 EN

Figure 535: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation monitoring

1045
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Inactive timer
The Inactive timer module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has
remained in the same open or closed state. The value is calculated by monitoring the
states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.

The number of inactive days INADAYS is available as a service value. The initial
number of inactive days is set using the InitInactDays parameter.

Alarm limit check

MONALM is initiated when the number of inactive days and hours exceed the limit
value defined by the InactiveAlDays and InactivAlHrs setting. The alarm signal
MONALM can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.

17.4.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring

The circuit breaker spring charge monitoring subfunction calculates the spring
charging time. The operation is described in Figure 536.

SPRCHRST
Spring charging
SPRCHRD time SPCHT
measurement
RSTSPCHT

Alarm limit
BLOCK SPCHALM
Check
BLKALM

IEC12000621 V2 EN

Figure 536: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charge
indication

Spring charging time measurement

The binary input SPRCHRST indicates the start of circuit breaker spring charging
time. SPRCHRD indicates that the circuit breaker spring is charged. The spring
charging time is calculated from the difference of these two signal timings. Spring
charging indication is described in Figure536.

The last measured spring charging time SPCHT is provided as a service value. The
spring charging time SPCHT can be reset on the LHMI or by activating the input
RSTSPCHT.

Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the
SpChAlmTime setting, the subfunction generates the SPCHALM alarm.

It is possible to block the SPCHALM alarm signal by activating the BLKALM binary
input.

1046
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

17.4.7.8 Circuit breaker gas pressure indication

The circuit breaker gas pressure indication subfunction monitors the gas pressure
inside the arc chamber. The operation is described in Figure 537.

PRESALM
tDGasPresAlm
BLOCK AND t GPRESALM

BLKALM

tDGasPresLO
PRESLO AND t GPRESLO
IEC12000622 V3 EN

Figure 537: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure
indication

When the PRESALM binary input is activated, the GPRESALM output is activated after
a time delay set with the tDGasPresAlm setting. The GPRESALM alarm can be
blocked by activating the BLKALM input.

If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRESLO binary input goes high,
activating the lockout alarm GPRESLO after a time delay set with the tDGasPresLO
setting. The GPRESLO alarm can be blocked by activating the BLKALM input.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals from
the function can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.

17.4.8 Technical data

Table 798: SSCBR Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Alarm level for open and close (0 200) ms 3 ms
travel time
Alarm level for number of (0 9999) -
operations
Independent time delay for (0.00 60.00) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
spring charging time alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas (0.00 60.00) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
pressure alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas (0.00 60.00) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
pressure lockout greater
CB Contact Travel Time, 3 ms
opening and closing
Remaining Life of CB 2 operations
Accumulated Energy 1.0% or 0.5 whichever is
greater

1047
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

17.5 Event function EVENT

17.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Event function EVENT -
S00946 V1 EN

17.5.2 Functionality
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication,
time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level.
These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the
Event function (EVENT). The event function block is used for LON and SPA
communication.

Analog and double indication values are also transferred through EVENT function.

17.5.3 Function block

EVENT
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC05000697-2-en.vsd
IEC05000697 V2 EN

Figure 538: EVENT function block

1048
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

17.5.4 Signals
Table 799: EVENT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 GROUP 0 Input 1
SIGNAL
INPUT2 GROUP 0 Input 2
SIGNAL
INPUT3 GROUP 0 Input 3
SIGNAL
INPUT4 GROUP 0 Input 4
SIGNAL
INPUT5 GROUP 0 Input 5
SIGNAL
INPUT6 GROUP 0 Input 6
SIGNAL
INPUT7 GROUP 0 Input 7
SIGNAL
INPUT8 GROUP 0 Input 8
SIGNAL
INPUT9 GROUP 0 Input 9
SIGNAL
INPUT10 GROUP 0 Input 10
SIGNAL
INPUT11 GROUP 0 Input 11
SIGNAL
INPUT12 GROUP 0 Input 12
SIGNAL
INPUT13 GROUP 0 Input 13
SIGNAL
INPUT14 GROUP 0 Input 14
SIGNAL
INPUT15 GROUP 0 Input 15
SIGNAL
INPUT16 GROUP 0 Input 16
SIGNAL

1049
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

17.5.5 Settings
Table 800: EVENT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SPAChannelMask Off - - Off SPA channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
LONChannelMask Off - - Off LON channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
EventMask1 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 1
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask2 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 2
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask3 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 3
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask4 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 4
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask5 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 5
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask6 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 6
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask7 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 7
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask8 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 8
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask9 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 9
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
Table continues on next page

1050
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

EventMask10 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 10
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask11 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 11
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask12 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 12
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask13 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 13
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask14 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 14
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask15 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 15
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask16 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 16
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 1
MinRepIntVal2 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 2
MinRepIntVal3 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 3
MinRepIntVal4 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 4
MinRepIntVal5 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 5
MinRepIntVal6 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 6
MinRepIntVal7 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 7
MinRepIntVal8 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 8
MinRepIntVal9 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 9
MinRepIntVal10 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 10
MinRepIntVal11 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 11
MinRepIntVal12 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 12
MinRepIntVal13 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 13
MinRepIntVal14 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 14
MinRepIntVal15 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 15
MinRepIntVal16 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 16

1051
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

17.5.6 Operation principle

The main purpose of the Event function (EVENT) is to generate events when the state
or value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state
transition, for which event generation is enabled.

Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given a
name from the Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create
single events, but are also intended for double indication events.

The EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.

Events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and
binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing
module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module.
Time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals have a
resolution corresponding to the execution cycle-time of the source application. Time-
tagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a resolution of
1 ms.

The outputs from the EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events and
alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each input
is intended to be used by the station level.

All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to
1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the
oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.

Events are produced according to set event masks. The event masks are treated
commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. An EventMask can be set
individually for each input channel. These settings are available:

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

It is possible to define which part of the EVENT function generates the events. This
can be performed individually for communication types SPAChannelMask and
LONChannelMask. For each communication type these settings are available:

Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16

For LON communication, events are normally sent to station level at change. It is also
possible to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input
channel.

1052
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate
the EVENT function or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is
implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted
quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be
removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the
maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel is 45 events per
second.

17.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE

17.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Analog input signals A41RADR - -
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -
Disturbance report A1RADR - -
Disturbance report A2RADR - -
Disturbance report A3RADR - -
Disturbance report A4RADR - -
Disturbance report B1RBDR - -
Disturbance report B2RBDR - -
Disturbance report B3RBDR - -
Disturbance report B4RBDR - -
Disturbance report B5RBDR - -
Disturbance report B6RBDR - -

17.6.2 Functionality
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.

Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of
all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a,
maximum of 40 analog and 96 binary signals.

The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:

Event list
Indications
Event recorder

1053
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Trip value recorder

Disturbance recorder
Fault locator

The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding

configuration, starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.

A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR

function blocks, which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected
signals from start of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time will be included in the
recording.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade
format as a reader file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The same
applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local HMI is
used to get information about the recordings. The disturbance report files may be
uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.

17.6.3 Function block

DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED

IEC05000406-3-en.vsd
IEC05000406 V3 EN

Figure 539: DRPRDRE function block

A1RADR
^GRP INPUT1
^GRP INPUT2
^GRP INPUT3
^GRP INPUT4
^GRP INPUT5
^GRP INPUT6
^GRP INPUT7
^GRP INPUT8
^GRP INPUT9
^GRP INPUT10

IEC05000430-4-en.vsdx

IEC05000430 V4 EN

Figure 540: A1RADR function block

1054
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

A4RADR
^INPUT31
^INPUT32
^INPUT33
^INPUT34
^INPUT35
^INPUT36
^INPUT37
^INPUT38
^INPUT39
^INPUT40

IEC05000431-3-en.vsd
IEC05000431 V3 EN

Figure 541: A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs

B1RBDR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC05000432-3-en.vsd
IEC05000432 V3 EN

Figure 542: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR -
B6RBDR

17.6.4 Signals
Table 801: DRPRDRE Output signals
Name Type Description
DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used

1055
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Table 802: A1RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
GRPINPUT1 GROUP - Group signal for input 1
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT2 GROUP - Group signal for input 2
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT3 GROUP - Group signal for input 3
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT4 GROUP - Group signal for input 4
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT5 GROUP - Group signal for input 5
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT6 GROUP - Group signal for input 6
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT7 GROUP - Group signal for input 7
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT8 GROUP - Group signal for input 8
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT9 GROUP - Group signal for input 9
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT10 GROUP - Group signal for input 10
SIGNAL

Table 803: A2RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
GRPINPUT11 GROUP - Group signal for input 11
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT12 GROUP - Group signal for input 12
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT13 GROUP - Group signal for input 13
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT14 GROUP - Group signal for input 14
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT15 GROUP - Group signal for input 15
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT16 GROUP - Group signal for input 16
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT17 GROUP - Group signal for input 17
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT18 GROUP - Group signal for input 18
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT19 GROUP - Group signal for input 19
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT20 GROUP - Group signal for input 20
SIGNAL

1056
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Table 804: A3RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
GRPINPUT21 GROUP - Group signal for input 21
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT22 GROUP - Group signal for input 22
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT23 GROUP - Group signal for input 23
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT24 GROUP - Group signal for input 24
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT25 GROUP - Group signal for input 25
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT26 GROUP - Group signal for input 26
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT27 GROUP - Group signal for input 27
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT28 GROUP - Group signal for input 28
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT29 GROUP - Group signal for input 29
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT30 GROUP - Group signal for input 30
SIGNAL

Table 805: A4RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31
INPUT32 REAL 0 Analog channel 32
INPUT33 REAL 0 Analog channel 33
INPUT34 REAL 0 Analog channel 34
INPUT35 REAL 0 Analog channel 35
INPUT36 REAL 0 Analog channel 36
INPUT37 REAL 0 Analog channel 37
INPUT38 REAL 0 Analog channel 38
INPUT39 REAL 0 Analog channel 39
INPUT40 REAL 0 Analog channel 40

Table 806: B1RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 5
Table continues on next page

1057
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 16

Table 807: B2RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 17
INPUT18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 18
INPUT19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 19
INPUT20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 20
INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 21
INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 22
INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 23
INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 24
INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 25
INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 26
INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 27
INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 28
INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 29
INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 30
INPUT31 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 31
INPUT32 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 32

Table 808: B3RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT33 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 33
INPUT34 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 34
INPUT35 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 35
INPUT36 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 36
INPUT37 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 37
Table continues on next page

1058
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

INPUT38 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 38
INPUT39 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 39
INPUT40 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 40
INPUT41 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 41
INPUT42 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 42
INPUT43 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 43
INPUT44 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 44
INPUT45 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 45
INPUT46 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 46
INPUT47 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 47
INPUT48 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 48

Table 809: B4RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT49 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 49
INPUT50 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 50
INPUT51 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 51
INPUT52 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 52
INPUT53 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 53
INPUT54 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 54
INPUT55 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 55
INPUT56 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 56
INPUT57 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 57
INPUT58 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 58
INPUT59 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 59
INPUT60 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 60
INPUT61 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 61
INPUT62 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 62
INPUT63 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 63
INPUT64 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 64

Table 810: B5RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT65 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 65
INPUT66 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 66
INPUT67 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 67
INPUT68 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 68
INPUT69 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 69
Table continues on next page

1059
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

INPUT70 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 70
INPUT71 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 71
INPUT72 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 72
INPUT73 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 73
INPUT74 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 74
INPUT75 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 75
INPUT76 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 76
INPUT77 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 77
INPUT78 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 78
INPUT79 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 79
INPUT80 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 80

Table 811: B6RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT81 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 81
INPUT82 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 82
INPUT83 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 83
INPUT84 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 84
INPUT85 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 85
INPUT86 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 86
INPUT87 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 87
INPUT88 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 88
INPUT89 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 89
INPUT90 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 90
INPUT91 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 91
INPUT92 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 92
INPUT93 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 93
INPUT94 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 94
INPUT95 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 95
INPUT96 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 96

17.6.5 Settings
Table 812: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 9.90 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
Table continues on next page

1060
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig Off - - Off Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)
On
MaxNoStoreRec 10 - 100 - 1 100 Maximum number of stored disturbances
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest Off - - Off Operation mode during test mode
On

Table 813: A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation01 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation02 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation03 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation04 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation05 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation06 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation07 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation08 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation09 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation10 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On

Table 814: A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 1
UnderTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 1 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 1 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 1
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1 in
% of signal
NomValue02 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 2
Table continues on next page

1061
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigOp02 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 2 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe02 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 2 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp02 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 2
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe02 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 2 in
% of signal
NomValue03 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 3
UnderTrigOp03 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 3 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe03 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 3 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp03 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 3
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 3 in %
of signal
NomValue04 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 4
UnderTrigOp04 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 4 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe04 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 4 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp04 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 4
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe04 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 4 in
% of signal
NomValue05 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 5
UnderTrigOp05 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 5 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe05 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 5 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp05 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 5
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe05 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 5 in
% of signal
NomValue06 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 6
UnderTrigOp06 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 6 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe06 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 6 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp06 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 6
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe06 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 6 in
% of signal
NomValue07 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 7
UnderTrigOp07 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 7 (on) or not (off)
Table continues on next page

1062
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigLe07 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 7 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp07 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 7
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe07 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 7 in
% of signal
NomValue08 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 8
UnderTrigOp08 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 8 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe08 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 8 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp08 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 8
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe08 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 8 in
% of signal
NomValue09 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 9
UnderTrigOp09 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 9 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe09 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 9 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp09 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 9
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe09 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 9 in
% of signal
NomValue10 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 10
UnderTrigOp10 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 10 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe10 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 10
in % of signal
OverTrigOp10 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 10 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe10 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 10 in
% of signal

Table 815: A2RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation11 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation12 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation13 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation14 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation15 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Table continues on next page

1063
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Operation16 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation17 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation18 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation19 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation20 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On

Table 816: A2RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue11 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 11
UnderTrigOp11 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 11 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe11 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 11
in % of signal
OverTrigOp11 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 11 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe11 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 11 in
% of signal
NomValue12 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 12
UnderTrigOp12 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 12 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe12 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 12
in % of signal
OverTrigOp12 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 12 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe12 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 12 in
% of signal
NomValue13 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 13
UnderTrigOp13 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 13 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe13 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 13
in % of signal
OverTrigOp13 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 13 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe13 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 13 in
% of signal
NomValue14 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 14
UnderTrigOp14 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 14 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe14 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 14
in % of signal
OverTrigOp14 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 14 (on) or not (off)
Table continues on next page

1064
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigLe14 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 14 in
% of signal
NomValue15 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 15
UnderTrigOp15 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 15 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe15 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 15
in % of signal
OverTrigOp15 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 15 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe15 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 15 in
% of signal
NomValue16 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 16
UnderTrigOp16 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 16 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe16 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 16
in % of signal
OverTrigOp16 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 16 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe16 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 16 in
% of signal
NomValue17 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 17
UnderTrigOp17 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 17 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe17 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 17
in % of signal
OverTrigOp17 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 17 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe17 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 17 in
% of signal
NomValue18 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 18
UnderTrigOp18 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 18 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe18 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 18
in % of signal
OverTrigOp18 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 18 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe18 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 18 in
% of signal
NomValue19 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 19
UnderTrigOp19 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 19 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe19 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 19
in % of signal
OverTrigOp19 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 19 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe19 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 19 in
% of signal
NomValue20 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 20
Table continues on next page

1065
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigOp20 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 20 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe20 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 20
in % of signal
OverTrigOp20 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 20 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe20 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 20 in
% of signal

Table 817: A3RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation21 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation22 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation23 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation24 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation25 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation26 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation27 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation28 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation29 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation30 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On

Table 818: A3RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue21 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 21
UnderTrigOp21 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 21 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe21 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 21
in % of signal
OverTrigOp21 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 21 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe21 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 21 in
% of signal
NomValue22 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 22
UnderTrigOp22 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 22 (on) or not (off)
Table continues on next page

1066
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigLe22 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 22
in % of signal
OverTrigOp22 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 22 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe22 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 22 in
% of signal
NomValue23 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 23
UnderTrigOp23 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 23 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe23 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 23
in % of signal
OverTrigOp23 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 23 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe23 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 23 in
% of signal
NomValue24 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 24
UnderTrigOp24 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 24 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe24 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 24
in % of signal
OverTrigOp24 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 24 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe24 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 24 in
% of signal
NomValue25 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 25
UnderTrigOp25 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 25 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe25 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 25
in % of signal
OverTrigOp25 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 25 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe25 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 25 in
% of signal
NomValue26 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 26
UnderTrigOp26 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 26 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe26 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 26
in % of signal
OverTrigOp26 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 26 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe26 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 26 in
% of signal
NomValue27 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 27
UnderTrigOp27 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 27 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe27 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 27
in % of signal
Table continues on next page

1067
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigOp27 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 27 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe27 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 27 in
% of signal
NomValue28 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 28
UnderTrigOp28 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 28 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe28 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 28
in % of signal
OverTrigOp28 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 28 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe28 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 28 in
% of signal
NomValue29 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 29
UnderTrigOp29 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 29 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe29 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 29
in % of signal
OverTrigOp29 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 29 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe29 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 29 in
% of signal
NomValue30 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 30
UnderTrigOp30 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 30 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe30 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 30
in % of signal
OverTrigOp30 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 30 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe30 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 30 in
% of signal

Table 819: A4RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation31 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation32 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation33 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation34 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation35 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation36 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Table continues on next page

1068
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Operation37 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation38 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation39 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation40 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On

Table 820: A4RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue31 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 31
UnderTrigOp31 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 31 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe31 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 31
in % of signal
OverTrigOp31 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 31 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe31 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 31 in
% of signal
NomValue32 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 32
UnderTrigOp32 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 32 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe32 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 32
in % of signal
OverTrigOp32 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 32 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe32 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 32 in
% of signal
NomValue33 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 33
UnderTrigOp33 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 33 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe33 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 33
in % of signal
OverTrigOp33 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 33 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe33 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 33 in
% of signal
NomValue34 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 34
UnderTrigOp34 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 34 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe34 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 34
in % of signal
OverTrigOp34 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 34 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe34 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 34 in
% of signal
Table continues on next page

1069
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

NomValue35 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 35
UnderTrigOp35 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 35 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe35 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 35
in % of signal
OverTrigOp35 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 35 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe35 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 35 in
% of signal
NomValue36 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 36
UnderTrigOp36 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 36 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe36 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 36
in % of signal
OverTrigOp36 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 36 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe36 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 36 in
% of signal
NomValue37 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 37
UnderTrigOp37 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 37 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe37 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 37
in % of signal
OverTrigOp37 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 37 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe37 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 37 in
% of signal
NomValue38 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 38
UnderTrigOp38 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 38 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe38 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 38
in % of signal
OverTrigOp38 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 38 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe38 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 38 in
% of signal
NomValue39 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 39
UnderTrigOp39 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 39 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe39 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 39
in % of signal
OverTrigOp39 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 39 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe39 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 39 in
% of signal
NomValue40 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 40
UnderTrigOp40 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 40 (on) or not (off)
Table continues on next page

1070
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigLe40 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 40
in % of signal
OverTrigOp40 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 40 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe40 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 40 in
% of signal

Table 821: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR01 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED01 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR02 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED02 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 2
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR03 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED03 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 3
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR04 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED04 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 4
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR05 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED05 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 5
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR06 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED06 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 6
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR07 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED07 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 7
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
Table continues on next page

1071
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR08 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED08 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 8
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR09 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED09 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 9
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR10 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED10 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 10
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR11 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED11 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 11
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR12 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED12 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 12
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR13 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED13 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 13
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR14 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED14 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 14
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR15 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED15 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 15
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR16 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

1072
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED16 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 16
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 1
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 2
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 3
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 4
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 5
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 6
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 7
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 8
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 9
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 10
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 11
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1073
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 12
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 13
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 14
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 15
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 16
(IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 822: B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 1
IndicationMa01 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 1
Show
TrigLevel02 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 2
IndicationMa02 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 2
Show
TrigLevel03 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 3
IndicationMa03 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 3
Show
TrigLevel04 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 4
IndicationMa04 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 4
Show
TrigLevel05 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 5
IndicationMa05 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 5
Show
TrigLevel06 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 6
IndicationMa06 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 6
Show
TrigLevel07 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 7
Table continues on next page

1074
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa07 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 7
Show
TrigLevel08 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 8
IndicationMa08 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 8
Show
TrigLevel09 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 9
IndicationMa09 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 9
Show
TrigLevel10 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 10
IndicationMa10 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 10
Show
TrigLevel11 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 11
IndicationMa11 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 11
Show
TrigLevel12 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 12
IndicationMa12 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 12
Show
TrigLevel13 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 13
IndicationMa13 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 13
Show
TrigLevel14 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 14
IndicationMa14 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 14
Show
TrigLevel15 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 15
IndicationMa15 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 15
Show
TrigLevel16 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 16
IndicationMa16 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 16
Show

1075
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Table 823: B2RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR17 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED17 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 17
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR18 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED18 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 18
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR19 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED19 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 19
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR20 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED20 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 20
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR21 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED21 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 21
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR22 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED22 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 22
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR23 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED23 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 23
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR24 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED24 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 24
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR25 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

1076
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED25 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 25
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR26 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED26 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 26
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR27 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED27 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 27
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR28 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED28 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 28
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR29 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED29 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 29
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR30 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED30 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 30
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR31 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED31 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 31
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR32 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED32 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 32
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType17 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 17 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo17 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 17
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType18 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 18 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1077
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo18 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 18
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType19 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 19 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo19 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 19
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType20 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 20 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo20 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 20
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType21 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 21 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo21 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 21
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType22 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 22 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo22 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 22
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType23 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 23 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo23 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 23
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType24 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 24 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo24 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 24
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType25 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 25 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo25 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 25
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType26 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 26 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo26 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 26
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType27 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 27 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo27 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 27
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType28 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 28 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo28 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 28
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType29 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 29 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo29 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 29
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType30 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 30 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1078
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo30 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 30
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType31 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 31 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo31 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 31
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType32 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 32 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo32 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 32
(IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 824: B2RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel17 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 17
IndicationMa17 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 17
Show
TrigLevel18 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 18
IndicationMa18 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 18
Show
TrigLevel19 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 19
IndicationMa19 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 19
Show
TrigLevel20 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 20
IndicationMa20 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 20
Show
TrigLevel21 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 21
IndicationMa21 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 21
Show
TrigLevel22 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 22
IndicationMa22 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 22
Show
TrigLevel23 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 23
IndicationMa23 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 23
Show
TrigLevel24 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 24
IndicationMa24 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 24
Show
TrigLevel25 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 25
Table continues on next page

1079
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa25 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 25
Show
TrigLevel26 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 26
IndicationMa26 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 26
Show
TrigLevel27 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 27
IndicationMa27 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 27
Show
TrigLevel28 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 28
IndicationMa28 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 28
Show
TrigLevel29 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 29
IndicationMa29 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 29
Show
TrigLevel30 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 30
IndicationMa30 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 30
Show
TrigLevel31 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 31
IndicationMa31 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 31
Show
TrigLevel32 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 32
IndicationMa32 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 32
Show

Table 825: B3RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR33 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED33 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 33
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR34 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED34 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 34
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR35 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

1080
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED35 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 35
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR36 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED36 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 36
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR37 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED37 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 37
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR38 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED38 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 38
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR39 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED39 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 39
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR40 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED40 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 40
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR41 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED41 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 41
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR42 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED42 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 42
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR43 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED43 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 43
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
Table continues on next page

1081
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR44 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED44 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 44
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR45 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED45 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 45
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR46 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED46 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 46
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR47 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED47 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 47
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR48 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED48 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 48
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType33 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 33 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo33 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 33
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType34 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 34 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo34 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 34
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType35 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 35 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo35 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 35
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType36 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 36 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo36 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 36
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType37 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 37 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo37 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 37
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType38 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 38 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1082
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo38 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 38
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType39 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 39 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo39 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 39
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType40 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 40 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo40 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 40
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType41 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 41 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo41 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 41
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType42 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 42 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo42 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 42
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType43 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 43 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo43 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 43
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType44 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 44 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo44 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 44
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType45 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 45 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo45 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 45
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType46 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 46 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo46 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 46
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType47 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 47 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo47 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 47
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType48 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 48 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo48 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 48
(IEC -60870-5-103)

1083
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Table 826: B3RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel33 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 33
IndicationMa33 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 33
Show
TrigLevel34 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 34
IndicationMa34 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 34
Show
TrigLevel35 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 35
IndicationMa35 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 35
Show
TrigLevel36 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 36
IndicationMa36 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 36
Show
TrigLevel37 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 37
IndicationMa37 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 37
Show
TrigLevel38 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 38
IndicationMa38 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 38
Show
TrigLevel39 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 39
IndicationMa39 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 39
Show
TrigLevel40 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 40
IndicationMa40 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 40
Show
TrigLevel41 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 41
IndicationMa41 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 41
Show
TrigLevel42 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 42
IndicationMa42 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 42
Show
TrigLevel43 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 43
IndicationMa43 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 43
Show
TrigLevel44 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 44
IndicationMa44 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 44
Show
Table continues on next page

1084
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigLevel45 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 45
IndicationMa45 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 45
Show
TrigLevel46 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 46
IndicationMa46 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 46
Show
TrigLevel47 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 47
IndicationMa47 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 47
Show
TrigLevel48 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 48
IndicationMa48 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 48
Show

Table 827: B4RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR49 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED49 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 49
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR50 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED50 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 50
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR51 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED51 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 51
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR52 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED52 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 52
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR53 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED53 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 53
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
Table continues on next page

1085
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR54 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED54 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 54
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR55 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED55 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 55
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR56 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED56 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 56
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR57 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED57 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 57
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR58 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED58 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 58
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR59 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED59 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 59
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR60 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED60 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 60
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR61 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED61 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 61
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR62 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

1086
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED62 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 62
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR63 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED63 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 63
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR64 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED64 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 64
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType49 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 49 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo49 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 49
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType50 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 50 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo50 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 50
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType51 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 51 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo51 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 51
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType52 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 52 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo52 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 52
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType53 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 53 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo53 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 53
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType54 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 54 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo54 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 54
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType55 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 55 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo55 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 55
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType56 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 56 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo56 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 56
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType57 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 57 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1087
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo57 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 57
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType58 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 58 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo58 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 58
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType59 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 59 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo59 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 59
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType60 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 60 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo60 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 60
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType61 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 61 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo61 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 61
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType62 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 62 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo62 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 62
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType63 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 63 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo63 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 63
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType64 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 64 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo64 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 64
(IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 828: B4RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel49 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 49
IndicationMa49 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 49
Show
TrigLevel50 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 50
IndicationMa50 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 50
Show
TrigLevel51 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 51
IndicationMa51 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 51
Show
TrigLevel52 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 52
Table continues on next page

1088
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa52 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 52
Show
TrigLevel53 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 53
IndicationMa53 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 53
Show
TrigLevel54 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 54
IndicationMa54 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 54
Show
TrigLevel55 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 55
IndicationMa55 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 55
Show
TrigLevel56 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 56
IndicationMa56 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 56
Show
TrigLevel57 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 57
IndicationMa57 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 57
Show
TrigLevel58 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 58
IndicationMa58 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 58
Show
TrigLevel59 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 59
IndicationMa59 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 59
Show
TrigLevel60 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 60
IndicationMa60 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 60
Show
TrigLevel61 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 61
IndicationMa61 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 61
Show
TrigLevel62 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 62
IndicationMa62 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 62
Show
TrigLevel63 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 63
IndicationMa63 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 63
Show
TrigLevel64 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 64
IndicationMa64 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 64
Show

1089
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Table 829: B5RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR65 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED65 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 65
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR66 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED66 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 66
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR67 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED67 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 67
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR68 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED68 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 68
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR69 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED69 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 69
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR70 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED70 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 70
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR71 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED71 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 71
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR72 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED72 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 72
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR73 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

1090
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED73 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 73
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR74 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED74 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 74
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR75 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED75 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 75
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR76 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED76 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 76
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR77 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED77 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 77
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR78 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED78 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 78
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR79 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED79 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 79
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR80 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED80 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 80
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType65 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 65 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo65 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 65
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType66 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 66 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1091
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo66 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 66
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType67 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 67 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo67 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 67
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType68 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 68 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo68 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 68
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType69 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 69 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo69 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 69
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType70 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 70 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo70 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 70
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType71 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 71 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo71 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 71
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType72 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 72 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo72 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 72
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType73 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 73 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo73 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 73
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType74 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 74 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo74 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 74
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType75 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 75 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo75 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 75
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType76 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 76 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo76 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 76
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType77 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 77 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo77 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 77
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType78 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 78 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1092
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo78 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 78
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType79 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 79 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo79 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 79
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType80 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 80 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo80 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 80
(IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 830: B5RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel65 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 65
IndicationMa65 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 65
Show
TrigLevel66 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 66
IndicationMa66 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 66
Show
TrigLevel67 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 67
IndicationMa67 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 67
Show
TrigLevel68 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 68
IndicationMa68 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 68
Show
TrigLevel69 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 69
IndicationMa69 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 69
Show
TrigLevel70 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 70
IndicationMa70 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 70
Show
TrigLevel71 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 71
IndicationMa71 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 71
Show
TrigLevel72 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 72
IndicationMa72 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 72
Show
TrigLevel73 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 73
Table continues on next page

1093
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa73 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 73
Show
TrigLevel74 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 74
IndicationMa74 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 74
Show
TrigLevel75 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 75
IndicationMa75 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 75
Show
TrigLevel76 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 76
IndicationMa76 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 76
Show
TrigLevel77 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 77
IndicationMa77 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 77
Show
TrigLevel78 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 78
IndicationMa78 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 78
Show
TrigLevel79 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 79
IndicationMa79 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 79
Show
TrigLevel80 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 80
IndicationMa80 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 80
Show

Table 831: B6RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR81 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED81 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 81
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR82 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED82 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 82
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR83 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

1094
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED83 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 83
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR84 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED84 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 84
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR85 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED85 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 85
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR86 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED86 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 86
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR87 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED87 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 87
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR88 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED88 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 88
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR89 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED89 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 89
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR90 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED90 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 90
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR91 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED91 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 91
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
Table continues on next page

1095
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR92 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED92 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 92
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR93 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED93 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 93
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR94 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED94 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 94
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR95 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED95 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 95
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR96 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED96 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 96
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType81 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 81 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo81 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 81
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType82 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 82 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo82 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 82
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType83 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 83 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo83 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 83
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType84 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 84 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo84 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 84
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType85 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 85 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo85 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 85
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType86 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 86 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1096
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo86 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 86
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType87 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 87 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo87 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 87
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType88 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 88 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo88 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 88
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType89 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 89 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo89 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 89
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType90 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 90 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo90 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 90
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType91 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 91 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo91 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 91
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType92 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 92 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo92 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 92
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType93 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 93 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo93 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 93
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType94 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 94 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo94 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 94
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType95 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 95 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo95 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 95
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType96 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 96 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo96 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 96
(IEC -60870-5-103)

1097
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Table 832: B6RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel81 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 81
IndicationMa81 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 81
Show
TrigLevel82 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 82
IndicationMa82 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 82
Show
TrigLevel83 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 83
IndicationMa83 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 83
Show
TrigLevel84 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 84
IndicationMa84 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 84
Show
TrigLevel85 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 85
IndicationMa85 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 85
Show
TrigLevel86 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 86
IndicationMa86 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 86
Show
TrigLevel87 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 87
IndicationMa87 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 87
Show
TrigLevel88 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 88
IndicationMa88 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 88
Show
TrigLevel89 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 89
IndicationMa89 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 89
Show
TrigLevel90 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 90
IndicationMa90 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 90
Show
TrigLevel91 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 91
IndicationMa91 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 91
Show
TrigLevel92 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 92
IndicationMa92 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 92
Show
Table continues on next page

1098
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigLevel93 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 93
IndicationMa93 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 93
Show
TrigLevel94 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 94
IndicationMa94 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 94
Show
TrigLevel95 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 95
IndicationMa95 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 95
Show
TrigLevel96 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 96
IndicationMa96 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 96
Show

17.6.6 Monitored data

Table 833: DRPRDRE Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MemoryUsed INTEGER - % Memory usage (0-100%)
UnTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 1 activated
OvTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 1 activated
UnTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 2 activated
OvTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 2 activated
UnTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 3 activated
OvTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 3 activated
UnTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 4 activated
OvTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 4 activated
UnTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 5 activated
OvTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 5 activated
UnTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 6 activated
OvTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 6 activated
Table continues on next page

1099
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 7 activated
OvTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 7 activated
UnTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 8 activated
OvTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 8 activated
UnTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 9 activated
OvTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 9 activated
UnTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 10 activated
OvTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 10 activated
UnTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 11 activated
OvTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 11 activated
UnTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 12 activated
OvTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 12 activated
UnTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 13 activated
OvTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 13 activated
UnTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 14 activated
OvTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 14 activated
UnTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 15 activated
OvTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 15 activated
UnTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 16 activated
OvTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 16 activated
UnTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 17 activated
OvTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 17 activated
UnTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 18 activated
OvTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 18 activated
Table continues on next page

1100
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 19 activated
OvTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 19 activated
UnTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 20 activated
OvTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 20 activated
UnTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 21 activated
OvTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 21 activated
UnTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 22 activated
OvTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 22 activated
UnTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 23 activated
OvTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 23 activated
UnTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 24 activated
OvTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 24 activated
UnTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 25 activated
OvTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 25 activated
UnTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 26 activated
OvTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 26 activated
UnTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 27 activated
OvTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 27 activated
UnTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 28 activated
OvTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 28 activated
UnTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 29 activated
OvTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 29 activated
UnTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 30 activated
OvTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 30 activated
Table continues on next page

1101
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 31 activated
OvTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 31 activated
UnTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 32 activated
OvTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 32 activated
UnTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 33 activated
OvTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 33 activated
UnTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 34 activated
OvTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 34 activated
UnTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 35 activated
OvTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 35 activated
UnTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 36 activated
OvTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 36 activated
UnTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 37 activated
OvTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 37 activated
UnTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 38 activated
OvTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 38 activated
UnTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 39 activated
OvTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 39 activated
UnTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 40 activated
OvTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 40 activated
FaultNumber INTEGER - - Disturbance fault number

17.6.7 Operation principle

Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the
operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the
system.

1102
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

The functions included in the disturbance report are:

Event list (EL)

Indications (IND)
Event recorder (ER)
Trip value recorder(TVR)
Disturbance recorder (DR)

Figure 543 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and
function blocks. Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER) and Indications (IND) uses
information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder
(TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (AxRADR).
Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from both AxRADR and
BxRBDR.

AxRADR Disturbance Report

DRPRDRE FL
Analog signals
Trip value rec Fault locator

BxRBDR Disturbance
recorder

Binary signals

Event list

Event recorder

Indications

IEC09000336-3-en.vsdx

IEC09000336 V3 EN

Figure 543: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings,
each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function
is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time, and
so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash
memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power.
Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.

1103
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Disturbance report

Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100

General dist. Trip Event Disturbance

Indications Fault locator Event list
information values recordings recording

en05000125.vsd

IEC05000125 V1 EN

Figure 544: Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded

when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one.
The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling
frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. Figure 545
shows the number of recordings versus the total recording time tested for a typical
configuration, that is, in a 50 Hz system it is possible to record 100 where the average
recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect the rest of the
disturbance report (Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER), Indications (IND) and Trip
value recorder (TVR)).

Number of recordings
100
3,4 s

80 3,4 s 20 analog
96 binary
40 analog
96 binary
60 6,3 s
6,3 s

6,3 s 50 Hz
40
60 Hz
Total recording time

250 300 350 400 s

en05000488.vsd
IEC05000488 V1 EN

Figure 545: Example of number of recordings versus the total recording time

1104
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk
space.

Disturbance information
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the
user must use a PC and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or
MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or remotely
via the station bus (Ethernet ports).

Indications (IND)
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the
disturbance (not time-tagged), see section "" for more detailed information.

Event recorder (ER)

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have
occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or
PCM600, see section "" for more detailed information.

Event list (EL)

The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The
oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or
PCM600, see section "" for more detailed information.

Trip value recorder (TVR)

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and
during the fault, see section "" for more detailed information.

Disturbance recorder (DR)

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after
the fault, see section "" for more detailed information.

Fault locator (FL)

The fault location function calculates the distance to fault, see section "Fault locator
LMBRFLO" for more detailed information.

Time tagging
The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time
tagging within the disturbance report

1105
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Recording times
Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a
settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
Disturbance recorder (DR), event recorder (ER) and indication function register
disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on which

criterion stops the current disturbance recording

Trig point
TimeLimit

PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT

1 2 3

en05000487.vsd
IEC05000487 V1 EN

Figure 546: The recording times definition

PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate
time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any
valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit
time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does
not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a
recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use
the setting TimeLimit to set this time.

Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and
triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for
external analog signals from analog input modules (TRM) and line data
communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and
summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to internally
calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input signals,
phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).

1106
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

SMAI A1RADR
Block AI3P A2RADR
^GRP2L1 AI1 INPUT1 A3RADR
External
analogue ^GRP2L2 AI2 INPUT2
signals ^GRP2L3 AI3 INPUT3
^GRP2N AI4 INPUT4
Type AIN INPUT5
INPUT6
...

A4RADR

INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
Internal analogue signals INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36

...

INPUT40

IEC10000029-1-en.vsd
IEC10000029 V1 EN

Figure 547: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after
configuration) available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the
SMAI function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base
sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according
to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than
the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until
a new updated sample is available.

If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration). In
case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the
Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.

The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases
where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the
information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual
output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input signal the
corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the
SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.

For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and
triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used
as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.

1107
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

If Operation = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph.

However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The
input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If Operation = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the
entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Binary signals
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The
signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal
is selected to be recorded when:

the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation
= Off). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the local HMI
(SetLED = On/Off).

The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance
recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers.
The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with local HMI
IndicationMask=Show/Hide.

Trigger signals
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which
runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete
disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled,
there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance
of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.

A trigger can be of type:

Manual trigger
Binary-signal trigger
Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via
station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is
generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to the operator's manual
for procedure.

Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger
(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger

1108
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the
disturbance report.

Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in
the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,
OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.

The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is
found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average
value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger
is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or
undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name.
The procedure is separately performed for each channel.

This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the
range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.

All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.

Post Retrigger
Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition
during a recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However,
under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault
recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.

In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig

= On) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and,
during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.

When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not start
until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig
occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a
new complete recording will be started.

Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance

recordings.

17.6.8 Technical data

Table 834: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Pre-fault time (0.059.90) s -
Post-fault time (0.110.0) s -
Limit time (0.510.0) s -
Table continues on next page

1109
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Function Range or value Accuracy

Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table 1012
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 96 -
Maximum number of phasors in the 30 -
Trip Value recorder per recording
Maximum number of indications in a 96 -
disturbance report
Maximum number of events in the 150 -
Event recording per recording
Maximum number of events in the 1000, first in - first out -
Event list
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s 340 seconds (100 recordings) at -
recording time and maximum number 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
of channels, typical value) recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

17.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP

17.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP - -

17.7.2 Functionality
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a SPA
master to poll signals from various other functions.

1110
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

17.7.3 Function block

BINSTATREP
BLOCK OUTPUT1
^INPUT1 OUTPUT2
^INPUT2 OUTPUT3
^INPUT3 OUTPUT4
^INPUT4 OUTPUT5
^INPUT5 OUTPUT6
^INPUT6 OUTPUT7
^INPUT7 OUTPUT8
^INPUT8 OUTPUT9
^INPUT9 OUTPUT10
^INPUT10 OUTPUT11
^INPUT11 OUTPUT12
^INPUT12 OUTPUT13
^INPUT13 OUTPUT14
^INPUT14 OUTPUT15
^INPUT15 OUTPUT16
^INPUT16

IEC09000730-1-en.vsd
IEC09000730 V1 EN

Figure 548: BINSTATREP function block

17.7.4 Signals
Table 835: BINSTATREP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 16

1111
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Table 836: BINSTATREP Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 16

17.7.5 Settings
Table 837: BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 10.0 Time delay of function

17.7.6 Operation principle

The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function has 16 inputs and 16
outputs. The output status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or via
SPA communication.

When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the input
signal remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the input signal
resets.

1112
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

INPUTn

OUTPUTn
t t

IEC09000732-1-en.vsd
IEC09000732 V1 EN

Figure 549: BINSTATREP logical diagram

17.8 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP

17.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP - -

17.8.2 Functionality
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU
and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and
VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are
provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be
supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high
limit. The measure value expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced to enable
translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals:
below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or above high-high
limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for
alarming purpose.

17.8.3 Function block

RANGE_XP
RANGE* HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW

IEC05000346-2-en.vsd
IEC05000346 V2 EN

Figure 550: RANGE_XP function block

1113
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

17.8.4 Signals
Table 838: RANGE_XP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range

Table 839: RANGE_XP Output signals

Name Type Description
HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit

17.8.5 Operation principle

The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGAPC). The
function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according
to table 840.
Table 840: Input integer value converted to binary output signals
Measured supervised below low-low between low between low between high- above high-
value is: limit low and low and high limit high and high high limit
Output: limit limit
LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High

17.9 Fault locator LMBRFLO

17.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fault locator LMBRFLO - -

1114
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

17.9.2 Functionality
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a
persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line.

The fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to the fault
in km, miles or % of line length. The main advantage is the high accuracy achieved by
compensating for load current and for the mutual zero-sequence effect on double
circuit lines.

The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation of
the distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault current,
together with recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault
position. The fault can be recalculated with new source data at the actual fault to
further increase the accuracy.

Especially on heavily loaded long lines, where the source voltage angles can be up to
35-40 degrees apart, the accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced
compensation included in fault locator.

17.9.3 Function block

LMBRFLO
PHSELL1* CALCMADE
PHSELL2* FLT_X
PHSELL3* BCD_80
CALCDIST* BCD_40
BCD_20
BCD_10
BCD_8
BCD_4
BCD_2
BCD_1

IEC05000679-4-en.vsd

IEC05000679 V4 EN

Figure 551: FLO function block

17.9.4 Signals
Table 841: LMBRFLO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
PHSELL1 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L1
PHSELL2 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L2
PHSELL3 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L3
CALCDIST BOOLEAN 0 Do calculate fault distance (release)

1115
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Table 842: LMBRFLO Output signals

Name Type Description
CALCMADE BOOLEAN Fault calculation made
FLT_X REAL Reactive distance to fault
BCD_80 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 80%
BCD_40 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 40%
BCD_20 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 20%
BCD_10 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 10%
BCD_8 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 8%
BCD_4 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 4%
BCD_2 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 2%
BCD_1 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 1%

17.9.5 Settings
Table 843: LMBRFLO Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
R1A 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance A (near end)
X1A 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance A (near end)
R1B 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance B (far end)
X1B 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance B (far end)
R1L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Positive sequence line resistance
X1L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.500 Positive sequence line reactance
R0L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 8.750 Zero sequence line resistance
X0L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 50.000 Zero sequence line reactance
R0M 0.000 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual resistance
X0M 0.000 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual reactance
LineLengthUnit kilometer - - kilometer Line length unit
miles
LineLength 0.0 - 10000.0 - 0.1 40.0 Length of line

Table 844: LMBRFLO Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DrepChNoIL1 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Recorder input number recording phase
current, IL1
DrepChNoIL2 1 - 30 Ch 1 2 Recorder input number recording phase
current, IL2
DrepChNoIL3 1 - 30 Ch 1 3 Recorder input number recording phase
current, IL3
DrepChNoIN 0 - 30 Ch 1 4 Recorder input number recording residual
current, IN
Table continues on next page

1116
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DrepChNoIP 0 - 30 Ch 1 0 Recorder input number recording 3I0 on
parallel line
DrepChNoUL1 1 - 30 Ch 1 5 Recorder input number recording phase
voltage, UL1
DrepChNoUL2 1 - 30 Ch 1 6 Recorder input number recording phase
voltage, UL2
DrepChNoUL3 1 - 30 Ch 1 7 Recorder input number recording phase
voltage, UL3
UL1Gain 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scale factor for fine tuning of voltage
magnitude L1
UL2Gain 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scale factor for fine tuning of voltage
magnitude L2
UL3Gain 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scale factor for fine tuning of voltage
magnitude L3

17.9.6 Monitored data

Table 845: LMBRFLO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FLT_REL REAL - - Distance to fault, relative
FLT_DIST REAL - - Distance to fault in line
length unit
FLT_X REAL - Ohm Reactive distance to fault
FLT_R REAL - Ohm Resistive distance to fault
FLT_LOOP INTEGER 1=L1-N - Fault loop
2=L2-N
3=L3-N
4=L1-L2
5=L2-L3
6=L3-L1
7=Others

17.9.7 Operation principle

The Fault locator (LMBRFLO) in the IED is an essential complement to other
monitoring functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with
high accuracy.

When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages
are selected from the Trip value recorder data, thus the analog signals used by the fault
locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report function. The analog
configuration (channel selection) is performed using the parameter setting tool within
PCM600.

The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and
additional fault resistance.

1117
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L

R1A+jX1A R1B+jX1B
Z0m=Z0m+jX0m

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
DRPRDRE
LMBRFLO

IEC05000045_2_en.vsd
IEC05000045 V2 EN

Figure 552: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for
settings of the fault location-measuring function

If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a
significant manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due to
exceptional switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of order,
and so on), new values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation of the
distance to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm described below. Its also
possible to change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault can be
achieved.

The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in
kilometers or miles according to the setting LineLengthUnit. The fault location is
stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and
managed via the local HMI or PCM600.

17.9.7.1 Measuring Principle

For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end
infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the
distance to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done,
the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the amount of
additional fault resistance.

The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of
double-end infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.

17.9.7.2 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault

Figure 553 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed from
both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume that the fault occurs at a
distance F from IED A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault
resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for better clarification of the
algorithm.

1118
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

A B
ZA IA pZL IB (1-p).ZL ZB

IF

UA RF

xx01000171.vsd
IEC01000171 V1 EN

Figure 553: Fault on transmission line fed from both ends

From figure 553 it is evident that:

U A = I A p Z L + IF R F
EQUATION95 V1 EN (Equation 186)

Where:
IA is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault,

IF is the fault current and

p is a relative distance to the fault

The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:

IF A
IF = --------
DA
EQUATION96 V1 EN (Equation 187)

Where:
IFA is the change in current at the point of measurement, IED A and

DA is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A and
the total fault current.

For a single line, the value is equal to:

( 1 p ) Z L + ZB
DA = -----------------------------------------
Z A + Z L + ZB
EQUATION97 V1 EN (Equation 188)

1119
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:

I FA
U A = I A p Z L + -------
- RF
DA
EQUATION98 V1 EN (Equation 189)

Table 846: Expressions for UA, IA and IFA for different types of faults

Fault type: UA IA IFA

L1-N UL1A IL1A + KN x INA 3
--- D ( I L 1 A I 0A )
2
EQUATION110 V1 EN

L2-N UL2A IL2A + KN x INA

3
--- D ( I L2A I 0A )
2
EQUATION111 V1 EN

L3-N UL3A IL3A + KN x INA 3

--- D ( I L3A I0A )
2
EQUATION112 V1 EN

L1-L2-L3, L1-L2,L1-L2- UL1A-UL2A IL1A - IL2A

DIL 1 L 2 A
N
EQUATION113 V1 EN

L2-L3, L2-L3-N UL2A-UL3A IL2A - IL3A DIL2L3A

EQUATION114 V1 EN

L3-L1, L3-L1-N UL3A-UL1A IL3A - IL1A

DIL3L1A
EQUATION115 V1 EN

The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal
to:

Z0L Z 1L
K N = ------------------------
3 Z1L
EQUATION99 V1 EN (Equation 190)

DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before
the fault.

In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into
the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm.

For double lines, the fault equation is:

1120
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

I FA
U A = I A p Z 1L + -------- RF + I 0P Z 0M
DA
EQUATION100 V1 EN (Equation 191)

Where:
I0P is a zero sequence current of the parallel line,

Z0M is a mutual zero sequence impedance and

DA is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:

( 1 p ) ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B
DA = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 ZA + Z L + 2 Z B
EQUATION101 V1 EN (Equation 192)

The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:

Z0L Z 1L Z 0M I 0P
K N = ----------------------- - -------
- + ----------------
3 Z1L 3 Z1L I 0A
EQUATION102 V1 EN (Equation 193)

From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location
equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two
cases.

Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 189 or 191 is a function of

p, the general equation 191 can be written in the form:
2
p p K1 + K2 K3 RF = 0
EQUATION103 V1 EN (Equation 194)

Where:

UA ZB
K 1 = ---------------
- + --------------------------
-+1
I A ZL Z L + ZA DD

EQUATION104 V1 EN (Equation 195)

UA ZB
K2 = --------------- --------------------------- + 1
IA Z L Z L + Z A DD

EQUATION105 V1 EN (Equation 196)

I F A Z A + ZB
- --------------------------- + 1
K 3 = ---------------
I A Z L Z 1 + ZA DD
EQUATION106 V1 EN (Equation 197)

1121
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

and:

ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines.

IA, IFA and UA are given in the above table.
KN is calculated automatically according to equation 193.
ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters.

For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 194 applies to both single and
parallel lines.

Equation 194 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:

2
p p Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) R F Re ( K 3 ) = 0
EQUATION107 V1 EN (Equation 198)

p Im ( K1 ) + Im ( K 2 ) R F Im ( K3 ) = 0
EQUATION108 V1 EN (Equation 199)

If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 199, and
then inserted to equation 198. According to equation 198, the relative distance to the
fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation.

Equation 198 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a
solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, which gives an unequivocal
figure for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should be
selected.

If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable
solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the
relative distance to the fault.

17.9.7.3 The non-compensated impedance model

In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA fault
current:

U A = p Z 1 L IA + R F IA
EQUATION109 V1 EN (Equation 200)

Where:
IA is according to table 846.

The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated

impedance model, is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is only
used if the load compensated models do not function.

1122
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

17.9.7.4 IEC 60870-5-103

The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll fault location
information from the IED to a master (that is station HSI). There are two outputs that
must be connected to appropriate inputs on the function block I103StatFltDis,
FLTDISTX gives distance to fault (reactance, according the standard) and
CALCMADE gives a pulse (100 ms) when a result is obtainable on FLTDISTX
output.

17.9.8 Technical data

Table 847: LMBRFLO technical data
Function Value or range Accuracy
Reactive and resistive reach (0.001-1500.000) /phase 2.0% static accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir

Phase selection According to input signals -

Maximum number of fault 100 -
locations

17.10 Limit counter L4UFCNT

17.10.1 Identification

17.10.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Limit counter L4UFCNT -

17.10.2 Functionality
The 30 limit counter L4UFCNT provides a settable counter with four independent
limits where the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the input signal are
counted against the setting values for limits. The output for each limit is activated
when the counted value reaches that limit.

Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.

1123
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

17.10.3 Operation principle

Limit counter (L4UFCNT) counts the number of positive and/or negative flanks on
the binary input signal depending on the function settings. L4UFCNT also checks if
the accumulated value is equal or greater than any of its four settable limits. The four
limit outputs will be activated relatively on reach of each limit and remain activated
until the reset of the function. Moreover, the content of L4UFCNT is stored in flash
memory and will not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.

17.10.3.1 Design

Figure 554 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function.

BLOCK

INPUT
Operation
Counter
RESET
VALUE
Overflow
CountType Detection OVERFLOW

OnMaxValue

Limit LIMIT1 4
MaxValue Check

CounterLimit1...4

Error ERROR
Detection
InitialValue

IEC12000625_1_en.vsd
IEC12000625 V1 EN

Figure 554: Logic diagram

The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of the
function. The function has also a maximum counted value check. The three
possibilities after reaching the maximum counted value are:

Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count

The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as
illustrated in figure 555.

1124
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

Overflow indication
Actual value ... Max value -1 Max value Max value +1 Max value +2 Max value +3 ...

Counted value ... Max value -1 Max value 0 1 2 ...

IEC12000626_1_en.vsd
IEC12000626 V1 EN

Figure 555: Overflow indication when OnMaxValue is set to rollover pulsed

The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or initial
value setting(s) greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting the input
and all the outputs except the error output remains at zero state. The error condition
remains until the correct settings for counter limits and/or initial value setting(s) are
applied.

The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is not
counted and outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can be
initialized after reset of the function. In this case the outputs remain in their initial
states until the release of the block input.

17.10.3.2 Reporting

The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI.

Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.

Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely, for
example from a IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a measurement
on the local HMI graphical display.

17.10.4 Function block

L4UFCNT
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT OVERFLOW
RESET LIMIT1
LIMIT2
LIMIT3
LIMIT4
VALUE

IEC12000029-1-en.vsd
IEC12000029 V1 EN

Figure 556: L4UFCNT function block

1125
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK505308-UEN B
Monitoring

17.10.5 Signals
Table 848: L4UFCNT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

Table 849: L4UFCNT Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN Error indication on counter limit and/or initial value
settings
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Overflow indication on count of greater than
MaxValue
LIMIT1 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit1
LIMIT2 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit2
LIMIT3 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit3
LIMIT4 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit4
VALUE INTEGER Counted value

17.10.6 Settings
Table 850: L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CountType Positive edge - - Positive edge Select counting on positive and/or
Negative edge negative flanks
Both edges
CounterLimit1 1 - 65535 - 1 100 Value of the first limit
CounterLimit2 1 - 65535 - 1 200 Value of the second limit
CounterLimit3 1 - 65535 - 1 300 Value of the third limit
CounterLimit4 1 - 65535 - 1 400 Value of the fourth limit
MaxValue 1 - 65535 - 1 500 Maximum count value
OnMaxValue Stop - - Stop Select if counter stops or rolls over after
Rollover Steady reaching maxValue with steady or pulsed
Rollover Pulsed overflow flag
InitialValue 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Initial count value after reset of the
function

1126
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 17
Monitoring

17.10.7 Monitored data

Table 851: L4UFCNT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE INTEGER - - Counted value

17.10.8 Technical data

Table 852: L4UFCNTtechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Counter value 0-65535 -
Max. count up speed 30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -

1127
Technical manual
1128
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 18
Metering

Section 18 Metering

18.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT

18.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT -

S00947 V1 EN

18.1.2 Functionality
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses,
for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read
by the PCFCNT function. A scaled service value is available over the station bus. The
special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be
ordered to achieve this functionality.

18.1.3 Function block

PCFCNT
BLOCK INVALID
READ_VAL RESTART
BI_PULSE* BLOCKED
RS_CNT NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL

IEC14000043-1-en.vsd
IEC09000335 V3 EN

Figure 557: PCFCNT function block

1129
Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK505308-UEN B
Metering

18.1.4 Signals
Table 853: PCFCNT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
READ_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE BOOLEAN 0 Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value

Table 854: PCFCNT Output signals

Name Type Description
INVALID BOOLEAN The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART BOOLEAN The reported value does not comprise a complete
integration cycle
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL BOOLEAN A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information

18.1.5 Settings
Table 855: PCFCNT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
EventMask NoEvents - - NoEvents Report mask for analog events from pulse
ReportEvents counter
CountCriteria Off - - RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - 90000.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit
per counted value
Quantity Count - - Count Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 0 - 3600 s 1 60 Cycle time for reporting of counter value

1130
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 18
Metering

18.1.6 Monitored data

Table 856: PCFCNT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Actual pulse counter
value
SCAL_VAL REAL - - Scaled value with time
and status information

18.1.7 Operation principle

The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary
input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are
sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.

The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is
synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter
values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All
active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI) or
IEC 61850.

Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function in the IED supports unidirectional

incremental counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses
a 32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range
0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the IED.

The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value
(pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality
consists of:

Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

Wrapped around
Blocked
Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is,
the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the
database. PCFCNT updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is
finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be
connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the station
HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the function.

The pulse-counter logic function requires a binary input card, BIMp,

that is specially adapted to the pulse-counter logic function.

Figure 558 shows the pulse-counter logic function block with connections of the
inputs and outputs.

1131
Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK505308-UEN B
Metering

SingleCmdFunc PulseCounter EVENT

OUTx BLOCK
INVALID INPUT1
SingleCmdFunc Pulse RESTART INPUT2
OUTx INPUT OUT READ_VAL
Pulse length >1s BLOCKED INPUT3
I/O-module NEW_VAL INPUT4
BI_PULSE
Reset counter RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL IEC EVENT

SMS settings Database

1.Operation = Off/On Pulse counter value:
2.tReporting = 0s...60min 0...2147483647
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000
en05000744.vsd
IEC05000744 V1 EN

Figure 558: Overview of the pulse-counter logic function

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command logics,
which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI.
As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected
to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must
be a pulse with a length >1 second.

The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the
Binary Input Module (BIM).

The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.

Each pulse-counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be
connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART,
BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC
Event function block.

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where
the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.

The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-up,
in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during
last integration cycle.

The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There
are two reasons why the counter is blocked:

The BLOCK input is set, or

The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

1132
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 18
Metering

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.

Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.

The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time
and status information.

18.1.8 Technical data

Table 857: PCFCNT technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy
Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) -
Cycle time for report of counter (13600) s -
value

18.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling

ETPMMTR

18.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Function for energy calculation and ETPMMTR W_Varh -
demand handling

18.2.2 Functionality
Measurements function block (CVMMXN) can be used to measure active as well as
reactive power values. Function for energy calculation and demand handling
(ETPMMTR) uses measured active and reactive power as input and calculates the
accumulated active and reactive energy pulses, in forward and reverse direction.
Energy values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values are
also calculated by the function. This function includes zero point clamping to remove
noise from the input signal. As output of this function: periodic energy calculations,
integration of energy values, calculation of energy pulses, alarm signals for limit
violation of energy values and maximum power demand, can be found.

The values of active and reactive energies are calculated from the input power values
by integrating them over a selected time tEnergy. The integration of active and
reactive energy values will happen in both forward and reverse directions. These

1133
Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK505308-UEN B
Metering

energy values are available as output signals and also as pulse outputs. Integration of
energy values can be controlled by inputs (STARTACC and STOPACC) and EnaAcc
setting and it can be reset to initial values with RSTACC input.

The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are calculated for the set time
interval tEnergy and these values are updated every minute through output channels.
The active and reactive maximum power demand values are calculated for both
forward and reverse direction and these values can be reset with RSTDMD input.

18.2.3 Function block

ETPMMTR
P* ACCINPRG
Q* EAFPULSE
STARTACC EARPULSE
STOPACC ERFPULSE
RSTACC ERRPULSE
RSTDMD EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD

IEC14000019-1-en.vsd
IEC14000019 V1 EN

Figure 559: ETPMMTR function block

18.2.4 Signals
Table 858: ETPMMTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
P REAL 0 Measured active power
Q REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STARTACC BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
STOPACC BOOLEAN 0 Stop to accumulate energy values.
RSTACC BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading

Table 859: ETPMMTR Output signals

Name Type Description
ACCINPRG BOOLEAN Accumulation of energy values in progress
EAFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
Table continues on next page

1134
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 18
Metering

Name Type Description

ERFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set
interval
EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set
interval
ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in
set interval
ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in
set interval
EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value in Ws
EARACC REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value in Ws
ERFACC REAL Accumulated forward reactive energy value in
VArS
ERRACC REAL Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in
VArS
MAXPAFD REAL Maximum forward active power demand value for
set interval
MAXPARD REAL Maximum reverse active power demand value for
set interval
MAXPRFD REAL Maximum forward reactive power demand value
for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse
direction

18.2.5 Settings
Table 860: ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
EnaAcc Off - - Off Activate the accumulation of energy
On values
tEnergy 1 Minute - - 1 Minute Time interval for energy calculation
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
tEnergyOnPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Energy accumulated pulse ON time in
secs
tEnergyOffPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in
secs
EAFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active forward
accumulated energy value
Table continues on next page

1135
Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK505308-UEN B
Metering

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

EARAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active reverse
accumulated energy value
ERFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive forward
accumulated energy value
ERRAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse
accumulated energy value

Table 861: ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EALim 0.001 - MWh 0.001 1000000.000 Active energy limit
10000000000.000
ERLim 0.001 - MVArh 0.001 1000.000 Reactive energy limit
10000000000.000
EnZeroClamp Off - - On Enable of zero point clamping detection
On function
LevZeroClampP 0.001 - 10000.000 MW 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at active Power
LevZeroClampQ 0.001 - 10000.000 MVAr 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at reactive
Power
DirEnergyAct Forward - - Forward Direction of active energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
DirEnergyReac Forward - - Forward Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
EAFPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward active
100000000.000 energy
EARPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse active
100000000.000 energy
ERFPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward reactive
100000000.000 energy
ERRPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive
100000000.000 energy

18.2.6 Monitored data

Table 862: ETPMMTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
EAFACC REAL - MWh Accumulated forward
active energy value in Ws
EARACC REAL - MWh Accumulated reverse
active energy value in Ws
ERFACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated forward
reactive energy value in
VArS
ERRACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated reverse
reactive energy value in
VArS
Table continues on next page

1136
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 18
Metering

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

MAXPAFD REAL - MW Maximum forward active
power demand value for
set interval
MAXPARD REAL - MW Maximum reverse active
power demand value for
set interval
MAXPRFD REAL - MVAr Maximum forward
reactive power demand
value for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL - MVAr Maximum reactive power
demand value in reverse
direction

18.2.7 Operation principle

The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements
function CVMMXN are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to measure
the integrated energy. Figure 560 shows the overall functionality of the energy
calculation and demand handling function ETPMMTR.
MAXPAFD
RSTDMD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
P
MAXPRRD
Zero Clamping Maximum Power
EAFALM
Detection Demand Calculation
Q EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM

ACCINPRG
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
Energy Accumulation ERRPULSE
STARTACC
Calculation EAFACC
EARACC
STOPACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
RSTACC

IEC13000185-2-en.vsd
IEC13000185 V2 EN

Figure 560: ETPMMTR Functional overview logical diagram

The integration of energy values is enabled by the setting EnaAcc and controlled by
the STARTACC and STOPACC inputs. If the integration is in progress, the output
ACCINPRG is high. Otherwise, it is low. Figure 561 shows the logic of the
ACCINPRG output. ACCINPRG is active when the STARTACC input is active and the
EnaAcc setting is enabled. When the RSTACC input is in the active state, the output
ACCINPRG is low even if the integration of energy is enabled. ACCINPRG is
deactivated by activating the STOPACC input.

1137
Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK505308-UEN B
Metering

STOPACC

FALSE
STARTACC T
1
& F ACCINPRG
EnaAcc &

q-1

RSTACC

q-1 = unit delay IEC13000186-4-en.vsd

IEC13000186 V4 EN

Figure 561: ACCINPRG Logic diagram

The accumulated energy values (in MWh and MVArh) are available as service values
and also as pulsed output depending on the ExxAccPlsQty setting, which can be
connected to a pulse counter. Accumulated energy outputs are available for forward
as well as reverse direction. The accumulated energy values can be reset to initial
accumulated energy values (ExxPrestVal) from the local HMI reset menu or with the
input signal RSTACC. Figure 562 shows the logic for integration of energy in active
forward direction. Similarly, the integration of energy in active reverse, reactive
forward and reactive reverse is done.
RSTACC

EAFPrestVal

ACCINPRG

P* (ACTIVE FORWARD)
X
S T
T EAFACC
60.0
F
F

&

q-1

EALim T

q-1 0.0 F

a
a>b
b
-1
q = unit delay
IEC13000187-4-en.vsd
IEC13000187 V4 EN

Figure 562: Logic for integration of active forward energy

The energy pulses generated by using internally calculated accumulated energy

values and energy per pulse (ExxAccPlsQty) setting. The accumulated energy values
are divided by the energy-per-pulse value to get the number of pulses. The number of

1138
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 18
Metering

pulses can be reset to zero by activating RSTACC input or by using the local HMI reset
menu. The pulse on and off time duration is set by the settings tEnergyOnPls and
tEnergyOffPls. Figure 563 shows the logic for pulse output generation for the
integrated energy in the active forward direction. Similarly, the pulse generation for
integrated energy in the active reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.

tEnergyOffPls
EAFACC

a Counter q-1
a>b CU
EALim b CV
Rst
tOff
t
R I q-1

0
X
S R I T
EAFPULSE
a TP
a>b F
b
EAFAccPlsQty 0
Counter
CU
CV
RSTACC
Rst

q-1

tEnergyOnPls

q-1 = unit delay IEC13000188-4-en.vsd

IEC13000188 V4 EN

Figure 563: Logic for pulse generation of integrated active forward energy

The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set
time interval tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and stored in a
register available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD,
MAXPRFD and MAXPRRD for the active and reactive power forward and reverse
direction. When the RSTDMD input is active from the local HMI reset menu, these
outputs are reset to zero. The energy alarm is activated once the periodic energy value
crosses the energy limit ExLim. Figure 564 shows the logic of alarm for active forward
energy exceeds limit and Maximum forward active power demand value. Similarly,
the maximum power calculation and energy alarm outputs in the active reverse,
reactive forward and reactive reverse is implemented.

1139
Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK505308-UEN B
Metering

P (ACTIVE FORWARD)
Average Power
X a EAFALM
tEnergy Calculation a>b
b

EALim

RSTMAXD

0.0 T MAXPAFD
MAX F

q-1
q-1 = unit delay
IEC13000189-4-en.vsd
IEC13000189 V4 EN

Figure 564: Logic for maximum power demand calculation and energy alarm

18.2.8 Technical data

18.2.8.1 Technical data

Table 863:
Function Range or value Accuracy
Energy metering MWh Export/Import, MVarh Input from MMXU. No extra error
Export/Import at steady load

1140
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Section 19 Station communication

19.1 670 series protocols

Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one or

many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation
(SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.

Following communication protocols are available:

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
LON communication protocol
SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
DNP3.0 communication protocol

Several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

19.2 DNP3 protocol

DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to

communicate data between components in process automation systems. For a detailed
description of the DNP3 protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.

19.3 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

19.3.1 Functionality
IEC 61850 Ed.1 or Ed.2 can be chosen by a setting in PCM600. The IED is equipped
with single or double optical Ethernet rear ports (order dependent) for IEC 61850-8-1
station bus communication. The IEC 61850-8-1 communication is also possible from
the electrical Ethernet front port. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows intelligent electrical
devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information and simplifies system
engineering. IED-to-IED communication using GOOSE and client-server
communication over MMS are supported. Disturbance recording file (COMTRADE)
uploading can be done over MMS or FTP.

1141
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.3.2 Communication interfaces and protocols

Table 864: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols
Protocol Ethernet Serial
100BASE-FX (ST Glass fibre (ST
EIA-485
connector) connector)
IEC 6185081 - -
DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103 -
= Supported

When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two ports
are connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-address
138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2 has IP-
address 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0

19.3.3 Settings
Table 865: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PortSelGOOSE Front - - LANAB Port selection for GOOSE communication
LANAB
LANCD
PortSelMMS Front - - Any Port selection for MMS communication
LANAB
LANCD
Any
ProtocolEdition Ed 1 - - Ed 1 Protocol Edition
Ed 2
RemoteModControl Off - - Off Remote Mode Control
Maintenance
All levels
AllowGOOSESimulation No - - No Allow enabling of GOOSE Simulation
Yes
IEC61850BufTimEnable Disabled - - Enabled Enable BRC buf time behavior
Enabled

1142
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

19.3.4 Technical data

Table 866: Communication protocols
Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol IEC 608705103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 30019200 Bd
Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s

19.3.5 Generic communication function for Single Point indication

SPGAPC, SP16GAPC

19.3.5.1 Functionality

Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC is used to send
one single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.

19.3.5.2 Function block

SPGAPC
BLOCK
^IN

IEC14000021-1-en.vsd
IEC14000021 V1 EN

Figure 565: SPGAPC function block

SP16GAPC
BLOCK
^IN1
^IN2
^IN3
^IN4
^IN5
^IN6
^IN7
^IN8
^IN9
^IN10
^IN11
^IN12
^IN13
^IN14
^IN15
^IN16

IEC14000020-1-en.vsd
IEC14000020 V1 EN

Figure 566: SP16GAPC function block

1143
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.3.5.3 Signals
Table 867: SPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status

Table 868: SP16GAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 status
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 status
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 status
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 status
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 status
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 status
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 status
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 status
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 status
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 status
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 status
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 status
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 status
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 status
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 status

19.3.5.4 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

19.3.5.5 Monitored data

Table 869: SPGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT GROUP - - Output status
SIGNAL

1144
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Table 870: SP16GAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT1 GROUP - - Output 1 status
SIGNAL
OUT2 GROUP - - Output 2 status
SIGNAL
OUT3 GROUP - - Output 3 status
SIGNAL
OUT4 GROUP - - Output 4 status
SIGNAL
OUT5 GROUP - - Output 5 status
SIGNAL
OUT6 GROUP - - Output 6 status
SIGNAL
OUT7 GROUP - - Output 7 status
SIGNAL
OUT8 GROUP - - Output 8 status
SIGNAL
OUT9 GROUP - - Output 9 status
SIGNAL
OUT10 GROUP - - Output 10 status
SIGNAL
OUT11 GROUP - - Output 11 status
SIGNAL
OUT12 GROUP - - Output 12 status
SIGNAL
OUT13 GROUP - - Output 13 status
SIGNAL
OUT14 GROUP - - Output 14 status
SIGNAL
OUT15 GROUP - - Output 15 status
SIGNAL
OUT16 GROUP - - Output 16 status
SIGNAL
OUTOR GROUP - - Output status logic OR
SIGNAL gate for input 1 to 16

19.3.5.6 Operation principle

Upon receiving a signal at its input, Generic communication function for Single Point
indication (SPGAPC) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment
or system that requests this signal. Additional configuration is needed with PCM600
or IET600 to get the IEC 61850-8-1 communication established For more information
refer to the Engineering manual.

19.3.6 Generic communication function for Measured Value

MVGAPC

1145
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.3.6.1 Functionality

Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC function is used to

send the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an
analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

19.3.6.2 Function block

MVGAPC
BLOCK ^VALUE
^IN RANGE

IEC14000022-1-en.vsd
IEC14000022 V1 EN

Figure 567: MVGAPC function block

19.3.6.3 Signals
Table 871: MVGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN REAL 0 Analog input value

Table 872: MVGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER Range

19.3.6.4 Settings
Table 873: MVGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BasePrefix micro - - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
MV db 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
MV hhLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV hLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
Table continues on next page

1146
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MV lLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -800.00 Low limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV llLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -900.00 Low Low limit multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV min -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -1000.00 Minimum value multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV max -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 1000.00 Maximum value multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)

19.3.6.5 Monitored data

Table 874: MVGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE REAL - - Magnitude of deadband
value
RANGE INTEGER 1=High - Range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
0=Normal

19.3.6.6 Operation principle

Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, Generic communication function for
Measured Value (MVGAPC) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the
range, as output values. Additional configuration is needed with PCM600 or IET600
to get the IEC 61850-8-1 communication established. For more information see the
Engineering manual.

19.3.7 IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication

Function description LHMI and ACT IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification identification device number
Parallel Redundancy PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH - -
Protocol Status
Duo driver PRP - - -
configuration

1147
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.3.7.1 Functionality

Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 and IEC
62439-3 Edition 2 parallel redundancy protocol (PRP) are available as options when
ordering IEDs. Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 uses
both port AB and port CD on the OEM module.

19.3.7.2 Function block

PRPSTATUS
PRP-A LINK
PRP-A VALID
PRP-B LINK
PRP-B VALID

IEC09000757.vsd
IEC09000757 V2 EN

Figure 568: PRPSTATUS function block

19.3.7.3 Signals
Table 875: PRPSTATUS Output signals
Name Type Description
PRP-A LINK BOOLEAN PRP-A Link Status
PRP-A VALID BOOLEAN PRP-A Link Valid
PRP-B LINK BOOLEAN PRP-B Link Status
PRP-B VALID BOOLEAN PRP-B Link Valid

19.3.7.4 Settings
Table 876: PRP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PRPMode PRP-0 - - PRP-1 PRP Mode
PRP-1
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 192.168.7.10 IP-Address
Address
IPMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 IP-Mask
Address

1148
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

19.3.7.5 Monitored data

Table 877: PRPSTATUS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
AB Beh INTEGER 2=Blocked - AB Link Beh
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On
CD Beh INTEGER 1=On - CD Link Beh
2=Blocked
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
PRP Beh INTEGER 2=Blocked - PRP Beh
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On

19.3.7.6 Principle of operation

The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is

transmitted on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one
channel is compared with data package identity from the other channel, if they are the
same, the last package is discarded. The PRP communication is based on the so called
duo driver concept.

The PRPSTATUS function block supervise the redundant communication on the two
channels. If no data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the
last 10 s, the output PRP-A LINK and/or PRP-B LINK is set to 0 which indicates an
error.

1149
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Station Control System

Redundancy
Supervision

Duo

Data Data

Switch A Switch B
1 2 1 2

Data Data

AB CD IED
Configuration OEM

PRP PRPSTATUS

=IEC09000758=3=en=Original.vsd

IEC09000758 V3 EN

Figure 569: Redundant station bus

19.4 IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol

19.4.1 Introduction
The IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to
communicate with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly
known as Merging Units (MU). The physical interface in the IED that is used for the
communication is the OEM modules (the two port module version) "CD" port.

1150
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

19.4.2 Function block

The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. The
signals appear only in the SMT tool when merging units (MU) are
included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In the
SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the
IED and used internally in the configuration.

19.4.3 Signals

19.4.3.1 Output signals

Table 878: MU1_4I_4U Output signals
Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

Table 879: MU2_4I_4U Output signals

Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
Table continues on next page

1151
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Name Type Description

SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

Table 880: MU3_4I_4U Output signals

Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

Table 881: MU4_4I_4U Output signals

Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

1152
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Table 882: MU5_4I_4U Output signals

Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

Table 883: MU6_4I_4U Output signals

Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

19.4.4 Settings
Table 884: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0101 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
Table continues on next page

1153
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 885: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

Table 886: MU2_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0102 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 887: MU2_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

Table 888: MU3_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0103 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

1154
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Table 889: MU3_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

Table 890: MU4_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0104 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 891: MU4_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

Table 892: MU5_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0105 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 893: MU5_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

1155
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Table 894: MU6_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0106 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 895: MU6_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

19.4.5 Monitored data

Table 896: MU1_4I_4U Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized to
1=Error same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

Table 897: MU2_4I_4U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized to
1=Error same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

1156
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Table 898: MU3_4I_4U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized to
1=Error same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

Table 899: MU4_4I_4U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized to
1=Error same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

Table 900: MU5_4I_4U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized to
1=Error same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

1157
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Table 901: MU6_4I_4U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized to
1=Error same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

19.4.6 Operation principle

The ABB merging units (MUs) are situated close to primary equipment, like circuit
breakers, isolators, etc. The MUs have the capability to gather measured values from
measuring transformers, non-conventional transducers or both. The gathered data are
then transmitted to subscribers over the process bus, utilizing the IEC 61850-9-2LE
protocol.

ABB "physical MU" contains up to 3 logical MUs, each capable of sampling 4

currents and 4 voltages.

The IED communicates with the MUs over the process bus via the OEM module port
"CD". For the user, the MU appears in the IED as a normal analogue input module and
is engineered in the very same way.

1158
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

IED

Application

Station Wide
Preprocessing blocks Preprocessing blocks GPS Clock
SMAI SMAI

MU1 MU2
Splitter
Electrical-to-
Optical Converter

1PPS
TRM module OEM Module
CD
110 V 1A 1A

IEC61850-9-2LE

Ethernet Switch

IEC61850-9-2LE

IEC61850-9-2LE

ABB ABB
1PPS 1PPS
Merging Merging
Unit Unit

Combi Combi
CT CT
Sensor Sensor

Conventional VT
en08000072-2.vsd

IEC08000072 V2 EN

Figure 570: Example of signal path for sampled analogue values from MU and
conventional CT/VT

The function has the following alarm signals:

1159
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

MUDATA: Indicates when sample sequence needs to be realigned. that is the

application soon needs to be restarted. The signal is raised to 2 s before the
application is restarted.
SYNCH: Indicates that the time quality of the hardware is out of the set value
from parameter synchAccLevel (1 s, 4 s or unspecified) and the parameter
AppSynch is set to Synch. In case of AppSynch is set to NoSynch the SYNCH
output will never go high.
SMPLLOST: Indicates that more than one sample has been lost/been marked
invalid/ overflow/ been marked failed, and the sample has thereafter been
substituted. When SMPLLOST is high, protection is blocked.
MUSYNCH: Indicates that the MU connected is not synchronized. Received
from quality flag in datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.
TESTMODE: Indicates that the MU connected is in TestMode. Received from
quality flag in datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.

Timeout

TSYNCERR Indicates that there is some timeout on any configured time source or the
time quality is worse than specified in SynchAccLevel. The timeout is individually
specified per time source (PPS, IRIG-B, SNTP etc.) See section "Time
synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN"

Blocking condition

Blocking of protection functions is indicated by (SAMPLOST is high) or

(MUSYNCH is high and AppSynch is set to Synch) or (SYNCH is high)

Application synch is not required for differential protection based on ECHO mode. A
missing PPS however will lead to a drift between MU and IED. Therefore protection
functions in this case will be blocked.

19.4.7 Technical data

Table 902: IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
Functions Value
Protocol IEC 61850-9-2LE
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX

19.5 LON communication protocol

19.5.1 Functionality
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables
communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operators workplace,
from the control center and also from other terminals.

1160
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

LON communication protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version

3 from Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks.
These networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few
bytes), peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication media, low
maintenance, multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk supports the
needs of applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol follows the
reference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the International
Standardization Organization (ISO).

In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available.
For other addresses, refer to section "".

It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general.

19.5.2 Settings
Table 903: HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation
On

Table 904: ADE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation
On
TimerClass Slow - - Slow Timer class
Normal
Fast
TimeDomain Local without DST - - Local with DST Time domain
Local with DST

19.5.3 Operation principle

The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With
protection and control devices, fibre optic media is used, which enables the use of the
maximum speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the
devices connected to the network can communicate with each other. The own subnet
and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes per one
subnet).

The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The
measured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent to
the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized
values, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also
enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for example,
interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus master.

1161
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network
variables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages,
such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals.
Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as events and
explicit read and write messages to access device data.

The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems
include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for
multi-master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the
terminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of network
variables.

Introduction of LON protocol

For more information, refer to LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and
Control, Users manual and Technical description.

LON protocol

Configuration of LON
LON network tool (LNT) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network
configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks
network, is easily accessible on a single tool program.

Activate LON Communication

Activate LON communication in the Parameter Setting tool under Main Menu/
Configuration/Communication/Station communication/ LON/HORZCOMM:
1, where Operation must be set to ON.

Add LON Device Types LNT

A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing
the device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505 using SLDT
package version 1p2 r04.

LON net address

To establish a LON connection, the IED has to be given a unique net address. The net
address consists of a subnet and node number. This is accomplished with the LON
Network Tool by creating one device for each IED.

Vertical communication
Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices
and protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed
process data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter
data and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using
explicit messages.

Events and indications

Events are sent to the monitoring devices using explicit messages (message code 44H)
with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal is
changed in the IED, one message with the value, quality and time is transmitted from
terminal.

1162
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Binary events
Binary events are generated in Event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:20 in the
IEDs. The EVENT function blocks have predefined LON addresses. Table 905 shows
the LON addresses to the first input on the EVENT function blocks. Addresses to the
other inputs on the EVENT function block are consecutive after the first input. For
example, input 15 on EVENT:17 function block has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) =
1294.

For double indications, only the first eight inputs 18 must be used. Inputs 916 can
be used for other types of events at the same EVENT block.

Three EVENT function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:3 running with a fast loop time
(3 ms) are available as basic in the IEDs.. The remaining EVENT function blocks
EVENT:4 to EVENT:9 run with a loop time of 8 ms and EVENT:10 to EVENT:20 run
with a loop time of 100 ms. The EVENT blocks are used to send binary signals,
integers, real time values like analogue data from measuring functions and mA input
modules as well as pulse counter signals.

16 pulse counter value function blocks PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16, and 24 mA input

service values function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in the
IEDs.

The first LON address in every EVENT function block is found in table 905
Table 905: LON adresses for EVENT functions
Function block First LON address in
function block
EVENT:1 1024
EVENT:2 1040
EVENT:3 1056
EVENT:4 1072
EVENT:5 1088
EVENT:6 1104
EVENT:7 1120
EVENT:8 1136
EVENT:9 1152
EVENT:10 1168
EVENT:11 1184
EVENT:12 1200
EVENT:13 1216
EVENT:14 1232
EVENT:15 1248
EVENT:16 1264
EVENT:17 1280
EVENT:18 1296
EVENT:19 1312
EVENT:20 1328

1163
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Event masks
Event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool (PST)
under: Settings/IED settings/ Monitoring / Event Function or via parameter setting
tool (PST) as follows:

No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, the EVENT function makes the reporting decision (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

Single indication
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always
reported on change, no changed detection is done in the EVENT function block. Other
Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event
masked in the EVENT function block.

Double indications
Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions. Event
reporting is based on the information coming from SCSWI functions, so no change
detection is done in the EVENT function block.

Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not
possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for
the first 8 inputs on an EVENT function block.

00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0

01 generates an open event with the read status 1
10 generates a close event with the read status 2
11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

Analog value
All analog values are reported cyclic. The reporting interval is taken from the
connected function if there is a limit supervised signal. Otherwise it is taken from the
EVENT function block.

Command handling
Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent
SPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character
message following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent
using explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport
service.

Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N)
are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only
one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the
next message.

1164
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, That is,
the function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 30, SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 24; the SPA
addresses are according to table 906.

Horizontal communication
Network variables are used for communication between 500 and 670 series
IEDs.Network variables are used for communication between 500 and 650 series
IEDs The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state
is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.

Multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) is used to pack the

information to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented
for the application by a multiple command receive function block
(MULTICMDRCV). With horizontal communication, the input BOUND on
MULTICMDSND must be set to 1. There are 10 MULTICMDSND and 60
MULTICMDRCV function blocks available. These function blocks are connected
using the LON network tool (LNT). The tool also defines the service and addressing
on LON.

This is an overview for configuring the network variables for the IEDs.

Configuration of LON network variables

Configure the Network variables according to the specific application using the LON
network tool (LNT). The following is an example of how to configure network
variables concerning, for example, interlocking between two IEDs.

LON

BAY E1 BAY E3 BAY E4

MULTICMDSND: 7 MULTICMDSND: 9 MULTICMDSND: 9

en05000718.vsd
IEC05000718 V2 EN

Figure 571: Examples connections between MULTICMDSND and

MULTICMDRCV function blocks in three IEDs

The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From
LNT window select Connections/ NVConnections/ New.

1165
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

en05000719.vsd
IEC05000719 V1 EN

Figure 572: The network variables window in LNT

There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either the users can use the
drag-and-drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window, drag
them to the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there;
or, they can perform it by selecting the traditional menu, Configuration/ Download.

1166
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

en05000720.vsd
IEC05000720 V1 EN

Figure 573: The download configuration window in LNT

Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the Main
Processing Module (NUM) and is used for LON, SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP
communication.

There are two types of IO connectors: snap-in connectors for plastic fibre cables and
ST/bayonet connectors for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either
type of connector or a combination of both connectors. This is identified by a tag.

Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical
fibre to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions concerning
handling and connection of fibre cables.
Table 906: SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus
control
Name Function SPA Description
block address
BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5139 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5161 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI04 1 I 5186 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI05 1 I 5210 SPA parameters for block
command
Table continues on next page

1167
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
BL_CMD SCSWI06 1 I 5234 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI07 1 I 5258 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI08 1 I 5283 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI09 1 I 5307 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI10 1 I 5331 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI11 1 I 5355 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI12 1 I 5379 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI13 1 I 5403 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI14 1 I 5427 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI15 1 I 5451 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI16 1 I 5475 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI17 1 I 5499 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI18 1 I 5523 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI19 1 I 5545 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI20 1 I 5571 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI21 1 I 5594 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI22 1 I 5619 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI23 1 I 5643 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI24 1 I 5667 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI25 1 I 5691 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI26 1 I 5715 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI27 1 I 5739 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI28 1 I 5763 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI29 1 I 5787 SPA parameters for block
command
Table continues on next page

1168
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
BL_CMD SCSWI30 1 I 5811 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI31 1 I 5835 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI32 1 I 5859 SPA parameters for block
command
CANCEL SCSWI01 1 I 5107 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI02 1 I 5131 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI03 1 I 5153 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI04 1 I 5178 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI05 1 I 5202 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI06 1 I 5226 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI07 1 I 5250 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI08 1 I 5275 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI09 1 I 5299 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI10 1 I 5323 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI11 1 I 5347 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI12 1 I 5371 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI13 1 I 5395 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI14 1 I 5419 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI15 1 I 5443 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI16 1 I 5467 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI17 1 I 5491 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI18 1 I 5515 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI19 1 I 5537 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI20 1 I 5563 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI21 1 I 5586 SPA parameters for cancel
command
Table continues on next page

1169
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
CANCEL SCSWI22 1 I 5611 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI23 1 I 5635 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI24 1 I 5659 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI25 1 I 5683 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI26 1 I 5707 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI27 1 I 5731 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI28 1 I 5755 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI29 1 I 5779 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI30 1 I 5803 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI31 1 I 5827 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI32 1 I 5851 SPA parameters for cancel
command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5105 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, Close) command
SELOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command before
SELClose+ILO=11, operate command
SELOpen+SCO=20,
SELClose+SCO=21,
SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
SELClose+ILO+SCO=31
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5129 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI03 1 I 5151 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI04 1 I 5176 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI05 1 I 5200 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI06 1 I 5224 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI07 1 I 5248 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI08 1 I 5273 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI09 1 I 5297 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI10 1 I 5321 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI11 1 I 5345 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
Table continues on next page

1170
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI12 1 I 5369 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI13 1 I 5393 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI14 1 I 5417 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI15 1 I 5441 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI16 1 I 5465 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI17 1 I 5489 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI18 1 I 5513 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI19 1 I 5535 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI20 1 I 5561 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI21 1 I 5584 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI22 1 I 5609 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI23 1 I 5633 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI24 1 I 5657 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI25 1 I 5681 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI26 1 I 5705 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI27 1 I 5729 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI28 1 I 5753 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI29 1 I 5777 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI30 1 I 5801 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI31 1 I 5825 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI32 1 I 5849 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5106 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, Close) command
ExcOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command before
ExcClose+ILO=11, operate command
ExcOpen+SCO=20,
ExcClose+SCO=21,
ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31
Table continues on next page

1171
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5130 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5152 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI04 1 I 5177 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI05 1 I 5201 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI06 1 I 5225 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI07 1 I 5249 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI08 1 I 5274 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI09 1 I 5298 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI10 1 I 5322 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI11 1 I 5346 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI12 1 I 5370 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI13 1 I 5394 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI14 1 I 5418 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI15 1 I 5442 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI16 1 I 5466 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI17 1 I 5490 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI18 1 I 5514 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI19 1 I 5536 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI20 1 I 5562 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI21 1 I 5585 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI22 1 I 5610 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI23 1 I 5634 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI24 1 I 5658 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI25 1 I 5682 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
Table continues on next page

1172
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI26 1 I 5706 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI27 1 I 5730 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI28 1 I 5754 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI29 1 I 5778 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI30 1 I 5802 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI31 1 I 5826 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI32 1 I 5850 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
Sub Value SXCBR01 2 I 7854 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Note: Send the value before Enable
Sub Value SXCBR02 2 I 7866 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR03 2 I 7884 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR04 2 I 7904 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR05 2 I 7923 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR06 2 I 7942 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR07 2 I 7961 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR08 2 I 7980 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR09 3I7 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR10 3 I 26 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR11 3 I 45 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR12 3 I 56 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR13 3 I 74 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR14 3 I 94 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR15 3 I 120 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR16 3 I 133 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR17 3 I 158 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Table continues on next page

1173
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Value SXCBR18 3 I 179 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI01 3 I 196 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI02 3 I 216 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI03 3 I 235 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI04 3 I 254 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI05 3 I 272 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI06 3 I 292 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI07 3 I 310 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI08 3 I 330 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI09 3 I 348 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI10 3 I 359 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI11 3 I 378 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI12 3 I 397 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI13 3 I 416 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI14 3 I 435 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI15 3 I 454 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI16 3 I 473 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI17 3 I 492 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI18 3 I 511 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI19 3 I 530 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI20 3 I 549 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI21 3 I 568 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI22 3 I 587 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI23 3 I 606 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Table continues on next page

1174
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Value SXSWI24 3 I 625 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI25 3 I 644 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI26 3 I 663 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI27 3 I 682 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI28 3 I 701 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Enable SXCBR01 2 I 7855 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Note: Send the Value before
Enable
Sub Enable SXCBR02 2 I 7865 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR03 2 I 7885 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR04 2 I 7903 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR05 2 I 7924 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR06 2 I 7941 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR07 2 I 7962 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR08 2 I 7979 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR09 3I8 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR10 3 I 25 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR11 3 I 46 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR12 3 I 55 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR13 3 I 75 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR14 3 I 93 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR15 3 I 121 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR16 3 I 132 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR17 3 I 159 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR18 3 I 178 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Table continues on next page

1175
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Enable SXSWI01 3 I 197 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI02 3 I 215 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI03 3 I 234 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI04 3 I 252 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI05 3 I 271 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI06 3 I 290 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI07 3 I 309 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI08 3 I 328 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI09 3 I 347 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI10 3 I 360 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI11 3I 379 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI12 3 I 398 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI13 3 I 417 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI14 3 I 436 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI15 3 I 455 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI16 3 I 474 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI17 3 I 493 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI18 3 I 512 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI19 3 I 531 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI20 3 I 550 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI21 3 I 569 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI22 3 I 588 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI23 3 I 607 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI24 3 I 626 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Table continues on next page

1176
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Enable SXSWI25 3 I 645 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI26 3 I 664 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI27 3 I 683 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI28 3 I 702 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Update Block SXCBR01 2 I 7853 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR02 2 I 7864 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR03 2 I 7883 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR04 2 I 7905 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR05 2 I 7922 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR06 2 I 7943 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR07 2 I 7960 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR08 2 I 7981 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR09 3I6 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR10 3 I 27 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR11 3 I 44 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR12 3 I 57 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR13 3 I 73 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR14 3 I 92 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR15 3 I 122 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR16 3 I 131 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR17 3 I 160 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR18 3 I 177 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI01 3 I 198 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI02 3 I 214 SPA parameter for update block
command
Table continues on next page

1177
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Update Block SXSWI03 3 I 236 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI04 3 I 253 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI05 3 I 273 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI06 3 I 291 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI07 3 I 311 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI08 3 I 329 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI09 3 I 349 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI10 3 I 358 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI11 3 I 377 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI12 3 I 396 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI13 3 I 415 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI14 3 I 434 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI15 3 I 453 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI16 3 I 472 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI17 3 I 491 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI18 3 I 510 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI19 3 I 529 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI20 3 I 548 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI21 3 I 567 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI22 3 I 586 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI23 3 I 605 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI24 3 I 624 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI25 3 I 643 SPA parameter for update block
command
Table continues on next page

1178
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Update Block SXSWI26 3 I 662 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI27 3 I 681 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI28 3 I 700 SPA parameter for update block
command

19.5.4 Technical data

Table 907: LON communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol LON
Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s

19.6 SPA communication protocol

19.6.1 Functionality
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available.
For other addresses, refer to section "".

It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in
general.

19.6.2 Design
Using the rear SPA port for either local or remote communication with a PC requires
the following equipment:

Optical fibres
Opto/electrical converter for the PC
PC

The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM600.

SPA cannot be used with PCM600.

When communicating between the local HMI and a PC, the only hardware required is
a front-connection cable. Note! SPA cannot be used from LHMI front, except for
using "FSTACCS", that is, Field Service Tool Access.

1179
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.6.3 Settings
Table 908: SPA Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address
BaudRate 300 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd

Table 909: LONSPA Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation
On
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address

19.6.4 Operation principle

The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data
bits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. For more
information on recommended baud rate for each type of IED, refer to Technical
reference manual. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.

Introduction of SPA protocol

The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated need
to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves and,
consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data to the
slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced polling (for
example, for event information) or only on demand.

The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information
to the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common
a broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit
and receive lines is a logical "1".

SPA protocol
The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data to
an IED with the SPA communication protocol implemented.

The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MIM3 to MIM16) are found in
table 910.

1180
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Table 910: SPA addresses for the MIM function

Function block SPA address
MIM3-CH1 4-O-6508
MIM3-CH2 4-O-6511
MIM3-CH3 4-O-6512
MIM3-CH4 4-O-6515
MIM3-CH5 4-O-6516
MIM3-CH6 4-O-6519
MIM4-CH1 4-O-6527
MIM4-CH2 4-O-6530
MIM4-CH3 4-O-6531
MIM4-CH4 4-O-6534
MIM4-CH5 4-O-6535
MIM4-CH6 4-O-6538
MIM5-CH1 4-O-6546
MIM5-CH2 4-O-6549
MIM5-CH3 4-O-6550
MIM5-CH4 4-O-6553
MIM5-CH5 4-O-6554
MIM5-CH6 4-O-6557
MIM6-CH1 4-O-6565
MIM6-CH2 4-O-6568
MIM6-CH3 4-O-6569
MIM6-CH4 4-O-6572
MIM6-CH5 4-O-6573
MIM6-CH6 4-O-6576
MIM7-CH1 4-O-6584
MIM7-CH2 4-O-6587
MIM7-CH3 4-O-6588
MIM7-CH4 4-O-6591
MIM7-CH5 4-O-6592
MIM7-CH6 4-O-6595
MIM8-CH1 4-O-6603
MIM8-CH2 4-O-6606
MIM8-CH3 4-O-6607
MIM8-CH4 4-O-6610
MIM8-CH5 4-O-6611
MIM8-CH6 4-O-6614
MIM9-CH1 4-O-6622
MIM9-CH2 4-O-6625
Table continues on next page

1181
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Function block SPA address

MIM9-CH3 4-O-6626
MIM9-CH4 4-O-6629
MIM9-CH5 4-O-6630
MIM9-CH6 4-O-6633
MIM10-CH1 4-O-6641
MIM10-CH2 4-O-6644
MIM10-CH3 4-O-6645
MIM10-CH4 4-O-6648
MIM10-CH5 4-O-6649
MIM10-CH6 4-O-6652
MIM11-CH1 4-O-6660
MIM11-CH2 4-O-6663
MIM11-CH3 4-O-6664
MIM11-CH4 4-O-6667
MIM11-CH5 4-O-6668
MIM11-CH6 4-O-6671
MIM12-CH1 4-O-6679
MIM12-CH2 4-O-6682
MIM12-CH3 4-O-6683
MIM12-CH4 4-O-6686
MIM12-CH5 4-O-6687
MIM12-CH6 4-O-6690
MIM13-CH1 4-O-6698
MIM13-CH2 4-O-6701
MIM13-CH3 4-O-6702
MIM13-CH4 4-O-6705
MIM13-CH5 4-O-6706
MIM13-CH6 4-O-6709
MIM14-CH1 4-O-6717
MIM14-CH2 4-O-6720
MIM14-CH3 4-O-6721
MIM14-CH4 4-O-6724
MIM14-CH5 4-O-6725
MIM14-CH6 4-O-6728
MIM15-CH1 4-O-6736
MIM15-CH2 4-O-6739
MIM15-CH3 4-O-6740
MIM15-CH4 4-O-6743
MIM15-CH5 4-O-6744
Table continues on next page

1182
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Function block SPA address

MIM15-CH6 4-O-6747
MIM16-CH1 4-O-6755
MIM16-CH2 4-O-6758
MIM16-CH3 4-O-6759
MIM16-CH4 4-O-6762
MIM16-CH5 4-O-6763
MIM16-CH6 4-O-6766

The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 are found
in table 911.
Table 911: SPA addresses for the PCFCNT function
Function block SPA address CNT_VAL SPA address NEW_VAL
PCFCNT:1 6-O-2788 6-O-2787
PCFCNT:2 6-O-2794 6-O-2793
PCFCNT:3 6-O-2800 6-O-2799
PCFCNT:4 6-O-2806 6-O-2805
PCFCNT:5 6-O-2812 6-O-2811
PCFCNT:6 6-O-2818 6-O-2817
PCFCNT:7 6-O-2824 6-O-2823
PCFCNT:8 6-O-2830 6-O-2829
PCFCNT:9 6-O-2836 6-O-2835
PCFCNT:10 6-O-2842 6-O-2841
PCFCNT:11 6-O-2848 6-O-2847
PCFCNT:12 6-O-2854 6-O-2853
PCFCNT:13 6-O-2860 6-O-2859
PCFCNT:14 6-O-2866 6-O-2865
PCFCNT:15 6-O-2872 6-O-2871
PCFCNT:16 6-O-2878 6-O-2877

I/O modules
To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function
block are used, that is, the addresses for BI1 BI16. For SPA addresses, refer to
section Related documents in Product Guide.

Single command, 16 signals

The IEDs can be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation
automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block has 16
outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in
switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used.

1183
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Single command, 16 signals function consists of three function blocks;

SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3 for 16 binary output signals each.

The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control
gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. For Single command, 3 signals function
block, SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3, the address is for the first output. The
other outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the
SINGLECMD:2 function block has the 5O533 address.

The SPA addresses for Single command, 16 signals functions SINGLECMD:1 to

SINGLECMD:3 are found in table 912.
Table 912: SPA addresses for SINGLECMD function
Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD1-Cmd1 4-S-4639 5-O-511
SINGLECMD1-Cmd2 4-S-4640 5-O-512
SINGLECMD1-Cmd3 4-S-4641 5-O-513
SINGLECMD1-Cmd4 4-S-4642 5-O-514
SINGLECMD1-Cmd5 4-S-4643 5-O-515
SINGLECMD1-Cmd6 4-S-4644 5-O-516
SINGLECMD1-Cmd7 4-S-4645 5-O-517
SINGLECMD1-Cmd8 4-S-4646 5-O-518
SINGLECMD1-Cmd9 4-S-4647 5-O-519
SINGLECMD1-Cmd10 4-S-4648 5-O-520
SINGLECMD1-Cmd11 4-S-4649 5-O-521
SINGLECMD1-Cmd12 4-S-4650 5-O-522
SINGLECMD1-Cmdt13 4-S-4651 5-O-523
SINGLECMD1-Cmd14 4-S-4652 5-O-524
SINGLECMD1-Cmd15 4-S-4653 5-O-525
SINGLECMD1-Cmd16 4-S-4654 5-O-526
SINGLECMD2-Cmd1 4-S-4672 5-O-527
SINGLECMD2-Cmd2 4-S-4673 5-O-528
SINGLECMD2-Cmdt3 4-S-4674 5-O-529
SINGLECMD2-Cmd4 4-S-4675 5-O-530
SINGLECMD2-Cmd5 4-S-4676 5-O-531
SINGLECMD2-Cmd6 4-S-4677 5-O-532
SINGLECMD2-Cmd7 4-S-4678 5-O-533
SINGLECMD2-Cmd8 4-S-4679 5-O-534
SINGLECMD2-Cmd9 4-S-4680 5-O-535
SINGLECMD2-Cmd10 4-S-4681 5-O-536
SINGLECMD2-Cmd11 4-S-4682 5-O-537
SINGLECMD2-Cmd12 4-S-4683 5-O-538
SINGLECMD2-Cmd13 4-S-4684 5-O-539
Table continues on next page

1184
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD2-Cmd14 4-S-4685 5-O-540
SINGLECMD2-Cmd15 4-S-4686 5-O-541
SINGLECMD2-Cmd16 4-S-4687 5-O-542
SINGLECMD3-Cmd1 4-S-4705 5-O-543
SINGLECMD3-Cmd2 4-S-4706 5-O-544
SINGLECMD3-Cmd3 4-S-4707 5-O-545
SINGLECMD3-Cmd4 4-S-4708 5-O-546
SINGLECMD3-Cmd5 4-S-4709 5-O-547
SINGLECMD3-Cmd6 4-S-4710 5-O-548
SINGLECMD3-Cmd7 4-S-4711 5-O-549
SINGLECMD3-Cmd8 4-S-4712 5-O-550
SINGLECMD3-Cmd9 4-S-4713 5-O-551
SINGLECMD3-Cmd10 4-S-4714 5-O-552
SINGLECMD3-Cmd11 4-S-4715 5-O-553
SINGLECMD3-Cmd12 4-S-4716 5-O-554
SINGLECMD3-Cmd13 4-S-4717 5-O-555
SINGLECMD3-Cmd14 4-S-4718 5-O-556
SINGLECMD3-Cmd15 4-S-4719 5-O-557
SINGLECMD3-Cmd16 4-S-4720 5-O-558

Figure 574 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way,
connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection IED
for control of a circuit breaker.

A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command
control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in SINGLECMD:
1 are shown in table 912.

SINGLECMD PULSETIMER
BLOCK ^OUT1 INPUT OUT To output board, CLOSE
#CD01-CMDOUT1 ^OUT2
#CD01-CMDOUT2 ^OUT3
#CD01-CMDOUT3 ^OUT4
#CD01-CMDOUT4 ^OUT5 AND PULSETIMER
^OUT6 INPUT1 OUT INPUT OUT To output board, OPEN
#CD01-CMDOUT5
^OUT7 INPUT2 NOUT
#CD01-CMDOUT6
#CD01-CMDOUT7 ^OUT8 INPUT3
#CD01-CMDOUT8 ^OUT9 INPUT4
#CD01-CMDOUT9 ^OUT10
#CD01-CMDOUT10 ^OUT11
#CD01-CMDOUT11 ^OUT12
#CD01-CMDOUT12 ^OUT13
#CD01-CMDOUT13 ^OUT14
#CD01-CMDOUT14 ^OUT15
#CD01-CMDOUT15 ^OUT16
#CD01-CMDOUT16

SYNCH OK

IEC05000717-4-en.vsd

IEC05000717 V4 EN

Figure 574: Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of
a circuit breaker

1185
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

The MODE input defines if the output signals from SINGLECMD:1 is off, steady or
setable pulse length signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Main
Menu/Settings / IED Settings / Control / Commands / Single Command or via
Parameter Setting Tool (PST).

Event function EVENT

The Event function (EVENT) sends time-tagged events to the station level (for
example, operator workplace) over the station bus. On the station level, events are
presented in an event list. Events can be created from both internal logical signals and
binary input channels. All the internal signals are time tagged in the main processing
module, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module.
Events are produced according to a set of event masks. These masks are treated
commonly for both LON and SPA channels. All events according to the event mask
are stored in a buffer which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before
the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow
alarm appears.

Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED: Terminal
Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).

Input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under:
Main Menu/Settings / IED Settings / Monitoring / Event Function or via the
Parameter Setting Tool (PST) as follows:

No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, the EVENT function makes the reporting decision (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

For double indications, only the fist eight inputs, 18, must be used. Inputs 916 can
be used for other types of events in the same EVENT block.

Status and event codes for the EVENT function are found in Table 913.

1186
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Table 913: Status and event codes

Single indication1) Double indication

Event block Status Set event Reset Intermedi Closed 10 Open 01 Undefined
event ate 00 11
EVENT:1
Input 1 22O1 22E33 22E32 22E0 22E1 22E2 22E3
Input 2 22O2 22E35 22E34 22E4 22E5 22E6 22E7
Input 3 22O3 22E37 22E36 22E8 22E9 22E10 22E11
Input 4 22O4 22E39 22E38 22E12 22E13 22E14 22E15
Input 5 22O5 22E41 22E40 22E16 22E17 22E18 22E19
Input 6 22O6 22E43 22E42 22E20 22E21 22E22 22E23
Input 7 22O7 22E45 22E44 22E24 22E25 22E26 22E27
Input 8 22O8 22E47 22E46 22E28 22E29 22E30 22E31
Input 9 22O9 22E49 22E48 - - - -
Input 10 22O10 22E51 22E50 - - - -
Input 11 22O11 22E53 22E52 - - - -
Input 12 22O12 22E55 22E54 - - - -
Input 13 22O13 22E57 22E56 - - - -
Input 14 22O14 22E59 22E58 - - - -
Input 15 22O15 22E61 22E60 - - - -
Input 16 22O16 22E63 22E62 - - - -

EVENT:2 230.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E..

EVENT:3 240.. 24E.. 24E.. 24E.. 23E.. 24E.. 24E..
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
EVENT:20 410.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E..

These values are only applicable if the event mask is masked OFF.

Connection of signals as events

Signals coming from different protection and control functions and sent as events to
the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus), are connected to the EVENT
function block as specified in Figure 575.

1187
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

EVENT
Block BLOCK
ILRANG ^INPUT1
PSTO ^INPUT2
UL12RANG ^INPUT3
UL23RANG ^INPUT4
UL31RANG ^INPUT5
3I0RANG ^INPUT6
3U0RANG ^INPUT7
FALSE ^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC07000065-2-en.vsd
IEC07000065 V2 EN

Figure 575: Connection of protection signals for event handling

19.6.4.1 Communication ports

The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the

numeric processing module (NUM). It is used for LON, SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and
DNP communication.

There are two types of IO connectors: snap-in connector for plastic fibre cables and
ST/bayonet connector for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either
type or connector or with a combination of both types of connectors. This is identified
with a tag.

Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical
fibre to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to instructions concerning
handling and connection of fibre cables.

For setting the transfer rate (baud rate) and slave number, please refer to the
Application manual and Commissioning manual respectively.

19.6.5 Technical data

Table 914: SPA communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol SPA
Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400
Bd
Slave number 1 to 899

1188
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

19.7 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

19.7.1 Introduction
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED
communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have
software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

19.7.2 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS

19.7.2.1 Functionality

103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on
connected signals.

The set of connected input will control which ASDUs (Application Service Data
Units) are generated.

9 Will be generated if at least IL1 is connected. IL2, IL3, UL1, UL2, UL3, P, Q,
F are optional but there can be no holes.
3.4 Will be generated if IN and UN are present.
3.3 Will be generated if IL2, Ul1L2, P and Q present.
3.2 Will be generated if IL2, UL1L2 and P or Q missing.
3.1 Will be generated if IL2 present and IL1 missing (otherwise IL2 in 9).

Description for I103MEAS function block:

9 = IL1
3.4 = IN AND UN
3.3 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND P AND Q
3.2 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND NOT 3.3
3.1 = IL2 AND NOT (3.2 OR 3.3 OR 9)

19.7.2.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS - -

1189
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.7.2.3 Function block

I103MEAS
BLOCK
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UN
P
Q
F

IEC10000287-1-en.vsd
IEC10000287 V1 EN

Figure 576: I103MEAS function block

19.7.2.4 Signals
Table 915: I103MEAS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
IL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L1
IL2 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L2
IL3 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L3
IN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual current IN
UL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L1
UL2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L2
UL3 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L3
UL1L2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2
UN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual voltage UN
P REAL 0.0 Service value for active power
Q REAL 0.0 Service value for reactive power
F REAL 0.0 Service value for system frequency

19.7.2.5 Settings
Table 916: I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
MaxIL1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L1
MaxIL2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L2
MaxIL3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L3
MaxIN 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum residual current IN
Table continues on next page

1190
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MaxUL1 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L1
MaxUL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L2
MaxUL3 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L3
MaxUL1-UL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Maximum voltage for phase-phase L1-L2
MaxUN 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum residual voltage UN
MaxP 0.00 - 2000.00 MW 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for active power
MaxQ 0.00 - 2000.00 MVAr 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for reactive power
MaxF 45.0 - 66.0 Hz 1.0 51.0 Maximum system frequency

19.7.3 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103MEASUSR

19.7.3.1 Functionality

I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor

direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block
in the private range, and the Information number parameter for each block.

19.7.3.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Measurands user defined signals for I103MEASUSR - -
IEC 60870-5-103

19.7.3.3 Function block

I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9

IEC10000288-1-en.vsd
IEC10000288 V1 EN

Figure 577: I103MEASUSR function block

1191
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.7.3.4 Signals
Table 917: I103MEASUSR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 2
INPUT3 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 3
INPUT4 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 4
INPUT5 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 5
INPUT6 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 6
INPUT7 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 7
INPUT8 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 8
INPUT9 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 9

19.7.3.5 Settings
Table 918: I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 25 Function type (1-255)
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for measurands
(1-255)
MaxMeasur1 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 1
MaxMeasur2 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 2
MaxMeasur3 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 3
MaxMeasur4 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 4
MaxMeasur5 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 5
MaxMeasur6 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 6
MaxMeasur7 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 7
MaxMeasur8 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 8
MaxMeasur9 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 9

1192
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

19.7.4 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR

19.7.4.1 Functionality

I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in

monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

19.7.4.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function status auto-recloser for IEC I103AR - -
60870-5-103

19.7.4.3 Function block

I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_BLKD

IEC10000289-2-en.vsd
IEC10000289 V2 EN

Figure 578: I103AR function block

19.7.4.4 Signals
Table 919: I103AR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-
recloser
130_BLKD BOOLEAN 0 Information number 130, auto-recloser blocked

19.7.4.5 Settings
Table 920: I103AR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

1193
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.7.5 Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF

19.7.5.1 Functionality

I103EF is a function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information
number parameter is defined for each output signal.

19.7.5.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function status earth-fault for IEC I103EF - -
60870-5-103

19.7.5.3 Function block

I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV

IEC10000290-1-en.vsd
IEC10000290 V1 EN

Figure 579: I103EF function block

19.7.5.4 Signals
Table 921: I103EF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 51, earth-fault forward
52_EFREV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 52, earth-fault reverse

19.7.5.5 Settings
Table 922: I103EF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 160 Function type (1-255)

1194
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

19.7.6 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT

19.7.6.1 Functionality

I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the
function block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a
correspondent signal present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN
represents the General Trip of the device, and therefore must be connected to the
general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.

The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is
triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC
60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.

19.7.6.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function status fault protection for IEC I103FLTPROT - -
60870-5-103

1195
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.7.6.3 Function block

I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTRL1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC

IEC10000291-1-en.vsd
IEC10000291 V1 EN

Figure 580: I103FLTPROT function block

19.7.6.4 Signals
Table 923: I103FLTPROT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting.
64_STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, start phase L1
65_STL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 65, start phase L2
66_STL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 66, start phase L3
67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67, start residual current IN
68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68, trip general
69_TRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69, trip phase L1
70_TRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 70, trip phase L2
71_TRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 71, trip phase L3
72_TRBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 72, back up trip I>>
73_SCL REAL 0 Information number 73, fault location in ohm
74_FW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 75, reverse/busbar
Table continues on next page

1196
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Name Type Default Description

76_TRANS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 77, signal received
78_ZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 78, zone 1
79_ZONE2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 79, zone 2
80_ZONE3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 80, zone 3
81_ZONE4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 81, zone 4
82_ZONE5 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 82, zone 5
84_STGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 84, start general
85_BFP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 86, trip measuring system
phase L1
87_MTRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 87, trip measuring system
phase L2
88_MTRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 88, trip measuring system
phase L3
89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89, trip measuring system
neutral N
90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
FLTLOC BOOLEAN 0 Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-
CALCMADE)

19.7.6.5 Settings
Table 924: I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 128 Function type (1-255)

19.7.7 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED

19.7.7.1 Functionality

I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This
block uses parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is defined
for each input signal.

1197
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.7.7.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED - -

19.7.7.3 Function block

I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
22_SETCH
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4

IEC10000292-2-en.vsd
IEC10000292 V2 EN

Figure 581: I103IED function block

19.7.7.4 Signals
Table 925: I103IED Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19, reset LEDs
21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21, test mode is active
22_SETCH BOOLEAN 0 Information number 22, setting changed
23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
24_GRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 24, setting group 2 is active
25_GRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 25, setting group 3 is active
26_GRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 26, setting group 4 is active

19.7.7.5 Settings
Table 926: I103IED Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

1198
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

19.7.8 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV

19.7.8.1 Functionality

I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications

in monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

19.7.8.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV - -

19.7.8.3 Function block

I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL

IEC10000293-1-en.vsd
IEC10000293 V1 EN

Figure 582: I103SUPERV function block

19.7.8.4 Signals
Table 927: I103SUPERV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33, measurand supervision of
U
37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37, I high-high back-up
protection
38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL BOOLEAN 0 Information number 47, group alarm

19.7.8.5 Settings
Table 928: I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

1199
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.7.9 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRDEF

19.7.9.1 Functionality

I103USRDEF is a function block with user defined input signals in monitor direction.
Each instance is associated with a Function Type (FUN) and each input signal with an
Information Number (INF). Additionally, all input signals may be defined to use
relative time and how to respond to a GI request.

The user is responsible for assigning a proper FUN value and proper INF values to all
connected inputs. See Settings for details.

19.7.9.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Status for user defined signals for IEC I103USRDEF - -
60870-5-103

19.7.9.3 Function block

I103USRDEF
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
RT_START

IEC10000294-3-en.vsdx

IEC10000294 V3 EN

Figure 583: I103USRDEF function block

19.7.9.4 Signals
Table 929: I103USRDEF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 3
Table continues on next page

1200
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Name Type Default Description

INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 8
RT_START BOOLEAN 0 Trig to set base of relative time

RT_START registers the positive transition (0->1) of a pulse and sets the time from
which relative time is derived. Relative time is assigned only to inputs where the
corresponding TypNo parameter is set to Relative. The maximum relative time and
unit conform to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.

19.7.9.5 Settings
Table 930: I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 5 Function type (1-255)
InfNo1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for binary input 1
(1-255)
InfNo2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for binary input 2
(1-255)
InfNo3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for binary input 3
(1-255)
InfNo4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for binary input 4
(1-255)
InfNo5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for binary input 5
(1-255)
InfNo6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for binary input 6
(1-255)
InfNo7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for binary input 7
(1-255)
InfNo8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for binary input 8
(1-255)
TypNo1 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo2 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo3 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo4 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo5 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo6 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
Table continues on next page

1201
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TypNo7 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo8 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
GiNo1 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo2 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo3 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo4 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo5 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo6 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo7 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo8 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included

The FunctionType parameter associates a particular instance of the function block

with a FUN. Refer to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.

The InfNon parameters are used to associate each individual input signal with a
userdefined INF. Refer to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.

The TypNon parameters determine if messages use absolute or relative time. This
adheres to the TYPE IDENTIFICATION (TYP) message types 1 (time-tagged
message) and 2 (time-tagged message with relative time) of the IEC 60870-5-103
standard.

The GiNon parameters determine whether a message is sent as a part of a GI reply or

not. Refer to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.

19.7.10 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD

19.7.10.1 Functionality

I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined output

signals. The signals are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in case of
restart.

1202
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

19.7.10.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function commands for IEC I103CMD - -
60870-5-103

19.7.10.3 Function block

I103CMD
BLOCK 16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT

IEC10000282-1-en.vsd
IEC10000282 V1 EN

Figure 584: I103CMD function block

19.7.10.4 Signals
Table 931: I103CMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 932: I103CMD Output signals

Name Type Description
16-AR BOOLEAN Information number 16, off/on of autorecloser
17-DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17, block of differential
protection
18-PROT BOOLEAN Information number 18, block of protection

19.7.10.5 Settings
Table 933: I103CMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

19.7.11 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD

19.7.11.1 Functionality

I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions.

All outputs are pulsed and they are NOT stored. Pulse length is fixed to 0,4s.

1203
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.7.11.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD - -

19.7.11.3 Function block

I103IEDCMD
BLOCK 19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4

IEC10000283-1-en.vsd
IEC10000283 V1 EN

Figure 585: I103IEDCMD function block

19.7.11.4 Signals
Table 934: I103IEDCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 935: I103IEDCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
19-LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 BOOLEAN Information number 23, activate setting group 1
24-GRP2 BOOLEAN Information number 24, activate setting group 2
25-GRP3 BOOLEAN Information number 25, activate setting group 3
26-GRP4 BOOLEAN Information number 26, activate setting group 4

19.7.11.5 Settings
Table 936: I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 255 Function type (1-255)

1204
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

19.7.12 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRCMD

19.7.12.1 Functionality

I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output

signals. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in
the private range, and the Information number parameter for each output signal.

19.7.12.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function commands user defined for I103USRCMD - -
IEC 60870-5-103

19.7.12.3 Function block

I103USRCMD
BLOCK ^OUTPUT1
^OUTPUT2
^OUTPUT3
^OUTPUT4
^OUTPUT5
^OUTPUT6
^OUTPUT7
^OUTPUT8

IEC10000284-1-en.vsd
IEC10000284 V1 EN

Figure 586: I103USRCMD function block

19.7.12.4 Signals
Table 937: I103USRCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 938: I103USRCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5
Table continues on next page

1205
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Name Type Description

OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8

19.7.12.5 Settings
Table 939: I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseMode Steady - - Pulsed Pulse mode
Pulsed
PulseLength 0.200 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for output 1 (1-255)
InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for output 2 (1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for output 3 (1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for output 4 (1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for output 5 (1-255)
InfNo_6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for output 6 (1-255)
InfNo_7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for output 7 (1-255)
InfNo_8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for output 8 (1-255)

19.7.13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103

I103GENCMD

19.7.13.1 Functionality

I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103.

The function has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to
implement double-point command schemes.

The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON/OFF or 2

steady ON/OFF outputs. The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2, while
the OFF output is pulsed with a command value 1. If in steady mode is ON asserted
and OFF deasserted with command 2 and vice versa with command 1. Steady mode
is selected by setting PulseLength=0. The I103GENCMD is retained, and a command
in steady mode will be reissued on restart.

19.7.13.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function commands generic for IEC I103GENCMD - -
60870-5-103

1206
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

19.7.13.3 Function block

I103GENCMD
BLOCK ^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON

IEC10000285-1-en.vsd
IEC10000285 V1 EN

Figure 587: I103GENCMD function block

19.7.13.4 Signals
Table 940: I103GENCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command

Table 941: I103GENCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
CMD_OFF BOOLEAN Command output OFF
CMD_ON BOOLEAN Command output ON

19.7.13.5 Settings
Table 942: I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseLength 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for command output
(1-255)

19.7.14 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD

19.7.14.1 Functionality

I103POSCMD is a transceiver function that monitors activity on its input signals and
interprets any state transition into commands then sent over an established IEC
60870-5-103 link. Additionally, it listens for general interrogation (GI) requests and
replies to those with a GI response message with the current state of each connected
input.

Input POSITION is a double-indication signal, and it is GI enabled. This means that

any state transition, that is to ON, OFF, intermediate and faulty, is reported
spontaneously. However, the intermediate and faulty states may be suppressed by

1207
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

setting the Report Intermediate Position = Off. See the settings for RS485 and optical
serial communication for more information.

Input SELECT is a single-indication signal, and it is also GI enabled. State transitions

to ON and OFF are reported spontaneously.

When input BLOCK is ON, the function will ignore GI requests and cease all
monitoring activity. Consequently, no transitions will be detected.

The I103POSCMD function is also equipped with two additional commands: Operate
and Cancel. These are hidden in ACT and respond only to base INF +2 and +3
respectively. The base INF (Information Number) parameter is an IEC 60870-5-103
identifier that associates a function in a 103 Master (such as Scada) with its equivalent
in the IED.

19.7.14.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
IED commands with position and select I103POSCMD - -
for IEC 60870-5-103

19.7.14.3 Function block

I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT

IEC10000286-1-en.vsd
IEC10000286 V1 EN

Figure 588: I103POSCMD function block

19.7.14.4 Signals
Table 943: I103POSCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
SELECT BOOLEAN 0 Select of controllable object

19.7.14.5 Settings
Table 944: I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type
InfNo 160 - 236 - 4 160 Information number for command output

1208
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

19.7.15 Operation principle

19.7.15.1 General

IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial

communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data
transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master and
a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point
principle. The master must have software that can interpret IEC 60870-5-103
communication messages.

Introduction to IEC 608705103 protocol

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol functionality consists of the following functions:

Event handling
Report of analog service values (measurements)
Fault location
Command handling
Autorecloser ON/OFF
Teleprotection ON/OFF
Protection ON/OFF
LED reset
Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
File transfer (disturbance files)
Time synchronization

For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC 60870 standard part
5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment.

IEC 60870-5-103 vendor specific implementation

The signal and setting tables specify the information types supported by the IEDs with
the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.

The information types are supported when corresponding functions are included in the
protection and control IED.

Be aware of that different cycle times for function blocks must be

considered to ensure correct time stamping.

Commands in control direction

Commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD
Command block in control direction with defined output signals.

Number of instances: 1

1209
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signals.

Table 945: I103IEDCMD supported indications
INF Description
19 LED Reset
23 Activate setting group 1
24 Activate setting group 2
25 Activate setting group 3
26 Activate setting group 4

Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD

Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signals.

Table 946: Pre-defined I103CMD supported indications
INF Description
16 Auto-recloser on/off
17 Teleprotection on/off
18 Protection on/off

Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103USRCMD

Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.

Number of instances: 4

Function type for each function block instance in private range is selected with
parameter FunctionType.

Information number must be selected for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.
Table 947: I103USRCMD supported indications

INF 1) Description
1 Output signal 01
2 Output signal 02
3 Output signal 03
4 Output signal 04
5 Output signal 05
Table continues on next page

1210
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

INF 1) Description
6 Output signal 06
7 Output signal 07
8 Output signal 08

1) User defined information number

Status
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined IED functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each input signals.

Table 948: I103IED supported functions
INF Description
19 LED reset
21 TestMode
22 Local Parameter setting
23 Setting group 1 active
24 Setting group 2 active
25 Setting group 3 active
26 Setting group 4 active

Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103USRDEF

Function indication block in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.

Number of instances: 20

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is required for each input signal.

Table 949: I103USRDEF Information number default values
INF Description GI TYP COT
11) Input signal 01 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)

2* Input signal 02 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)

3* Input signal 03 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
4* Input signal 04 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
5* Input signal 05 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
Table continues on next page

1211
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

INF Description GI TYP COT

6* Input signal 06 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
7* Input signal 07 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
8* Input signal 08 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)

1) * User defined information number

Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103SUPERV

Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for output signals.

Table 950: I103SUPERV supported functions
INF Description TYP GI COT
32 Measurand supervision I 1 Y 1,7,9
33 Measurand supervision U 1 Y 1,7,9
37 I>>back-up operation 1 Y 1,7,9
38 VT fuse failure 1 Y 1,7,9
46 Group warning 1 Y 1,7,9
47 Group alarm 1 Y 1,7,9

Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF

Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signal.

Table 951: I103EF supported indications
INF Description
51 Earth fault forward
52 Earth fault reverse

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.

The instance type is suitable for distance protection function.

FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.

1212
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.

Number of instances: 1
Info. no. Message Supported
64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
67 Start IN Yes
84 General start Yes
69 Trip L1 Yes
70 Trip L2 Yes
71 Trip L3 Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
78 Zone 1 Yes
79 Zone 2 Yes
80 Zone 3 Yes
81 Zone 4 Yes
82 Zone 5 Yes
76 Signal transmitted Yes
77 Signal received Yes
73 SCL, Fault location in ohm Yes

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStd

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.

The instance type is suitable for line differential, transformer differential, overcurrent
and earth fault protection functions.

FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.

Number of instances: 1
Info. no. Message Supported
64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
67 Start IN Yes
84 General start Yes
69 Trip L1 Yes
Table continues on next page

1213
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Info. no. Message Supported

70 Trip L2 Yes
71 Trip L3 Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
85 Breaker failure Yes
86 Trip measuring system L1 Yes
87 Trip measuring system L2 Yes
88 Trip measuring system L3 Yes
89 Trip measuring system N Yes
90 Over current trip I> Yes
91 Over current trip I>> Yes
92 Earth fault trip IN> Yes
93 Earth fault trip IN>> Yes

Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR

Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signal.

Table 952: I103AR supported indications
INF Description
16 Autorecloser active
128 CB on by Autorecloser
130 Autorecloser blocked

Measurands
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to
monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXN.

Measurands in public range, I103MEAS

Number of instances: 1

The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.

Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.

Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.

1214
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

The upper limit is the maximum value that can be encoded into the ASDU
(Application Service Data Unit). Any value higher than this value will be tagged as
OVERFLOW. The factors 1.2 and 2.4 are taken from the 103 standard and require that
a rated value to use as base exists, and then use 1.2 or 2.4 times <rated> as maxVal.
You can use 2.4 times rated as maxVal, but as there is no way to propagate value to
client, the use of a scale factor on <rated> does not make much difference.

You can configure client:client-scaled-max ::= 1.2 * <rated> or

client-scaled-max ::= 1.0 * <maxVal>

If the client has a hard-coded gain of 1.2 * <rated> then client-scaled-

max ::= 1.2 times <maxVal>/1.2

Resolution is <maxVal> / 4095 and hence the lowest possible maxVal yields the best
accuracy.
Table 953: I103MEAS supported indications
INF Description
148 IL1
144, 145, IL2
146, 148
148 IL3
147 IN, Neutral current
148 UL1
148 UL2
148 UL3
145, 146 UL1-UL2
147 UN, Neutral voltage
146, 148 P, active power
146, 148 Q, reactive power
148 f, frequency

Measurands in private range, I103MEASUSR

Number of instances: 3

Function type parameter for each block in private range.

Information number must be selected for measurands.

1215
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Table 954: I103MEASUSR supported indications

INF FUN GI TYP COT Description
*1) *2) No, polled *3) 2,7 Meas1
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas2
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas3
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas4
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas5
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas6
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas7
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas8
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas9
with CL2

1) * User defined information value (PARAM.3)

2) * User defined information value (PARAM.2)
3) 9 = Measurands II, Format = Measurand II (7.3.1.8 in IEC 60870-5-103:1997), semantics per IE is
defined by semantics of connected source.

<Number of information elements> is defined by index of first input not connected.

Example: Input1, Input2, and Input4 are connected, Input3 is not connected.

<Number of information elements> will be 3 (Input3 NOT connected) -1 = 2, that is,

only Input1 and Input2 will be transmitted.

Disturbance recordings
The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units)
defined in the standard.

Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified.
Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:

IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block A1RADR

IL2 connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block A1RADR
IL3 connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block A1RADR
IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block A1RADR
UL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block A1RADR
UL2E connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block A1RADR
UL3E connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block A1RADR
UEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block A1RADR

1216
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private
range 64 to 95.

Binary signals, 128-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION
TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER.

Disturbance upload

All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder can be
reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for
transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the
master) will not be reported to the master again.

When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded

disturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances can be
sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. For example, when
a disturbance is deleted (by other client, for example, SPA) or when a new disturbance
has been recorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance.

Deviations from the standard

Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however, some
of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in the
IED series.

This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.

ASDU23

In list of recorded disturbances (ASDU23) an information element named SOF

(status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates
whether:

Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or
test mode.
Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event than
start

The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information
is always set (hard coded) to:

TP Recorded fault with trip. [1]

TM Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]
OTEV Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]

1217
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to the
standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes action.
FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for each disturbance.

ASDU26 / ASDU31

When a disturbance has been selected by the master by sending ASDU24, the
protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information
element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number must indicate fault number
in the power system,that is, a fault in the power system with several trip and auto-
reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN must be incremented). NOF is just as
FAN, equal to disturbance number.

Interoperability, physical layer

Supported
Electrical Interface
EIA RS-485 Yes
number of loads 32
Optical interface
glass fibre Yes
plastic fibre
Transmission speed
9600 bit/s Yes
19200 bit/s Yes
Link Layer
DFC-bit used Yes
Connectors
connector F-SMA No
connector BFOC/2.5 Yes

Interoperability, application layer

Supported
Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU Yes
1 Time-tagged message Yes
2 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
3 Measurands I Yes
4 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
5 Identification Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
8 End of general interrogation Yes
9 Measurands II Yes
Table continues on next page

1218
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Supported
10 Generic data No
11 Generic identification No
23 List of recorded disturbances Yes
26 Ready for transm. of disturbance data Yes
27 Ready for transm. of a channel Yes
28 Ready for transm of tags Yes
29 Transmission of tags Yes
30 Transmission fo disturbance data Yes
31 End of transmission Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction
ASDU Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
7 General interrogation Yes
10 Generic data No
20 General command Yes
21 Generic command Yes
24 Order for disturbance data transmission Yes
25 Acknowledgement for distance data transmission Yes
Selection of basic application functions
Test mode No
Blocking of monitoring direction Yes
Disturbance data Yes
Private data Yes
Generic services No

19.7.15.2 Communication ports

The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP and
LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and is placed assembled
on the Numerical module (NUM). The serial communication module can have
connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre cables (ST,
bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different types are available
depending on type of fibre.

The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out, pay
special attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of the
optical fibres. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.

1219
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.7.16 Technical data

Table 955: IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd

19.8 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for

interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV

19.8.1 Functionality
GOOSE communication can be used for exchanging information between IEDs via
the IEC 61850-8-1 station communication bus. This is typically used for sending
apparatus position indications for interlocking or reservation signals for 1-of-n
control. GOOSE can also be used to exchange any boolean, integer, double point and
analog measured values between IEDs.

1220
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

19.8.2 Function block

GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK ^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
^APP1_OP
^APP1_CL
APP1VAL
^APP2_OP
^APP2_CL
APP2VAL
^APP3_OP
^APP3_CL
APP3VAL
^APP4_OP
^APP4_CL
APP4VAL
^APP5_OP
^APP5_CL
APP5VAL
^APP6_OP
^APP6_CL
APP6VAL
^APP7_OP
^APP7_CL
APP7VAL
^APP8_OP
^APP8_CL
APP8VAL
^APP9_OP
^APP9_CL
APP9VAL
^APP10_OP
^APP10_CL
APP10VAL
^APP11_OP
^APP11_CL
APP11VAL
^APP12_OP
^APP12_CL
APP12VAL
^APP13_OP
^APP13_CL
APP13VAL
^APP14_OP
^APP14_CL
APP14VAL
^APP15_OP
^APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC07000048.vsd

IEC07000048 V3 EN

Figure 589: GOOSEINTLKRCV function block

19.8.3 Signals
Table 956: GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

1221
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Table 957: GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
RESREQ BOOLEAN Reservation request
RESGRANT BOOLEAN Reservation granted
APP1_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is valid
APP2_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is open
APP2_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is closed
APP2VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is valid
APP3_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is open
APP3_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is closed
APP3VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is valid
APP4_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is open
APP4_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is closed
APP4VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is valid
APP5_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is open
APP5_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is closed
APP5VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is valid
APP6_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is open
APP6_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is closed
APP6VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is valid
APP7_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is open
APP7_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is closed
APP7VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is valid
APP8_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is open
APP8_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is closed
APP8VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is valid
APP9_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is open
APP9_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is closed
APP9VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is valid
APP10_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is open
APP10_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is closed
APP10VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is valid
APP11_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is open
APP11_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is closed
APP11VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is valid
APP12_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is open
APP12_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is closed
APP12VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is valid
Table continues on next page

1222
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Name Type Description

APP13_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is open
APP13_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is closed
APP13VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is valid
APP14_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is open
APP14_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is closed
APP14VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is valid
APP15_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is open
APP15_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is closed
APP15VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is valid
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output

19.8.4 Settings
Table 958: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

1223
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.9 Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV

19.9.1 Function block

GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK ^OUT1
DVALID1
^OUT2
DVALID2
^OUT3
DVALID3
^OUT4
DVALID4
^OUT5
DVALID5
^OUT6
DVALID6
^OUT7
DVALID7
^OUT8
DVALID8
^OUT9
DVALID9
^OUT10
DVALID10
^OUT11
DVALID11
^OUT12
DVALID12
^OUT13
DVALID13
^OUT14
DVALID14
^OUT15
DVALID15
^OUT16
DVALID16
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC07000047.vsd
IEC07000047 V3 EN

Figure 590: GOOSEBINRCV function block

19.9.2 Signals
Table 959: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

Table 960: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1
DVALID1 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Binary output 2
DVALID2 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Binary output 3
DVALID3 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 3
Table continues on next page

1224
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Name Type Description

OUT4 BOOLEAN Binary output 4
DVALID4 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Binary output 5
DVALID5 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Binary output 6
DVALID6 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Binary output 7
DVALID7 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Binary output 8
DVALID8 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Binary output 9
DVALID9 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Binary output 10
DVALID10 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Binary output 11
DVALID11 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Binary output 12
DVALID12 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Binary output 13
DVALID13 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Binary output 14
DVALID14 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Binary output 15
DVALID15 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Binary output 16
DVALID16 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 16
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output

19.9.3 Settings
Table 961: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

1225
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.10 GOOSE function block to receive a double point

value GOOSEDPRCV

19.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEDPRCV - -
double point value

19.10.2 Functionality
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC 61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

19.10.3 Function block

GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK ^DPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000249-1-en.vsd
IEC10000249 V1 EN

Figure 591: GOOSEDPRCV function block

19.10.4 Signals
Table 962: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 963: GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
DPOUT INTEGER Double point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for double point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

1226
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

19.10.5 Settings
Table 964: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

19.10.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of

a cross to receive the double point values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted

to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the
DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

19.11 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV

19.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive an GOOSEINTRCV - -
integer value

19.11.2 Functionality
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC 61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

1227
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.11.3 Function block

GOOSEINTRCV
BLOCK ^INTOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000250-1-en.vsd
IEC10000250 V1 EN

Figure 592: GOOSEINTRCV function block

19.11.4 Signals
Table 965: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 966: GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
INTOUT INTEGER Integer output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

19.11.5 Settings
Table 967: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

19.11.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of

a cross to receive the integer values.

1228
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted

to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the
DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

19.12 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value

GOOSEMVRCV

19.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEMVRCV - -
measurand value

19.12.2 Functionality
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC 61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

19.12.3 Function block

GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK ^MVOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000251-1-en.vsd
IEC10000251 V1 EN

Figure 593: GOOSEMVRCV function block

19.12.4 Signals
Table 968: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

1229
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Table 969: GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
MVOUT REAL Measurand value output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

19.12.5 Settings
Table 970: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

19.12.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of

a cross to receive the measured value.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted

to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the
DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

19.13 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value

GOOSESPRCV

19.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSESPRCV - -
single point value

1230
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

19.13.2 Functionality
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC 61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

19.13.3 Function block

GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK ^SPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000248-1-en.vsd
IEC10000248 V1 EN

Figure 594: GOOSESPRCV function block

19.13.4 Signals
Table 971: GOOSESPRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 972: GOOSESPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

19.13.5 Settings
Table 973: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

19.13.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

1231
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of

a cross to receive the binary single point values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted

to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the
DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

19.14 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Multiple command and receive MULTICMDRCV - -
Multiple command and send MULTICMDSND - -

19.14.1 Functionality
The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive
signals via the interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes 16
binary inputs. LON enables these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving
function block, MULTICMDRCV, which has 16 binary outputs.

19.14.2 Design

19.14.2.1 General

The common behavior for all 16 outputs of the MULTICMDRCV is set to either of
two modes: Steady or Pulse.

1 = Steady: This mode simply forwards the received signals to the binary outputs.
2 = Pulse: When a received signal transitions from 0 (zero) to 1 (one), a pulse with
a duration of exactly one execution cycle is triggered on the corresponding binary
output. This means that no connected function block may have a cycle time that
is higher than the execution cycle time of the particular MULTICMDRCV
instance.

1232
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

19.14.3 Function block

MULTICMDRCV
BLOCK ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID

IEC06000007-2-en.vsd
IEC06000007 V2 EN

Figure 595: MULTICMDRCV function block

MULTICMDSND
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC06000008-2-en.vsd
IEC06000008 V2 EN

Figure 596: MULTICMDSND function block

19.14.4 Signals
Table 974: MULTICMDRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

1233
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

Table 975: MULTICMDSND Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

Table 976: MULTICMDRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN MultiReceive error
NEWDATA BOOLEAN New data is received
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16
VALID BOOLEAN Output data is valid

1234
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Table 977: MULTICMDSND Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN MultiSend error

19.14.5 Settings
Table 978: MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tMaxCycleTime 0.050 - 200.000 s 0.001 11.000 Maximum cycle time between receptions
of input data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum cycle time between receptions
of input data
Mode Steady - - Steady Mode for output signals
Pulsed
tPulseTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse length for multi command outputs

Table 979: MULTICMDSND Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tMaxCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 5.000 Maximum time interval between
transmission of output data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum time interval between
transmission of output data

19.14.6 Operation principle

There are 10 instances of the MULTICMDSND function block. The first two are fast
(8 ms cycle time) while the others are slow (100 ms cycle time). Each instance has 16
binary inputs, to which 16 independent signals can be connected. Connected signals
are sent through MULTICMDSND to the receiving equivalent, MULTICMDRCV,
located on a different IED.

The MULTICMDRCV function block has 16 binary outputs, all controlled through
the command block of one or many MULTICMDSND function blocks. There are 60
instances of the MULTICMDRCV where the first 12 are fast (8 ms), and the others are
slow (100 ms). Additionally, the MULTICMDRCV has a supervision function, which
sets the output connector "VALID" to 0 (zero) if its block does not receive any data
within the time defined by tMaxCycleTime.

LON connections are established using LON network tool (LNT).

1235
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK505308-UEN B
Station communication

19.15 Security events on protocols SECALARM

19.15.1 Security alarm SECALARM

19.15.1.1 Signals
Table 980: SECALARM Output signals
Name Type Description
EVENTID INTEGER EventId of the generated security event
SEQNUMBER INTEGER Sequence number of the generated security event

19.15.1.2 Settings
Table 981: SECALARM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On/Off
On

19.16 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG

19.16.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG

ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging.

There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to. Each server can be
configured with IP address; IP port number and protocol format. The format can be
either syslog (RFC 5424) or Common Event Format (CEF) from ArcSight.

19.16.2 Settings
Table 982: ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ExtLogSrv1Type Off - - Off External log server 1 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv1Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 1 port number
ExtLogSrv1IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 1 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv2Type Off - - Off External log server 2 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Table continues on next page

1236
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 19
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ExtLogSrv2Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 2 port number
ExtLogSrv2IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 2 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv3Type Off - - Off External log server 3 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv3Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 3 port number
ExtLogSrv3IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 3 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv4Type Off - - Off External log server 4 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv4Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 4 port number
ExtLogSrv4IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 4 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv5Type Off - - Off External log server 5 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv5Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 5 port number
ExtLogSrv5IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 5 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv6Type Off - - Off External log server 6 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv6Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 6 port number
ExtLogSrv6IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 6 IP-address
Address

1237
Technical manual
1238
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 20
Remote communication

Section 20 Remote communication

20.1 Binary signal transfer

20.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Binary signal transfer BinSignReceive - -
Binary signal transfer BinSignTransm - -

20.1.2 Functionality
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current
values with a maximum of 8 binary signals in the line differential protection IED, or
for the transmission of only binary signals (up to 192) in the other IEDs. The binary
signals are freely configurable and can, thus, be used for any purpose, for example,
communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signals
between IEDs.

Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with a Line
Data Communication Module (LCDM). The LDCMs then act as interfaces to a 64
kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.

The IED can be equipped with up to four short range, medium range or long range
LDCMs.

1239
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK505308-UEN B
Remote communication

20.1.3 Function block

LDCMRecBinStat1
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
REMCOMF
LOWLEVEL

IEC07000043-2-en.vsd

IEC07000043 V2 EN

LDCMRecBinStat2
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL

IEC07000044-2-en.vsd
IEC07000044 V2 EN

Figure 597: LDCMRecBinStat function blocks

LDCMRecBinStat3
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL

IEC05000451-2-en.vsd
IEC05000451 V2 EN

Figure 598: LDCMRecBinStat function block

20.1.4 Signals
Table 983: LDCMRecBinStat1 Output signals
Name Type Description
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming
message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
Table continues on next page

1240
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 20
Remote communication

Name Type Description

NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming
message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received
message
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

Table 984: LDCMRecBinStat2 Output signals

Name Type Description
CH1 STRING Remote communication channel 1
CH2 STRING Remote communication channel 2
CH3 STRING Remote communication channel 3
CH4 STRING Remote communication channel 4
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming
message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming
message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR BOOLEAN Error in echo synchronization
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received
message
REMGPSER BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS
synchronization
SUBSTITU BOOLEAN Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

Table 985: LDCMRecBinStat3 Output signals

Name Type Description
CH1 STRING Remote communication channel 1
CH2 STRING Remote communication channel 2
CH3 STRING Remote communication channel 3
CH4 STRING Remote communication channel 4
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
Table continues on next page

1241
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK505308-UEN B
Remote communication

Name Type Description

YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming
message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming
message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR BOOLEAN Error in echo synchronization
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received
message
REMGPSER BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS
synchronization
SUBSTITU BOOLEAN Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

20.1.5 Settings
Table 986: LDCMRecBinStat1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low,
HighPower 1=High
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error
signal is reset
InvertPolX21 Off - - Off Invert polarization for X21 communication
On

1242
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 20
Remote communication

Table 987: LDCMRecBinStat2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
DiffSync Echo - - Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM,
GPS 0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - - Block Operation mode when GPS
Echo synchroniation signal is lost
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low,
HighPower 1=High
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - - CT-GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted current
CT-GRP2 values
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error
signal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 ms 5 5 Time delay before switching in redundant
channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back from
redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 ms 0.01 0.00 Asymmetric delay when communication
use echo synch.
AnalogLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Latency between local analogue data and
transmitted
remAinLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 ms 1 20 Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA - - 0-25kA Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 us 1 600 Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 us 1 300 Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21 Off - - Off Invert polarization for X21 communication
On

1243
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK505308-UEN B
Remote communication

Table 988: LDCMRecBinStat3 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
DiffSync Echo - - Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM,
GPS 0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - - Block Operation mode when GPS
Echo synchroniation signal is lost
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low,
HighPower 1=High
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - - CT-GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted current
CT-GRP2 values
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChannel
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error
signal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 ms 5 5 Time delay before switching in redundant
channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back from
redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 ms 0.01 0.00 Asymmetric delay when communication
use echo synch.
AnalogLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Latency between local analogue data and
transmitted
remAinLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 ms 1 20 Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA - - 0-25kA Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 us 1 600 Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 us 1 300 Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21 Off - - Off Invert polarization for X21 communication
On

1244
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 20
Remote communication

20.1.6 Monitored data

Table 989: LDCMRecBinStat1 Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CommStatus BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Status of communication
1=SyncErr link
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err

Table 990: LDCMRecBinStat2 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CommStatus BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Status of communication
1=SyncErr link
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err

Table 991: LDCMRecBinStat3 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CommStatus BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Status of communication
1=SyncErr link
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err

1245
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK505308-UEN B
Remote communication

20.1.7 Operation principle

The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s
channels. It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (same
in 50 Hz and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used is
C37.94 and one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be
transmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated
with C37.94).

Start Stop
Information CRC
flag flag

8 bits n x 16 bits 16 bits 8 bits

en01000134.vsd

IEC01000134 V1 EN

Figure 599: Data message structure

The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in the
HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition.
The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing
is included in the data field.

The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the
correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the
messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then
programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function
detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation.

When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data
consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eight
binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are represented
as sampled values.

When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacity
of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the
capacity of 192 signals.

1246
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 20
Remote communication

20.2 Transmission of analog data from LDCM

LDCMTransmit

20.2.1 Function block

LDCMTRN
^CT1L1
^CT1L2
^CT1L3
^CT1N
^CT2L1
^CT2L2
^CT2L3
^CT2N

IEC10000017-1-en.vsd
IEC10000017 V1 EN

Figure 600: LDCMTransmit function block

The function blocks are not represented in the Application

Configuration tool except for the LDCMTRN function block that is
visible in ACT. The signals appear only in the Signal Matrix tool when
a LDCM is included in the configuration with the function selector
tool.

20.2.2 Signals
Table 992: LDCMTRN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CT1L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L1 to
remote end
CT1L2 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L2 to
remote end
CT1L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L3 to
remote end
CT1N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 neutral N to
remote end
CT2L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L1 to
remote end
CT2L2 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L2 to
remote end
CT2L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L3 to
remote end
CT2N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 neutral N to
remote end

1247
Technical manual
1248
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

Section 21 Basic IED functions

21.1 Authority check ATHCHCK

21.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority check ATHCHCK - -

21.1.2 Functionality
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The
authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access
points to the IED:

local, through the local HMI

remote, through the communication ports

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited with PCM600 IED user management
tool.

1249
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

IEC12000202-2-en.vsd
IEC12000202 V2 EN

Figure 601: PCM600 user management tool

21.1.3 Operation principle

There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas
of the IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 993.

Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required when
writing particular data to the IED from PCM600.

The meaning of the legends used in the table:

R= Read
W= Write
- = No access rights

1250
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

Table 993: Pre-defined user types

Access rights System Protection Design User
Guest Super User SPA Guest
Operator Engineer Engineer Administrator
Basic setting possibilities (change R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
setting group, control settings, limit
supervision)
Advanced setting possibilities (for R R/W R R R/W R/W R
example protection settings)
Basic control possibilities (process R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
control, no bypass)
Advanced control possibilities R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
(process control including interlock
trigg)
Basic command handling (for R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
example clear LEDs, manual trigg)
Advanced command handling (for R R/W R R R/W R/W R/W
example clear disturbance record)
Basic configuration possibilities R R/W R R R R/W R/W
(I/O-configuration in SMT)
Advanced configuration R R/W R R R R/W R/W
possibilities (application
configuration including SMT, GDE
and CMT)
File loading (database loading from - R/W - - - R/W R/W
XML-file)
File dumping (database dumping to - R/W - - - R/W R/W
XML-file)
File transfer (FTP file transfer) - R/W - R/W R/W R/W R/W
File transfer (limited) (FTP file R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
transfer)
File Transfer (SPA File Transfer) - R/W - - - R/W -
Database access for normal user R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
User administration (user R R/W R R R R R/W
management FTP File Transfer)
User administration (user - R/W - - - - -
management SPA File Transfer)

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management
within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED,
there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.

If the IED is Central Account Management enabled, users can only be

created, deleted or edited in the Central Account Management server.
In that case, only the user rights can be edited using the PCM600 tool.
See Cyber Security Deployment Guidelines manual.

Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names and

passwords.

1251
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

The maximum of characters in a password is 18.

At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to

be able to write users, created in PCM600, to IED.

At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED
until a user has been created with the IED User Management..

Once a user is created and downloaded to the IED, that user can perform a Log on,
introducing the password assigned in the tool.

If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: No user
defined!

If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main
menu/Settings/General Settings/HMI/Screen/Display Timeout) elapses, the IED
returns to Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 10
minutes at delivery.

If there are one or more users created with the IED User Management and downloaded
into the IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or when the user
attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the Log on window will
appear.

The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the key, the user
can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and down
arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the E key again.
When it comes to password, upon pressing the key, the following character will
show up: $. After all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose
OK and press the key again.

If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the
Authorization screen. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a
password protected setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the
Log on has failed, then the Log on window opens again, until either the user makes it
right or presses Cancel.

21.1.3.1 Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED

The users, their roles and rights are created, deleted and edited only in the Central
Account Management server (SDM600). However, the user rights can be edited in the
IED by using the PCM600 user tool.

One user can have one or several user roles. By default, the users in Table 747 are
created in the IED, and when creating new users in the SDM600 server, the predefined
roles from Table 995 can be used.

1252
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

At delivery, the IED user has full access as SuperUser when using the
LHMI and as Administrator when using FTP or PCM600 until Central
Account Management is activated.

Table 994: Default users

User name User rights
SuperUser Full rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default until other users
are defined
Guest Only read rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default when other
users are defined (same as VIEWER)
Administrator Full rights. Password: Administrator. This user has to be used when reading out
disturbances with third party FTP-client.

Table 995: Predefined user roles according to IEC 62351-8

User roles Role explanation User rights
VIEWER Viewer Can read parameters and browse the menus from LHMI
OPERATOR Operator Can read parameters and browse the menus as well as
perform control actions
ENGINEER Engineer Can create and load configurations and change settings
for the IED and also run commands and manage
disturbances
INSTALLER Installer Can load configurations and change settings for the IED
SECADM Security Can change role assignments and security settings. Can
administrator deploy certificates.
SECAUD Security auditor Can view audit logs
RBACMNT RBAC Can change role assignment
management
ADMINISTRATOR Administrator Sum of all rights for SECADM, SECAUD and RBACMNT
rights

This User role is vendor specific and

not defined in IEC 623518

Changes in user management settings do not cause an IED reboot.

The PCM600 tool caches the login credentials after successful login
for 15 minutes. During that time no more login will be necessary.

The successfully activation of Central Account Management will disable built-in

users or remove all local created users from PCM600.

1253
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

Management of user credentials and roles is handled on the central Account

Management server e.g. SDM600 The IED employs two strategies to ensure
availability of the authentication system even if there is a problem with the network or
authentication server:
A substation can be equipped with two redundant authentication servers
operating in a hot standby mode.
If configured by the security administrator, the IED itself maintains a local replica
in the database with selected users. This database is periodically updated with
data from the server and used as fallback if none of the servers are reachable.

Note that not all users in the SDM600 server are part of the replica. There might be
users that are not assigned to any replication group. IED only replicates those users
which are part of replication group configured in the IED.

This replication can be disabled using PCM600 by the security administrator, which
means that the IED will forward login requests to the SDM600 for authorization and
in case of problems with the network users will not be able to log in to the IED.

If user replication has been disabled in a CAM-enabled IED and if

communication with SDM600 is lost, access to that IED will be
denied until communication is re-established.

All communication between the central management and the IEDs is protected using
secure communication. Customers using SDM600 are required to generate and
distribute certificates during the engineering process of the substation. These
certificates ensure mutual trust between IED and for example SDM600, FTP,
PCM600 and other system.
Table 996: Authority-related IED functions
Function Description
Authority status This function is an indication function block for user logon activity.
ATHSTAT User denied attempt to logon and user successful logon are reported.
Authority check To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
ATHCHCK accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The
authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access
points to the IED:

local, through the local HMI

remote, through the communication ports

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only in the CAM server.
Authority This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the
management maintenance menu logon time out.
AUTHMAN

For more information on the functions Authority Management (AUTHMAN),

Authority Status (ATHSTAT), and Authority Check (ATHCHCK) functions, refer to
chapter Basic IED functions in the Technical Manual.

1254
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.2 Authority management AUTHMAN

21.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority management AUTHMAN - -

21.2.2 AUTHMAN
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the
maintenance menu log on time out.

21.2.3 Settings
Table 997: AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MaintMenuDisAuth Disable - - Enable In maintenance menu, disable authority
Enable selection is shown
AuthTimeout 600 - 3600 s 600 600 Authority blocking timeout

21.3 FTP access with password FTPACCS

21.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
FTP access with SSL FTPACCS - -

21.3.2 FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS

The FTP Client defaults to the best possible security mode when trying to negotiate
with TLS.

The automatic negotiation mode acts on configured port number 21 and server
features, it tries to negotiate with explicit TLS via AUTH TLS. If the specified port is
any other, it tries to negotiate in a similar way.

Using FTP without TLS encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities. This
mode is only for accessing disturbance recorder data from the IED.

1255
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

If normal FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings, create a

specific account for this purpose with rights only to do File transfer.
The password of this user will be exposed in clear text on the wire.

21.3.3 Settings
Table 998: FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PortSelection None - - Any Port selection for communication
Front
LANAB
LANCD
Any
SSLMode FTP+FTPS - - FTPS Support for AUTH TLS/SSL
FTPS
TCPPortFTP 1 - 65535 - 1 21 TCP port for FTP and FTP with Explicit
SSL
PasvPortStart 0 - 65515 - 1 49200 First TCP data port for PASV
PasvPortEnd 0 - 65535 - 1 49232 Last TCP data port for PASV

21.4 Authority status ATHSTAT

21.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority status ATHSTAT - -

21.4.2 Functionality
Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on
activity.

User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.

21.4.3 Function block

ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON

IEC06000503-2-en.vsd
IEC06000503 V2 EN

Figure 602: ATHSTAT function block

1256
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.4.4 Signals
Table 999: ATHSTAT Output signals
Name Type Description
USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on

The output signal USRBLKED is not valid if the IED is Centralized

Account Management enabled.

21.4.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or in Protection
and Control IED Manager (PCM600)

21.4.6 Operation principle

Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED
and the user authorization:
the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or
LOGGEDON) is activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event
(EVENT) function block for LON/SPA.The signals are also available on IEC 61850
station bus.

21.5 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG

21.5.1 Functionality
Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal system
events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal
events are saved in an internal event list presented on the LHMI and in PCM600 event
viewer tool.

21.5.2 Function block

1257
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

INTERRSIG
FAIL
WARNING
TSYN CERR
RTCERR
STUPBLK

IEC09000787-2-en.vsdx

IEC09000787 V2 EN

Figure 603: INTERRSIG function block

21.5.3 Signals
Table 1000: INTERRSIG Output signals
Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail
WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
STUPBLK BOOLEAN Application startup block

21.5.4 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

21.5.5 Operation principle

The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:

Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

Checking of digitized measuring signals.
Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the
Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.

Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-
supervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main
menu/Diagnostics/Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
General. The information from the self-supervision function is also available in the
Event Viewer in PCM600.

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm

contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function of this

1258
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

output relay is an OR-function between the INT-FAIL signal see figure 605 and a
couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 604

IEC04000520 V1 EN

Figure 604: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact

IO fail
OR Set e.g. BIM 1 Error
IO stopped
Reset
IO started
e.g. IOM2 Error OR
e.g. IO (n) Error Internal
OR FAIL
LON ERROR

FTF fatal error

OR
Watchdog NUMFAIL
RTE fatal error
Internal
Set WARN
RTE Appl-fail
OR
RTE OK Reset

IEC61850 not ready NUMWARNING

OR
RTCERROR Set RTCERROR
RTC OK Reset

TIMESYNCHERROR
OR TIMESYNCHERROR
Time reset Set

SYNCH OK Reset
SETCHGD
Settings changed
1 second pulse

en04000519-1.vsd
IEC04000519 V2 EN

Figure 605: Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block

1259
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from
this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The
signals from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary outputs
for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions
if required/desired.

Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in
the Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from
the time synchronization block TIME.

21.5.5.1 Internal signals

Self supervision provides several status signals that give information about the
internal status of the IED. For this reason they are also called internal signals. These
internal signals , available on local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
General, can be divided into two groups.

Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see table 1001.
Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see table 1002.

Table 1001: Self-supervision's standard internal signals

Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation
local HMI as
FAIL Internal Internal fail This signal will be active if one or more of the
Fail status following internal signals are active;
LMDERROR, WATCHDOG, APPERROR,
RTEERROR, or any of the HW dependent
signals
WARNING Internal Internal This signal will be active if one or more of the
Warning warning following internal signals are active;
status RTCERROR, IEC61850ERROR,
TIMESYNCHERROR
RTCERROR Real Time Real time This signal will be active when there is a hardware
Clock clock error with the real time clock.
status
TIMESYNCHERROR Time Time synch This signal will be active when the source of the
Synchroni time synchronization is lost, or when the time
zation system has to make a time reset.
status
RTEERROR Runtime Runtime This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine
Execution execution failed to do some actions with the application
Error threads. The actions can be loading of settings or
status parameters for components, changing of setting
groups, loading or unloading of application
threads.
IEC61850ERROR IEC IEC61850 This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack
61850 did not succeed in some actions like reading IEC
Error 61850 configuration, startup, for example
status
DNP3 DNP3 DNP3 This signal will be active when DNP3 detects any
error configuration error during startup.
status
Table continues on next page

1260
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation

local HMI as
LMDERROR LON/Mip SLM301 LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an
Device unrecoverable error state.
Error
status
APPERROR Runtime Runtime This signal will be active if one or more of the
Applicatio App Error application threads are not in the state that
n Error Runtime Engine expects. The states can be
status CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for
example
SETCHGD Settings Settings This signal will generate an Internal Event to the
changed changed Internal Event list if any settings are changed.
SETGRPCHGD Setting Settings This signal will generate an Internal Event to the
groups changed Internal Event list if any setting groups are
changed changed.

Table 1002: Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Card Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation
local HMI as
PSM PSM-Error Power PSM1 Activated if the module has a hardware
Supply error.
Module
Error
status
BIM BIM-Error Binary In BIMn Activated if the module has a hardware
Module error.
Error n = slot number
status
BOM BOM-Error Binary Out BOMn Activated if the module has a hardware
Module error.
Error n = slot number
status
IOM IOM-Error In/Out IOMn Activated if the module has a hardware
Module error.
Error n = slot number
status
MIM MIM-Error Millamper MIMn Activated if the module has a hardware
e Input error.
Module n = slot number
Error
status
SOM SOM-Error Static Out SOMn Activated if the module has a hardware
Module error.
Error n = slot number
status
NUM NUM-Error Numerical NUM30 Activated if the module has a hardware or
/CPU software error.
Module
Error
status
ADM ADM-Error A/D ADM31 Activated if the module has a hardware
Module error.
Error
status
Table continues on next page

1261
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

Card Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation

local HMI as
ADM ADM-Error A/D ADM32 Activated if the module has a hardware
Module error.
Error
status
OEM OEM-Error Optical OEM3nn Activated if the module has a hardware
Ethernet error.
Module n = slot number
Error
status
LDCM LDCM-Error Line LDCM3nn Activated if the module has a hardware
Differentia error.
l n = slot number
Communi
cation
Module
Error
status
TRM TRM-Error Transform TRM40
er Module
Error
status
TRM TRM-Error Transform TRM41
er Module
Error
status

21.5.5.2 Supervision of analog inputs

The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification.

When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of
the two A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will
be informed and an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.

21.5.6 Technical data

Table 1003: Self supervision with internal event list
Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out

1262
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.6 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN

21.6.1 Functionality
The time synchronization function is used to select a common source of absolute time
for the synchronization of the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes
it possible to compare events and disturbance data between all IEDs within a station
automation system and in between sub-stations. A common source shall be used for
IED and merging unit when IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication is used.

Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time

synchronization source.

21.6.2 Settings
There are two groups of parameter settings related to time:
System time
Synchronization

The System time group relates to setting the on/off and start/end of the Daylight
Saving Time (DST) for the local time zone in relation to Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC). The Synchronization group relates to selecting the coarse and fine
synchronization sources. As well as defining the synchronization master and accuracy
levels specifically for IEC 61850-9-2.

All the settings and parameters related to time are available via Local HMI under
Main menu/Configuration/Time/System time and via PCM600 under IED
Configuration/Time.

1263
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

Table 1004: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CoarseSyncSrc Off - - Off Coarse time synchronization source
SPA
LON
SNTP
DNP
IEC103
FineSyncSource Off - - Off Fine time synchronization source
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS
SyncMaster Off - - Off Activate IEDas synchronization master
SNTP-Server
TimeAdjustRate Slow - - Fast Adjust rate for time synchronization
Fast
HWSyncSrc Off - - Off Hardware time synchronization source
GPS
IRIG-B
PPS
AppSynch NoSynch - - NoSynch Time synchronization mode for
Synch application
SyncAccLevel Class T5 (1us) - - Unspecified Wanted time synchronization accuracy
Class T4 (4us)
Unspecified

Table 1005: BININPUT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ModulePosition 3 - 16 - 1 3 Hardware position of IO module for time
synchronization
BinaryInput 1 - 16 - 1 1 Binary input number for time
synchronization
BinDetection PositiveEdge - - PositiveEdge Positive or negative edge detection
NegativeEdge

Table 1006: SNTP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ServerIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Server IP-address
Address
RedServIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Redundant server IP-address
Address

1264
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

Table 1007: DSTENABLE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DST Enable Off - - On Enables or disables the use of Daylight
On Saving Time

Table 1008: DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - March Month in year when daylight time starts
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time starts
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
-23:30 time starts
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00

1265
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

Table 1009: DSTEND Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - October Month in year when daylight time ends
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time ends
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
-23:30 time ends
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00

1266
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

Table 1010: TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TimeZone -12:00 - - 1:00 Local time from UTC
-11:00
-10:00
-9:30
-9:00
-8:00
-7:00
-6:00
-5:00
-4:30
-4:00
-3:30
-3:00
-2:00
-1:00
0:00
1:00
2:00
3:00
3:30
4:00
4:30
5:00
5:30
5:45
6:00
6:30
7:00
8:00
8:45
9:00
9:30
10:00
10:30
11:00
11:30
12:00
12:45
13:00
14:00

Table 1011: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchType BNC - - Opto Type of synchronization
Opto
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ

1267
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

21.6.3 Operation principle

21.6.3.1 General concepts

Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time
the clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the
time gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to
compensate for them.

Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

The time system is based on software and hardware clocks that run independently
from each other. See figure 606

External
Synchronization
sources Time tagging and general synchronisation

Off
Comm- Protection
LON Events
Time- unication and control
SPA Regulator functions
Min. pulse
(Setting,
GPS see
SW-time
technical
SNTP
reference
DNP manual) Connected when GPS-time is
IRIG-B used for differential protection

PPS

Synchronization for differential protection

(ECHO-mode or GPS)
Off Time-
GPS Regulator HW-time
(fast or slow)
IRIG-B
PPS Diff.-
A/D Trans-
converter comm- ducers*
unication

*IEC 61850-9-2

IEC08000287-2-en.vsd
IEC08000287 V2 EN

Figure 606: Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

1268
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

External
synchronization
sources Time tagging and general synchronization

Off
Commu- Protection
LON Events
Time nication and control
SPA regulator functions
Min. pulse
(Setting:
SNTP
see SW time
DNP Technical
manual)
IRIG-B
PPS

Synchronization for differential protection

(Echo mode)
Off Time
IRIG-B regulator HW time
(fast or slow)
PPS

A/D Diff. Trans-

converter commu- ducers*
nication

*IEC 61850-9-2

IEC16000002-2-en.vsdx

IEC16000002 V2 EN

Figure 607: Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When, for example, a status
signal is changed in the protection system of a function based on the free running
hardware clock, the event is time tagged by the software clock when it reaches the
event recorder. The hardware clock can thus run independently.

The echo mode of differential protection is based on the hardware clock. Thus, there
is no need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock.

The synchronization of the hardware clock to the software clock is necessary only
when GPS or IRIG B 00X with optical fibre, IEEE 1344 is used for differential
protection. The two clock systems are synchronized by a special clock
synchronization unit with two modes, fast and slow. A special feature, an automatic
fast clock time regulator is used. The automatic fast mode makes the synchronization
time as short as possible during start-up or at interruptions/disturbances in the GPS
timing. The fast and slow settings are also available on the local HMI.

The hardware and software clocks are synchronized also if a GPS clock is used.

Fast clock synchronization mode

At start-up and after interruptions in the GPS or IRIG B time signals, the deviation
between the GPS time and the internal differential time system can be substantial. A

1269
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

new start-up is also required, for example, after maintenance of the auxiliary voltage
system.

When the time difference is >16s, the differential function is blocked and the time
regulator for the hardware clock automatically uses a fast mode to synchronize the
clock systems. The time adjustment is made with an exponential function, that is, with
big time adjustment steps in the beginning, and then smaller steps until a time
deviation between the GPS time and the differential time system of <16s has been
reached. The differential function is then enabled and the synchronization remains in
fast mode or switches to slow mode depending on the setting.

Slow clock synchronization mode

During normal service, a setting with slow synchronization mode is used. This
prevents the hardware clock to make too big time steps, >16s, emanating from the
differential protection requirement of correct timing.

Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure.
A function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower
levels.

Synchronization from
a higher level

Function

Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level

IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN

Figure 608: Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization

messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the
synchronization decreases as well. A function can have several potential sources of
synchronization, with different maximum errors. This gives the function the
possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock
based on this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:

The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

The time since the last used synchronization message
The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.

1270
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.6.3.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation

The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The
clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.

Real-time clock at power off

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time
clock that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off,
the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time
the time will be lost completely.

Real-time clock at startup

Time synchronization startup procedure

The first message that contains the full time (as for instance LON, SNTP and GPS)
gives an accurate time to the IED. After the initial setting of the clock, one of the three
following conditions happens with each of the coming synchronization messages
configured as FineSynchSource:

If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, has an

offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for
synchronization, which means, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero
offset at the next coming time message.
If the synchronization message has a large offset compared to the other messages,
a spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message.
If the synchronization message has a large offset and the following message also
has a large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in the synchronization
message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 500 milliseconds. If the offset
is more than the threshold, the clock jumps a whole number of seconds so the
remaining offset is less than 500ms. The remaining offset is then slowly adjusted
with 1000 ppm until the offset is removed. With an adjustment of 1000ppm it
takes 500 seconds to remove an offset of 500 milliseconds.

Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of the
time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and
only an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.

Rate accuracy
The Rate accuracy is the accuracy of the internal clock while the external time signal
is lost (e.g. GPS lost). In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the
IED is synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the
surrounding temperature is constant. It can take up to one hour after a cold start of the
IED to reach to a stable rate due to the normal warming-up procedure of the IED.

Time-out on synchronization sources

All synchronization interfaces have a time-out, and a configured interface must
receive time synchronization messages regularly in order not to give an error signal
(TSYNCERR) that is reported from the INTERRSIG function block. The time-out is

1271
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

such that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one
message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.

21.6.3.3 Synchronization alternatives

Four main alternatives of external synchronization sources are available. The

synchronization message is applied:
via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including
date and time
as a minute pulse connected to a binary input
via GPS
via IRIG-B or PPS

Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an
IED to an SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a
reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet
network that connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to operate
properly, there must be an SNTP server present, preferably in the same station. The
SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms accuracy for binary
inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.

SNTP provides complete time-information and can be used as both fine and coarse
time synch source. However SNTP shall normally be used as fine synch only. The
only reason to use SNTP as coarse synch is in combination with PPS as fine source.
The combination SNTP as both fine and coarse source shall not be used.

SNTP server requirements

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5
switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or
at least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server
software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable
source like GPS, or local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without
synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not
recommended.

Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)

On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are
sent.

Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, that
is, year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.

The SLM module is located on the Numeric processing module (NUM).

1272
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

Synchronization via Built-in-GPS

The built-in GPS clock modules receive and decode time information from the global
positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronization
Module (GTM).

Synchronization via binary input

The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be
generated from, for example station master clock. If the station master clock is not
synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the
substation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This signal
is also considered as a fine time synchronization signal.

The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED.
The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.

If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation

and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute
pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute
pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in the
IED.

The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As only
the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after the
last flank.

Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.

Pulse data:

Period time (a) should be 60 seconds.

Pulse length (b):
Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms.
Maximum pulse length is optional.
Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".

Deviations in the period time (a) larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.

1273
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

en05000251.vsd
IEC05000251 V1 EN

Figure 609: Binary minute pulses

The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute
pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.

If contact bounce occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The
next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.

If the minute pulses are perfect, for example, it is exactly 60 seconds between the
pulses, contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without
effecting the system. If contact bounce occurs more than 50 ms, for example, it is less
than 59950 ms between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute
pulse will not be accepted.

Binary synchronization example

An IED is configured to use only binary input for time synchronization, and a valid
binary input is applied to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the
approximate time, and the minute pulse is then used to synchronize the IED. Minute
pulse means that each pulse occurs one minute after the previous pulse, so the first
pulse is not used at all. The second pulse will probably be rejected due to the spike
filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time, and will reset the time so that the
fourth pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, the time in the
IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or if the RTC backup
still keeps the time since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed, for example, for
an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If
the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse is automatically rejected. The second pulse
will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will set the time if the
time offset is more than 500 ms or adjust the time if the time offset is small enough.
If the time is set, the application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set.
If the time is adjusted, the time will reach its destination within one minute.

Synchronization via IRIG-B module

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local
time of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are
transmitted and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there are numbers
stating if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.

1274
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG-B module, one galvanic BNC
connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via the
galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the galvanic
interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means a number in the range
of 0-7.

00 means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-B
module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. 12 means that a 1 kHz modulation
is used. In this case the information must go into the module via the BNC connector.

If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains

information of the year. If the x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time
within the year, and year information has to be set via PCM600 or local HMI.

The IRIG-B module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B
clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is
compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the time-
zone.

21.6.3.4 Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization

When process bus communication (IEC 61850-9-2LE protocol) is used, it is essential

that the merging units are using the same time source as the IED. To achieve this, a
satellite-controlled clock shall provide time synchronization to the IED (either
internal GPS or via IRIG-B 00x with IEEE1344 support) and to the merging units (via
for instance PPS). For the time synchronization of the process bus communication,
GPS Time Module (GTM) and/or IRIG-B module can be used. If the IED contains a
GTM, the merging unit can be synchronized from the PPS output of the GTM.

21.6.4 Technical data

Table 1012: Time synchronization, time tagging
Function Value
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse 1.0 ms typically
synchronization), events and sampled measurement values
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement 1.0 ms typically
values

21.7 Parameter setting groups

21.7.1 Functionality
Use the six different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different
power system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets,

1275
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

either from the local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable
IED that can be applied to a variety of power system scenarios.

21.7.2 Function block

ACTVGRP
ACTGRP1 GRP1
ACTGRP2 GRP2
ACTGRP3 GRP3
ACTGRP4 GRP4
ACTGRP5 GRP5
ACTGRP6 GRP6
SETCHGD
REMSETEN

IEC05000433-3-en.vsd
IEC05000433 V3 EN

Figure 610: ActiveGroup function block

21.7.3 Signals
Table 1013: ACTVGRP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ACTGRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 2 as active
ACTGRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 3 as active
ACTGRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 4 as active
ACTGRP5 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 5 as active
ACTGRP6 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 6 as active

Table 1014: ACTVGRP Output signals

Name Type Description
GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active
GRP2 BOOLEAN Setting group 2 is active
GRP3 BOOLEAN Setting group 3 is active
GRP4 BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is active
GRP5 BOOLEAN Setting group 5 is active
GRP6 BOOLEAN Setting group 6 is active
SETCHGD BOOLEAN Pulse when setting changed
REMSETEN BOOLEAN Settings over IEC 61850 enabled

1276
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.7.4 Settings
Table 1015: SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1 - - SettingGroup1 Active setting group
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6
MaxNoSetGrp 1-6 - 1 1 Max number of setting groups 1-6

21.7.5 Operation principle

Parameter setting groups ActiveGroup function has six functional inputs, each
corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these
inputs changes the active setting group. Seven functional output signals are available
for configuration purposes, so that information on the active setting group is always
available.

A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by
activating the corresponding input to the ActiveGroup function block.

Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary
inputs in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.

The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when
adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups
must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.

More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order
setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group
two are set to be activated, group two will be the one activated.

Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a
pulse.

The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to
switch between.

1277
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

ACTIVATE GROUP 6
ACTIVATE GROUP 5
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
+RL2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1
ACTVGRP
IOx-Bly1
ACTGRP1 GRP1

IOx-Bly2
ACTGRP2 GRP2

IOx-Bly3 ACTGRP3 GRP3

IOx-Bly4
ACTGRP4 GRP4

IOx-Bly5
ACTGRP5 GRP5

IOx-Bly6
ACTGRP6 GRP6

SETCHGD

REMSETEN

IEC05000119-3-en.vsd
IEC05000119 V3 EN

Figure 611: Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which
group that is active.

SETGRPS function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is
defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of
setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will
be shown on the Parameter Setting Tool.

21.8 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK

21.8.1 Functionality
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to
block inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.

The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.

1278
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.8.2 Function block

CHNGLCK
LOCK* ACTIVE
OVERRIDE
IEC09000946.vsd

IEC09000946 V2 EN

Figure 612: CHNGLCK function block

21.8.3 Signals
Table 1016: CHNGLCK Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Activate change lock

Table 1017: CHNGLCK Output signals

Name Type Description
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Change lock active
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN Change lock override

21.8.4 Operation principle

The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.

The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state
that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
Monitoring
Reading events
Resetting events
Reading disturbance data
Clear disturbances
Reset LEDs
Reset counters and other runtime component states
Control operations
Set system time
Enter and exit from test mode
Change of active setting group

The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:

1279
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

Binary input Function

1 Activated
0 Deactivated

21.9 Test mode functionality TESTMODE

21.9.1 Functionality
When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the functions in the
IED are automatically blocked. Activated TESTMODE is indicating by a flashing
yellow LED on the local HMI. It is then possible to unblock every function(s)
individually from the local HMI to perform required tests.

When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes normal
operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later
restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection functions
blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will be done with
actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus
mistakes are avoided.

21.9.2 Function block

TESTMODE
IED_TEST TEST
IED_TEST
BLOCK
NOEVENT
INPUT
SETTING
IEC61850

IEC14000072-1-en.vsd
IEC09000219 V2 EN

Figure 613: TESTMODE function block

21.9.3 Signals
Table 1018: TESTMODE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IED_TEST BOOLEAN 0 Activate IED test mode

1280
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

Table 1019: TESTMODE Output signals

Name Type Description
TEST BOOLEAN In test via IED TEST or via LD0 Mode
IED_TEST BOOLEAN IED test mode is active
BLOCK BOOLEAN Active when LD0 is blocked or test blocked
NOEVENT BOOLEAN Event disabled during test mode
INPUT BOOLEAN IED TEST input is active
SETTING BOOLEAN IED test mode setting is On
IEC61850 BOOLEAN Active when LD0 Mode is in Blocked, Test or Test
blocked

21.9.4 Settings
Table 1020: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IEDTestMode Off - - Off Activate IED Test mode
On
EventDisable Off - - Off Event disable during test mode
On
BlockAllFunc Off - - On Block all functions when entering IED test
On mode
CmdTestEd1 Off - - Off Require test bit in command at test mode
On (only for IEC61850 Ed1)

21.9.5 Operation principle

Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED. Set the IED in test mode by

configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.

setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under Main menu/TEST/IED test
mode.

While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE
is activated. The outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the
Test mode: being in On state. If the input from the configuration (OUTPUT signal
is activated) or setting from local HMI (SETTING signal is activated).

While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions are
blocked. Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality and
event signalling.

The deblocking is reseted when exiting test mode.

The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no
outputs will be activated.

1281
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

If the IED is restarted while set to IED TESTMODE by a binary input

all functions will be temporarily unblocked during startup, which
might cause unwanted operations.

The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions

when a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24
contact 29-30) can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the
TESTMODE function block.

Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.

The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to
prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a
commissioning or maintenance test.

21.10 IED identifiers TERMINALID

21.10.1 Functionality
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual
IED in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

21.10.2 Settings
Table 1021: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StationName 0 - 18 - 1 Station name Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 - 1 Object name Object name
ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Object number
UnitName 0 - 18 - 1 Unit name Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Unit number
IEDMainFunType 0 - 255 - 1 0 IED main function type for
IEC60870-5-103
TechnicalKey 0 - 16 - 1 AA0B0Q0A0 Technical key (part 1)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 2)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 3)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 4)

1282
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.11 Product information PRODINF

21.11.1 Functionality
The Product identifiers function contains constant data (i.e. not possible to change)
that uniquely identifies the IED:

ProductVer
ProductDef
FirmwareVer
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate
IEDProdType

The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiers and under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED Status/IED
identifiers

This information is very helpful when interacting with ABB product support (e.g.
during repair and maintenance).

21.11.2 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

21.11.3 Factory defined settings

The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very
helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different
Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be
changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are found in the local
HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers

The following identifiers are available:

IEDProdType
Describes the type of the IED (like REL, REC or RET). Example: REL670
ProductDef
Describes the release number, from the production. Example: 1.2.2.0
ProductVer
Describes the product version. Example: 1.2.3

1 is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the
product

1283
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

2 is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new
hardware added to the product
3 is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware is
either changed or enhanced in the product

IEDMainFunType
Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128
(meaning line protection).
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate

21.12 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI

21.12.1 Functionality
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see
the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought in for
one IED configuration.

21.12.2 Function block

SMBI
^VIN1 ^BI1
^VIN2 ^BI2
^VIN3 ^BI3
^VIN4 ^BI4
^VIN5 ^BI5
^VIN6 ^BI6
^VIN7 ^BI7
^VIN8 ^BI8
^VIN9 ^BI9
^VIN10 ^BI10

IEC05000434-2-en.vsd
IEC05000434 V2 EN

Figure 614: SMBI function block

21.12.3 Signals
Table 1022: SMBI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BI1 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI2 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI3 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
Table continues on next page

1284
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

Name Type Default Description

BI4 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI5 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI6 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI7 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI8 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI9 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI10 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input

Table 1023: SMBI Output signals

Name Type Description
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7
BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8
BI9 BOOLEAN Binary input 9
BI10 BOOLEAN Binary input 10

21.12.4 Operation principle

The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function , see figure 614, receives its
inputs from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT) or
ACT, and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, BI1 to
BI10. The inputs and outputs, as well as the whole block, can be given a user defined
name. These names will be represented in SMT as information which signals shall be
connected between physical IO and SMBI function. The input/output user defined
name will also appear on the respective output/input signal.

21.13 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO

21.13.1 Functionality
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see

1285
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are sent from one
IED configuration.

21.13.2 Function block

SMBO
BO1 ^BO1
BO2 ^BO2
BO3 ^BO3
BO4 ^BO4
BO5 ^BO5
BO6 ^BO6
BO7 ^BO7
BO8 ^BO8
BO9 ^BO9
BO10 ^BO10

IEC05000439-2-en.vsd
IEC05000439 V2 EN

Figure 615: SMBO function block

21.13.3 Signals
Table 1024: SMBO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO2 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO3 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO4 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO5 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO6 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO7 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO8 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO9 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO10 in Signal Matrix Tool

21.13.4 Operation principle

The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function , see figure 615, receives
logical signal from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware)
outputs, via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT) or ACT. The inputs in SMBO are BO1 to
BO10 and they, as well as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The name tags
will appear in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical
IO and the SMBO.

1286
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.14 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI

21.14.1 Functionality
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). See
the Application Manual for information about how milliamp (mA) inputs from
external transducers are physically connected to the MIM board inputs used in an IED.
Via the SMMI, the signals are brought into the IED configuration, for example, to the
input for ambient temperature compensation of the thermal overload function when
there is a need for ambient temperature compensation in the thermal function.

21.14.2 Function block

SMMI
^AI1 ^AI1
^AI2 ^AI2
^AI3 ^AI3
^AI4 ^AI4
^AI5 ^AI5
^AI6 ^AI6

IEC05000440.vsd
IEC05000440 V3 EN

Figure 616: SMMI function block

21.14.3 Signals
Table 1025: SMMI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
AI1 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI2 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI3 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI4 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI5 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI6 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input

Table 1026: SMMI Output signals

Name Type Description
AI1 REAL Analog milliampere input 1
AI2 REAL Analog milliampere input 2
AI3 REAL Analog milliampere input 3
AI4 REAL Analog milliampere input 4
AI5 REAL Analog milliampere input 5
AI6 REAL Analog milliampere input 6

1287
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

21.14.4 Operation principle

The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function, see figure 616, receives its inputs
from the real (hardware) mA inputs (the MIM boards) via the Signal Matrix Tool
(SMT), and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog
outputs, named AI1 to AI6. The inputs, outputs, as well as the whole block, can be
given user-defined names which will be represented in SMT and ACT.

The outputs on SMMI can also be connected to the IEC 61850 generic communication
I/O functions (MVGAPC) for further use of the mA signals elsewhere in a substation
system.

21.15 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI

21.15.1 Functionality
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function
block, analyses the connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and
calculates all relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude, phase angle,
frequency, true RMS value, harmonics, sequence components and so on. This
information is then used by the respective functions connected to this SMAI block in
ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring functions).

21.15.2 Function block

SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC G1AI3P
REVROT G1AI1
^GRP1L1 G1AI2
^GRP1L2 G1AI3
^GRP1L3 G1AI4
^GRP1N G1N

IEC14000027-1-en.vsd
IEC14000027 V1 EN

Figure 617: SMAI1 function block

SMAI2
BLOCK G2AI3P
REVROT G2AI1
^GRP2L1 G2AI2
^GRP2L2 G2AI3
^GRP2L3 G2AI4
^GRP2N G2N

IEC14000028-1-en.vsd
IEC14000028 V1 EN

Figure 618: SMAI2 function block

Figure 618 is an example of SMAI2:n to SMAI12:m in each of the three task time
groups 1, 2 or 3 where:

1288
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

n=2 and m=12 in task group 1

n=14 and m=24 in task group 2
n=26 and m=36 in task group 3

The task time defines the execution repetition rate, and is 3, 8 or 1 ms respectively for
the three task time groups.

21.15.3 Signals
Table 1027: SMAI1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 20.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for
DFT calculation
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2
quantity
GRP1L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3
quantity
GRP1L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1
quantity
GRP1N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral
quantity

Table 1028: SMAI1 Output signals

Name Type Description
SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from
internal DFT reference function
G1AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
G1AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 1
G1AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 2
G1AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3
G1AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 4
G1N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample

Table 1029: SMAI2 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 2
GRP2L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2
quantity
Table continues on next page

1289
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

Name Type Default Description

GRP2L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3
quantity
GRP2L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1
quantity
GRP2N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral
quantity

Table 1030: SMAI2 Output signals

Name Type Description
G2AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
G2AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 1
G2AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 2
G2AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3
G2AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 4
G2N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample

21.15.4 Settings

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default

value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal
frequency DFT reference is then the reference.

1290
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

Table 1031: SMAI1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

Table 1032: SMAI1 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

1291
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

Table 1033: SMAI2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

Table 1034: SMAI2 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

21.15.5 Operation principle

Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog
signals (three phases and one neutral or residual value), either voltage or current, see
figure 617 and figure 618. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the
3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency
derivates etc. 244 values in total). The BLOCK input will force all outputs to value
zero if BLOCK is TRUE (1).

System phase rotation and frequency are defined using the PhaseRotation and
Frequency settings in the primary system values PRIMVAL function. Logic 1 in the
REVROT input to the SMAI function means that the phase rotation is changed relative
to the set PhaseRotation in PRIMVAL.

The output signal AI1 to AI4 are single phase outputs which directly represent the four
inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN, x=1-12. GxN (x = 1-12) is always
calculated residual sum from the first three inputs. A3P is grouped, three-phase
information containing all relevant information about four connected inputs. Note that
all other functions, with a few exceptions, use this output in configuration. Note that

1292
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

the SMAI function will always calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if the
input GRPxN is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few exceptions shall
always be connected to AI3P.

21.15.5.1 Frequency values

The SMAI function includes a functionality based on the level of positive sequence
voltage, MinValFreqMeas, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If
the positive sequence voltage is lower than MinValFreqMeas, the function freezes the
frequency output value for 500 ms and after that the frequency output is set to the
nominal value. A signal is available for the SMAI function to prevent operation due
to non-valid frequency values. MinValFreqMeas is set as % of UBase/3

If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, at least two of the inputs GRPxL1,

GRPxL2 and GRPxL3, where 1x12, must be connected in order to calculate the
positive sequence voltage. Note that phase to phase inputs shall always be connected
as follows: L1-L2 to GRPxL1, L2-L3 to GRPxL2, L3-L1 to GRPxL3. If SMAI setting
ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be
connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage.

If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-
Ph, the user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and
GRPxL3 to the same voltage input as shown in figure 619 to make SMAI calculate a
positive sequence voltage.

SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT SAPTOF
DFTSPFC G1AI3P U3P* TRIP SAPTOF(1)_TRIP
UL1L2 BLOCK START
REVROT G1AI1
PHASEL1 G1AI2 BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
^GRP1L1 G1AI4 FREQ
TRM_40.CH7(U) PHASEL2
G1N
^GRP1L2
PHASEL3
^GRP1L3
NEUTRAL
^GRP1N

EC10000060-3-en.vsdx

IEC10000060 V3 EN

Figure 619: Connection example

The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting

ConnectionType is Ph-N. If only one phase-earth voltage is available,
the same type of connection can be used but the SMAI
ConnectionType setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be
accounted for when setting MinValFreqMeas. If SMAI setting
ConnectionType is Ph-N and the same voltage is connected to all three
SMAI inputs, the positive sequence voltage will be zero and the
frequency functions will not work properly.

1293
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used
for Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF), Underfrequency protection
(SAPTUF) and Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) due
to that all other information except frequency and positive sequence
voltage might be wrongly calculated.

21.16 Global base values GBASVAL

21.16.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Global base values GBASVAL - -

21.16.2 Functionality
Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common
for all applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values
for current, voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have twelve different sets.

This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of
base values. This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a
single point for updating values when necessary.

Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out
of the twelve sets of GBASVAL functions.

21.16.3 Settings

Table 1035: GBASVAL Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Global base voltage
IBase 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Global base current
SBase 1.00 - 200000.00 MVA 0.05 2000.00 Global base apparent power

1294
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.17 Primary system values PRIMVAL

21.17.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Primary system values PRIMVAL - -

21.17.2 Functionality
The rated system frequency and phase rotation direction are set under Main menu/
Configuration/ Power system/ Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600
parameter setting tree.

21.17.3 Settings
Table 1036: PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Frequency 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation Normal=L1L2L3 - - Normal=L1L2L3 System phase rotation
Inverse=L3L2L1

21.18 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM

21.18.1 Functionality
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of
three-phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need
it.

1295
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

21.18.2 Function block

3PHSUM
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
^G1AI3P* AI2
^G2AI3P* AI3
AI4

IEC05000441-3-en.vsdx

IEC05000441 V3 EN

Figure 620: 3PHSUM function block

21.18.3 Signals
Table 1037: 3PHSUM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block
BLKGR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block input for group 1
BLKGR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block input for group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation
G1AI3P GROUP - Group 1 three phase analog input from first SMAI
SIGNAL
G2AI3P GROUP - Group 2 three phase analog input from second
SIGNAL SMAI

Table 1038: 3PHSUM Output signals

Name Type Description
SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from
internal DFT reference function
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of two connected three phase
inputs
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 1 signals from both
SMAI blocks
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 2 signals from both
SMAI blocks
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 3 signals from both
SMAI blocks
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 4 signals from both
SMAI blocks

1296
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.18.4 Settings

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default

value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

Table 1039: 3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
SummationType Group1+Group2 - - Group1+Group2 Summation type
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref

Table 1040: 3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FreqMeasMinVal 5 - 200 % 1 10 Amplitude limit for frequency calculation in
% of UBase

21.18.5 Operation principle

Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal
matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will
reset all the outputs of the function to 0.

21.19 Denial of service DOS

21.19.1 Functionality
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD) are
designed to limit overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic.
The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary
functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that
too heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be
the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.

1297
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

21.19.2 Function blocks

DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC09000749-1-en.vsd
IEC09000749 V1 EN

Figure 621: DOSFRNT function block

DOSLANAB
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC13000308-1-en.vsd
IEC13000308 V1 EN

Figure 622: DOSLANAB function block

DOSLANCD
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC13000309-1-en.vsd
IEC13000309 V1 EN

Figure 623: DOSLANCD function block

21.19.3 Signals
Table 1041: DOSFRNT Output signals
Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

Table 1042: DOSLANAB Output signals

Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

Table 1043: DOSLANCD Output signals

Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

1298
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.19.4 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

21.19.5 Monitored data

Table 1044: DOSFRNT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
State INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent
0-100

Table 1045: DOSLANAB Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DoSStatus INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent
0-100

Table 1046: DOSLANCD Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DoSStatus INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent
0-100

21.19.6 Operation principle

The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD)
measures the IED load from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not
jeopardizing the IEDs control and protection functionality due to high CPU load. The
function has the following outputs:

1299
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK505308-UEN B
Basic IED functions

LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status

WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal
ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication

1300
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

Section 22 IED hardware

22.1 Overview

22.1.1 Variants of case size with local HMI display

IEC04000458-2-en.psd
IEC04000458 V2 EN

Figure 624: 1/2 19 case with local HMI display.

1301
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

IEC05000762-2-en.psd
IEC05000762 V2 EN

Figure 625: 3/4 19 case with local HMI display.

IEC04000460-2-en.psd
IEC04000460 V2 EN

Figure 626: 1/1 19 case with local HMI display.

1302
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

22.1.2 Case from the rear side

Table 1047: Designations for 1/2 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to X51
MIM and X52
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or GTM X312, X313
TRM X401

1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

1303
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Table 1048: Designations for 3/4 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to
MIM X101 and X102
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM X312, X313
TRM X401

1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

1304
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

Table 1049: Designations for 3/4 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to X71 and
MIM X72
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM X312, X313, X322, X323
TRM 1 X401
TRM 2 X411

1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

1305
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Table 1050: Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, X31 and X32 etc. to X161 and
IOM or MIM X162
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or X302
RS485
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM,RS485 or X312, X313
GTM
TRM X401

1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

1306
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

Table 1051: Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slots

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, X31 and X32 etc. to X131 and
IOM or MIM X132
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or X302
RS485
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or X312, X313, X322, X323
GTM
TRM 1 X401
TRM 2 X411

1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

1307
Technical manual
Section 22
IED hardware
22.2 Hardware modules
22.2.1 Overview
Table 1052: Basic modules
Module
Power supply module (PSM)
Numerical module (NUM)
Local Human machine interface (LHMI)
Transformer input module (TRM)
Analog digital conversion module (ADM)
Table 1053: Application specific modules
Module
Binary input module (BIM)
Binary output module (BOM)
Binary I/O module (IOM)
Line data communication modules (LDCM), short
range, medium range ,long range,X21
Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103
communication modules (SLM)
Optical ethernet module (OEM)
mA input module (MIM)
GPS time synchronization module (GSM)
Static output module (SOM)
IRIG-B Time synchronization module (IRIG-B)
1308
1MRK505308-UEN B
Description
Including a regulated DC/DC converter that
supplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.
An internal fail alarm output is available.
Module for overall application control. All
information is processed or passed through this
module, such as configuration, settings and
communication.
The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push
button keyboard and an ethernet connector used to
connect a PC to the IED.
Transformer module that galvanically separates
the internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It
has 12 analog inputs.
Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.
Description
Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs
Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole
command outputs including supervision function
Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10
outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs.
Modules used for digital communication to remote
terminal.
Used for SPA/LON/IEC 608705103
communication
PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication.
Analog input module with 6 independent,
galvanically separated channels.
Used to provide the IED with GPS time
synchronization.
Module with 6 fast static outputs and 6 change over
output relays.
Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling both
pulse-width modulated signals and amplitude
modulated signals and one is used for optical input
type ST for PPS time synchronization.
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

22.2.2 Numeric processing module (NUM)

22.2.2.1 Introduction

The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protection
functions and logic.

For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high
speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM is
the compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and
receives interrupts.

22.2.2.2 Functionality

The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, compact-PCI CPU

module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is via two
compact PCI connectors and an euro connector.

The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP slots
onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted.

To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one
internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI
accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.

The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flash
file system.

The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup of
the real time clock.

No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power
dissipation.

1309
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

22.2.2.3 Block diagram

Compact
Flash Logic

PMC
connector
PC-MIP

connector
UBM
Memory Ethernet

North
bridge

Backplane
PCI-PCI-

connector
bridge

CPU

en04000473.vsd
IEC04000473 V1 EN

Figure 627: Numeric processing module block diagram

22.2.3 Power supply module (PSM)

22.2.3.1 Introduction

The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full
isolation between the IED and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is
available.

22.2.3.2 Design

There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC
input voltage ranges see table 1054. The power supply module contains a built-in, self-

1310
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

regulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the
external battery system.

Connection diagram

IEC08000476 V2 EN

Figure 628: PSM Connection diagram.

22.2.3.3 Technical data

Table 1054: PSM - Power supply module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Auxiliary DC voltage, EL (input) EL = (24-60) V EL 20%
EL = (90-250) V EL 20%
Power consumption 50 W typically -
Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 10 A during 0.1 s -

22.2.4 Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)

Refer to section "Local HMI" for information.

22.2.5 Transformer input module (TRM)

22.2.5.1 Introduction

The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the secondary
currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The module has
twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.

Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.

1311
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

22.2.5.2 Design

The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of the
module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers.

Basic versions:

6 current channels and 6 voltage channels

7 current channels and 5 voltage channels
9 current channels and 3 voltage channels
12 current channels
6 current channels

The rated values and channel type, measurement or protection, of the current inputs
are selected at order.

Transformer input module for measuring should not be used with

current transformers intended for protection purposes, due to
limitations in overload characteristics.

The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM.

For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for
analog inputs SMAI".

1312
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

IEC08000479 V2 EN

Figure 629: TRM connection diagram

22.2.5.3 Technical data

Table 1055: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
modules
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Current Ir = 1 or 5 A (0.2-40) Ir

Operative range (0-100) x Ir

Permissive overload 4 Ir cont.

100 Ir for 1 s *)

Burden < 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A

< 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

Ac voltage Ur = 110 V 0.5288 V

Operative range (0340) V

Permissive overload 420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency fr = 50/60 Hz 5%
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

1313
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Table 1056: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer
modules
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Current Ir = 1 or 5 A (0-1.8) Irat Ir = 1 A
(0-1.6) Irat Ir = 5 A

Permissive overload 1.1 Ir cont.

1.8 Ir for 30 min at Ir = 1 A
1.6 Ir for 30 min at Ir = 5 A

Burden < 350 mVA at Ir = 5 A

< 200 mVA at Ir = 1 A

Ac voltage Ur = 110 V 0.5288 V

Operative range (0340) V

Permissive overload 420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency fr = 50/60 Hz 5%

22.2.6 Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization

(ADM)

22.2.6.1 Introduction

The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC slot.
The PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards according
to table 1057. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board.
Table 1057: PC-MIP cards and PMC cards
PC-MIP cards PMC cards
SR-LDCM SLM
LR-LDCM OEM 1 ch
MR-LDCM OEM 2 ch
X21-LDCM
IRIG-B
RS485

22.2.6.2 Design

The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from the
transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic
voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate
A\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is
obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter.

1314
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system

frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz and
are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency
and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

Channel 1
AD1 Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
AD2
Channel 5
1.2v Channel 6
AD3 Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
AD4 Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12

PMC

level shift

PC-MIP
2.5v

PCI to PCI

PC-MIP

en05000474.vsd
IEC05000474 V1 EN

Figure 630: The ADM layout

1315
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

22.2.7 Binary input module (BIM)

22.2.7.1 Introduction

The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two
versions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs
to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable
and can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can also
be included in the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enables
extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all associated
electrical circuits.

22.2.7.2 Design

The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level
of the binary input is selected at order.

For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBI".

A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a

hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it
possible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.

Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 631 The figure shows the typical operating
characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage levels.

The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand

disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required. Inputs
are debounced by software.

I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and
stored by the event recorder if present.

1316
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

[V]

300

176
144
88
72
38
32
19
17

24/30V 48/60V 110/125V 220/250V

xx06000391-2-en.vsd
IEC06000391 V2 EN

Figure 631: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

Operation

Operation uncertain

No operation
IEC99000517-ABC V1 EN

This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM).

The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact
connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is
shown in figure 632 and 633.

1317
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

[mA]
50

55 [ms]

en07000104-3.vsd
IEC07000104 V3 EN

Figure 632: Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of
BIM.

[mA]
50

5.5 [ms]

en07000105-1.vsd
IEC07000105 V2 EN

Figure 633: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities.

1318
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

IEC99000503 V3 EN

Figure 634: Connection diagram

22.2.7.3 Signals
Table 1058: BIM Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input module status
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1 value
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2 value
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3 value
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4 value
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5 value
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6 value
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7 value
Table continues on next page

1319
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Name Type Description

BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8 value
BI9 BOOLEAN Binary input 9 value
BI10 BOOLEAN Binary input 10 value
BI11 BOOLEAN Binary input 11 value
BI12 BOOLEAN Binary input 12 value
BI13 BOOLEAN Binary input 13 value
BI14 BOOLEAN Binary input 14 value
BI15 BOOLEAN Binary input 15 value
BI16 BOOLEAN Binary input 16 value
OSCWRN BOOLEAN Oscillation warning

22.2.7.4 Settings
Table 1059: BIM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

22.2.7.5 Monitored data

Table 1060: BIM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary input module
1=Error status

22.2.7.6 Technical data

Table 1061: BIM - Binary input module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL 20%
48/60 V RL 20%
110/125 V RL 20%
220/250 V RL 20%
Power consumption
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input
Table continues on next page

1320
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 140 Hz
Release settable 130 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 120 ms

Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated

simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range.

Table 1062: BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL 20%
48/60 V RL 20%
110/125 V RL 20%
220/250 V RL 20%
Power consumption
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 140 Hz
Release settable 130 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms

Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated

simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range.

22.2.8 Binary output modules (BOM)

22.2.8.1 Introduction

The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output
or any signaling purpose.

22.2.8.2 Design

The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each pair
of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 635. This
should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the
back of the IED.

1321
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker
trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker
auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is
required.

For configuration of the output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary
outputs SMBO".

Output module

xx00000299.vsd

IEC00000299 V1 EN

Figure 635: Relay pair example

1 Output connection from relay 1

2 Output signal power source connection
3 Output connection from relay 2

1322
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

IEC99000505 V3 EN

Figure 636: Connection diagram

22.2.8.3 Signals
Table 1063: BOM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 8
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 9
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 10
BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 11
BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 12
Table continues on next page

1323
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Name Type Default Description

BO13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 13
BO14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 14
BO15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 15
BO16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 16
BO17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 17
BO18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 18
BO19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 19
BO20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 20
BO21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 21
BO22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 22
BO23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 23
BO24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 24

Table 1064: BOM Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary output part of IOM module status

22.2.8.4 Settings
Table 1065: BOM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

22.2.8.5 Monitored data

Table 1066: BOM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary output part of IOM
1=Error module status
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced
BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 2 value
0=0
BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 force
1=Forced
Table continues on next page

1324
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO2 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 3 value
0=0
BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 force
1=Forced
BO3 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 4 value
0=0
BO4FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 force
1=Forced
BO4 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 5 value
0=0
BO5FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 force
1=Forced
BO5 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 6 value
0=0
BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 force
1=Forced
BO6 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 7 value
0=0
BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 force
1=Forced
BO7 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 8 value
0=0
BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 force
1=Forced
BO8 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 9 value
0=0
BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 force
1=Forced
Table continues on next page

1325
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO9 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 10 value
0=0
BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 force
1=Forced
BO10 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - nary output 11 value
0=0
BO11FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 force
1=Forced
BO11 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 12 value
0=0
BO12FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 force
1=Forced
BO12 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO13VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 13 value
0=0
BO13FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 13 force
1=Forced
BO13 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 13 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO14VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 14 value
0=0
BO14FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 14 force
1=Forced
BO14 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 14 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO15VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 15 value
0=0
BO15FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 15 force
1=Forced
BO15 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 15 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO16VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 16 value
0=0
BO16FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 16 force
1=Forced
Table continues on next page

1326
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO16 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 16 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO17VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 17 value
0=0
B017FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 17 force
1=Forced
BO17 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 17 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO18VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 18 value
0=0
BO18FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 18 force
1=Forced
BO18 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 18 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO19VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 19 value
0=0
BO19FORCE BOOLEAN 1=Forced - Binary output 19 force
0=Normal
BO19 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 19 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO20VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 20 value
0=0
BO20FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 20 force
1=Forced
BO20 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 20 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO21VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 21 value
0=0
BO21FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 21 force
1=Forced
BO21 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 21 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO22VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 22 value
0=0
BO22FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 22 force
1=Forced
BO22 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 22 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO23VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 23 value
0=0
BO23FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 23 force
1=Forced
Table continues on next page

1327
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO23 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 23 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO24VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 24 value
0=0
BO24FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - nary output 24 force
1=Forced
BO24 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 24 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked

22.2.8.6 Technical data

Table 1067: BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays
Binary outputs 24
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously. After 6 ms an

additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for the 96
outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated during 1
s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current
consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely
affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM should
be activated continuously due to power dissipation.

1328
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

22.2.9 Static binary output module (SOM)

22.2.9.1 Introduction

The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over output
relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.

22.2.9.2 Design

The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6
electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts.

The SOM consists mainly of:

An MCU
A CAN-driver
6 static relays outputs
6 electromechanical relay outputs
A DC/DC converter
Connectors interfacing
CAN-bus to backplane CBM
IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)

The following parts are supervised:

Interruption in relay coil

Short circuit of relay coil
Driver failure

IEC09000974-1-en.vsd

IEC09000974 V1 EN

Figure 637: SOM Static output principle

1329
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

IEC09000975 V1 EN

Figure 638: Connection diagram of the static output module

22.2.9.3 Signals
Table 1068: SOM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 7
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 8
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 9
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 10
BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 11
BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 12

Table 1069: SOM Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Static binary output module status

1330
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

22.2.9.4 Settings
Table 1070: SOM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

22.2.9.5 Monitored data

Table 1071: SOM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Static binary output
1=Error module status
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced
BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 2 value
0=0
BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 force
1=Forced
BO2 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 3 value
0=0
BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 force
1=Forced
BO3 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 4 value
0=0
BO4FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 force
1=Forced
BO4 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 5 value
0=0
BO5FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 force
1=Forced
BO5 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Table continues on next page

1331
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 6 value
0=0
BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 force
1=Forced
BO6 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 7 value
0=0
BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 force
1=Forced
BO7 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 8 value
0=0
BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 force
1=Forced
BO8 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 9 value
0=0
BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 force
1=Forced
BO9 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 10 value
0=0
BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 force
1=Forced
BO10 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 11 value
0=0
BO11FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 force
1=Forced
BO11 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 12 value
0=0
BO12FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 force
1=Forced
BO12 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked

1332
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

22.2.9.6 Technical data

Table 1072: SOM - Static Output Module (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Static binary outputs
Function of quantity Static binary output trip
Rated voltage 48-60 VDC 110-250 VDC
Number of outputs 6 6
Impedance open state ~300 k ~810 k
Test voltage across open contact, 1 No galvanic separation No galvanic separation
min
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 5A 5A
1.0 s 10 A 10 A
Making capacity at capacitive load
with the maximum capacitance of
0.2 F :
0.2 s 30 A 30 A
1.0 s 10 A 10 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A
40 ms
60 V/0.75 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Operating time < 1 ms < 1 ms

Table 1073: SOM - Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2):
Electromechanical relay outputs
Function of quantity Trip and signal relays
Max system voltage 250 V AC/DC
Number of outputs 6
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 8A
1.0 s 10 A
Making capacity at capacitive load with the
maximum capacitance of 0.2 F:
0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 40 ms 48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

1333
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with

influencing factors within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24
outputs may be activated. The activation time for the 96 outputs must
not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated during 1 s. Continued
activation is possible with respect to current consumption but after 5
minutes the temperature rise will adversely affect the hardware life.
Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated
continuously due to power dissipation.

22.2.10 Binary input/output module (IOM)

22.2.10.1 Introduction

The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels are
needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signaling
purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications where
short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for
required binary input information.

22.2.10.2 Design

The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with
unprotected contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.

Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase the
disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved with
a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure 632.
Inputs are debounced by software.

Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 631.

The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering.

I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and
stored by the event recorder if present.

The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays.
One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are
connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the other
group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, see
figure 639.

The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay is
connected in parallel to the standard output relay.

For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to sections "Signal matrix for
binary inputs SMBI" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO".

1334
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.

IEC1MRK002801-AA11-UTAN-RAM V2 EN

Figure 639: Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds to
rear position X31, X41, and so on, and output contacts named XB to
rear position X32, X42, and so on

The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for
example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause
excessive wear of the contacts.

The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the
binary input/output module.

1335
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

xx04000069.vsd

IEC04000069 V1 EN

Figure 640: IOM with MOV protection, relay example

22.2.10.3 Signals
Table 1074: IOMIN Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input part of IOM module status
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1 value
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2 value
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3 value
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4 value
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5 value
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6 value
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7 value
BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8 value
OSCWRN BOOLEAN Oscillation warning

Table 1075: IOMOUT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 8
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 9
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 10
BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 11
BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 12

1336
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

22.2.10.4 Settings
Table 1076: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in operation
On (On) or not (Off)
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

22.2.10.5 Monitored data

Table 1077: IOMIN Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary input part of IOM
1=Error module status

Table 1078: IOMOUT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced
BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 2 value
0=0
BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 force
1=Forced
BO2 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 3 value
0=0
BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 force
1=Forced
BO3 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 4 value
0=0
BO4FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 force
1=Forced
BO4 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Table continues on next page

1337
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO5VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 5 value
0=0
BO5FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 force
1=Forced
BO5 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 6 value
0=0
BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 force
1=Forced
BO6 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 7 value
0=0
BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 force
1=Forced
BO7 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 8 value
0=0
BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 force
1=Forced
BO8 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 9 value
0=0
BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 force
1=Forced
BO9 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 10 value
0=0
BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 force
1=Forced
BO10 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 11 value
0=0
BO11FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 force
1=Forced
BO11 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Table continues on next page

1338
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO12VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 12 value
0=0
BO12FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 force
1=Forced
BO12 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked

22.2.10.6 Technical data

Table 1079: IOM - Binary input/output module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 8 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL 20%
48/60 V RL 20%
110/125 V RL 20%
220/250 V RL 20%
Power consumption -
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1-40 Hz
Release settable 1-30 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms

Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated

simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range.

Table 1080: IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Binary outputs 10 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1000 V rms 800 V DC
1 min
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, 12 A 12 A
continuous
Table continues on next page

1339
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Making capacity at inductive load
with L/R>10 ms

0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load
220250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 4860 V/0.2 A
2430 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos > 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
< 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously. After 6 ms an

additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for the 96
outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated during 1
s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current
consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely
affect the hardware life.Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM should
be activated continuously due to power dissipation.

Table 1081: IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA - contact data (reference standard: IEC
61810-2)

Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel
reed relay)
Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Test voltage across open contact, 250 V rms 250 V rms
1 min
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, 12 A 12 A
continuous
Making capacity at inductive
loadwith L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load
220250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 4860 V/0.2 A
2430 V/0.1 A
Table continues on next page

1340
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

Breaking capacity for AC, cos 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A

j>0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
< 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously. After 6 ms an

additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for the 96
outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated during 1
s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current
consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely
affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM should
be activated continuously due to power dissipation.

22.2.11 mA input module (MIM)

22.2.11.1 Introduction

The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the 20 to +20
mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure transducers. The
module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.

22.2.11.2 Design

The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated
protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input
making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.

For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMMI".

The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D converter
has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately
The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory
on the module.

The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical
calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range.

1341
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

IEC99000504 V2 EN

Figure 641: MIM connection diagram

22.2.11.3 Signals
Table 1082: MIM Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Milliampere input module status
CH1 REAL Analog input 1
CH2 REAL Analog input 2
CH3 REAL Analog input 3
Table continues on next page

1342
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

Name Type Description

CH4 REAL Analog input 4
CH5 REAL Analog input 5
CH6 REAL Analog input 6

22.2.11.4 Settings
Table 1083: MIM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
MaxReportT 0 - 3600 s 1 1 Maximum time between reports
EnDeadBandCh1 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 1
DeadBandCh1 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 1
IMinCh1 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 1
IMaxCh1 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 1
ValueMinCh1 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh1
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh1 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh1
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh2 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 2
DeadBandCh2 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 2
IMinCh2 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 2
IMaxCh2 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 2
ValueMinCh2 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh2
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh2 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh2
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh3 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 3
DeadBandCh3 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 3
IMinCh3 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 3
IMaxCh3 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 3
ValueMinCh3 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh3
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh3 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh3
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh4 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 4
DeadBandCh4 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 4
IMinCh4 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 4
IMaxCh4 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 4
Table continues on next page

1343
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ValueMinCh4 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh4
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh4 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh4
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh5 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 5
DeadBandCh5 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 5
IMinCh5 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 5
IMaxCh5 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 5
ValueMinCh5 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh5
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh5 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh5
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh6 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 6
DeadBandCh6 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 6
IMinCh6 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 6
IMaxCh6 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 6
ValueMinCh6 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh6
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh6 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh6
- 10000000000.000

22.2.11.5 Monitored data

Table 1084: MIM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Milliampere input module
1=Error status
CH1 REAL - - Analog input 1
CH2 REAL - - Analog input 2
CH3 REAL - - Analog input 3
CH4 REAL - - Analog input 4
CH5 REAL - - Analog input 5
CH6 REAL - - Analog input 6
CH1 REAL - A Service value analog
input 1
CH2 REAL - A Service value analog
input 2
CH3 REAL - A Service value analog
input 3
Table continues on next page

1344
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

CH4 REAL - A Service value analog
input 4
CH5 REAL - A Service value analog
input 5
CH6 REAL - A Service value analog
input 6

22.2.11.6 Technical data

Table 1085: MIM - mA input module
Quantity: Rated value: Nominal range:
Input resistance Rin = 194 Ohm -

Input range 5, 10, 20mA -

0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA
Power consumption -
each mA-board 2W
each mA input 0.1 W

22.2.12 Serial and LON communication module (SLM)

22.2.12.1 Introduction

The serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for SPA, IEC
60870-5-103, DNP3 and LON communication. The module has two optical
communication ports for plastic/plastic, plastic/glass or glass/glass. One port is used
for serial communication (SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 port) and one port is
dedicated for LON communication.

22.2.12.2 Design

The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module. Three variants of the SLM are available with different combinations of
optical fiber connectors, see figure 642. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-in
type and the glass fiber connectors are of ST type.

1345
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

I
EC0500760=1=en=Or
igi
nal
.psd
IEC05000760 V2 EN

Figure 642: The SLM variants, component side view

1 Receiver, LON
2 Transmitter, LON
3 Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
4 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
A Snap in connector for plastic fiber
B ST connector for glass fiber

Observe that when the SLM connectors are viewed from the rear side
of the IED, contact 4 above is in the uppermost position and contact 1
in the lowest position.

22.2.12.3 Technical data

Table 1086: SLM LON port
Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST
Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000 ft typically *)
Plastic fiber: 7 dB (10m/35ft typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation

1346
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

Table 1087: SLM SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port

Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST
Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000ft m typically *)
Plastic fiber: 7 dB (25m/80ft m typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation

22.2.13 Galvanic RS485 communication module

22.2.13.1 Introduction

The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0 and IEC
60870-5-103 communication. The module has one RS485 communication port. The
RS485 is a balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire
connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a
multidrop communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant requires
however a control of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for RX
and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the rest are slaves. No
special control signal is needed in this case.

22.2.13.2 Design

The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module.

RS485 connector pinouts

The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 643) are presented in
table 1088:
Table 1088: The arrangement for the pins

Pin Name 2-wire Name 4-wire Description

1 RS485+ TX+ Receive/transmit high or transmit high
2 RS485 TX Receive/transmit
3 Term T-Term Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver
in 2wir case) (connect to TX+)
4 N.A. R-Term Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX+)
5 N.A. RX Receive low
6 N.A. RX+ Receive high

1347
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Angle
bracket

Screw
1
terminal
X3 2
1
2 RS485
3 PWB
Screw
4
terminal
5
X1
6

Backplane

IEC06000517 V1 EN

Figure 643: RS485 connector

2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5

Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3

Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6

Soft ground connector pinouts

A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be
used in two combinations like:

Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part .

Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a
MOV

22.2.13.3 Technical data

Table 1089: Galvanic RS485 communication module
Quantity Range or value
Communication speed 240019200 bauds
External connectors RS-485 6-pole connector
Soft ground 2-pole connector

1348
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

22.2.14 Optical ethernet module (OEM)

22.2.14.1 Introduction

The optical fast-ethernet module is used for fast and interference-free communication
of synchrophasor data over IEEE C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 protocols. It is also used
to connect an IED to the communication buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC
61850-8-1 protocol (OEM rear port A, B). The process bus use the IEC 61850-9-2LE
protocol (OEM rear port C, D). The module has one or two optical ports with ST
connectors.

22.2.14.2 Functionality

The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems according
to IEC 6185081 have been implemented.

22.2.14.3 Design

The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine card
on the ADM. The OEM is a 100BASE-FXmodule and available as a single channel or
double channel unit.

IEC05000472=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC05000472 V3 EN

Figure 644: OEM layout, standard PMC format 2 channels

1: Transmitter
2: Receiver

1349
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

22.2.14.4 Technical data

Table 1090: OEM - Optical ethernet module
Quantity Rated value
Number of channels 1 or 2 (port A, B for IEC 61850-8-1 / IEEE C37.118
and port C, D for IEC 61850-9-2LE / IEEE C37.118)
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber 62.5/125 mm multimode fibre
Wave length 1300 nm
Optical connector Type ST
Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s

22.2.15 Line data communication module (LDCM)

22.2.15.1 Introduction

The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between
the IEDs situated at distances <110 km or from the IED to optical to electrical
converter with G.703 interface located on a distances <3 km away. The LDCM
module sends and rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/
ANSI standard format is used.

The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module
has one optical port with ST connectors see figure 645.

Line data communication module LDCM

Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED
communicates.

Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm
single mode) and Short range (850 nm multi mode) are available.

Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes.

Never look into the laser beam.

22.2.15.2 Design

The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be
mounted on:

the ADM
the NUM

1350
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

ST

IO-connector
ST

IEC07000087=1=en=Original.vsd

IEC07000087 V2 EN

Figure 645: The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI
connectors and one I/O ST type connector

C
IEC06000393=1=en=Original.vsd

IEC06000393 V2 EN

Figure 646: The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width
format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector

22.2.15.3 Technical data

1351
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Table 1091: Line data communication module

Characteristic Range or value
Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)
Type of fiber Graded-index Singlemode 9/125 Singlemode 9/125 m
multimode m
62.5/125 m
Peak Emission
Wave length 820 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm
Nominal 865 nm 1330 nm 1580 nm
Maximum 792 nm 1290 nm 1520 nm
Minimum
Optical budget 13 dB (typical 22 dB (typical 26 dB (typical distance 110 km/68
Graded-index distance about 3 distance 80 km/50 mile *)
multimode 62.5/125 km/2 mile *) mile *)
mm, 9 dB (typical
distance about 2
km/1 mile *)
Graded-index
multimode 50/125
mm

Optical connector Type ST Type FC/PC Type FC/PC

Protocol C37.94 C37.94 C37.94 implementation **)
implementation **)
Data transmission Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous
Transmission rate / 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
Data rate
Clock source Internal or derived Internal or derived Internal or derived from received
from received from received signal signal
signal
*) depending on optical budget calculation
**) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as
C37.94

22.2.16 Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)

22.2.16.1 Introduction

The galvanic X.21 line data communication module is used for connection to
telecommunication equipment, for example leased telephone lines. The module
supports 64 kbit/s data communication between IEDs.

Examples of applications:

Line differential protection

Binary signal transfer

1352
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

22.2.16.2 Design

The galvanic X.21 line data communication module uses a ABB specific PC*MIP
Type II format.

C
en07000196.vsd
IEC07000196 V1 EN

Figure 647: Overview of the X.21 LDCM module

1 4

1 8

9 15

3 2
en07000239.wmf
IEC07000239 V1 EN

Figure 648: The X.21 LDCM module external connectors

1. Earth selection connector for IO, screw terminals, 2-pole

2. Earth pin
3. Soft earth pin, see figure 649
4. X.21 Micro D-sub 15 pole male connector according to the V11 (X:27) balanced
version

1353
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

I/O

100kW 100nF

Soft ground

en07000242.vsd
IEC07000242 V1 EN

Figure 649: Schematic view of soft earth

Earthing

Three different kinds of earthing principles can be set (used for fault tracing):
1. Direct earth - The normal earthing is direct earth, connect terminal 2 directly to
the chassis.
2. No earth - Leave the connector without any connection.
3. Soft earth - Connect soft earth pin (3), see figure 648

X.21 connector
Table 1092: Pinout for the X.21 communication connector

Pin number Signal

1 Shield (earth)
2 TXD A
3 Control A
4 RXD A
6 Signal timing A
8 Earth
9 TXD B
10 Control B
11 RXD B
13 Signal timing B
5,7,12,14,15 Not used

22.2.16.3 Functionality

The data format is HDLC. The speed for the transmission of the messages used is 64
kbit/s.

1354
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

A maximum of 100 meter of cable is allowed to ensure the quality of the data
(deviation from X.21 standard cable length).

Synchronization

The X.21 LDCM works like a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and is normally
expecting synchronization from the DCE (Data Circuit Equipment). The transmission
is normally synchronized to the Signal Element Timing signal when a device is a DTE.
When the signal is high it will read the data at the receiver and when the signal is low
it will write data to the transmitter. This behaviour can be inverted in the control
register.

Normally an external multiplexer is used and it should act like the master.

When two X.21 LDCM is directly communicating with each other one must be set as
a master generating the synchronization for the other (the slave). The DTE Signal
Element Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock.

The Byte Timing signal is not used in ABB devices.

22.2.16.4 Technical data

Table 1093: Galvanic X.21 line data communication module (X.21-LDCM)
Quantity Range or value
Connector, X.21 Micro D-sub, 15-pole male, 1.27 mm (0.050") pitch
Connector, ground selection 2 pole screw terminal
Standard CCITT X21
Communication speed 64 kbit/s
Insulation 1 kV
Maximum cable length 100 m

22.2.17 GPS time synchronization module (GTM)

22.2.17.1 Introduction

This module includes a GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has one
SMA contact for connection to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPS ST-
connector output.

22.2.17.2 Design

The GTM is a PCMIP-format card and is placed only on one of the ADM slots. The
antenna input connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to
eliminate the risk of electromagnetic interference.

1355
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the PCI-bus. PPS time data
is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1s accuracy at
sampling level. An optical transmitter for PPS output is available for time
synchronization of another relay with an optical PPS input. The PPS output connector
is of ST-type for multimode fibre and could be used up to 1 km.

22.2.17.3 Monitored data

Table 1094: SYNCHGPS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
NoOfSatellites INTEGER - - Number of GPS signals
from satellites

22.2.17.4 Technical data

Table 1095: GPS time synchronization module (GTM)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Receiver 1s relative UTC
Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new <30 minutes
position or after power loss longer than 1 month
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss longer <15 minutes
than 48 hours
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss shorter <5 minutes
than 48 hours

22.2.18 GPS antenna

22.2.18.1 Introduction

In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna
with applicable cable must be used.

22.2.18.2 Design

The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or on
an antenna mast. See figure 650

1356
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

1 6

4 7

xx04000155.vsd
IEC04000155 V2 EN

Figure 650: Antenna with console

where:
1 GPS antenna
2 TNC connector
3 Console, 78x150 mm
4 Mounting holes 5.5 mm
5 Tab for securing of antenna cable
6 Vertical mounting position
7 Horizontal mounting position

Antenna cable
Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a male
SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GTM. Choose cable type
and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.

Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to the
antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna cable
with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna. When
the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the receiver.
The IED must be switched off when the antenna cable is connected.

1357
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

22.2.18.3 Technical data

Table 1096: GPS Antenna and cable
Function Value
Max antenna cable attenuation 26 db @ 1.6 GHz
Antenna cable impedance 50 ohm
Lightning protection Must be provided externally
Antenna cable connector SMA in receiver end
TNC in antenna end
Accuracy +/-1s

22.2.19 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B

22.2.19.1 Introduction

The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of the
IED from a station clock.

The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input shall be used for synchronizing when IEC
61850-9-2LE is used.

Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X IRIG-B support.

22.2.19.2 Design

The IRIG-B module has two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle both
a pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude
modulated signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input type
ST for optical pulse-width modulated signal (IRIG-B 00X).

1358
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

ST

Y2

A1
T

IEC06000304=1=en=Original.ai
IEC06000304 V2 EN

Figure 651: IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for optical IRIG-B
00X 820 nm multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC
connector for IRIG-B signal input

22.2.19.3 Settings
Table 1097: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchType BNC - - Opto Type of synchronization
Opto
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ

22.2.19.4 Technical data

Table 1098: IRIG-B
Quantity Rated value
Number of channels IRIG-B 1
Number of optical channels 1
Electrical connector:
Electrical connector IRIG-B BNC
Pulse-width modulated 5 Vpp
Amplitude modulated
low level 1-3 Vpp
high level 3 x low level, max 9 Vpp
Table continues on next page

1359
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Quantity Rated value

Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x
Accuracy +/-10s for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100s for IRIG-B 12x
Input impedance 100 k ohm
Optical connector:
Optical connector IRIG-B Type ST
Type of fibre 62.5/125 m multimode fibre
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x
Accuracy +/- 1s

22.3 Dimensions

22.3.1 Case without rear cover

A
D

B C

IEC08000164-2-en.vsd
IEC08000164 V2 EN

Figure 652: Case without rear cover

1360
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

K
F

G
H J

xx08000166.vsd

IEC08000166 V1 EN

Figure 653: Case without rear cover with 19 rack mounting kit

Case size (mm) A B C D E F G H J K

6U, 1/2 x 19 265.9 223.7 201.1 252.9 205.7 190.5 203.7 465.1 187.6 482.6
6U, 3/4 x 19 265.9 336.0 201.1 252.9 318.0 190.5 316.0 465.1 187.6 482.6
6U, 1/1 x 19 265.9 448.3 201.1 252.9 430.3 190.5 428.3 465.1 187.6 482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit

1361
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

22.3.2 Flush mounting dimensions

A C
B

E
D

IEC08000162-2-en.vsd
IEC08000162 V2 EN

Figure 654: Flush mounting

Cut-out dimensions (mm)

Case size
Tolerance A B C D
+/-1 +/-1
6U, 1/2 x 19" 210.1 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
6U, 3/4 x 19" 322.4 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
6U, 1/1 x 19" 434.7 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover

1362
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

22.3.3 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions

IEC06000182-2-en.vsd
IEC06000182 V2 EN

Figure 655: A 1/2 x 19 size IED side-by-side with RHGS6

G
D
B
E

F
C
xx05000505.vsd

IEC05000505 V1 EN

Figure 656: Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting

Case size (mm) A B C D E F G

Tolerance 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
6U, 1/2 x 19 214.0 259.3 240.4 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam
6U, 3/4 x 19 326.4 259.3 352.8 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam
6U, 1/1 x 19 438.7 259.3 465.1 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam

1363
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

22.3.4 Wall mounting dimensions

IEC04000471-2-en.vsd
IEC04000471 V2 EN

Figure 657: Wall mounting

Case size (mm) A B C D E

6U, 1/2 x 19 292.0 267.1 272.8 390.0 243.0
6U, 3/4 x 19 404.3 379.4 272.8 390.0 243.0
6U, 1/1 x 19 516.0 491.1 272.8 390.0 243.0

22.3.5 External resistor unit for high impedance differential

protection

WARNING! - USE EXTREME CAUTION!Dangerously high

voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate
with resistors. Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object
protected with this equipment is de-energized. If required by national
law/standard enclose the plate with resistors with a protective cover or
in a separate box!

1364
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

[1.48]
[6.97]

[4.02]
[0.33] [18.31] [0.79] [7.68]
[18.98]

Dimension
mm [inches] xx06000232.eps

IEC06000232 V2 EN

Figure 658: Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit

[1.50]
[10.47]

[7.50]

[0.33] [18.31] [0.79] [7.68]

[18.98]

en06000234.eps
[inches]

IEC06000234 V2 EN

Figure 659: Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit

1365
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

22.4 Mounting alternatives

22.4.1 Flush mounting

22.4.1.1 Overview

The flush mounting kit can be used for case sizes:

1/2 x 19
3/4 x 19
1/1 x 19
1/4 x 19 (RHGS6 6U)

Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class IP54
protection.

Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when

IP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when
mounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.

To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealing

must be ordered when ordering the IED.

1366
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

22.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting

IEC08000161-2-en.vsd
IEC08000161 V2 EN

Figure 660: Flush mounting details.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54 class. The sealing strip is factory - -
mounted between the case and front plate.
2 Fastener 4 -
3 Groove - -
4 Screw, self tapping 4 2.9x9.5 mm
5 Joining point of sealing strip - -
6 Panel - -

1367
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

22.4.2 19 panel rack mounting

22.4.2.1 Overview

All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using the for each size
suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles, fastening screws and
washers for the angles.

The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19 or
3/4 x 19 either to the left or right side of the cubicle.

Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by-
side mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be
selected so that the total size equals 19.

Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the
plates and the angles on the IED. Screws with wrong dimension may
damage the PCBs inside the IED.

1368
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

22.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting

1a

1a

IEC08000160-3-en.vsdx

IEC08000160 V3 EN

Figure 661: 19 panel rack mounting details

The required torque for the screws is 3.5 Nm.

Pos Description Quantity Type

1a Mounting angles, which can be mounted, either to the 2 -
left or right side of the case.
2 Screw 8 M4x6
3 Washer 8 M4x6

1369
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

22.4.3 Wall mounting

22.4.3.1 Overview

All case sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19,1/1 x 19, can be wall mounted. It is also possible
to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.

Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the
plates and the angles on the IED. Screws with wrong dimension may
damage the PCBs inside the IED.

If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall
mounting is therefore not recommended for any communication
modules with fiber connection.

22.4.3.2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting

2
3
1 4

IEC130 00266-1-en.vsd

IEC13000266 V1 EN

Figure 662: Wall mounting details.

1370
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Bushing 4 -
2 Screw 8 M4x10
3 Screw 4 M6x12 or
corresponding
4 Mounting bar 2 -
5 Screw 6 M5x8
6 Side plate 2 -

22.4.3.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED

The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover recommended to be used with
this type of mounting. See figure 663.

To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mm is required on the unhinged
side.

3
1

80 mm 2

IEC06000135-2-en.vsd
IEC06000135 V3 EN

Figure 663: How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.

PosNo Description Type

1 Screw M4x10
2 Screw M5x8
3 Rear protection cover (Ordered separately)

1371
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

22.4.4 Side-by-side 19 rack mounting

22.4.4.1 Overview

IED case size 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 and RHGS cases can be mounted side-by-side up
to a maximum size of 19. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side mounting
kit together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has
to be ordered separately.

Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the
plates and the angles on the IED. Screws with wrong dimension may
damage the PCBs inside the IED.

22.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting

IEC04000456-3-en.vsd

IEC04000456 V3 EN

Figure 664: Side-by-side rack mounting details.

The required torque for the screws is 3.5 Nm.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -
5 Washer 16 M4x6

1372
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

22.4.4.3 IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case

An 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12 depending

on IED size) case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type
RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of,
for example, a DC-switch or two trip relays.

1 2 1 2

1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5

6 6 6 6

7 7 7 7

8 8 8 8

IEC06000180-2-en.vsd
IEC06000180 V2 EN

Figure 665: IED in the 670 series (1/2 x 19) mounted with a RHGS6 case
containing a test switch module equipped with only a test switch and
a RX2 terminal base

22.4.5 Side-by-side flush mounting

22.4.5.1 Overview

If IP54 is required it is not allowed to flush mount side by side mounted cases. If your
application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting details
kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be
ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19.

With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is

obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is required to mount the IEDs
separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, see
section "Flush mounting".

1373
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the
plates and the angles on the IED. Screws with wrong dimension may
damage the PCBs inside the IED.

Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT

switches on the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.

22.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting

1 2

IEC06000181-2-en.vsd
IEC06000181 V2 EN

Figure 666: Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x
19 IED).

The required torque for the screws is 3.5 Nm.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw, washer 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -

1374
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

22.5 Technical data

22.5.1 Enclosure
Table 1099: Case
Material Steel sheet
Front plate Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel
Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)

Table 1100: Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529

Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)

Sides, top and bottom IP20
Rear side IP20 with screw compression type
IP10 with ring lug terminals

Table 1101: Weight

Case size Weight
6U, 1/2 x 19 10 kg/22 lb
6U, 3/4 x 19 15 kg/33 lb
6U, 1/1 x 19 18 kg/40 lb

22.5.2 Electrical safety

Table 1102: Electrical safety according to IEC 60255-27

Equipment class I (protective earthed)

Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 2 (normally only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a
temporary conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected)

22.5.3 Connection system

Table 1103: CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
ring lug terminals

1375
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Table 1104: Auxiliary power supply and binary I/O connectors

Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)
2 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)
Terminal blocks suitable for 300 V AC 3 mm2 (AWG14)
ring lug terminals

Because of limitations of space, when ring lug terminal is ordered for

Binary I/O connections, one blank slot is necessary between two
adjacent IO cards. Please refer to the ordering particulars for details.

22.5.4 Influencing factors

Table 1105: Temperature and humidity influence
Parameter Reference value Nominal range Influence
Ambient temperature, +20C -10 C to +55C 0.02% / C
operate value
Relative humidity 10%-90% 10%-90% -
Operative range 0%-95%
Storage temperature - -40 C to +70 C -

Table 1106: Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation

Dependence on Reference value Within nominal range Influence
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage max. 2% 15% of EL 0.01% / %
Operative range Full wave rectified
Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate 20% of EL 0.01% / %
value
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage 24-60 V DC 20%

90-250 V DC 20%
Interruption
interval
050 ms No restart
0 s Correct
behaviour at
power down
Restart time <300 s

1376
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

Table 1107: Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 602551)

Dependence on Within nominal range Influence
Frequency dependence, fr 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz 1.0% / Hz
operate value fr 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

Frequency dependence fr 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz 2.0% / Hz

for distance protection fr 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
operate value
Harmonic frequency 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr 2.0%
dependence (20%
content)
Harmonic frequency 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr 10.0%
dependence for distance
protection (10% content)
Harmonic frequency 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr 10.0%
dependence for high
impedance differential
protection (10% content)
Harmonic frequency 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr 3.0% / Hz
dependence for
overcurrent protection

22.5.5 Type tests according to standard

Table 1108: Electromagnetic compatibility
Test
1 MHz burst disturbance
100 kHz slow damped
oscillatory wave immunity
test
Ring wave immunity test, 100
kHz
Surge withstand capability
test
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
Fast transient disturbance
Surge immunity test
Power frequency immunity
test
Conducted common mode
immunity test
Power frequency magnetic
field test
Pulse magnetic field
immunity test
Table continues on next page
Type test values
2.5 kV
2.5 kV
2-4 kV
2.5 kV, oscillatory
4.0 kV, fast transient
15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge
15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge
4 kV
2-4 kV, 1.2/50 ms
high energy
150-300 V, 50 Hz
15 Hz-150 kHz
1000 A/m, 3 s
100 A/m, cont.
1000 A/m
Reference standards
IEC 60255-26
IEC 61000-4-18, Class III
IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
IEC 60255-26
IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
IEC 60255-26, Zone A
IEC 60255-26, Zone A
IEC 60255-26, Zone A
IEC 61000-4-16, Class IV
IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
IEC 6100049, Class V

1377
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK505308-UEN B
IED hardware

Test Type test values Reference standards

Damped oscillatory magnetic 100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Class V
field test
Radiated electromagnetic 20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz IEC 60255-26
field disturbance
1.4-2.7 GHz
Radiated electromagnetic 20 V/m IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
field disturbance 80-1000 MHz
Conducted electromagnetic 10 V, 0.15-80 MHz IEC 60255-26
field disturbance
Radiated emission 30-5000 MHz IEC 60255-26
Radiated emission 30-5000 MHz IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC
Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-26

Table 1109: Insulation

Test Type test values Reference standard
Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-27
ANSI C37.90
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J
Insulation resistance >100 MW at 500 VDC

Table 1110: Environmental tests

Test Type test value Reference standard
Cold operation test Test Ad for 16 h at -25C IEC 60068-2-1
Cold storage test Test Ab for 16 h at -40C IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat operation test Test Bd for 16 h at +70C IEC 60068-2-2
Dry heat storage test Test Bb for 16 h at +85C IEC 60068-2-2
Change of temperature test Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25C IEC 60068-2-14
to +70C
Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 10 days at +40C IEC 60068-2-78
and humidity 93%
Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to IEC 60068-2-30
+55C and humidity 93 to
95% (1 cycle = 24 hours)

Table 1111: CE compliance

Test According to
Immunity EN 6025526
Emissivity EN 6025526
Low voltage directive EN 6025527

1378
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 22
IED hardware

Table 1112: Mechanical tests

Test Type test values Reference standards
Vibration response test Class II IEC 60255-21-1
Vibration endurance test Class I IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test Class II IEC 60255-21-3

1379
Technical manual
1380
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 23
Labels

Section 23 Labels

23.1 Labels on IED

Front view of IED

10

9 1

8 2

3
7
5
6

IE C15000506-1-en.vsd
IEC15000506 V1 EN

1381
Technical manual
Section 23 1MRK505308-UEN B
Labels

1
1 QR-code containing the
complete ordering code

10 2 Power supply module (PSM)

9
3 mA input module (MIM)
4 Ordering and serial number

8
5 Manufacturer
6 Transformer designations
7
2 7 Transformer input module,
7 rated currents and voltages
8 Optional, customer specific
6 information
9 Order number, dc supply
6
3 voltage and rated frequency
10 Product type, description and
serial number
5

IEC15000504-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000504 V1 EN

Figure 667: Example of IED label

Rear view of IED

4
en06000573.ep
IEC06000573 V1 EN

1382
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 23
Labels

1 Warning label
2 Caution label
3 Class 1 laser product label

IEC06000575 V1 EN

4 Warning label

1383
Technical manual
1384
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 24
Connection diagrams

Section 24 Connection diagrams

The connection diagrams are delivered on the IED Connectivity package DVD as part
of the product delivery.

The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.

Connection diagrams for Customized products

Connection diagram, 670 series 2.0 1MRK002801-AE

Connection diagrams for Configured products

Connection diagram, RED670 2.0, A31 1MRK002803-DA

Connection diagram, RED670 2.0, B31 1MRK002803-DB

Connection diagram, RED670 2.0, A32 1MRK002803-DC

Connection diagram, RED670 2.0, B32 1MRK002803-DD

1385
Technical manual
1386
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

Section 25 Inverse time characteristics

25.1 Application

In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections at

different points in the network different time delays for the different protections are
normally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time-lag. In more
sophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both
alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections
operating in series.

I> I> I>

xx05000129.vsd
IEC05000129 V1 EN

Figure 668: Three overcurrent protections operating in series

Stage 3

Time
Stage 2 Stage 2

Stage 1 Stage 1 Stage 1

Fault point
position

en05000130.vsd

IEC05000130 V1 EN

Figure 669: Definite time overcurrent characteristics

1387
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

Time

Fault point
position

en05000131.vsd

IEC05000131 V1 EN

Figure 670: Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time
and still assure the selectivity between protections.

To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following
factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:

Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co-ordinated

Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
Reset times of the protections
Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections

Assume we have the following network case.

1388
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A1 B1
Feeder

I> I>

Time axis

t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3

en05000132.vsd

IEC05000132 V1 EN

Figure 671: Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1

where:
t=0 is The fault occurs
t=t1 is Protection B1 trips

t=t2 is Breaker at B1 opens

t=t3 is Protection A1 resets

In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous).
When the fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault current. After the time t1
the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its
delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences between
the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip is sent to the
B1 circuit breaker. At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts
and thus the fault current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between
different faults. The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test
protocols. Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1
is reset, that is the timer is stopped.

In most applications it is required that the times shall reset as fast as possible when the
current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time shall be
minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of delayed
reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following
applications:

If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current IED, close to the faults, starts
and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.
Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other
protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the
release function.

1389
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

25.2 Principle of operation

25.2.1 Mode of operation

The function can operate in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse
time mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard
curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the component
inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr.

Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.

If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal
startValue), a timer, according to the selected operating mode, is started. The
component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current
level used in timing calculations.

In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached
or until the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the hysteresis) and
the reset time has elapsed.

For definite time delay curve ANSI/IEEE Definite time or IEC Definite time are
chosen.

The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 201.

A

t[ s ] = + B k
i p
-C
in >
EQUATION1189 V1 EN (Equation 201)

where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.

For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set
start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:

1390
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

i p
(top - B k ) - C = Ak
in >
EQUATION1190 V1 EN (Equation 202)

where:
top is the operating time of the protection

The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according
to equation 203, in addition to the constant time delay:

t
i p
in > - C dt A k
0
EQUATION1191 V1 EN (Equation 203)

For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.

n i( j ) p
Dt - C A k
j =1 in >
EQUATION1192 V1 EN (Equation 204)

where:
j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been
detected, that is, when

i
>1
in >
EQUATION1193 V1 EN

Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the

protection algorithm,
n is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time
equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j) is the fault current at time j

For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC
and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.

For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see
figure 672.

1391
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

Operate
time

tMin

Current
IMin
IEC05000133-3-en.vsd
IEC05000133 V2 EN

Figure 672: Minimum time-lag operation for the IEC curves

In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set
to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse time curve
for measured current of twenty times the set current start value. Note that the operating
time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.

In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two
additional inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.

The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA
relay RI. The curve is described by equation 205:

k
t[ s ] =
in >
0.339 - 0.235
i
EQUATION1194 V1 EN (Equation 205)

where:
in> is the set start current for step n
k is set time multiplier for step n
i is the measured current

1392
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection
RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual
earth-fault current protection, with ability to detect high-resistive earth faults. The
curve is described by equation 206:

i
t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 ln
k in >
EQUATION1195 V1 EN (Equation 206)

where:
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current

If the curve type programmable is chosen, the user can make a tailor made inverse time
curve according to the general equation 207.

A

t[ s ] = + Bk
i p
-C
in >
EQUATION1196 V1 EN (Equation 207)

Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. There is the possibility
to choose between three different reset time-lags.
Instantaneous Reset
IEC Reset
ANSI Reset.

If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops
below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.

If IEC reset is chosen the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the current
drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.

If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault
clearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the hysteresis).
The timer will reset according to equation 208.

1393
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

tr
t [s] = k
i
2

-1
in >
EQUATION1197 V2 EN (Equation 208)

where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.

The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the

choice of time delay characteristic.

For the definite time delay characteristics the possible reset time settings are
instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.

For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics
are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current dependent
reset time.

For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC set constant time reset).

For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current
dependent reset time. If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must
be given, see equation 209:

tr
t [s] = k
i
pr

- cr
in >
EQUATION1198 V2 EN (Equation 209)

For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate

time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it
is of utmost importance to set the definite time delay for that stage to
zero.

1394
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

In version 2.0, a typical starting time delay of 24ms is subtracted from

the set trip time delay, so that the resulting trip time will take the
internal IED start time into consideration.

25.3 Inverse characteristics

Table 1113: ANSI Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
2.0% or 40 ms
whichever is greater
A
t= + B k + tDef
(
I P - 1
)

EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,
tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,
tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,
tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,
tr=4.6

1395
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1114: IEC Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, 2.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
A greater
t = P k
( I - 1)

EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of
0.001
A B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
t = P + B k C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
(I - C ) P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
0.001
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps
Reset characteristic: of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
TR
t = k 0.001
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 1115: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, 2.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

I
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
k
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

1396
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1116: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential Protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
5.0% or 40 ms
whichever is greater
A
t= + B k + tDef
(
I P - 1
)

EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,
tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,
tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,
tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,
tr=4.6

1397
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1117: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
A greater
t = P k
( I - 1)

EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of
0.001
A B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
t = P + B k C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
(I - C ) P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
0.001
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps
Reset characteristic: of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
TR
t = k 0.001
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/Reserved shall not be used,

since this parameter setting is for future use and not implemented yet.

1398
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1118: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

I
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
k
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 1119: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and
power protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.10 k 2.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset 5.0% or 160 ms
whichever is greater
A
t= + B k + tDef
(
I P - 1
)

EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,
tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,
tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,
tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,
tr=4.6

1399
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1120: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and
power protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.10 k 2.00 IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset or 160 ms whichever is
A greater
t = P k
( I - 1)

EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of
0.001
A B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
t = P + B k C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
(I - C ) P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
0.001
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps
Reset characteristic: of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
TR
t = k 0.001
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/Reserved shall not be used,

since this parameter setting is for future use and not implemented yet.

1400
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1121: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual
overcurrent and power protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic 0.10 k 2.00 IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset or 160 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic

I
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
k
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 1122: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.10 k 3.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
5.0% or 40 ms
whichever is greater
A
t= + B k + tDef
(
I P - 1
)

EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,
tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,
tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,
tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,
tr=4.6

1401
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1123: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.10 k 3.00 IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
A greater
t = P k
( I - 1)

EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0

Table 1124: Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in 5.0% or 45 ms
steps of 0.01 whichever is greater
k
t =
U -U >

U >
EQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN

U> = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
k 480
t = + 0.035
2.0
32 U U > 0.5

U >
EQUATION1437-SMALL V2 EN

Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
k 480
t = + 0.035
3.0
32 U U > 0.5

U >
EQUATION1438-SMALL V2 EN

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
kA A = (0.005-200.000)
t = +D in steps of 0.001
P
B U - U > B = (0.50-100.00) in
-C
steps of 0.01
U >
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps
EQUATION1439-SMALL V1 EN
of 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001

1402
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1125: Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in 5.0% or 45 ms
steps of 0.01 whichever is greater
k
t =
U < -U


U<
EQUATION1431-SMALL V1 EN

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
k 480
t = + 0.055
2.0
32 U < -U - 0.5

U <
EQUATION1432-SMALL V1 EN

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
A = (0.005-200.000)
in steps of 0.001
kA B = (0.50-100.00) in
t = +D
U < -U P
steps of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps
B -C
U < of 0.1
EQUATION1433-SMALL V1 EN D = (0.000-60.000)
U< = Uset in steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
U = Umeasured
steps of 0.001

1403
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

Table 1126: Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 5.0% or 45 ms
0.01 whichever is
k greater
t =
U -U >

U>
EQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN

U> = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k 480
t = + 0.035
2.0
32 U U > 0.5

U >
EQUATION1437-SMALL V2 EN

Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k 480
t = + 0.035
3.0
32 U U > 0.5

U >
EQUATION1438-SMALL V2 EN

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
kA A = (0.005-200.000) in
t = +D steps of 0.001
P
B U - U > B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
-C of 0.01
U >
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
EQUATION1439-SMALL V1 EN
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001

1404
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A070750 V2 EN

Figure 673: ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics

1405
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

A070751 V2 EN

Figure 674: ANSI Very inverse time characteristics

1406
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A070752 V2 EN

Figure 675: ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics

1407
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

A070753 V2 EN

Figure 676: ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics

1408
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A070817 V2 EN

Figure 677: ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics

1409
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

A070818 V2 EN

Figure 678: ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics

1410
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A070819 V2 EN

Figure 679: ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics

1411
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

A070820 V2 EN

Figure 680: IEC Normal inverse time characteristics

1412
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A070821 V2 EN

Figure 681: IEC Very inverse time characteristics

1413
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

A070822 V2 EN

Figure 682: IEC Inverse time characteristics

1414
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A070823 V2 EN

Figure 683: IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics

1415
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

A070824 V2 EN

Figure 684: IEC Short time inverse time characteristics

1416
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A070825 V2 EN

Figure 685: IEC Long time inverse time characteristics

1417
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

A070826 V2 EN

Figure 686: RI-type inverse time characteristics

1418
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A070827 V2 EN

Figure 687: RD-type inverse time characteristics

1419
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN

Figure 688: Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection

1420
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN

Figure 689: Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection

1421
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN

Figure 690: Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection

1422
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN

Figure 691: Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection

1423
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK505308-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN

Figure 692: Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection

1424
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 26
Glossary

Section 26 Glossary

26.1 Glossary

AC Alternating current
ACC Actual channel
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time
synchronization
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
ASDU Application service data unit
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5 Bayonet fibre optic connector
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals
between IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for
serial communication

1425
Technical manual
Section 26 1MRK505308-UEN B
Glossary

CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body
within the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle Close-open cycle
Codirectional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves
two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information
in both directions
COM Command
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange
format for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI
C37.111, 1999 / IEC 60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves
four twisted pairs, two of which are used for transmitting
data in both directions and two for transmitting clock
signals
COT Cause of transmission
CPU Central processing unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CU Communication unit
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US
developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current

1426
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 26
Glossary

DFC Data flow control

DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force
EMI Electromagnetic interference
EnFP End fault protection
EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
F-SMA Type of optical fibre connector
FAN Fault number
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech,
data and protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of
up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical
fibers
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FUN Function type
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used
by local telephone companies. Can be transported over
balanced and unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS
receiver module

1427
Technical manual
Section 26 1MRK505308-UEN B
Glossary

GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600

GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GSE Generic substation event
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC
standard
HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6:
Requirements for protective current transformers for
transient performance
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protection equipment. A serial
master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard
IEC 6185081 Communication protocol standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s
on twisted-pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.
References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common
Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI
specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for
the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices
(IEDs) Cyber Security Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are
available in the IED, they are referred to as instances of that

1428
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 26
Glossary

function. One instance of a function is identical to another of

the same kind but has a different number in the IED user
interfaces. The word "instance" is sometimes defined as an
item of information that is representative of a type. In the
same way an instance of a function in the IED is
representative of a type of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP
protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a
connectionless, best-effort packet-switching protocol. It
provides packet routing, fragmentation and reassembly
through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 20
IP 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 40
IP 54 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 54
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,
standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LIB 520 High-voltage software module
LCD Liquid crystal display
LDCM Line differential communication module
LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode
LNT LON network tool
LON Local operating network
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MIM Milli-ampere module
MPM Main processing module
MVAL Value of measurement
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus
originally developed for use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre
NOF Number of grid faults
NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle

1429
Technical manual
Section 26 1MRK505308-UEN B
Glossary

OCP Overcurrent protection

OEM Optical Ethernet module
OLTC On-load tap changer
OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than
start/pick-up
OV Overvoltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example, a distance relay is overreaching
when the impedance presented to it is smaller than the
apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point,
that is, the set reach. The relay sees the fault but perhaps
it should not have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
PMC PCI Mezzanine card
POR Permissive overreach
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near
proximity to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
RCA Relay characteristic angle
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital
data in point-to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
SC Switch or push button to close

1430
Technical manual
1MRK505308-UEN B Section 26
Glossary

SCL Short circuit location

SCS Station control system
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit
SLM Serial communication module.
SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with
constant impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize
computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the
requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every
embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can
instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the
required accuracy.
SOF Status of fault
SPA Strmberg Protection Acquisition (SPA), a serial master/
slave protocol for point-to-point and ring communication.
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport
layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The
de facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into
4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for
Internet working and encompasses both network layer and
transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two
protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to
refer to the entire US Department of Defense protocol suite
based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF Time delayed earth-fault protection function
TLS Transport Layer Security
TM Transmit (disturbance data)

1431
Technical manual
Section 26 1MRK505308-UEN B
Glossary

TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance

version of a BNC connector
TP Trip (recorded fault)
TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC
TRM Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and
voltages taken from the process into levels suitable for
further signal processing.
TYP Type identification
UMT User management tool
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example, a distance relay is underreaching
when the impedance presented to it is greater than the
apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point,
that is, the set reach. The relay does not see the fault but
perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale,
maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et
Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated
dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals.
UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by
the addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to
synchronize it with Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing
for the eccentricity of the Earth's orbit, the rotational axis tilt
(23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth's irregular
rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated
Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock, and uses
the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship
navigation, where it is also sometimes known by the
military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet
stands for "Z", which stands for longitude zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom
equipment
3IO Three times zero-sequence current.Often referred to as the
residual or the earth-fault current
3UO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as
the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

1432
Technical manual
1433
Contact us
For more information please contact:
ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Vsters, Sweden
Phone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
www.abb.com/substationautomation
Note:
1MRK505308-UEN
We reserve the right to make technical changes or modify
the contents of this document without prior notice. ABB AB
does not accept any responsibility whatsoever for potential
errors or possible lack of information in this document.
We reserve all rights in this document and in the subject
matter and illustrations contained herein. Any reproduction,
disclosure to third parties or utilization of its contents in
whole or in part is forbidden without prior written consent of
ABB AB.
Copyright 2014 ABB.
All rights reserved.
Scan this QR code to visit our website